Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 874

i-t V

, 4k -- ' S f:
&
M
i /
■'Tg./if y

/f /^>2" T ■

BURNDY
LIBRARY
Charter*d m I?-#!

GIFT OF

Bern Dibner

The Dibner Library


of the History of
Science and Technology

SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION LIBRARIES


1*.

/
' .Kiwis


'
*

h- .

''
.

' ■
■Ha,. .
m


v .

Ki
-f.V>

■■ I

‘v
BE

. 5

• v :

I?* >‘J.' ■ - ‘ 'V■'

• . +-■

* ' *'


•» ■ -

1'- J ' I • ' • '

\
r


S
.
»

■ •

•‘SKI il'
4 '« V-..
• V‘v - - - -■ - -
•V ' '- -
A - >*- - «
;

>• . V
* *

■: * H: '
? '

- • -U V

■*
■ > : •

•• '• •
r
...

..s ■» a -

.^5 •
/.#■
■r
, p

/
* .
> V *'
A.

.f:

' ! r' r

*1
'

T- — -T,. . - ! ■ V • . - -■

• »
V J j J 3L ■

* .

i. ; ■
■ r . -f< ; v-,
; ' Jt


c : i * . •/ .. 1 i - 1 '

Vw v:
'

MMt&k
ADVERTISEMENT.

P Art of the enfuing Difcourfe about Light was written


at the defire offome Gentlemen of the Royal Society,
in the Tear 1675. and then fent to their Secretary, and
read at their Meetings, and the reft was added about
Twelve Tears after to complete the Theory; except the
Third Book, and the lajt Proportion of the Second, which
wereJince put together out offcattered Papers. To avoid
being engaged in Difputes about thefe Matters, I have
hitherto delayed the Printing, and jhould fill have de¬
layed it, had not the importunity of Friends prevailed upon
me. If any other Papers writ on . this Suh\eB are got out
of my Hands they are imperfeff, and were perhaps written
before / had tried all the Experiments here fet down,
and fully fatisfied my felf about the Laws of Refrations
and Compofition of Colours. I have here Publifhed what
I think proper to come abroad, wijhing that it may not be
Tranflated into another Language without my Confent.
The Crowns of Colours, which fometimes appear about
the Sun and Moon, I have endeavoured to give an Ac¬
count of; butfor want offufficient Obfervations leave that
Matter to be further examined. 'The Subject of the Third
Book I have alfo left imperfeffi, not having tried all the
Expe-
Experiment# which I intended when J was about thefe
Matters, nor repeated fome of thofe which I did try, until
I hadJ'atisfied my felf about all their Circumftances. To
communicate what I have tried, and leave the resit to
others for further Enquiry, is all my Dejign in publifhing
thefe Tapers.
In a Letter written to Mr.Leibnitz in the Tear 167 6.
and pubhfhed by Dr. Wallis, I mentioned a Method by
which I had found fome general Theorems about fquaring
Curvilinear Figures, or comparing them with the Conic
Sections, or other the Jimple ft Figures with which they may
he compared. Andfome Tears ago I lent out a Manufcript
containing fuch Theorems, and havingJince met with fome
Things copied out of it, / have on this Occajim made it
publick, prefixing to it an Introdudlion and fubjoyning a
Scholium concerning that Method. And I have pined
with it another fmall Trail concerning the Curvilinear
Figures of the Second, R ind, which was alfo written,
many Tears ago, and made known to fome Friends, who
have foMdied the making it publick ; ~

I N.
DS!
a - -4
The FIRST BOOK
O F

O P T I C K S.
PART I.

M Y Defign in this Book is not to explain the Pro¬


perties of Light by Hypothefes, but to propofe
and prove them by Reafon and Experiments:
In order to which , I fhall premife the following Defini¬
tions and Axioms.

DEFINITIONS.
D E F I N. I.

B Y the (Rays of Light I underftand its leaf Tarts, and thofe


as wellSucceffiVe in the fame Lines as Contemporary in fe¬
deral Lines. For it is manifeft that Light confifts of parts
both Succeflive and Contemporary 5 becaufe in the fame
place you may flop that which comes one moment, and
let pals that which comes prefently after5 and in the fame
time you may flop it in any one place, and let it pafs in
any other. For that part of Light which is ftopt cannot
be the fame with that which is let pafs. The leaft Light
or part of Light, which may be ftopt alone without the
reft of the Light, or propagated alone, or do or fuffer any
A thing
03
thing alone, which the reft of the Light doth not or fuft
ers not, I call a Ray of Light.

D E F I N. IT.

^efrangihility of the Bays of Light, is their Difpofition to he


refra&ed or turned out of their Way in pafjing out of one tranfi
parent Body or Medium into another. And a greater or lefs Bp-
frangihility of Bays, is their Difpofition to he turned more or lefs
out of their Way in like Incidences on the fame Medium. Mathe¬
maticians ufually confider the Rays of Light to be Lines
reaching from the luminous Body to the body illumina¬
ted, and the refraCtion of thofe Rays to be the bending
or breaking of thofe Lines in their paffing out of one Me¬
dium into another. And thus may Rays and Refractions
be confidered, if Light be propagated in an inftant. But
by an Argument taken from the ./Equations of the times
of the Eclipfes of Jupiter’s Satellites it feems that Light is
propagated in time, (pending in its pafiage from the Sun
to us about Seven Minutes of time : And therefore I have
chofen to define Rays and Refractions in fuch general
terms as may agree to Light in both cates.

DEFIN. III.

Bpfiexihility of Bays, ts their Difpofition to he turned hac^ into


the fame Medium from any other Medium upon whofe Surface they
fall. And Bays are more or left refiexihle, which are returned
hack^ more or lefs eafily. As if Light pafs out of Glafs into
Air, and by being inclined more and more to the conrr-
mon Surface of the Glafs and Air, begins at length to be
totally reflected by that Surface 3 thofe forts of Rays which
at like Incidences are reflected moft copioufly, or by in¬
clining the Rays begin fooneft to be totally reflected, are
moft reflexible, D E-
E$]
DEFIN. IV.

The Angle of Incidence, is that Angle which the Line defcribed


by the incident Pay contains with the (perpendicular to the refle¬
cting or refraMing Surface at the Point of Incidence.

DEFIN. V.

The Angle of Pyflexion or Pyfruition, is the Angle which the


Line defcribed by the refleBed or refrailed Pay containeth with
the Perpendicular to the reflecting or refralling Surface at the
Point of Incidence.

D EFI N. VI.

The Sines of Incidence, Reflexion, and pefraltion, are the


Sines of the Angles of Incidence, peflexion, and Pefraltion.

DEFIN. VII.

The Light whofe Pays are all alike PyfTangible, I call Sim¬
ple , Homogeneal and Similar $ and that whofe Pays are flome
more Pyfrangible than others, l call Compound, Heterogeneat and
Dijfimilar. The former Light I call Homogeneal, not
becaufe I would affirm it fo in all relpe&s $ but becaufe
the Rays which agree in Refrangibility 5 agree at leaft in
all thofe their other Properties. Which I confider in the
following Difcourfe.

DEFIN. VUE

The Colours of Homogeneal Lights y I call Primary, Homo¬


geneal and Simple y and thofe of Heterogeneal Lights, Heteroge-
neal and Compound. For thefe are always compounded of
the colours of Homogeneal Lights 5 as will appear in the
following Difcourfe. A z" A XI-
C 4 1
AXIOMS.
AX. I.
T HE Angles of Incidence, Inflexion, and RefraSion, lye
in one and the fame Plane.

AX. II.

The Angle of Reflexion is equal to the Angle of Incidence„

A X. III.

If the refraBed (Ray he returned direSly hackL to the Point


of Incidence , it Jhall he refrailed into the Line before deferL
led by the incidmt Ray.

AX. IV.

RefraBion out of the rarer Medium into the denfer , is made


towards the Perpendicular 3 that is, fo that the Angle of Refra-
Sion he left than the Angle of Incidence.

A X. V.

The Sine of Incidence, is either accurately1 or Very ?iearly in a


gtyen Ratio to the Sine of Refra&ion.

Whence if that Proportion be known in~ any one Incli¬


nation of the incident Ray, *tis known in all the Inclina^
tions, and thereby the Refra&ion in all cafes of Incidence
on the fame refra&ing Body may be determined. Thus
if the Refra&ion be made out of Air into Water, the Sine
©f Incidence of the red Light is to the Sine of its Refra¬
ction as 4 to 3 . If out of Air into Glafs, the Sines are
’* as
m
as 17 to it. In Light of other Colours the Sines have
other Proportions : but the difference is fo little that it
need feldom be confidered.
Suppofe therefore, that R S reprefents the Surface of Fig. i
ftagnating Water, and C is the point of Incidence in-
which any Ray coming in the Air from A in the Line
A C is reflected or refracted, and I would know whether
this Ray {hall go after Reflexion or Refraction : I ereCt
upon the Surface of the Water from the point of Inci¬
dence the Perpendicular C P and produce it downwards
to Q., and conclude by the firfl: Axiom, that the Ray af¬
ter Reflexion and Refraction, fhall be found fomewhere in
the Plane of the Angle of Incidence A C P produced. I
let fall therefore upon the Perpendicular C P the Sine of
Incidence A D, and if the reflected Ray be defired, I pro¬
duce A D to B fo that D B be equal to A D, and draw
C B. For this Line C B fhall be the reflected Ray; the
Angle of Reflexion B C P and its Sine B D being7 equal
to the Angle and Sine of Incidence, as they ought to be
by the fecond Axiom. But if the refraCted Ray be de¬
fired, I produce A D to H, fo that D H may be to A B
as the Sine of Refraction to the Sine of Incidence; that is
as 3 to 4 ; and about the Center C and in the Plane AGP
with the Radius C A defcribing a Circle ABE I draw
Parallel to the Perpendicular GPQ, the Line H E cutting
the circumference in E, and joyning CE, this Line CE •
(hall be the Line of the refraCted Ray. For if E F be let
fall perpendicularly on the Line P Q., this Line E F fhall,
be the Sine of Refraction of the Ray C E, the Angle of
Refraction being ECQ; and this Sine EF is eoual to
DH, and confequently in Proportion to the Sine of Inci-
dence. AD as 3 to.4.,

I11
-[6]
In like manner, if there be a Prifm of Glafs (that is a
Glafs bounded with two Equal and Parallel Triangular
ends, .and three plane and well polifhed Sides, which meet
in three Parallel Lines running from the three Angles of
one end to the three Angles of the other end) and if the
Refradion of the Light in paffing crofs this Prifm be defi-
Fix.
<_>
z. red : Let ACB reprefent a Plane cutting this Prifm tranf-
verfly to its three Parallel lines or edges there where the
Light pafleth through it, and let JE be the Ray inci¬
dent upon the firft fide of the Prifm A C where the Light
goes into the Glafs 5 And by putting the Proportion of
the Sine of Incidence to the Sine of Refradion as 17 to
11 find E F the firft refraded Ray. Then taking this Ray
for the Incident Ray upon the fecond fide of the Glafs B C
where the Light goes out, find the next refraded Ray F G
by putting the Proportion of the Sine of Incidence to the
Sine of Refradion as 11 to 17. For if the Sine of Inci¬
dence out of Air into Glafs be to the Sine of Refradion
as 17 to 11, the Sine of Incidence out of Glafs into Air
muft on the contrary be to the Sine of Refradion as 11
to 17, by the third Axiom.
Much after the fame manner , if A C B D reprefent a
Glafs {pherically Convex on both fides (ufually called a
Lem, fuch as is a Burning-glafs, or Spectacle-glafs, or an
Objed-glafs of a Telefcope) and it be required to know
how Light falling upon it from any lucid point Q {hall
be refracted, let Q_M reprefent a Ray falling upon any
point M of its firft fpherical Surface A CB, and by ereding
a Perpendicular to the Glafs at the point M, find the firft
refracted Ray M N by the Proportion of the Sines 17
to 11. Let that Ray in going out of the Glafs be inci¬
dent upon N, and then find the fecond .refracted Ray N q
by the Proportion of the Sines 11 to 17. And after the
C 7 J
feme manner may the Refraction be found when the
Lens is Convex on one fide and Plane or Concave on
the other, or Concave on both Sides.

AX. VI.

Homogeneal (Rays which flow from federal (points of any Qk~


and fall almofi Perpendicularly on any reflecting or refra*
Bing Plane or Spherical Surface, flhall afterwards diverge from
fo many other Points, or he Parallel to fo many other Lines, or
converge to fo many other Points, either accurately or without any
fenjible Error. And the fame thing will happen, if the pays he
refleBed or refraBed fuccejfiVely by two or three or more Plane
or flherical Surfaces.

The Point from which Rays diverge or to which they


converge may be called their Focus. And the Focus of
the incident Rays being given, that of the reflected or re¬
fracted ones may be found by finding the Refraction of
any two Rays, as above y or more readily thus.
Caf. i. Let ACBbe a reflecting or refracting Plane, Fg
and Q the Focus of the incident Rays, and Qf C a per¬
pendicular to that Plane. And if this perpendicular be
produced to q, fo that q C be equal to QC, the point q
fhall be the Focus of the reflected Rays. Or if q C be
taken on the fame fide of the Plane with QC and in Pro¬
portion to QC as the Sine of Incidence to the Sine of
Refra&ion, the point q fhall be the Focus of the refrac¬
ted Rays.
Caf. 2 Let A C B be the reflecting Surface of any Fk
Sphere whofe Center is E. Bifect any Radius thereof (fup-
pole EC) in T, and if in that Radius on the fame fide the
point T you take the Points Q and q, fo that T Q, T E,
and Tq be continual Proportionals, and the point Qbe
the:
[ 8 ]
the Focus of the incident Rays, the point q (hall be the
Focus of the refleded ones.
Caj\ 4. Let ACB be the refracting Surface of any
Sphere whofe Center is E, In any Radius thereof E C
produced both ways take E T and C t feverally in fuch
Proportion to that Radius as the leffer of the Sines of
Incidence and Refradion hath to the difference of thofe
Sines. And then if in the fame Line you find any two
Points Q_ and q , fo that T Q be to E T as E t to t qy
taking t q the contrary way from t which T Q. lieth from
T, and if the Point Q.be the Focus of any incident Rays,
the Point q fhall be the Focus of the refracted ones.
And by the fame means the Focus of the Rays after
two or more Reflexions or Refradions may be found.
Caf. 4. Let A C B D be any refrading Lens, fpheri-
cally Convex or Concave or Plane on either fide, and let
CD be its Axis (that is the Line which cuts both its Sur¬
faces perpendicularly, and paffes through the Centers of
the Spheres,) and in this Axis let F and/be the Foci of the
refraded Rays found as above, when the incident Rays
on both fides the Lens are Parallel to the fame Axis 5 and
upon the Diameter F / bifected in E, defcribe a Circle.
Suppofe now that any Point Q. be the Focus of any inci¬
dent Rays. Draw QE cutting the faid Circle in T and tJ
and therein take t q in fuch Proportion to t E as t E or T E
hath to T Q_. Let t q lye the contrary way from t which
T Q. doth from T, and q fhall be the Focus of the refrac¬
ted Rays without any fenfible Error , provided the Point
Q_ be not fo remote from the Axis, nor the Lens fo broad
as to make any of the Rays fall too obliquely on the
refracting Surfaces.
And by the like Operations may the reflecting or re¬
fracting Surfaces be found when the two Foci are given,
-- " : • and
[ 9 ]
and thereby a Lens be formed, which fhall make the Rays
flow towards or from what place you pleafe.
So then the meaning of this Axiom is, that if Rays
fall upon any Plane or Spherical Surface or Lens, and
before their Incidence flow from or towards any Point <X,
they fhall after Reflexion or Refraction flow from or to¬
wards the Point q found by the foregoing Rules. And if
the incident Rays flow from or towards ieveral points Q.,
the reflected or refracted Rays fhall flow from or towards
fo many other Points q found by the fame Rules. Whe¬
ther the reflected and refracted Rays flow from or towards
the Point q is eafily known by the fituation of that Point.
For if that Point be on the fame fide of the reflecting or
refracting Surface or Lens with the Point Q, and the in¬
cident Rays flow7 from the Point Q, the reflected flow to¬
wards the Point q ai id the refracted from it 5 and if the
incident Rays flow towards Q, the reflected flow from q7
and the refracted towards it. And the contrary happens
when q is on the other fide of that Surface.

A X. VII.

Wherever the pays which come from all the (points of any Ob-
jefl meet again in fo many Points after they hair been made to
converge hy Reflexion or Pyfraftion, there they mil make a Pic¬
ture of the Object upon any white Body on ivhich they fall

So if PR reprefent any Object without Doors, and ABPg. 3.


be a Lens placed at a hole in the Window-flhut of a dark
Chamber, whereby the Ray s that come from any Point Q.
of that Object are made to converge and meet again in
the Point q ^ and if a Sheet of white Paper be held at q
for the Light there to fall upon it : the Picture of that
Object P R will appear upon the Paper in its proper Shape '
B ^ ~ and
[IO!
and Colours. For as the Light which comes from the
Point Q goes to the Point q, fo the Light which comes
from other Points P and R of the Object, will go to fo
many other correfpondent Points p and r (as is manifeft
by the flxth Axiom 3) fo that every Point of the Object
{hall illuminate a correfpondent Point of the Picture, and
thereby make a Picture like the Object in Shape and Co¬
lour, this only excepted that the Picture ihall be inverted.
And this is the reafon of that Vulgar Experiment of call¬
ing the Species of Objects from abroad upon a Wall or
Sheet of white Paper in a dark Room.
In like manner when a Man views any Object P QR5
the Light which comes from the feveral Points of the Ob¬
ject is fo refracted by the tranfparent skins and humours
of the Eye, (that is by the outward coat EFG called the
Tunica Cornea, and by the cryftalline humour AB which is
beyond the Pupil m 4 J as to converge and meet again at
fo many Points in the bottom of the Eye, and there to paint
the Picture of the Object upon that skin (called the T«-
nica Retina) with which the bottom of the Eye is covered.
For Anatomills when they have taken off from the bot¬
tom of the Eye that outward and moll thick Coat called
the Dura Mater , can then fee through the thinner Coats
the Pictures of Objects lively painted thereon. And thefe
Pictures propagated by Motion along the Fibres of the Op-
tick Nerves into the Brain, are the caufe of Vifion, For
accordingly as thefe Pictures are perfect or imperfect, the
Object is feen perfectly or imperfectly. If the Eye be tin¬
ged with any colour ("as in the Difeafe of the Jaundife) fo
as to tinge the Pictures in the bottom of the Eye with that
Colour, then all Objects appear tinged with the fame Co¬
lour. If the humours of the Eye by old Age decay, fo
as. by Ihrinking to make the Carma and Coat of the Cry-
ftalline
[II ]
flatting humour grow flatter than before, the Light will not be
refracted enough, and for want of a fufficient RefraCtion
will not converge to the bottom of the Eye but to feme
place beyond it, and by confequence paint in the bottom
of the Eye a confufed Picture,and according to the indiftinCt-
nefs of this Picture the ObjeCt will appear confufed. This
is the reafon of the decay of Sight in old Men, and flie.ws
why their Sight is mended by Spectacles. For thofe Con¬
vex-glafles fupply the defeCt of plumpnefs in the Eye, and
by encreafing the RefraCtion make theRays converge fooner
fo as to convene diftinCtly at the bottom of the Eye if the
Glafs have a due degree of convexity. And the contrary
happens in fhort-fighted Men whofe Eyes are too plump.
For the RefraCtion being now too great,the Rays converge
and convene in the Eyes before they come at the bottom *
and therefore thePiCture made in the bottom and the Vifion
caufed thereby will not be diftinCt, unlefs the ObjeCt be
brought fo near the Eye as that the place where the con¬
verging Rays convene may be removed to the bottom, or
that the plumpnefs of the Eye be taken off and the Refra¬
ctions diminimed by a Concave-glafs of a due degree of
Concavity, or laftiy that by Age the Eye grow flatter till it
come to a due Figure : For fliort-fighted Men fee remote
Objects belt in Old Age, and therefore they are accounted
to have the moft lafting Eyes.

A X. VIII.

An Object feen by Reflexion or fraction^ appears in that place


from ivhence the 5^ays after their laft ^flexion or RefraCtion di¬
verge in falling on the Spectators Eye.

If the ObjeCt A be feen by Reflexion of a Looking- Fig


glafs m b7 it (hall appear, not in it’s proper place A, but
B i behind
[12]
behind the Glafs at a, from whence any Rays AB, AC?
A D, which flow from one and the fame Point of the Ob-
jed, do after their Reflexion made in the Points B, C, D,
diverge in going from the Glafs to E, F, G, where they
are incident on the Spectator’s Eyes. For thefe Rays do
make the fame Picture in the bottom of the Eyes as if
they had come from the Object really placed at a without
the interpolation of the Looking-glafs 3 and all Villon is
made according to the place and lhape of that Picture.
In like manner the Object D feen through a Prifm ap¬
pears not in its proper place D, but is thence tranflated to
fome other place d lituated in the laft refracted Ray F G
drawn backward from F to L
And fo the Object Q_ feen through the Lens A B, appears
at the place q from whence the Rays diverge in paffing
from the Lens to the Eye. Now it is to be noted, that the
Image of the Object at q is fo much bigger or lefler than
the Object it felfat Q, as the diftance of the Image at
q from the Lens AB is bigger or lefs than the diftance of
the Object at Q_ from the fame Lens. And if the Object
be feen through two or more fuch Convex or Concave-
glafles, every Glafs lhall make a new Image, and the Ob-
jed fliall appear in the place and of the bignefs of the laft
Image. Which confideration unfolds the Theory of Mi-
crolcopes and Telefcopes. Eor that Theory confifts in al-
moft nothing elfe than the defcribing fuch Glafles as fhall
make the laft Image of any Object as diftind and large
and luminous as it can conveniently be made.
I have now given, in Axioms and their Explications the
flimm of what hath hitherto been treated of in Opticks*
For what hath been generally agreed on I content my
felf to afltime under the notion oT Principles, in order to
what I have further to write. And this may fuffice for an
Intro-
Introduction to Readers of quick Wit and good Under^
ftanding not yet verfed in Opticks : Although thofe who
are already acquainted with this Science, and have
handled Glaffes, will more readily apprehend what fol¬
lowed!.

PROPOSITIONS.
IP1^0(P. I. Theor. I.

L IGHTS which differ in Colour, differ alfo in De^


grees of Refrangibility.

The Proof by Experiments:

Exper. i. I took a black oblong ftiff Paper terminated


by Parallel Sides, and with a Perpendicular right Line
drawn crofs from one Side to the other , diftinguiflbed it
into two equal Parts.. One of thefe Parts I painted with
a red Colour and the other with a blew. The Paper was
very black, and the Colours intenfe and thickly laid on,
that the Phenomenon might be more confpicuous. This
Paper I viewed through a Prifm offolid Glaft, whofe two
Sides through which the Light paffed to the Eye were
plane and well polifhed, and contained an Angle of about
Sixty Degrees : which Angle I call the refrading Angle of
the Prifm. And whilft I viewed it , I held it before a
Window in fuch manner that the Sides of the Paper were
parallel to the Prifm, and both thofe Sides and the Prifm
parallel to the Horizon, and the crofs Line perpendicular
to it 3 and that the Light which fell from the Window
[H]
■upon the Paper made an Angle with the Paper, equal to
that Angle which was made with the fame Paper by the
Light renewed from it to the Eye. Beyond the Prifm was
the Wall of the Chamber under the Window covered over
with black Cloth, and the Cloth was involved in Dark-
nefs that no Light might be reflected from thence, which
in paffing by the edges of the Paper to the Eye , might
mingle it felf with the Light of the Paper and obfeure the
Phenomenon thereof. Thefe things being thus ordered,
I found that if the refracting Angle of the Priim be turned
upwards, fo that the Paper may feem to be lifted upwards
by the Refraction, its blew half will be lifted higher by
the RefraCtion than its red half. But if the refraCting
Angle of the Prifm be turned downward, fo that the Pa¬
per may feem to be carried lower by the RefraCtion, its
blew half will be carried fomething lower thereby than
its red half. Wherefore in both cafes the Light which
comes from the blew half of the Paper through the Prifm
to the Eye, does in like Circumftances fuffer a greater Re¬
fraction than the Light which comes from the red half,
and by confequenee is more refrangible.
llhifiration. In the Eleventh Figure, M N represents the
Window,and D E the Paper terminated with parallel Sides
D J and H E, and by the tranfverfe Line F G diftinguiflied
into two half's, the one D G of an intenfely blew Colour,
the other FEof an intenfely red. AndBACc#^ repre-
fents the Prifm whole refraCting Planes AV>b a and ACca
meet in the edge of the refraCting Angle A 4. This edge
A a being upward, is parallel both to the Horizon and to
the parallel edges of the Paper D J and H E. And de re-
prelents the Image of the Paper feen by RefraCtion up¬
wards in fuch manner that the blew half D G is carried
hiaher to dg than the red half F E is to fey and therefore
D fuffers
[15]
fuffers a greater Refradion. If the edge of the refrading;
Angle be turned downward, the Image of the Paper will
be refraded downward fuppofe to «N, and the blew half
will be refraded lower to ^ y than the red half is to
Exper. 2. About the aforefaid Paper, whofe two halfs
were painted oyer with red and blew, and which was fluff
like thin Paftboard, I lapped feveral times a flender thred
of very black Silk, in fuch manner that the feveral parts ;
of the thred might appear upon the Colours like fo many
black Lines drawn over them, or like long and flender
dark Shadows caft upon them. I might have drawn black
Lines with a Pen, but the threds were fmaller and better
defined. This Paper thus coloured and lined I fet againft
a Wall perpendicularly to the Horizon, fo that one of the
Colours might Hand to the right hand and the other to
the left. Clofe before the Paper at the confine of the Co¬
lours below I placed a Candle to illuminate the Paper
ftrongly : For the Experiment was tried in the Night*
The flame of the Candle reached up to the lower edge of
the Paper, or a very little higher. Then at the diftance of
Six Feet and one or two Inches from the Paper upon the
Floor I ereded a glafs Lens four Inches and a cjuarter
broad, which might colled the Rays coming from the
feveral Points of the Paper, and make them converge to¬
wards fo many other Points at the fame diftance of fix
Feet and one or two Inches on the other fide of the Lens,
and fo form tne Image of tne coloured Paper upon a white
Paper placed there 5 after the fame manner that a Lens at
a hole in a Window cafts the Images of Objeds abroad i
upon a Sheet of white Paper in a dark Room. The afore¬
faid white Paper, ereded perpendicular to the Horizon
and to the Rays which fell upon it from the Lens, I moved!
fometimes towards-the Lens, fomerimes from it, to find1
thee
tltf]
the places where the Images of the blew and red parts of
the coloured Paper appeared mod diftind. Thofe places
I eafily knew by the Images of the black Lines which I
had made by winding the Silk about the Paper. For the
Images of thofe fine and (lender Lines (which by reafon of
their blacknefs were like Shadows on the Colours) were
^onfufed and fcarce vifible, unlefs when the Colours on ei¬
ther fide of each Line were terminated mod diftindly.
Noting therefore, as diligently as I could, the places where
the Images of the red and blew halfs of the coloured Pa¬
per appeared mod diftind, I found that where the red
half of the Paper appeared diftind, the blew half appeared
eonfufed, fo that the black Lines drawn upon it could
fcarce be feen 5 and on the contrary where the blew half
appeared mod diftind the red half appeared eonfufed, fo
that the black Lines upon it were fcarce vifible. And be¬
tween the two places where thefe Images appeared diftind
there was the diftance of an Inch and a half : the diftance
of the white Paper from the Lens, when the Image of the
red half of the coloured Paper appeared mod diftind, be-
ing greater by an Inch and an half than the diftance of the
fame white Paper from the Lens when the Image of the
blew half appeared moft diftind. In like Incidences there¬
fore of the blew and red upon the Lens, the blew was re-
fraded more by the Lens than the red, fo as to converge
fooner by an Inch and an half, and therefore is more refran¬
gible.
. Illuftratio?i. In the Twelfth Figure, DE fignifies the co¬
loured Paper, D G the blew half, F E the red half, M N
the Lens, H J the white Paper in that place where the red
half with its black Lines appeared diftind, and hi the fame
Paper in that place where the blew half appeared diftind.
The place hi was nearer to the Lens MN than the place
H J by an Inch and an half. Scholium.
[
Scholium. The fame things fiicceed notwithstanding that
fome of the Circumftances be varied : as in the firft Ex¬
periment when the Prifm and Paper are any ways inclined
to the Horizon, and in both when coloured Lines are
drawn upon very black Paper. But in the Defcription of
thefe Experiments , I have fet down fuch Circumftances
by which either the Phenomenon might be rendred more
conlpicuous, or a Novice might more eafily try them, or
by which I did cry them only. The fame thing I have
often done in the following Experiments : Concerning all
which this one Admonition may fuffice. Now from thefe
Experiments it follows not that all the Light of the blew
is more Refrangible than all the Light of the red 3 For
both Lights are mixed of Rays differently Refrangible,
So that in the red there are fome Rays not lefs Refrangible
than thofe of the blew , and in the blew there are fome
Rays not more Refrangible than thofe of the red 3 But
thefe Rays in Proportion to the whole Light are but few,
and ferve to diminifh the Event of the Experiment, but
are not able to deftroy it. For if the red and blew Co¬
lours were more dilute and weak, the diftance of the Ima¬
ges would be lefs than an Inch and an half 3 and if they
were more intenfe and full, that diftance would be greater,
as will appear hereafter. Thefe Experiments may fuffice
for the Colours of Natural Bodies. For in the Colours
made by the Refradtion of Prifms this Propofition will
appear by the Experiments which are now to follow in the
next Propofition.

C tp^O (P.

\ ■
P R 0 P. II. Theor. II.
The Light of the Sun confifls of Rays differently Refrangible,

The Proof by Experiments.

er.g. I N a very dark Chamber at a round hole about


j[ one third part of an Inch broad made in the
Shut of a Window I placed a Glafs Prifm, whereby the
beam of the Suns Light which came in at that hole might
be refracted upwards toward the oppofite Wall of the
Chamber, and there form a coloured Image of the
Sun.- The Axis of the Prifm (that is the Line paffing.
through the middle of the Prifm from one end of it to
the other end Parallel to the edge of the Refracting Angle)
was in this and the following Experiments perpendicular
to the incident Rays. About this Axis I turned the Prifm
flowly , and faw the refraCted Light on the Wall or co¬
loured Image of the Sun firft to defcend and then to af-
cend. Between the Defcent and Afcent when the Image
feemed Stationary 5 I ftopt the Prifm, and fixt it in that
Pofture, that it flhould be moved no more. For in that
pofture the Refractions of the Light at the two fides of
the RefraCting Angle, that is at the entrance of the Rays
into the Prifm and at their going out of it, were equal to
one another. So alfo in other Experiments as often as I
would have the Refractions on both fides the Prifm to be
equal to one another, I noted the place where the Image
of the Sun formed by the refraCted Light flood ftill be¬
tween its two contrary Motions, in the common Period
of its progrefs and egrefs 3 and when the Image fell upon
that place, I made fail the Prifm. And in this pofture, as
the
[J9]
the moft convenient,it is to be underftood that all the Prifms
are placed in the following Experiments, unlefs where feme
other pofture is defcribed. The Prifm therefore being pla¬
ced in this pofture, I let the refraded Light fall perpendi¬
cularly upon a Sheet of white Paper at the oppofite Wall
of the Chamber, and obferyed the Figure and Dimenfions
of the Solar Image formed on the Paper by that Light.
This Image was Oblong and not Oval, but terminated
with two Redilinear and Parallel Sides, and two Semi¬
circular Ends. On its Sides it was bounded pretty diftindly,
but on its Ends very confufedly and indiftindly, the Light
there decaying and vanifhing by degrees. The breadth qf
this Image anfwered to the Suns Diameter, and was about
two Inches and the eighth part of an Inch , including the
Penumbra. For the Image was eighteen Feet and an half
diftant from the Prifm, and at this diftance that breadth if
diminilhed by the Diameter of the hole in the Window-lhut,
that is by a quarter of an Inch, febtended an Angle at the
Prifm of about half a Degree, which is the Sun’s apparent
Diameter. But the length of the Image was about ten Inches
and a quarter, and the length of the Rectilinear Sides about
eight Inches 3 And the refrading Angle of the Prifm where¬
by fo great a length was made, was -6a degr. With a Ids
Angle the length of the Image was lefs, the breadth re¬
maining the fame. If the Prifm was turned about its Axis
that way which made the Rays emerge more obliquely out
of the fecond refolding Surface of the Prifm, the Image foon
became an Inch or two longer, or more 3 and if the Prifm
was turned about the contrary way, fo as to make the Rays
fall more obliquely on the firft refrading Surface, the Image
foon became an Inch or two (hotter. And therefore in try¬
ing this Experiment, I was as curious as I could be in pla¬
cing the Prifm by the above-mentioned Rule exadiy in
C i fuch
[20]
fuch a pofture that the Refractions of the Rays at their emer¬
gence out of the Prifm might be equal to that at their inci¬
dence on it. This Prifm had feme Veins running along
within the Glafs from one end to the other, which feat-
tered feme of the Sun’s Light irregularly, but had no fen-
fible effeCt in encreafing the length of the coloured Spec¬
trum. For I tried the fame Experiment with other Prifms
with the fame Succefs. And particularly with a Prifm
which feemed free from fuch Veins, and whofe refracting
Angle was 62- Degrees, I found the length of the Image 92
or 10 Inches at the diftance of i8J Feet from the Prifm,
the breadth of the hole in the Window-flhut being i of an
Inch as before. And becaufpit is eafie to commit a mi-
ftake in placing the Prifm in its due pofture, I repeated
the Experiment four or five times, and always found the
length of the Image that which is fet down above. With
another Prifm of clearer Glafs and better Polliflh, which
feemed free from Veins and whofe refracting Angle was
63 Degrees, the length of this Image at the fame diftance
of 18; Feet was alfo about 10 Inches, or 10k Beyond
tkefe Meafures for about -1 or 1 of an Inch at either end of
4 3
the SpeCtrum the Light of the Clouds feemed to be a little
tinged with red and violet, but fo very faintly that I fufpe-
Cted that tinClure might either wholly or in great meafure
arife from feme Rays of the SpeCtrum fcattered irre¬
gularly by feme inequalities in the Subftance and Polifh
of the Glafs, and therefore I did not include it in thefe
Meafures. Now the different Magnitude of the hole in
theWindow-fliut, and different thicknefs of the Prifm where
the Rays paffed through it, and different inclinations of the
Prifm to the Florizon, made no fenfible changes in the
length of the Image. Neither did the different matter of
the
[21 ]
the Prifms make any : for in a Veffel made of polifihedr
Plates of Glafs cemented together in the Ihape of a Prifmn
and filled with Water, there is the like Succefs of the Ex¬
periment according to the quantity of the Refraction. It
is further to be obferved, that the Rays went on in right
Lines from the Prifm to the Image, and therefore at their
very going out of the Prifm had all that Inclination to
one another from which the length of the Image pro^
ceeded, that is the Inclination of more than two Degrees
and an half. And yet according to the Laws of Opticks
vulgarly received, they could not poflibly be fo much in¬
clined to one another. For let EG reprefent the Window-
fliut, F the hole made therein through which a beam of the
Sun’s Light was tranfmitted into the darkned Chamber, and
ABC a Triangular Imaginary Plane whereby the Prifm is
feigned to be cut tranfverfly through the middle of the
Light. Or if you pleafe, let AB C reprefent the Prifm it
felfj looking direCtly towards the Spectator s Eye with its
nearer end : And let X Y be the Sun, M N the Paper upon
which the Solar Image or Spectrum is call, and P T the
Image it felf whofe fides towards V and W are Rectili¬
near and Parallel, and ends towards P and T Semicir¬
cular. YKHP and X L J T are the two Rays, the firft
of which comes from the lower part of the Sun to the
higher part of the Image, and is refraCted in the Prifm at
K and H, and the latter comes from the higher part of
the Sun to the lower part of the Image, and is refraCted
at L and J. Since the Refractions on both fides the Prifm
are equal to one another, that is the RefraCtion at K equal
to the RefraCtion at J, and the RefraCtion at L equal to
the RefraCtion at H, fo that the Refractions of the inci¬
dent Rays at K and L taken together are equal to the
RefraCtions. of the. emergent Rays at Hand J taken toge¬
ther t:
i>2]
thef : it follows by adding equal things to equal things,
that the RefraCtions at K and H taken together, are equal
to the Refractions at J and L taken together , and there¬
fore the two Rays being equally refracted have the fame
Inclination to one another after RefraCiion which they had
before, that is the Inclination of half a Degree anfwering
to the Sun's Diameter. For fo great was the Inclination
of the Rays to one another before RefraCHon. So then,
the length of the Image P T would by the Rules of Vul¬
gar O-pticks fubtend an Angle of half a Degree at the
Prifm, and by confequence be equal to the breadth Vw $
and therefore the Image would be round. Thus it would
be were the two Rays X L J T and Y K H P and all the
reft which form the Image P w T >, alike Refrangible.
And therefore feeing by Experience it is found that the
Image is not round but about five times longer than
broad, the Rays which going to the upper end P of the
Image fuffer the greateft Refraction, muft be more Refran¬
gible than thofe which go to the lower end T , unlefs the
inequality of Refraction be cafual.
This Image or SpeCtrum P T was coloured, being red
at its lead: refracted end T, and violet at its mod: refraCted
end P, and yellow green and blew in the intermediate
fpaces. Which agrees with the firft Fropofition, that Lights
which differ in Colour do alfo differ in Refrangibility.
The length of the Image in the foregoing Experiments I
meafured from the fainted; and outmoft red at one end, to
the fainted: and outmoft blew at the other end.
Exper. 4. In the Sun's beam which was propagated in¬
to the Room through the hole in the Window-fhut, at
the diftance of feme Feet from the hole, I held the Prifin
in fech a pofture that its Axis might be perpendicular to
that beam. Then I looked through the Prifm upon the
[ 23 ]
hole, and turning the Prifm to and fro about its Axis to
make the Image of the hole afcend and defcend, when be¬
tween its two contrary Motions it feemed ftationary, X
ftopt the Prifm that the Refractions on both fides of the
refracting Angle might be equal to each other as in the
former Experiment* In this Situation of the Prifm view¬
ing through it the faid hole, I obferved the length of its
refracted Image to be many times greater than its breadth,
and that the mod refracted part thereof appeared violet,
the leaf: refracted red, the middle parts blew green and
yellow in order. The fame thing happened when I re¬
moved the Prifm out of the Suns Light, and looked
through it upon the hole fhining by the Light of the
Clouds beyond it. And yet if the Refraction were done
regularly according to one certain Proportion of the Sines
of Incidence and Refraction as is vulgarly fuppofed, the
refracted Image ought to have appeared round.
So then, by thefe two Experiments it appears that m
equal Incidences there is a confiderable inequality of Re¬
fractions : But whence this inequality arifes, whether it be
that feme of the incident Rays are refracted more and--,
others lefs, conftantly or by chance, or that one and the
fame Ray is by^ Refraction difturbed, flattered, dilated,
and as it were Iplit and Ipread into many diverging Rays,,,
as Grimaldo fuppofes, does not yet appear by thefe Experi¬
ments, but will appear by thofe that follow.
Exper. 5. Confidering therefore, that if in the third Ex¬
periment the Image of the Sun fheuld be drawn out into-
an oolong form, either by a Dilatation of every Ray, or
by any other cafual inequality of the Refractions, the fame,
oblong Image would by a fecond Refraction made Side¬
ways be drawn out as much in breadth by the like Dila¬
tation. of the. Rays or other cafual inequality of the Re¬
fractions.
I24]
fractions Sideways, I tried what would be the Effects of
fuch a fecond Refraction. For this end I ordered all things
as in the third Experiment, and then placed a fecond Prifm
immediately after the firft in a crofs Petition to it, that it
might again refrad the beam of the Suns Light which
came to it through the firft Prifm. In the firft Prifm this
beam was refraded upwards, and in the fecond Sideways.
And I found that by the Refradion of the fecond Prifm
the breadth of the Image was not increafed, but its fupe-
rior part which in the firft Prifm buffered the greater Re¬
fradion and appeared violet and blew, did again in the
fecond Prifm buffer a greater Refradion than its inferior
part, which appeared red and yellow , and this without
any Dilation of the Image in breadth.
4- llluflratton. Let S reprefent the Sun, F the hole in the
Window, ABC the firft Prifm, D H the fecond Prifm, Y
the round Image of the Sun made by a dired beam of
Light when the Prifms are taken away, P T the oblong
Image of the Sun made by that beam palling through the
•firft Prifm alone when the fecond Prifm is taken away, and
ft the Image made by the crofs Refradions of both
Prifms together. Now if the Rays which tend towards
the feveral Points of the round Image Y were dilated and
Ipread by the Refradion of the firft Prifm, fo that they
ftiould not any longer go in fingle Lines to Angle Points,
but that every Ray being fplit, fhattered, and changed
from a Linear Ray to a Superficies of Rays diverging
from the Point of Refradion, and lying in the Plane of
the Angles of Incidence and Refradion, they Ihould
go in thofe Planes to fo many Lines reaching almoft
from one end of the Image P T to the other, and if
that Image Ihould thence become oblong : thofe Rays
and their feveral parts tending towards the feveral Points of
[^5]
the Image P T ought to be again dilated and fpread Side¬
ways by the tranfverfe RefraCtion of the fecond Prifm, fo
as to compofe a fourfquare Image, fuch as is reprefented
at «r7. For the better underftanding of which, let the Image
PT be diftinguiftied into five equal Parts PQK, KQRL,
LRSM, MSVN, NVT. And by the fame irregularity
that the Orbicular Light Y is by the RefraCtion of the firft
Prifm dilated and drawn out into a long Image P T, the
the Light PQK which takes up a fpace of the fame length
and breadth with the Light Y ought to be by the Refra¬
ction of the fecond Prifm dilated and drawn out into the
long Image *qkp, and the Light K QR L into the long
Image 4 q r h an^ ^ Lights LRSM, MSVN, NVT
into fo many other long Images l r s w, m s v w, ny tl 3 and
all thefe long Images would compofe the fourfquare Image
*1- Thus it ought to be were every Ray dilated by Re¬
fraction, and fpread into a triangular Superficies of Rays
diverging from the Point of RefraCtion. For the fecond
RefraCtion would fpread the Rays one way as much as the
firft doth another, and fo dilate the Image in breadth as
much as the firft doth in length. And the fame thing
ought to happen, were fome Rays cafually refraCted more
than others. But the Event is otherwife. The Ima^e P T
was not made broader by the RefraCtion of the Ifecond
Prifm, but only became oblique, as ?tis reprefented at p
its tipper end P being by the RefraCtion tranflated to a
greater diftance than its low7er end T. So then the Light
which went towards the upper end P of the Image, was
(at equal Incidences) more refraCted in the fecond Prifm
than the Light which tended towards the lower end T,
that is the blew and violet, than the red and yellow 3 and
therefore was more Refrangible. The fame Light was by
the RefraCtion of the firft Prifm tranflated further from the
[2(5]
place Y to which it tended before Refraction 5 and there¬
fore fuffered as well in the firft Prifm as in the fecond a
greater Refraction than the reft of the Light, and by con-
lequence was more Refrangible than the reft, even before
its incidence on the firft Prifm.
Sometimes I placed a third Prifm after the fecond, and
foitietimes alfo a fourth after the third , by all which the
Image might be often refracted fide ways : but the Rays
which were more refracted than the reft in the firft Prifin
were alfo more refracted in all the reft, and that without
any Dilatation of the Image fide ways : and therefore thofe
Rays for their conftancy of a greater Refraction are de-
fervedly reputed more Refrangible.
But that the meaning of this Experiment may more
clearly appear, it is to be confidered that the Rays which
are equally Refrangible do fall upon a circle anfwering to
the Suns Difque. For this was proved in the third Experi¬
ment. By a circle I underftand not here a perfect Geo¬
metrical Circle, but any Orbicular Figure whofe length is
equal to its breadth, and which, as to fenfe, may feem
circular. Let therefore A G reprefent the circle which all
the moft Refrangible Rays propagated from the whole
Difq ue of the Sun, would illuminate and paint upon the
oppofite Wall if they were alone 5 E L the circle which all
the leaft Refrangible Rays would in like manner illuminate
and paint if they were alone 3 B H, C J, D K, the circles
which fo many intermediate forts of Rays would fuccef-
fively paint upon the Wall, if they were fingly propagated
from the Sun in fucceffive Order, the reft being always in¬
tercepted 3 And conceive that there are other intermediate
Circles without number which innumerable other inter¬
mediate forts of Rays would fucceffively paint upon the
Wall if the Sun fhould fucceffively emit every fort apart.
[27]
And feeing the Sun emits all thefe forts at once, they muft
all together illuminate and paint innumerable equal cir¬
cles, of all which, being according to their degrees of Re-
frangibility placed in order in a continual feries, that ob¬
long Spedrum PT is compofed which I defcribed in the
third Experiment. Now if the Sun's circular Image Y
which is made by an unrefraded beam of Light was by
any dilatation of the fingle Rays, or by any other irregu¬
larity in the Refraction of the firft Prifm, converted into
the Oblong Spedrum, P T : then ought every circle A G,
B H, C J, tsrc. in that Spedrum, by the crofs Refra¬
ction of the fecond Prifm again dilating or otherwife
fcattering the Rays as before, to be in like manner drawn
out and transformed into an Oblong Figure, and thereby
the breadth of the Image P T would be now as much aug¬
mented as the length of the Image Y was before by the Re¬
traction of the firft Prifm 5 and thus by the Refradions of
both Prifms together would be formed a fourfqnare Figure
T*t 7 as I defcribed above. Wherefore fince the breadth of
the SpeCtrum P T is not iiicreafed by the Refraction fide¬
ways, it is certain that the Rays are not fplit or dilated, or
otherways irregularly fcattered by that RefraCtion, but
that every circle is by a regular and uniform RefraCtion
tranflated entire into another place, as the circle A G by
the greateft RefraCtion into the place agy the circle B H by
a Ids RefraCtion into the place bh, the circle C J by a Re¬
fraCtion frill lefs into the place cz, and fo of the reft 5 by
which means a new Spedrum p t inclined to the former
P T is in like manner compofed of circles lying in a
right Line 3 and thefe circles muft be of the fame bignefs
with the former, becaufe the breadths of all the Spe-
drums Y, PT and pt at equal diftances from the Prifms
are equal.
D 2 I con-
[28]
t confidered further that by the breadth of the hole F
through which the Light enters into the Dark Chamber*
there is a Penumbra made in the circuit of the SpeCtrum
Y, and that Penumbra remains in the rectilinear Sides of
the SpeCtrums P T and pt. I placed therefore at that hole
a Lens or ObjeCt-glafs of a Telefcope which might call
the Image of the Sun diftinCtly on Y without any Penum-
bra at all, and found that the Penumbra of the Rectili¬
near Sides of the oblong SpeCtrums P T and pt was alfo
thereby taken away, fo that thofe Sides appeared as di¬
ftinCtly defined as did the Circumference of the firft Image
Y. Thus it happens if the Glafs of the Prifms be free
from veins, atd their Sides be accurately plane and well
polifihed without thofe numberlefs waves or curies which
ufually arife from Sand-holes a little fmoothed in polifh-
ing with Putty. If the Glafs be only well polifbed and
free from veins and the Sides not accurately plane but a
little Convex or Concave, as it frequently happens 3 yet
may the three SpeCtrums Y, P T and pt want Penumbras,
but not in equal diftances from the Prifms. Now from
this want of Penumbras, I knew more certainly that every
one of the circles was refraCted according to fome moft
regular, uniform, and conftant law. For if there were
any irregularity in the RefraCtion, the right Lines A E and
G L which all the circles in the SpeCtrum P T do touch,
could not by that RefraCtion be tranflated into the Lines
a e and gl as diftinCt and ftraight as they were before, but
there would arife in thofe tranflated Lines fome Penumbra
or crookednefs or undulation, or other fenfible Perturba¬
tion contrary to what is found by Experience. Whatfo-
ever Penumbra or Perturbation fbould be made in the
circles by the crofs RefraCtion of the fecond Prifm, all
that Penumbra or Perturbation would be conlpicuous in
[29]
the right Lines a e and g l which touch thofe circles. And
therefore fince there is no fuch Penumbra or Perturbation
in thofe right Lines there mu ft be none in the circles*
Since the diftance between thofe Tangents or breadth of
the Sped rum is not increafed by the Refradions, the Dia¬
meters of the circles are not increafed thereby. Since thofe
Tangents continue to be right Lines, every circle which
in the firft Prifm is more or lefs refraded , is exadly in
the fame Proportion more or lefs refraded in the fecond.
And feeing all thefe things continue to fucceed after the
fame manner when the Rays are again in a third Prifm,
and again in a fourth refraded Sideways, it is evident that
the Rays of one and the fame circle as to their degree of
Refrangibility continue always Uniform and Homogeneal
to one another, and that thofe of feveral circles do differ
in degree of Refrangibility, and that in fome certain and
conftant Proportion. Which is the thing I was to prove.
There is yet another Circumftance or two of this Ex- Fig.
periment by which it becomes ftill more plain and con¬
vincing. Let the fecond Prifm D H be placed not imme-
ately after after the firft, but at fome diftance from it 5
Suppofe in the mid-way between it and the Wall on which
the oblong Spedrum P T is caft, fo that the Light from
the firft Prifm may fall upon it in the form of an oblong
Spedrum, *7 Parallel to this fecond Prifm,and be refraded
Sideways to form the oblong Spedrum p t upon the Wall.
And you will find as before, that this Spedrum p t is in¬
clined to that Spedrum P TL, which the firft Prifm forms
alone without the fecond 3 the blew ends P and p beino^ fur¬
ther diftant from one another than the red ones T and t
and by confluence that the Rays which go to the blew
end *■ of the Image *1 and which therefore fuffer the greateft
Refradion in the firft Prifm, are again in the fecond Prifm
more refraded than the reft,
13°]
The fame thing I try’d alfo by letting the Sun’s Light
into a dark Room through two little round holes F and p
made in the Window, and with two Parallel Prifins ABC
and plaoed at thofe holes ( one at each ) refra&ing
thofe two beams of Light to the oppofite Wall of the
Chamber, in fuch manner that the two colour’d Images
P T and m n which they there painted were joyned end to
end and lay in one ftraight Line, the red end T of the
one touching the blew end m of the other. For if thefe
two refra&ed beams were again by a third Prifm D H pla¬
ced croft to the two firft, refrafted Sideways, and the Spe-
Ctrums thereby tranflated to feme other part of the Wall
of the Chamber, fuppofe the Spectrum P T to p t and
the Spedxum M N to m w, thefe tranflated SpeCtrums p t
and m n would not lie in one ftraight Line with their ends
contiguous as before, but be broken off from one another
and become Parallel, the blew end of the Image m n being
by a greater Refraction tranflated farther from its former
place M T, than the red end t of the other Image p t from
the fame place MT which puts the Propofition paft di-
fpute. And this happens whether the third Prifm D H be
placed immediately after the two firft or at a great diftance
from them , fo that the Light refraCfed in the two firft
Prifms be either white and circular, or coloured and ob¬
long when it falls on the third.
Exper. 6. In the middle of two thin Boards I made
round holes a third part of an Inch in Diameter, and in
the Window-fhut a much broader hole, being made to let
into my darkned Chamber a large beam of the Sun’s
Light 3 I placed a Prifm behind the Shut in that beam to
refraCl it towards the oppofite Wall, and clofe behind the
Prifm I fixed one of the Boards, in fuch manner that the
middle of the refraCted Light might pafs through the hole
made
[30
made in it, and the reft be intercepted by the Board.
Then at the diftance of about twelve Feet from the firft
Board I fixed the other Board, in fuch manner that the
middle of the refracted Light which came through the hole
in the firft Board and fell upon the oppofite Wall might
pafs through the hole in this other Board, and the reft be-r
ing intercepted by the Board might paint upon it the co*
loured SpeCtrum of the Sun. And clofe behind this Board
I fixed another Prifm to refrad: the Light which came
through the hole. Then I returned Ipeedily to the firft
Prifm, and by turning it flowly to and fro about its Axis,
I caufed the Image which fell upon the fecond Board to
move up and down upon that Board, that all its parts
might fucceflively pafs through the hole in that Board and
fall upon the Prilm behind it. And in the mean time, I
noted the places on the opppfite Wall to which that Light
after its Refraction in the fecond Prifm did pafs $ and by
the difference of the places I found that the Light which
being moft refraCted in the firft Prifm did go to the blew
end of the Image, was again more refrafted in the fecond
Prifm than the Light which went to the red end of that
Image, which proves as well the firft Propofition as the
fecond. And this happened whether the Axis of the two
Prifms were parallel, or inclined to one another and to the
Horizon in any given Angles.
Illuftration. Let F be the wide hole in the Window-ftiut,
through which the Sun ftiines upon the firft Prifm ABC, ^
and let the refra&ed Light fall upon the middle of the
Board D E, and the middle part of that Light upon the
hole G made in the middle of that Board. Let this tra-
jeCted part of the Light fall again upon the middle of the
fecond Board d e and there paint fuch an oblong coloured
Image of the Sun as was defcribed in the third Experiment.
By
[ 32]
By turning the Prifm ABC flowly to and fro about its
Axis this Image will be made to move up and down the
Board d e, and by this means all its parts from one end to
the other may be made to pafs fucceffively through the
hole g which is made in the middle of that Board. In the
mean while another Prifm ale is to be fixed next after
that hole£ to refradt the trajedted Light a fecond time.
And thefe things being thus ordered, I marked the places
M and N of the oppofite Wail upon which the refradted
Light fell,and found that whilft the two Boards and fecond
Prifm remained unmoved, thofe places by turning the firft
Prifm about its Axis were changed perpetually. For when
the lower part of the Light which fell upon the fecond
Board d e was call through the hole g it went to a lower
place M on the Wall, and when the higher part of that
Light was call through the fame hole^, it went to a higher
place N on the Wall, and when any intermediate part of
the Light was call through that hole it went to fome place
on the Wall between M and N. The unchanged Pofition
of the holes in the Boards, made the Incidence of the Rays
upon the fecond Prifm to be the fame in all cafes. And
yet in that common Incidence fome of the Rays were more
refradted and others lefs. And thofe were more refracted
in this Prifm which by a greater Refradtion in the firft
Prifm were more turned out of the way, and therefore for
their conftancy of being more refradted are defervedly cal¬
led more Refrangible.
Exper. 7. At two holes made near one another in my
Window-fhut I placed two Prifms , one at each, which
might caft upon th§ oppofite Wall (after the manner of
the third Experiment) two oblong coloured Images of the
Sun. And at a little diftance from the Wall I placed a
long (lender Paper with ftraight and parallel edges, and
ordered
33
[ 1
ordered the Prifms and Paper fo, that the red Colour of
one Image might fall direddy upon one half of the Paper,
and the violet colour of the other Image upon the other
half of the fame Papery fo that the Paper appeared of two
Colours , red and violet, much after the manner of the
painted Paper in the firft and fecond Experiments. Then
with a black Cloth I covered the Wall behind the Paper,
that no Light might be reflected from it to difturb the
Experiment, and viewing the Paper through a third Prifm
held parallel to it, I faw that half of it which was illumi¬
nated by the Violet-light to be divided from the other
half by a greater Refradion, efpecially when I went a good
way off from the Paper. For when I viewed it too near
at hand, the two halfs of the Paper did not appear fully
divided from one another, but Termed contiguous at one
of their Angles like the painted Paper in the firft: Expe¬
riment. Which alfo happened when the Paper wras too
broad.
Sometimes inftead of the Paper I ufecl a white Thred,
and this appeared through the Prifm divided into two Pa¬
rallel Threds as is reprelented in the i pth Figure , where Fig.
D G denotes the Thred illuminated with violet Light
from D to E and with red Light from E to G, and d e °fg
are the parts of the Thred feen by Refraction. If one half
or the 1 hred be conftantly illuminated with red, and the
other half be illuminated with all the Colours lucceffively,
(which may be done by caufihg one of the Prifms to be
turned about its Axis whilft the other remains unmoved)
tins other half in viewing the Thred through the Prifm,
will appear in a continued right Line with the firft half
when illuminated with red, and begin to be a little divi¬
ded from it when illuminated with Orange, and remove
further from it when illuminated with Yellow, and ftill
E further
[34]
further when with Green, and further when with Blew, and
go yet further off when illuminated with Indigo, and fur-
theft when with deep Violet. Which plainly flhews, that
the Lights of feveral Colours are more and more Refran¬
gible one than another, in this order of their Colours, Red,
Orange, Yellow, Green, Blew, Indigo, deep Violet 3 and
fo proves as well the firft Propofition as the fecond.
Fig-. 17. I caufed alfo the coloured SpeCtrums P T and M N
made in a dark Chamber by the Refractions of two Prifrns
to lye in a right Line end to end, as was defcribed above
in the fifth Experiment, and viewing them through a third
Priftn held Parallel to their length, they appeared no longer
in a right Line, but became broken from one another, as
they are reprefented at p t and m n\ the violet end m of the
SpeCtrum m n being by a greater RefraCtion tranflated
further from its former place M T than the red end £ of the
other SpeCtrum pt.
_f/V. 20. I further caufed thofe two SpeCtrums P T and MN to
become co-incident in an inverted order of their Colours,
the red end of each falling on the violet end of the other,
as they are reprefented in the oblong Figure P T M N 3
and then viewing them through a Prifm D H held Paral¬
lel to their length, they appeared not co-incident as when
viewed with the naked Eye, but in the form of two di-
ftinCt SpeCtrums p t and mn crofting one another in the
middle after the manner of the letter X. Which fhews
that the red of the one SpeCtrum and violet of the other,
which were co-incident at P N and M T, being parted
from one another by a greater RefraCtion of the violet to
p and m than of the red to n and t, do differ in degrees of
Refrangibility.
I illuminated alfo a little circular piece of white Paper
all over with the Lights of both Prifms intermixed, and
when
when it was illuminated with the red of one Spedhrum and
deep violet of the other , fo as by the mixture of thofe
Colours to appear all over purple , I viewed the Paper,
firft at a lefs diftance , and then at a greater , through a
third Prifm 3 and as I went from the Paper, the refradted
Image thereof became more and more divided by the un¬
equal Refradfion of the two mixed Colours, and at length
parted into two diftindt Images, a red one and a violet one,
whereof the violet was furtheft from the Paper, and there¬
fore buffered the greateft Refradtion. And when that Prifm
at the Window which call: the violet on the Paper was ta¬
ken away,the violet Image difappeared} but when the other
Prifm was taken away the red vanifhed : which (hews that
thefe two Images were nothing elfe than the Lights of the
two Prifms which had been intermixed on the purple Pa¬
per, but were parted again by their unequal Refradtions
made in the third Prifm through which the Paper was
viewed. This alfo was obfervable that if one of the
Prifms at the Window, fuppofe that which caft the violet y
on the Paper, was turned about its Axis to make all the
Colours in this order, Violet, Indigo, Blew, Green, Yel¬
low, Orange, Red, fall fucceffively on the Paper from that
Prifm, the violet Image changed Colour accordingly, and
in changing Colour came nearer to the red one, until when
it was alfo red they both became fully co-incident.
I placed alfo two paper circles very near one another,
the one in the red Light of one Prifm, and the other in
the violet Light of the other. The circles were each of
them an Inch in Diameter, and behind them the Wall was
dark that the Experiment might not be difturbed by any
Light coming from thence. Thefe circles thus illuminated,
I viewed through a Prifm fo held that the Refradtion might
be made towards the red circle , and as I went from them
E 2 they
they came nearer and nearer together, and at length be¬
came co-incident 3 and afterwards when I went ftill further
off, they parted again in a contrary order, the violet by a
greater Refraction being carried beyond the red.
Exper. 8. In Summer when the Stiffs Light ufes to
be ftrongeft, I placed a Prifrn at the hole of the Window-
flint, as in the third Experiment, yet fo that its Axis might
be Parallel to the Axis of the World, and at the oppofite
Wall in the Stiffs refra&ed Light, I placed an open Book.
Then going Six Feet and two Inches from the Book, I
placed there the abovementioned Lens,by which the Light
reftedled from the Book might be made to converge and
meet again at the diftance of fix Feet and two Inches be¬
hind the Lens , and there paint the Species of the Book
upon a fiheet of white Paper much after the manner of the
iecond Experiment. The Book and Lens being made faft,
1 noted the place where the Paper was, when the Letters
of the Book, illuminated by the fulled: red Light of the
Solar Image falling upon it, did caff their Species on that
Paper moft diftinctly • And then I flay'd till by the Mo¬
tion of the Sun and confequent Motion of his Image on
the Book, all the Colours from that red to the middle of
the blew pafs’d over thofe Letter and when thofe Letters
were illuminated by that blew, I noted again the place of
the Paper when they caff their Species moft diftindtly upon
it : And I found that this laft place of the Paper was nearer
to the Lens than its former place by about two Inches and
an half, or two and three quarters. So much fooner there¬
fore did the Light in the violet end of the Image by a grea¬
ter Refraction converge and meet, than the Light in the
red end. But in trying this the Chamber was as dark as I
could make it. For if thefe Colours be diluted and weak-
ned by the mixture of any adventitious Light, the diftance
between.
between the places of the Paper will not be fo great. This
diftance in the fecond Experiment where the Colours of
natural Bodies were made ufe of, was but an Inch and a
half, by reafon of the imperfedtion of thofe Colours. Elere
in the Colours of the Prifm , which are manifeftly more
full, intenfe, and lively than thofe of natural Bodies, the
diftance is two Inches and three quarters. And were the
Colours ftill more full, I queftion not but that the di¬
ftance would be considerably greater. For the coloured
Light of the Priim, by the interfering of the Circles de~
fcnbed in the i nh Figure of the fifth Experiment, and alfo
by the Light of the very bright Clouds next the Sun's
Body intermixing with thefe Colours, and by the Light
foartered by the inequalities in the pobfti of the Prifm, was
io very much compounded, that the Species which thofe
faint and dark Colours, the Indigo and Violet, call upon
the Paper were not diftindt enough to be well obferved.
Exper. o. A Prifm, wliofe two Angles at its Bafe were
equal to one another and half right ones, and the third
a right one, I placed in a beam, of the Sun's Light let in¬
to a dark Chamber through a hole in the Window7-flint
as in the thirAExperiment. And turning the Prifm flowly
about its Axis until all the Light which went through one
of its Angles and was refracted by it began to be reflected
by its Bale , at which till then it went out of the Glafs,
I obferved that thofe Rays which had fuffered the greateft
Refradtion were fooner refledted than the reft. I conceived
therefore that thofe Rays of the refledted Light, which
were moft Refrangible, did firft of all by a total Reflexion-
become more copious in that Light than the reft, and
that afterwards the reft alfo, by "a total Reflexion, be¬
came as copious as thefe. To try -this, I made the. re¬
flected Eight pafs through another Prifm, and being refra-
[38]
£ktd by it to fall afterwards upon a fheet of white Paper
placed at fome diftance behind it, and there by that Re¬
fraction to paint the ufual Colours of the Prifm. And
then caufing the firft Prifm to be turned about its Axis as
above, I obferved that when thofeRays which in this Prifm
had fuffered the greateft Refraction and appeared of a blew
and violet Colour began to be totally reflected, the blew
and violet Light on the Paper which was moft refraCted
in the fecond Prifm received a fenfible increafe above that
of the red and yellow, which was leaf! refraCted 5 and
afterwards when the reft of the Light which was green,
yellow and red began to be totally reflected in the firft
Prifm, the light of thofe Colours on the Paper received as
great an increafe as the violet and blew had done before.
Whence 'tis manifeft, that the beam of Light reflected by
the Bafe of the Prifm, being augmented firft by the more
Refrangible Rays and afterwards by the lefs Refrangible
ones, is compounded of Rays differently Refrangible.
And that all fuch reflected Light is of the fame Nature
with the Sun's Light, before its Incidence on the Bafe of
the Prifm, no Man ever doubted : it being generally al¬
lowed, that Light by fuch Reflexions fuffers no Alteration
in its Modifications and Properties. I do not here take
notice of any Refractions made in the Sides of the firft
Prifm, becaufe the Light enters it perpendicularly at the
firft Side, and goes out perpendicularly at the fecond Side,
and therefore fuffers none. So then, the Stiffs incident
Light being of the fame temper and conftitution with his
emergent Light, and the laft being compounded of Rays
differently Refrangible, the firft mull be in like manner
compounded.
Fig. 21. lllujlration. In the 21 dr Figure, A B C is the firft Prifm,
B C its Bafe, B and C its equal Angles at the Bafe, each
of
[39]
of 45 degrees, A its Rectangular Vertex, F M a beam of
the Sun’s Light let into a dark Room through a hole F
one third part of an Inch broad, M its Incidence on theBafe
of the Prifm, M G a lefs refra&ed Ray, M H a more refract¬
ed Ray, M N the beam of Light reflected from the Bafe,
V X Y the fecond Frifm by which this beam in palling
through it is refraCted, N t the lefs refracted Light of this
beam, and N p the more refracted part thereof. When the
firft Prifm A B C is turned about its Axis according to the
order of the Letters ABC, the Rays M H emerge more
and more obliquely out of that Prifm, and at length after
their moft oblique Emergence are reflected towards N,
and going on to p do increafe the number of the Rays N p*
Afterwards by continuing the motion of the firft Prifm, the
Rays MG are alfo reflected to N and increafe the number of
the Rays N t. And therefore the Light M N admits into
its Competition, firft the more Refrangible Rays, and then
the lefs Refrangible Rays, and yet after this Compofition
is of the lame; Nature with the Sun’s immediate Light F M, V
the Reflexion of the fpecular Bafe B C caufing no Altera¬
tion therein.
Exper. 10. Two Prifms, which were alike in Aiape, I
tied fo together, that their Axes and oppofite Sides being
Parallel, they compofed a Parallelepiped, And, the Sun
fliining into my dark Chamber through a little hole in the
Window-(hut, I placed that Parallelepiped in his beam at
fome diftance from the hole, in fuch a pofture that the Axes
of the Prifms might be perpendicular to the incident Rays,
and that thofe Rays being incident upon the firft Side of
one Priim, might go on through the two contiguous Sides
of both Prifms, and emerge out of the laft Side of the fe¬
cond Prifm. This Side being Parallel to the firft Side of
the firft Prifm, caufed the emerging Light to be Parallel
to
[ 4° ]
to the Incident. Then, beyond thefe two Prifms I placed
a third, which might refract that emergent Light, and by
that Refraction call: the ufnal Colours of the Prifm upon
the oppofite Wall, or upon a {heet of white Paper held at
a convenient diftance behind the Prifm for that refraCled
Light to fall upon it. After this I turned the Parallelepiped
about its Axis, and found that when the contiguous Sides
of the two Prifms beeame fo oblique to the incident Rays
that thofe Rays began all of them to be reflected, thofe
Rays which in the third Prifm had fuffered the greateft Re¬
fraction and painted the Paper with violet and blew, were
iirft of all by a total Reflexion taken out of the tranfmitted
Light, the reft remaining and on the Paper painting their
Colours of Green, Yellow, Orange, and Red as before 5
and afterwards by continuing the motion of the two Prifms,
the reft of the Rays alio by a total Reflexion vaniihed in
order, according to their degrees of Refrangibility. The
Light therefore which emerged out of the twTo Prifms is
compounded of Rays differently Refrangible , feeing the
more Refrangible Rays may be taken out of it while the
lefs Refrangible remain. But this Light being trajeCted
only through the Parallel Superficies of the twTo Prifms, if
it fuffered any change by the RefraCtion of one Superficies
it loft that impreffion by the contrary RefraCfcion of the
other Superficies, and fo being reftored to its priftine con-
ftitution became of the fame nature and condition as at firft
before its Incidence on thofe Prifms 5 and therefore, before
its Incidence, was as much compounded of Rays differently
Refrangible as afterwards.
lllujlration. In the 22th Figure ABC and B C D are the
the two Prifms tied together in the form of a Parallele¬
piped, their Sides BC and CB being contiguous, and
their Sides A B and C D Parallel. And H J K is the third
Prifm,
UO
Priftn, by which the Suns Light propagated through the
hole F into the dark Chamber, and there paffing through
thofe fides of the Frifms AB, BC, CB and CD, is refra¬
cted at O to the white Paper PT, falling there partly upon
P by a greater Refraction, partly upon T by a lefs Refra¬
ction, and partly upon R and other intermediate places by
intermediate Refractions. By turning the Parallelopiped
ACBD about its Axis, according to the order of the Let¬
ters A,C,D,B, at length when the contiguous Planes BC
and CB become fufficiently oblique to the Rays F M,
which are incident upon them at M, there will vanifli to¬
tally out of the refracted Light OPT, firft of all the moft
refracted Rays O P, (the reft OR and O T remaining as
before) then the Rays O R and other intermediate ones,
and laftly, the leaft refracted Rays O T. For when the
Plane B C becomes fufficiently oblique to the Rays inci¬
dent upon it, thofe Rays will begin to be totally reflect¬
ed by it towards N 5 and firft the moft Refrangible Rays \\
will be totally reflected (as was explained in the preceding
experiment) and by confequence muft firft difappear at P,
and afterwards the reft as they are in order totally reflect¬
ed to N, they muft difappear in the fame order at R and
T. So then the Rays which at O fuffer the greateft Re¬
fraction, may be taken out of the Light M O whilft the reft
of the Rays remain in it, and therefore that Light MO is
Compounded of Rays differently Refrangible. And be-
caufe the Planes A B and C D are parallel, and therefore
by equal and contrary Refractions deftroy one anothers
Effects, the incident Light F M muft be of the fame kind
and nature with the emergent Light M O, and therefore
doth alfo confift of Rays differently Refrangible. Thefe
two Lights FM and MO,before the moft refrangible Rays
are feparated out of the emergent Light M O agree in Co-
F lour,
[ 42 ]
lour, and in all other properties fo far as my obfervation
reaches, and therefore are defervedly reputed of the fame
Nature and Conftitution, and by confequence the one is
compounded as well as the other. But after the molt: Re¬
frangible Rays begin to be totally reflected, and thereby
feparated out of the emergentLightMO,that Light changes
its Colour from white to a dilute and faint yellow, a pretty
good orange, a very full red fucceffively and then totally
vanifhes. For after the moil Refrangible Rays which paint
the Paper at P with a Purple Colour, are by a total re¬
flexion taken out of the Beam of light M O, the reft of
the Colours which appear on the Paper at R and T being
mixed in the light M O compound there a faint yellow,
and after the blue and part of the green which appear on
the Paper between P and R are taken away, the reft which
appear between R and T (that is the Yellow, Orange, Red
and a little Green) being mixed in the Beam M O com¬
pound there an Orange 5 and when all the Rays are by re¬
flexion taken out of the Beam MO, except the leaft Refran¬
gible, which at T appear of a full Red, their Colour is
the fame in that Beam M O as afterwards at T, the Re¬
fraction of the Prifm HJK ferving only to feparate the
differently Refrangible Rays, without making any alteration
in their Colours, as (hall be more fully proved hereafter.
All which confirms as well the firft Propofition as the fe-
cond.
Scholium. If this Experiment and the former be conjoyned
'fig. z2, and made one, by applying a fourth Prifm VXY to re¬
fract the reflected Beam MN towards tp, the conclufion
will be clearer. For then the light Np which in the 4th
Prifm is more refrafted, will become fuller and ftronger
when the Light O P, which in the third Prifm H J K is
more refracted, vanifhes at P 3 and afterwards when the lefs
refracted
refracted Light OT vaniflies at T, the lefs mfradedLight
N t will become encreafed whilft the more refraded Light
at p receives no further encreafe. And as the trajeded
Beam M O in vanifliing is always of fuch a Colour as
ought to refult from the mixture of the Colours which
fall upon the Paper P T. fo is the refleded Beam MN al¬
ways of fuch a Colour as ought to refult from the mix¬
ture of the Colours which fall upon the Paper pt. For
when the moil refrangible Rays are by a total Reflexion
taken out oi the Beam MO, and leave that Beam of an
Orange Colour, the excefs of thofe Rays in the refleded
Light, does not only make the Violet, Indigo and Blue at
p more full, but alfo makes the Beam M N change from
the yellowifli Colour of the Sun's Light, to a pale white in¬
clining to blue, and afterward recover its yellowifli Co¬
lour again, fo foon as all the reft of the tranfmitted light
MOT is refleded.
Now feeing that in all this variety of Experiments,
whether the trial be made inLight refleded,and that either
from natural Bodies, as in the firfl: and fecond Experiment,
or Specular, as in the Ninth 3 or in Light refraded, and
that either before the unequally refraded Rays are by di¬
verging feparated from one another, and lofing their white-
nefs which they have altogether, appear feverally of feve-
ral Colours, as in the fifth Experiment 3 or after they are
feparated from one another, and appear Coloured as in the
fixth,^ feventh, and eighth Experiments 3 or in Light tra-
jedea through Parallel fuperficies, deftroying each others
Effeds as in the 1 oth Experiment 3 there are always found
Rays, which at equal Incidences on the fame Medium fuf-
fer unequal Refradions, and that without any Iplitting or
dilating of fingle Rays, or contingence in the inequality
or the Refradions, as is proved in the fifth and fixth Ex-
F 2 periments 3
[44]
periments $ and feeing the Rays which differ in Refrangibi-
lity may be parted and forted from one another, and that
either by Refraction as in the third Experiment, or by Re¬
flexion as in the tenth, and then the feveral forts apart at
equal Incidences fuffer unequal Refractions, and thofe forts
are more refraCted than others after feparation, which were
more refraCted before it, as in the fixth and following Ex¬
periments, and if the Suns Light be trajeCted through three
or more crofs Prifms fucceffively, thofe Rays which in the
firft Prifm are refraCted more than others are in all the fol¬
lowing Prifms, refraCted more then others in the fame rate
and proportion, as appears by the fifth Experiment 3 it’s
manifeft that the Sun’s Light is an Heterogeneous mixture of
Rays, fome of which are conftantly more Refrangible then
others, as was to be propofed.

PROP. III. Theor. III.


'The Suns Light conflfts of flays differing in fleflexibility, and
thofe (flays are more fleflexible than others which are more
frangible.

T HIS is manifeft by the ninth and tenth Experi¬


ments : For in the ninth Experiment, by turning
the Prifm about its Axis, until the Rays within it which in
going out into the Air were refraCted by its Bafe, became
fo oblique to that Bafe, as to begin to be totally reflected
thereby 5 thofe Rays became firft of all totally reflected,
which before at equal Incidences with the reft had fuffered
the greateft RefraCtion. And the fame thing happens in
the Reflexion made by the commonBafe of the two Prifms
in the tenth Experiment.

<P fl^Of.
[ 45 1
PROP. IV. Prob. I.
To feparate from one another the Heterogeneous 'ays of
Compound Light.

np H E Heterogeneous Rays are in fome meafure fepa-


j| rated from one another by the Refra&ion of the
Prifm in the third Experiment, and in the fifth Experiment
by taking away the Penumbra from the Rectilinear fides of
the Coloured Image, that feparation in thofe very Rectili¬
near fides or ftraight edges of the Image becomes perfect.
But in all places between thofe rectilinear edges, thofe in¬
numerable Circles there defcribed, which are leverally illu¬
minated by Homogeneral Rays, by interfering with one
another, and being every where commixt, do render the
Light fufficiently Compound. But if thefe Circles, whilft
their Centers keep their diftances and pofitions, could be \
made lefs in Diameter, their interfering one with another
and by confequence the mixture of the Heterogeneous
Rays would be proportionally diminifhed. In the 23thFig. 23.
Figure let A^G, B H, C J, D K, EL, F M be the Circles
which fo many forts of Rays flowing from the fame Difque
of the Sun, do in the third Experiment illuminate 5 of all
which and innumerable other intermediate ones lying in a
continual Series between the two Rectilinear and Parallel
edg es of the Sun s oblong Image P T, that Image is com-
pofed as was explained in the fifth Experiment. And let
ag, hhy ci, dkj el, fm be fo many lefs Circles lying in
a like continual Series between two Parallel right Lines af
and g m with the fame diftances between their Centers,
and illuminated by the fame forts of Rays, that is the
Circle ag with the fame fort by which the correfponding
Circle
[4<n
Circle AG was illuminated, and the Circle bh with the fame
fort by which the correfponding Circle BHwas illuminated,
and the reft of the Circles c z, d 4, el, fm refpedtively,
with the fame forts of Rays by which the feveral corre¬
fponding Circles C J, D K, EL, FM were illuminated.
In the Figure P T compofed of the greater Circles, three
of thofe Circles AG, B H, CJ, are fo expanded into one
another, that the three forts of Rays by which thofe Cir¬
cles are illuminated, together with other innumerable forts
of intermediate Rays, are mixed at Q.R in the middle of
the Circle B H. And the like mixture happens through¬
out almoft the whole length of the Figure P T. But in
the Figure p t compofed of the lefs Circles, the three lefs
Circles ag, bb, c i, which anfwer to thofe three greater, do
not extend into one another 3 nor are there any where
mingled io much as any two of the three forts of Rays
by which thofe Circles are illuminated, and which in the
Figure P T are all of them intermingled at B H.
Now he that fhall thus confider it, will eafily underftand
that the mixture is diminifhed in the fame Proportion
with the Diameters of the Circles. If the Diameters of
the Circles whilft their Centers remain the fame, be made
three times lefs than before, the mixture will be alfo three
times lefs 5 if ten times lefs, the mixture will be ten times
lefs, and fo of other Proportions. That is, the mixture
of the Rays in the greater Figure P T will be to their mix¬
ture in the lefs p t, as the Latitude of the greater Figure is
to the Latitude of the lefs. For the Latitudes of thefe Fi¬
gures are equal to the Diameters of their Circles. And
hence it eafily follows, that the mixture of the Rays in the
refradted Spedtrum p t is to the mixture of the Rays in the
diredt and immediate Light of the Sun, as the breadth of
that Spedtrum is to .he difference between the length and
breadth of the fame Spedtrum. So
So then, if we would diminifli the mhtmt of the Rays',
we are to diminifli the Diameters of the Circles. Now
thefe would be diminiflied if the Sun's Diameter to which
they anfwer could be made lefs than it-is, or (which comes
to the fame purpofe) if without Doors, at a great diftance
from the Prifm towards the Sun, feme opake body were
placed, with a round hole in the middle of it, to intercept
all the Sun's Light, excepting fo much as coming from
the middle of his Body could pafs through that hole to
the Prifm. For fo the Circles AG, B H and the reft,
would not any longer anfwer to the whole Difque of the
Sun , but only to that part of it which could be feen
from the Prifm through that hole, that is to the apparent
magnitude of that hole viewed from the Prifm. But that
thefe Circles may anfwer more diftindly to that hole a
Lens is to be placed by the Prifm to caft the Image of the
hole, (that is, every one of the Circles A G, B H, <&c.) di¬
ftindly upon the Paper at P T, after fuch a manner as by
a Lens placed at a Window the Species of Objeds abroad
are caft diftindly upon a Paper within the Room, and the
Redilinear Sides of the oblong folar Image in the fifth
Experiment became diftind without any Penumbra. If
this be done it will not be neceffary to place that hole
very far off, no not beyond the Window. And therefore
inftead of that hole, I ufed the hole in the Window-fliut
as follows.
Exper. it. In the Sun's Light let into my darkned
Chamber through a fmall round hole in my Window-
fliut, at about i o or 12 Feet from the Window, I placed
a Lens, by which the Image of the hole might be di¬
ftindiy caft upon a fheet of white Paper, placed at the
diftance of fix, eight, ten or twelve Feet from the Lens,
For according to the difference of the Lenfes I ufed various
diftances,
[+8]
diftances, which I think not worth the while to defcribe.
Then immediately after the Lens I placed a Prifm, by
which the trajeded Light might be refraded either up¬
wards or tideways, and thereby the round Image which
the Lens alone did call upon the Paper might be drawn
out into a long one with Parallel Sides , as in the third
Experiment. This oblong Image I let fall upon another
Paper at about the fame diftance from the Prifm as be¬
fore, moving the Paper either towards the Prifm or from
it, until I found the juft diftance where the Rectilinear
Sides of the Image became mod diftind. For in this cafe
the circular Images of the hole which compofe that Image
after the fame manner that the Circles agJ bh, ci, Sec. do
x 3. the Figure p t, were terminated mod diftindly without any
Penumbra, and therefore extended into one another the
leaft that they could, and by confequence the mixture of
the Heterogeneous Rays was now the leaft of all. By this
2 3, means I ufed to form an oblong Image (fuch as is p t) of
24. circularlmages of the hole (fuch as are ag, bh, ci, See.)
and by ufing a greater or lefs hole in the Window-fhut, I
made the circular Images ag, b /;, c /, See. of which it was
formed, to become greater or lefs at pleafure, and thereby
the mixture of the Rays in the Image p t to be as much
or as little as I defired.
24. Illufiration. In the 24th Figure, F reprefents the circular
hole in the Window^Ihut, M N the Lens whereby the
Image or Species of that hole is caft diftindly upon a
Paper at J, ABC the Prifm whereby the Rays are at their
emerging out of the Lens refraded from J towards ano¬
ther Paper at p t, and the round Image at J is turned into
an oblong Image p t falling on that other Paper. This
Image p t confifts of Circles placed one after another in a
Redilinear order, as was fufficiently explained in the fifth
Experiment 3
[49]
Experiment • and thefe Circles are equal to the Circle X,
and confequently anfwer in Magnitude to the hole F 5 and
therefore by diminishing that hole they may be at pleafure
diminished, whifft their Centers remain in their places.
By this means I made the breadth of the Image p t to be
forty times, and fometimes fixty or Seventy times lefs than
its length. As for inftance, if the breadth of the hole f
be of an Inch, and MF the diftance of the Lens from
the hole be 1 2 Feet 5 and if p B or p M the diftance of
the Image pt from the Prifm or Lens be 10 Feet, and the
refra&ing Angle of the Prifm bt 62 degrees, the breadth
of the Image p t will be ~ of an Inch and the length about
fix Inches, and therefore the length to the breadth as 72
to 1, and by confequence the Light of this Image 71 times
lefs compound than the Sun’s dired: Light. And Light
thus far Simple and Homogeneal, is fumcient for trying
all the Experiments in this Book about fimple Light. For
the compofition of Heterogeneal Rays is in this Light fo
little that it is fcarce to be difcovered and perceived by
fenfe, except perhaps in the Indigo and Violet 5 for thefe
being dark Colours, do eafily fuffer a fenfible allay by that
little fcattering Light which ufes to be refrafted irregularly
by the inequaliteis of the Prifm.
Yet inftead of the circular hole F, tis better to fubfti-
tute an oblong hole Shaped like a long Parallelogram
with its length Parallel to the Prifm ABC. For if this
hole be an Inch or two long, and but a tenth or twentieth
part of an Inch broad or narrower : the Light of the Image
p t will be as Simple as before or Simpler, and the Image
will become much broader, and therefore more fit to have
Experiments tried in its Light than before.
Inftead of this Parallelogram-hole may be fubftitured a
Triangular one or equal Sides, whofe Bafe for inftance is
G about
!>j
about the tenth part of an Inch, and its height an Inch or
more. For by this means, if the Axis of the Prifm be
Parallel to the Perpendicular of the Triangle , the Image
5. pt will now be formed of Equicrural Triangles ag, bhy ci,
e 1^ f m, &cc. and innumerable other intermediate ones
anfwering to the Triangular hole in flhape and bignefs,and
lying one after another in a continual Series between two
Parallel Lines af anAgm. Thefe Triangles are a little
intermingled at their Bafes but not at their Vertices, and
therefore the Light on the brighter fide af of the Image
where the Bafes of the Triangles are is a little compounded,
but on the darker fide^ m is altogether uncompounded,
and in all places between the fides the Compofition is
Proportional to the diftances of the places from that ob-
fcurer fideg m. And having a Spedtrum pt of fuch a
Compofition, we may try Experiments either in its ftronger
and lefs fimple Light near the fide af or in its weaker
and Ampler Light near the other fide l m, as it fihall feem
moft convenient.
But in making Experiments of this kind the Chamber
ought to be made as dark as can be, leaft any forreign
Light mingle it felf with the Light of the Spectrum p
and render it compound 3 efpecially if we would try Ex¬
periments in the more fimple Light next the fide g m of
the Spedtrun^ which being fainter, will have a lefs Pro¬
portion to the forreign Light, and fo by the mixture of
that Light be more troubled and made more compound.
The Lens alfo ought to be good, fuch as may ferve for
Optical Ufes, and the Prifm ought to have a large Angle,
fuppofe of 70 degrees, and to be well wrought, being
made of Glafs free from Bubbles and Veins, with its fides
not a little Convex or Concave as ufually happens but
truly Plane,and its pollifh elaborate, as in working Optick-
c$o
glaffes, and not fuch as is ufually wrought with Putty,
whereby the edges of the Sand-holes being worn away,
there are left all over the Glafs a numberlefs company of
very little Convex polite rifings like Waves. The edges
alfo of the Prifrn and Lens fo far as they may make any
irregular Refradion, muft be covered with a black Paper
glewed on. And all the Light of the Suns beam let into
the Chamber which is ufelefs and unprofitable to the Ex¬
periment, ought to be intercepted with black Paper or other
black Obftacles. For otherwife the ufelefs Light being
refleded every way in the Chamber, will mix with the
oblong Spedrum and help to difturb it. In trying thefe
things fo much Diligence is not altogether neceffary, but
it will promote the fuccefs of the Experiments, and by a
very fcrupulous Examiner of things deferves to be applied*
Its difficult to get glafs Prifms fit for this purpofe, and
and therefore I ufed fometimes Prifmatick Venels made
with pieces of broken Looking-glades, and filled with rain
Water. And to increafe the Refradion, I fometimes im¬
pregnated the Water ftrongly with Saccharum SaturuL

PROP. V. Theor. IV.


Homogeneal Light is refralied regularly without any Dilatation
fplitting or /battering 0/ the [ays , and the confu/ed Vifion
of Objects feen through <%efratting Ladies by Heterogeneal
Light ari/es from the different Lgfrangibihty of federal forts
of (ffays.

T H E firft Part of this Propofition has been already


diffidently proved in the fifth Experiment, and will
further appear by the Experiments which follow.

G 2 Exper. t2.
Exper. i 2a In the middle of a black Paper I made a
round hole about a fifth or fixth part of an Inch in Dia¬
meter. Upon this Paper I caufed the Spectrum of Homo-
geneal Light defcribed in the former Propofition, fo to
fall, that forne part of the Light might pafs through the
hole of the Paper. This tranlmitted part of the Light I
refraded with a Prifm placed behind the Paper, and let¬
ting this refra£fed Light fall perpendicularly upon a white
Paper two or three Feet diftant from the Priftn, I found
that the Spedtrum formed on the Paper by this Light was
not oblong, as when 'tis made (in the third Experiment)
by Refrafting the Suns compound Light, but was (fo far
as I could judge by my Eye) perfectly circular, the length
being no greater than the breadth. Which fhews that this
Light is refradted regularly without any Dilatation of the
Rays.
Exper. 15. In the Homogeneal Light I placed a Circle
of ^ of an Inch in Diameter, and in the Sun’s unrefradted
Heterogeneal white Light I placed another Paper Circle of
the fame bignefs. And going from the Papers to the diftance
offomeFeet, I viewed both Circles through a Prifm. The
Circle illuminated by the Sun's Heterogeneal Light appear¬
ed very oblong as in the fourth Experiment, the length
being many times greater than the breadth : but the other
Circle illuminated with Homogeneal Light appeared Cir¬
cular and diftindtly defined as when 'tis viewed with the
naked Eye. Which proves the whole Propofition.
Exper. 14. In the Homogeneal Light I placed Flies and
fuch like Minute Objedls, and viewing them through a
Prifm, I faw their Parts as diftindtly defined as if I had
viewed them with the naked Eye. The fame Objects pla¬
ced in the Sun’s unrefradted Heterogeneal Light which was
white I viewed alfo through a Prifm, and faw them moil
confufedly
eonfufedly defined,fo that I could not diftinguifii their fmal-
ler Parts from one another. I placed alfo the Letters of a
fmall Print one while in the Homogeneal Light and then
in the Heterogeneal, and viewing them through a Prifm,
they appeared in the latter cafe fo confufed and indiftinCt
that I could not read them 3 but in the former they ap¬
peared fo diftinCt that I could read readily, and thought
I faw them as diftinCt as when I viewed them with my
naked Eye. In both cafes I viewed the fame Objects
through the fame Prifm at the fame diftance from me and
in the fame Situation. There was no difference but in the
Light by which the Objects were illuminated, and which
in one cafe was Simple and in the other Compound, and
therefore the diftinCt Vifion in the former cafe and confu¬
fed in the latter could arife from nothing elfe than from
that difference of the Lights. Which proves the whole
Propofition.
And in thefe three Experiments it is further very remar¬
kable, that the Colour of Homogeneal Light was never
changed by the Refraction.

PROP. VI. Theor. V.


The Sine of Incidence of every [ay confidered apart, is to its Sim’
of fRefraBwn in a given I^atio*

T HAT every Ray confidered apart is conftant to


it felf in fame certain degree of Refrangibility, is
fufficiently manifeft out of what has been faid. Thofe
Rays which in the firft RefraCtion are at equal Incidences
mo ft refraCted, are alfo in the following Refractions at
equal Incidences mod refraCted 3 and fo of the leaft Re¬
frangible , and the reft which have any mean degree of
Refran-
Refrangibility, as is tnanifeft by the 5 th, 6th, 7th, 8th,
and 9th Experiments. And thofe which the firft time at
like Incidences are equally refracted, are again at like In¬
cidences equally and uniformly refra&ed, and that whe¬
ther they be refraCted before they be feparated from one
another as in the 5 th Experiment, or whether they be re¬
fracted apart, as in the 1 2 th, 13 th and 14th Experiments.
The RefraCtion therefore of every Ray apart is regular,
and what Rule that RefraCtion obferves we are now
to fliew.
The late Writers in Opticks teach, that the Sines of In¬
cidence are in a given Proportion to the Sines of Refra¬
ction, as was explained in the 5 th Axiom 3 and fome by
Inftruments fitted for meafuring Refractions, or otherwise
experimentally examining this Proportion, do acquaint us
that they have found it accurate. But whilft they, not
underftanding the different Refrangibility of feveral Rays,
conceived them all to be refraCted according to one and
the fame Proportion, 5tis to be prefumed that they adapted
their Meafures only to the middle of the refraCted Light 3
fo that from their Meafures we may conclude only that
the Rays which have a mean degree of Refrangibility ,
that is thofe which when feparated from the reft appear
green, are refraCted according to a given Proportion of
their Sines. And therefore we are now to fliew that the
like given Proportions obtain in all the reft. That it
fhould be fo is very reafonable, Nature being ever confor¬
mable to her felf: but an experimental Proof is defired.
And fuch a Proof will be had if we can fliew that the
Sines of RefraCtion of Rays differently Refrangible are
one to another in a given Proportion when their Sines of
Incidence are equal. For if the Sines of RefraCtion of all
the Rays are in given Proportions to the Sine of RefraCtion
LS5]
of a Ray which has a mean degree of Reffangibilky, and
this Sine is in a given Proportion to the equal Sines of
Incidence, thofe other Sines of Refraction will alfo be in
given Proportions to the equal Sines of Incidence. Now
when the Sines of Incidence are equal, it will appear by
the following Experiment that the Sines of Refradion are
in a given Proportion to one another.
Exper. 15. The Sun Alining into a dark Chamber
through a little round hole in the Window-fhut, let S re-Tg*.
prefent his round white Image painted on the oppofite
Wall by his dired Light, P T his oblong coloured Image
made by refrading that Light with a Prifm placed at the
Window 3 and pt, or ip it, or 3/? 3 ty his oblong coloured
Image made by refrading again the fame Light tideways
with a fecond Prifm placed immediately after the firft in
a crofs Pofition to it, as was explained in the fifth Experi¬
ment : that is to fay, pt when the Refradion of the fecond
Prifm is fmall, 2p 21 when its Refradion is greater, and
3 pit when it is greateft. For fuch will be the diverfity
of the Kefradions if the refrading Angle of the fecond
Prifm be of various Magnitudes 3 fuppofe of fifteen or
twenty degrees to make the Image p t, of thirty or
forty to make the Image ip zt, and of fixty to make,
the Image 3 p 31. But for want of folid Glafs Prifms with
Angles of convenient bigneffes, there may be Veffels
made of poliflied Plates of Glafs cemented together in the
form of Prifms and filled with Water. Thefe things being
thus ordered, I observed that; all the folar images or co¬
loured Spedrums PT, pt, 2p 2t, %p did very nearly
converge to the place S on which the dired Light of the
Sun fell and painted his white round Image when the
Prifms were .taken away. The Axis of the Spedrum PT,
that is the Line, drawn through the middle of it Parallel to
C5«]
its Redilinear Sides, did when produced pafs exactly through
the middle of that white round Image S. And when the
Refraction of the fecond Prifm was equal to the Refraction
of the firll, the refracting Angles of them both being about
do degrees, the Axis of the Spectrum ip 3 £ made by that
Refraction, did when produced p^fs alfo through the mid¬
dle of the fame white round Image S. But when the Re¬
fraction of the fecond Prifm was lefs than that of the firft,
the produced Axes of the SpeCtrums tp or it zp made
by that RefraCtion did cut the produced Axis of the Spe¬
ctrum TP in the Points m and ft, a little beyond the Cen¬
ter of that white round Image S. Whence the Proportion
of the Line ^Tto the Line 3^ P was a little greater than
the Proportion of z t T to 2 pP} and this Proportion a little
greater than that of fT topP. Now when the Light of
the SpeCtrum P T falls perpendicularly upon the Wall, thofe
Lines 31T, 3 p P, and 21T, ip P and t T, pP,are the Tan-
gents of the Refractions 3 and therefore by this Experiment
the Proportions of the Tangents of the Refractions are ob¬
tained, from whence the Proportions of the Sines being deriv¬
ed, they come out equal, fo far as by viewing the SpeCtrums
and ufing fome Mathematical reafoning I could Eftimate.
Eor I did not make an Accurate Computation. So then
the Propofition holds true in every Ray apart, fo far as ap¬
pears by Experiment. And that it is accurately true may
be demonftrated upon this Suppofition, That Bodies refrah
Light hy acting upon its (fays in Lines Perpendicular to their
Surfaces. But in order to this Demonftration, I mull di-
ftinguilh the Motion of every Ray into two Motions, the
one Perpendicular to the refracting Surface, the other Pa¬
rallel to it, and concerning the Perpendicular Motion lay
down the following Propofition.

If
If any Motion or moving thing whatfoever be incident
with any velocity on any broad and thin Space termina¬
ted on both fides by two Parallel Planes, and in its paflage
through that fpace be urged perpendicularly towards the
further Plane by any force which at given diftances from
the Plane is of given quantities 5 the perpendicular Velo¬
city of that Motion or Thing, at its emerging out of that
fpace, fhall be always equal to the Square Root of the
Summ of the Square of the perpendicular Velocity of
that Motion or Thing at its Incidence on that fpace $
and of the Square of the perpendicular Velocity which
that Motion or Thing would have at its Emergence, if
at its Incidence its perpendicular Velocity was infinitely
little.
And the fame Propofition holds true of any*Motion or
Thing perpendicularly retarded in its paflage through that
(pace, if inftead of the Summ of the two Squares you take
their difference. The Demonftration Mathematicians will
eafily find out, and therefore I fhall not trouble the Rea¬
der with it,
Suppofe now that a Ray coming moll obliquely in the Fig.
Line MC be refra&ed at C by the Plane RS into the Line
CN, and if it be required to find the Line CE into which
any other Ray AC fhall be refracted 3 let MC, AD, be
the Sines of incidence of the two Rays, and NG, EF, their
Sines of Refraction, and let the equal Motions of the In¬
cident Rays be reprefented by the equal Lines M C and
AC, and the Motion MC being confidered as parallel to
the refracting Plane, let the other Motion AC be diftin-
guifihed into two Motions. AD; and DC, one of winch
AD is parallel, and she other DC perpendicular to the re¬
fracting Surface, hi like manner, let the Motions of the
emering Rays be diftlngniflfd into two, whereof the per-
H pendicular
perpendicular ones are ^ CG and ^ CF. And if the
force of the refracting Plane begins to aCt upon the Rays
either in that Plane or at a certain diftance from it on the
one fide, and ends at a certain diftance from it on the
other fide, and in all places between thofe two Limits aCts
upon the Rays in Lines perpendicular to that rafrafting
Plane, and the Actions upon the Rays at equal diftances
from the refracting Plane be equal, and at unequal ones ei¬
ther equal or unequal according to any rate whatever •
that motion of the Ray which is Parallel to the refracting
Plane will fuffer no alteration by that force 5 and that mo¬
tion which is perpendicular to it will be altered according
to the rule of the foregoing Propofition. If therefore for
the perpendicular Velocity of the emerging Ray CN you
write ^ CG as above, then the perpendicular Velocity

of any other emerging Ray CE which was ^ CF, will be

equal to the fquare Root of CDq + CGq. And


by fquaring thefe equals, and adding to them the Equals
ADq and MCq—CDand dividing the Summs by the
Equals CF$ + EFq and CG^-|-NGf, you will have
equal to Whence AD, the Sine of Incidence,
is to EF the Sine of RefraCtion, as MC to NG, that is,
in a given ratio. And this Demonfiration being general,
without determining what Light is, or by what kind of
force it is refraCted, or affuming any thing further than
that the refracting Body aCts upon the Rays in Lines per¬
pendicular to its Surface 3 I take it to be a very convincing
Argument of the full Truth of this Propofition*
So then* if the ratio of the Sines of Incidence and Re-
fra&ion of any fort of Rays be found in any one Cafe, us
given in all Cafes 3 and this may be readily found by the
Method in the following Propofition.

PROP. VII Theor. VI


‘The (Perfe&ion ofTelefcopes is impeded by the different %efran~
gibility of the Ofays of Light,

rpH E imperfection of Telefcopes is vulgarly attri-


I buted to the fpherical Figures of the Glaffes, and
therefore Mathematicians have propounded to Figure them
by the Conical Sections. To Chew that they are mifta-
ken, I have inferred this Propofition^ the truth of which
will appear by the meafures of the Refractions of the feve-
ral forts of Rays 5 and thefe meafures I thus determine*
In the third experiment of the firft Book, where the re¬
fracting Angle of the Prifrn was 6z] degrees, the half of
that Angle 31 deg. 1 5 min. is the Angle of Incidence of
the Rays at their going out of the Glafs into the Air 3 and
the Sine of this Angle is 5188, the Radius being ioooo.
When the Axis of this Prifrn was parallel to the Horizon,
and the Refraction of the Rays at their Incidence on this
Prifrn equal to that at their Emergence out of it, I obferved
with a Qiiadrant the Angle which the mean refrangible Rays
(that is, thofe which went to the middle ofthe Sun's colour¬
ed Image ) made with the Horizon and by this Angle and
th^ Sun s altitude oblerved at the fame time, I found the
Angle which the emergent Rays contained with the incident
to be 44 deg. and 40 min. and the half of this Aiwle ^d-
ded to the Angle of Incidence 3 1 deg. 15 min. males the
H t Antrim
[So]'
Angle of RefraCtion,which is therefore 5 3 degi 3 j min. and
its Sine 8047. Thefe are the Sines of Incidence and Re¬
fraCtion of the mean refrangible Rays, and their proportion
in round numbers is 20 to 31. This Glafs was of a colouring
dining to green. The laft of the Prifms mentioned in the
third Experiment was of clear white Glafs. Its reloading
Angle 63 i degrees. The Angle which the emergent Rays
contained, with the incident 45 deg. 50 min. The Sine of
half the firft Angle 5 2dr. The Sine of half the Summ
of the Angles 815 7. And their proportion in round num¬
bers 20 to 31 as before.
From the Length of the Image, which was about 9-! or
1 o Inches, fubduCt its Breadth, which was 2 ~ Inches, and
the Remainder 7* Inches would be the length of the Image
were the Sun but a point, and therefore fubtends the An¬
gle which the moft and lead: refrangible Rays, when inci¬
dent on the Prifm in the fame Lines, do contain with one
another after their Emergence. Whence this Angle is
2 deg. 0/ 7." For the diftance between the Image and the
Prifm where this Angle is made, was 18| Feet, and at that
diftance the Chord /j Inches fubtends an Angle of 2 deg.
0/ 7." Now half this Angle is the Angle which thefe e-
mergent Rays contain with the emergent mean refrangible
Rays, and a quarter thereof, that is 30. 2," may be ac¬
counted the Angle which they would contain which the
fame emergent mean refrangible Rays, were they co-inci¬
dent to them within the Glafs and differed no other Re-
fraCtiomthen that at their Emergence. For if two equal
Refractions, the one at the incidence of the Rays on the
Prifm, the other at their Emergence, make half the Angle
2 deg. of 7." then one of thofe Refractions will make
about a quarter of that Angle, and this quarter added to
and '
[S']
and fubduded from the Angle of Refradion of the mean,
refrangible Rays, which was 53 deg* 35", gives the An¬
gles of Refradion of the moft and leaft refrangible Rays
54 deg. 5* z", and 53 deg. 4 5 8 ^ whofe Sines are 8099
and 7995, the common Angle of Incidence being 3 1 deg.
1 5' and its Sine 51885 and thefe Sines in the leaft round
numbers are in proportion to one another as 78 and 77
to 50.
Now if you fubdud the common Sine of Incidence 501
from the Sines of Refradion 77 and 78, the remainders
27 and 28 fhew that in fmall Refradions the Refradion >
of the leaft refrangible Rays is to the Refradion of the moft
refrangible ones as 27 to 28 very nearly, and that the dif¬
ference of the Refractions of the leaft refrangible and moft .
refrangible Rays is about the 27{th part of the whole Re-*
fraction of the mean refrangible Rays.
Whence they that are skilled in Opcicks will eafily un-
derftand, that the breadth of the leaft circular fpace into
which Object' Glades of Telefcopes can collect all forts of
Parallel Rays, is about the 27-th part of half the aperture
of the Glafs, or 5 5 th part of the whole aperture 5 and
that the Focus of the moft refrangible Rays is nearer to the
Object-Glafs than the Focus of the leaft refrangible ones, by
about the 27jth part of the diftance between the Object-
Glafs and the Focus of the mean refrangible ones.
And if Rays of all forts,flowing from any one lucid point
in the Axis of any convex Lens, be made by the Refraction ^
of the Lens to converge to points not too remote from the
Lens, the Focus of the moft refrangible Rays flhall be
nearer to the Lens than the Focus of the leaft refrangible
ones, by a diftance which is to the 27^th part of the di¬
ftance of the Focus of the mean refrangible Rays from the
Lens as the diftance between that Focus and the lucid
point....
point from whence the Rays flow is to die diftance be¬
tween that lucid point and the Lens very nearly.
Now to examine whether the difference between the Re-
fractions which the moft refrangible and the leaft refran¬
gible Rays flowing from the fame point fuffer in the Ob-
jed-Glalies of Telefcopes and fuch like Glafles, be fo great
■<; 1

, as is here defcribed, I contrived the following Experi-


: ment.
Exper. 16. The Lens which I ufed in the fecond and
eighth Experiments, being placed fix Feet and an Inch dif-
tant from any Objed, colleded the Species of that Object
by the mean refrangible Rays at the diftance of fix Feet
and an Inch from the Lens on the other fide. And there¬
fore by the foregoing Rule it ought to colled the Species of
that Objed by the leaft refrangible Rays at the diftance of
Fix Feet and 31 Inches from the Lens, and by the moft re¬
frangible ones at the diftance of five Feet and lof Inches
from it: So that between the tw o Places where thefe leaft
and moft refrangible Rays colled the Species, there may
be the diftance of about 5* Inches. For by that Rule, as
tfix Feet and an Inch ( the diftance of the Lens from the
lucid Object) is to twelve Feet and two Inches (the di¬
ftance of the lucid Object from the Focus of the mean re¬
frangible Rays) that is, as one is to two, fo is the 17 [th
part of fix Feet and an Inch (the diftance between the Lens
.and the fameFocus ) to the diftance between the Focus of
the moft refrangible Rays and the Focus of the leaft re¬
frangible ones, which is therefore 5- inches, that is very
nearly 5 ~ Inches. Now to know whether this meafure
was true, I repeated the fecond and eighth Experiment of
this Book with coloured Light, which was lefs compound¬
ed than that I there made me of: For I now feparated the
hetero-
fi eterogencous Rays from one another by the Method I de~
fc ribed in the i itn Experiment, fo as to make a coloured
Spedrum about twelve or fifteen times longer than broach
This Spedrum I call on a printed book, and placing the
above-mentioned Lens at the diftance of fix Feet and an
Inch from this Spedrum to colled the Species of the illu¬
minated Letters at the fame diftance on the other fide, I
found that the Species of the Letters illuminated with Blue
were nearer to the Lens than thofe illuminated with deep
Red by about three Inches or three and a quarter: but the
Species of the Letters illuminated with Indigo and Violet
appeared fo confufed and indiftind, that I could not read
them : Whereupon viewing the Prifm, I found it was full
of Veins running from one end of the Glafs to the other 5
fo that the Refradion could not be regular. I took ano¬
ther Prifm therefore which was free from Veins, and in-
ftead of the Letters I ufed two or three Parallel black Lines
a little broader than the ftroakes of the Letters, and call¬
ing the Colours upon thefe Lines in fuch manner that the
Lines ran along die Colours from one end of the Spedum
to the other, I found that the Focus where the Indigo, or
confine of this colour and Violet call the Species of the
black Lines mort diftindly,tobe about 4 Inches or 4* near¬
er to the Lens than the Focus where the deepeft Red caft
the Species of the fame black Lines moft diftindfy.
The violet was fo faint and dark, that I could not
difeern the Species of the Lines diPdnctly by that Co¬
lour 5 and therefore confidering that the Prifm was made
©f a dark coloured Glafs inclining to Green, I took another
Pifm of clear white Glafs 3 but the Spedrum of Colours
which this Prifm made had long white Streams of faint
Light Shooting out from both ends of the Colours, which
made me conclude that fomediing was axmifs 3 and view-
t«4]
ing the Prifm, 1 found two or three little Bubbles in the
Glafs which refracted the Light irregularly. Wherefore I
covered that part of the Glafs5with black Paper, and let¬
ting the Light pais through another part of it which was
free from fiich Bubles, the Spectrum of Colours became
free from thofe irregular Streams of Light, and was now
fuch as I defired. But Mill I found the Violet fo dark and
faint, that I could fcarcefee the Species of the Lines by the
Violet, and not at all by the deepeft part of it, which was
next the end of the Spedlrum. I fulpedted therefore that
this faint and dark Colour might be allayed by that Mat¬
tering Light which was refracted, and refledted irregularly
partly by fome very final! Bubbles in the Glaffes and
partly by the inequalities of their Poliffr. which Light,
tho5 it was but little, yet it being of a White Colour,
might fuffice to affedt the Senfe fo ftrongly as to difturb
the Phenomena of that weak and dark Colour the Violet,
and therefore I tried, as in the 12th, 13 th, 14th Experi¬
ments, whether the Light of this Colour did not confift of
a fenfible mixture of heterogeneous Rays, but found it did
not. Nor did the Refradtions caufe any other fenfible
Colour than Violet to emerge out of this Light, as they
would have done out of White Light, and by con-
fequence out of this Violet Light had it been fenfi-
bly compounded with White Light. And therefore I con¬
cluded, that the reafon why I could not fee the Species of
the Lines diftindtly by this Colour, was only the darknefs
of this Colour and Thinnefs of its Light, and its dif-
tance from the Axis of the Lens 3 I divided therefore thofe
Parallel Black Lines into equal Parts, by which I might
readily know the diltances of the Colours in the Spedfrum
from one another, and noted the diftances of the Lens
from the Foci of fuch Colours as caft the Species of the
Lines
Lilies diflin&ly, and then confidered whether the diffe¬
rence of thofe diflances bear fuch proportion to 5 ^Inches,
the greatefl difference of the diflances which the Foci of
the deepefl Red and Violet ought to have from the Lens,
as the diflance of the obferved Colours from one another
in the Spedlrum bear to the like diflance of the deepefl Red
and Violet meafured in the rectilinear fides of the Spect¬
rum, that is, to the length of thofe fides or excefs of the
length of the Spectrum above its breadth. And my Ob-
fervations were as follows.
When I obferved and compared the deepefl fenfibleRed,
and the Colour in the confine of Green and Blue, which
at that rectilinear fides of the Spectrum was diflant from it
half the length of thofe fides, the Focus where the confine
of Green and Blue call the Species of the Lines diflinCtly
on the Paper, was nearer to the Lens then the Focus where
the Red cafl thofe Lines diCtinCtly on it by about or
2 - Inches. For fometimes the Meafures were a little grea¬
ter, fometimes a little lefs, but feldom varied from one
another above ~ of an Inch. For it was very difficult to
define the Places of the Foci, without fome little Errors.
Now if the Colours diflant half the length of the Image,
{ meafured at its rectilinear fides) give z~ or 2 ~ difference
of the diflances of their Foci from the Lens, then the Co¬
lours diflant the whole length ought to give j or 5^ Inches
difference of thofe diflances.
But here its to be noted, that I could not fee the Red
to the full End of the SpeCtrum, but only to the Center
of the Semicircle which bounded that End, or a little far¬
ther 5 and therefore I compared this Red not with that Co¬
lour which was exadly in the middle of the Spectrum, or
confine of Green and Blue, but with that which verged a
little more to the Blue than to the Green : And as I reck-
I oned
[66]
dttt& tile whole length of the Colours not to be the whole-
length of the SpeCtrum, hot the length of its rectilinear
fides, fo completing the Semicirlar Ends into Circles, when
either of the obferved Colours fell within thofe Circles, I
meafured the diftance of that Colour from the End of the
SpeCtrum, and fubduCling half the diftance from the mea¬
fured diftance of the Colours, I took the remainder for
their corrected diftance 3 and in thefe Obfervations fet
down this corrected diftance for the difference of their di-
fiances from the Lens. For as the length of the rectilinear
fides of the SpeCtrum would be the whole length of all the
Colours, were the Circles of which ( as we (hewed) that
SpeCtrum confifts contracted and reduced to Fhyfical
Points, fo in that Cafe this corrected diftance would be the
real diftance of the obferved Colours.
When therefore I further obferved the deepeft fenfible Red,
and that Blue whofe corrected diftance from it w^as ^ parts
of the length of the rectilinear fides of the SpeCtrum, the
difference of the diftances of their Foci from the Lens was
about 3 ^ Inches, and as 7-to 12 fo is 3^ to 5 j.
When I obferved the deepeft fenfible Red, and that Indi¬
go whofe corrected diftance w^as ^ or ~ of the length of the
rectilinear fides of the SpeCtrum, the difference of the di¬
ftances of their Foci from the Lens, was about 3 ^Inches,,
and as 2 to 3 fo is 3 *-to 5b
When I obferved the deepeft fenfible Red, and that deep-
Indigo whofe corrected diftance from one another was ^ or
1 of the length of the rectilinear fides of the SpeCtum, the
difference of the diftances of their Foci from the Lens was
about 4 Inches 5 and as 3 to 4 fo is 4 to 5 |.
When I obferved the deepeft fenfible Red, and that part
of the Violet next the Indigo whofe corrected diftance from
Red was or £ of the length of the rectilinear fides of
the.
r.«7]
the Spe&rum, the difference of the diftances of their Foci
from the Lens was about 4^ Inches 5 and as 5 to 6, fo is
4^ to 57. For fometimes when the Lens was advantage*
oufly placed, fo that its Axis relpe&ed the Blue, and all
things elfe were well ordered, and the Sun flione clear, and
I held my Eye very near to the Paper on which the Lens
call the Species of the Lines, I could fee pretty diftinctly
the Species of thofe Lines by that part of the Violet which
was next the Indigo 3 and fometimes I could fee them by
above half the Violet. For in making thefe Experiments
I had obferved, that the Species of thofe Colours only ap¬
peared diftinct which were in or near the Axis of the Lens:
So that if the Blue or Indigo were in the Axis, I could fee
their Species diftinctly 3 and then the Red appeared much
lefs diftinct than before. Wherefore I contrived to make
the Spectrum of Colours fhorter than before, fo that both
its Ends might be nearer to the Axis of the Lens. And
now its length was about z[ Inches and breadth about l-or
\ of an Inch. Alfo inftead of the black Lines on which the
Spectrum was caft, I made one black Line broader than
thofe, that I might fee its Species more eafily 3 and this
Line I divided by Abort crofs Lines into equal Parts, for
meafuringthe diftancesof the obferved Colours. And now
I could fometimes fee the Species of this Line with its divi-
fions almoft as tar as the Centers of the Semicircular Violet
End of the Spectrum, and made thefe further Observations.
When I obferved the deepeft fallible Red, and that part
of the Violet whofe corrected diftance from it was about
| Parts of the rectilinear fidesof the Speftrum the difference
of the diftances of the Foci of thofe Colours from the Lens,
was one time 4^, another time 4J, another time 4I, Inches,
and as 8 to 9, fo are 4*, 4*, 4$, to 5 * 5^5^ refpedively.
I 2 When
[68]
When I obferved the deepeft fenfible Red, and deepeft
fenfible Violet, (the Corrected diftance of which Colours
when all things were ordered to the beft advantage, and the
Sun fihone very clear, was about £ or ^ parts of the length
of the rectilinear fides of the coloured Spectrum, ) I found
the difference of the diftances of their Foci from the Lens
fbmetimes 4^ fometimes 5^ and for the mod part 5 Inches
or thereabouts : and as 11 to 1 2 or 15 to 26, fo is five
Inches to 5 or 5 l Inches.
And by this progreffion of Experiments I fatisfied my
felf, that had the light at the very Ends of the Spectrum been
ftrong enough to make the Species of the black Lines ap¬
pear plainly on the Paper, the Focus of the deepeft Vio¬
let would have been found nearer to the Lens, than the Fo¬
cus of the deepeft Red, by about 5 *- Inches at leaft. And
this is a further Evidence, that the Sines of Incidence and
RefraCtion of the feveral forts of Rays, hold the fame pro¬
portion to one another in the fmalleft Refractions whicE
they do in the greateft.
My progrefs in making this nice and troublefome Expe¬
riment I have fet down more at large, that they that fhali
try it after me may be aware of the CircumfpeCtion re-
quifite to make it fucceed well. And if they cannot make
it fucceed fo well as I did, they may notwithftanding coi¬
led by the Proportion of the diftance of the Colours in the
SpeCtrum, to the difference of the diftances of their Foci
from the Lens, what would be the fuccefs in the more di-
ftant Colours by a better Trial. And yet if they ufe a
broader Lens than I did, and fix it to a long {freight Staff
by means of which it may be readily and truly directed to
the Colour whofe Focus is defired, I queftion not but the
Experiment will fucceed better with them than it did with
me,. For I directed the Axis as nearly as I could to the
middle
[<?9J
middle of the Colours, and then the faint Ends of the
Spedmm being remote from the Axis, caft their Species lefs
diftindly on the Paper than they would have done had the
Axis been fucceffively direded to them.
Now by what has been faid its certain, that the Rays
which differ in refrangibility do not converge to the fame
Focus, but if they flow from a lucid point, as far from
the Lens on one fide as their Foci are one the other, the
Focus of the moft refrangible Rays fliall be nearer to the
Lens than that of the leaft refrangible, by above the four¬
teenth part of the whole diftance: and if they flo w from a lu¬
cid point, fo very remote from the Lens that before their
Incidence they may be accounted Parallel, the Focus of the
moft refrangible Rays fliall be nearer to the Lens than the
Focus of the leaft refrangible, by about the 27th or 28th part
of their whole diftance from it. And the Diameter of the
Circle in the "middle fpace between thofe two Foci which
they illuminate when they fall there on any Plane, perpen¬
dicular to the Axis (which Circle is the leaft into which
they can all be gathered) is about the 55th part of the Dia¬
meter of the aperture of the Glafs. So that tis a wonder
that Telefcopes reprefent Objeds fo diftind as they do. But
were all the Rays of Light equally refrangible, the Error
arifing only from the fphericalnefs of the Figures of Glades
would be many hundred times Ids. For if the Objed-
Glafs of a Telefcope be Plano-convex, and the Plane fide
be turned towards the Objed, and the Diameter of the
Sphere whereof this Glafs is a fegment,be called D, and the
Semidiameter of the aperture of the Glafs be called S, and
the Sine of Incidence out of Glafs into Air, be to the Sine of
Refradion as I to R: the Rays which come Parallel to the
Axis of the Glafs, fliall in the Place where the linage of the
Objed is moft diftindly made, be fcatcered all over a little
Circle-
[7°]
Circle whofe Diameter is j * very nearly, as I ga~
ther by computing the Errors of the Rays by the method
of infinite Series, and rejecting the Terms whofe quanti-
tities are inconfiderable. As for inftance, if the Sine of In¬
cidence I, be to the Sine of Refraftion R, as 20 to 51, and
if D the Diameter of the Sphere to which the Convex fide
of the Glafs is ground, be 100 Feet or 1200 Inches, and
S the Semidiameter of the aperture be two Inches, the
Diameter of the little Circle ( that is ) will be
31 x 8 2X
20 X 1200 X 1200 ( or ^— ) parts of an Inch. But the
Diameter of the little Circle through which thefe Rays are
fcattered by unequal refrangibility, will be about the 55 th
part of the aperture of the Objeft-Glafs which here is four
Inches. And therefore the Error arifing from the fpherical
figure of the Glafs, is to the Error arifing from the diffe¬
rent Refrangibility of the Rays, as TS^) to ± that is as 1
to 8151 : and therefore being in Comparifon fo very little,
deferves not to be confidered.
But you will fay, if the Errors caufed by the different re¬
frangibility be fo very great, how comes it to pals that Ob-
|efts appear through Telefcopes fo diftinft as they do ? I an-
fwTer, ?tis becaufe the erring Rays are not fcattered uniform¬
ly over all that circular fpace, but collected infinitely more
denfely in the Center than in any other part of the Circle,
and in the way from the Center to the Circumference grow
continually rarer and rarer, fo as at the Circumference to
become infinitely rare5 and by reafon of their rarity are
not ftrong enough to bevifible, unleis in the Center and ve¬
ry near it. Let ADE reprefent one of thofe Circles de-
fcribed with the Center C and Semidiameter AC, and let
BFG be a fmaller Circle concentric to the former, cutting
• with
[ 71 ]
with its Circumference the Diameter AC in B, and befect
AC in N, and by my reckoning the denfity of the Light
in any place B will be to its denfity in N, as AB to BC$
and the whole Light within the leffer Circle BFG, will be
to the whole Light within the greater AED, as the Excefs of
the Square of AC above the Square of AB, is to the Square
of AC. As if BC be the fifth part of AC, the Light will be..
four times denfer in B than in N, and the whole Light with-
in the lefs Circle,will be to the whole Light within the grea¬
ter, as nine to twenty five. Whence its evident that the
Light within the lefs Circle, muftftrike the fenfe much more
ftrongly, than that faint and dilated light round about be¬
tween-it and the Circumference of the greater.
But its further to be noted, that the mod luminous of
the prifmatick Colours are the Yellow and Orange. Thefe
affedt the Senfes more ftrongly than all the reft together, and v
next to thefe in fifength are the Red and Green. The Blue
compared with thefe is a faint and dark Colour, and the In¬
digo and Violet are much darker and fainter, fo that thefe
compared with the ftronger Colours are little to be regard¬
ed. The Images of Objects are therefore to be placed, not
in the Focus of the mean refrangible Rays which are in the:
confine of Green and Blue, but in the Focus of thofe Rays
which are in the middle of the Orange and Yellow 5 there
where the Colour is mod luminous and fulgent, that is in
the brighteft Yellow, that Yellow which inclines., more to **
Orange than to Green. And by the Refradtion of thefe
Rays ( whofe Sines of Incidence and Refraction in Glafs
are as 17 and 11 ) the Refradtion of Glafs and Cryftal for ::
optical ufes is to be meafured., Let us therefore place, the :
Image of the Objedt in the Focus of thefe Rays, and all the
Yellow and Orange will fall within a Circle, whofe Dia- -
meter is. about. the z 5 oth part of the Diameter of the aper¬
ture
[y2]
ture of the Glafs. And if you add the brighter half of the
Red, (that half which is next the Orange, and the brighter
half of the Green, (that half which is next the Yellow,} a-
bout three fifth parts of the Light of thefe two Colours will
fall within the fame Circle,and two fifth parts will fall with¬
out it round about 5 and that which falls without will be
Ipread through almofl: as much more Ipace as that which
falls within, and fo in the grofs be almofl: three times ra¬
rer. Of the other half of the Red and Green, (that is of
the deep dark Red and Willow Green ) about one quarter
will fall within this Circle, and three quarters without, and
that which falls without will be fpread through about four
or five times more fpace than that which fall within 3 and fo
in the grofs be rarer, and if compared with the whole Light
within it, willbe about 25 times rarer than all that taken in
the grofs 5 or rather more than 3 o or 40 times rarer, be-
caufe the deep red in the end of the Spedrum of Colours
made by a Prifm is very thin and rare,and the Willow Green
is fomething rarer than the Orange and Yellow. The Light
of thefe Colours therefore bring fo very much rarer than that
within the Circle, will fcarce affed the Senfe efpecially fince
the deep Red and Willow Green of this Light, are much
darker Colours then the reft. And for the fame reafon the
Blue and Violet being much darker Colours than thefe, and
much more tariffed, may be neglected. For the denfe and
bright Light of the Circle, will obfcure the rare and weak
Light of thefe dark Colours round about it, and render them
almofl: infenfible. The fenfible Image of a lucid point is
therefore fcarce broader than a Circle whofe Diameter is
the 250th part of the diameter of the aperture of the Object
Glafs of a good Telefcope, or not much broader, if you
except a faint and dark mifty light round about it, which
aSpedator will fcarce regard. And therefore in a Telefcope
whofe
#

173 :i
whofe aperture is four Inches, and length an hundred Feet,
it exceeds not i" 45', or 3”. And in a Telefcope whofe
aperture is two Inches, and length 20 or 30 Feet, it may
be 5 " or 6" and fcarce above. And this Anfwers well to
Experience : For fome Aftronomers have found the Dia-
meters of the fixt Stars, in Telefcopes of between twenty
and fixty Feet in length, to "be about 4” or 5" or at mol
6 in Diameter. But if the Eye-Glafs be tingled faintly
with the fmoke of a Lamp or Torch, to obfcure the Light
of the Star, the fainter Light in the circumference of the
Star ceafes to be vifible, and the Star (if the Glafs be fuffici-
ently foiled with fmoke) appears fomething more like a Ma¬
thematical Point. And for the fame reafon, the enormous
part of the Light in the Circumference of every lucid Point
ought to be lefs difcernable in flhorter Telefcopes than in
longer, becaufe the fihorter tranfmit lefs Light to the Eye.
Now if we fuppofe the fenfible Image of a lucid point,
to be even 250 times narrower than the aperture of the
Glafs: yet were it not for the different refrangibility of the
Rays, its breadth in an 100 Foot Telefcope whofe aperture
is 4 Inches would be but parts of an Inch, as is ma-
nifeft by the foregoing Computation. And therefore in
this Cafe the greateft Errors arifing from the fpherical Figure
of the Glafs, would be to the greateft fenfible Errors ari¬
fing from the different refrangibility of the Rays as ~~
to — at moft, that is only as 1 to 18 2 6. And this fuffi-
ciently {hews that it is not the fpherical Figures of Glaffes
but the different refrangibility of the Rays which hinders the
perfection of Telefcopes,
There is another Argument by which it may appear that
the different refrangibility of Rays, is the true Caufe of the
imperfection of Telefcopes. For the Errors of the Rays
arifing from the fpherical Figures of ObjeCt-Glaffes, are as
K the
the Cubes of the apertures of the ObjeCLGlafles • and thence *
to make Telefcopes of various lengths, magnify with equal
diftinCtnefs, the apertures of the Objed> Glafles, and the
Charges or magnifying Powers, ought to be as the Cubes of
the fcjuare Roots of their lengths 5 which doth not anfwer
to Experience. But the errors of the Rays ariflng from
the different refrangibility, are as the apertures of the Ob¬
ject-Glafles,. and thence to make Telefcopes of various
lengths, magnify with equal diftinCtnefs, their apertures and
charges ought to be as the fquare Roots of their lengths 5
and this anfwers to experience as is well known. For in-
ftance, a Telefcope of 64 Feet in length, with an aperture
of 1- Inches, magnifies about 1 20 times, with as much dif¬
tinCtnefs as one of a Foot in length, with ~ of an Inch aper¬
ture, magnifies 15 times.
Now were it not for this different refrangibility of Rays,
Telefcopes might be brought to a greater Perfection than
we have yet defcribed, by compofing the ObjeCt-Glafs of
two Glafles with Water between them. Let ADFC repre¬
sent the ObjeCt-Glafs compofed of two Glafles ABED and
and BEFC, alike convex on the outfides AGD and CFIF,
and alike concave on the infides BME, BNE, with Water
in the concavity BMEN. Let the Sine of Incidence out of
Glafs into Air be as I to R and out of Water into Air as K
to R, and by confequence out of Glafs into Water, as I to
K : and let the Diameter of the Sphere to which the convex
fides AGD and CHF are ground be D, and the Diameter
of the Sphere to which the concave fides BME and BNE
are ground be to D, as the Cube Root of KK—KI to the
Cube Root of RK—RI: and the Refractions on the con¬
cave fides of the Glafles, will very much correct the Errors
of the Refractions on the convex fides, fo far as they arife
from the fphericalnefs of the Figure. And by this means
might. _
[7$]
might Telefcopes be brought to fufficient perfection, were it
not for the different refrangibility of feveralforsof Rays. But
by reafon of this different refrangibility, I do not yet fee any
other means of improving Telefcopes by Refractions alone
than that of increafing their lengths, for which end the late
contrivance of Hugenius feems well accommodated. For
very long Tubes are cumberfome, and fearce to be readily
managed, and by reafon of their length are very apt to
bend, and fhake by bending fo as to caufe a continual
trembling in the ObjeCts, whereby it becomes difficult to
fee them diftin&ly : whereas by his contrivance the GlafTes
are readily manageable, and the ObjeCtiGlafs being fixt up¬
on a ftrong upright Polebecomes more fteddy.
Seeing therefore the improvement of Telefcopes of given
lengths by Refractions is defperate 3 I contrived heretofore a
PerfpeCtive by reflexion, ufing inftead of an ObjeCt Glafs
a concave Metal. The diameter of the Sphere to which
the Metal was ground concave was about 25 Englifli Inches,
and by confequence the length of the Inftrument about fix
Inches and a quarter. The Eye-Glafs was plano-convex,
and the Diameter of the Sphere to which the convex fide was
ground was about L of an Inch, or a little lefs, and by con¬
fequence it magnified between 50 and 40 times. By ano¬
ther way of meafuring I found that it magnified about
35 times. The Concave Metal bore an aperture of an Inch
and a third part 3 but the aperture was limited not by an
opake Circle, covering the Limb of the Metal round about,
but by an opake circle placed between the Eye-Glafs and the *
Eye, and perforated in the middle with a little round hole
for the Rays to pafs through to the Eye. For this Circle
by being placed here, ftopt much of the erroneous Light,
which otherwife would have difturbed the Villon. By com¬
paring it with a pretty good PerfpeCtive of four Feet in
K 2 length,
[ 76 ]

length, made with a concave Eye-Glafs, L could read at a


greater diftance with my own Inftrument than with the.
Glafs. Yet Objects appeared much darker in it than in the
Glafs, and that partly becaufe more Light was loft by re¬
flexion in the Metal, then by refraction in the Glafs, and
partly becaufe my Inftrument was overcharged. Had it.
magnified but 50 or 2 5 times it would have made the Object
appear more brisk and pleafant. Two of thefelmade about
16 Years ago, and have one of them ftill by me by which
L ean prove the truth of what I write. Yet it is not fo good
as at the firft. For the concave has been divers times tar-
niftied and cleared again, by rubbing it with very foft Lea¬
ther. When I made thefe, an Artift in London undertook
to imitate it 3 but ufing another way of polifhing them
than I did, he fell much-Abort of what I had attained to,
as I afterwards underftood by difeourfing the under-Work¬
man he had imployed. The Polifih I ufed was on this man¬
ner. I had two round Copper Plates each fix Inches in
Diameter, the one convex the other concave, ground ve¬
ry true to one another. On the convex I ground the. Oh-
jeCl-Metal or concave which was to hepoliflbd, till it had.
taken the Figure of the convex and was ready for a Polifh.
Then I pitched over the convex very thinly, by droppings
melted pitch upon it and warming it to keep the pitch
foft, whilft I ground it with the concave Copper wetted to
make it fpread evenly all over the convex. Thus by work¬
ing it well I made it as thin as a Groat, and after the .con¬
vex was cold I ground it again to give it as true a Figure as,
I could. Then I took.Putty which I had made very fine
by wafhing it from all its grolfer Particles,, and laying a lit¬
tle of this upon the pitch, I ground it upon the Pitch with
the concave Copper till it had done making a noife 3 and
then upon the pitch I ground the Objeft-Metal with a brisk
■ • " *' " * .Motion,
C 77'}
Motion, for about two or three Minutes of time, leaning
hard upon it,. Then I put frefh Putty upon the Pitch and
ground it again till it had done making a noife, and after¬
wards ground the Gbjed Metal upon it as before. And
this Work I repeated till the Metal was poliflied, grinding
it the laft time with all my ftrength for a good while toge¬
ther, and frequently breathing upon the Pitch to keep it
moift without laying on any more frefli Putty. The Ob-
jed-Metal was two Inches broad and about one third part
of an Inch thick, to keep it from bending. I had two of
thefe Metals, and when I had polifihed them both I tried
which was bell, and ground the other again to fee if I could
make it better than that which I kept. And thus by many
Trials I learnt the way of polifhing, till I made thofe two
refleding Peipedives I fpake of above. For this Art of
poliihing will he better learnt by repeated Pradice than by
my defcription. Before I ground the Qbjed MetaTon the
Pitch, I always ground the Putty on it with the concave
Copper till it had done making a noife, becaufe if the Par¬
ticles of the Putty were not by this means made to ftick
faft in the Pitch, they would by rolling up and down grate
and fret the Objed Metal and fill it full of little holes.
But becaufe Metal is more difficult to polifih than Glafs
and is afterwards very apt to be fpoiled by tamifhing? and
refleds not fo much Light as Glafs quick-filvered over does:
I would propound touleinfteadof theMetal, a Glafs ground
concave on the forefide, and as much convex on the back-
fide, and quicksilvered over on the convex fide. The Glafs s
muft be every where of the fame thicknefs exadly. Other-
wife it will make Objeds look coloured and indiftind. By
fuch a Glafs I tried about five or fix Years ago to make
a refleding Telefcope of four Feet in length to magnify a- -
bbut 150 times, and I fatisfied my felf that there wants no--
•vj?
tiling but a good Artift to bring the defign to Perfection.
For the Glafs being wrought by one of our London Artifts
after fuch a manner as they grind Glaffes for Telefcopes.,
tho it feemed as well wrought as the ObjeCi Glaffes ufe to
be, yet when it was quick-filvered, the reflexion difcovered
innumerable Inequalities all over the Glafs. And by reafon
of thefe Inequalities, ObjeCts appeared indiftinCt in this In-
ftrument. For the Errors of reflected Rays caufed by any
Inequality of the Glafs, are about fix times greater than the
Errors of refraCled Rays caufed by the like Inequalities. Yet
>by this Experiment I fatisfied my felf that the reflexion on
the concave fide of the Glafs, which I feared would difturb
the vifion,didno fenfibleprejudice to it, and by confequence
that nothing is wanting to perfect thefe Telefcopes, but
good Workmen who can grind and polilh Glaffes truly fphe-
rical. An ObjeCt-Glafs of a fourteen Foot Telefcope, made
by one of our London Artificers, I once mended confidera-
bly, by grinding it on Pitch with Putty, and leaning ve¬
ry eafily on it in the grinding, left the Putty flhould fcratch
it. Whether this way may not do well enough for poliflh-
ing thefe reflecting Glaffes, I have not yet tried. But he
that flhall try either this or any other way of poliflhing which
he may think better, may do well to make his Glaffes rea¬
dy for poliflhing by grinding them without that violence,
wherevuth our London Workmen prefs their Glaffes in grind¬
ing. For by fuch violent preffure, Glaffes are apt to bend
a little in the grinding, and fuch bending will certainly Ip oil
their Figure. To recommend therefore the confideration
of thefe reflecting Glaffes, to fuch Artifts as are curious in
figuring Glaffes, I flhall defcribe this Optical Inftrument in
, the following Propofition.

PROP.
[79]
PROP. VII. Prob. II.
To Jhorlen Tele/copes.

T E T ABDC reprefent a Glafs fpherically concave on


the forefide AB,1 and as much convex on the back-
fide CD, fo that it be every where of an equal thicknefs. Let
it not be thicker on one fide than on the other, left it make
Objects appear coloured and indiftindt, and let it be very
truly wrought and quick-filveredoveron the backfide 3 and
fet in the Tube VXYZ which muft be very black within.
Let EFG reprefent a Prifm of Glafs or Cryftal placed near
the other end of the Tube, in the middle of it, by means of
a handle of Brafs or Iron FGK, to the end of which made
flat it is cemented. Let this Prifm be rectangular at E, and
let the other two Angles at F and G be accurately equal to
each other, and by confequence equal to half right ones, and
let the plane tides FE and GE be fquare, and by confe¬
quence the third fideFG a rectangular parallelogram, whofe
length is to its breath in a fubduplicate proportion of two
to one. Let it be fo placed in the Tube, that the Axis of
the Speculum may pafs through the middle of the fquare
fide EF perpendicularly, and by confequence through the
middle of the fide F G at an Angle of 45 degrees, and let the
fide EF be turned towards the Speculum, and the diftance -
of this Prifm from the Speculum be fuch that the Rays of the
light PQ, RS, ScCi which are incident upon the Speculum in *
Lines Parallel to the Axis thereof, may enter the Prifm at
the fide EF, and be reflected by the fide F G, and thence
go out of it through the fide GE, to the point T which
muft be the common Focus of the Speculum ABDC, and of
a Plano-convex Eye-Glafs FI, through which thofe Rays
muft. pafs to the Eye. . And let the Rays at their corning
out
[ 8o ]
Out of the Glafs pafs through a fmall round hole, or aper¬
ture made in a little Plate of Lead, Brafs, or Silver, where¬
with the Glafs is to be covered, which hole muff be no
bigger than is neceiTary for light enough to pafs through.
For fo it will render the Objedt diftindt, the Plate in which
"tis made intercepting all the erroneous part of the Light
which comes from the Verges of the Speculum AB. Such
an Inftrument well made if it be 6 Foot long, ( reckoning
the length from the Speculum to the Prifm, and thence to
the Focus T) will bear an aperture of 6 Inches at the Spe¬
culum, and magnify between two and three hundred times.
But the hole H here limits the aperture with more advan¬
tage, then if the aperture was placed at the Speculum. If
the Inftrument be made longer or fihorter, the aperture mu ft
be in proportion as the Cube of the fquare Root of the
length, and the magnifying as the aperture. But its con¬
venient that the Speculum be an Inch or two broader than
the aperture at the leaft, and that the Glafs of the Speculum
be thick, that it bend not in the working. The Prifm EFG
niuft be no bigger than is neceflary, and its back fide FG
muft not be quick-filvered over. For without quick-filver
it will refledt all the Light incident on it from the Speculum.
In this Inftrument the Objedt will be inverted, but may
be eredted by making the fquare fides EF and EG of the
Prifm EFG not plane but fpherically convex, that the Rays
may crofs as well before they come at it as afterwards be¬
tween it and the Eye-Glafs. If it be defired that the Inftru¬
ment bear a larger aperture, that may be alfo done by com-
pofing the Speculum of two Glaffes with Water between
them.

THE
Book I. Plate I. Part i.

Fig. y.
A
/
Book I. Plate I. Parti.

Q.
[8i]
THE

FIRST BOOK
O F

O P T I C K s.
PAR T II.

PROP. I, THEOR. I.

1 he Phenomena of Colours in refratted or refietted Light


are not caufed by new modifications of the Light varioufi \\
ly imfrejl, according to the variom terminations of the
Light and Shadow.

The Proof by Experiments.

EX PER. I.

F O R if the Sun fhine into a very dark Chamber pV %


through an oblong Hole F, whofe breadth is the °*
lixth or eighth part'of an Inch, or fomething lefs ; and
his Beam F H do afterwards pafs firft through a very
large Prifm ABC, diftant about oo Feet from the
L • Hole,
'[82]
Hole, and parallel to it, and then (with its white part)
through an oblong Hole H, whole breadth is about
the fortieth or fixtieth part of an Inch, and which is
made in; a black opake Body G I, and placed at the
diftance of two or three Feet from the Prifm, in a pa¬
rallel lituation both to the Prifm and to the former
Hole, and if this white Light thus tranfmitted through
the Hole H, fall afterwards upon a white Paper PL
placed after that Hole H, at the diftance of three or
four Feet from it, and there paint the ufual Colours of
the Prifm, fuppofe red at t, yellow at s, green at r,
blue at q, and violet at p ; you may with an iron Wire,
or any fuch like (lender opake Body, whole breadth is
about the tenth part of an Inch, by intercepting the rays
at k, 1, m, n or o, take away any one of the Colours*
at t, s, r, q or p, whilft the other Colours remain up¬
on the Paper as before; or with an obftacle fomething
bigger you may take away any two, or three, or four Co¬
lours together, the reft remaining: So that any one of
the Colours as well as violet may become outmoft in
the confine of the fhadow towards p, and any one of
them as well as red may become outmoft in the confine
of the lhadow towards t, and any one of them may alfo
border upon the fhadow made within the Colours by
the obftacle R intercepting fome intermediate part of
the Light; and, laftly, any one of them by * being
left alone may border upon the fhadow on either hand.
All the Colours have themfelves indifferently to any
confines of fhadow, and therefore the differences of thefe
Colours from one another, do not arife from the diffe¬
rent confines of fhadow, whereby Light is varioufly
modified as has hitherto been the Option of Philofo-
phers.
r «3 ]
phers. In trying thefe things Lis to be obferved, that
by how much the Holes F and H are narrower, and the
intervals between them, and the Prifm greater, and the
Chamber darker, by fo much the better doth the Ex¬
periment fucceed ; provided the Light be not fo far
diminifhed, but that the Colours at p t be fufficiently
viiible. To procure a Prifm of folid Glafs large enough
for this Experiment will be difficult, and therefore a
prifmatick Veffel muft be made of polifhed Glafs-plates
cemented together, and filled with Water,

EXPEL II.

The Sun’s Light let into a dark Chamber through Fig.


the round Hole F, half an Inch wide, paffed firft through
the Prifm ABC placed at the Hole, and then through
a Lens PT fomething more than four Inches broad, and
about eight Feet diftant from the Prifm,and thence con¬
verged to O the Focus of the Lens diftant from it about
three Feet, and there fell upon a white Paper DE„ If
that Paper was perpendicular to that Light incident up-
on it, as Lis reprefented in the pofture D E, all the Co¬
lours upon it at O appeared white* But if the Paper
being turned about an Axis parallel to the Prifm, be¬
came very much inclined to the Light as Lis reprefeiv
ted in the pofttions de and <h • the fame Light in the
one cafe appeared yellow and red, in the other blue.
Here one and the fame part of the Light in one and the
fame place, according to the various inclinations of the
Paper, appeared in one cafe white, in another yellow
or red, in a third blue, whilft the confine of Light and
L 2 Shadow^
.... .. . [ 84]
Shadow, and the refrattions of the Prifm in all thefe
cafes remained the fame.

EX PER. III.
1

3. Such another Experiment may be more eafily tried


^

as follows. Let a broad beam of the Sun’s Light coming


into a dark Chamber through a Hole in the Window
Unit be refratted by a large Prifm ABC, whole re-
flatting Angle C is more than 60 degrees, and fo foon
as it comes out of the Prifm let it fall upon the white
Paper D E glewed upon a ftiff plane, and this Light,
when the Paper is perpendicular to it, as 5tis reprefen-
ted in D E, will appear perfectly white upon the Paper,
but when the Paper is very much inclined to it in Inch
a manner as to keep always parallel to the Axis of the
Prifm, the whitenefs of the whole Light upon the
Paper will according to the inclination of the Paper
this way, or that way, change either into yellow and
red, as in the pofture de, or into blue and violet, as
in the pofture And if the Light before it fall upon
the Paper be twice refratted the fame way by two pa¬
rallel Prifms, thefe Colours will become the more con-
fpicuous. Here all the middle parts of the broad beam
of white Light which fell upon the Paper, did without
any confine of fhadowWo modify it, become coloured
all over with one uniform Colour, the Colour being al¬
ways the fame in the middle of the Papa' as at the
edges, and this Colour changed according the various
obliquity of the reftetting Paper, without any change
in the refrattions or fhadow, or in the Light which
fell upon the Paper. And therefore thefe Colours are
to
'[ 85 j
to be derived from fome other caufe than the new mo¬
difications of Light by refraftions and Shadows.
If it be asked, What then is their caule? I anfwer,
That the Paper in the pofture de , being more ob¬
lique to the more refrangible rays than to the lefs re¬
frangible ones, is more ftrongly illuminated by the laL
ter than by the former, and therefore the lefs refran¬
gible rays are predominant in the reflected Light. And
wherever they are predominant in any Light they tinge
it with red or yellow, as may in fome meaftire appear by
the firft Proposition of the firft Book,and will more fully
appear hereafter. And the contrary happens in the
pofture of the Paper ^s, the more refrangible rays be¬
ing then predominant which always tinge Light with ,
blues and violets.

EX PER. IV.

The Colours of Bubbles with which Children play


are various, and change their fttuation varioufly, with¬
out any refpedft to any confine of ftiadow. If fuch a
Bubble be covered with a concave Glafs, to keep it from
being agitated by any wind or motion of the Air, the
Colours will flowly and regularly change their fixa¬
tion, even whilft the Eye, and the Bubble, and all Bo^
dies which emit any Light, or caft any ftiadow, re¬
main unmoved. And therefore their Colours arife from
fome regular caufe which depends not on any confine of
ftiadow. What this caufe is will be fhewed in the next
Book,

To
[8<S]
To thefe Experiments may be added the tenth Ex¬
periment of the firft Book, where the Sun’s Light in a
dark Room being traje&ed through the parallel fuperfi-
cies of two Prifms tied together in the form of a Paral-
lelopide, became totally of one uniform yellow or red
Colour, at its emerging out of the Prifms. Here, in
the production of thefe Colours, the confine of fhadow
can have nothing to do. For the Light changes from
white to yellow,orange and red fucceffively,without any
alteration of the confine of fhadow: And at both edges of
the emerging Light where the contrary confines of fha¬
dow ought to produce different effeCts, the Colour is
one and the fame, whether it be white, yellow, orange
or red : And in the middle of the emerging Light,
where there is no confine of fhadow at all, the Colour
is the very fame as at the edges, the whole Light at its
very firft emergence being of one uniform Colour, whe¬
ther white, yellow, orange or red, and going on thence
perpetually without any change of Colour, fuch as the
confine of fhadow is vulgarly fuppofed to work in re-
fraCted Light after its emergence. Neither can thefe
Colours arife from any new modifications of the Light
by refraClions, becaufe they change fucceffively from
white to yellow, orange and red, while the refractions
remain the fame, and alfo becaufe the refractions are
made contrary ways by parallel fuperficies which de¬
ft r®y one anothers effeCts. They arife not therefore
from any modifications of Light made by refractions
andfhadows, but have fome other caufe. What that
caufe is *we fhewed above in this tenth Experiment,
.and need not here repeat it.

There

f
There
[ 87 ]. .
is yet another material circumfiance of this
Experiment. For this emerging Light being by a third Fig. 22^
Prifm HIK refracted towards the Paper P T, and there Tart 1
painting the ufual Colours of the Prifm-, red, yellow,
green, blue, violet : If thefe Colours arofe from the
refractions of that Prifm modifying the Light, they
would not be in the Light before its incidence on that
Prifm. And yet in that Experiment we found that
when by turning the two firft Prifms about their com¬
mon Axis all the Colours were made to vanifh but the
red; the Light which makes that red being left alone,
appeared of the very fame red Colour before its inci¬
dence on the third Prifm. And in general we find by
other Experiments that when the rays which differ in
refrangibility are feparated from one another, and any
one fort of them is confidered apart, the Colour of the
Light which they compofe cannot be changed by any
refraction or reflexion whatever, as it ought to be were
Colours nothing elfe than modifications of Light caufied v
by refractions, and reflexions, and fhadows. This un-
ehangeablenefs of Colour I am now to defcribe in the
following Propofition.

PROP. IL THEOR.IL

AU homogeneal Light has its proper Colour anfwering to-


its degree of refrangibility, and that Colour cannot be
changed by reflexions and refractions*

In the Experiments of the 4th Propofition of the fir ft


Book, when I had feparated the heterogeneous rays
from one another, the SpeCtrum p t formed by the fepa¬
rated
[88]
rated rays, did in the progrefs from its end p, on which
the molt refrangible rays fell, unto its other end t, on
which the leaft refrangible rays fell, appear tinged with
this Series of Colours, violet, indico, blue, green, yel¬
low, orange, red, together with all their intermediate
degrees in a continual fucceffion perpetually varying:
So that there appeared as many degrees of Colours, as
there were forts of rays differing in refrangibility.

EX PER. V.

Now that thefe Colours could not be changed by re¬


fraction, I knew by refracting with a Prifrn fometimes
one very little part of this Light, fometimes another
very little part, as is defcribed in the iath Experiment
of the firft Book. For by this refraCtion the Colour of
the Light was never changed in the leaft. If any part
of the red Light was refraCted, it remained totally of
the fame red Colour as before. No orange, no yel¬
low, no green, or blue, no other new Colour was pro¬
duced by that refraction. Neither did the Colour any
ways change by repeated refractions, but continued al¬
ways the fame red entirely as at firft. The like con-
ftancy and immutability I found alfo in the blue, green,
and other Colours. So alfo if I looked through a Prifrn
upon any body illuminated with any part of this homo-
geneal Light, as in the 14th Experiment of the firft
Book is defcribed; I could not perceive any new Co¬
lour generated this way. All Bodies illuminated with
compound Light appear through Prifms confufed ( as
was faid above) and tinged with various new Colours,
but thofe illuminated with homogeneal Light appeared
through
[»9]
through Prifins neither lefs diftinfit, nor otherwife co¬
loured, than when viewed with the naked Eyes. Their
Colours were not in the leaft changed by the refraction
of the interpofed Prifm. I fpeak here of a fenfible
change of Colour : For the Light which I here call ho¬
mogeneal, being not abfolutely homogeneal, there ought
to arife fome little change of Colour from its heteroge¬
neity. But if that heterogeneity was fo little as it might
be made, by the laid Experiments of the fourth Fropo-
fition, that change was not fenfible, and therefore, in
Experiments where fenfe is judge, ought, to be accoun¬
ted none at alb

EX PER. VI.

And as thefe Colours were not changeable by refra¬


ctions, fo neither were they by reflexions. For all
white, grey, red, yellow, green, blue, violet Bodies, as
Paper, Allies, red‘Lead, Orpiment, Indico, Bile, Gold,
Silver, Copper, Grafs, blue Flowers, Violets, Bubbles
of Water tinged with various Colours, Peacock's Fea¬
thers, the tinCture of Lignum Neghriticum, and fuch
like, in red homogeneal Light appeared totally red, in
blue Light totally blue, in green Light totally green,
and to of other Colours, In the homogeneal Light of
of any Colour they all appeared totally of that fame
Colour, with this onlf difference, that fome of them
reflected that Light more ftrongly, others more faintly,
I never yet found any Body which by reflecting homo¬
geneal Light could fenfibly change its Colour.

M From
k
[90]
From all which it is manifeft, that if the Sun’s Light
confifted of but one fort of rays, there would be but
one Colour in the whole World, nor would it be pof-
fible to produce any new Colour by reflexions and re-
fractions, and. by confequence that the variety of Co¬
lours depends upon the competition of Light.

© E FI NIT 10 N.

The homogeneai light and rays which appear redT,


or rather make Objects appear lb, 1 call rubrific •
orred-makng ; thole which make Objects appear
yellow, green, blue and violet, I call yellow-mar¬
king, green-making^ blue-making, violet-making,
and fo of the reft. And if at any time I fpeak of
light and rays as coloured or endued with Co¬
lours, I would be underftood to fpeak not philo-
fophically and properly, but groily, and accor¬
ding to fuch conceptions as vulgar Feople in fee¬
ing all thefe Experiments would be apt to frame. *
For the rays to fpeak properly are not coloured.
In them there is nothing elfe than a. certain power,
and difpolition to ftir up a fenlation of this or that
Colour. For as found in a Bell ori mufical String,
or other founding Body, . is nothing but a trem¬
bling Motion, and in the Air nothing but that
Motion propagated from, the Objed:, and in the .
Senforium ’tis a fenfe of that Motion under the :
form of found ; fo Colours in the Object are no¬
thing but a difpofition to refled this or that fort
of rays more copioufty than the reft; in the rays
they are nothing but their difpofttions to propa¬
gate
Fip: 8

Fig. 12 .
M
1

}
Book I. Plate IL Part I

\
*v ''

'

0
■ •

%>" - ;

| I I

, -
*

i. ■
B ook I. Plate HI. Par t1

r\K
*%
BookI.Plate BE. Parti.

\\

\
1
a
Book,I,fhte,W,
Fig. 23. BOOK, I. Part I. Plate V,
B C D E F
■1
Fig. 23. BOOK, I, Part I. Plate V.
A B C D E F

Fig 25.
£ d e f

h 1 h I 71L
I O'**'-"''

/'/gT 2 £
Fig. 27. ABC
A

// I
g:i;;mh|p
\\
DIF

whS
■jm
in
Fig 2 (J.
W
[?l]
gate this or that Motion into the Senforium, and
in the Senforium they are fenfations of thole Mo¬
tions under the forms of Colours.

PROP. III. PRO EL I.

To define the refrcmgibihty of the feverd forts of homo*


genecd Light anfwering to the feverd Colours.

For determining this Problem I made the following


Experiment.

EXPER, V1L

1 When I had caufed the redilinear line fides AF, GM, Fig. 4,
of the Spedrum of Colours made by the Prifm to be
diftindly defined, as in the fifth Experiment of the
firft Book is defcribed, there were found in it all the
homogeneal Colours in the fame order and Situation
one among another as in the Spedrum of fimple Light,
defcribed in the fourth Experiment of that Book. For
the Circles of which the Spedrum of compound Light
FT is compofed, and which in the middle parts of
the Spedrum interfere and are intermixt with one ano¬
ther, are not intermixt in their outmoft parts where
they touch thofe redilinear fides A F and G M. And
therefore in thofe redilinear fides when diftindly defi¬
ned, there is no new Colour generated by refradiom I
obferved alio, that if any where between the two out¬
moft CirclesTMF and PG A a right line, as 5 was
crofs to the Spedrum, fo as at both ends to fall per¬
pendicularly upon its redilinear fides, there appeared
M a one' i
03
one and the fame Colour and degree of Colour from one
end of this line to the other. 1 delineated therefore in
a Paper the perimeter of the SpeCtrum F APGMT,
and in trying the third Experiment of the firft Book, I
held the Paper fo that the Spectrum might fall upon
this delineated Figure, and agree with it exaCtly, whilft
an Affiftant whofe Eyes for diftinguifhing Colours were
more critical than mine, did by right lines
drawn crofs the SpeCtrum, note the confines of the Co¬
lours that is of theredM*£F of the orange * 7 * of
the yellow 7g i of the green ^ 01, of the blue >1 * x.e ^
of the indico «and of the violet xGAm, And
this operation being divers times repeated both in the
fame and in federal Papers, I found that the Ob-
fervations agreed well enough with one another, and
that the rectilinear fides M G and F A were by the laid
crofs lines divided after the manner of a mufical Chord.
Let GM be produced to X, that MX may be equal
to GM, and conceive G X, xX, JX, * X, *X, 7X,
M X, to be in proportion to one another, as the num¬
bers 1, L L p b *6’ L and fo to reprefent the.
Chords of the Key, and of a Tone, a third Minor, a
fourth, a fifth, a fixth Major, a feventh, and an eighth
above that Key : And the intervals «y, 7%..** 9
xx ? alld xG, will be the ipaces which the leveral Co¬
lours (. red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indico, violet )
take up.^
Now thefe- intervals or fpacts fubtending the diffe¬
rences of the refraftions of the rays going to the limits,
of thefe Colours, that is^ to the points M, <*, #,..h *,/, x, G,
may without any fenfible.. Error be accounted propor¬
tional to the differences of the fines of net raCt ion of.th.ofe.
rays
[93]. .
rays having one common fine of incidence, and there¬
fore fince the common fine of incidence of the inoft and
leaft refrangible rays out of Glafs into Air was, (by a
method defcribed above ) found in proportion to their
fines of refraction, as 50 to 77 and 78, divide the dif¬
ference between the fines of refraction 77 and 78, as the
line G M is divided by thole intervals, you will have
n, n\y 77}» 77j,1% 77 a 77^,78,, the fines of
refraCtion of thofe rays out of Glais into. Air , their
common fine of incidence being 50. So then the fines
of the incidences of all the red-making rays out of
Glafs into Air, were to the fines- of their refraCtions,
not greater than 50 to 77, nor lefs than 50 to77-, but
varied from one another according to all interme¬
diate Proportions. And the fines of the incidences
of the green-making rays were to the fines of
their refraCtions in all proportions from that of 50
to 77-1, unto that of 50 to 77-f And by the like limits
above-mentioned were the refraCtions of the rays be¬
longing to the reft of the Colours defined, the fines of
the red-making;rays extending from 77 to 77^ thofe
of the orange-making from 77\ to , thofe of the yel¬
low-making from 77~ to 77thole of the green-making
from 77^ to 7 7G thofe of the blue-making from jj~ to
77“, thofe of the indico-making from 77- to 77*, and
thofe of the violet from 77z9 to 78,.
Thefe are the Laws of the refraCtions made out of
Glafs into Air, and thence by the three Axioms of the
firft Book the Laws of the refraCtions made out of Air.
into Glafs are eafily derived.

EXPER.
[9+]
EXPER. VIII.

I found moreover that when Light goes out of Air


through feveral contiguous refracting Mediums as
through Water and Glafs, and thence goes out again
into Air, whether the refracting fuperficies be parallel
or inclined to one another, that Light as often as by
contrary refraCtions "tis fo corrected, that it emergeth
in lines parallel to thofe in which it was incident,
continues ever after to be white. But if the emer¬
gent rays be inclined to the incident, the whitenefs of
the emerging Light will by degrees in paffing on from
the place of emergence, become tinged in its edges with
Colours. This I tryed by refraCting Light with Prifms
of Glafs within a prifmatick Veffel of Water. Now thofe
Colours argue a diverging and reparation of the hetero¬
geneous rays from one another by means of their un¬
equal refraCtions, as in what follows will more fully
appear. And, on the contrary, the permanent white¬
nefs argues, that in like incidences of the rays there is
no fuch reparation of the emerging rays, and by confe-
quence no inequality of their whole refraCtions. Whence
1 feem to gether the two following Theorems.

i. The Exceffes of the fines of refraCtion of feveral


forts of rays above their common fine of incidence when
the refraCtions are made out of divers denfer mediums
immediately into one and the fame rarer medium, are
do one another in a given Proportion

2, The
[95]
a. The Proportion of the fine of incidence to the line
of refraction of one and the fame fort of rays out of one
medium into another, is compofed of the Proportion of
the fine of incidence to the fine of refraction out of the
firft medium into any third medium, and of the Pro¬
portion of the line of incidence to the fine of refraCtioiv
out of that third medium into the fecond medium*

By the firft Theorem the refractions of the rays of


every fort made out of any medium into Air are known ,
by having the refraction of the rays of any one fort. As
for inftance, if the refractions of the rays of every fort
out of Rain-water into Air be defired, let the common
line of incidence out of Glafs into Air be fubduCted
from the fines of refraCtion, and the Exceffes will be
ay, ay£,-.ayj, if-, ij[, if-r,if9yi%. Suppofe now
that the fine of incidence of the leaft refrangible rays be~
to their fine of refraction out of Rain-water into Air as
three to four, and fay as i the difference of thofe fines
is to 3 the fine of incidence, fo is ay the leaft of the.
Exceffes above-mentioned to a fourth number 81 j and
8.1-will be the common fign of incidence out of Rain¬
water into Air, to which fine if you add all the above-
mentioned Exceffes you will have the defired fines of
the refractions 108., io8i? io8f, io8i, io8t, io8f,
I C89 ? IO9.
By the latter Theorem the refraCtion out of., one me¬
dium into another is gathered as often as you. have
the refractions out of them both into any third medium.
As if the fine of incidence of any ray out of Glafs into
Air be to its fine of refraCtion as ao to 31, and the fine
of incidence of the fame ray out of Air into Water, be
to
[ 9^ ]
to its fine of refra£tion as four to three; the fine of
incidence of that ray out of Glafs into Water will be to
its fine of refraction as ao to 31 and 4 to 3 joyntly, that
is, as the FaCtum of 20 and 4 to the Falfum of 31 and
3, or as 80 to 93.
And thefe Theorems being admitted into Opticks,
there would be fcope enough of handling that Science
voluminoufly after a new manner; not only by teaching
thofe things which tend to the perfection of vifion, but
alfo by determining mathematically all kinds of Pheno¬
mena of Colours which could be produced by refra¬
ctions. For to do this, there is nothing elfe requifite
than to find out the reparations of heterogeneous rays,
and their various mixtures and proportions in every
mixture. By this way of arguing I invented almoft
all the Phenomena defcribed in thefe Books, befide fome
others lefs neceflary to the Argument ; and by the
fuccefles I met with in die tryals, I dare promile, that
to him who (hall argue truly, and then try all things
with good Glaffes and fufficient circumfpeCtion, the
expefted event will not be wanting. But he is firft to
know what Colours will arife from any others mixt in
any affigned Proportion.

PROP. IV. THE OR. III.

Colours may be produced by comfofition which jhatt be like


to the Colours of homogeneal Light as to the appearance
of Colour, but not as to the immutability of Colour and
conjlitutim of Light, Lind thofe Colours by ho‘w much
they are more compounded by jo much are they lejs f ull
.md inteufe, and by too much compofition they may be
diluted
[97]
diluted and weakened till they ceaje. ‘There may he
aljo Colours produced by comnojition^ which are not fully
like any oj the Colours oj homogeneal Light.

For a mixture of homogeneal red and yellow com¬


pounds an orange, like in appearance of Colour to that
orange which in the feries of unmixed prifmatick Co¬
lours lies between them; but the Light of one orange
is homogeneal as to refrangibility, that of the other is
heterogeneal, and the Colour of the one, if viewed
through a Prifm, remains unchanged, that of the other
is changed and refolved into its component Colours red
and yellow. And after the fame manner other neigh¬
bouring homogeneal Colours may compound new Co¬
lours, like the intermediate homogeneal ones, as yel¬
low and green, the Colour between them both, and af¬
terwards, if blue be added, there will be made a green
the middle Colour of the three which enter the compo-
lition. For the yellow and blue on either hand,if they are
equal in quantity they draw the intermediate green equal¬
ly towards themfelves in competition, and fo keep it as
it were in equilibrio, that it verge not more to the
yellow on the one hand, than to the blue on the other,
but by their mixt actions remain ftill a middle Colour.
To this mixed green there may be further added
feme red and violet, and yet the green will not prefent-
ly ceafe but only grow lets full and vivid, and by in-
creafing the red and violet it will grow more and more
dilute, until by the prevalence of the added Colours it
be overcome and turned into whitenefs, or feme other
Colour, do if to the Colour of any homogeneal Light,
the Sun's white Light compofed of all forts of rays be
N added.
added, that Colour will not vanifh or change its fpe*
cies but be diluted., and by adding more and more white
it will be diluted more and more perpetually. Lafi>
ly, if red and violet be mingled, there will be generated
according to their various Proportions various Purples,
fuch as are not like in appearance to the Colour of any
homogeneal Light, and of thefe Purples mixt with yel¬
low and blue may be made other new Colours.

PROP. Y. THEOR. IV.

Whitenefs and all grey Colours between white and blacks


may be compounded of Colours, and the whitenefs of the
Suns Light is compounded of all, the primary Colours
mixt in a due proportion...

The Proof by Experiments;


; ■

EX PER. IX.

' pig, ^ The Sun Aiming into a dark Chamber through a


° ' little round Hole in the Window fhut, and his Light
being there refrafted by a Prifm to cafi his coloured-
image PT upon the oppofite Wall : I held a white Pa¬
per V to that Image in fuch manner that it might be
illuminated by the coloured Light refected from thence,
and yet not intercept any part of that Light in its paL
fage from the Prifm to the Spedtrum. And I found that
when the Paper was held nearer to any Colour than to
the reft, it appeared of that Colour to which it ap¬
proached neareft ; but when it. was equally or almoft
equally
[ 993
equally difrant from all the Colours, fo that it might
be equally illuminated by them all it appeared white.
And in this la ft fituation of the Paper, iffome Colours
were intercepted, the Paper loft its white Colour, and
appeared of the Colour of the reft of the Light which
was not intercepted. So then the Paper was illuminated
with Lights of various Colours, namely, red, yellow,
green, blue and violet, and every part of the Light re¬
tained its proper Colour, until it was incident on the
Paper, and became reflected thence to the Eye ; fo that
if it had been either alone (the reft of the Light being
intercepted) or if it had abounded moft and been pre¬
dominant in the Light reflected from the Paper,it would
have tinged the Paper with its own Colour; and yet be¬
ing mixed with the reft of the Colours in a due propor¬
tion, it made the Paper look white, and therefore by a
eompofition with the reft produced that Colour, The
feveral parts of the coloured Light reflected from the
-Spedrum, whilft they are propagated from thence thro" \
the Air, do perpetually retain their proper Colours,
becaufe wherever they fall upon the Eyes of any Specta¬
tor, they make the feveral parts of the SpeCtrum to
appear under their proper Colours. They retain there¬
fore their proper Colours when they fall upon the Pa¬
per V, and fo by the confufion and perfect mixture of
thofe Colours compound the whitenefs of the Light
reflected from thence,

EX PER, X,

Let that Spectrum or tolar Image P T fall now upon Fig, 6


the .Lens M N above four Inches broad, and about fix
N 2 Feet
[ i oo ]
Feet diftant from the Prifm ABC, and fo figured that
it may caufe the coloured Light which divergeth from
the Prifm to converge and meet again at its Focus G,
about fix or eight Feet diftant from the Lens, and
thereto fall perpendicularly upon a white Paper DE.
And if you move this Paper to and fro, you will per¬
ceive that near the Lens, as at dey the whole folar Image
(fuppofe at pt) will appear upon it intenfly coloured
after the manner above-explained, and that by receding
from the Lens thofe Colours will perpetually come to¬
wards one another, and by mixing more and more di¬
lute one another continually, until at length the Paper
come to the Focus G, where by a perfect mixture they
will wholly vanifh and be converted into whitenefs, the
whole Light appearing now upon the Paper like a little
white Circle, And afterwards by receding further from
the Lens, the rays which before converged will now
crofs one another in the Focus G, and diverge from
thence, and thereby make the Colours to appear again,
but yet in a contrary order; fuppofe at ^, where the
red t is now above which before was below, and the
violet p is below which before was above.
Let us now flop the Paper at the Focus G where
the Light appears totally white and circular, and let us
eonfider its whitenefs. I fay, that this is com poled of
the converging Colours. For it any of thofe Colours
be intercepted at the Lens, the whitenefs will ceafe and
degenerate into that Colour which arifeth from the
compofition of the other Colours which are not inter¬
cepted. And then if the intercepted Colours he let
pais and fall upon that compound Colour, they mix
with it, and by their mixture reftore the whitenefs.
[101 ]
So if the violet, blue and green be intercepted, the re¬
gaining yellow, orange and red will compound upon
the Paper an orange, and then if the intercepted Co¬
lours be let pals they will fall upon this compounded
orange, and together with it decompound a white. So
alfo if the red and violet be intercepted, the remaining
yellow, green and blue, will compound a green upon
the Paper, and then the red and violet being let pafs
will fall upon this green, and together with it decom¬
pound a white. And that in this compofition of white
the feveral rays do not fuffer any change in their colori¬
fic qualities by ading upon one another, but are only
mixed, and by a mixture of their Colours produce
white, may further appear by thefe Arguments.
If the Paper be placed beyond the Focus G, fuppofe
at ^, and then the red Colour at the Lens be alternate¬
ly intercepted, and let pafs again, the violet Colour on
the Paper will not fuffer any change thereby, as it ought
to do if the feveral forts of rays aded upon one another
in the Focus G, where they crofs. Neither will the
red upon the Paper be changed by any alternate flop¬
ping, and letting pafs the violet which crofleth it.
And if the Paper be placed at the Focus G, and the
white round Image at G be viewed through the Prilm
HIK, and by the reflation of that Prilm be tranflated
to the place rv, and there appear tinged with various
Colours, namely, the violet at v and red at r, and
others between, and then the red Colour at the Lens be
often ftopt and let pafs by turns, the red at r will ac¬
cordingly difappear and return as often, but the violet
at v will not thereby fuffer any change. And fo by
flopping and letting pafs alternately the blue at the
Lens,
I *02
'Lens, the blue at r will accordingly difappear and re-
turn, without any change made in the red at r. The
red therefore depends on one fort of rays, and the blue
on another fort, which in the Focus G where they are
commixt do not aft on one another. And there is the
fame reafon of the other Colours.
I confidered further, that when the mod refrangible
rays P p, and the leaft refrangible ones T t, are by con¬
verging inclined to one another, the Paper, if held very
oblique to thofe rays in the Focus G, might refleft one
fort of them more copioufly than the other fort, and by
that means the reflected Light would be tinged in that
Focus with the Colour of the predominant rays, pro¬
vided thofe rays feverally retained their Colours or co¬
lorific qualities in the compofition of white made by
them in that Focus. But if they did not retain them
in that white, but became all of them feverally endued
there with a difpoiition to ftrike the fenfe with the pew
ception of white, then they could never lofe their white-
nefs by fuch reflexions. I inclined therefore the Paper
to the rays very obliquely, as in the fecund Experiment
of this Book, that the rnoft refrangible rays might be
more copioufly reflefted than the reft, and the white-
nefs at length changed fucceffively into blue, indico
and violet. Then I inclined it the contrary way, that
the moft refrangible rays might be more copious in the
reflefted Light than the reft, and the whitenefs turned
fucceffively to yellow, orange and red. . .
Laftly, I made an Inftrument X Y in fafhion of a
Comb, whofe Teeth being in number fixtecn were
about an Inch and an half broad, and the intervals of the
Teeth about two Inches wide. Then by interpofing
fuc-
C io3 ]
iucceffively the Teeth of this Inftrument near the Lens,
I intercepted part of the Colours by the interpofed
Toothy whilft the reft of them went on through the in¬
terval of the Teeth to the Paper D E, and there pain¬
ted a round folar Image. But the Paper I had firft pla¬
ced fo, that the Image might appear white as often
as the Comb was taken away; and then the Comb be¬
ing as was faid interpofed, that whitenefs by reafon of
the intercepted part of the Colours at the Lens did al¬
ways change into the Colour compounded of thofe
Colours which were not intercepted, and that Colour
was by the motion of the Comb perpetually varied fo,
that in the paffing of every Tooth over the Lens ail
thefe Colours red, yellow, green, blue and purple, did
always fucceed one another. I caufed therefore all the
Teeth to pafs fucceffively over the Lens, and when the
motion was How, there appeared a perpetual fuccefiion
of the Colours upon the Paper : But if I fo much acce¬
lerated the motion, that the Colours by reafon of their
quick fuccefiion could not be diftinguiftied from one
another, the appearance of the fingle Colours ceafed.
There was no red, no yellow, no green, no blue, nor
purple to be feen any longer, but from a confufion of
them all there arofe one uniform white Colour. Of the
Light which now by the mixture of all the Colours ap¬
peared white, there was no part really white. One
part was red, another yellow, a third green, a fourth
blue, a fifth purple, and every part retains its proper.
Colour till it ftnke the Senforium. If the imprefiions
follow one another (lowly, fo that they may be feve-
rally perceived, there is made a diftinft fenfation of all
the Colours one after another in a continual fuccefiion.
But...,
[io4]
But if the impreffions follow one another fo quickly
that they cannot be feverallv perceived, there arifeth
out of them all one common fenfation, which is nei¬
ther of this Colour alone nor of that alone, but hath it
felf indifferently to ’em all, and this is a fenfation of
whitenefs. By the quicknefs of the fucceffions the im¬
preffions of the feveral Colours are confounded in the
Senforium, and out of that confufion arifeth a mixt fen¬
fation, If a burning Coal be nimbly moved round in a
Circle with Gyrations continually repeated, the whole
Circle will appear like fire; the reafon of which is, that
the fenfation of the Coal in the feveral places of that
Circle remains impreft on the Senforium, until the
Coal return again to the fame place. And fo in a
quick confecution of the Colours the impreffion of every
Colour remains in the Senforium, until a revolution of
all the Colours be compleated, and that firft Colour re¬
turn again. The impreffions therefore of all the fucceffive
Colours are at once in the Senforium,and joyntly ftir up
a fenfation of them all; and fo it is manifeft by this Ex¬
periment, that the commixt impreffions of all the Co¬
lours do ftir up and beget a fenfation of white, that is,
that whitenefs is compounded of all the Colours,
And if the Comb be now taken away, that all the
Colours may at once pals from the Lens to the Paper,
and be there intermixed, and together reflected thence
to the Spectators Eyes ; their impreffions on the Senfo-
rium being now more lubtily and perfectly commixed
there, ought much more to ftir up a fenfation of white-
nefs*

You
[10$] '
Y6u may inftead of the Lens ufe two Prifms HIK
and L M N, which by refracting the coloured Light
the contrary way to that of the firft refra&ion, may
make the diverging rays converge and meet again in G,
as you fee it repreiented in the feventh Figure. For Fig. y.
where they meet and mix they will compote a white
Light as when a Lens is ufed.

EXPEL XL

Let the Sun’s coloured Image PT fall upon the Wall Fig* 8*
of a dark Chamber, as in the third Experiment of the
firft Book, and let the fame be viewed through a Prifm
a be, held parallel to the Prifm ABC, by whofe refra¬
ction that Image was made, and let it now appear lower
than before, fuppofe in the place S over againft the red-
colour T. And if you go near to the Image PT, the
Speftrum S will appear oblong and coloured like the
Image P T • but if you recede from it, the Colours of
the Spectrum S will be contracted more and more, and
at length vaniih, that Spectrum S becoming perfectly
round and white ; and if you recede yet further, the
Colours will emerge again, but in a contrary order.
Now that SpeCtrum S appears white in that cafe when
the rays of leveral forts which converge from the feve-
ral parts of the Image PT, to the Prifm a be, are fo
retraCted unequally by it, that in their paffage from the
Prifm to the Eye they may diverge from one and the
lame point of the SpeCtrum S, and fo fall afterwards
upon one and the fame point in the bottom of the Eye,
and there be mingled.

O And
[lod]
And further, if the Comb be here made ufe of, by
whole Teeth the Colours at the Image PT may be fuo
ceffively intercepted ; the Spedxum S when the Comb
is moved flowly will be perpetually tinged with fuc-
ceffive Colours: But when by accelerating the motion
of the Comb, the fucceffion of the Colours is fo quick
that they cannot be feverally feen, that Spedfrum S, by
a confufed and mixt lenfation of them all, will appear
white.

EXPER. XII.

Fig. 9. The Sun Alining through a large Prifm ABC upon


a Comb X Y, placed immediately behind the Prifm, his
Light which paffed through the interftices of the Teeth
fell upon a whitePaper BE. The breadths of the
Teeth Were equal to their interftices, and feven Teeth
together with their interftices took up an Inch in
breadth. Now when the Paper was about two or
three Inches diftant from the Comb, the Light which
paffed through its feveral interftices painted fo many
ranges of Colours kl, mn, op, qr, tor. which were,
parallel to one another and contiguous, and without any
mixture of white. And thefe ranges of Colours, if the
Comb was moved continually up and down with a re¬
ciprocal motion, afcended and defcended in the Paper,
and when the motion of the Comb was fo quick, that
the Colours could not be diftinguilhed from one another,
the whole Paper by their confufion and mixture in the
Senforium appeared white*

Let
' C I07 3
Let the Comb now reft, and let the Paper be remo¬
ved further from the Prifin, and the feveral ranges of
Colours will be dilated and expanded into one another
more and more, and by mixing their Colours will di¬
lute one another, and at length, when the diftance
of the Paper from the Comb is about a Foot, or a
little more ( fuppofe in the place 2 D 2 E) they will
fo far dilute one another as to become white,,
With any Obftacle let all the Light be now ftopt
wdiich paffes through any one interval of the Teeth, lb
that the range of Colours which comes from thence may
be taken away, and you will fee the Light of the reft of
the ranges to be expanded into the place of the range
taken away, and there to be coloured. Let the inter¬
cepted range pafs on as before, and its Colours falling
upon the Colours of the other ranges, and mixing with
them, will reftore the whitenefs.
Let the Paper 2D 2E be now very much inclined to
the rays, fo that the mo ft refrangible rays may be more
copioufly reflected than the reft, and the white Colour
oi the Paper through the excefs of thofe rays will be
changed into blue and violet. Let the Paper be as
much inclined the contrary way, that the leaft refran¬
gible rays may be now more copioufly reflected than
the reft, and by their excefs the whitenefs will be
changed into yellow and red. The feveral rays there-
fore in that white Light do retain their colorific qua¬
lities, by which thole of any fort, when-ever they be-
come more copious than the reft, do by their excels
and predominance caufe their proper Colour to ap¬
pear, - x ;

And
[ io8 ]
And by the fame way of arguing, applied to the third
Experiment of this Book, it may be concluded, that
the white Colour of all refracted Light at its very firft
emergence, where it appears as white as before its inci¬
dence, is compounded of various Colours.

EX P ER. XIII.

In the foregoing Experiment the feveral intervals of


the Teeth of the Comb do the office of fo many Prifms.,
every interval producing the Phenomenon of one Prifm.
Whence inftead of thofe intervals ufing feveral Prifms, I
try'd to compound whitenefs by mixing their Colours,and
did it by ufing only three Prifms, as alfo by ufing only
fig. io. two as follows. Let two Prifms ABC and a be, whole
refrafting Angles B and b are equal,be fo placed parallel
to one another, that the refracting Angle B of the one
may touch the Angle c at the bafe of the other, and
their planes CB and cb, at which the rays emerge, may
lye in direftum. Then let the Light trajeCted through
them fall upon the Paper M M, diftant about 8 or 12
Inches from the Prifms. And the Colours generated
by the interior limits B and c of the two Prifms, will
be mingled at PT, and there compound white. For if
either Prifm be taken away, the Colours made by the
other will appear in that place PT, and when the Prifm
is reflated to its place again, fo that its Colours may
there fall upon the Colours of the other, the mixture
<*f them, both will reftore the whitenefs.
[ lop ]
This Experiment fueceeds alfo, as 1 have try ed, when
the Angle b of the lower Prifm, is a little greater than
the Angle B of the upper , and between the interior
Angles B an Ac, there intercedes fome fpace Be, as is
reprefented in the Figure, and the refracting planes
BC and be, are neither in dire&um, nor parallel to
one another. For there is nothing more requifite to
the fuccefs of this Experiment, than that the rays of all
forts may be uniformly mixed upon the Paper in the
place PT. If the mod refrangible rays coming from
the fuperior Prifm take up all the fpace from M toP, the
rays of the fame fort which come from the inferior
Prifm ought to begin at P, and take up all the reft of the
fpace from thence towards N. If the leaft refrangible
rays coming from the fuperior Prifm take up the fpace
M T, the rays of the fame kind which come from the
other Prifm ought to begin atT, and take up the remain¬
ing fpace T N». If one fort of the rays which have in¬
termediate degrees of refrangibility, and come from the
fuperior Prifm be extended through the fpace MQ, and
another fort of thofe rays through the fpace MR, and
a third fort of them through the fpace M S, the fame
forts of rays coming from the lower Prifm, ought to il¬
luminate the remaining fpaces QM, RN, SN refpe-
lively. And the fame is to be underftood of all the
other forts of rays. For thus the rays of every fort will
be fcattexed uniformly and evenly through the whole
fpace MN, and fo being every where mixt in the fame,
proportion, they muft every where produce the fame
Colour. And therefore fince by this mixture they pro-
duce white in the exterior fpaces M P and TN, fhey
muft alio produce white in the interior fpaceP T, This
[no]
is the reafon of the compofition by which whitenefs
was produced in this Experiment, and by what other
way foever I made the like compofition the refult was
whitenefs.
Laftly, If with the Teeth of a Comb of a due fize.
the coloured Lights of the two Prifms which fall upon
the fpace P T be alternately intercepted, that fpace
P T, when the motion of the Comb is flow, will always
appear coloured, but by accelerating the motion of
the Comb fo much, that the fucceflive Colours can¬
not be diftinguifiled from one another, it will appea r
white.

EXPEL XIV.
i

Hitherto I have produced whitenefs by mixing the


Colours of Prifms. If now the Colours of natural Bo¬
dies are to be mingled, let Water a little thickned with
Soap be agitated to raife a froth, and after that froth
has flood a little, there will appear to one that fliall
view it intently various Colours every where in the
furfaces of the feveral Bubbles; but to one that (hall
go fo far off that he cannot diftinguifh the Colours from
one another, the whole froth will grow white with a
perfect whitenefs.

EX PER. XV.

Laftly, in attempting to compound a white by mixing


the coloured Powders which Painters ufe, I confidered
that all coloured Powders do fupprefs and flop in
them a very confiderable part of the Light by which
they
[ill ]'
they are illuminated. For they become coloured by
reflecting the Light of their own Colours more copioufly,
and that of all other Colours more fparinglv, and yet
they do not refleCt the Light of their own Colours fo
copioufly as white Bodies do. If red Lead,for inftance,
and a white Paper, be placed in the red Light of the
coloured SpeCtrum made in a dark Chamber by the re¬
fraction of a Prifm, as is defcribed in the third Eperi-
ment of the firft Book ; the Paper will appear more lu¬
cid than the red Lead, and therefore reflects the red-
making rays more copioufly than red Lead doth. And
if they be held in the Light of any other Colour, the
Light reflected by the Paper will exceed the Light re¬
flected by the red Lead in a much greater proportion.
And the like happens in Powders of other Colours.
And therefore by mixing Inch Powders we are not to
expeCt a ftrong and full white, fuch as is that of Paper,
but fome dusky obfcure one, luch as might arife from a
mixture of light and darknefs, or from white and black,
that is, a grey, or dun, or ruffet brown, fuch as are the
Colours of a Man’s Nail, of a Moufe, of Allies, of or¬
dinary Stones, of Mortar, of Dull and Dirt in High¬
ways, and the like. And fuch a dark white I have
often produced by mixing coloured Powders. For thus
one part of red Lead,and five parts of Viride H£m,com-
pofed a dun Colour like that of a Moufe. For thefe
two Colours were feverally fo compounded of others,
that in both together were a mixture of all Colours; and
there was lefs red Lead ufed than Viride ALrhj becaufe
of the fuinefs of its Colour. Again, one part of red
Lead, and four parts of blue Bife, compofed a dun Co¬
lour verging a little to purple, and by adding to this a
sextain
[ II21
certain mixture of Orpiment and ViricLi Arts in a due
proportion, the mixture loft its purple tinCture, and be¬
came perfectly dun. But the Experiment fucceeded beft
without Minium thus. To Orpiment I added by little
and little a certain full bright purple, which Painters
ule until the Orpiment ceafed to be yellow, and became
of a pale red. Then I diluted that red by adding a
little Vtride Arts, and a little more blue Bife than Vu
ridi Arm, until it became of luch a grey or pale white,
as verged to no one of the Colours more than to ano¬
ther. For thus it became of a Colour equal in white-
nefs to that of Allies or of Wood newly cut, or of a
Man's Skin. The Orpiment reflected more Light than
did any other of the Powders, and therefore conduced
more to the whitenefs of the compounded Colour than
they. To aflign the proportions accurately may be
difficult, by realon of the different goodnefs of Pow¬
ders of the fame kind. Accordingly as the Colour of
any Powder is more or lefs full and luminous, it ought
to be ufed in a lefs or greater proportion.
Now confidering that thefe grey and dun Colours
may be alfo produced by mixing whites and blacks, and
by confequence differ from perfeCt whites not in Species
of Colours but only in degree of luminoufnefs, it is ma-
nifeft that there is nothing more requifite to make
them perfeftly white than to increafe their Light fuffi-
ciently ; and, on the contrary, if by increafing their
Light they can be brought to perfeCt whitenefs, it will
thence alfo follow, that they are of the lame Species of
Colour with the beft whites, and differ from them only
in the quantity of Light. And this I tryed as follows.
I took the third of the above-mentioned grey mixtures
[i 13 3
( that Which was compounded of Qtpiment, Purple,
Bife and Vinde Mr is) and rubbed it thickly upon the
floor of my Chamber, where the Sun (hone upon it
through the opened Calement; and by it, in the (ha-
dow, I laid a piece of white Paper of the fame bignef^
Then going from them to the diftance of 12 or 18 Feet,"
fo that I could not difcern the unevennefs of the furface
of the Powder, nor the little (hadows let fall from the
gritty particles thereof; the Powder appeared intently
white, fo as to tranfcend even the Paper it felf in white-
nets, efpecially if the Paper were a little (haded from
the Light of the Clouds, and then the Paper compared
with the Powder appeared of fuch a grey Colour as the
Powder had done before. But by laying the Paper
where the Sun dimes through the Glafs of the Window,
or by (hutting the Window that the Sun might fhine
through the Glafs upon the Powder, and by fuch other
fit means of increafing or decreafing the Lights where¬
with the Powder and Paper were illuminated , the
Light wherewith the Powder is illuminated may be
made (Longer in fuch a due proportion than the Light
wherewith the Paper is illuminated, that they (hall both
appear exactly alike in whitenefs. For when I was
trying this, a Friend coming to vifit me, I ftopt him
at the door, and before I told him what the Colours
were, or what I was doing ; I askt him, Which of the
two whites were the beft, and wherein they differed ?
And after he had at that diftance viewed them well, he
anlwered, That they were both good whites, and that
he could not fay which was beft, nor wherein their Co¬
lours differed. Now if you confider, that this white
of the Ponder in the Sumfhine was compounded of the
P Colours
Cr 14 1
Colours which the component Powders ( Orpimentr
Purple, Bile, and Viride JEris) have in the fame Sun-
fhine, you inuft acknowledge by this Experiment, as
well as by the former, that perfect whitenefs may be
compounded of Colours.
From what has been faid it is alfo evident, that thee
whitenefs of the Sun’s Light is compounded of all the
Colours wherewith the feveral forts of rays whereof
that Light confifts, when by their feveral refrangibili-
ties they are feparated from one another, do tinge Paper?
or any other white Body whereon .they fall. For thofer
Colours by Prop. 1. are unchangeable, and whenever
all thole rays with thofe their Colours are mixt again,
they reproduce, the fame white Light as before.

PROP, VI. PRGB. IL

M a mixture of primary Colourr, the quantity and quaiitfr


of, each -being given, ta know the Colour of the com-

With the Center O and Radius O B defcribe a Circle


A DF, and diftinguifti its circumference intodeven parts
DE, EE, FG$ GA, AB, BG, G D, proportional to
the feven mufical Tones or Intervals of the eight Sounds,
Sof la, /^, folr la1 fa, fof contained in an Eight,
that is, proportional to the numbers L, C
C Lev the fir ft part DE reprefent a red Colour, the
fecond E F orange, the third F G yellow,, the fourth
G H green, the fifth A B blue,. the fixth BC indico,
and the.feventh CD violet. And. conceive, that thefe
are all the Colours of uncompounded Light gradually
\ paffing
[”$]
paffing into one another, as they do when made by
Prifms ; the circumference DE FG A BCD, reprefen-
ting the whole l’eries of Colours from one end of the
Sun’s coloured Image to the other, fo that from D to E
be ail degrees of red, at E the mean Colour between red
and orange, from E to F all degrees of orange, at F the
mean between orange and yellow, from F to G all de¬
grees of yellow, and fo on. Let p be the center of
gravity of the Arch DE, and q, r, s, t, v, x, the centers
of gravity of the Arches EF, FG, GA, AB, BC
and C D refpeftively, and about thofe centers of gra¬
vity let Circles proportional to the number of rays of
each Colour in the given mixture be defcribed; that is,
the circle p proportional to the number of the red-ma¬
king rays in the mixture, the Circle q proportional to
the number of the orange-making rays in the mixture,
and fo of the reft. Find the common center of gravity
of all thofe Circles p, q, r, s, t, v, x. Let that center
be Z ; and from the center of the Circle A D F, through
Z to the circumference, drawing the right line O Y,
the place of the point Y in the circumference lhall fhew
the Colour arifing from the compofition of all the Co¬
lours in the given mixture, and the line O Z fnall be
proportional to the fulnefs or intenfenefs of the Colour,
that is, to its diftance from whitenefs. As if Y fall in
the middle between F and G, the compounded Colour
lhall be the beft yellow 3 if Y verge from the middle to¬
wards F or G, the compounded Colour lhall according¬
ly be a yellow, verging towards orange or green. IfZ
fall upon the circumference the Colour lhall be intenfe
and florid in thehigheft degree; if it fall in the mid
way between the circumference and center, it lhall be
P -2 but
[lid]
but half fo mtenfe, that is, it ihall be fucli a Colour as
would he made by diluting the intenfeft yellow with an
equal quantity of whitenefs; and if it fall upon the
center O, the Colour ihall have loft all its intenfenefiq
and become a white. But it is to be noted, That if the
point Z fall in or near the line O 33, the main ingredients
being the red and violet, the Colour compounded ihall
not be any of the prifmatic Colours, but a purple, in¬
clining to red or violet, accordingly as the point Z
lieth on the fide of the line D O towards E or towards C,
and in general the compounded violet is more bright and
more fiery than the uncompounded. Alio if only two
of the primary Colours which in the Circle are oppofite
to one another be mixed in an equal proportion, the
point Z ihall fall upon the center O, and yet the Co¬
lour compounded of thofe two ihall not be perfectly
white, but fome faint anonymous Colour. For I could
never yet by mixing only two primary Colours produce
a perfect white. Whether' it may be compounded of a
mixture of three taken at equal diftances in the circum¬
ference I do not know, but of four or five I do not much
queftion but it may. But thefe are curiofities of little
or no moment to the underftanding the Phenomena of
nature. For in all whites produced by nature, there
ufes to be a mixture of all forts of rays, and by confe-
quence a competition of all Colours.
To give an inftance of this Rule; fuppofe a Colour is
compounded of thefe homogeneal Colours, of violet
i part, of indico i part, of blue a parts, of green 3 parts,
of yellow 5 parts, of orange 6 parts, and of red 1 o parts.
Proportional to thefe parts I deferibe the Circles x, v, t,
% ri T P refpedtively, that is, la that if the Circle x
[ ri7 ] _
be i, the Circle v may be i, the Circle t r, the Circle
S3, and the Circles r, q and p, 5, 6 and 10. Then I
find Z the common center of gravity of thefe Circles,
and through Z drawing the line OY, the point Y falls
upon the circumference between E and F, fome thing
nearer to E than to F, and thence I conclude, that the
Colour compounded of thefe ingredients will be an
orange, verging a little more to red than to yellow.
Alfo I find that O Z is a little lefs than one half of
OY, and thence 1 conclude, that this orange hath a
little lels than half the fulnefs or intenfenefs of an un¬
compounded orange ; that is to fay, that it is fuch an
orange as may be made by mixing an homogeneal orange-
with a good white in the proportion of the line O Z to
the line Z Y, this proportion being not of the quantities
of mixed orange and white powders, but of the quan¬
tities of the lights refiedted from them.
This Rule 1 conceive accurate enough for pradtife,
though not mathematically accurate ; and the truth of
it may be fufficiently proved to fenfe, by flopping any
of the Colours at the Lens in the tenth Experiment of
this Book. For the reft of the Colours which are not
flopped, but pafs on to the Focus of the Lens, will
there compound either accurately or very nearly fuch
a Colour as by this Rule ought to refult from them
mixture.

PRO Vi
.• » —I
PROP. VII. THE OR* V.

>,+411 the Colours in the Univerje -which are made by Light,


and depend not on the power of imagination, are
either the Colours of homogeneal Lightr, or compounded
of thefe and that either accurately or very nearly, ac¬
cording to the Rjule of the foregoing Tdr&blem.

For it has been proved ( in Prop.i. Lib.o..) that the


^changes of dolours made by refradions do not arife
from any new modifications of the rays impreft by thofe
refradions, and by the various terminations of light
andfhadow, as has been the conftant and general opi¬
nion of Philofophers. It has alfo been proved that the
leveral Colours of the homogeneal rays do conftantly
anfwer to their degrees of refrangibility, (Prop, i. Lik i.
and Prop.i. Lib.'i.) and that their degrees of refrangi-
bility cannot be changed by refradions and reflexions,
(Prop.i. Lib A.) and by confequence that thofe their
Colours are likewife immutable. It has alfo been pro¬
ved diredly by refrading and refieding homogeneal
Tights apart, that their Colours cannot be changed,
(Prop.i. Lib.o..) It has been proved alfo, that when
the feveral forts of rays are mixed, and in croffing ;pafs
through the fame fpace, they do not ad on one another
So as to change each others colorifick qualities, (Exper.
lo.Lik'i.) but by mixing their adions in the Senfio-
rium beget a ienfation differing from what either would
do apart, that is a fenfation of a mean Colour between
fheir proper Colours ; and particularly when by the
^oncourfe and .mixtures of all forts of rays, a white
Colour
[H5>]
Colour is produced, the white is a mixture of all the
Colours which the rays would have apart, ( Prop. 5,
Lik c. ) The rays in that mixture do not lofe or alter
their feveral colorifick qualities, but by all their various
kinds of actions mixt in the Senforiumr beget a fenfa-
tion of a middling Colour between all their Colours-
which is whitenefs. For whitenefs is a mean between ■
all Colours, having it felf indifferently to them aFg fo-
as with equal facility to be tinged with any of them.
A red Powder mixed with a little blue, or a blue with
a little red, doth not prelently lofe its Colour, but a
white Powder mixed with any Colour is prefently tin¬
ged with that Colour, and is equally capable of being
tinged with any Colour what-ever. It has been (hewed ’
aifo, that as the Sun’s Light is mixed of all forts of rays,
lb its whitenefs is a mixture of the Colours of all forts.*-
of rays; thofe rays having from the beginning their fe-
veral colorific qualities as well as their feveral refrangL
bilities, and retaining them perpetually unchang’d not-
withftanding any refractions or reliexions they may at
any time fuffer, and that whemever any fort of the
Sun’s-rays is by. any means (as by reflexion in Ex per. y,
audio. Lik 1. or by refraCtion as happens in all re¬
fractions) feparated from the : reft, they then manifeft
their proper Colours, . . Thefe things have been proved/
and the fum of all this amounts to the Propofition here
to be proved.. For if the Sun’s Light is mixed of 1L, ~
veral forts of rays,- each of which have originally their
feveral refrangibilities and colorifick qualities, and not- -
withftanding their refraCtions and reflections, and their .
various reparations or . mixtures, keep .thofe their ori- -
ginal properties perpetually the fame without, altera¬
tion ] ;
[ 120 ]
"tion ; then all the Colours in the World mu ft: be fuch as
conftantly ought to arife from the original colorific qua¬
lities of the rays whereof the Lights coniift by which
thofe Colours are feen. And therefore if the reafon of
any Colour what-ever be required., we have nothing elfe
to do then to confider how the rays in the Sun’s Light
have by reflexions or refractions, or other caufes been par¬
ted from one another,or mixed together; or otherwile to
find out what forts of rays are in the Light by which
that Colour is made, and in what proportion; and
then by the laft Problem to learn the Colour which
ought to arife by mixing thofe rays (or their Colours)
in that proportion. I fpeak here of Colours fo Aar as
they arife from Light. For they appear fometimes by
other caufes, as when by the power of phantafy we
fee Colours in a Dream, or a mad Man fees things before
him which are not there; or when we fee Fire by ftriking
the Eye, or fee Colours like the Eye of a Peacock’s
Feather, by preffing our Eyes in either corner whilft
we look the other way. Where thefe and fuch like
caufes interpofe not, the Colour always anfwers to
the fort or forts of the rays whereof the Light confiffs,
as I have conftantly found in what-ever Phenomena of
Colours I have hitherto been able to exarniir 1 flrall in
the following Propoiitions give infiances of this in the
Phenomena of ehiefeft note.

PROP.
PROP. VIII. P ROB. III.

By the dijcovered ‘Properties of Light to explain the


Colours made by Prifms.

Let ABC reprefent a Prifm refracting the Light of pia


the Sun, which comes into a dark Chamber through a °
Hole F <P almoft as broad as the Prifm, and let M N
reprefent a white Paper on which the refracted Light is
caft, and fuppofe the moft refrangible or deepeft violet
making rays fall upon the fpace Ptt , the lea ft refran¬
gible or deepeft red-making rays upon the fpace T
the middle fort between the Indico-making aud blue¬
making rays upon the fpace Q x, the middle fort of the
green-making rays upon the fpace R e, the middle fort
between the yellow-making and orange-making rays
upon the fpace S and other intermediate forts upon
intermediate fpaces. For fo the fpaces upon which the
feveral forts adequately fall will by reafon of the diffe¬
rent refrangibility of thofe forts be one lower than ano¬
ther. Now if the Paper MN be fo near the Prifm that the
fpaces P T and ■rri do not interfere with one another, the
diftance between them T T will be illuminated by all
the l'orts of rays in that proportion to one another which
they have at their very firft coining out of the Prifm,
and consequently be white. But the fpaces PT and
on either hand, will not be illuminated by them all,
-and therefore will appear coloured. And particularly
at P,^ where the outmoft violet-making rays fall alone,
the Colour muft be the deepeft violet. At Q where the
violet-making and indico-making rays are mixed, it
Q, muft
„ p223
muft be a violet inclining much to indico. At R where
the violet-making, indico-making, blue-making, and
one half of the green-making rays are mixed, their Co¬
lours muft ( by the conftruftion of the fecund Problem)
compound a middle Colour between indico and blue.
At S where all the rays are mixed except the red-ma¬
king and orange-making,their Colours ought by the fame
Rule to compound a faint blue, verging more to green
than indie. And in the progrefs from S to T, this blue
will grow more and more faint and dilute, till atT,
where all the Colours begin to be mixed , it end in
whitenefs.
So again, on the other fide of the white at T, where
the leaft refrangible or utmoft red-making rays are alone
the Colour muft be the deepeft red. At cr the mixture
of red and orange will compound a red inclining to
orange. At e the mixture of red, orange, yellow, and
one half of the green muft compound a middle Colour
between orange and yellow. At x the mixture of all
Colours but violet and indico will compound a feint
yellow, werging more to green than to orange. And
this yellow will grow more feint and dilute continually
in its progrefs from ^ to tt, where by a mixture of all
forts of rays it will become white.
Thefe Colours ought to appear were the Sun's Light
perfectly white: But becauleit inclines to yellow,the ex¬
cels of the yellow-making rays whereby ftis tinged with
that Colour, being mixed with the faint blue between
S and T, will draw it to. a faint green. And fo the
Colours in order from P toT ought to be violet, indico,
blue, very feint green, white, feint yellow, orange, red.
Thus it is by the computation : And they that pleafe to
view
[ I23 J
view the Colours made by a Prifm will find it fo in
Nature.
Thele are the Colours on both fides the white when
the Paper is held between the Prifm, and the point X
where the Colours meet, and the interjacent white va-
nifhes. For if the Paper be held ftill farther off from the
Priirn, the molt refrangible and leaft refrangible rays
will be wanting in the middle of the Light, and the reft
of the rays which are found there, will by mixture pro¬
duce a fuller green than before. Alfo the yellow and
blue will now become lefs compounded, and by con-
fequence more intenfe than before. And this alio
agrees with experience.
And if one look through a Prifm upon a white Object
encompaffed with blacknefs or darknefs, the reafon of
the Colours arifing on the edges is much the fame, as
will appear to one that fhall a little corifider it. If a
black Object be encompaffed with a white one, the Co¬
lours which appear through the Prifm are to be derived
from the Light of the white one, fpreading into the Re¬
gions of the black, and therefore they appear in a con¬
trary order to that, in which they appear when a white
Object is furrounded with black. And the fame is to
be underftood when an Objeft is viewed, whofe parts
are l'ome of them lefs luminous than others. For in the
Borders of the more and lefs luminous parts, Colours
ought always by the fame Principles to arife from the
excels of the Light of the more luminous, and to be of
the fame kind as if the darker parts were black, but yet
to be more faint and dilute.
C !24]
What is faid of Colours made by Prifms may be eafily
applied to Colours made by the Glafifes of Telefeopes,
or Microfcopes, or by the humours of the Eye. For if
the ObjeCt-glafs of a Telefcope be thicker on one fide
than on the other, or if one half of the Glafs, or one
half of the Pupil of the Eye be covered with any opake
fubftance: the ObjeCt-glafs, or that part of it or of the
Eye which is not covered, may be confidered as a Wedge
with crooked fides, and every Wedge of Glafs, or other
pellucid fubftance, has the effeCt of a Prifm in refracting
the Light which paflfes through it.
How the Colours in the 9th and 10th Experiments
of the firft Part arile from the different reflexibility of
Light,is evident by what was there faid. But it is obfer-
vable in the 9th Experiment, that whilft the Sun's di-
reCt Light is yellow, the excefs of the blue-making
rays in the reflected Beam of Light MM, fuffices only
to bring that yellow to a pale white inclining to blue,
and not to tinge it with a manifeftly blue Colour. To -
obtain therefore a better blue, I ufed inftead of the yel¬
low Light of the Sun the white Light of the Clouds, by
varying a little the Experiment as follows*

EX PER. XVI,

Let H F G reprefent a Prifm in the open Air, and S


the Eye of the Spectator, viewing the Clouds by their
Light coming into the Prifm at the plane fide BIGK,
and reflected in it by its bale H EIG, and thence going
out through its plain fide H E F K to the Eye. And
when the Prifm and Eye are conveniently placed, fo
that the Angles of incidence and reflexion at the bafe
[*2$]
may be about 40 degrees, the Spectator will fee a Bow
M N of a blue Colour, running from one end of the
bale to the other, with the concave fide towards him,
and the part of the bafe IJMN G beyond this Bow will
he brighter than the other part EMNH on the other
fide or it. This blue Colour MN being made by no¬
thing elfe than by reflexion of a fpecular fuperficies,
feems fo odd a Phenomenon, and fo unaccountable for
by the vulgar Hypothefis of Philofopliers, that 1 could
not but think it deferved to be taken notice of . Now
for underftanding the reafon of it, fuppofe the plane
ABC to cut the plane {ides and bafe of the Prifm per¬
pendicularly. From the Eye to the line BC, wherein that
plane cuts the bafe, draw the lines Sp and S t, in the ?
Angles Spc 50 degr. and Stc 49 degr,-z8, and the
point f will be the limit beyond which none of the moft
refrangible rays can pafs through the bafe of the Prifm,
and be refracted, whole incidence is fuch that they may
be reflected to the Eye; and the point t will be the like
limit for the leaft refrangible rays, that is, beyond ;
which none of them can pafs through the bafe, whofe -
incidence is fuch that by reflexion they may come to the
Eye. And the point r taken in the middle way between
p and t, will be the like limit for the meanly refrangible
rays. And therefore all the refrangible rays which fall
upon the bafe beyond t, that is, between t and B, and
can come from thence to the Eye will be reflected thi¬
ther : But on this fide t, that is, between t and c, many „
of thefe rays will be tranfmitted through the bafe.
And all the moft refrangible rays which fall upon the
Bale beyond p, that is, between p andB, and can by
reflexion come from thence to the Eye, will be reflected
thither^ %
[ I2J5~]
thither, but every where between t and c, many of
thefe rays will get through the bafe and be refracted ;
and the fame is to be underftood of the meanly refran¬
gible rays on either fide of the point r. Whence it fol¬
lows, that the bafe of the Prifin muft every where be¬
tween t and B, by a total reflexion of all forts of rays to
the Eye, look white and bright And every where
between p and C, by reafon of the tranfmiflion of many
rays of every fort, look more pale, obfcure and dark.
But at r, and in other places between p and t, where
all the more refrangible rays are reflefted to the Eye,
and many of the lefs refrangible are tranfmitted, the
excefs of the mod refrangible in the reflected Light will
tinge that Light with their Colour, which is violet and
blue* And this happens by taking the line CprtB any
where between the ends of the Prifin H G and E L

PROP. IX. P ROB. IV.

J3y the dijcovered ‘Properties of Light to explain the


Colours of the Rjim^iow,

This Bow never appears but where it Rains in the


iSun-fhine, and may be made artificially by fpouting up
Water which may break aloft, and lcatter into Drops,
and fall down like Rain. For the Sun Ihining upon thefe
Drops certainly caufes the Bow to appear to a Specta¬
tor handing in a due pofition to the Rain and Sun. And
hence it is nowr agreed upon, that this Bow is made by
refraCfion of the Sun’s Light in Drops of falling Rain.
This was underitood by fome of the Ancients, and of
late more fully difcovered and explained by the Famous
Ant on ins
't127 J
Antonius de Donums Archbifhop of Splaics. in his Book
T)e Radiis V'tfm Lticis, publifhed by his Friend
tolm at JS'enice^ in the Year 1611 ^ and written above
twenty Years before. For he teaches there how the
interior Bow is made in round Drops of Rain by two
refractions of the Sun's Light, and one reflexion be¬
tween them, and the exterior by two refractions and
two forts of reflexions between them in each Drop of
Water, and proves his Explications by Experiments
made with a Phial full of Water,and with Globes ofGlafs
filled with Water, and placed in the Sun to make the
Colours of the two Bows appear in them. The fame
Explication Bes^Cartes hath purfued in his Meteors,
and mended that of the exterior Bow. But whilft they
underftood not the true origin of Colours, it’s neceffary
to purfue it here a little further. For underftanding
therefore how the Bow is made, let a Drop of Rain or
any other fpherical tranfparent Body be reprefented by
the Sphere B N F G, defcribed wflth the Center C, and Rg*.\W
Semi-diameter GN. And let AN be one of the Sun’s
rays incident upon it at N, and thence refraCted to F,
where let it either go out of the Sphere by refraCtion to¬
wards V, or be reflected to G ; and at G let it either go
out by refraCtion to R, or be reflected to H ; and at H
let it go out by refraCtion towards S, cutting the inci¬
dent ray in Y;; produce AN and RG, till they meet in
X, and upon AX and NF let fall the perpendiculars
CD and CE, and produce CD till it fall upon the cir-
eumlerence at L. Parallel to the incident ray AN draw?,
the Diameter B Q, and let the fine of Incidence out of
Air into Water be to the fine of refraCtion as I to,
Ro Now if you fuppofe the point of incidence N to
move...
[ 128]
move from the point B, continually til! It come to T,
the Arch QF will firft increafe and then decreafe, and
fo will the Angle A X R which the rays A N and G R
- contain; and the Arch Q F and Angle A X R will be
biggeft when ND is to CN as KnTRR to 7/3 RR,
- in which cafe N E will be to N D as 2 R to I. Alfo the
Angle AYS which the rays A N and H S contain will
lirft decreafe, and then increafe and grow leaft when
N D is to C N as // iRrr to R R, in which cafe
M E will be to ND as 3 R toI. And fo the Angle which
■ the next emergent ray (that is, the emergent ray after
three reflexions ) contains with the incident ray A N
will come to its limit whenND is to CN as / ii-rr to
/A 5 RR, in which cafe N E will be to ND as 4R to I,
and the Angle which the ray next after that emergent,
that is, the ray emergent after four reflexions, con¬
tains with the incident will come to its limit, when
ND is to CN/ as /iErr to /A4 RR, in which cafe
JME will be to N D as 5 R to I; and fo on infinitely^
the numbers 3, 8,15, 14, &c. being gathered by conti¬
nual addition of the terms of the arithmetical progreffion
3,5,7,9,^. The truth of all this Mathematicians will
ceafily examine.
Now it is to be obferved, that as when the Sun comes
to his Tropicks, days increafe and decreafe but a very
little for a great while together ; fo when by increasing
;the diftance C D, thefe Angles come to their limits,
they vary their quantity but very little for fome time
together, and therefore a far greater number of the rays
which fall upon all the points N in the Quadrant
IBL, (hall emerge in the limits of thefe Angles,
..then in any other inclinations. And further it is
to
[ 129]
to be obferved, that the rays which differ in refrangi-
bility will have different limits of their Angles of emer¬
gence, and by confequence according to their different
degrees of refrangibility emerge mod copioufly in dif¬
ferent Angles, and being feparated from one another
appear each in their proper Colours. And what thole
Angles are may be eafily gathered from the foregoing
Theorem by computation.
For in the leaft refrangible rays the fines I and R (as
was found above) are 108 and 81, and thence by
computation the greateft Angle AXR will be found
4a degrees and a minutes, and the leaft Angle AYS,
go degr. and 57 minutes. And in the moft refrangible
rays the fines I and R are 109 and 81, and thence by
computation the greateft Angle AXR will be found
4.0 degrees and 17 minutes, and the leaft Angle AYS
54 degrees and 7 minutes.
Suppofe now that O is the Spedtator’s Eye, and OP a line fig
drawn parallel to the Sun's rays, and let P O E, P O F,
POG, POH, be Angles of 40 degr. 17 min. 4a degr.
2 min. 50 degr. 57 min. and 54 degr. 7 min. refpedtively,
and thefe Angles turned about their common fide O P,
ftiall with their other fidesOE, OF; OG, OH de-
defcribe the verges of two Rain-bows A F BE and
CHDG. For if E, F, G, H, be Drops placed any
where in the conical fuperficies defcribed by OE, OF,
O G, O H, and be illuminated by the Sun’s rays S E,
SF, SG, SH; the Angle SEO being equal to the
Angie POE or 40 degr. 17mm. ftiall be the greateft
Angle in which the moft refrangible rays can after one
reflexion be refradted to the Eye, and t herefore all the
Drops in the line O E {hall fend the moft refrangible
R rays
C r3° ]
rays mo ft copioufly to the Eye, and thereby ftrike the
fenles with the deepeft violet Colour in that region.
And in like manner the Angle SFO being equal to*
the Angle P O F, or 42 deg. 2 min, (hall be the greateft
in which the leaft refrangible rays after one reflexion
can emerge out of the Drops., and therefore thofe rays
fhafl come molt copioufly to the Eye from the Drops in
the line O F, and ftrike the fenfes with the deepeft red
Colour in that region. And by the fame armament,
the rays which have intermediate degrees of refrangibi-
lity fhall come molt copioufly from Drops between
E and F, and ftrike the fenfes with the intermediate
Colours in the order which their degrees of refrangibi-
lity require, that is, in the progrefs from E to F, or
from the infide of the Bow to the outiide in this order,
violet, indico, blue, green, yellow,orange, red. But the
violet, by the mixture of the white Light of the Clouds,
will appear faint and incline to purple.
Again, the Angle SCO being equal to Angle P O G,
or 50 gr. 51 min. fhall be the leaft Angle in which the
leaft refrangible rays can after two reflexions emerge out
of the Drops,and therefore the leaft refrangible rays fhall
come moft copioufly to the Eye from the Drops in the
lineOG, and ftrike the feme with the deepeft red in
that region. And the Angle S H O being equal to the
Angle P O H or 54 gr. 7 min. fhall be the leaft Angle in
which the moft refrangible rays after two reflections can
emerge out of the Drops, and therefore thofe rays fhall
come moft copioufly to the Eye from the Drops in the
line O H, and ftrike the fenfes with the deepeft violet in
that region. And by the fame argument, the Drops in
the regions between G and H fhall ftrike the fenfe with
the
[igi]
the intermediate Colours in the order which their de¬
grees of refrangibility require, that is, in the progress
from G to H, or from the infide of the Bow to the out-
fide in this order, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, in-
dico, violet. And fince thefe four lines O E, O F, O G.
O H, may be fituated any where in the above-mentioned
conical fuperficies, what is faid of the Drops and Co¬
lours in thefe lines is to be underftood of the Drops
and Colours every where in thofe fuperficies.
Thus fhall there be made two Bows of Colours, an
interior and ftronger, by one reflexion in the Drops,
and an exterior and fainter by two • for the Light be¬
comes fainter by every reflexion. And their Colours
fhall ly in a contrary order to one another, the red of
both Bows bordering upon the fpace G F which is be¬
tween the Bows. The breadth of the interior Bow
EOF meafured crofs the Colours fhall be I degr. 45 min.
and the breadth of the exterior GOH fhall be 3
degr. 1 o min. and the diftance between them GO F
fhall be 8 gr. 5 5 min. the greateft Semi-diameter of the
innermoft, that is, the Angle POF being 42 gr. a min.
and the lea ft Semi-diameter of the outermoft P O G, be¬
ing 50 gr. 57 min. Thefe are the meafures of the Bows,
as they would be were the Sun but a point; for by the
breadth of his Body the breadth of the Bows will be in-
creafed and their diftance decreafed by half a degree,
and fo the breadth of the interior Iris will be 2 degr.
* S min. that of the exterior 3 degr. 40 min. their dj~
ftance 8 degr. 35 min. the greateft Semi-diameter of the
interior Bow 42 degr. 17 min. and the leaft of the ex¬
terior 50 degr. 43 min. And fuch are the diraenfions
of the Bows in the Heavens found to be verv nearly,
2 when
when their Colours
[wy]
appear ftrong and perfect. For
once, by Inch means as I then had, I meafured the
greateft Semi-diameter of the interior Iris about 4a de¬
grees, the breadth of the red, yellow and green m that
Iris 63 or 64 minutes, betides the outmoft faint red ob-
fcured by brightnefs of the Clouds, for which we
may allow 3 or 4 minutes more. The breadth of the
blue was about 40 minutes more betides the violet,
which was fo much obfcured by the brightnefs of the
Clouds, that I could not meafure its breadth. But
fuppofing the breadth of the blue and violet together
to equal that of the red, yellow and green together, the
whole breadth of this Iris will be about a- degrees as
above. The leaft diftance between this Iris and the ex¬
terior Iris was about 8 degrees and 30 minutes. The ex¬
terior Iris was broader than the interior, but fo faint,
efpeciaily on the blue fide, that I could not meafure its
breadth diftindtly. At another time when both Bows
appeared more diftindt, I meafured the breadth of the
interior Iris 2 gr. 104 and the breadth of the red, yel¬
low and green in the exterior Iris, was to the breadth
of the fame Colours in the interior as 3 to a.
This Explication of the Rain-bow is yet further con¬
firmed by the known Experiment ( made by Antonins
de Domints and ‘Des-Cartes) of hanging up any where
in the Sun-fhine a G1 ifs-Globe filled with Water, and
viewing it in fuch a pofture that the rays which come
from the Globe to the Eye may contain with the Sun’s
rays an Angle of either 4a or 50 degrees. For if the
Angle be about 4a or 43 degrees, the Spectator ( fup-
pofe at O) (hall lee a full red Colour in that fide of the
Globe oppofed to the Sun as ’tis reprefented at F, and
if
[133]
if that Angle become lefs ( fuppofe by depreffing the
Globe to E ) there will appear other Colours, yellow,
green and blue fucceffively in the fame fide of the Globe.
But if the Angle be made about 50 degrees (fuppofe by
lifting up the Globe to G)there will appear a red Colour
in that fide of the Globe towards the Sun, and if the
Angle be made greater (fuppofe by lifting up the Globe
to H) the red will turn fucceffively to the other Colours
yellow, green and blue. The fame thing I have tried by
letting a Globe reft, and railing or depreffing the Eye,,
or otherwife moving it to make the Angle of a Juft
magnitude.
I have heard it reprefen ted, that if the Light of a
Candle be refracted by a Prifm to the Eye ; when the
blue Colour falls upon the Eye the Spectator ftiall fee
red in the Prifm, and when the red fills upon the Eye
he ftiall fee blue ; and if this were certain, the Colours
of the Globe and Rain-bow ought to appear in a con¬
trary order to what we find. But the Colours of the
Candle being very faint, the miftake feems to arife from
the difficulty of difcerning what Colours fall on the
Eye. For, on the contrary, I have fometimes had oc~
calion to obferve in the Sun’s Light refradted by a Prifm,
that the Spectator always fees that Colour in the Prifm
which falls upon his Eye. And the fame I have found
true alfo in Candle-Light. For when the Prifm is mo¬
ved ilowly from the line which is drawn diredtly from the
Candle to the Eye, the red appears fir ft in the Prifm and
then the blue, and therefore each of them is feen when
it falls upon the Eye. For the red paffes over the Eye
firft, and then the blue.
The
t134 3
The Light which comes through Drops of Rain by
two refractions without any reflexion, ought to appear
ftrongeft at the diftance of about a 6 degrees from the
Sun, and to decay gradually both ways as the diftance
from him increafes and decreafes. And the fame is to
be underftood of Light tranfmitted through fphericai
Hail-ftones. And if the Hail be a little flatted, as it
often is, the Light tranfmitted may grow fo ftrong at
a little left diftance than that of a6 degrees, as to form
a Halo about the Sun or Moon ; which Halo, as often
as the Hail-ftones are duly figured may be coloured,,
and then it muft be red within by the leaft refrangible
rays,and blue without by the moft refrangible ones,efpw
dally if the Hail-ftones have opake Globules of Snow in
their center to intercept the Light within the Halo ( as
Trlugemm has obferved) and make the infid e thereof more
diftinCbly defined than it would otherwife be. For
fuch Hail-ftones, though fphericai, by terminating the
Light by the Snow, may make a Halo red within and
colourlefs without, and darker in the red than with¬
out, as Halos ufe to be. For of thole rays which pa ft
clofe by the Snow the rubriform will be leaft refraCted,
and fo come to the Eye in the diredeft lines.
The Light which paffes through a Drop of rain after
two refradions, and three or more reflexions, is icarce
ftrong enough to caule a fen Able Bow j but in* thole Cy¬
linders of Ice by which Hugenim explains the Tewbelm
it may perhaps be fen fible.

PROP
» •"
C13 5II
PROP. X. PROS. V.

Bi the dijcovered'Properties $f Light to explain the per*


raanent Colours of natural Bodies.

Theie Colours arife from hence, that fome natural


Bodies reflect fome forts of rays, others other forts more
copioufly than the reft. Minium reflects the leaft re¬
frangible or red-making rays moft copioufty, and thence
appears red. Violets reflect the moft refrangible, moft
copioufly, and thence have their Colour, and fo of other
Bodies. Every Body reflects the rays of its own Colour
more copioufly than the reft, and from their excefs and
predominance in the reflected Light has its Colour.

EX PER. XV XL

For if the homogeneal Lights obtained by the folia¬


tion of the Problem propofed in the ^.th Propofition of
the firft Book you place Bodies of feveral Colours, you
will find, as X have done, that every Body looks moft
iplendid and luminous in the Light of its own Colour.
Cinnaber in the homogeneal red Light is moft refplen-
den-t, in the green Light it is manifeftly lefs refplen-
dent, and in the blue Light ftill left. Ind-ico in the
violet blue Light is moft refplendent, and its fplendor
is gradually diminiftied as it is removed thence by de¬
grees through the green and yellow Light to the red.
By a Leek the green Light, and next that the blue and,
yellow which compound green, are more ftrongly re¬
flected
flefted than the other Colours red and violet,and fo of the
reft. But to make thefe Experiments the more manifeft,
fuch Bodies ought to be chofen as have the fulleft and
moil vivid Colours, and two of thole Bodies are to be
compared together. Thus, for inftance, if Cinnaber
and ultra marine blue, or fome other full blue be
held together in the homogeneal Light, they will both
appear red, but the Cinnaber will appear of a ftrongly
luminous and refplendent red, and the ultra marine
blue of a faint obfcure and dark red; and if they be
held together in the blue homogeneal Light they will
both appear blue, but the ultra marine will appear of
a ftrongly luminous and refplendent blue, and the
Cinnaber of a faint and dark blue. Which puts it out
of difpute, that the Cinnaber reflects the red Light
much more copioully than the ultra marine doth, and
the ultra marine refledts the blue Light much more co-
pioufly than the Cinnaber doth. The fame Experiment
may be tryed fuccesfully with red Lead and Indico, or
with any other two coloured Bodies, if due allowance
be made for the different ftrength or weaknefs of their
Colour and Light.
And as the reafon of the Colours of natural Bodies is
evident by thefe Experiments, fo it is further confirmed
and put paft difpute by the two firft Experiments of the
firftBook, whereby ’twas proved in fuch Bodies that
the reflected Light which differ in Colours do differ alfo
in degrees of refrangibility. For thence it’s certain,
that fome Bodies refieft the more refrangible, others
the lefs refrangible rays more copioufly.

And
0371
And that this is not only a true reafon of thefe Co¬
lours, but even the only reafon may appear further
from this conlideration, that the Colour of homogeneal
Light cannot be changed by the reflexion of natural
Bodies.
For if Bodies by reflexion cannot in the leaf! change
. the Colour of any one fort of rays, they cannot appear
coloured by any other means than by reflecting thofe
which either are of their own Colour, or which by
mixture muft produce it.
But in trying Experiments of this kind care muft be
had that the Light be fufficiently homogeneal. For if
Bodies be illuminated by the ordinary prifmatick Co¬
lours, they will appear neither of their own day-light
Colours, nor of the Colour of the Light caft on them,
but of lbme middle Colour between both, as I have
found by Experience. Thus red Lead ( for inftance )
illuminated with the ordinary prifmatick green will
not appear either red or green, but orange or yellow,
or between yellow and green accordingly, as the green
Light by which ’tis illuminated is more or lefs com¬
pounded. For becaufe red Lead appears red when il¬
luminated with white Light, wherein all forts of rays
are equally mixed, and in the green Light all forts of
rays are not equally mixed, the excels of the yellow¬
making, green-making and blue-making rays in the
• incident green Light, will caufe thofe rays to abound
to much in the reflected Light as to draw the Colour
from red towards their Colour. And becaufe the red
Lead reflects the red-making rays moft copioufly in
proportion to their number, and next after them the
orange-making and yellow-making rays • thefe rays in
S the
[ x38 J
the refiefted Light will be more in proportion to the
Light than they were in the incident green Light, and
thereby will draw the reflected Light from green to¬
wards their Colour. And therefore the red Lead will ap¬
pear neither red nor green,butofaColour between both.
In tranfparently coloured Liquors ’tis obfervable,
that their Colour ufes to vary with their thicknefs.
Thus, for inftance, a red Liquor in a conical Glafs
held between the Light and the Eye, looks of a pale
and dilute yellow at the bottom where ’tis thin, and a
little higher where ’tis thicker grows orange,and where
’tis ftill thicker becomes red, and where ’tis thickeft
the red is deepeft and darkeft. For it is to be conceived
that fuch a Liquor flops the indico-making and violet-
making rays moft eafily, the blue-making rays more
difficultly, the green-making rays ftill more difficultly,
and the red-making moft difficultly : And that if the
thicknefs of the Liquor be only fo much as fuffices to
flop a competent number of the violet-making and in¬
dico-making rays, without diminifhing much the num¬
ber of the reft, the reft muft (by Prop. 6. Lib. a.) com¬
pound a pale yellow. But if the Liquor be fo much
thicker as to flop alfo a great number of the blue-making
rays, and fome of the green-making, the reft muft com¬
pound an orange ; and vrhere it is fo thick as to flop
alfo a great number of the green-making and a consi¬
derable number of the yellow-making, the reft muft
begin to compound a red, and this red muft grow deeper
and darker as the yellow making and orange-making
rays are more and more ftopt by increasing the thick¬
nefs of the Liquor, fo that few rays befides the red-
making can get through,,
Of
[ 139 ]
Of this kind is an Experiment lately related to me by
Mr. Halley, who, in diving deep into the Sea, found
in a clear Sundhine day, that when he was funk many
Fathoms deep into the Water, the upper part of his
Hand in which the Sun flione diredly through the
Water looked of a red Colour, and the under part of
his Hand illuminated by Light reflected from the Water
below looked green. For thence it may be gathered,
that the Seacwater reflects back the violet and blue¬
making rays moft eafily, and lets the red-making rays
pafs moft freely and copiouily to great depths. For
thereby the Sun’s direCt Light at all great depths, by
reafon of the predominating red-making rays, muft
appear red; and the greater the depth is, the fuller
and intenfer muft that red be. And at fuch depths as
the violet-making rays fcarce penetrate unto, the blue-
making, green-making and yellow-making rays being
reflected from below niore copiouily than the red~making
ones, muft compound a green.
Now if there be two Liquors of full Colours, fup-
pole a red and a blue, and both of them fo thick as
fuffices to make their Colours fufficiently full ; though
either Liquor be fufficiently tranfparent apart, yet
will you not be able to fee through both together. For
if only the red-making rays pafs through one Liquor,,
and only the blue-making through the other, no rays
can pafs through both. This Mr. Hook tried cafually
with Glafs-wedges filled with red and blue Liquors,
and was furprized at the unexpected event, the reafon
of it being then unknown ; which makes me truft the
more to his Experiment, though I have not tryed it
my felf. But he that would repeat it, muft take care
the Liquors be of very good and full Colours*
S a Now
[;4°]
Now whilft Bodies become coloured by reflecting or
tranfmitting this or that fort of rays more copioufly than
the reft, it is to be conceived that they ftop and ftifle in
themfelves the rays which they do not refledtor tranfmit.
For if Gold be foliated and held between your Eye and
the Light, the Light looks blue, and therefore maffy Gold
lets into its Body the blue-making rays to be refledted
to and fro within it till they be ft opt and ftifled, whilft
it refledts the yellow-making outwards, and thereby
looks yellow. And much after the fame manner that
Leaf-gold is yellow by refledted, and blue by tranfmit-
ted Light, and maffy Gold is yellow in all politions of
the Eye; there are l'ome Liquors as the tindture of
Lignum JSTephritiam, and iome forts of Glai's which
tranfmit one fort of Light mod copioufly, and refiedt
another fort, and thereby look of feveral Colours, ac¬
cording to the polition of the Eye to the Light. But if
thele Liquors or Glaffes were lb thick and maffy that
no Light could get through them, I queftion not but
that they would like-all other opake Bodies appear of
one and the fame Colour in all politions of the Eye,
though this I cannot yet affirm by experience. For all
coloured Bodies, fo far as my Oblervation reaches, may
be feen through if made fufficiently thin, and therefore
are in fome meafure tranlparent, and differ only in de¬
grees of tranfparency from tinged tranfparent Liquors3
thefe Liquors, as well as thole Bodies, by a fumcient
thicknefs becoming opake. A tranlparent Body which
looks of any Colour by tranfmitted Light, may aifo
look of the lame Colour by refledted Light, the Light
of that Colour being refledted by the further furface of
the Body, orby the Air beyond it. And then the t e-
fledted Colour will be diminiihed, and perhaps ceafe, by
making
[ H1 ]
making the Body very thick, and pitching it on the
back-fide to diminiih the reflexion of its further furface,
io that the Light reflected from the tinging particles
may predominate. In fuch cafes, the Colour of the re¬
flected Light will be apt to vary from that of the Light
tranfmitted. But whence it is that tinged Bodies and
Liquors reflect lbme fort of rays, and intromit or trank
mit other forts, lhall be laid in the next Book. In this
Propofition I content my felf to have put it paft difpute,
that Bodies have fuch Properties, and thence appear
coloured.

PROP. XL P ROB. VI.

% mixing coloured Lights to compound a Beam of Light


of the fame Colour and Nature sjuith a Beam of the Suns-
direS Lght, and therein to experience the truth of the
foregoing Brogofit ions.

Let AB Gabc reprefent a Prifm by which the Sun's Fig-


Light let into a dark Chamber through the Hole F, may .
be refracted towards the Lens M N, and paint upon it
at p, q, r, s and t, the ufual Colours violet, blue, green,
yellow and red,, and let the diverging rays by the re-
fradtion of this Lens converge again towards X, and
there,by the mixture of all thole their Colours,compound:
a white according to what was fliewn above. Then let
another Prifm DEG deg, parallel to the former, be
placed at X, to refraft that white Light upwards to¬
wards Y. Let the refracting Angles of the Prilins,
and their diftances from the Lens be equal, fo that the
rays which, converged from the Lens towards X, and
without refraction, would there have eroded and. diver¬
ged again, may by the refraction of the fecond Prifm be.
reduced
[ H2 J
reduced into Parallelifm and diverge no more. For
then thofe rays will recompofe a Beam of white Light
X Y, If the refradling Angle of either Prifm be the
bigger, that Prifm mull be fo much the nearer to the
Lens. You will know when the Prifms and the Lens
are well fet together by obferving if the Beam of Light
X Y which comes out of the fecond Prifm be perfectly
white to the very edges of the Light, and at all diftan-
ces from the Prifm continue perfedlly and totally white
like a Beam of the Sun’s Light. For till this happens,
the politico of the Prifms and Lens to one another mull
be corredled, and then if by the help of a long Beam of
Wood, as is reprefented in the Figure, or by a Tube,
or fome other fuch inftrument made for that purpofe,
they be made fall in that fituation, you may try all the
fame Experiments in this compounded Beam of Light-
X Y, which in the foregoing Experiments have been
made in the Sun’s diredt Light. For this compounded
Beam of Light has the fame appearance, and is endowed
with all the fame Properties with a diredt Beam of the
Sun’s Light, fo far as my Obfervation reaches. And in
trying Experiments in this Beam you may by flopping
any of the Colours p, q, r, s and t, at the Lens, fee how
the Colours produced in the Experiments are no other
than thofe which the rays had at the Lens before they
entered the compolition ot this Beam : And by confe-
queued that they arife not from any new modifications
of the Light by refradtions and reflexions, but from the
various feparations and mixtures of the rays originally
endowed with their colour-making qualities.
So, for Alliance, having with a Lens \\ Inches broad,
and two Prifms on either Hand 6~ Feet diftant from the
Lens, made fuch a Beam of compounded Light: to
examin
C 143 ]
examin the reafon of the Colours made by Prifrns, I
refraded this compounded Beam of Light X Y with
another Prilfn HIK k h, and thereby eaft the ufual prift
matick Colours PQRST upon the Paper LV placed be¬
hind, And then by flopping any of the Colours p, q,
r, s, t, at the Lens, I found that the fame Colour would
vanifh at the Paper. So if the purple P was flopped at
the Lens, the purple P upon the Paper would vanifh,
and the reft of the Colours would remain unaltered,
unlefs perhaps the blue, fo far as fome purple latent in
it at the Lens might be feparated from it by the foL
lowing refradions. And fo by intercepting the green;
upon the Lens, the green R upon the Paper would va-
nilh, and fo of the reft ; which plainly fhews, that as
the white Beam of Light X Y was compounded of fe~
ve Lights varioufly coloured at the Lens, fo the Co¬
lours which afterwards emerge out of it by new refra-
dions are no other than thofe of which its whitenefs
was compounded. Therefradion of the Prifm HI K
kh generates the Colours PQRST upon the Paper,
not by changing the colorific qualities of the rays, but
by feparating the rays which had the very fame colorific
qualities before they entered the compofition of the re-
fraded Beam white of Light XY. For otherwife the rays
which were of one Colour at the Lens might be of ano¬
ther upon the Paper, contrary to what we find*
So again, to examin the reafon of the Colours of na^
tural Bodies, I placed fuch Bodies in the Beam of Light
XY, and found that they all appeared there of thofe
their own Colours which they have in Day-light, and
that thofe Colours depend upon the rays which had the:
lame Colours at the Lens before they, entred the compo¬
fition.
[ H4- ]
fition of that Beam. Thus, for inftance,Cinnaber illumi¬
nated by this Beam appears of the fame red Colour as in
Day-light • and if at the Lens you intercept the green-
making and blue-making rays, its rednefs will become
more full and lively : But if you there intercept the red-
making rays, it will not any longer appear red, but be¬
come yellow or green, or of ibme other Colour, accor¬
ding to the forts of rays which you do not intercept.
So Gold in this Light X Y appears of the fame yellow
Colour as in Day-light, but by intercepting at the Lens a
due quantity of the yellow-making rays it will appear
white like Silver (as I have tryed) which fhews that its
yellownefs arifes from the excels of the intercepted rays
tinging that whitenefs with their Colour when they are
let pals. So the infulion of Lignum JSfef hriticum (as I
have alfo tryed) when held in this Beam of Light X Y,
looks blue by the reflected part of the Light, and yellow
by the tranfmitted part of it, as when Yis viewed in Day¬
light, but if you intercept the blue at the Lens the infu¬
lion will lofe its reflected blue Colour, whilft its tranf-
rnitted red remains perfect and by the lofs of fome blue-
making rays wherewith it was allayed becomes morein-
tenfe and full. And, on the contrary, if the red and orange¬
making rays be intercepted at Lens, the infulion will
lofe its tranfmitted red, whilft its blue will remain and
become more full and perfect. Which fhews, that the in¬
fulion does not tinge the rays with blue and yellow, but
only tranfmit thole moft copiouily which were red-ma¬
king before, and reflects thole moft copiouily which were
blue-making before. And after the fame manner may the
realons of other Phenomena be examined, by trying
them in this artificial Beam of Light X Y.
THE
Book I. Part B. Plate 1
Book I. Part E. Plate I.
Book 1, Part H Plate H.
-BookI. Part CL Plate E.
BookL Part K. Plate IE.
*7&7U
i m

cr'

T_

7
' ^
:: '

■ : .j
- f' s[

'

.

'
Book I. Part R. Plate %
Book L Part E.J'kte b",
m
THE

SECOND BOOK

OPTICKS.
PART I.

, .
Observations concerning the Reflexions Refratlionsy and
Colours of thin tranjfarent Bodies

I T has been obferved by others that tranfparent


Subftances, as Giafs, Water, Air, l$c. when made
very thin by being blown into Bubbles, or otherwife
formed into Plates, do exhibit various Colours accor¬
ding to their various thinnefs, although at a greater
thicknefs they appear very clear and colourlefs. In
the former Book I forbore to treat of thefe Colours,
becaufe they feemed of a more difficult coniideration,
and were not neceffary for eftabliffiing the Properties
of Light there difcourfed of. But becaufe they may
conduce to further difcoveries for completing the
Theory of Light, efpecially as to the conftitution of
the parts of natural Bodies, on which their Colours or
I ranlparency depend; I have here let down an ac¬
count of them. To render this Difcourfe fjiort and
diftindd, I have firft defcribed the principal of my
Aa ' ' Obfer-
[23
Obfervations, and then coniidered and made ufe of
them. The Obfervations are thefe.

O B 3. I.

Compreiiing two Prifms hard together that their


Sides (which by chance were a very little convex)might
fomewhere touch one another: I found the place in
which they touched to become abfolutely tranfparent,
as if they had there been one continued piece of Glafs.
For when the Light fell fo obliquely on the Air, which
in other places was between them,as to be all reflected ;
it feemed in that place of contact to be wholly tranf-
mitted, infomuch that when looked upon, it appeared
like a black or dark Spot, by reafon that little or no
fenfible Light was reflected from thence, as from other
places; and when looked through it feemed (as it were)
a hole in that Air which was formed into a thin Plate,
by being compreffed between the Glades. And through
this hole Objects that were beyond might be feen di-
ftinCtly, which could not at all be feen through other
parts of the Glaffes where the Air was interjacent. Al¬
though the Glaffes were a little convex, yet this trans¬
parent Spot was of a conflderable breadth,which breadth
feemed principally to proceed from the yielding inwards
of the parts of the Glaffes, by reafon of their mutual
preffure. For by preffing them very hard together it
would become much broader than other wife.

OBS.
[9]
O B S. II.

When the Plate of Air, by turning the Prifms about


their common Axis, became fo little inclined to the in¬
cident Rays, that fome of them began to be tranfmit-
ted, there arofe in it many {lender Arcs of Colours
which at firft were (haped almoft like the Conchoid,
as you fee them delineated in the firft Figure, Arid Fig*
by continuing the motion of the Prifms, thefe Arcs in-
creafed and bended more and more about the faid trans¬
parent Spot, till they were completed into Circles or
Rings incompaffing it, and afterwards continually grew
more and more contracted.
Thefe Arcs at their firft appearance were of a violet f
and blue Colour, and between them were white Arcs
of Circles, which prefently by continuing the motion of
the Prifms became a little tinged in their inward Limbs
with red and yellow, and to their outward Limbs the \\
blue was adjacent. So that the order of thefe Colours
from the central dark Spot, was at that time white,
blue, violet ; black; red, orange, yellow, white, blue,
violet, teV. But the yellow and red were much fainter
than the blue and violet.
The motion of the Prifms about their Axis being con¬
tinued, thefe Colours contracted more and more,(brink-
ing towards the whitenefs on either fide of it, until they
totally vaniftied into it. And then the Circles in thole
parts appeared black and white, without any other Co¬
lours intermixed. But by further moving the Prifins
about, the Colours again emerged out of the whitenefs,
the violet and blue as its inward Limb, and at its out-
A -a a ward
ward Limb the red and yellow. So that now their order
from the central Spot was white, yellow, red; black ;
violet, blue, white, yellow, red, &c. contrary to what
it was before.

O B S. III.

When the Rings or fome parts of them appeared only


black and white, they were very diftinft and well de¬
fined, and the backnefs feemed as intenfe as that of
the central Spot. Alfo in the borders of the Rings,
where the Colours began to emerge out of the whiter
nefs, they were pretty diftind, which made them vi-
fible to a very great Multitude. I have fometimes
numbred above thirty Succeffions ( reckoning every
black and white Ring for one Succeffion) and feen
more of them, which by reafon of their final nefs I could
not number. But in other Petitions of the Prifms, at
which the Rings appeared of many Colours, I could not
diftinguifh above eight or nine of them, and the exte¬
rior of thofe were very eonfufed and dilute.
In thefe two Obfervations to fee the Rinps diftindh
and without any other Colour than black and white,!
found it neceffary to hold my Eye at a good diflance
from them. For by approaching nearer, although in the
fame inclination of my Eye to the plane of the Rings^
there emerged a blueifh Colour out of the white,
which by dilating it felf more and more into the black
rendred the Circles lefs diftindt, and left the white a
little tinged with red and yellow. I found alfo by
looking through a flit or oblong hole , which was
narrower than the Pupil of my Eye, and held dole to
it parallel to the Prifms, I could fee the Circles much
diftindter and vifible to a far greater number than
otherwife.

O B S. IV.

To obferve more nicely by the order of the Colours


which arofe out of the white Circles as the Rays be¬
came lefs and lefs inclined to the plate of Air; 1 took
two Object Glaffes, the one a Plano-convex for a four¬
teen-foot Telefcope, and the other a large double con¬
vex for one of about fifty-foot; and upon this,laying the
other with its its plane-fide downwards, I prefled them
flowly together,to make the Colours fuccefftvely emerge
in the middle of the Circles, and then flowly lifted
the upper Glafs from the lower to make them fuccef¬
fively vanifh again in the fame place. The Colour,,
which by prefling the Glaffes together emerged laft in
the middle of the other Colours, would upon its ftrft
appearance look like a Circle of a Colour almoft uni¬
form from the circumference to the center, and by
comprefling the Glaffes ftill more, grow continually
broader until a new Colour emerged in its center, and
thereby it became a Ring encompaffing that new Co¬
lour. And by comprefling the Glaffes ftill more, the
Diameter of this Ring would encreafe, arid the breadth
of its Orbit or Perimeter decreafe until another new*
Colour emerged in the center of the laft: And fo on
until a third, a fourth, a fifth, and other following
new Colours fucceffively emerged there, and became
Rings encompaffing the innernloft Colour]' the laft of.
which was the black Spot. And] on the contrary, by
JJ
lifting up the upper Glafs from the lower, the diameter
of the Rings would decreafe, and the breadth of their
Orbit encreafe, until their Colours reached fucceflively
to the center ; and then they being of a confiderable
breadth, I could more eafily difcern and diftinguifli
their Species than before. And by this means I ob-
ferved their Succeffion and Quantity to be as fol-
loweth.
Next, to the pellucid central Spot made by the con-
tafit of the Glaffes fucceeded blue, white, yellow, and
red, the blue was fo little in quantity that I could not
difcern it in the circles made by the Prifms, nor could
I well diftinguifli any violet in it, but the yellow and
red were pretty copious, and feemed about as much
in extent as the white, and four or five times more
than the blue. The next Circuit in order of Colours
immediately encompaffing thefie were violet, blue,
green, yellow, and red, and thefe were all of them co¬
pious and vivid, excepting the green, which was very
little in quantity, and feemed much more faint and
dilute than the other Colours. Of the other four, the
violet was the leaft in extent, and the blue lefs than
the yellow or red. The third Circuit or Order was
purple, blue, green, yellow, and red 5 in which the
purple feemed more reddifh than the violet in the
former Circuit, and the green was much more confpi-
cuous, being as brifque and copious as any of the other
Colours, except the yellow; but the red began to be
a little faded, inclining very much to purple. After
this fucceeded the fourth Circuit of green and red. The
green was very copious and lively, inclining on the one
fide to blue, and on the other fide to yellow. But in
this
Gy] ,
this fourth Circuit there was neither violet, blue, nor
yellow, and the red was very imperfect and dirty,
Alfo the fucceeding Colours became more and more im¬
perfect and dilute, till after three or four Revolutions
they ended in perfect whitenefs. Their Form, when the
Glaffes were molt compreffed fo as to make the black
Spot appear in the Center, is delineated in the Second
Figure; where «, r, n', e o, /a, i, h : /, w,«, o, p? 7, r: Fig.
j, t: V,x:y denote the Colours reck’ned in order from
the center, black, blue, white, yellow, red : violet,
blue, green, yellow, red : purple, blue, green, yellow,
red : green, red : greenilh blue, red : greenilh blue,
pale red : greenilh blue, reddilh white.

O B S. V.

To determine the interval of the Glaffes, or thick-


nefs of the interjacent Air, by which each Colour was
produced, I meafured the Diameters of the firft fix \\
Rings at the moil lucid part of their Orbits, and fqua-
ring them, I found their Squares to be in the Arith¬
metical Progreffion of the odd Numbers, 1.3.5.7.9.11,
And fince one of thefe Glaffes was Plain, and the other
Spherical, their Intervals at thofe Rings muft be in the
fame Progreffion. I meafured alfo the Diameters of
the dark or faint Rings between the more lucid Co¬
lours, and found their Squares to be in the Arithme¬
tical Progreffion of the even Numbers, 2.4.6. 8.10. 1 a.
And it being very nice and difficult to take thefe mea-
fures exactly; I repeated them at divers times at divers
parts of the Glaffes, that by their Agreement I might
be confirmed in them. And the fame Method I ufed in
deter-
[8]
determining fome others of the following Obfem^
tipns.

OBS, VI.

The Diameter of the fixth Ring at the mod lucid


part of its Orbit was ^ parts of an Inch, and the Dia¬
meter of the Sphere on which the double convex Ob-
jeCLGlafs was ground wras about 102 Feet, and hence
I gathered the thicknefs of the Air or Aereal Interval
of the Glades at that Ring. But fome time alter, fuf-
pefting that in making this Obfervation 1 had not de¬
termined the Diameter of the Sphere with fuffident ac-
curatenefs, and being uncertain whether the Plano¬
convex Glafs was truly plain, and not fomething con¬
cave or convex on that fide which I accounted plain;
and whether I had not prefied the Glades together, as
I often did, to make them touch (for by preding Inch
Glades together their parts eafily yield inwards, and
the Rings thereby become fendbly broader than they
would be, did the Glades keep their Figures) I re¬
peated the Experiment , and found the Diameter of
the fixth lucid Ring about parts of an Inch. I re¬
peated the Experiment alio with fuch an ObjeCt-Glais
of another Telefcope as I had at hand. This was a double
convex ground on both fides to one and the lame
Sphere, and its Focus was diftant from it 8^ Inches.
And thence, if the Sines of incidence and refraction of
the bright yellow Light be affumed in proportion as
II to i y, the Diameter of the Sphere to which the
Glafs was figured will by computation be found 18 2 In¬
ches. This Glafs I laid upon a fiat one, fo that the
1 black
m
black Spot appeared in the middle of the Rings of Colours
without any other preffure than that of the weight of
the Glafs. And now meafuring the Diameter of the
fifth dark Circle as accurately as 1 could, I found it the
fifth part of an Inch precifely. This meafure was taken
with the points of a pair of Compaffes on the upper fui>
face on the upper Glafs, and my Eye was about eight
or nine Inches diftance from the Glafs, almoft perpen¬
dicularly over it, and the Glafs wTas \ of an Inch thick,
and thence it is eafy to colled! that the true Diameter
of the Ring between the Glaffes was greater than its
meafured Diameter above the Glaffes in the proportion
of 80 to 79 or thereabouts, and by confequence equal
to ~ parts of an Inch, and its true Semi-diameter equal
to ~ parts. Now as the Diameter of the Sphere (18a In¬
ches) is to the Semi-diameter of this fifth dark Ring
( — parts of an Inch) io is this Semi-diameter to the0
thicknefs of the Air at this fifth dark Ring; which fe
therefore or mm Parts an Inch, and the fifth
part thereof; viz. the ^7th part of an Inch, is the
thicknefs of the Air at the firft of thefe dark Rings;
The fame Experiment { repeated with another dou¬
ble convex ObjedTgiafs ground on both fides to one and
the fame Sphere. Its Focus was diftant from it 168-
Inches, and therefore the Diameter of that Sphere was
184 Inches. This Glafs being laid upon the fame
plain Glafs, the Diameter of the fifth of the dark
Rings, when the black Spot in their center appeared
plainly without preffing the Glaffes, was by the mea-
fure of the Compafies upon the upper Glais im parts
of an Inch, and by confequence between the Glaffes it
was|~, For the upper Glafs was § of an Inch thick,
Bb and
and my Eye was diftant from it 8 Inches. And a third
proportional to half this from the Diameter of the
Sphere is ^ parts of an Inch. This is therefore the
thicknefs of the Air at this Ring, and a fifth part there¬
of, viz. the g^-th part of an Inch is the thicknefs there¬
of at the firft of the Rums
o as above.
,
I tryed the fame thing by laying thefe Objeft-Glaffes
upon Hat pieces of a broken Looking-glafs, and found
the fame meafures of the Rings : Which makes me
rely upon them till they can be determined more ac¬
curately by Glades ground to larger Spheres, though
in fuch Glafies greater care muft be taken of a true
nil.
Thefe Dimen fioris were ta n when my Eye was
placed almoft perpendicularly over the Glades, being
about an Inch, or an Inch and a quarter, diftant from
° the incident rays, and eight Inches diftant from the
Glafs; fo that the rays were inclined to the Glafs in an
Angle of about \ degrees. Whence by the following
Observation you will underftand, that had the rays
been perpendicular to the Glades, the thicknefs of the
Air at thefe Rings would have been lefs in the propor¬
tion of the Radius to the lecant of 4 degrees, that is of
loooo. Let the thicknedes found be therefore dimi-
nilhed in this proportion, and they will become and
or ( to ufe the neareft round number) the8~th
part of an Inch. This is the thicknefs of the Air at the
darkeft part of the firft dark Ring made by perpendi¬
cular rays, and half this thicknefs multiplied by the
progredion,i,3,5,7,,9,1 i,l5>c. gives the thicknedes of the
Air at the mod: luminous parts of all the brighteft
Rings, vk. ^3i7C)OO05- IJtiQCQ) IJijCCO? *70000?.
i9V\ their arithmetical
means.
[II]
means — 0c. being its thiekneffes at the
darkeft parts of all the dark ones.

obs, vir.
The Rings were leaft when my Eye was placed per¬
pendicularly over the Glaffes in the Axis of the Rings :
And when I viewed them obliquely they became big¬
ger, continually fwelling as I removed my Eye further
trom the Axis. And partly by meafuring the Diameter
ol the fame Circle at feveral obliquities of my Eye,
partly by other means, as alio by making ule of the
two Frilms for very great obliquities. I found its Dia¬
meter, and confequently the thicknefs of the Air at its
perimeter in all thole obliquities to be very nearly in the
proportions expreffed in this Table.
Angle of In- Angle of Re¬ Diameter of Thicknefs of
cidence on the fraction into the Ring, the Air.
Air, the Air.

deg. min. f. 1 >


OO OO OO OO IO IO
06 26 IO OO
O

*°iS
12 45 20 OO Ici I0i .
18 49 3° OO IO; Hi
24 3° 4° OO I l| *3
29 37 5° OO 151 I
33 58 60 OO 14 20

35 47 65 00
*5?
37 l9 70 OO 16|
38 33 75 OO J94 37
39 27 SO OO 22f 5^
40 OO 85 OO 29 84,-; 1
40 11 90 OO j 35 I 2 2l St
[12]
In th&tfco firftColumns are e&preffed the obliquities
of the incident and emergent rays to the plate of the
Air, that is, their angles of incidence and refraction. In
the third Column the Diameter of any coloured Ring
at thole obliquities is expreffed in parts, of which ten
conftitute that Diameter when the rays are perpendicu¬
lar. And in the fourth Column the thicknefs of the Air
at the circumference of that Ring is expreffed in parts
of which alio ten conftitute that thicknefs when the rays
ate perpendicular..
And from thefe meafures I feem to gather this Rule :
That the thicknefs of the Air is proportional to the fe-
cantwof an angle, whole Sine is a certain mean proper-
tionai between the Sines of incidence and refraCtionr
And that mean proportional, lb far as by thefe meafures
I can determine it, is the firft of an hundred and fix
arithmetical mean proportionals between thofe Sines
counted from the Sine of refraction when the refra¬
ction is made out of the Glafs into the plate of Air, or
from the Sine of incidence when the refraCtion is
made out of the plate of Air into the Glafs.
| • J I j - l | . O OC | (*-j- - i f
-• 1 ‘ O B S. ¥ 11L V ; - -
\ 1 ! ^ i 1 O ay : ; *

The dark Spot in the middle of the Rings increafed


alfo by the obliquation of the Eye, although almoft in-
fenlibly. But if inftead of the Object-Glades the Prifms
were madeufeof, itsincreafe was more manifeft when
¥iewed fo obliquely that no Colours appeared about it.
It was leaft when the rays were incident moft obliquely
on the interjacent Air, and as the obliquity decreafed
it increafed more and more until the coloured Rings ap-
hi peared.
peared, and then decreafed again,1 but not fo much as
it increafed before. And hence it is evident, that the
tranfparency was not only at the abfolute contact of the
Glaffes, but alfo where they had feme little interval.
I have fometimes obferved the Diameter of that Spot to
be between half and two fifth parts of the Diameter of
the exterior circumference of the red in the firft cir¬
cuit or revolution of Colours when viewed almoft per¬
pendicularly ; whereas when viewed obliquely it hath
wholly vanifhed and become opake and white like the
other parts of theGlafs; whence it may be collected
that the Glaffes did then fcarcely, or not at all, touch
one another, and that their interval at the perimeter
of that Spot when viewed perpendicularly was about a
fifth or fixth part of their interval at the circumference
of the faid red.

O B S. IX
. '' f . { i , V f u - ’ ' . t
• - - 'jj'..! : ■' „; 'J • f\ : * : . i :■ - " •; V; ; *; , ; -■

By ■ looking through the two contiguous Obje£L


Glaffes, I found that the interjacent Air exhibited Rings
of Colours, as well by tranfmitting Light as by reflect¬
ing it. The central Spot was now white, and from it
the order of the Colours were yellowife red; black ;
violet, blue, white, yellow, red; violet, blue, green,
yellow, red, bv. But thefe Colours were very faint
and dilute unlefs when the Light was trajefted very
obliquely through the Glaffes : For by that means they
became pretty vivid. Only the fir ft yellowife red, like
the blue in tire fourth Obfervation, was fo little and
faint as fcarcely to be difcerned. Comparing the co¬
loured Rings made by reflexion , with thefe made by
tranff
[1+]
tranfmiffion of the Light; I found that white was op-
polite to black, red to blue, yellow to violet, and green
to a compound of red and violet. That is, thofe parts
of the Glals were black when looked through, which
when looked upon appeared white, and on the con¬
trary. And fo thofe which in one cafe exhibited blue,
did in the other cafe exhibit red. And the like of the
Fig. 5. other Colours. The manner you have reprefen ted in
the third Figure, where AB, CD, are the furfaces of
the daffes contiguous at E, and the black lines be¬
tween them are their diffances in arithmetical progrel-
lion, and the Colours written above are feen by re¬
flected Light, and thofe below by Light tranfmitted.

O B S. X.

Wetting the ObjeCt-Glaffes a little at their edges,


the water crept in (lowly between them, and the Cir¬
cles thereby became lels and the Colours more ^ faint :
Infomuch that as the water crept along one half of
them at which it firft arrived would appear broken off
from the other half, and contracted into a lets room.
By meafuring them I found the proportions of their
Diameters to the Diameters of the like Circles made by
Air to be about leven to eight, and conlequently the in¬
tervals of the Glaffes at like Circles, cauled by thofe
two mediums Water and Airfare as about three to four.
Perhaps it may be a general Rule, That if any other
medium more or lefs denfe than water be compreffed
between the Glaffes, their intervals at the Rings caufed
thereby will be to their intervals caufed by interjacent
[!$]
Air, as the Sines are which meafure the refraction made
out of that medium into Air.

OBS. XI.

When the water was between the Glalfes, if I pref-


fed the upper Glafs varioufly at its edges to make the*
Rings move nimbly from one place to another, a little
white Spot would immediately follow the center of
them, which upon creeping in of the ambient water
into that place would prefently vanifh. Its appearance
was fuch as interjacent Air would have caufed, and it
exhibited the fame Colours. But it was not Air, for
where any bubbles of Air were in the water they would
not vanifh. The reflexion mult have rather been caufed
by a fubtiler medium,, which could recede through the
Glalfes at the creeping in of the water.

O B S. XIL

Thefe Obfervations were made in the open Air. But-


further to examin the effects of coloured Light falling
on the Glalfes, I darkened the Room, and viewed them
by reflexion of the Colours of a Prifm call on a Sheet:
of white Paper,. my .Eye being fo placed that I cou ld
fee the coloured Paper by reflexion in the Glalfes, as
in a Looking-glafs. And by this means the Rings be¬
came diftinfter and vilible to a far greater number than
in the open Air. I have fometimes feen more than
twenty of them, whereas in the open Air I could not
difcern above eight or nine.
O B S. XIII.

Appointing an afliftant to move the Prifm to and


fro about its Axis, that all the Colours might fuccef-
fively fall on that part of the Paper which I faw by
reflexion from that part of the Glades, where the Cir¬
cles appeared, fo that all the Colours might be fuccef-
fively reflected front the Circles to my Eye whilft I held
it immovable, I found the Circles which the red Light
made to be manifeftly bigger than thofe which were
made by the blue and violet. And it was very plea-
fant to fee them gradually fwell or contradt according
as the Colour of the Light was changed. The inter¬
val of the Glades at any of the Rings when they were
made by the utmoft red Light, was to their interval at
the fame Ring when made by the utmoft violet, greater
than as 3 to a, and lefs than as 13 to 8,by the mod of my
Obfervations it was as 14 to 9. And this proportion
feemed very nearly the lame in all obliquities of my
Eye 3 unlefs when two Prifms were made ufe of inftead
of the Obje6f-Glades.: For then at a' certaimgreat
obliquity of my Eye, the Rings made by the feveral
Colours feemed equal, and at a greater obliquity thofe
made by the violet would be greater than the fame
Rings made by the red. The refraction of the Prifm
in this cafe caufing the mod: refrangible rays to fall
more obliquely on that plate of the Air than the lead:
refrangible ones. Thus the Experiment fucceeded in
the coloured Light, which was fufficiently ftrong and
copious to make the Rings fenflble. And thence it
maybe gathered, that if the moft refrangible and leaft
refran*
[ J7 ]
refrangible rays had been copious enough to make the
Rings fenfible without the mixture of other rays, the
.proportion which here was 14 to 9 would have been a
little greater, fuppofe 14 ~ or 14 l to 9.

O B S. XIV.

Whilft the Prifm was turn'd about its Axis with an


uniform motion, to make all the feveral Colours fall
fucceffively upon the ObjeCt rGlaffes, and thereby to
make the Rings contract: and dilate : The contraction
or dilation of each Ring thus made by the variation of
its Colour was fwifteft in the red, and iloweft in the
violet, and in the intermediate Colours it had inter¬
mediate degrees of celerity. Comparing the quantity
of contraction and dilation made by all the degrees of
each Colour, I found that it was greateft in the red ;
lefs in the yellow, (till lefs in the blue, and leaft in the
violet. And to make as juft an eftimation as 1 could of the
proportions of their contractions or dilations, I obferved
that the whole contraction or dilation of the Diameter
of any Ring made by all the degrees of red, was to that
of the Diameter of the fame Ring made by all the de¬
grees of violet, as about four to three, or five to four, and
that when the Light was of the middle Colour between
yellow and green, the Diameter of the Ring was very
nearly an arithmetical mean between the greateft Dia¬
meter of the fame Ring made by the outmoft red, and
the leaft Diameter thereof made by the outmoft violet:
Contrary to what happens in the Colours of the oblong
SpeCtrum made by the refraCtion of a Prifm, where the
red is moft contracted, the violet moft expanded, and
Dd m
[i8]
in the midft of all the Colours is the confine of green
and blue. And hence I feem to colled that the thick-
neffes of the Air between the Glaffes there., where the
Ring is lucceffively made by the limits of the five prin¬
cipal Colours (red, yellow, green, blue, violet) in order
(that is, by the extreme red, by the limit of red and
yellow in the middle of the orange, by the limit of
yellow and green, by the limit of green and blue, by
the limit of blue and violet in the middle of the in-
digo, and by the extreme violet) are to one another
very nearly as the fix lengths of a Chord which found
the notes in a fixth Major, fol, la, mi, fa, fol, la. But
it agrees fomething better with the Obiervation to fay,
that the thicknefies of the Air between the Glaffes there,
where the Rings are fucceffively made by the limits of
the feven Colours, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, in¬
digo, violet in order, are to one another as the Cube-
roots of the Squares of the eight lengths of a Chord,
which found the notes in an eighth, fol, la, fa, fol, la,
mi, fa, fol ; that is, as the Cube-roots of the Squares
of the Numbers, i, f, % \ \ \ ^ \.

O B S. XV.

Thefe Rings were not of various Colours like thole


made in the open Air, but appeared all over of that
prifmatique Colour only with which they were illu¬
minated. And by projecting the prifmatique Colours
immediately upon the Glaffes, I found that the Light
which fell on the dark Spaces which were between
the coloured Rings , was tranfmitted through the
Glaffes without any variation of Colour. For on a
white
[I91
white Paper placed behind, it would paint Rings of
the fame Colour with thofe which were reflected, and
/

of the bignefs of their immediate Spaces. And from


thence the origin of thefe Rings is manifeft; namely,
That the Air between the Glaffes, according to its va¬
rious thicknefs, is difpofed in fome places to reflect,
and in others to tranimit the Light of any one Co¬
lour (as you may fee reprefented in the fourth Figure) fig, ^
and in the fame place to reflect that of one Colour
where it tranfmits that of another.

O B S. XVI.1

The Squares of the Diameters of thefe Rings made


by any prilmatique Colour were in arithmetical pro-
greflion as in the fifth Obfervation. And the Diameter
of the fixth Circle, when made by the citrine yellow,
and viewed almoft perpendicularly, was about s~ parts
of an Inch, or a little lefs, agreeable to the fixth Ob¬
fervation. ■
The precedent Obfervations were made with a rarer
thin medium, terminated by a denfer, fuch as was Air
or Water compreffed between two Glaffes. In thofe
that roliow are fet down the appearances of a denfer
medium thin’d within a rarer, fuch as are plates of
Muicovy-glafs, Bubbles of Water, and fome other thin
fubftances terminated on all fides with Air. -

, Dd a 0 B 3.
O B S. XVII.

If a Bubble be blown with Water firfl: made tenacious


by diffolving a little Soap in it, ?tis a common Obfer¬
vation, that after a while it will appear tinged with a
great variety of Colours, To defend thefe Bubbles
from being agitated by the external Air (whereby their
Colours are irregularly moved one among another, fe
that no accurate Obfervation can be made of them,) as
foon as I had blown any of them I covered it with a
clear Glafs, and by that means its Colours emerged in
a very regular order, like fo many concentrick Rings
incompaffing the top of the Bubble. And as the
Bubble grew thinner by the continual fubfiding of the
Water, thefe Rings dilated llowly and over-fpread the
whole Bubble, defending in order to the bottom of it,
where they vanifhed fucceffively. In the mean while,
after all the Colours were emerged at the top, there
grew in the Center of the Rings a fmall round black
Spot, like that in the firfl: Obfervation, which conti¬
nually dilated it felf till it became Fometimes more than
- or f of an Inch in breadth before the Bubble broke.
At firfl: I thought there had been no Light refledted from
the Water in that place, but obferving it more cu-
rioufly, I faw within it levend fmaller round Spots,
which appeared much blacker and darker than the reft,
whereby I knew that there was fome reflexion at the
other places which were not fo dark as thofe Spots.
And by further tryal I fouud that I could fee the Images
©f fome things (as of a Candle or the Sun ) very faint¬
ly reflected, not only from the great black Spot, but
alfo
[21 ]

aifo from the little darker Spots which were with¬


in it.
Befides the aforefaid coloured Rings there would
often appear fmall Spots of Colours, afcending and de¬
fending up and down the fides of the Bubble, by reafon
of feme inequalities in the fubfiding of the Water.
And fometimes fmall black Spots generated at the fides
would afcend up to the larger black Spot at the top of
the Bubble, and unite with it.

OBS. XVIIL

Becaufe the Colours of thefe Bubbles were more ex¬


tended and lively than thofe of the Air thin’d between
two Glafles, and fo more eafy to to diftinguiftied, I
fhall here give you a further defcription of their order,,
as they were obferved in viewing them by reflexion of
the Skies when of a white Colour, whilft a black Sub-
ftance was placed behind the Bubble. And they were
thefe, red, blue; red, blue ; red, blue • red, green ;
red, yellow, green, blue, purple; red, yellow,, green,
blue, violet; red, yellow, white, blue, black.
The three firft Succeffions of red and blue were very
dilute and dirty, efpecialiy the firft, where the red
feemed in a manner to be white^ Among thefe there
was fcarce any other Colour fenfible befides red and
blue, only the blues ( and principally the fecond blue
inclined a little to green.
The fourth red was alfo dilute and dirty, but not
fo much as the former three; after that fucceeded little,
or no yellow, but a copious green, which at firft incli¬
ned a little to yellow, and then became a pretty brifque
and
. [ M ]
and good willow green, and afterwards changed to a
bluifh Colour; but there fucceeded neither blue nor
violet.
The fifth red at firft inclined very much to purple,
and afterwards became more bright and brifque, but
yet not very pure. This was fucceeded with a very
bright and intenfe yellow, which wras but little in
quantity, and foon changed to green : But that green
was copious and fomething more pure, deep and lively,
than the former green. After that followed an excel¬
lent blue of a bright sky-colour, and then a purple,
which was lefs in quantity than the blue, and much
inclined to red. /
The fixth Red was at firft of a very fair and lively
Scarlet, and foon after of a brighter Colour, being
very pure and brifque, and the beft of all the
reds. Then after a lively orange followed an intenfe
bright and copious yellow, which was alfo the beft
of all the yellows, and this changed firft to a greenifti
yellow, and then to a greenifti blue ; but the green
between the yellow and the blue, was very little and
dilute, fceming rather a greenifti white than a green.
The blue which fucceeded became very good, and of a
very fair bright sky-colour, but yet fomething inferior
to the former blue; and the violet was intenfe and
deep with little or no rednefs in it. And lefs in quan¬
tity than the blue.
In the laft red appeared a tinfture of fcarlet next
to violet, which foon changed to a brighter Colour,
inclining to an orange; and the yellow which followed
was at firft pretty good and lively, but afterwards it
grew more dilute, until by degrees it ended in perfedt
white-
1

(
BooTc,n. Plate, H.
03] ,
whitenefs. And this whitenefs, if the Water was very
tenacious and well-tempered, would ftowly fpread and
dilate it felf over the greater part of the Bubble; con¬
tinually growing paler at the top, where at length it
would crack in many places, and thofe cracks, as they
dilated, would appear of a pretty good, but yet obfcure
and dark sky-colour j the white between the blue Spots
diminiftiirig, until it refembled the threds of an irre¬
gular Net-work, and foon after vanifhed and left all
the upper part of the Bubble of the laid dark blue
Colour. And this Colour, after the aforefaid manner,
dilated it felf downwards , until fometimes it hath
overfpread the whole Bubble. In the mean while at
the top, which was of a darker blue than the bottom,
and appeared alfo full of many round blue Spots, feme-
thing darker than the reft, there would emerge one
or more very black Spots, and within thofe other Spots
of an interifer blacknefs, which I mentioned in the
former Obfervation j and thefe continually dilated
themfelves until the Bubble broke.
If the Water was not very tenacious the black Spots
would break forth in the white, without any fenlible
intervention of the blue. And fometimes they would
break forth within the precedent yellow, or red, or
perhaps within the blue of the fecond order, before
the intermediate Colours had time to difplay them¬
felves.
By this defcription you may perceive how great an
affinity thefe Colours have with thofe of Air defcri-
bed in the fourth Obfervation, although fet down in
a contrary order, by reafon that they begin to appear
when the Bubble is thickeft , and are molt conve*
niently
niently reckoned from the loweft and thickeft part of
the Bubble upwards.

OBS, XIX.

Viewing in feveral oblique pofitions of my Eye


the Rings of Colours emerging on the top of the Bubble,
I found that they were fenfibly dilated by increafing
the obliquity, but yet not fo much by far as thofe
made by thin’d Air in the feventh Obfervation. For
there they were dilated fo much as, when viewed
moft obliquely, to arrive at a part of the plate more
than twelve times thicker than that where they ap¬
peared when viewed perpendicularly; whereas in this
cafe the thicknefs of the Water, at which they arrived
when viewed moft obliquely, was to that thicknefs
which exhibited them by perpendicular rays, fome-
thing lefs than as 8 to 5. By the beft of my Observations
it was between 15 and 15; to 10, an increafe about
ap times lefs than in the other cafe.
Sometimes the Bubble would become of an uniform
thicknefs all over, except at the top of it near the black
Spot, as I knew, becaufe it would exhibit the fame
appearance of Colours in all pofitions of the Eye. And
then the Colours which were feen at its apparent cir¬
cumference by the obliqueft rays, would be different
from thofe that were feen in other places, by rays lefs
oblique to it. And divers Spectators might fee the
fame part of it of differing Colours, by viewing it at
very differing obliquities. Now obferving how much
the Colours at the fame places of the Bubble, or at di¬
vers places of equal thicknefs, were varied by the
feveral
[* 5]
feveral obliquities of the rays; by the affiftance of the
4th, 14th, 16 th and 18 th Obfervations, as they are
hereafter explained, I colled the thicknefs of the Water
requifite to exhibit any one and the fame Colour, at fe¬
veral obliquities, to be very nearly in the proportion
expreffed in this Table.

Incidence on Refraction in- Thicknefs of


the Water. to the Water, the Water.
deg. min. deg. min.
OO OO OO OO IO
15 OO I I I I l°5
OO 22 I 10-;

2
45 OO 32 I
60 OO 4° 3° J3
75 OO 46 25 • Hi
90 OO 48 35 Hi
_ In the two firft Columns are expreffed the obliqui¬
ties of the rays to the fuperficies of the Water, that
is, their Angles of incidence and refradion. Where
I fuppofe that the Sines which meafure them are in
round numbers as 3 to 4, though probably the diffo-
lution of Soap in the Water, may a little alter its
reiradive Vertue. In the third Column the thicknefs
of the Bubble, at which any one Colour is exhibited
in thofe feveral obliquities, is expreft in parts,of which
ten conftitute that thicknefs when the rays are perpen¬
dicular.
I have fometimes obferved, that the Colours which
arife on polilhed Steel by heating it, or on Bell-metal,
and fome other metalline fubftances, when melted and
Ee poured
[2d]
poured on the ground , where they may cool in the
open Air, have, like the Colours of Water-bubbles,
been a little changed by viewing them: at divers ob¬
liquities, and particularly that a deep Hue, or violet,
when viewed very obliquely, hath been changed to a
deep red. But the changes of thefe Colours are not fo
great and fenfible as of thofe made by Water. For the
Scoria or vitrified part of the Metal, which rnoft Me¬
tals when heated or melted do continually protrude,
and fend out to their furface, and which by covering
the Metals in form of a thin glaffy skin, caules thefe
Colours, is much denfer than Water ; and I find that
the change made by the obliquation of the Eye is lead
in Colours of the aenfeft thin fubftances.

O B 3. XX.

As in the ninth Obfervation, fo here, the Bubble, by


tranfmitted Light, appeared of a contrary Colour to
that which it exhibited by reflexion. Thus when the
Bubble being looked on by the Light of the Clouds re-
fltefited from it, feemed red at its apparent circumfe¬
rence, if the Clouds at the fame time, or immediately
after, were viewed! through it, the Colour at its cir¬
cumference would be blue; And, on the contrary,,
wftetr by reflected Light it appeared blue, it would ap¬
pear red by tranfmitted* Light.

O B S. XXL

By wetting vfery thin plates of Mufcovy-glafs, whofe


thinnefs made the like Colours appear,, the Colours
became
c27 ]
became mote faint and languid; especially by wetting
the plates on that fide oppofite to the Eye: But I could
not perceive any variation of their fpecies. So then
the thieknefs of a plate requifite to produce any Co¬
lour, depends only on the denfity of the plate, and
not on that of the ambient medium: And hence, by the
10th and 16th Oblervations, may be known the thick-
nefs which Bubbles of Water, or Plates of Mufcovy-
glafs, or other fubftances, have at any Colour pro¬
duced by them.

O B S. X X I I.

A thin tranfparent Body, which is denfer than Its


ambient medium, exhibits more brifque and vivid Co¬
lours than that which is fo much rarer * as I have
particularly obferved in the Air and Glafs. For blow¬
ing Glafs very thin at a Lamp-furnace, thofe plates
incompafled with Air did exhibit Colours much
more vivid than thofe of Air made thin between two
Glaffes.

O B S. XXIII.

Comparing the quantity of Light reflected from the


feveral Rings, I found that it was moft copious from
the firft or inmoft, and in the exterior Rings be¬
came gradually lefs and left. Alfo the whitenefs of
the firft Ring was ftronger than that reflected from
thofe parts of the thinner medium which were with¬
out the Rings; as I could manifeftly perceive by view¬
ing at a dirtance the Rings made by the two Object-
Ee 3 Glafles?
[28]
Glaffes | or by comparing two Bubbles of Water blown
at diftant times, in the fir ft of which the whitenefs
appeared, which fucceeded all the Colours, and in
the other, the whitenefs which preceded them all

OBS. XXIV.

When the two ObjeCt-Glaffes wrere lay’d upon one


another, fo as to make the Rings of the Colours ap¬
pear, though with my naked Eye I could not difcern
above 8 or 9 of thofe Rings, yet by viewing them
through a Prifm I have feen a far greater multitude,
infomuch that I could number more than forty, befides
many others, that were fo very final! and dole toge¬
ther, that I could not keep my Eye fteddy on them
feverally fo as to number them, but by their extent I have
fometimes eftimated them to be more than a hundred.
And I believe the Experiment may be improved to the
difcovery of far greater numbers. For they feem to
be really unlimited, though vifible only fo far as they
can be feparated by the refraction, as I (hall hereafter
explain.
But it was but one fide of thefe Rings, namely, that
towards which the refraction was made, which by that
refraCtion was rendered diftinCt, and the other fide be¬
came more confufed than when viewed by the naked
Eye, infomuch that there I could not difcern above
one or two, and fometimes none of thofe Rings, of
which I could difcern eight or nine with my naked
Eye, And their Segments or Arcs, which on the
other fide appeared fo numerous, for the moll part
[ 29 ]
exceeded not the third part of a Circle. If the Re¬
fraction was very great, or the Prifm very diftant from
the ObjeCt-Glaffes, the middle part of thofe Arcs be¬
came alfo confufed, fo as to difappear and conftitute an
even whitenefs, whilft on either fide their ends, as alfo
the whole Arcs furtheft from the center, became di-
ftindter than before, appearing in the form as you fee
them defigned in the fifth Figure. Fig
The Arcs, where they feemed diftinCteft, were only
white and black fucceffively, without any other Co¬
lours intermixed. But in other places there appeared
Colours, whofe order was inverted by the refraCtion
in fuch manner, that if I firft held the Prifm very near
the Objedt-Glafles, and then gradually removed it
further off towards my Eye, the Colours of the ad,
3d, 4th, and following Rings ihrunk towards the white
that emerged between them, until they wholly va-
nifhed into it at the middle of the Arcs, and after¬
wards emerged again in a contrary order. But at
the ends of the Arcs they retained their order un¬
changed.
I have fometimes fo lay’d one Objedt-Glafs upon
the other, that to the naked Eye they have all over
feemed uniformly white, without the lead appearance-
of any of the coloured Rings -} and yet by viewing
them through a Prifm, great multitudes of thofe Rings
have difcovered themfelves. And in like manner plates,
of Mufcovy-glafs, and Bubbles of Glafs blown at a
Lamp-furnace, which were not fo thin as to exhibit
any Colours to the naked Eye, have through the Prifm
exhibited a great variety of them ranged irregu-
larly up and, down in the form of waves. And fo
Bubbles.
Babbles of Water, before they began to exhibit their
Colours to the naked Eye of a By-ftander, hare ap¬
peared through a Prifm, girded about with many pa¬
rallel and horizontal Rings; to produce which effe®,
it was neceflary to hold the Prifm parallel, or very
nearly parallel to the Horizon, and to difpofe it fo
that the rays might be refracted upwards,

-.ft

THE
CP]
i

THE

SECOND BOOK

PART II.

Remarks ufon the foregoing Oifervations..

Aving given my Obfervations of thefe Colours,


_ before I make ufe of them to unfold the Caufes
of the Colours of natural Bodies, it is convenient that
by the fimpleft of them, fuch as are the ad, 3d, 4th,
9th, rath, 18th, 20th, and a4th, I firft explain the
more expounded. And firft to fhew how the Colours
in the fourth and eighteenth Obfervations are produ-
eed, let there be taken in any right line from the point
% the lengths ¥A, YB, Y C, YD, YE, YF, YGyFig.$
YH, in proportion to one another, as the Cube-roots
of the Squares of the numbers, ^ 3, f, ? 1, where¬
by the lengths of a mufical Chord to found all the Notes 1
ins an Eighth are reprefented; that is, in the propor- >
tion of the numbers 630a, 6814, 7114, 7631, 8255,,
8855, 2243,: ioooo.. And at the points A, B, C, D51
E,F.
CS2!
E, F, G, H, let perpendiculars A B bv. be ere&ed,
by whole intervals the extent of the feveral Colours
fet underneath againft them, is to be reprefented. Then
divide the line A « in fuch proportion as the numbers
i, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, io, 11,19V. fet at the points of divi¬
sion denote. And through thofe divilions from Y
draw lines i I, 2 K, 5 L, 5 M, 6 N, 7 O, be.
Now if A 2 be iuppofed to reprefent the thicknefs
of any thin transparent Body, at which the outmoft
violet is moft copioufly refie&ed in the firft Ring, or
Series of Colours, then by the 13th Obfervation H K,
will reprefent its thicknefs, at which the utmoft red
is moft copioufly refle&ed in the fame Series. Alfo
by the 5 th and 16th Obfervations, A 6 and HN will
denote the thickneffes at which thofe extreme Colours
are moft copioufly reflected in the fecond Series, and
A 1 o and H Q the thickneffes, at which they are
moft copioufly reflected in the third Series, and fo on.
And the thicknefs at which any of the intermediate
Colours are reflefted moft copioufly, will, according to
the 14th Obfervation, be defined by the diftance of the
line A H from the intermediate parts of the lines 2 K,
6N, 10Q, be. againft which the names of thofe Co¬
lours are written below. ; •
But further, to define the latitude of thefe Colours in
each Ring or Series, let A 1 defign the leaft thicknefs,
and A 3 the greateft thicknefs, at which the extreme
violet in the firft Series is reflected, and let H and
H L, defign the like limits for the extreme red, and
let the intermediate Colours be limited by the inter¬
mediate parts of the lines 11, and 3 L, againft which
the names of thofe Colours are written, and fo on: But
yet
[33]
yet with this caution, that the reflections be fuppofed
ftrongeft at the intermediate Spaces, a K, 6 N, 10Qfee.
and from thence to decreafe gradually towards thefe li¬
mits, 11, 3 L, 5 M, 7O, he. on either fide; where
you mull not conceive them to be precifely limited,
but to decay indefinitely. And whereas I have afiigned
the fame latitude to every Series, I did it, becaufe al¬
though the Colours in the firft Series feem to be a little
broader than the reft, by reafon of a ftronger reflexion
there, yet that inequality is fo infenfible as fcarcely to
be determined by Oblervation.
Now according to this defeription, conceiving that
the rays originally of feveral Colours are by turns re¬
flected at the Spaces 11 L 3, 5 M O 7, 9 P R 11, he.
and tranfmitted at the Spaces AHIi,3LM5,70P9,
he. it is eafy to know what Colour muft in the open Air
be exhibited at any thicknefs of a tranfparent thin body.
For if a Ruler be applied parallel to A H, at that di-
ftance from it by which the thicknefs of the body is
reprefented, the alternate Spaces 11L 3, 5 M O 7,35V.
wrhich it croffeth will denote the reflected original Co¬
lours, of which the Colour exhibited in the open Ay:
is compounded. Thus if the conftitution of the green
in the third Series of Colours be defired, apply the
Ruler as you fee at * e* and by its palling through
fome of the blue at * and yellow at0', as well as through
the green at ?, you may conclude that the green exhi¬
bited at that thicknefs of the body is principally con-
ftituted of original green, but not without a mixture
of fome blue and yellow',

Ff. By
C34]
$y this means you may know how the Colours front
the center of the Rings outward ought to fucceed in
order as they were defcribed in the 4th and 18th Ob-
fervations. For if you move the Ruler gradually from
AH through all diftances, having paft over the firft
fpa.ee which denotes little or no reflexion to be made
by thinneft fubftances, it will firft arrive at 1 the violet,
and then very quickly at the blue and green, which
together with that violet compound blue, and then at
the yellow and red, by whofe further addition that
blue is converted into whitenefs, which whitenefs con¬
tinues during the tranfit of the edge of the Ruler from
1 to 5, and after that by the fucceffive deficience of
its component Colours, turns firft to compound yellow,
and- then to red: and1 laft of all the red ceafeth at L.
Then begin the Colours of the fecund Series, which
fucceed in order during the tranfit of the edge of the
Ruler from 5 to O, and are more lively than before,
becaufe more expanded and fevered. And for the
fame reafon, inftead of the former white there inter¬
cedes between the blue and yellow a mixture of orange,
yellow, green, blue and indico, all which together ought
to exhibit a dilute and imperfed green. So the Co¬
lours of the third Series all fucceed in order ; firft, the
violet, which a little interferes with the red of the fe~
cond order, and is thereby inclined to a reddiih purple;
then the blue and green, which are lefs mixed with
other Colours, and confequently more lively than be¬
fore, efpecially the green: Then follows the yellow,
fomeof which towards the green is diftind and good, but
that part of it towards the fucceeding red, as alfo that
red is mixed with the violet and blue of the fourth Se-
ries, whereby Various degrees of red very much incli¬
ning to purple are ’Compounded* This violet and blue,
which fhould fucceed this red, being mixed with, and
hidden in it, there fucceeds a green. And this at firft
is much inclined to blue, but foon becomes a good
green, the only unmixed and lively Colour in this
fourth Series. For as it verges towards the yellow, it
begins to interfere with the Colours of the fifth Series,
by whofe mixture the fucceeding yellow and red are
very much diluted and made dirty, efpecially the yel¬
low, which being the weaker Colour is fcarce able to
(hew it felf. After this the feveral Series interfere more
and more, and their Colours become more and more
intermixed, till after three or four more revolutions
(in which the red and blue predominate by turns )
all forts of Colours are in all places pretty equally ben¬
ded, and compound an even whitenefs.
And fince by the 15th Obfervation the rays indued
with one Colour are tranfmitted, where thofe of ano¬
ther Colour are reflected, the reafon of the Colours
made by the tranfmitted Light in the 9th and 29th Ob-
fervations is from hence evident. ■ ,
If not only the order and fpecies of thefe Colours^
but alfo the precife thicknefs of the plate, or thin body
at which they are exhibited, be defired in parts ;of an
Inch, that may be alfo obtained by affiftance of the 6th
or 16th Obfervations, For according to thofe Obferva-
tions the thicknefs of the thinned Air, which between
two Glades exhibited the molt luminous parts of the
firft fix Rings were ^ ^ gfe parts of
an Inch. Suppofe the Light reflected moft copioufiy
at thefe thickneffes be the bright citrine yellow, or con-
Ff 2 fine
[3*]
fine of yellow and orange, and thefe thickneffes will
be G Gv, G ?, G», G i. And this being known, it is
to etermine what thicknels or Air is reprelented
h r by any other diftance of the ruler from

But farther, fincebythe 10th Obfervation the thick-


nefs of Air was to the thicknefs of Water, which be¬
tween the fame Glaffes exhibited the fame Colour, as
4 to 3, and by the a 1 th Obfervation the Colours of
thin bodies are not varied by varying the ambient me¬
dium ; the thicknefs of a Bubble of Water, exhibiting
any Colour, will be ^ of the thicknefs of Air producing
the fame Colour. And fo according to the fame 10th
and aith Obfervations the thicknefs of a plate of
Glafs, whofe refraftion of the mean refrangible ray, is
meafured by the proportion of the Sines 31 to 20,
may be of the thicknefs of Air producing the fame
Colours y and the like of other mediums. I do not
affirm, that this proportion of no to 31, holds in all
the rays; for the Sines of other forts of rays have other
proportions. But the differences of thofe proportions
are fo little that I do not here confider them. On
thefe Grounds I have compofed the following Table^
wherein the thicknefs of Air, Water, and Glafs, at
which each Colour is moft intenfe and fpecifick, is ex-
preffed in parts of an Inch divided into Ten hundred
thoufand equal parts.

The
‘The ibicknefs of coloured Plates and ‘Particles of
i 'rAea
*®9
Air, Water. GUfs.
I 2. t O
rVery Black % 8 32 1
J. O
Black I 4 31
Beginning of %
2 17
Their Colours of the j Bllfekck it 1*0
ix
hr ft Order, White n 3.5 3t
Yellow- 7? 51 4f
Orange 8 6 Si
: vRed 9 <>\ 5f
r Violet 116 Si yt
12g
Oi
On
Indica. 9*
Blue 14 ioi 9
nf 9?
Of the fecond Order, , Qv*:?n i6f I2f
7 < Yellow iof
Orange 1-7 9 1J iif
Bright Red i Sf Hi
cScarlet i9f Hi I2f .
■r 21 1311
Indico 22ri 16* Hi
Blue 2-3 f J7ii 157!
Of the third Order, 4 Green 2 51 i8*10 I6f
Yellow 2Df iyi
Red 29 214 1 si
LBluifh Red 32 24 20f

( Bluilh Green 34 25I 22

351 2 6f 22 f
Of the fourth Order, jGreen
YYellowiih Green 36 2.7 23t
CRed 4°3 3°i 26

46 34l '29I
Of the fifth Order, S§reenilh Blue
39i 34'
^n\
00
4>|w

Of the fixth Order, S G reenilh Blue • 44 38


^Red 65 481 42.

Of the feventh Order, 5 £reeniilv Blue 71 53-1 45?


’ (Ruddy Whitt 77 57l 49? . _
■Now if this Table be compared with the 6th Scheme*
you will there fee the conliitution of each Colour* as
to its Ingredients* or the original Colours of which it
is compounded* and thence be enabled to judge of its
intenfenefs or imperfection; which may fuffice in ex¬
plication of the 4-th and 18th Obfervations* unlefs it
be further deiired to delineate the manner how the Co¬
lours appear* when the two ObjeCt-Glaffes are lay’d
upon one another. To do which* let there be de-
fcribed a large Arc of a Circle* and a ftreight Line
which may touch that Arc* and parallel to that Tan¬
gent feveral occult Lines* at fuch distances from it* as
the numbers fet againft the feveral Colours in the Table
denote. For the Arc* and its Tangent* will reprelent
the fuperficies of the Glafles terminating the interjacent
Air; and the places where the occult Lines cut the
Arc will fhow at what diftances from the Center* or
Point of contaft* each Colour is reflected.
There are alfo other ufes of this Table : For by its
afliftanee the thicknefs of the Bubble in the 19th 01>
fervation was determined by the Colours which it ex¬
hibited. And fo the bignefs of the parts of natural
Bodies may be conjectured by their Colours* asfhall be
hereafter fhewn. Alfo* if two or more very thin plates
be lay’d one upon another* fo as to compofe one plate
equalling them all in thicknefs* the refulting Colour
may be hereby determined. For inftance* Mr. Hook in
his Mifcrografhm obferves* that a faint yellow- platemf
Mufcovy-glafs lay’d upon a blue one* conftituted a very
deep purple. The yellow of the firft Order is a faint
one* and the thicknefs of the plate exhibiting it* ac¬
cording to the Table is 4f, to which add 9* the thick-
nefs exhibiting blue of the fecond Order, and the furn
will be which is the thicknefs exhibiting the
purple of the third Order.
To explain, in the next place, the Circumftances of
the ad and 3d Obfervations; that is, how the Rings of
the Colours may (by turning the Prifms about their
common Axis the contrary way to that expreffed in
thofe Obfervations) be converted into white and black
Rings, and afterwards into Rings of Colours again, the
Colours of each Ring lying now in an inverted order; it
muft be remembred, that thofe Rings of Colours are di¬
lated by the obliquaticn of the rays to the Air which
intercedes the Glaffes, and that according to the Table
in the 7th Obfervation, their dilatation or increafe of
their Diameter is moft manifeft and fpeedy when they
are obliqueft, Now the rays of yellow being more re-
frafted by the firft fiiperficies of thefaid Air than thofe
of red, are thereby made more oblique to the fecond fu-
perficies, at which they are reflected to produce the co¬
loured Rings, and confequently the yellow Circle in each
Ring will be more dilated than the red; and the excefs of
its dilatation will be fo much the greater, by how much
the greater is the obliquity of the rays, until at laft it be¬
come of equal extent with the red of the fame Ring. And
for the fame reafon the green, blue and violet, will be alia
fo much dilated by the ftill greater obliquity of their
rays, as to become all very nearly of equal extent with
the red, that is, equally diftant from the center of the
Rings. And then all the Colours of the fame Ring
mud be coincident, and by their mixture exhibit a
white Ring. Arid thefe white Rings muft have black
and dark Rings between them, beeaufe they do not
[ 4° 3
fpread and interfere with one another as before. And
for that reafon alio they muft become diftin&er and vi~
fible to far greater Numbers. But yet the violet being
obliqueft will be fomething more dilated in proportion
to its extent then the other Colours, and fo very apt to
appear at the exterior verges of the white.
Afterwards, by a greater obliquity of the rays, the
violet and blue become more fenfibly dilated than the
red and yellow, and fo being further removed from the
center or the Rings, the Colours muft emerge out of the
white in an order contrary to that which they had be¬
fore, the violet and blue at the exterior limbs of each
Ring,and the red and yellow at the interior. And the vio¬
let, by reafon of the greateft obliquity of its rays, being
in proportion moft of all expanded, will fooneft appear
at the exterior limb of each white Ring, and become
more confpicuous than the reft. And the feveral Series
of Colours belonging to the feveral Rings, will, by
their unfolding and fpreading, begin again to interfere,
and thereby render the Rings lefs diftindf, and not vifL
ble to fo great numbers.
If inftead of the Prifms the Obje£Tglafies be made
ufe of, the Rings which they exhibit become not white
and diftinft by the obliquity of the Eye, by reafon that
the rays in their paflage through that Air which inter¬
cedes the Glaffes are very nearly parallel to thofe Lines
in which they were fir ft incident on the Glaffes, and con-
fequently the rays indued with feveral Colours are not
inclined one more than another to that Air, as it hap¬
pens in the Prifms.
There is yet another circumftance of thefe Experiments
tp be confidered, and that is why the black and white
Rings
[40
Rings which when viewed at adiftance appear diftind,
fhould not only become confufed by viewing them near
at hand , but alfo yield a violet Colour at both the
edges of every white Ring. And the reafon is, that the
rays which enter the Eye at feveral parts of the Pupil,
have feveral obliquities to the Glaffes, and thofe which
are moft oblique, if confidered apart, would reprefent
the Rings bigger than thofe which are the leaft oblique.
Whence the breadth of the perimeter of every white
Ring is expanded outwards by the obliqued rays,
and inwards by the leaft oblique. And this expanfion
is fo much the greater by how much the greater is the
difference of the obliquity ; that is, by how much the
Pupil is wider, or the Eye nearer to the Glaffes. And
the breadth of the violet mu ft be moft expanded, be-
caufe the rays apt to excite a fenfation of that Colour
are moft oblique to a fecond, or further fuperficies of
the thin’d Air at which they are refle&ed, and have
alfo the greateft variation of obliquity, which makes
that Colour fooneft emerge out of the edges of the
white. And as the breadth of every Ring is thus aug¬
mented, the dark intervals muft be diminifhed, until
the neighbouring Rings become continuous, and are
blended, the exterior firft, and then thofe nearer the
Center, fo that they can no longer be diftinguilh’d
apart, but feem to conftitute an even and uniform
whitenel's.
Among all the Obfervations there is none accompa¬
nied with fo odd circumftances as the 24th. Of thofe
the principal are, that in thin plates, which to the
naked Eye ieem of an even and uniform tranfparent
G g white-
r +* ;i
wtiitfcnefs, without any terminations of fhadows, the
refra&ion of a Prifm fhould make Rings of Colours ap¬
pear, whereas it ufually makes ObjeCts appear coloured
only there where they are terminated with fhadows, or
have parts unequally luminous; and that it fhould make
thofe Rings exceedingly diftinCt and white, although
it ufually renders ObjeCts confided and coloured. The
caufe of thefe things you will underhand by considering,
that all the Rings of Colours are really in the plate,
when viewed with the naked Eye, although by reafon
of the great breadth of their circumferences they fo
much interfere and are blended together,that they feem
to conftitute an even whitenefs. But when the rays
pafs through the Prifm to the Eye, the orbits of the
Several Colours in every Ring are refracted, fome more
than others, according to their degrees of refrangibility :
By which means the Colours on one fide of the Ring
(that is on one fide of its Center) become more unfolded
and dilated, and thofe on the other, fide more compli¬
cated and contracted. And where by a due refraCtion
they are fo much contracted, that the fevral Rings be¬
come narrower than to interfere with one another, they
mu ft appear diftinCt, and alfo white, if the conftituent
Colours be fo much contracted as to be wholly coincident.
But, on the other fide, where the orbit of every Ring
is made broader by the further unfolding of its Co¬
lours, it mu ft interfere more with other Rings than
before, and fo become lefs diftinCt.
To explain this a little further, fuppofe the concern
°pige 7. trick Circles A V, and BX, reprefent the red and violet
of any order, which, together with the intermediate
Colours,
[ 431
Colours, conftitute any one of thefe Rings. Now thefe
being viewed through a Prifm, the violet Circle B X,
will by a greater refraction be further tranflated from
its place than the red A V, and fo approach nearer to
it on that fide, towards which the refractions are made.
For inftance, if the red be tranflated to av, the viole;t
may be tranflated to b x, fo as to approach nearer to it
at x than before, and if the red be further tranflated
to a v, the violet may be fo much further tranflated to
b x as to convene with it at x, and if the red be yet
further tranflated to «■T, the violet may be ftill fo much
further tranflated to 0 5 as to pals beyond it at 5, and
convene with it at e and/. And this being underftood
not only of the red and violet, but of all the other in¬
termediate Colours, and alfo of every revolution of
thofe Colours, you will eafily perceive how thofe of the
fame revolution or order, by their nearnefs at xv and
T ?, and their coincidence at xv, e and/, ought to con¬
ftitute pretty diftinCt Arcs of Circles, efpecially at xv,
or at e and /, and that they will appear feverally at
x and at x v exhibit whitenefs by their coincidence,
,
and again appear feveral at T 5 but yet in a contrary
order to that which they had before, and ftill retain
beyond and /. But, on the other fide, at ab, ab,
or * 0, thefe Colours mu If become much more confu¬
ted by being dilated and fpread fo, as to interfere with
thofe of other Orders. And the fame confufion will
happen at T 5 between e and/, if the refraction be very
great, or the Prifm very diftant from the ObjeCt-Glaffes:
In which cafe no parts of the Rings will be feen, fave
only two little Arcs at e and/, whofe diftance from one
Gg 2 another,
another will be augmented by removing the Prifhr
ftill further from the ObjedbGlaffes: And thefe little
Arcs muft be diftin<fteft and whiteft at their middle, and
at their ends, where they begin to grow confufed they
muft be coloured. And the Colours at one end of
every Arc muft be in a contrary order to thofe at the
other end, by reafon that they crofs in the interme¬
diate white 5 namely their ends, which verge towards
T ?, will be red and yellow on that fide next the Cen¬
ter, and blue and violet on the other fide. But their
other ends which verge from T ? will on the contrary
be blue and violet on that fide towards the Center, and
on the other fide red and yellow.
Now as all thefe things follow from the Properties
of Light by a mathematical way of reafoning, lo the
truth of them may be manifefted by Experiments. For
in a dark room, by viewing thefe Rings through as*
Prifm, by reflexion of the feveral prifmatique Colours,
which an afliftant caufes to move to and fro upon a
Wall or Paper from whence they are reflected, whilft
the Spectator’s Eye, the Prifm and the ObjeCl-Glafles
( as in the 13 th Obfervation ) are placed fteddy : the
pofition of the Circles made fucceflively by the feveral
Colours, will be found fuch, in relpedt of one another,
as I have defcribed in the Figures or abxv,
or «£ % T. And by the fame method the truth of
the Explications of other Obfervations may be exa¬
mined.
By what hath been faid the like Ph&nomina of
Water, and thin plates of Glafs may be underftoodi
But in fmall fragments of thofe plates, there is this
further
further oblervable, that where they lye flat upon a
Table and are turned about their Centers whilft they are
viewed through a Prifm, they will in Tome poftures
exhibit waves of various Colours, and fome of them ex¬
hibit thefe waves in one or two pofitions only, but the
moft of them do in all pofitions exhibit them, and make
them for the moft part appear almoft all over the plates.
The reafon is, that the fuperficies of fuch plates are not
even, but have many cavities and fwellings, which how
shallow foever do a little vary the thicknefs of the
plate. For at the feveral fides of thofe cavities, for
the reafons newly defcribed, there ought to be produ¬
ced waves in feveral poftures of the Prifm. Now though
it be but fome very lmall, and narrower parts of the
Glafs, by which thefe waves for the moft part are cau-
led, yet they may feem to extend themfelves over the
whole Glafs, beeaulefrom the narroweft of thofe parts
there are Colours of feveral Orders that is of feveral
Rings, confufedly reflected, which by refradion of the
Prifm are unfolded, feparated, and according to their
degrees of refradion, difperfed to feveral places, fo as to.
conftitute fo many feveral waves, as there were divers-
orders of Colours promifcuoufly refleded from that
part of the Glafs.
Thefe are the principal Phenomena of thin Plates
or Bubbles, whole explications depend on the pro¬
perties of Light, which I have heretofore delivered;
And thefe you fee do neceflarily follow from them, and
agree with them, even to their very leaft circumftancesj
and not only fo, but do very much tend to their proof
Thus, by the 14th Obfervation, it appears, that the
rays ■
[4*1
rays of leveral Colours made as well by thin Plates or
Bubbles, as by refractions of a Prifm, have feveral de¬
grees of refrangibility, whereby thofe of each order,
which at their reflexion from the Plate or Bubble are
intermixed with thofe of other orders, are feparated
from them by refraCtion, and affociated together fo as to
become vifibleby themfelves like Arcs of Circles. For
if the rays were all alike refrangible, ’tis impoffible that
the whitenels, which to the naked fence appears uni¬
form, ffiould by refraction have its parts tranlpofed and
ranged into thofe black and white Arcs.
It appears alfo that the unequal refractions of dif-
form rays proceed not from any contingent irregulari¬
ties ; fuch as are veins, an uneven polilh, or fortuitous
pofition of the pores of Glafs; unequal and cafual mo¬
tions in the Air or iEther; the fpreading, breaking, or
dividing the fame ray into many diverging parts, or
the like. For, admitting any fuch irregularities, it would
be impoffible for refractions to render thofe Rings fo
very diftinCt, and well defined, as they do in the
aqth Obfervation. It is neceflary therefore that eve¬
ry ray have its proper and conftant degree of refran¬
gibility connate with it,according to which its refraCtion
is ever juftly and regularly performed, and that feve¬
ral rays have feveral of thofe degrees.
And what is faid of their refrangibility may be alfo
underftood of their reflexibility, that is of their difpo-
fitions to be reflected fome at a greater, and others at a
lefs thicknels, of thin Plates or Bubbles, namely, that
thofe difpofitions are alfo connate with the rays, and
immutable; as may appear by the 15th, 1 qth, and
15th
[473
t 5th Observations compared with the fourth and
eighth.
By the precedent Observations it appears alfo, that
whitenefs is a diffimilar mixture of all Colours, and that
Light is a mixture of rays indued with all thofe Co¬
lours. For confidering the multitude of the Rings of
Colours, in the 3d, xath and 24th Observations, it is
manifeft that although in the 4th and 18th Observa¬
tions there appear no more than eight or nine of thofe
Rings, yet there are really a far greater number, which.
So much interfere anduningle with one another, as after
thofe eight or nine revolutions to dilute one another
wholly, and constitute an even and fenfibly uniform
whitenefs. And consequently that whitenefs muft be
allowed a mixture of all Colours, and the Light which
conveys it to the Eye muft be a mixture of rays indued
with all thofe Colours.
But further, by the 14th Observation, it appears,
that there is a conftant relation between Colours and
Refrangibility, the moft refrangible rays being violet,
the leaft refrangible red, and thofe of intermediate Co¬
lours having proportionably intermediate degrees of re¬
frangibility. And by the 13 th, 14th and 15th Obser¬
vations, compared with the 4th or 18th, there appears
to be the fame conftant relation between Colour and
Reflexibility, the violet being in like circumftances re-
fleded at leaft thickneflfes of any thin Plate or Bubble,
the red at greateft thickneflfes, and the intermediate
Colours at intermediate thickneflfes. Whence it fol¬
lows, that the colorifique difpoiitions of rays are alfo
connate with them and immutable, and by confequence
that
. [+8]
that all the productions and appearances of Colours
in the World are derived not from any phyfical change
caufed in Light by refraction or reflexion, but only
from the various mixtures or reparations of rays, by
virtue of their different Refrangibility or Reflexibility.
And in this refpeCt the Science of Colours becomes a
Speculation as truly mathematical as any other part of
Optiques. I mean fo far as they depend on the nature
of Light, and are not produced or altered by the power
of imagination, or by ftriking or prefling the Eyes.

THE
Book,H. . Plate!.
Fig. 2.
5
/
c
[49]
THE

SECOND BOOK

OPT I c k s.
PART III.

Of the permanent Colours of natural Bodies y and the


+Analogy between them and the Colours of thin tranf*
parent Blates.

I Am now come to another part of this Defign, which


is to conlider how the Phenomena of thin tranfpa-
rent Plates hand related to thol e of all other natural
Bodies* Of thefe Bodies I have already told you that
they appear of. divers Colours, accordingly as they are
difpofed to reflect moft copioufly the rays originally
indued with thofe Colours* But their Conftitutionsf
whereby they reflect fome rays more copioufly than
others, remains to be difcovered, and thefe I fliall en*
deavour to manifeft in the following Propofi.tio.ns,

Hh PROP*
t $0 ]
PROP, I.
T’hoftbfiiperficiesoftran[parent Bodies refieSl the great eff
quantify of Light ^ ‘which have the great eft refrailing powers
that is, which intercede mediums that differ moft in their
refractive denfities* And in the confines of equally re-
frailing mediums there is no reflexion.
The Analogy between reflexion and refraction will
appear by confidering, that when Light paffeth ob¬
liquely out of one medium into another which refraCts
from the perpendicular, the greater is difference of
their refractive denfity, the lefs obliquity is requifite
to caufea total reflexion. For as the Sines are which
meafure the refraction, fo is the Sine of incidence at
which the total reflexion begins, to the radius of the
Circle, and eonfequently that incidence is leaf! where
there is the greateft difference of the Sines. Thus in the
paffing of Light out of Water into Air, where the
refraCtion is mealured by the Ratio of the Sines 3 to 4,
the total reflexion begins when the Angle of incidence
is about 48 degrees 3 5 minutes. In paffing out ofGlafs
into Air, where the refraCtion is mealiired by the Ratio
of the Sines 20 to 31, the total reflexion begins when
the Angle of incidence is 40 deg. 10 min. and fo in
paffing out of cryftal, or more ftrongly refracting me¬
diums into Air, there is ftill a lefs obliquity requifite
to caufe a total reflexion. Superficies therefore which
refraCt moft do fooneft reflect all the Light which is in¬
cident on them, and fo mnft be allowed moft ftrongly
reflexive*

But
[*<] .

But the truth of this Propofition wilt further appear


by obferving, that in the fuperficies interceding two
tranfparent mediums, fuch as are (Air,Water,Oyl,Com¬
mon-Glafs, Cryftal, Metalline-Glafles, Ifland-Glafles,
white tranfparent Arfnick, Diamonds, I2V. ) the re¬
flexion is ftronger or weaker accordingly, as the fuper-
ficies hath a greater or lefs refracting power. For in
the confine of Air and Sal-gemm 'tis ftronger than in
the confine of Air and Water, and Hill ftronger in the
confine of Air and Common-Glafs or Cryftal,and ftronger
in the- confine of Air and a Diamond. If any of thefe,and
fuch like tranfparent Solids, be immerged in Water, its
reflexion becomes much weaker than before, and ftill
weaker if they be immerged in the more ftrongly re¬
fracting Liquors of well-reCtified oyl of Vitriol or fpirit
of Turpentine. IfWater be diftinguifhed into two parts,
by any imaginary furface, the reflexion in the confine
of thofe two parts is none at all. In the confine of Wa¬
ter and Ice ’tis very little, in that of Water and Oyl ’tis
fomething greater, in that of Water and Sal-gemm ftill
greater, and in that of Water and Glafs, or Cryftal, or
other denfer lubftances ftill greater, accordingly as thofe
mediums differ more or lefs in their refracting powers.
Hence in the confine of Common-Glafs and Cryftal,
there ought to be a weak reflexion, and a ftronger re¬
flexion in the confine of Common and Metalline-Glafs,
though I have not yet tried this. But, in the confine of
two Glafles of equal denfity, there is not any lenfible re¬
flexion, as was Ihewn in the firft Obfervation. And
the fame may be underftood of the fuperficies interce¬
ding two Cryftals, or two Liquors, or any other Sub-
ftances in which no refraction is caufed. So then the
' • Hh 2 sreafon
reafoii why uniform pellucid mediums, (fuch as Water,.
Glafs, or Cryftal) have no fenfible reflexion but in
their external fuperficies, where they are adjacent to
other mediums of a different denfity, is becaufe all
their contiguous parts have one and the fame degree
of denfity,
PROP, IL
The leafl farts of almoji all natural Bodies are in fome
meafure tranffarent : And the opacity of tbofe Bodies
arifeth from the multitude of reflexions caufed in their in*
ternal Barts.
That this is fo has been obferved by others, and-
will eafily be granted by them that have been conver-
fant with Mifcrofcopes. And it may be alfo tryed by
applying any fubftance to a Hole through which fome
Light is immitted into a dark room. For how opake
foever that fubftance may feem in the open Air, it will
by that means appear very manifeftly tranfparent, if
it be of a fufficient thinnefs. Only white metalline Bo¬
dies muft be excepted, which by reafon of their excef-
five denfity feem to reflect almoft all the Light inci¬
dent on their firft fuperficies , unlefs by folution in
menftruums they be reduced into very fmall particles^
■and then they become tranfparent*

PROP* 1 IL

Between the parts of opake and coloured Bodies are


many ffacesj either empty or replenijhed, with mediums
of other densities ; as Water between the tinging corpufcles
wherewith my Liquor is impregnatedy Air between the
aqueom
aqueous globules that conjlitute Clouds or Mtfts j and for
the mofl fart [faces void of both .Air and TVat er^ but yet
ferhafs not wholly void of all fubjlance, between the farts
of hard Bodies,
The truth of this is evinced by the two precedent
Propofitions : For by the fecond Proportion there are
many reflexions made by the internal parts of Bodies^
which, by the firft Propofition, would not happen if
the parts of thofe Bodies were continued without any
luch interftices between them, becaufe reflexions are
caufed only in fuperficies, which intercede mediums of
a differing denfity by Prop, r.
But further, that this difcontinuity of parts is the -
principal caufe of the opacity of Bodies,, will appear by
confidering, that opake fubftances become tranfparent
by filling their pores with any fubftance of equal or al-
mofl: equal denfity with their parts. Thus Paper dip¬
ped in Water or Oyl, the Qculm mundi Stone fteep’d in
Water, Linnen-cloth oyled or varniflied, and many other
fubftances foaked in fuch Liquors as will intimately
pervade their little pores, become by that means more
tranfparent than otherwise ; fo, on the contrary, the.
mofl: tranfparent fubftances may by evacuating their
pores, or Separating their parts, be rendred fuffieiently
opake, as Salts or wet Paper, or the 0culm mundi Stone
by being dried, Horn by being fcraped, Glafs by being
reduced to powder, or otherwife flawed^ Turpen¬
tine by being ftirred about with Water till they mix,
imperfectly, and Water by being formed into many
fmall Bubbles, either alone in the form of froth, or
by fhaking it together with Oyl of Turpentineor
with fome other convenient Liquor, with which if will-
not
C54]
not perfectly incorporate. And to the increafe of the
opacity of thefe Bodies it conduces fomething, that by
the 13 th Obfervation the reflexions of very thin tranf-
parent fubftances are confiderably ftronger than thofe
made by the fame fubftances of a greater thicknefs.

PROP. IV.

'1 he -parts of Bodies and their Interfiles muft not be


lefs than, offame definite bignefs, to render them opake and
coloured.
For the opakeft Bodies, if their parts be fubtily
divided, (as Metals by being diflolved in acid men-
ftruums, ®c.) become perfectly tranfparent. And you
may alfo remember, that in the eighth Obfervation
there was no fenfible reflexion at the fuperficies of
the Object-GlaiTes where they were very near one
another, though they did ndt abfolutely touch. And
in the r yth Obfervation the reflexion of theWater-bubble
where it became thinneft was almoft infenfible, fo as
to caufe very black Spots to appear on the top of the
Bubble by the want of reflected Light.
On thefe grounds I perceive it is that Water, Salt,
Glals, Stones, anclfuch like fubftances, are tranfparent.
For, upon divers confiderations, they feem to be as full
of pores or interftiees between their parts as other Bo¬
dies are, but yet their parts and interftiees to be too
fmall to caufe reflexions in their common furfaces.

PROP.
[55]
PROP. V. T*

The tranfparent parts of Bodies according to their fe*


veral fizes mufl refled rays of one Colour* and tranfmit
thofe of another, on the fame grounds that thin 2?lattes or
Bubbles do reflect or tranfmit thofe rays. Tlnd this I take
to be the ground of all their Colours.
For if a thiif d or plated Body, which being of an
even thicknefs, appears all over of one uniform Co¬
lour, fhould be flit into threds, or broken ■ into frag¬
ments, of the fame thicknefs with the plate; I fee no
reafon why every thred or fragment fhould not keep its
Colour, and by confequence why a heap of thofe threds
or fragments fhould not conftitute a mafs or powder of.
the fame Colour, which the plate exhibited before it
was broken. And the parts of all natural Bodies being
like fo many fragments of a Plate, muft on the fame
grounds exhibit the fame Colours.
Now that they do fo, will appear by the affinity of
their properties. The finely coloured Feathers of fomer
Birds, and particularly thofe of Peacocks Tails, do im
the very fame part of the Feather appear of feveral Co¬
lours in feveral politicos of the Eye, after the very fame
manner that thin Plates were found to do in the yth:
and 19th Obfervations, and therefore arife from the
thinnefs of the tranfparent parts of the Feathers y that
is, from the flendernefs of the very fine Hairs, or Capitt
mentaj which grow out of the tides of the gruffer late¬
ral, branches or fibres of thofe Feathers,. And;to,the
fame purpofe it is, that the Webs of. feme Spiders- by:
, _ ~. ~ Wng:
being fpun very fine have appeared coloured, as forne
have obferved, and that the coloured fibres of fome lilks
by varying the pofition of the Eye do vary their Co¬
lour. Alfo the Colours of filks, cloths, and other fub-
ftances, which Water or Oyl can intimately penetrate,
become more faint and obfcure by being immerged in
thofe liquors, and recover their vigor again by being
dried, much after the manner declared of thin Bodies
in the ioth and aith Obfervations. Leaf-gold, fome
forts of painted Glafs, the infufion of Lignum Nefbn-
ticum, and fome other fubftances reflect one Colour,
and tranfinit another, like thin Bodies in the 9th and
aoth Obfervations. And fome of thofe coloured pow¬
ders which Painters ufe, may have their Colours a little
changed, by being very elaborately and finely ground.
Where I fee not what can be juftly pretended for thofe
changes, befides the breaking of their parts into lefs
parts by that contrition after the fame manner that the
Colour of a thin Plate is changed by varying its thick-
nefs. For which reafon alfo it is that the coloured flowers
of Plants and Vegitables by being bruifed ufually be¬
come more tranfparent than before, or at leaft in fome
degree or other change their Colours. Nor is it much
lefs to my purpofe, that by mixing divers liquors very-
odd and remarquable productions and changes of Co¬
lours may be effected, of which no caufe can be more
obvious and rational than that the faline corpufcles of
one liquor do varioufly a£t upon or unite with the
tinging corpufcles of another, fo as to make them fwell,
or Ihrink (whereby not only their bulk but their den-
fity alfo may be changed ) or to divide them into
fmaller corpufcles, (whereby a coloured liquor may be¬
come
come tranfparent) or to make many of them affociate
into one duller, whereby two tranfparent liquors may
compofe a coloured one. For we fee how apt thofe
faline menftruums are to penetrate and diffolve fub-
ftances to which they are applied, and fome of them
to precipitate what others diffolve. In like manner, if
we confider the various Phenomena of the Atmofphaere,
we may obferve, that when Vapors are firft raifed, they
hinder not the tranfparency of the Air, being divided
into parts too fmall to caui’e any reflexion in their fuper-
ficies. But when in order to compofe drops of rain they
begin to coalefce and conftitute globules of all inter¬
mediate fizes, thole globules when they become of a
convenient fize to relied! fome Colours and tranfmit
others, may conftitute Clouds of various Colours accor¬
ding to their fizes. And I fee not what can be ratio¬
nally conceived in fo tranfparent a fubftance as Water for
the production of thefe Colours, befides the various
fizes of its fluid and globuler parcels.

PROP. VI.

The farts of Bodies on which their Colours defend


are denfer than the medium, which -pervades their m-
terftices.
This will appear by confidering, that the Colour of
a Body depends not only on the rays which are inci¬
dent perpendicularly on its parts, but on thofe alfo
which are incident at all other Angles. And that ac¬
cording to the 7th Obfervation, a very little variation
of obliquity will change the 1'efledted Colour where the
thin body or fmall particle is rarer than the ambient
I i medium,
medium, infomuch that fuch a fmall particle will tit di-
verily oblique incidences reflect all forts of Colours, in
fo great a variety that the Colour refulting from them
all, confufedly reflected from a heap of fuch particles,
muft rather be a white or grey than any other Colour,
or at beft it muft be but a very imperfect and dirty Co¬
lour. Whereas if the thin body or fmall particle be
much denfer than the ambient medium, the Colours
according to the 19th Obfervation are fo little changed
by the variation of obliquity, that the rays which are
reflected leaft obliquely may predominate over the reft
fo much as to caufe a heap of fuch particles to appear
very intently of their Colour.
It conduces alfo fomething to the confirmation of this
Propolition, that, according to the 22th Obfervation,
the Colours exhibited by the denfer thin body within
the rarer, are more brifque than thofe exhibited by the
rarer within the denfer.

PROP. VII.

The bignefs of the component parts of natural Bodies


may be conjectured by their Colours.
For fince the parts of thefe Bodies by Prop. 5. do
moft probably exhibit the fame Colours with a Plate of
equal thicknefs^ provided they have the fame refraftive
denfity; and fince their parts Teem for the moft part to
have much the fame denfity with Water or Glafs, as
by many circumftances is obvious to colle£t; to deter¬
mine the fizes^of thofe parts you need only have recourfe
to the precedent Tables, in which the thicknefs of Wa¬
ter or Glals exhibiting any Colour is expreffed. Thus
if
[59-].
if it be defired to know the Diameter of a corpufcle,
which being of equal denfity with Glafs fhall refled
green of the third order; the number 16- lhews it to
be l6^ parts of an Inch.
IOOOOO A

The greateft difficulty is here to know of what order


the Colour of any Body is. And for this end we muft
have recourfe to the 4th and 18th Obfervations, from
whence may be collected thefe particulars.
Scarlets, and other reds, oranges and yellows^ if they
be pure and intenfe are moft probably of the fecond or¬
der. Thofe of the firft and third order alfo may be
pretty good, only the yellow of the firft order is faint,
and the orange and red of the third order have a great
mixture of violet and blue.
There may be good greens of the fourth order, but
the pureft are of the third. And of this order the green
of all vegitables feem to be, partly by reafon of the in-
tenfenefs of their. Colours, and partly becaufe when
they wither fome of them turn to a greenilh yellow,
and others to a more perfect yellow or orange, or per¬
haps to red, paffing firft through all the aforefaid in¬
termediate Colours. Which changes feem to be effe&ed
by the exhaling of the moifture which may leave the
tinging corpufcles more denfe, and fomething augmen¬
ted by the accretion of the oyly and earthy part of
that moifture. Now the green without doubt is of the
fame order with thofe Colours into which it changeth,
becaufe the changes are gradual, and thofe Colours,
though ulually not very full, yet are often too full and
lively to be of the fourth order.

li a Blues
[do]
Blues and purples maybe either of the fecond or third
order, but the beft are of the third. Thus the Colour
of violets feems to be of that order, becaufe their Syrup
by acid Liquors turns red, and by urinous and alcali-
zale turns green. For fince it is of the nature of Acids
to diffolve or attenuate, and of Alcalies to precipitate
or incraflate, if the purple Colour of the Syrup was of
the fecond order, an acid Liquor by attenuating its ting¬
ing corpufcles would change it to a red of the fir ft
order, and an Alcaly by incrafifating them would change
it to a green of the fecond order 3 which red and green,
efpecially the green, feem too imperfect to be the Co¬
lours produced by thefe changes. But if the faid purple
be fuppofed of the third order, its change to red of the
fecond, and green of the third, may without any in¬
convenience be allowed.
If there be found any Body of a deeper and lei's red-
difh purple than that of the violets, its Colour moft
probably is of the fecond order. But yet their being
no Body commonly known whofe Colour is conftantly
more deep than theirs, 1 have made ufe of their name to
denote the deepeft and leaft reddifih purples, fuch as
manifeftly tranfcend their Colour in purity.
The Hue of the firft order, though very faint and
little, may poffibly be the Colour of fome fubftances;
and particularly the azure Colour of the Skys feems to
be of this order. For all vapours when they begin to
condenfe and coalefce into lmall parcels, become firft of
that bignefs whereby fuch an Azure muft be reflected
before they can conftitute Clouds of other Colours. And
fo this being the firft Colour which vapors begin to
reflect, it ought to be the Colour of the hneft and moft <
tranfe
[6!]
tranfparent Skys in which vapors are not arrived to that
grofnefs requifite to reflect other Colours, as we find it
is by experience.
JVbiteneJ's, if moil: intenfe and luminous, is that of the
firft order, if lefs ftrong and luminous a mixture of the
Colours of feveral orders. Of this laft kind is the
whitenefs of Froth, Paper, Linnen, and moft white fub-
fiances ; of the former I reckon that of white metals to
be. For whilft the denfeft of metals, Gold, if foliated
is tranfparent, and all metals become tranfparent if
diffolved in menftruums or vitrified, the opacity of
white metals arileth not from their denfity alone. They
being lefs denfe than Gold would be more tranfparent
than it, did not feme other caufie concur with their den¬
fity to make them opake. And this caufe I take to be
fuch a bignefs of their particles as fits them to reflect
the white of the firft order. For if they be of other
thickneffes they may reflect other Colours, as is mani-
left by the Colours which appear upon hot Steel in tem¬
pering it, and fometimes upon the ferface of melted
metals in the Skin or Scoria which arifes upon them in
their cooling. And as the white of the firft order is
the ftrongeft which can be made by Plates of tranfparent
lubftances, fo it ought to be ftronger in the denfer fub~
fiances of metals than in the rarer of Air, Water and
Glafs. Nor do I fee but that metallic lubftances of fuch
a thicknefs as may fit them to refleft the white of the
firft order, may, by reafon of their great denfity (accor¬
ding to the tenour of the firft of thefe Propofitions) re¬
flect all the Light incident upon them, and fo be as
opake and fplendent as its poffible for any Body to be.
Gold, or Copper mixed with lefs than half their weight
of
O]
of Silver, or Tin, or Regulus of Antimony, in fufion
or amalgamed with a very little Mercury become white;
which Thews both that the particles of white metals
have much more fuperficies, and fo are fmaller, than
thofe of Gold and Copper, and alfo that they are lb
opake as not to fuffer the particles of Gold or Copper to
Ihine through them. Now it is fcarce to be doubted,
but that the Colours of Gold and Copper are of the fe-
cond or third order, and therefore the particles of white
metals cannot be much bigger than is requifite to make
them refled, the white of the firft order. The volati¬
lity of Mercury argues that they are not much bigger,
nor may they be much lefs, leaft they lofe their opacity,
and become either tranfparent as they do when attenua¬
ted by vitrification, or by folution in menftruums, or
black as they do when ground fmaller, by rubbing Sil¬
ver,or Tin, or Lead, upon other fubftances to draw black
Lines. The firft and only Colour which white metals
take by grinding their particles fmaller is black, and
therefore their white ought to be that which borders
upon the black Spot in the center of the Rings of Co¬
lours, that is, the white of the firft order. But if you
would hence gather the bignefs of metallic particles,
you muft allow for their denfity. For were Mercury
tranfparent, its denfity is fuch that the Sine of inci¬
dence upon it (by my computation) would be to the
line of its refraction, as 71 to 20, or 7 to 2. And
therefore the thicknefs of its particles, that they may
exhibit the fame Colours with thofe of Bubbles of Wa¬
ter, ought to be lefs than the thicknefs of the Skin of
thofe Bubbles in the proportion of 2 to 7. Whence
its poffible that the particles of Mercury may be as little
as
, 1
I f? I
as the particles of lome tranfparent and volatile fluids,
and yet reflect the white of the firft order.
Laftly, for the production of blacky the corpufcles
muft be lefs than any of thofe which exhibit Colours.
For at all greater fizes there is too much Light refle¬
cted to conftitute this Colour. But if they be fuppo-
fed a little lefs than is requifite to refieCt the white and
very faint blue of the firft order, they will, according
to the 4th, 8th, 17th and 18th Oblervations, refleCt
fo very little as to appear intenfly black, and yet may
perhaps varioully refraCt it to and fro within them*
felves fo long, until it happen to be ftifled and loft,
by which means they will appear black in all pofitions
of the Eye without any tranfparency. And from hence
may be underftood why Fire, and the more fubtile
difiblver Putrefaction, by dividing the particles of tub-
fiances, turn them to black, why fmall quantities of
black fubftances impart their Colour very freely and in-
tenfly to other fubftances to which they are applied •
the minute particles of thefe, by reafon of their very
great number, eafily overfpreading the grofs particles
of others; why Glafs ground very elaborately with
Sand on a copper Plate, ’till it be well polifhed, makes
the Sand, together with what is worn off from the Glafs
and Copper, become very black : why black fubftances
do fooneft of all others become hot in the Suffs Light
and burn, (which effeCt may proceed partly from the
multitude of refractions in a little room, and partly
from the eafy commotion of fo very fmall corpufcles;)
and why blacks are ufually a little inclined to a bluifh
Colour. For that they are fo may be feen by illumina¬
ting white Paper by Light reflected from black fub¬
ftances.
[ *4 ]
fiances. For the Paper will ufually appear of a biuifh
white; and the reafon is, that black borders on the
obfcure blue of the firft order defcribed in the 18th
Obfervation, and therefore reflects more rays of that
Colour than of any other.
In thefe Defcriptions I have been the more particu¬
lar, becaufe it is not impoffible but that Mifcrofcopes
may at length be improved to the difcovery of the
particles of Bodies on which their Colours depend, if
they are not already in fome meafure arrived to that de¬
gree of perfection. For if thofe Inftruments are or can
be fo far improved as with fufficient diftinCtnefs to re-
prefent Objects five or fix hundred times bigger than
at a Foot diftanoe they appear to our naked Eyes, I
fhould hope that we might be able to difcover foine of
the greateft of thofe corpufcles. And by one that would
magnify three or four thoufand times perhaps they
might all be difcovered, but thofe which produce black-
nefs. In the mean while I fee nothing material in this
Difcourfe that may rationally be doubted of excepting
this Pofition, That traniparent corpufcles of the fame
thicknefs and deniity with a Plate, do exhibit the fame
Colour. And this I would have underfiood not with¬
out fome latitude, as well becaufe thofe corpufcles may
be of irregular Figures, and many rays muft be oblique¬
ly incident on them, and fo have a Ihorter way through
them than the length of their Diameters, as becaufe the
ftraitnefs of the medium pent in on all fides within fuch
corpufcles may a little alter its motions or other qua¬
lities on which the reflexion depends. But yet I can¬
not much lufpeCt the laft, becaufe I have obferved of
dome fimall Plates of Mulcovy-Giafs which were of an
even
even thicknefs, that through a Mifcrofcope they have
appeared of the fame Colour at their edges and cor*
ners where the included medium was terminated, which
they appeared of in other places* However it will add
much to our fatisfa&ion, if thofe corpufcles could be dis¬
covered with Mifcrofcopes; which if we {hall at length
attain to, I fear it will be the utmoft improvement of
this fenfe. For it feems impoffible to fee the more fe~
cret and noble works of nature within the corpufcles
by reafon of their transparency*

PRO P. VIII.

T*he caufe of Reflexion is not the impinging of Light on


the folid or imferviom farts of Bodies, as is commonly he*
lieved.
This will appear by the following Confiderations.
Firft, That in the paffage of Light out of Glafs into
Air there is a reflexion as ftrong as in its paffage out of
Air into Glafs, or rather a little ftronger, and by many
degrees ftronger than in its paffage out of Glafs into
Water. And it feems not probable that Air fliould have
more reflecting parts than Water or Glafs. But if that
fliould poflibly be fuppofed, yet it will avail nothing ;
tor the reflexion is as ftrong or ftronger when the Air is
drawn away from the Glafs, (fuppofe in the Air-pump
invented by Mr. Boyle ) as when it is adjacent to'it.
Secondly, If Light in its paffage out of Glafs into Air
be incident more obliquely than at an Angle of 40 or
41 degrees it is wholly reflected, if lefs obliquely it is
in great meafure tranfmitted. Now it is not to be ima^
gined that Light at one degree of obliquity fliould meet
K k with
[<56]
with pores enough in the Air to tranfmit the greater
part of it, and at another degree of obliquity fihould
meet with nothing but parts to reflefk it wholly, efpe-
dally confidering that in its pafiage out of Air into
Glafs, how oblique foever be its incidence, it finds
pores enough in the Glafs to tranfmit the greateft part
of it. If any Man fuppofe that it is not reflected by the
Air, but by the outmoft fuperficial parts of the Glafs,
there is ftill the fame difficulty : Befides, that fuch a
Suppofition is unintelligible, and will alfo appear to be
falle by applying Water behind fome part of the Glafs
inftead of Air. For fo in a convenient obliquity of the
rays fuppofe of 45 or 46 degrees, at which they are all
reflected where the Air is adjacent to the Glals, they
lhall be in great meafure tranfmitted where the Water
is adjacent to it; which argues, that their reflexion
or tranliniffion depends on the conftitution of the Air
andi Water behind the Glafs, and not on the ftriking
off the rays upon the parts of the Glafs. Thirdly, If
the Colours made by a Prifm placed at the entrance of
a beam of Light into a darkened room be fucceffively
caft bn a fecond Prifm placed at a greater diftance from
the former, in fuch manner that they are all alike inci¬
dent upon it, the fecond Prifin may be fo inclined to
the incident rays, that thofe which are of a blue Colour
lhall be all refleded by it, and yet thofe of a red Colour
pretty copioufly tranfmitted. Now if the reflexion be
caufed by the parts of Air or Glafs, I would ask, why
at the fame obliquity of incidence the blue fliould whol¬
ly impinge on thofe parts fo as to be all reflected, and
yet the red find pores enough to be in great meafure
tranfmitted. Fourthly, where two Glailes touch one
another.
another, there is no fenfible reflexion as was declared
in the firft Obfervation; and yet I fee no reafon why
the rays fhould not impinge on the parts of Glafs as
much when contiguous to other Glafs as when con¬
tiguous to Air. Fifthly, When the top of a Water-
bubble (in the 17th Obfervation) by the continual fub-
fiding and exhaling of the Water grew very thin, there
was fuch a little and almoft infenfible quantity of Light
reflected from it, that it appeared intenlly black ; where¬
as round about that black Spot, where the Water was
thicker, the reflexion was fo ftrong as to make the
Water feem very white. Nor is it only at the leaft
thicknefs of thin Plates or Bubbles, that there is no
manifeft reflexion, but at many other thicknefles con¬
tinually greater and greater. For in the 15 th Obfer¬
vation the rays of the fame Colour were by turns tranf-
mitted at one thicknefs, and relieved at another thick¬
nefs, for an indeterminate number of fucceffions. And
yet in the fiiperficies of the thinned Body, where it is
of any one thicknefs, there are as many parts for the
rays to impinge on, as where it is of any other thick¬
nefs. Sixthly, If reflexion were caufed by the parts of
refle&ing Bodies, it would be impoffible for thin Plates
or Bubbles at the fame place to reflect the rays of one
Colour and tranfmit thofe of another, as they do accor¬
ding to the 13 th and 15 th Obfervations. For it is
not _ to be imagined that at one place the rays which
for inftance exhibit a blue Colour, fhould have the for¬
tune to dafh upon the parts, and thofe which exhibit
a red to hit upon the pores of the Body ; and then at
another place, where the Body is either a little thicker,
or a little thinner, that on the contrary the blue fhould
K k 2 hit
[68]
hit upon its pores., and the red upon its parts* Laftly,
were the rays of Light reflected by impinging on the
folid parts of Bodies, their reflexions from polifhed Bo¬
dies could not be fo regular as they are* For in po-
lilhing Glafs with Sand, Putty or Tripoly, it is not to
be imagined that thofe fubftances can by grating and
fretting the Glafs bring all its leaft particles to an ac¬
curate polilh; fo that all their furfaces fliall be truly
plain or truly fpherical, and look all the fame way, fo
as together to compofe one even furface* The fmaller
the particles of thofe fubftances are, the fmaller will
be the fcratches by which they continually fret and wear
away the Glafs until it be polifhed, but be they never
fo fmall they can wear away the Glafs no otherwife
than by grating and fcratching it, and breaking the
proturberances, and therefore polifti it no otherwife
than by bringing its roughnefs to a very fine Grain, fo
that the fcratches and frettings of the furface become
too fmall to be vifible. And therefore if Light were
reflected by impinging upon the folid parts of the Glafs^
it would be fcattered as much by the moft polifhed
Glafs as by the roughed. So then it remains a Pro¬
blem, how Glafs polifhed by fretting fubftances can re¬
flect Light fo regularly as it does. And this Problem
is fcarce otherwife to be folved than by faying, that
the reflexion of a ray is effected, not by a Angle point of
the reflecting Body, but by fome power of the Body
which is evenly diffufed all over its furface, and by
which it aCts upon the ray without immediate contaCt.
For that the parts of Bodies do aCt upon Light at a di-
fiance fliall be fhewn hereafter.

Now
Now if Light be reflected not by impinging on the
folid parts of Bodies, but by fome other principle ; its
probable that as many of its rays as impinge on the
folid parts of Bodies are not reflected but ftifled and
loft in the Bodies. For otherwife we muft allow two
forts of reflexions. Should all the rays be reflected which
impinge on the internal parts of clear Water or Cryftal,
thofe fubftances would rather have a cloudy Colour
than a clear tranfparency. To make Bodies look black,
its neceflary that many rays be ftopt, retained and loft
in them, and it feems not probable that any rays can
be ftopt and ftifled in them which do not impinge on
their parts.
And hence we may underftand that Bodies are much
more rare and porous than is commonly believed. Wa¬
ter is 19 times lighter, and by confequence 19 times
rarer than Gold, and Gold is fo rare as very readily
and without the leaft oppofition to tranfmit the mag-
netick Effluvia,, and eaiily to admit Quick Tilver into
its pores, and to let Water pafs through it. For a con>
cave Sphere of Gold filled with Water, and fodered up,
has upon preffing the Sphere with great force, let the
Water fqueeze through it, and ftand all over its out-
fide in multitudes of fmall Drops, like dew, without
burfting or cracking the Body of the Gold as I have
been informed by an Eye-witnefs. From all which we
may conclude, that Gold has more pores than folid
parts, and by confequence that Water has above forty-
times more pores than parts. And he that ftiall find out
anHypothefis, by which Water may befo rare, and yet
not be capable of compreflion by force, may doubtleis
by the fame Hypothefis make Gold and Water, and all
other
[ 7° 3
other Bodies as much rarer as he pleafes, fo that Light
may find a ready paflage through tranfparent fub-
ftances.

PROP. IX.

Bodies reflect and refrafi Light by one and the fame


fower varioujly exercifed in variom circumflances.
This appears by feveral Confiderations. Firft, Be-
caufe when Light goes out of Glafs into Air, as ob¬
liquely as it can poffibly do, if its incidence be made
ftill more oblique, it becomes totally reflected. For
the power of the Glafs after it has refracted the Light
as obliquely as is poffible if the incidence be ftill made
more oblique, becomes too ftrong to let any of its rays
go through, and by confequence caufes total reflexions.
Secondly, Becaufe Light is alternately reflected and
tranfmitted by thin Plates of Glafs for many fucceflions
accordingly, as the thicknefs of the Plate increafes
in an arithmetical Progreffion. For here the thicknefs
of the Glafs determines whether that power by which
Glafs ads upon Light ftiall caufe it to be refleded, or
luffer it to be tranfmitted. And, Thirdly, becaufe thofe
furfaces of tranfparent Bodies which have the greateft
refrading power, refled the greateft quantity of Light,
as was Shewed in the firft Propofition.

PROP. X.

If Light be fwifter in Bodies than in Vacuo in the


proportion of the Sines which measure the refraffion of the
Bodies, the forces of the Bodies to refleiB and refrafl Light,
[ 71 3
are very nearly proportional to the denjities of the fame
Bodies, excepting that unduom and fulphureom Bodies re-
frad more than others of this fame denfity.
Let A B reprefent the refracting plane furface of any
Body, and IC a ray incident very obliquely upon the

Body in C, fo that the Angle A CI may be infinitely


little, and let CR be the refraCted ray. From a given
point B perpendicular to the refracting furface ereCt
B R meeting with the refrafted ray CR in R, and if
CR reprefent the motion of the refraCted ray, and this
motion be diftinguilhed into two motions CB and BR,
whereof CB is a parallel to the refraCting plane, and
BR perpendicular to it: CB {hall reprefent the motion
of the incident ray, and B R the motion generated by
the refraCtion, as Opticians have of late explained.
Now if any body or thing in moving through any
fpace of a giving breadth terminated on both tides by
two parallel plains, be urged forward in all parts ofi
that {pace by forces tending direCtly forwards towards
the laft plain, and before its incidence on the firft
plane, had no motion towards it, or but an infinitly
little one *. and if the forces in all parts of that fpace, #
between the planes be at equal diftances from the planes
equal to one another, but at feveral diftances be bigger
or lefs in any given proportion, the motion generated-
by the forces in the whole paflage of the body or thing-
through.
[70
through that fpace lha.ll be in a fubduplicate proportion
of the forces, as Mathematicians will eafily underftand.
And therefore if the fpace of activity of the refracting
luperficies of the Body be confidered as fuch a fpace,
the motion of the ray generated by the refraCting force
of the Body, during its paflage through that fpace
that is the motion BR muft be in a fubduplicate
proportion of that refraCting force : I fay therefore that
the lquare of the Line B R, and by confequence the
refrading force of the Body is very nearly as the den-
fity of the fame Body. For this will appear by the fol-
lowingTable, wherein the proportion of the Sines which
meafure the refraxions of feveral Bodies, the fquare
of BR fuppofing CB an unite, the denfities of the
Bodies eftimated by their fpecifick gravities, and their
refraCtive power in refpeCt of their denfities are fet
down in feveral Columns.

The
[73]
The Proportion The Square of The denfity The refra¬
of the Sines of B R, to which and fpeci- ctive power
The refrafting Bodies. incidence and the refracting fc gravity of the Body
refraction of force oftheBo- of the Bo- in refpeCt
yellow Light, dy is propor¬ dy. of its den-
tionate. fity.

A Pfeudo-Topazius, be¬
ing a natural,pellucid,
brittle, hairy Stone, of 23 t0 14 ^699 4’27 3979
a yellow Colour
Air 2851 to 385° o’ooo 5 2 o’oOI2 5 4160
Glafs of Antimony 17 to 9 2*568 5*28 '4864
A Selenitis 61 to 41 1*213 2*252 5386
Glafs vulgar 31 to 20 1*4025 275§ 5436
Cryltal of the Rock 25 to 16 1’44 5 2^65 5450
Hand Cryftal 5 3 1*778 2?72 6536
Sal Gemmae 17 to 11 1388 2?I43 6477
Alume 3 5 to 24 1T267 *’7*4 6 57°
Borax 22 tO *5 1*1511 *’7*4 6716
Niter 3 2 to 21 t’345 i?9 7°79
Dantzick Vitriol 3°3 to 200 1*295 I’7I5 755*
Oyl of Vitriol 10 to 7 1*041 x*7 6124V
Rain Water 529 to 396 °’7845 I. 7S45
Gumm Arabic 31 to 21 I*179 i’375 8574
Spirit of Wine well recti¬
100 to 73 °J8y6<y o’866 10121
fied
Camphire 3 to 2 T25 ©’996 12551
Oyl Olive 22 to 15 1*1511 913 12607
Lintfeed Oyl 40 to 27 1T948 °y 93 2 12819
Spirit of Turpentine 25 to *7 1T626 0*874 13222
Ambar 14 to 9 I742 1*04
i3654
A Diamond IOO to 41 4^949 3’4 - M556

The refraftion of the Air in this Table is determined


by that of the Atmofphere obferved by Aftronomers.
For if Light pals through many refracting fubftances or
mediums gradually denfer and denier, and terminated
L1 with
' '
with parallel furfaces,
3
the fumm of all the refradions
wifi be equal to the Angle refradion which it would
have fullered in palling immediately out of the firft
medium into the laft. And this holds true, though tire
number of the refracting fubftances be increafed to infi¬
nity, and the diftances from one another as much de¬
creased^ fo that the Light may be refraded in every
point of its paffage, and by continual refradions bent
into a curve Line. And therefore the whole refradion
of Light in paffing through the Atmofphere from the
higheft and rareft part thereof down to the loweft and
denfeft part, mult be equal to the refradion which it
would futfer in paffing at like obliquity out of a Va¬
cuum immediately into Air of equal denfity with that
in the loweft part of the Atmofphere.
Now, by this Table, the refradions of a Pfeudo-To-
paz, a Selenitis, Rock Cryftal, Ifiand Cryftal, Vulgar
Glafs (that is, Sand melted together ) and Glafs of
Antimony, which are terreftrial ftony alcalizate con¬
cretes,and Air which probably arifes from fuch fubftances
by fermentation,though thefe be fubftances very differing
from one another in denfity, yet they have their refra¬
ctive powers almoft in the fame proportion to one ano¬
ther as their denfities are, excepting that the refradion of
that ftrange fubftance Iiland-Cryftal is a little bigger
than the reft. And particularly Air, which is 3 400 times
rarer than thePfeudo-Topaz, and 4200 times rarer than
Glafs of Antimony, has notwithftanding its rarity the
fame refradive power in refped of its denfity which
thofe two very denfe fubftances have in refped of theirs,
excepting fo tar as thofe two differ from one another.

Again,
[ 75 ]
Again, the refraCtion of Camphire, OyLOlive, Lint-
feed Oyl, Spirit of Turpentine and Amber, which are
fat fulphureous unCtuous Bodies, and a Diamond, which
probably is an unctuous fubftance coagulated, have their
refractive powers in proportion to one another as their
denfities without any confiderable variation* But the
refraCtive power of thefe unCtuous fubftances is two
or three times greater in refpeCi of their denfities than
the refraCtive powers of the former fubftances in refpeCfc
of theirs.
Water has a refraCtive power in a middle degree be¬
tween thole two forts of fubftances, and probably is of
a middle nature* For out of it grow all vegetable and
animal fubftances, which confift as well of fulphureous
fat and inflamable parts, as of earthy lean and alcalh
zate ones*
Salts and Vitriols have refraCtive powers in a middle
degree between thofe of earthy fubftances and Water,
and accordingly are compofed of thofe two forts of fub¬
ftances* For by diftillation and rectification of their
Spirits a great part of them goes into Water, and a great
part remains behind in the form of a dry fixt earth ca¬
pable of vitrification*
Spirit of Wine has a refraCtive power in a middle
degree between thofe of Water and oyly fubftances, and
accordingly feems to be compofed of both, united by
fermentation ; the Water, by means of fome faline Spi¬
rits with which ’tis impregnated, diffolving the Oyl,
and volatizing it by the aCtion. For Spirit of Wine is
inflamable. by means of its oyly parts, and being diftiL
led often from Salt of Tartar, grows by every diftilla¬
tion more and more aqueous and fiegmatick. And
L1 2 Chymifts
Chymifts obferve, that Yegitables (as Lavender, Rue,
Marjoram, i3c.) diftilled per fe, before fermentation
yield Oyls without any burning Spirits, but after fer¬
mentation yield ardent Spirits without Oyls : Which
fhews, that their Oyl is by fermentation converted into
Spirit. They find alfo, that if Oyls be poured in final!
quantity upon fermentating Vegetables, they diftil over
after fermentation in the form of Spirits.
So then, by the foregoing Table, all Bodies feem to
have their refractive powers proportional to their
denfities, (or very nearly ;) excepting fo far as they
partake more or lefs of fulphurous oyly particles, and
thereby have their refractive power made greater or
lefs. Whence it feems rational to attribute the refra¬
ctive power of all Bodies chiefly, if not wholly, to the
fulphurous parts with which they abound. For it’s
probable that all Bodies abound more or lefs with Sul¬
phurs. And as Light congregated by a Burning-glafs
aCts mod upon fulphurous Bodies, to turn them in¬
to fire and flame ; fo, fince all aCtion is mutual, Sul¬
phurs ought to aCt mod upon Light. For that the
aCtion between Light and Bodies is mutual, may appear
from this Confideration, That the denfeft Bodies which
refraCt and refleCt Light mod ftrongly grow hotteft in
the Summer-Sun, by the aCtion of the refraCted or re¬
flected Light.
I have hitherto explained the power of Bodies to re¬
flect and refraCt, and fliewed, that thin tranfparent
plates, fibres and particles do, according to their leveral
thicknefles and denfities, refleCt feveral forts of rays,
and thereby appear of feveral Colours, and by conle-
quence that nothing more is requifite for producing all
[77]
the Colours of natural Bodies than the leveral fizes and
denfities of their tranfparent particles. But whence it
is that thefe plates, fibres and particles do, according
to their feveral thickneffes and denfities, refledf federal
forts of rays, I have not yet explained. To give fome
infight into this matter, and make way for underftan-
ding the next Part of this Book, I fhali conclude this
Part with a few more Propofitions. Thofe which pre¬
ceded refpedt the nature of Bodies, thefe the nature of
Light : For both mu ft be under ft ood before the reafon
of their actions upon one another can be known. And,
becaufe the laft Propofition depended upon the velo¬
city of Light, I will begin with a Propofition of that
kind.
y c

PROP. XL

Light is propagated from luminous Bodies in time, and


fpends about feven or eight minutes of an hour in puffing
from the Sun to the Earth.
This was obferved firft by Romer, and then by others^
by means of the Eclipfes of the Satellites of Jupiter..,
For thefe Eclipfes, when the Earth is between the Sun
and Jupiter, happen about feven or eight minutes fooner
than they ought to do by the Tables, and when the Earth
is beyond the Sun they happen about feven or eight mi¬
nutes later than they ought to do; the reafon being, that
the Light of the Satellites has farther to go in the latter
cafe than in the former by the Diameter of the Earth's
Orbit. Some inequalities of time may arife from the
eccentricities of the Orbs of the Satellites; but thofe
cannot anfw.er in all the Satellites, and at all times
[78]
to the potition and diftance of the Earth from the Sun,
The mean motions of Jupiter's Satellites is alfo fwifter
in his defcent from his Aphelium to his Perihelium,
than in his afcent in the other half of his Orb : But this
inequality has no refpeCt to the pofition of the Earth,
and in the three interior Satellites is infenfible, as I find
by computation from the Theory of their gravity.

P R O P, XII.

Every ray of Light in its pajfage through any refra¬


cting furface is put into a certain tranfient conflitution
or fate, which in the progrefs of the ray returns at
equal intervals, and difpojes the ray at every return
to be eafily tranfmitted through the next refratting fur-
face, and between the returns to be eafdy reflected by
it.
This is manifeft by the 5th, 9th, x 2th and 15th Ob-
fervations. For by thofe Obfervations it appears, that
one and the fame fort of rays at equal Angles of inci¬
dence on any thin tranlparent plate, is alternately refle¬
cted and tranfmitted for many fucceffions accordingly,
as the thicknefs of the plate increafes in arithmetical
progreffion of the numbers o, 1,2, 3,4., 5, 6, 7, 8, tev.
lo that if the firft reflexion (that which makes the firft
or innermoft of the Rings of Colours there defcribed )
be made at the thicknefs 1 ,the rays fhall be tranfmitted at
the thickneffes o, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 3$c. and thereby
make the central Spot and Rings of Light, which ap¬
pear by tranfmiflion, and be reflected at the thicknefs
S 3) 55 7t V11^- and thereby make the Rings which
appear
l 79 j
appear by reflexion. And this alternate reflexion and
tranftnifiion, as I gather by the o.4th Obfervation, con¬
tinues for above an hundred viciffitudes , and by the
the Obfervations in the next part of this Book, for many
thoufands, being propagated from one furface of a Glafs-
plate to the other, though the thicknefs of the plate
be a quarter of an Inch or above : So that this alter¬
nation feems to be propagated from every refracting
furface to all diftances without end or limitation,
.This alternate reflexion and refraction depends on
both the furfaces of every thin plate., becaufe it de¬
pends on their diftance* By the aith Obfervation, if
either furface of a thin plate of Mufcovy-Glafs be wet¬
ted, the Colours caufed by the alternate reflexion
and refraCtion grow faint, and therefore it depends on
them. both.
It is therefore performed at the fecond furface, for
if it were performed at the firft, before the rays ar¬
rive at the fecond, it would not depend on the fe»
condL
It is alfo influenced by fame aCtion or difpofition,
propagated from the firft to the fecond, becaufe other-
wife at the fecond it would not depend on the firft. And
this aCtion or difpofition, in its propagation, intermits
and returns by equal intervals, becaufe in all its pro-
grefs it inclines the ray at one diftance from the firft
furface to be reflected by the fecond, at another to be
tranfmitted by it, and that by equal intervals for innu¬
merable viciffitudes. And becaufe the ray is difpofed
to reflexion at the diftances 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, If1c. and to
tranfmiffion at the diftances o, a, 4, 6, 8, 10, tec, ( for
its tranfmiffion through the firft furface, is at the di¬
ftance
[ So ]
fence o, and it is tranfmitted through both toge¬
ther, if their diftance be infinitely little or much lefs
than i) the difpofition to be tranfmitted at the diftances
a, 4, 6, 8, 10, is to be accounted a return of the
fame difpofition which the ray firft had at the diftance o,
that is at its tranlmiffion through the firft refraCting fur-
face. All which is the thing I would prove.
What kind of aCtion or difpofition this is ? Whether
it confift in a circulating or a vibrating motion of the
ray, or of the medium, or fomething elfe ? I do not
here enquire. Thofe that are averfe from affenting to
any new difcoveries, but fuch as they can explain by an
Hypothefts, may for the prefent fuppofe, that as Stones
by falling upon Water put the Water into an undula¬
ting motion, and all Bodies by percuffion excite vibra¬
tions in the Air; fo the rays of Light, by impinging on
any refraCting or reflecting furface, excite vibrations in
the refraCting or reflecting medium or fubftance, and
by exciting them agitate the folid parts of the refraCting
or reflecting Body, and by agitating them caufe the Body
to grow warm or hot; that the vibrations thus excited
are propagated in the refraCting or reflecting medium
or fubftance, much after the manner that vibrations are
propagated in the Air for caufing found, and move
fafter than the rays fo as to overtake them; and that
when any ray is in that part of the vibration which con-
fpires with its motion, it eafily breaks through a re¬
fraCting furface, but when it is in the contrary part of
the vibration which impedes its motion, it is eafily
reflected ; and, by conlequence, that every ray is fuc-
ceflively difpofed to be eafily reflected, or eafily tranf-
inttted, by every vibration which overtakes it. But
whether
[8ij
whether this Hypothefis be true or falfe I do not here
confider. I content my felf with the bare difcovery,
that the rays of Light are by fome caufe or other alter¬
nately difpofed to be refle&ed or refrafted for many vh
ciffitudes.

DEFINITION

The returns of the diffofition of any ray to he reflected


I will call its Fits of eafy reflexion, and tbofe of
its difpojition to be tranfmitted its Fits of eafy tranf-
miffion, and the Jpace it gaffes between every re¬
turn and the next return, the Interval of its
Fits.

PROP, XIII.

The reafon why the furfaxes of all thick trrnfparent


Bodies refleH fart of the Light incident on them, and
refrail the reft, is^ that fome rays at their incidence are
in Fits of eafy reflexion, and others in Fits of eafy tranfl
mijjion.
This may be gathered from the 24th Obfervation,
where the Light reflected by thin plates of Air and Glafs,
which to the naked Eye appeared evenly white all over
the plate, did through a Prifm appear waved with many
fucceffions of Light and Darknels made by alternate fits
of eafy reflexion, and eafy tranfmiffion 5 the Prifm
fevering and diftinguifhing the waves of which the
white reflected Light was compofed, as was explained
above.

Mm And
i>]
And hence Light is in fits of eafy reflexion and eafy
tranfmiflion, before its incidence on tranfparent Bodies.
And probably it is put into fuch fits at its firft emiflion
from luminous Bodies, and continues in them during
all its progrefs, For thefe fits are of a lading Nature,
as will appear by the next part of this Book*
In this Propofition I fuppofe the tranfparent Bodies
to be thick, becaufe if the thicknefs of the Body be
much lefs than the interval of the fits of eafy reflexion
and tranfmiflion of the rays, the Body lofethits reflecting
power. For if the rays, which at their entering into
the Body are put into fits of eafy tranfmiflion, arrive at
the furtheft lurface of the Body before they be out of
thofe fits they muft be tranfmitted. And this is the
reafon why Bubbles of Water lofe their reflecting power
when they grow very thin, and why all opake Bo¬
dies when reduced into very fmall parts become tranf¬
parent.

,
PROP. XIV.

Thofe furfaces of tranfparent Bodies 'which if the ray


he in a fit of refraction do refraCt it mofl ftronglyy if the
fay be in a fit of reflexion do refleCt it mofl eafily.
For we fhewed above in Prop. 8. that the caufe of
reflexion is not the impinging of Light on the folid
impervious parts of Bodies, but fome other powrer by
which thofe folid parts a£t on Light at a diftance. We
fhewed alfo in Prop. 9. that Bodies reflect and refra£t
Light by one and the fame power varioufly exercifed in
various circumftances, and in Prop. 1. that the mofl:
ftrongly refracting furfaces reflect the mofl Light: All
which
which compared together evince and ratify both this
and the laft Propolition,

PROP, XV,

In any one and the fame fort of rays emerging in any


jingle out of any refracting furface into one and the fame
medium, the interval of the following fits of eafy reflexion
and tranfmijflon are either accurately or very nearly, as
the Re Clangle of the feeant of the Angle of refraSion, and
of the fecant of mother Angle y whofe fine is the firfl of
106 arithmetical mean proportionals y between the fines
of incidence and refraction counted from the fine of re~
fradion.
This is manifeft by the 7th Oblervation.

PROP, XVL

In feveral forts of rays emerging in equal Angles out


of any refraCting furface into the fame medium,, the inter*
vals of the following fits of eafy reflexion and eafy tranfl
mijfion are either accurately, or very nearly, as the Cube*
roots of the Squares of the lengths of a Chord, which found
the notes in an Eighty fol, la, fa, folr la, mi, fa, fol, with
all their intermediate degrees answering to the Colours of
thofe raysy according to the Analogy deferibed in the fe*
venth Experiment of the fecond Booh
This is manifeft by the 13 th and 14th Obfervations*

Mm 2 PROP,
[8+]

PROP. XVII.

If rays of any one fort pafs perpendicularly into feveral


mediums, the intervals of the fits of eafy reflexion and
tranfmijfion m any one medium, is to thofe intervals in
any other as the fine of incidence to the fine of refraHion,
when the rays pafs out of the firft of thofe two mediums
into the fecond.
This is inanifeft by the loth Obfervatiom

PROP. XVIII.

If the rays which paint the Colour in the confine of


yellow and orange pafs perpendicularly out of any medium
into ylir^ the intervals of their fits of eafy reflexion are
the zf~-ath part of an Inch. iAnd of the fame length are
the intervals of their fits of eafy tranfmijfion.
This is manifeft by the 6th Qbfervation.
From thefe Propofitions it is eafy to colled the in¬
tervals of the fits of eafy reflexion and eafy tranfmif-
fion of any fort of rays refraded in any Angle into
any medium, and thence to know, whether the rays
Ihall be refleded or tranfmitted at their fubfequent
incidence upon any other pellucid medium. Which
thing being ufeful for underflanding, the next part of
this Book was here to be fet down. And for the lame
-reafon I add the two following Propofitions.

PROP.
[85]

PROP. XIX.

If any fort of rays falling on the polite furface of am


pellucid medium be reflecled back^ the fits of eafy re¬
flexion which they have at the point of reflexion , J,hall
fiill continue to return, and the returns Jhall be at di¬
fiances from the point of reflexion in the arithmetical
progreflion of the numbers 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, I2,&c. and be¬
tween thefe fits the rays Jhall be in fits of eafy tranfl
mijflon.
For fince the fits of eafy reflexion and eafy tranf-
miflion are of a returning nature, there is no reafbn
why thefe fits, which continued till the ray arrived at
the reflecting medium, and there inclined the ray to
reflexion, fliould there ceafe, And if the ray at the
point of reflexion was in a fit of eafy reflexion, the
progreflion of the diftances of thefe fits from that point
•rnuft begin from o, and fo be of the numbers o, a, 4,
6, 8,1Sc.. And therefore the progreflion of the di¬
ftances of the intermediate fits of eafy tranfmiflion rec¬
koned from the fame point, muft be in the progreflion
of the odd numbers 1, 4, 5, 7, 9, If1c, contrary to what
happens when the fits are propagated from points of
refraction,

PRO P. XX

The intervals of the fits of eafy reflexion and eajf


tranfmiflion, propagated from points of reflexion into any
medium, are equal to the intervals of the like fits which
the fame rays would have, if refracted into the fame
medium

/
[8<5]
medium in Angles of refraction equal to their Angles of
reflexion .
For when Light is reflected by the fecond furface of
thin plates, it goes out afterwards freely at the firft fur-
face to make the Rings of Colours which appear by
reflexion, and by the freedom of its egrefs, makes the
Colours of thefe Rings more vivid and ftrong than thofe
which appear on the other fide of the plates by the
tranfmitted Light. The reflefted rays are therefore in
fits of eafy tranfmiffion at their egrefs ; which would
not always happen, if the intervals of the fits within
the plate after reflexion were not equal both in length
and number to their intervals before it. And this confirms
alfo the proportions fet down in the former Propofition.
For if the rays both in going in and out at the firft furface
be in fits of eafy tranfmiffion, and the intervals and num¬
bers of thofe fits between the firft and fecond furface,
before and after reflexion, be equal • the diftances or
the fits of eafy tranfmiffion from either furface, muff be
in the fame progrefiion after reflexion as before; that
is, from the firft furface which tranfmitted them, in
the progrefiion of the even numbers o, 2, 4, 6, 8, )3c.
and from the fecond which reflected them, in that of
the odd numbers 3^ 5^ 7^ &V* But thefe two Pro-
pofitions will become much more evident by the Gbfer-
various in the following part of this Book*

THE
THE

SECOND BOOK

OPTICK S.
PART IV.

Observations concerning the Reflexions and Colours of


thick tranfparent folijhed 'plates.

T Here is no Glafs or Speculum how well foever


polifhed, but, befides the Light which it refracts
or refle&s regularly, fcatters every way irregularly a
faint Light, by means of which the polifhed furface,
when illuminated in a dark Room by a beam of the
Sun’s Light, may be eafily feen in all pofitions of the
Eye. There are certain Phenomena of this fcattered
Light, which when I firft obferved them, feemed very
ft range and furprifing to me. My Operations were
as follows.

OBS.
[ S8 ]
O B S. I.

The Sun firming into my darkened Chamber through


a Hole ] of an Inch wide, I let the intromitted beam
of Light fall perpendicularly upon a Glafs Speculum
ground concave on,one fide and convex on the other,
td a Sphere of five Feet and eleven Inches Radius, and
quickTilvered over on the convex fide. And holding
a white opake Chart, or a Quire of Paper at the Center
of the Spheres to which the Speculum was ground, that
is, at thediftance of about five Feet and eleven Inches
from the Speculum, in fuch manner, that the beam of
Light might pafs through a little Hole made in the
middle of the Chart to the Speculum, and thence be
reflected back to the fame Hole : I obferved upon the
Chart four or five concentric Irifes or Rings of Colours,
like Rain-bows, encompaffing the Hole much after the
manner that thofe, which in the fourth and following
Obfervations of the firftpart of this third Book appeared
between theObje<ft-GlafiTes,encompafTed the black Spot,
but yet larger and fainter than thofe. Thefe Rings as
they grew larger and larger became diluter and fainter,
■lb that the fifth was fcarce vifible. Yet fometimes,
when the Sun fhone very clear, there appeared faint
Lineaments of a fixth and feventh. If the diftance of
the Chart from the Speculum was much greater or much
lefs than that of fix Feet, the Rings became dilute and
vanifhed. And if the diftance of the Speculum from
the Window was much greater than that of fix Feet,
the reflected beam of Light wou ld be fo broad at the
diftance of fix Feet from the Speculum where the Rings
appeared,
appeared, as to obfcure one or two of the mnermoft
Rings, And therefore I ufually placed the Speculum
at about fix Feet from the Window; fo that its Focus
might there fall in with the center of its concavity at the
Rings upon the Chart, And this pofture is always to
be underftood in the following Oblervations where no
other is expreft,

O B S. IL

The Colours of thefe Rain-bows fucceeded one ano-


ther from the center outwards, in the fame form and
order with thofe which were made in the ninth Obfer-
vation of the firft Part of this Book by Light not re¬
flected, but tranfmitted through the twoObjeCLGlaffes*
For, firft, there was in their common center a white
round Spot of faint Light, fomething broader than the
reflected beam of Light; which beam fometimes fell
upon the middle of the Spot, and fometimes by a little
inclination of the Speculum receded from the middle,,
and left the Spot white to the center.
This white Spot was immediately encompaffed with
a dark grey or ruffet, and that darknefs with the Co¬
lours of the firft Iris, which were on the infide next
the darknefs a little violet and indico, and next to that
a blue, which on the outfide grew pale, and then fuc¬
ceeded a little greenifti yellow, and after that a brighter
yellow, and then on the outward edge of the Iris a red,
which on the outfide inclined to purple.
This Iris was immediately encompaffed with a fe¬
cund, whole Colours were in order from the infide
Nn out-
[ 9° ]
outwards, purple, blue, green, yellow, light red, a red
mixed with purple.
Then immediately followed the Colours of the third
Iris, which were in order outwards a green inclining
to purple, a good green, and a red more bright than
that ot the former Iris.
The fourth and fifth Iris feemed of a bluiffi green
within, and red without, but fo faintly that it was dif¬
ficult to difcern the Colours.

OBS. III.

Meafuring the Diameters of thefe Rings upon the


Chart as accurately as I could, I found them alfo in
the fame proportion to one another with the Rings
made by Light tranfmitted through the two Objeft-
Glaffes. For the Diameters of the four firft of the
bright Rings meafured between the brighteft parts of
their orbits, at the diftance of fix Feet from the Specu¬
lum were ajy, 3! Inches, whofe fquares are in
arithmetical progreffion of the numbers 1, a, 4. If
the white circular Spot in the middle be reckoned
amongft the Rings, and its central Light, where it
feemstobe moft luminous, be put equipollent to an
infinitely little Ring; the fquares of the Diameters of the
Rings will be in the progreffion o, 1, a, 3, 4, 5f1c. I
meafured alfo the Diameters of the dark Circles be¬
tween thefe luminous ones, and found their fquares
in the progreffion of the numbers i\9 3-, foV.
the Diameters of the firft four at the diftance of fix Feet
from the Speculum, being 2~6, 3^ Inches. If
the diftance of the Chart from the Speculum was in-
creafed
[90
creafed or diminilhed, the Diameters of the Circles were
increafed or diminifhed proportionally.

OBS. IV.

By the analogy between thefe Rings and thofe de-


fcribed in the Obfervations of the firftPart of this Book,
I fufpeCted that there were many more of them which
fpread into one another, and by interfering mixed their
Colours, and diluted one another fo that they could
not be feen apart. I viewed them therefore through a
Prifm, as I did thofe in the 24th Obfervation of the
firft Part of this Book. And when the Prifm was fo
placed as by refracting the Light of their mixed Co¬
lours to feparate them, and diftinguilh the Rings from
one another, as it did thofe in that Obfervation, I could
then fee them diftinCter than before, and eafily num¬
ber eight or nine of them, and fometimes twelve or
thirteen. And had not their Light been fo very faint,
I queftion not but that I might have feen many more.

OBS. V.

Placing a Prifm at the Window to refraCt the intro¬


mitted beam of Light, and caft the oblong Spectrum
of Colours on the Speculum : I covered the Speculum
with a black Pap£r which had in the middle of it a Hole
to let any one of the Colours pafs through to the Spe¬
culum, whilft the reft were intercepted by the Paper.
And now I found Rings of that Colour only which fell
upon the Speculum. If the Speculum was illuminated
with red the Rings were totally red with dark inter-
Nn 2 vats,
[92]
vals, if with blue they were totally blue, and fo of the
other Colours. And when they were illuminated with
any one Colour, the Squares of their Diameters mea-
fured between their moft luminous parts, were in the
arithmetical progreffion of the numbers o, i, a, 3,4, and
the Squares of the Diameters of their dark intervals in
the progreffion of the intermediate numbers ii, 3I;
But if the Colour was varied they varied their magni¬
tude. In the red they were largeft, in the indico and
violet leaft, and in the intermediate Colours yellow,
green and blue; they were of leveral intermediate big-
neffes anlwering to the Colour, that is, greater in yel¬
low than in green, and greater in green than in blue.
And hence I knew that when the Speculum was illumi¬
nated with white Light, the red and yellow on the out-
fide of the Rings were produced by the leaft refrangible
rays, and the blue and violet by the moft refrangible,
and that the Colours of each Ring fjpread into the Co¬
lours of the neighbouring Rings on either fide, after
the manner explained in the firft and fecond Part of this
Book, and by mixing diluted one another fo that they
could not be diftinguiftied, unlefs near the center where
they were leaft mixed. For in this Obfervation I could
fee the Rings more diftinftly, and to a greater number
than before, being able in the yellow Light to number
eight or nine of them, befides a faint ffiadow of a tenth.
To fatisfy my felf how much the Colours of the feveral
Rings fpread into one another, I meafured the Diame¬
ters of the fecond and third Rings, and found them
when made by the confine of the red and orange to be
the fame Diameters when made by the confine of blue
and indico, as 9 to 8, or thereabouts. For it was hard
to,
[P3 ]
to determine this proportion accurately. Alfo the Cir¬
cles made fucceffively by the red., yellow and green,
differed more from one another than thofe made fuccef-
lively by the green., blue and indico. For the Circle
made by the violet was too dark to be feen. To carry
on the computation, Let us therefore fuppofe that the
differences of the Diameters of the Circles made by the
outmoft red, the confine of red and orange, the confine
of orange and yellow, the confine of yellow and green,
the confine of green and blue, the confine of blue and?
indico, the confine of indico and violet, and outmoft vio¬
let, are in proportion as the differences of the lengths
of a Monochord which found the tones in an Eight;
fol, la^ fa^ fol, la^ mi^ fay [oly that is, as the numbers t
Jg, L k, l7, [j, L And if the Diameter of the Circle made
by the confine of red and orange be 9 A, and that of
the Circle made by the confine of blue and indico be
8 A as above, their difference 9 A —— 8 A will be to
the difference of the Diameters of the Circles made by
the outmoft red, and by the confine of red and orange,
as i8 + + K + if to t, that is as h to i or 8 to 3, and to
the difference of the Circles made by the outmoft violet,
and by the confine of blue and indico, as h +f» +.7* -f §7
to h +L, that is, as L to f4, or as 16 to 5, And there¬
fore thefe differences will be I A and U A. Add the
fir ft to 9 A and fubduft the laft from 8 A, and yow
will have the Diameters of the Circles made by the
leaft and moft refrangible rays V A and pi A; Thefe
Diameters are therefore to one another as 75 to 6i - on
50 to 41, and their Squares as acoo to 1681, that Is,
as 3 to 2 very nearly. Which proportion differs not
much from the proportion of the Diameters of the
Circles-*
[9+]
Circles made by the outmoft red and outmoft violet in
the 13 th Obfervation of the firft part of this Book.

O B S. VI.

Placing my Eye where thefe Rings appeared plaineft,


I faw the Speculum tinged all over with waves of Co¬
lours ( red, yellow, green, blue ;) like thole which in
the Obfervations of the hr ft Part of this Book appeared
between the Objed-GlalTes and upon Bubbles of Water,
but much larger. And after the manner of thofe, they
were of various magnitudes in various pohtions of the
Eye, fweiling and fhrinking as I moved my Eye this
way and that way. They were formed like Arcs of
concentrick Circles as thofe were, and when my Eye
was over againft the center of the concavity of the Spe¬
culum (that is, 5 Feet and 10 Inches diftance from the
Speculum) their common center was in a right Line
with that center of concavity, and with the Hole in the
Window. But in other poftures of my Eye their center
had other pohtions. They appeared by the Light of
the Clouds propagated to the Speculum through the
Hole in the Window, and when the Sun Ihone through
that Hole upon the Speculum, his Light upon it was
of the Colour of the Ring whereon it fell, but by its
fplendor obfcured the Rings made by the Light of the
Clouds, unlefs when the Speculum was removed to a
great diftance from the Window, fo that his Light upon
it might be broad and faint. By varying the polition of
my Eye, and moving it nearer to or farther from the
diredt beam of the Sun’s Light, the Colour of the Sun’s
ceflefited Light conftantly varied upon the Speculum,
as
as it did upon my Eye, the fame Colour always ap¬
pearing to a By-ftander upon my Eye which to me ap¬
peared upon the Speculum. And thence I knew that
the Rings of Colours upon the Chart were made by thefe
reflected Colours propagated thither from the Specu¬
lum in feveral Angles, and that their production de¬
pended not upon the termination of Light and Shad-
dow*

O B S. VII,

By the Analogy of all thefe Phenomena with thofe of


the like Rings of Colours defcribed in the firft Part of
this Book, it teemed to me that thefe Colours were
produced by this thick plate of Glafs, much after the
manner that thofe were produced by very thin
plates. For, upon tryal, I found that if the Quick-
Ill ver were rubbed off from the back-fide of the Specu¬
lum, the Glafs alone would caufe the fame Rings, of
Colours, but much more faint than before ; and there¬
fore the Phenomenon depends not upon the Quick-
filver, unlefs fo far as the Quick-fiver by the increafing
the reflexion of the back-fide of the Glafs increafes the
Light of the Rings of Colours. I found alfo that a Spe¬
culum of metal without Glafs made fome years fince
for optical ufes, and very well wrought, produced none
of thofe Rings; and thence I underftood that thefe
Rings arife not from one fpecular furface alone, but
depend upon the two furfaces of the plate of Glafs where¬
of the Speculum was made, and upon the thicknefs of
the Glafs between them. For as in the yth and 19th,
Obfervations of the firft Part of this Book a thin plate
~ ~ ~ of
[5>«]
of Air, Water, or Glafs of an even thicknefs appeared
of one Colour when the rays were perpendicular to it,
of another when they were a little oblique, of another
when more oblique, of another when ftill more oblique,
and fo on ; fo here, in the lixth Obfervation, the Light
which emerged out of the Glafs in feveral obliquities,
made the Glafs appear of feveral Colours, and being
propagated in thofe obliquities to the Chart, there pain¬
ted Rings of thofe Colours. And as the reafon why a
thin plate appeared of feveral Colours in feveral obli¬
quities of the rays,was,that the rays of one and the fame
fort are reflected by the thin plate at one obliquity and
tranfmitted at another, and thofe of other forts tranf-
mitted where thefe are reheated, and reflected where
thefe are tranfmitted : So the reafon why the thick
plate of Glafs whereof the Speculum was made did ap¬
pear of various Colours in various obliquities, and in
thofe obliquities propagated thofe Colours to the Chart,
was, that the rays of one and the fame fort did at one
obliquity emerge out of the Glafs, at another did not
emerge but were reflected back towards the Quick-fil-
ver by the hither furface of the Glafs, and accordingly
as the obliquity became greater and greater emerged
and were relieved alternately for many fucceffions, and
that in one and the fame obliquity the rays of one fort
were reflected, and thofe of another tranfmitted. This
is manifeft by the firft Obfervation of this Rook : For
in that Obfervation, when the Speculum was illumi¬
nated by any one of the prifmatick Colours, that Light
made many Rings of the fame Colour upon the Chart
with dark intervals, and therefore at its emergence out
of the Speculum was alternately tranfmitted, and not
tranf-
[ 9? 1
tranfmitted from the Speculum to the Chart for many
fucceffions, according to the various obliquities of its
emergence. And when the Colour caft on the Specu¬
lum by the Prifm was varied, the Rings became of
the Colour caft on it, and varied their bignefs with their
Colour, and therefore the Light was now alternately
tranfmitted and not tranfmitted from the Speculum to
the Lens at other obliquities than before. It feemed to
me therefore that thefe Rings were of one and the fame
original with thofe of thin plates, but yet with this
difference that thofe of thin plates are made by the al¬
ternate reflexions and tranfmiffions of the rays at the
fecond furface of the plate after one paffage through it:
But here the rays go twice through the plate before
they are alternately reflected and tranfmitted ; fir ft,
they go through it from the firft furface to the Quick-
filver, and then return through it from the Quick-filver
to the firft furface, and there are either tranfmitted to
the Chart or reflected back to the Quick-filver, ac¬
cordingly as they are in their fits of eafie reflexion or
tranfmiffion when they arrive at that furface. For the
intervals of the fits of the rays which fall perpendicu¬
larly on the Speculum, and are reflected back in the
fame perpendicular Lines, by reafon of the equality of
thefe Angles and Lines,are of the fame length and num-
ber within the Glafs after reflexion as before by the
19th Propofition of the third Part of this Book. * And
therefore ftnce all the rays that enter through the firft
furface are in their fits of eafy tranfmiffion at their en¬
trance, and as many of thefe as are reflected by the fe¬
cond are in their fits of eafy reflexion there, all thefe
mull be again in their fits of eafy tranfmiffion at their
Q o return
return to the firft, and by confequence there go out of
the Glafs to the Chart., and form upon it the white
Spot of Light in the center of the Rings. For the rea-
fon holds good in all forts of rays , and therefore all
forts mu ft go out promifcuoully to that Spot, and by
their mixture caufe it to be white. But the intervals
of the fits of thole rays which are reflected more ob¬
liquely than they enter, muft be greater after reflexion
than before by the 15 th and 20th Prop. And thence
it may happen that the rays at their return to the firft
furface, may in certain obliquities be in fits of eafy re¬
flexion, and return back to the Guick-filver, and in
other intermediate obliquities be again in fits of eafy
tranfmiflion, and fo go out to the Chart, and paint on
it the Rings of Colours about the white Spot. And
becaufe the intervals of the fits at equal obliquities are
greater and fewer in the lefs refrangible rays, and lefs
and more numerous in the more refrangible, therefore
the lefs refrangible at equal obliquities fhall make fewer
Rings than the more refrangible, and the Rings made
by thofe fhall be larger than the like number of Rings
made by thefe ; that is, the red Rings fhall be larger
than the yellow, the yellow than the green, the green
than the blue, and the blue than the violet, as they
were really found to be in the 5th Obfervation. And
therefore the firft Ring of all Colours incompaffing the
white Spot of Light fhall be red without and violet
within, and yellow, and green, and blue in the middle,
as it was found in the fecond Obfervation; and thefe
Colours in the fecond Ring, and thofe that follow fhall
be more expanded till they fpread into one another,
and blend one another by interfering*
Thefe
[99 3 i
Thefe feem to be the reafons of thefe Rings in ge¬
neral, and this put me upon obferving the thicknefs of
the Glafs, and confidering whether the dimenfions and
proportions of the Rings may be truly derived from it
by computation.

O B S. VIII.

I meafured therefore the thicknefs of this concavo-


convex plate of Glafs, and found it every-where i of an
Inch precifely. Now, by the 6th Obfervation of the
firft Part of this Book, a thin plate of Air tranfmits the
brighteft Light of the firft Ring, that is the bright yel¬
low, when its thicknefs is the 8^-0th part of an Inch,
and by the i oth Obfervation of the fame part, a thin
plate of Glafs tranfmits the fame Light of the fame Ring
when its thicknefs is lefs in proportion of the fine of
refraction to the fine of incidence, that is, when its
thicknefs is the ~ath or ,-3;—th part of an Inch, fup-
pofing the fines are as 11 to 17. And if this thicknefs
be doubled it tranfmits the fame bright Light of the
fecond Ring, if tripled it tranfmits that of the third,
and fo on, the bright yellow Light in all thefe cafes be¬
ing in its fits of tranfmiffion. And therefore if its thick¬
nefs be multiplied 34.386 times fo as to become^ of an
Inch it tranfmits the fame bright Light of the 34.386th
Ring. Suppofe this be the bright yellow Light tranf-
mitted perpendicularly from the reflecting convex fide
of the Glais through the concave fide to the white Spot
in the center of the Rings of Colours on the Chart: And
by a rule in the feventh Obfervation in the firft Part of
the firft Book, and by the 15 th and 20th Propofitions
Oo 2 of

/
[ioo]
of the third Part of this Book, if the rays he made ob¬
lique to the Glafs, the thicknefs of the Glafs requh
fite to tranfmit the fame bright Light of the fame Ring
in any obliquity is to this thicknefs of of an Inch, ,as
the fecant of an Angle whole line is the firft of an hun¬
dred and fix arithmetical means between the fines of
incidence and refraction, counted from the fine of inci¬
dence when the refraction is made out of any plated Bo¬
dy into any medium incompafliog it, that is, in this cafe,
out of Glals into Air. Now if the thicknefs of the Glafs
be increafed by degrees,fo as to bear to its firft thicknefs,
( viz. that of a quarter of an Inch ) the proportions
which 343 86 (the number of fits of the perpendicular
rays in going through the Glafs towards the white Spot
in the center of the Rings,) hath to 34385, 34384,
34383 and 3438a (the numbers of thefits of the oblique
rays in going through the Glafs towards the firft, fe-
cond, third and fourth Rings of Colours,) and if the
firft thicknefs be divided into 100000000 equal parts,
the increafed thickneffes will be 100002908, 1000058165
100008725 and 10001163 3, and the Angles of which thefe

thickneffes are fecants will be 26' 13", 357' 5', 45' 6' and
5,a' a 6", the Radius being ioooooooo ; and the fines of
thefe Angles are 76a, 1079, 1321 and 1-5.25, and the
proportional fines of refraction 117a, 1659, 2031 and
2345, the Radius being 100000. For fince the fines
of incidence out of Glafs into Air are to the fines
of refraCtion as ri to 17, and to theabove-mentioned
fecants as. 11 to the firft of 106 arithmetical means
between 11 and 17,, that is as 11 to 11^, thefe fe¬
cants will he to the fines of refraCtion as 11-5 to 17,
and by this Analogy will give thefe fines. So then
.[ 101 ]
if the obliquities of the rays to the concave furface of
the Glals be fuch that the lines of their relradtion in
palling out of the Glafs through that furface into the
Air be 117:2, 1659, 2031, 2345, the bright Light of
the 34386th Ring lhall emerge at the thicknefles of the
Glafs which are to I of an Inch as 34386 to 34385,
34384, 34383, 34382, refpedtively. And therefore if
the thicknels in all thefe cafes be - of an Inch (as it is in
the Glafs of which the Speculum was made) the bright
Light of the 34385th Ring lhall emerge where the line
of refraction is 1172,and that of the 34384th,384383th
and 34382th Ring where the line is 1659, 2031, and
2345 refpedtively. And in thefe Angles of refraction
the Light of thefe Rings lhall be propagated from the
Speculum to the Chart, and there paint Rings about the
white central round Spot of Light which we laid was
the Light of the 34386th Ring. And the Semidiame¬
ters of thefe Rings lhall fubtend the Angles of refraCtion
made at the concave, lurface of the Speculum, and by
confequence their Diameters lhall be to the diftance of
the Chart from the Speculum as thole lines ofrefratition
doubled are to the Radius that is as 1172, 1659, 203 r,
and 2.345, doubled are to 100000. And therefore if,
the diftance of the Chart from the concave furface of
the Speculum be fix Feet (as it was in the third of thefe
Obfervations) the Diameters of the Rings of this bright
yellow Light upon the Chart lhall be x7688?
2’925j F375 Inches : For thefe Diameters are to A Feet
as the above-mentioned fines doubled are to the Radius.
No thefe Diameters of the bright yellow Rings, thus
found by computation are the very fame with thole
found in the third of thefe Obfervations by meafuring
therrq
[ 102 ]
them, (viz. with ijj. a|> a|i, and 3’-Inches, and there¬
fore the Theory of deriving thefe Rings from the thick-
nefs of the plate of Glafs of which the Speculum was
made, and from the obliquity of the emerging rays agrees
with the Obfervation. In this computation I have
equalled the Diameters of the bright Rings made by
Light of all Colours, to the Diameters of the Rings
made by the bright yellow. For this yellow makes the
brighteft part of the Rings of all Colours. If you defire
the Diameters of the Rings made by the Light of any
other unmixed Colour, you may find them readily by
putting them to the Diameters of the bright yellow ones
in a lubduplicate proportion of the intervals of the fits
of the rays of thole Colours when equally inclined to
the refracting or reflecting furface which caufed thofe
fits, that is, by putting the Diameters of the Rings made
by the rays in the extremities and limits of the feven
Colours, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indico, violet,
proportional the Cube-roots of the numbers, 1, f, |, *,
>, *, %, {, which exprefs the lengths of a Monochard
founding the notes in an Eight: For by this means the
Diameter of the Rings of thefe Colours will be found
pretty nearly in the fame proportion to one another,
which they ought to have by the fifth of thefe Obfer-
vations.
And thus I fatisfied my felf that thefe Rings were of
the fame kind and original with thofe of thin plates,
and by conlequence that the fits or alternate difpofi-
tions of the rays to be reflected and tranfmitted are pro¬
pagated to great diftances from every reflecting and re¬
fracting furface. But yet to put the matter out of doubt
I added the following Obfervation.
OBS.
C io3 ]
O B S. IX.

If thefe Rings thus depend on the thicknefs of the plate


ofGlafs their Diameters at equal di fiances from feveral
Speculums made of luch concavo-convex plates of Glals
as are ground on the fame Sphere, ought to be recipro¬
cally in a fubduplicate proportion of the thickneffes of
the plates of Glals. And if this proportion be found
true by experience it will amount to a demonftration-
that thefe Rings (like thofe formed in thin plates) do-
depend on the thicknefs of the Glafs. I procured there¬
fore another concavo-convex plate of Glafs ground on
both fides to the fame Sphere with the former plate :
Its thicknefs was f2 parts of an Inch; and the Diameters
of the three firft bright Rings meafured between the
brighteft parts of their orbits at the diftance of 6 Feet
from the Glafs were 3. 4.5. 5k Inches. Now the thick¬
nefs of the other Glafs being of an Inch was to thick¬
nefs of this Glafs a s j to f, > that is as 31 to 10, or
3 rooooooo to iooqoooo©5 and the roots of thefe numbers
are 17607 and 10000, & in the proportion of the firft
of thefe roots to the fecond are the Diameters of the
bright Rings made in this Obfervation by the thinner
Glafs, 3. 4k 5; to the Diameters of the fame Rings made
in the third of thel'e Oblervations by the thicker Glafs
i[k af that is, the Diameters of the Rings are reci¬
procally in a fubduplicate proportion of thickneffes of
the plates of Glafs.
So then in plates of Glafs which are alike concave on
one fide, and alike convex on the other fide, and alike
quick-filvered on the convex fides, and differ in nothing
but
[I°+]
but their thicknefs, the Diameters of the Rings are re¬
ciprocally in a fubduplicate proportion of the thickneffes
of the plates. And this fhews fufficiently that the Rings
depend on both the furfaces of the Glafs. They de¬
pend on the convex furface becaufe they are more lu¬
minous when that furface is quick-filvered over than
when it is without Quick-lilver. They depend alfo
upon the concave furface, becaufe without that furface
a Speculum makes them not. They depend on both
furfaces and on the diftances between them., becaufe
their bignefs is varied by varying only that diftance.
And this dependance is of the fame kind with that
which the Colours of thin plates have on the diftance
of the furfaces of thofe plates, becaufe the bignefs
of the Rings and their proportion to one another
and the variation of their bignefs arifing from the varia¬
tion of the thicknefs of the Glafs, and the orders of
their Colours, is fuch.as ought to refult from the Propo-
fitions in the end of the third Part of this Book, derived
from the the Phenomena of the Colours of thin plates
fet down in the firft Part.
There are yet other Phenomena of thefe Rings of
Colours but fuch as follow from the fame Propofitions
and therefore confirm both the truth of thofe Propofi¬
tions, and the Analogy between thefe Rings and the
Rings of Colours made by very thin plates. I fhall
fubjoyn fome of them.
t 10$ ]
O B S. X.

When the beam of the Sun’s Light was reflected back


from the Speculum not direftly to the Hole in the Win¬
dow, but to a place a little diftant from it, the common
center of that Spot, and of all the Rings of Colours fell
in the middle way between the beam of the incident
Light, and the beam of the reflected Light, and by
confequence in the center of the fpherical concavity of
the Speculum, whenever the Chart on which the Rings
of Colours fell was placed at that center. And as the
beam of reflected Light by inclining the Speculum re¬
ceded more and more from the beam of incident Light
and from the common center of the coloured Rings be¬
tween them, thofe Rings grew bigger and bigger, and
fo alfo did the white round Spot,and new Rings of Co¬
lours emerged fucceffively out of their common center,
and the white Spot became a white Ring encompaffing
them ; and the incident and reflected beams of Light
always fell upon the oppoiite parts of this Ring, illumi¬
nating its perimeter like two mock Suns in the oppoiite
parts of an Iris. So then the Diameter of this Ring,
meafured from the middle of its Light on one fide to
the middle of its Light on the other fide, was always
equal to the diftance between the middle of the Incident
beam of Light, and the middle of the reflected beam
meaiured at the Chart on which the Rings appeared:
And the rays which formed this Ring were reflected by
the Speculum in Angles equal to their Angles of inci¬
dence, and by confequence to their Angles of refrafif ion
at their entrance into the Glafs, but yet their Angles of
' Pp reflexion
[io6]
reflexion were not in the fame planes with their Angles
of incidence.

O B S. XL

The Colours of the new Rings were in a contrary


order to thofe of the former, and arofe after this man¬
ner. The white round Spot of Light in the middle of
the Rings continued white to the center till the diftance
of the incident ond reflected beams at the chart was
about | parts of an Inch, and then it began to grow
dark in the middle. And when that diftance was about
if6of an Inch, the white Spot was become a Ring en-
compafling a dark round Spot which in the middle in¬
clined to violet and indico. And the luminous Rings
incompaffing it were grown equal to thofe dark ones
which in the four firft Obfervations encompaffed them,
that is to fay, the white Spot was grown a white Ring
equal to the firft of thofe dark Rings, and the firft of
thofe luminous Rings was now grown equal to the fe-
cond of thofe dark ones, and the fecond of thofe lumi¬
nous ones to the third of thofe dark ones, and fo on.
For the Diameters of the luminous Rings were now
Inches.
When the diftance between the incident and reflected
beams of Light became a little bigger, there emerged
out of the middle of the dark Spot after the indico a
blue, and then out of that blue a pale green, and foon
after a yellow and red. And when the Colour at the
center was brighteft, being between yellow and red,
the bright Rings were grown equal to thofe Rings which
in the four firft Obfervations next encompaffed them;
that
[I°73
that is to fay, the white Spot in the middle of thofe
Rings was now become a white Ring equal to the firft
of thofe bright Rings, and the firft of thofe bright ones
was now become equal to the fecond of thofe, and fo
on. For the Diameters of the white Rings, and of the
other luminous Rings incompaffing it, were now lit
ai? aU, ^8,2or thereabouts.
When the diftance of the two beams of Light at the
Chart was a little more increafed, there emerged out
of the middle in order after the red, a purple, a blue,
a green, a yellow, and a red inclining much to purple,
and when the Colour was brighteft being between yel¬
low and red, the former indico, blue, green, yellow and
red, were become an Iris or Ring of Colours equal
to the firft of thofe luminous Rings which appeared in
the four firft Qbfervations, and the white Ring which
was now become the fecond of the luminous Rings was
grown equal to the fecond of thofe, and the firft of
thofe which was now become the third Ring was be¬
come the third of thofe, and fo on. For their Diame¬
ters were i*«, at, ? gi Inches, the diftance of the
two beams of Light, and the Diameter of the white
Ring being a- Inches.
When thefe two beams became more diftant there
emerged out of the middle of the purplifti red, firft a
darker round Spot, and then out of the middle of that
Spot a brighter. And now the former Colours (purple,
blue, green, yellow, and purplifti red) were become a
Ring equal to the firft of the bright Rings mentioned in
the four firft Qbfervations, and the Ring about this
Ring were grown equal to the Rings about that re*-
fpe&ively ; the diftance between the two beams of
P p ^ Light
[i°8]
Light and the Diameter of the white Ring (which
was now become the third Ring) being about 3. In¬
ches.
The Colours of the Rings in the middle began now
to grow very dilute, and if the diftance between the
two beams was increafed half an Inch, or an Inch more,
they vanifhed whilft the white Ring, with one or two
of the Rings next it on either fide, continued ftili vi-
fible. But if the diftance of the two beams of Light
was ftili more increafed thefe alfo vanifhed : For the
Light which coming from feveral parts of the Hole in
the Window fell upon the Speculum in feveral Angles of
incidence made Rings of feveral bigneffes, which diluted
and blotted out one another, as I knew by intercepting
fome part of that Light. For if I intercepted that part
which was neareft to the Axis of the Speculum the
Rings would be lefs, if the other part which was re-
moteft from it they would be bigger.

OBS. XIL

When the Colours of the Prifm were caft fucceflively


on the Speculum, that Ring which in the two laft Ob>
fervations was white, was of the fame bignefs in all the
Colours, but the Rings without it were greater in the
green than in the blue, and ftili greater in the yellow,
and greateft in the red. And, on the contrary, the
Rings within that white Circle were lefs in the green
than in the blue, and ftili lefs in the yellow, and lea ft
in the red. For the Angles of reflexion of thofe rays
which made this Ring being equal to their Angles of
incidence, the fits of every reflected ray within, the Glafs
after
[lop]
after reflexion are equal in length and number to the
fits of the fame ray within the Glafs before its incidence
on the reflecting furface; and therefore fince all the rays
of all forts at their entrance into the Glafs were in a fit
of tranfmiffion, they were alfo in a fit of tranfmiflion at
their returning to the fame furface after reflexion ; and
by confequence were tranfmitted and went out to the
white Ring on the Chart. This is the reafon why that
Ring was of the fame bignefs in all the Colours, and
why in a mixture of all it appears white. But in rays
which are reflected in other Angles, the intervals pf the
fits of the leaft refrangible being greateft, make the
Rings of their Colour in their progress from this white
Ring, either outwards or inwards, increafe or decrease
by the greateft fteps • fo that the Rings of this Colour
without are greateft, and within leaft. And this is the
reafon why in the laft Obfervation, when the Specu¬
lum was illuminated with white Light, the exterior
Rings made by all Colours appeared red without and
blue within, and the interior blue without and red
within.
Thefe are the Phenomena of thick convexo-concave
plates of Glafs, which are every where of the fame
thicknefs. 1 here are yet other Phenomena when thefe
plates are a little thicker on one fide than on the
other, and others when the plates are more or lefs con-
cave than convex, or plano-convex, or double-convex.
For in all thefe cafes the plates make Rings of Colours,
but after various manners ; all which, fo far as I have
yet obferved, follow from the Propofitions in the end
of the third part of this Book, and fo confpire to con¬
firm the truth of thofe Propofitions. But the Pheno¬
mena,,
[no]
mena are too various, and the Calculations whereby
they follow from thofe Propofitions too intricate to be
here profecuted. I content my felf with having profe-
cuted this kind of Phenomena fo far as to difcover their
caufe, and by difcovering it to ratify the Propofitions
in the third Part of this Book,

OBS. XIIL

As Light reflected by a Lens quick-filvered on the


back-fide makes the Rings of Colours above de-
Icribed, fo it ought to make the like Rings of Colours
in palling through a drop of Water; At the firft re¬
flexion of the rays within the drop, fome Colours ought
to be tranfmitted, as in the cafe of a Lens, and others
to be reflected back to the Eye. For inftance, if the
Diameter of a fmall drop or globule of Water be about
the 500th part of an Inch, fo that a red-making ray in
palling through the middle of this globule has 150 fits
of eafy tranfmiflion within the globule, and that all the
red-making rays which are at a certain diftance from
this middle ray round about it have 249 fits within the
globule, and all the like rays at a certain further di-
fiance round about it have 24.8 fits, and all thofe at a
certain further diftance 247 fits, and fo on ; thefe con-
centrick Circles of rays after their tranfmiflion, falling
on a white Paper, will make concentrick rings of red
upon the Paper , fuppofing the Light which pafles
through one Angle globule ftrong enough to be fenfible.
And, in like manner, the rays of other Colours will
make Rings of other Colours. Suppofe now that in a
fair day the Sun Ihines through a thin Cloud of fuch
globules
[Ill]
globules of Water or Hail, and that the globules are all
of the fame bignefs,and the Sun feen through this Cloud
lhall appear incompaffed with the like concent rick Rings
of Colours, and the Diameter of the firft Ring of red
fhall be 7-* degrees, that of the fecond 1 o'- degrees, that
of the third 12 degrees 33 minutes. And accordingly
as the globules of Water are bigger or Ids, the Rings
fhall be lefs or bigger. This is the Theory, and expe¬
rience anfwers it.. For in June 169a. I law by reflexion
in a Veflel of ftagnating Water three Halos Crowns or
Rings of Colours about the Sun, like three little Rain¬
bows, concentrick to his Body. The Colours of the
firft or innermoft Crown were blue next the Sun, red
without, and white in the middle between the blue
and red. Thofe of the fecond Crown were purple and
blue within, and pale red without, and green in the
middle. And thofe of the third were pale blue with¬
in, and pale red without; thefe Crowns inclofed one
another immediately, fo that their Colours proceeded
in this continual order from the Sun outward: blue,
white, red ; purple, blue, green, pale yellow and red ;
pale blue, pale red. The Diameter of the fecond Crown
meafured from the middle of the yellow and red on one
fide of the Sun, to the middle of the fame Colour on
the other fide was degrees, or thereabouts. The Dia¬
meters of the firf^and third I had not time to meafure,
but that of the firft feemed to be about five or fix de¬
grees, and that of the third about twelve. The like
Crowns appear fometimes about the Moon; for in the
beginning of the year 1664, Febr. 19th at night, I faw
two fuch Crowns about her. The Diameter of the firft
or innermoft was about three degrees, and that of the
fecond.
[H2]
feeond about five degrees and an half. Next about the
Moon was a Circle of white, and next about that the
inner Crown which was of a bluifli green within next the
white, and of a yellow and red without, and next about
thefe Colours were blue and green on the infide of the
outward Crown, and red on the outfide of it. At the
fame time there appeared a Halo about 22 degrees 35*
diftant from the center of the Moon. It was Elliptical,
and its long Diameter was perpendicular to the Horizon
verging below fartheft from the Moon. I am told that
the Moon has fometimes three or more concentrick
Crowns of Colours incompafling one another next about
her Body. The more equal the globules of Water or
Ice are to one another, the more Crowns of Colours
will appear, and the Colours will be the more lively.
The Halo at the diftance of 22- degrees from the Moon
Ys of another fort. By its being oval and remoter from
the Moon below than above, I conclude, that it was
made by refraCtion in fome fort of Hail or Snow floating
in the Air in an horizontal Pofture, the refracting Angle
being about 58 or 60 degrees,

T H E
[ri3]

THE

THIRD BOOK r

O F

O P T I C K s.
Obfervations concerning the Inflexions of the rays of Light ,
and the Colours made thereby.

G Rimaldo has informed us, that if a beam of the


Sun’s Light be let into a dark Room through a
very fmall Hole, the fliadows of things in this Light
will be larger than they ought to be if the rays went
on by the Bodies in Freight Lines, and that thefe Ilia-
dows have three parallel fringes, bands or ranks of co¬
loured Light adjacent to them. But if the Hole be
enlarged the fringes grow broad and run into one ano¬
ther, lo that they cannot be diftinguifhed. Thefe broad
fhadows and fringes have been reckoned by fome to pro¬
ceed from the ordinary refraction of the Air, but with¬
out due examination of the matter. For the circuit-
fiances of the Phenomenon, fo far as I have obferved
them-, are as follows,
Qq OBS,
[iH]
O B S. I.

I made in a piece of Lead a fmall Hole with a Pin,


whofe breadth was the 41th part of an Inch. For 21
of thofe Pins laid together took up the breadth of half
an Inch. Through this Hole I let into my darkened
Chamber a beam of the Sun's Light, and found that the
fhadows of Hairs,Thred,Pins,Straws, and fuch like lien-
der fubftances place! in this beam ofLight, were confider-
ably broader than they ought to be, if the rays of Light
palled on by thefe Bodies in right Lines. And particu¬
larly a Hair oi a Man’s Head, whofe breadth was but
the 280th part of an Inch, being held in this Light, at
the diftance of about twelve Feet from the Hole, did
eaft a fhadow which at the diftance of four Inches from
the Hair was the fixtieth part of an Inch broad, that is,
above four times broader than the Hair, and at the di¬
ftance of two Feet from the Hair was about the eight
and twentieth part of an Inch broad, that is, ten times
broader than the Hair, and at the diftance of ten Feet
was the eighth part of an Inch broad, that is 3 5 times
broader.
Nor is it material whether the Hair be incompaffed
with Air, or with any other pellucid fubftance. For I
wetted a poliftied plate of Glais, and laid the Hair in
the Water upon the Glafs, and then laying another po-
lifhed plate of Glafs upon it, fo that the Water might
fill up the fpace between the GlaiTes, I held theni in
the aforefaid beam of Light, lb that the Light might
pais through them perpendicularly, and the fhadow
of the Hair was at the lame diftances as big as before.
The
C»$]
The fhadows of fcratches made in poliflied plates of
Glafs were alfo much broader than they ought to be,
and the Veins in poliffied plates of Glafs did alfo call the
like broad fhadows. And therefore the great breadth
of thefe fhadows proceeds from feme other caufe than
the refraction of the Air.
Let the Circle X reprefent the middle of the Hair; pin\
A D G, B E H, C F I, three rays paffing by one fide of
the Hair at feveral diftances; KNQ, LOR, MPS,
three other rays paffing by the other fide of the Hair at
the like diftances; D, E, F and N, Q, P, the places
where the rays are bent in their paffage by the Hair;
G, H, I and Q, R, S, the places where the rays fall on
a Paper GQ; IS the breadth of the ffiadow of the Hair
caft on the Paper, and T I, V S, two rays paffing to the
points I and S without bending when the Hair is taken
away. And it’s manifeft that all the Light between
thefe two rays AI and V S is bent in paffing by the
Hair, and turned afide from the ffiadow IS, becaufe if
any part of this Light were not bent it would fall on
the Paper within the ffiadow, and there illuminate the
Paper contrary to experience. And becaufe when the
Paper is at a great diftance from the Hair, the ffiadow
is broad, and therefore the rays TI and VS are at a
great diftance from one another, it follows that the
Hair a£ts upon the rays of Light at a good diftance in
their paffing by it. But the aftion is ftrongeft on the
rays which pafs by at leaft diftances, and grows weaker
and weaker accordingly as the rays pafs by at diftances
greater and greater, as is reprefented in the Scheme:
For thence it comes to pals, that the ffiadow of the
Hair is much broader in proportion to the diftance of
(2 q a the
[nd]
the Paper from the Hair, when the Paper is nearer the
Hair than when it is at a great diftance from it.

O B S. II.
* H

The ffiadows of all Bodies ( Metals, Stones, Glafs,


Wood, Horn, Ice, toV. j in this Light were bordered
with three parallel fringes or bands of coloured Light,
whereof that which was contiguous to the lhadow was
broadeft and mod luminous, and that which was re-
moteft from it was narroweft, and fo faint, as not eafily
to be vifible. It was difficult to diftinguiffi the Colours
unlefs when the Light fell very obliquely upon a fmooth
Paper, or fome other fmooth white Body, fo as to make
them appear much broader than they would otherwife
do. And then the Colours were plainly vifible in this
order: The firft or innermoft fringe was violet and deep
blue next the ffiadow, and then light blue, green and
yellow in the middle, and red without. The fecond
fringe was almoft contiguous to the firft, and the third
to the fecond, and both were blue within and yellow
and red without, but their Colours were very faint
efpecially thofe of the third. The Colours therefore
proceeded in this order from the ffiadow, violet, indico,
pale blue, green, yellow, red; blue, yellow, red; pale
blue, pale yellow and red. The fhadows made by
fcratches and bubbles in poliflied plates of Glafs were
bordered with the like fringes of coloured Light. And
if plates of Looking-glafs floop’d off near the edges with
a Diamond cut, be held in the fame beam of Light, the
Light which paffes through the parallel planes of the
Glafs will be be bordered with the like fringes of Co¬
lours
[ 117 3
lours where thofe Planes meet with the Diamond cut,
and by this means there will fometimes appear four or
five fringes of Colours. Let A B, C D reprefent the Fig
parallel planes of a Looking-glafs, and BD the plane
of the Diamond-cut, making at B a very obtufe Angle
with the plane A B. And let all the Light between the
rays E NI and F B M pafs diredtly through the parallel
planes of theGlafs, and fall upon the Paper between I
and M, and all the Light between the rays GO and
HD be refracted by the oblique plane of the Diamond
cut B D,and fall upon the Paper between K and L ; and
the Light which paffes direftly through the parallel
planes of the Glafs, and falls upon the Paper between
I and M, will be bordered with three or more fringes
at M.

O B S. III.

When the Hair was twelve Feet diftant from the1


Hole, and its fiiadow fell obliquely upon a flat white
fcale of Inches and parts of an Inch placed half a Foot
beyond it, and alfo when the fliadow fell perpendicu¬
larly upon the fame fcale placed nine Feet beyond it;
I meafured the breadth of the lhadow and fringes as
accurately as I could, and found them in parts of an
Inch as follows*
[n8]
At the diftance of ^oot^ *Feet
£
The breadth of the Shadow S4 9

The breadth between the middles of the


brighteft Light of the innermoft fringes T—
3*
or J-
3*
7.

on either fide the fhadow
The breadth between the middles of the
brighteft Light of the middlemoft frin¬ I
~ I
237
1
lT

ges on either fide the lhadow


The breadth between the middles of the
brighteft Light of the outmoft fringes s °r 78]
10

on either fide the fhadow


The diftance between the middles of the
T_ I
brighteft Light of the fir ft and fecond 120 21

fringes
The diftance between the middles of the
jr^ r
brighteft Light of the fecond and third 17a Si

fringes
The breadth of the luminous part (green,
r 1
white, yellow and red ) of the firft 173 Si
fringe
The breadth of the darker fpace between I
1

the firft and fecond fringes. 4?

The breadth of the luminous part of the I I__

fecond fringe 290 A

The breadth of the darker fpace between I T_

the fecond and third fringes. 340 03 |

Thcfe
[ up]
Thefe meafures I took by letting the Ihadow of the
Hair at half a Foot diftance fall lb obliquely on the
fcale as to appear twelve times broader than when it
fell perpendicularly on it at the fame diftance, and bet¬
ting down in this Table the twelfth part of the mea¬
fures I then took.

OBS. IV.

When the fhadovv and fringes were caft obliquely


upon a fmooth white Body, and that Body was remo¬
ved further and further from the Hair, the firft fringe
began to appear and look brighter than the reft of the
Light at the diftance of lefs than, a quarter of an Inch
from the Hair, and the dark line or Ihadow between
that and the fecond fringe began to appear at a lefs di¬
ftance from the Hair than that of the third part of an
Inch* The fecond fringe began to appear at a diftance
from the Hair of lefs than half an Inch, and the Ihadow
between that and the third fringe at a diftance lefs than
an Inch, and the third fringe at a diftance lefs than three
Inches. At greater diftances they became much more
fenfible, but kept very nearly the fame proportion of
their breadths and intervals which they had at their firft
appearing. For the diftance between the middle of the
firft and middle of the fecond fringe, was to the diftance
between the middle of the fecond and middle of the
third fringe, as three to two, or ten to feven. And
the laft of thefe two diftances was equal to the breadth
of the bright Light or luminous part of the firft fringe.
And this breadth was to the breadth of the bright Light
of the fecond fringe as feven to four, and to the dark
interval.
[II2]
interval of the firft and fecond fringe as three to two,
and to the like dark interval between the fecond and
third as two to one. For the breadths of the fringes
feemed to be in the progreffion of the numbers i, i/^ ,
f/ \ and their intervals to be in the fame progreffion
with them ; that is, the fringes and their intervals to¬
gether to be in the continual progreffion of the numbers
i, / {? f/~, f/1-^ f/] > or thereabouts. And thefe pro¬
portions held the fame very nearly at all diftances from
the Hair 5 the dark Intervals of the fringes being as
broad in proportion to the fringes at their firft appea¬
rance as afterwards at great diftances from the Hair,
though not ib dark and diftinft.

OBS, V.

The Sun fhining into my darkened Chamber through


a Hole a quarter of an Inch broad; I placed at the di-
ftance of two or three Feet from the Hole a Sheet of
Paft-board, which was black’d all over on both fides,
and in the middle of it had a Hole about three quarters
of an Inch fquare for the Light to pafs through. And
behind the Hole I fattened to the Paft-board with Pitch
the blade of a fliarp Knife, to intercept fome part of
the Light which patted through the Hole. The planes
of the PafTboard and blade of the Knife were parallel
to one another, and perpendicular to the rays. And
when they were fo placed that none of the Sun’s Light
fell on the Paft-board, but all of it patted through the
Hole to the Knife, and there part of it fell upon the
blade of the Knife, and part of it palled by its edge:
I let this part of the Light which patted by, fall on a
white
[121]
white Paper two or three Feet beyond the Knife, and
there faw two ftreams of faint Light fhoot out both
ways from the beam of Light into the ftiadow like the
tails of Comets. But becaufe the Sun’s direct Light by
its brightnefs upon the Paper obfcured thefe faint
ftreams, fo that I could fcarce fee them, 1 made a little
Hole in the midft of the Paper for that Light to pafs
through and fall on a black cloth behind it; and then
I law the two ftreams plainly. They were like one
another, and pretty nearly equal in length and breadth
and quantity of Light. Their Light at that end nex
the Sun’s direft Light was pretty ftrong for the fpace o
about a quarter of an Inch, or half an Inch, and in al
its progrefs from that diredt Light decreafed gradually
till it became infenfible. The whole length of either o
thefe ftreams meafured upon the Paper at the diftano
of three Feet from the Knife was about fix or eigh
Inches; fo that it fubtended an Angle at the edge of
the Knife of about ioorn, dr at moft 14 degrees.
Yet fometimes I thought I faw it (hoot three or four
degrees further, but with a Light fo very faint that I
could fcarce perceive it, and fulpefted it might ( in
fome meafure at leaft) arile from fome other caufe than
the two ftreams did. For placing my Eye in that Light
beyond the end of that ftream which was behind the
Knife, and looking towards the Knife, I could fee a
line of Light upon its edge, and that not only when
my Eye was in the line of the ftreams, but alfo when
it was without that line either towards the point of the
Knife, or towards the handle. This line of Light ap¬
peared contiguous to the edge of the Knife, and was
narrower than the Light of the innermoft fringe, and
Rr narrowed
[ 122 ]
narroweft when my Eye was furtheft from the direct
Light, and therefore feemed to pafs between the Light
of that fringe and the edge of the Knife, and that
which paffed neareft the edge to be mo ft bent, though
not all of it.

O B S. VI

I placed another Knife by this fo that their edges


might be parallel and look towards one another, and
that the beam of Light might fall upon both the Knives,
and fome part of it pafs between their edges. And
when the diftance of their edges was about the 400th
part of an Inch the ftream parted in the middle, and
left a lhadow between the two parts. This fhadow
was fo black and dark that all the Light which paffed
between the Knives feemed to be bent, and turned afide
to the one hand or to the other. And as the Knives ftill
approached one another the fhadow grew broader, and
the ftreams fhorter at their inward ends which were
next the lhadow, until upon the con tad: of the Knives
the whole Light vanilhed leaving its place to the
lhadow.
And hence I gather that the Light which is leaffc
bent, and goes to the inward ends of the ftreams, paf-
fes by the edges of the Knives at the greateft diftance,
and this diftance when the fhadow begins to appear be¬
tween the ftreams is about the eight-hundredth part of
an Inch. And the Light which paffes by the edges of
the Knives at diftances ftill lefs and lets is more and
more bent, and goes to thofe parts of the ftreams which
are further and further from the dired Light, becaufe
when
r12 3 i
when the Knives approach one another till they touchy
thole parts of the ftreams vanilh laft which are furtheft
from the direct Light*

O B S. VIL

In the fifth Obfervation the fringes did not appear,


but by reafon of the breadth of the Hole in the Win¬
dow became fo broad as to run into one another, and
by joyning make one continued Light in the beginning
of the ftreams. But in the fixth, as the Knives ap¬
proached one another, a little before the Shadow ap¬
peared between the two ftreams, the fringes began to
appear on the inner ends of the ftreams on either fide
of the direct Light, three on one fide made by the edge
of one Knife, and three on the other fide made by the
edge of the other Knife. They were diftinfteft when
the Knives were placed at the greateft diftance from the
Hole in the Window, and ftill became more diftinft by
making the Hole lefs, infomuch that I could fometimes
fee a faint lineament of a fourth fringe beyond the three
above-mentioned. And as the Knives continually ap¬
proached one another, the fringes grew diftinTer and
larger until they vanilhed. The outmoft fringe va¬
nished firft, and the middlemoft next, and the inner-
moft laft. And after they were all vanilhed, and the
line of Light which was in the middle between them
was grown very broad, enlarging it fielf on both fides
into the ftreams of Light defcribed in the fifth Obfer¬
vation, the above-mentioned fhadow began to appear
in the middle of this line, and divide it along the middle
into two lines of Light, and increafed until the whole
Rr 2 Light
. . . . t*H]
Light vanifhed. This inlargement of the fringes was
fo great that the rays which go to the innermoft fringe
feemed to be bent above twenty times more when this
fringe was ready to vanilh, than when one of the Knives
was taken away.
And from this and the former Obfervation compared,
I gather, that the Light of the firft fringe paflfed by the
edge of the Knife at a diftance greater than the eight-
hundredth part of an Inch, and the Light of the fecond
fringe palled by the edge of the Knife at a greater di¬
ftance than the Light of the firft fringe did, and that
of the third at a greater diftance than that of the fe¬
cond, and that of the ftreams of Light defcribed in
the fifth and fixth Obfervations palled by the edges
of the Knives at lefs diftances than that of any of the
fringes..

o b a vin.
I caufed the edges of two Knives to be ground truly
ftreight, and pricking their points into a board fo that
their edges might look towards one another, and meet¬
ing near their points contain a rectilinear Angle, I fafl>
ned their handles together with Pitch to make this
Angle invariable. The diftance of the edges of the
ATnives from one another at the diftance of four Inches
from the angular point, where the edges of the Knives
met, was the eighth part of an Inch, and therefore the
Angle contained by the edges was about i degr. 54/.
The Knives thus fixed together I placed in a beam of
the Sun's Light, let into my darkened Chamber through
a Hole the 42th part of an Inch wide, at the diftance
of
[ 12$ ]
of ten or fifteen Feet from the Hole, and let the Light
which pafled between their edges fall very obliquely
upon a lmooth white Ruler at the diftance of half an
Inch, or an Inch from the Knives, and there faw the
fringes made by the two edges of the Knives run along
the edges of the lhadows of the Knives in lines parallel
to thole edges without growing fenfibly broader, till
they met in Angles equal to the Angle contained by the
edges of the Knives, and where they met and joyned
they ended without eroding one another. But if the
Ruler was held at a much greater diftance from the
Paper, the fringes became fomething broader and. broader
as they approached one another, and after they met
they crofted one another, and then became much broader
than before.
Whence I gather that the diftances at which the
fringes pafs by the Knives are not increafed nor altered
by the approach of the Knives, but the Angles in which
the rays are there bent are much increafed by that ap¬
proach ; and that the Knife which is neareft any ray
determines which way the ray lhall be bent, and the
other Knife increafes the bent.

O B S.. IX,.

When the rays fell very obliquely upon the Ruler at


the diftance of the third part of an Inch from the Knives,
the dark line between the firft and fecond fringe of the
lhadow of one Knife, and the dark line between the
firft and fecond fringe of the lhadow of the other Knife
met with one another, at the diftance of the fifth part
of an Inch from the end of the Light which pafled be¬
tween.
tween the Knives at the concourfe of their edges. And
therefore the diftance of the edges of the Knives at the
meeting of thefe dark lines was the i6othpart of an
Inch, For as four Inches to the eighth part of an Inch,
fo is any length of the edges of the Knives rneafured
from the point of their concourfe to the diftance of the
edges of the Knives at the end of that length, and fo is
the fifth part of an Inch to the 16oth part. So then the
dark lines above-mentioned meet in the middle of the
Light which pafles between the Knives where they are
diftant the 16oth part of an Inch, and the one half of
that Light pafles by the edge of one Knife at a diftance
not greater than the 320th part of an Inch, and falling
upon the Paper makes the fringes of the lhadow of that
Knife, and the other half pafles by the edge of the
other Knife, at a diftance not greater than the 320th
part of an Inch, and falling upon the Paper makes the
fringes of the lhadow of the other Knife. But if the
Paper be held at a diftance from the Knives greater than
the third part of an Inch, the dark lines above-men¬
tioned meet at a greater diftance than the fifth part of
an Inch from the end of the Light which pafled be¬
tween the Knives at the concourfe of their edges; and
therefore the Light which falls upon the Paper where
thofe dark lines meet pafles between the Knives
where their edges are diftant above the 160th part of
an Inch,
For at another time when the two Knives were di¬
ftant eight Feet and five Inches from the little Hole in
the Window, made with a fmall Pin as above, the Light
which fell upon the Paper where the aforefaid dark
lines met. pafled between the Knives, where the di~
ftance
[127]
fiance between their edges was as in the following
Table, when the diftance of the Paper from the Knives
was alio as follows*

Difiances of the Paper Difiances between the edges


from the Kjvives in of the }(jiives in mtlle-
Inches. fimal parts of an Inch.

ij. o’oi 2.
3? ooao.
8t- q’o’34.
32. O'C^y,
96, o’o8i.
0^087.

And hence I gather that the Light which makes the


fringes upon the Paper is not the fame Light at all di-
fiances of the Paper from the Knives, but when the Pa¬
per is held near the Knives, the fringes are made by
Light which paffes by the edges of the Knives at a lefs
diftance, and is more bent than when the Paper is held
at a greater diftance from the Knives,

O B S* X.

When the fringes of the lhadows. of the Knives fell


perpendicularly upon a Paper at a great diftance from
the Knives,- they were in the form of Hyperbolas, and
their dimenfions were as follows* LetCA, CB repre-
fent lines drawn upon the Paper parallel to the edges of
the Knives, and between which all the Light would
fall, if it paffed between the edges of the Knives with¬
out inflexion; DE a right line drawn throughC making
[ 128 ]
the Angles A CD, BCE, equal to one another, and
terminating all the Light whith falls upon the Paper from
the point where the edges of the Knives meet; eis, fkt,
and glv, three hyperbolical lines reprefenting the ter¬
minus of the fhadow of one of the Knives, the dark line
between the firft and fecond fringes of that lhadow, and
the dark line between the fecond and third fringes of
the fame fhadow ; x i p, y k q and z 1 r, three other Hy¬
perbolical lines reprefenting the terminus of the fhadow
of the other Knife, the dark line between the firft and
fecond fringes of that fhadow, and the dark line be¬
tween the fecond and third fringes of the fame fhadow.
And conceive that thefe three Hyperbolas are like and
equal to the former three, and crofs them in the points
i, k and 1, and that the fhadows of the knives are termi¬
nated and diftinguifhed from the firft luminous fringes
by the lines eis and xip, until the meeting and crof¬
ting of the fringes, and then thofe lines crofs the fringes
in the form of dark lines, terminating the firft luminous
fringes within fide, and diftinguifhing them from ano¬
ther Light which begins to appear at i, and illuminates
all the triangular fpace ipDEs comprehended by thefe
dark lines, and the right line DE. Of thefe Hy¬
perbolas one Afymptote is the line D E, and their other
Afymptotes are parallel to the lines C A and C B. Let
r v reprefent a line drawn any where upon the Paper
parallel to the Afymptote D E, and let this line crofs
the right lines A C in m and B C in n, and the fix dark
hyperbolical lines in p, q, r; s, t, v ; and by meafuring
the diftances ps, qt, rv, and thence colleiting the
the lengths of the ordinates n p, n q, n r or m s, m t,
mv, and doing this at feveral diftances of the line rv,
[ I2p]
from the Afymptote DE you may find as many points
of thefe Hyperbolas as you pleafe, and thereby know
that thefe curve lines are Hyperbolas differing little from
the conical Hyperbola. And by meafuring the lines
C i, C k , Cl, you may find other points of thefe
Curves.
For inftance, when the Knives were diftant from the
Hole in the Window ten Feet, and the Paper from the
Knives 9 Feet, and the Angle contained by the edges of
the Knives to which the Angle ACB is equal,was fut>
tended by a chord which was to the Radius as 1 to 52,
and the diftance of the line rv from the Afymptote DE
was half an Inch : I meafured the lines ps, qt, rv,
and found them 0^5, 0*65, 0*98 Inches refpedivefy,
and by adding to their halfs the line [ mn (which here
was the 128th part of an Inch, or o’ooyS Inches ) the
fums np, nq, nr, were o?i8i8, 0^318, 0^978 In¬
ches. I meafured alfo the difiances of the brightefi
parts of the fringes which run between pqarid st, qr
and tv, and next beyond r and v, and found them o’j,
o’8, and 1 ’ 17 Inches,

OBS. XL JL

The Sun fhihing into my darkened Room through a


finall round Hole made in a plate of Lead with a llender
Pin as above; I placed at the Hole a Pilfer to refrad
the Light, and form on the oppofite Wall theSpedrum
of Colours, defcribed in the third Experiment of the
firftBook. And then I found that the ihadows of all
Bodies held in the coloured Light between the Pflife
and the Wall, were bordered with fringes of the Cdlotif
S s ‘ J of
[ 13° 3
of that Light in which they were held. In the full red
Light they were totally red without any fenfible blue
or violet, and in the deep blue Light they were totally
blue without any fenfible red or yellow ; and fo in the
green Light they were totally green, excepting a little
yellow and blue, which were mixed in the green Light
of the Prifm. And comparing the fringes made in the
feveral coloured Lights, I found that thofe made in the
red Light were largeft, thofe made in the violet were
leaf!:, and thofe made in the green were of a middle
bignefs. For the fringes with which the fhadow of a *
Man’s Hair were bordered, being meafured crofs the
fhadow at the diftance of fix Inches from the Hair ; the
difiance between the middle and moft luminous part of
the firft or innermoft fringe on one fide of the fhadow,
and that of the like fringe on the other fide of the lha-
dow, was in the full red Light ^ of an Inch, and in
the full violet tg. And the like diftance between the
middle and moft luminous parts of the fecond fringes on
either fide the fhadow was in the full red Light h, and
in the violet • of an Inch. And thefe diftances of the
fringes held the fame proportion at all diftances from
the Hair without any fenfible variation.
So then the rays which made thefe fringes in the red
Light pafled by the Hair at a greater diftance than thofe
did which made the like fringes in the violet; and there¬
fore the Hair in caufing thefe fringes adted alike upon
the red Light or leafi refrangible rays at a greater di¬
ftance, and upon the violet or moft refrangible rays at
a lefs diftance, and by thofe actions difpofed the red
Light into larger fringes, and the violet into fmaller,
and the Lights of intermediate Colours into fringes of
inter-
Cl 313
intermediate bigneffes without changing the Colour of
of any fort of Light,
When therefore the Hair in the fir ft and fecond of
thefie Oblervations was held in the white beam of the
Sun’s Light, and caft a fhadow which was bordered with
three fringes of coloured Light, thofe Colours arofe not
from any new modifications impreft upon the rays of
Light by the Hair, but only from the various inflections
whereby the feveral forts of rays were feparated from
one another, which before feparation by the mixture
of all their Colours, compofed the white beam of the
Sun’s Light, but whenever fepaaated comp ole Lights
of the feveral Colours which they are originally dilpo-
fed to exhibit. In this 13 th Obfervation, where the
Colours are feparated before the Light pafles by the
Hair, the leaft refrangible rays, which when fepara¬
ted from the reft make red, were infleCted at a greater
diftance from the Hair, fo as to make three red fringes
at a greater diftance from the middle of the fhadow of
the Hair 3 and the moft refrangible rays which when
feparated make violet, were infleCted at a lefs diftance
from the Hair, fo as to make three violet fringes at a
lefs diftance from the middle of the fhadow of the Hair.
And other rays of intermediate degrees of refrangible
lity were infleCted at intermediate diftances from the
Hair, fo as to make fringes of intermediate Colours at
intermediate diftances from the middle of the fhadow
of the Hair. And in the fecond Obfervation, where
all the Colours are mixed in the white Light which
pafles by the Hair, thefe Colours are feparated by the
various inflexions of the rays, and the fringes which
they make appear all together , and the innennolf
S§ a fringes
. . - , t r32J
fringes being contiguous make one broad fringe compo-
fed of all the Colours in due order, the violet lying
on the infide of the fringe next the fhadow, the red on
the outfide furtheft from the fhadow, and the blue,
green and yellow, in the middle. And, in like man¬
ner, the middlemoft fringes of all the Colours lying in
order, and being contiguous, make another broad fringe
compofed of all the Colours; and the outmoft fringes
of all the Colours lying in ordejr, and being contiguous,
make a third broad fringe compofed of all the Colours.
Thefe are the three fringes of coloured Light with
which the lhadows of all Bodies are bordered in the fe-
cond Obfervation.
When I made the foregoing Obfervations, I defigned
to repeat moft of them with more care and exaftnefs,
and to make fome new ones for determining the man¬
ner how the rays of Light are bent in their paffage by
Bodies for making the fringes of Colours with the
dark lines between them. But I was then interrupt
ted, and cannot how think of taking thefe things into
further confederation. And iince I have not finifhed
this part of my Defign, I fhall conclude, with propo-
fing only lbme Queries in order to a further learclr to
be made by others.
.... A • ‘ "r * • f

J^uery i. Do not Bodies ad upon Light at a diftance,


and by their action bend its rays, and is not this addon
(cateris fariAm) ftrongeft at the leaft diftance ?
G>u. a. Do not the rays which differ in refrangibility
differ alfo in flexibility, and are they not by their dif¬
ferent inflexions feparated from one another, fo as
after reparation to make the Colours in the three fringes
above
C 1331
above defcribed ? And after what manner are they in-
fleCted to make thofe fringes ?
3. Are not the rays of Light in paffing by the
edges and fides of Bodies, bent feveral times backwards
and forwards, with a motion like that of an Eel ? And
do not the three fringes of coloured Light above-men¬
tioned, arife from three fuch bendings ?
Qu. 4. Do not the rays of Light which fall upon Bo¬
dies, and are reflected or refracted, begin to bend be¬
fore they arrive at the Bodies; and are they not re¬
flected, refracted and infleCted by one and the fame
Principle, adding varioufly in various circmnftances ?
5* Do not Bodies and Light add mutually upon
one another, that is to lay, Bodies upon Light in emit¬
ting, reflecting, refraCting and inflefting it, and Light
upon Bodies for heating them, and putting their parts
into a vibrating motion wherein heat con hits ?
<%. 6. Do not black Bodies conceive heat more eafily
from Light than thofe of other Colours do, by reafon
that the Light falling on them is not reflected outwards,
but enters the Bodies, and is often reflected and re-
fradted within them, until it be {tilled and loft ?
7. Is not the ftrength and vigor of the aCtion
between Light and fulphureous Bodies obferved above,
one reafon why fulphureous Bodies take fire more
readily, and burn more vehemently, then’other Bor
dies do ?
8, Do not all fixt Bodies when heated beyond a
certain degree, emit Light and fhine, and is not this
emiflion performed by the vibrating motions of their
parts ?
C134]
«%. 9. Is not fire a Body heated fo hot as to emit
Light copioufly ? For what elfe is a red hot Iron than
fire ? And what elfe is a burning Coal than red hot
Wood ?
10. Is not flame a vapour, fume or exhalation
heated red hot, that is, fo hot as tolhine? For Bodies
do not flame without emitting a copious fume, and this
fume burns in the flame. The Ignis Fatuus is a vapour
j fhining without heat, and is there not the fame diffe¬
rence between this vapour and flame, as between rot¬
ten Wood fhining without heat and burning Coals of
fire ? In diftilling hot Spirits, if the head of the ftill be
taken off, the vapour which afcends out of the Still will
take fire at the flame of a Candle, and turn into flame,
and the flame will run along the vapour from the Candle
to the Still. Some Bodies heated by motion or fermen¬
tation, if the heat grow intenfe fume copioufly, and if
the heat be great enough the fumes will fhine and be¬
come flame. Metals in fufion do not flame for want of
a copious fume, except Spelter which fumes copioufly,
and thereby flames. All flaming Bodies, as Oyl, Tal-
low, Wax, Wood, foffil Coals, Pitch, Sulphur, by
^flaming wafte and vanifh into burning fmoke, which
fmoke, if the frame be put out, is very thick and vifible,
and fometimes fmells ftrongly, but in the flame loles
its fmell by burning, and according to the nature of the
fmoke the flame is of feveral Colours, as that of Sul¬
phur blue, that of Copper opened with Sublimate
green, that of Tallow yellow* Smoke paffing through
flame cannot but grow red hot, and red hot Imoke can
Vhave no other appearance than that of flame.

11.
- [!?;]
<$u. n. Do not great Bodies conferve their heat the
longeft, their parts heating one another, and may not
great denfe and fix’d Bodies, when heated beyond a
certain degree, emit Light fo copiouily, as by the emif-
fion and reaction of its Light, and the reflexions and re¬
fractions of its .rays within its pores to grow ftill hot¬
ter, till it comes to a certain period of heat, luch as is
that of the Sun ? And are not the Sun and fix’d Stars
great Earths vehemently hot, whofe heat is conferved
by the greatnefs of the Bodies, and the mutual aCtion
and reaction between them, and the Light which they
emit, and whofe parts are kept from fuming away, not
only by their fixity, but alfo by the vaft weight and
denfity of the Atmofpheres incumbent upon them, and
very ftrongly comprefling them, and condenfing the va¬
pours and exhalations which arife from them ?
£$u. i a. Do not the rays of Light in falling upon the
bottom of the Eye excite vibrations in the "Tunica re-
tina ? Which vibrations, being propagated along the
folid fibres of the optick Nerves into the Brain, caufe
the fenfe of feeing. For becaufe denfe Bodies conferve'
their heat a long time, and the denfeft Bodies conferve
their heat the longeft, the vibrations of their parts are
of a lafting nature, and therefore may be propagated
along folid fibres of uniform denfe matter to a great di-
ftance, for conveying into the Brain the impreflions
made upon all the Organs of fenfe. For that motion ,
which can continue long in one and the fame part of a
Body, can be propagated a long way from one part to
another, fuppofing the Body homogeneal, fo that the
motion may not be reflected, refraCted, interrupted or;
difordered by any unevennefs of the Body.
§>u. 13.
[i36]
«%£. 13. Do not feveral fort of rays make vibrations
of feveral bigneffes, which according to their bigneffes
excite fenfations of feveral Colours, much after the
manner that the vibrations of the Air, according to their
feveral bigneffes excite fenfations of feveral founds ?
And particularly do not the mo ft refrangible rays ex¬
cite the fhorteft vibrations for making* a fenfation of
deep violet, the leaft refrangible the largeft for making
a fenfation of deep red, and the feveral intermediate
forts of rays, vibrations of feveral intermediate bignef¬
fes to make fenfations of the feveral intermediate Co¬
lours ?
14. May not the harmony and difcord of Co¬
lours arife from the proportions of the vibrations propa¬
gated through the fibres of the optick Nerves into the
Brain, as the harmony and difcord of founds arifes from
the proportions of the vibrations of the Air ? For feme
Colours are agreeable, as thofe of Gold and Indico, and
others difagree*
<Qu. 15. Are not the Species of Objects feen with both
Eyes united where the optick Nerves meet before
they come into the Brain, the fibres on the right fide
of both Nerves uniting there, and after union going
thence into the Brain in the Nerve which is on the
right fide of the Head, and the fibres on the left fide
of both Nerves uniting in the fame place, and after
union going into the Brain in the Nerve which is on
the left fide of the Head, and thefe two Nerves meet¬
ing in the Brain in fuch a manner that their fibres
make but one entire Species or Picture, half of which
on the right fide of the Senforium comes from the
right fide of both Eyes through the right fide of
both
[ i37]
both optick Nerves to the place where the Nerves
meet, and from thence on the right fide of the Head
into the Brain, and the other half on the left fide of the
Senforium comes in like manner from the left fide of
both Eyes. For the optick Nerves offuch Animals as
look the fame way with both Eyes (as of Men, Dogs,
Sheep, Oxen, )3c. ) meet before they come into the
Brain, but the optick Nerves of Inch Animals as do
not look the fame way with both Eyes (as of Filhes and
of the Chameleon) do not meet, if I am rightly in¬
formed.
$u. 16. When a Man in the dark preffes either cor¬
ner of his Eye with his Finger, and turns his Eye away
from his Finger, he will fee a Circle of Colours like
thofe in the Feather of a Peacock’s Tail ? Do not thefe
Colours arife from fuch motions excited in the bottom
of the Eye by the preffure of the Finger, as at other
times are excited there by Light for caufing Vifion ? And
when a Man by a ftroke upon his Eye fees a Flafii of
Light, are not the like Motions excited in the Retina
by the ftroke ?
. \N v ’
'• .r -
*
*, • • fjr'a :,h < ;
. !-■ ■

fr '
.
.. • ' ' ‘ • i ’ ' f> J: ; .

.. • Y •: V - : ' • , ■
: - - . : — . • i ' :Y;n :Y: \o' i YTM i;JY-;
■it ■■ ■
1 ,
:
f' ; r . -
(
i . ,

.I !
’ •; ,
. . • - - <rt .; A. "v;

’ *f

'
. . .

. ; . •

i •. - *
J - W ‘ i

* -r’ i •• •

. . U; .. r ■ ' - ^ f c.i ,■ , * ,

;

.

s* - S J. .

V-
*
j

.
Book n. Plate I.
Book HI.Plate I.

O pq ~«j
^ J ^
TER Til OR DIN IS.
["39]

ENUME RATIO

LINEARUM
TERTII ORDINIS,

L Ineae Geometric^ fecundum numerum dimen- i:


fionum aequationis qua relatio inter Ordinatas Lin*<&um
& Abfciflas definitur, vel (quod perinde eft) fecum m*5'
dum numerum pun&orum in quibus a linea re£la
fecari poffunt^ optime diftinguuntur in Ordines*
Qua ratione linea primi Ordinis erit Re£ta fola, eas
fecund! five quadratici ordinis erunt feftiones Conicae
& Circulus, & ex tertii five cubic! Ordinis Parabola
Cubica, Parabola Neiliana, Ciffois veterum & relL
quae quas hie enumerare fufeepimus. Curva autem
primi generis, (fiquidem refta inter Curvas non eft
numeranda) eadem eft cum Linea fecundi Ordinis5
& Curva fecundi generis eadem cum Linea Ordinis
tertii. Et Linea Ordinis infinitefimi ea eft quam
re£ta in punftis infinitis fecare poteft, qualis eft Spi¬
ralis, Cyclois, Quadratrix & linea omnis quae per
radii vel rota: revofutiones infinitas genera tur.

Tt i SeCtionum
#

II. Seftionum Conicarum proprietates praecipuae a


Proprieties Se-
iHonem Conica- Geometris paffim traduntur*. Et confimiles funt pro-
rum competunt prietates Curvarum fecundi generis & reliquarutn, ut
Purvis fuperiorum
generum.
ex fequenti proprietatum praecipuarum enumera-
tione conftabit.
III. Nam fi redae plures parallels & ad conieam fe-
Cur varum fe-
cundi generis Or~
dionem utrinq; terminate ducantur, reda duas ea-
din at a. Diame¬ fum bifeeans bifecablt alias omnes,icteoq; dicitur D ia~
tric VvrticesJCen- meter figmx&L redae bifedae dkuntur Ordinatim
tra5 Axes,
dieattend Biametrum, & concurfus omnium Dia-
metrorum eft Centrum figprae, & interfiedio Curvae &
diametri Vertex nominatur, & diameter ilia Axis
eft cui ordinatim applicates infiftunt ad angulos re¬
dos. Et ad eundem moduin in Cur vis fecundi ge¬
neris,' fi redae duae quaevis parallelae ducantur occur-
rentes Curvae in tribus pundis: reda quae ita fecat
has parallels^ ut fumma duarum partium ex uno Te-
eantis latere adcurvam terminatarum aequeturparti
tertiae ex altero latere ad curvam terminates, eodem
inodo fecabit omnes alias his parallelas curvaeq; in
tribus pundis occurrentes redas, hoc eft,,ita ut turn-
in a partium duarum ex uno ipfius latere femper
aequetur parti tertiae ex altero latere. Has itaq; tres
partes quae hinc inde aequantur, Ordinatim apflu
eatevs & redam fecantem cui ordinatim applicantur
‘Diametrum. & interfedionem diametri & curvezVer~
ticem & concurfum duarum diametrorum Centrum
nominare licet. Diameter autem ad Ordinatas re-
dangula fi modo aliqua fit, etiam Axis did poteft~.
& ubi omnes diametri in eodem pundo concurrunt
iftud erit Centrum generale*
[ H1 ]
Hyperbola primi generis duas Afymptotos, ea fo* # JV.
eundi tres,ea tertii quatuor & non plures habere po-
teft, & lie in reliquis. Et quemadmodum partes^,
lines cujufvis refits inter Hyperbolam Conicam &
duas ejus Afymptotos lunt hinc inde squales : lie irj(
Hyperbolis fecundi generis fi ducatur reda qusvi/s
fecans tam Curvam quam tres ejus Afymptotos 4n
tribus pundis, fumma duarum partium iftius rdfts
qus a duobus quibufvis Alymptptis in eandem pla-
gam ad duo punda Curvs extenduntur squali§ erit
parti tertis quae a tertia Afymptoto in plagam con-
trariam ad tertium Curvae pundum extenditur;
Et quemadmodum in Conicis fedionibus non Pa» v.
rabolicis quadratum Ordinatim applicate, hoc eft,^ LaterareB4m-
redangulum Ordinatarum quae ad contrarias par- 4 ^ ^ ^
tes Diametri ducuntur, eft ad redangulum partium
Diametri quae ad Vertices Ellipfeos vel Hyperbolae
terminantur,ut data quaedam linea. quae dicitur Lams
reSlim^ ad partem diametri quae inter Vertices jacet
& dicitur Lattes tranfverfum : fic in Curvis non Para- \
bolicis fecundi generis Parallelepipedum fub tribus
Ordinatim applicatis eft ad Parallelepipedum fub par¬
ti bus Diametri ad Ordinatas & tres Vertices figure ab-
feiffis, in ratione quadam data : in qua ratione ft fix-
mantur tres reds ad tres partes diametri inter ver¬
tices figuts fitas lingulae ad lingulas, tunc ills tres
reds did poffunt Late?'a reMa figurs, & ills partes.-
Diametri inter Vertices Later a tranfverfa.. Et ficufc
in Parabola Conica qus adunam & eandem diarne-
trum unicum tantum habet Verticem, redangulum;
fub Ordinatis squatur redangulofub parte Diametri
qus ad Ordinatas & Verticem abfeinditur Sereda
quadam
[ H2 ]
quadam data qux Latus return dicitmqfic in Curvis
fecundi generis qux non nili duos habent Vertices ad
eandem Diametrunq Parallelepipedum fub Ordinatis
tribus xquatur Parallelepipedo fub duabus partibus
Diametri ad Ordinatas & Vertices illos duos abfciffis^
& reda quadam data qux proinde Latm reclum
dici poteft.
vi* Deniq; iicut in Conicis fedionibus ubi dux paral-
rum fub Paraiie- lelee ad murvam utrmq; terminats iecantur a dua-
Urumfegmemis. bus parallelis ad Curvam utrinq; terminatis, prima
a tertia & fecunda a quarta, redangulum partium
prims eft ad redangulum partium tertia ut redan-
gulum partium fecund® ad redangulum partium
quart®: lie ubi quatuor tales reds occurrunt Curva
fecundi generis lingula in tribus pundis, paralleled
pipedum partium prima reda erit ad parallelepide-
dum partium tertia, ut parallelepipedum partium
fecunda ad parallelepipedum partium quarta.
„ V!I- ^ Curvarum fecundi & fuperiorum generum aque
boiica&Pa/abo-atq; prmu crura omnia m mhmtum progredientia
Uca & eorum pia- vel HyperMici funt generis vel TaraMtci. Crus Hy~
per Miami voco quod ad Afymptoton aliquam in in¬
finitum appropinquat^TaraMicum quod Afymptoto
deftituitur. Hxc crura ex tangentibus optime dig-
nofeuntur. Nam fi pundum contadus in infinitum
abeat tangens cruris Hyperbolici cum Afymptoto
coincidet & tangens cruris Parabolici in infinitum
recede^ evanefcet & nullibi reperietur. Invenitur
igitur Afymptotos cruris cujufvis quxrendo tangen-
tem cruris illius ad pundum infinite diftans. Plaga
autem cruris infiniti invenitur quxrendo pofitionem
redx cujufvis qux tangenti parallela. eit ubi pun¬
dum
C H3l
Sum conta&us in infinitum abit. Nam haec recta
in eandem plagam cum crure infinite dirigitur.
Linear omnes Ordinis primi, tertii, quintq fep- VIIL
timi & imparis cujufq; duo habent ad minimum
crura in infinitum verfus plagas oppofitas progre- generisfscundi ad
dientia. Et lineae omnes tertii Ordinis duo habent ^uatl0num^4^
ejuimodi crura m plagas oppohtas progredientia m pri? ''wins*
quas nulla alia earum crura infinita (praeterquam
in Parabola Cartefiana) tenduntv Si crura ilia
lint Hyperbolici generis., fit GAS eorum Afymp-
totos & huic parallela agatur reSta quamvis C B c
ad Curvam utrinque ( fi fieri poteft ) tenninata
eademq; bifecetur in pundto X, & locus pundti il- F&
lius X erit Hyperbola Conica ( puta X $ ) cujus
una Afymptotos eft AS. Sit ejus altera Afymp-
totos A B, & aaquatio qua relatio inter Ordinatam
BC & Abfciflam AB definituig fi AB dicatur x &
B C y5 Temper induet hanc formam x y y -|- e y = a x5
-|-bxx-(-cx~|--d. Ubi termini e, a5 b^ c5 d5 defig-
nant quantitates datas cum fignis fuis -\- & —< affe-
<ftas0 quarum quaelibet deeffe poffuntmodo ex earum
deledtu figura in fedionem conicam non vertatur. -
Poteft autem Hyberbola ilia Conica cum afympto-
tis fuis coin cider e, id eft pundum X in reda AB,
locari: & tunc terminus-j-ey deeft.
At fi reda illaCB c non poteft utrinq; ad Curvam
terminari fed Curvae in unico tan turn pundo occur- IX.
Cafm fecund'mj
lit: age quamvis pofitione datamredam AB afymp-
toto AS occurrentem in A, ut & aliam quamvis BC
afymptoto illi parallelam Curvaeque occurrentem in
pundo C5 & asquatio qua relatio inter Ordinatam
BC
i
.. C144 ]
B C Sc AbfcilTam A B definitur, Temper induet hanc
formam x y = a x* b x x-|- c x d.
X. Quod fi crura ilia oppollta Parabolici lint generis,
Cafu-s tertim.
recta C B c ad Curvam utrinque, fi fieri poteft, ter-
minata in plagam cruruni ducatur & bifecetur in B,
& locus pundi B erit linea reda. Sit ilia AB, ter-
minata ad datum quodvis pundum A, & oequatio
qua relatio inter Ordinatam BC & AbfcilTam AB
definitur, temper induet hanc formam, yy = axs
-pbxx-Ecx-j- d.
XL At vero fi reda ilia C B c in unico tantum pundo
■Cafm quartm.
occurrat Cufvse, ideoq; ad Curvam utrinq; terminari
non poffit: fit pundum illud C, & incidat reda ilia
ad pundum B in redam quamvis aliam pofitione
datam & ad datum quodvis pundum A terminatam
A B : Sc aequatio qua relatio inter Ordinatam B C Sc
AbfcilTam AC definitur femper induet hanc formam,
y = ax5-fbxx^cx -f d.
XII. Enumerando curvas horum cafuum, Hyperbolam
- Nomi/m forma-
rum.
vocabimus injcnptam quae tota jacet in Afymptotoii
angulo ad inftar Hyperbola conicae, circumfcnptam
qua? Afymptotos fecat Sc partes abtciffas in finu fuo
ampleditur, ambigenam quae uno crure infinito in-
fcribitur Sc altero circumfcribitur, convergentem
eujus crura concavitate fua feinvicem refpiciunt Sc
in plagam eandem diriguntur ^divergentem eujus crura
convexitate fua feinvicem recipiunt 8c in plagas con¬
traries diriguntur, cruribus contrariis preeditam eujus
crura in partes contrarias convexa funt 8c in plagas
contrarias infinita, Conchoidalem quae vertice concavo
& cruribus divergentibus ad alymptoton applicatur,
dngiiimam quae flexibus contrariis afymptoton fecat
&
C r4$ ]
8c utrinq; in crura contra ria producitur, cruciformem
qua conjugatam decuffat, nodatam qus feipfam de-
cuffat in orbem redeundo, cufpidatam cujus partes
dux in angulo contadus concurrunt & ibi terminan-
tur, punttatam qure conjugatam habet Ovalem infi¬
nite parvam id eft pundum, Sc fur am quse per im-
poffibilitatem duarum radicum Ovali, Nodo, Cuf-
pide Sc Pundo conjugato privatur. Eodem fenfu
Parabolam quoq; convergeniem, divergentem, cruri-
bus contrarm pneditam, cruciformem, nodatam, cuf-
fidatamj punilatam 8c puram nominabimus.
In cai'u primo li terminus a x* affirmativus eft Fi- XIIL , ,
gura erit Hyperbola triplex^ cum fex cruriblxs Hy- redunimu&
perbolicis qusjuxta tres Alymptotos quarum nulls tribm ct-
font parallels in infinitum progrediuntur,binge juxta
unamquamq; in plagas contrarias. Et hx Alymp-
toti fi terminus b x x non deeft fe mutuo fecabunt
in tribus pundis triangulum (Dd^J inter fe con-
tinentes, fin terminus bxx deeft convergent omnes
ad ,idem pundum. In priori cafu cape A D =
& Ad = Ac/' = ~~rs ac junge Dd, D^, 8c erunt
AD, Dd, D^tres Afymptoti. In pofteriori due
ordinatam quamvis B C, & in ea utrinq; produda
cape hine inde B F & Bf fibi mutuo sequales &
in ea ratione ad A B quam habet /d ad a, j'unpeq:
AF, Af, & erunt AB, AF, Af tres Alympoti.
Hanc autem Hyperbolam vocamus redundantem
quia numero crurum Hyperbolicorum Sediones Co¬
rneas foperat.
In Hyperbola omni redundante fi neq; terminus ^ XIV’-
e} defit neq, in oo — qac squale ft ae•y a curva nul-perboUdiametric
lam habebit diametrum, fin eorum alterutrum ac- & (itu crurum
-- infinitorum*
Uu cidat
.[■4<S]
cidat curva habebi# unicam diametrum., & tres E
utrumque. Diameter autem femper tranftt per in-
terfedionem duarum Afymptoton & bilecat redas
omnes quae ad Afymptotos illas utrinq; terminantur
& parallels funt & Afymptoto tertiae. Eftq; abfciffa
A B diameter Figurae quoties terminus ey deeft.
Diametrum vero abfolute didam hie & in fequen-
tibus in vulgari fignificatu ufurpo, nempe pro ab¬
fciffa quae paffim habet ordinatas binas aequales ad
idem pundum hinc inde infiftentes.
xv. Si Hyperbola redundans nullam habet diametrum
^emredmdantes eperantur iEquationis hujus a X4+b X* A c X X A d X
qu*diametrode- A 4 = ° radices quatuor feu valores ipfius x. Eae
:ilZntUAfydjtlfunt0 A P5 A w» A *, A P- Erigantur ordinate
ios triangidum PT, WT •) Trfj p tj & hae tangent Curvam in pundis
ententes. totidem T, t, it, & tangendo dabunt limites Cur-
vx per quos fpecies ejus innotefeet.
v- Nam ft radices omnes AP5 A*®*, A^q Ap funt
reales., ejufdein figni & inaequales, Curva conftat ex
tribus Hyperbolis ., ( infer,ipta circumfcripta & am-
bigena ) cum Ovalt. Hyperbolarum una jacet ver-
fus D1 altera verfus d, tertia verlus ^ & Ovalis
femper jacet intra triangulam Dd d\ atq; etiam in¬
ter medios limites n & r 7 in quibus utiq; tangitur
ab ordinatis nfi & ot. Et haec eft fpecies prima.
3,4* Si e radicibus duae maxima A ^ A vel duae mi¬
nima AP, A^ aequantur inter fe, & ejufdem funt
figni cum alteris duobus., Ovalis & Hyperbola cir¬
cumfcripta fibi inxicem junguntur coeuntibus earum
pundis contadusT & t vel T & ^ & crura Hyper¬
bolae fefe decuffando in Ovalem continual! tur5 ftgu-
ram mdatcwi efficientia. Quae fpecies eft fecunda.
Si
[ r47 1
Si e radicibus tres maximae A/, A t, A*r, vel tres Fig. 5,at
minimae A^, A*r, AP oequentur inter fe5 Nodus in
cuffidem acutiffimum convertetur. Nam crura duo
Hyperbolae circumfcriptae ibi in angulo contadus
concurrent & non ultra producentur. Et haec eft
fpecies tertia.
Si e radicibus duae media' A^ & Ax a'quentur in- 7.
ter fe, punda contadus T & 7 coincidunt, & propte-
rea Ovalis interjeda in pundum evanuit, & conftat
figura ex tribus Hyperbolis, infcripta, circumfcripta
& ambigena cum fundi0 conjugate,, Qua eft fpecies
quarta.
Si duae ex radicibus funt impoffibiles & reliquae
duae inaequales & ejufdem figni (nam figna contraria
habere nequeunt,) pnra habebuntur Hyperbola tres
fineOvali vel Nodo vel cufpide vel pundo conju¬
gate,, & hae Hyperbola vel ad latera trianguli ab
Afymptotis comprehenft vel ad angulos ejus jacebunt
& perinde fpeciem vel quintam vel fextam corifti- \\
tuent.
Si e radicibus duae funt aequales & alterae duae 9,10,15^
vel impoffibiles funt vel reales cum fignis quae a fig-
nis aequalium radicum diverfa funt, figura crucifor-
mis habebitur, nempe duae ex Hyperbolis feinvicem
decuffabunt idq; vel ad verticem trianguli ab A-
fymptotis comprehenfi, vel ad ejus bafem. Qua
dus fpecies funt feptima & odava.
Sideniq; radices omnes funt impoffibiles vel n,i£
omnes funt reales & inaequales & earum duae funt
affirmative & alterae duae negativae} tunc duae babe-
buntur Hyperbolae ad angulos oppofitos duarum
U u 2 Afymp-
■ . [148]
Afymptoton cum Hyperbola mguinea circa Afymp-
toton tertiam. Quae fpecies eft nona.
Et hi lunt omnes radicum cafus poffibiles. Nam.
ft duae radices funt aequales inter fe, & alias duae font
etiany inter le aequales, Figura evadet Sedio Conica
cum linea reda.
XVI. Si Hyperbola redundans habet unicam tan turn
d!c^tiuJdZ Diametrum fit ejus Diameter Abfciffa AB, & squa-
ies cum unica tan- tioms hujus ax3A~bxx-j-cxJ|~d = o quaere tres ra-
turn Dtametro. Jices feu lores X.
17• Si radices illae font omnes reales & ejufdem figni^
Figura conftabit ex Ovali intra triangulum Dd^ ja-
cente & tribus Hyperbolis ad angulos ejus, nempe
circumfcripta ad angulum D & infcriptis duabus ad
angulos d Et haec eft fpecies decima.
184 Si radices duae majores font aequales & tertia ejuf¬
dem figni, crura Hyperbola jacentis verfus D fefe
decuffabunt in forma Modi propter contadum Ova-
lis. Quae fpecies eft undecima.
l9» Si tres radices funt aequales. Hyperbola ifta fit
cujpdata fine Ovali. Quae fpecies eft duodecima.
2a Si radices duae minores funt aequales & tertia ejuf¬
dem figni, Ovalis in funclum evanuit. Quae fpecies
eft decima tertia. In fpeciebus quatuor noviffimis
Hyperbola quae jacet verfus D Afymptotos in finu
fuo arnpleditur, reliquae duae in finu Afymptoton
jacent.
pf*20* Si duae ex radicibus funt impoffibiles habebuntur tres
&£ 22. Hyperbolae fur<e fine Ovali decuffatione vel cufpide.
^23- Et hujus caius fpecies funt quatuor, nempe decima
quarta fi Hyperbola circumfcripta jacet verfus D &
decima
[ H9 J - .
decima quinta fi Hyperbola infcripta jacet verfus D,
decima fexta ii Hyperbola circumicripta jacet fub
bafi cH trianguli DcH, & decima feptima fi Hyper-
bola.infcripta jacet fub eadem bafi.
Si dux radices funt sequales & tertia figni diverfi 24*
figura erit cruciformk. Nempeduse ex tribus Hy-
perbolis feinvicem decuffabunt idq; vel ad verticem
trianguli ab Afymptotis comprehenfi vel ad ejus ba-
fem. Qjix duse lpecies funt decima octave & decima.
nona.
Si duse radices funt inaquales & ejufdem figni &
tertia eft figni diverfi, duse habebuntur Hyperbola
in oppofitis angulis duarum afymptoton cum Con*
choidali intermedia. Conchoidalis autem vel jace- FiZ*2~
bit ad eafdem partes afymptoti fuse cum triangulo Bg° 26
ab afymptotis conftituto, vel ad partes contrarias ;
& hi duo cafus conftituunt fpeciem vigefimam & vi¬
gefimam primam.
Hyperbola redundans quae fiabet tres diametros . XVII,
Hyperbola dim
conftat ex tribus Hyperbolis in finubus afymptot6nre^Sej. cum
jacentibus, idq; vel ad angulos trianguli ab afympto- tribus Diametris
*

tis comprehenfi vel ad ejus latera. Cafus prior dat p|]


ipeciem vigefimam fecundanq& pofterior Ipeciem vi¬
gefimam tertiam.
Si tres afymptoti in pundto communi fe mutuo XViii.
decuffant, vertuntur fpecies quinta & fexta in vise- Hy^oU m-
iimam quartam, leptima & ottava m vigefimam cum Afymptotis
quintam, & nona in vigefimam fextam ubi Anguineatribu! ad ctmmu~
non tranfit per concurfum afymptoton, & in vigefi- ZJfmitZ. °>n~
rnam leptimam ubi tranfit per concurfum ilium, quo Fis- 3P-
cai’u termini b ac d delunt, & concurfus afyrnpto- 32.
ton ell centrum figura ab omnibus ejus partibus 33*
oppofitis
C1^] ,
oppofitis aequaliter diftans. Et hx quatuor fpecles
Diametnim non habent.
F/>. 34, Fertuntur etiam fpecies decima quarta ac decima
Fig. 35.
fexta in vigefimam oftavam, decima quinta ac de¬
'%* 37* cima feptima in vigefimam nonam, decima octava
& decima nona in tricefimam, & vigefima cum vige-
lima prima in tricefimam primam. Et hx fpecies
unicam habent diametrum.
%* .38. Ac deniq; fpecies vigefima fecunda & vigefima
tertia vertuntur in fpeciem tricefimam fecundam cu-
jus tres funt Diametri per concurfum afymptotdn
tranfeuntes. Quae omnes! converfiones facillime in-
telliguntur faciendo ut triangulum ab afymptotis
comprehenfum diminuatur donee in pun&um eva-
nefcat.
xix. Si in primo aequationum cafu terminus ax3 ne-
gativus eft, Figura erit Hyberbola defediva unicam
trum nm habrn- liabens afymptoton & duo tantum crura Hyperbo-
tes„
lica juxta afymptoton illam in plagas contrarias in¬
finite progredientia. Et afymptotos ilia eft Ordi-
nata prima & principalis AG. Si terminus ey non
deeft figura nullam habebit Diametrum, fi deeft ha-
bebit unicam. In priori cafu fpecies fic enume-
rantur.
■ £' 3 9* Si sequationis hujus ax4 = bx5-j-cxx-[■ dx-ee,
radices omnes At, AP, A A.w, funt reales & in-
oequales, Figura erit Hyperbola anguinea afympto¬
ton flexu contrario amplexa, cum Ovali conjugata.
Quse fpecies eft tricefima tertia.
•:a. 40., Si radices duae mediae AP & Af aequentur inter
fe, Ovalis & Anguinea junguntur feie decuflantes
in forma Nodi, Qua’ eft fpecies tricefima quarta.
Si
[ ]
Si tres radices funt sequaks, Nodus vertetur
cuff idem acutiffimum in vertice anguinese. Et hxc
eft fpecies tricesima quinta.
Si e tribus radicibus ejufdem figni dux maxknae fi£' 43-
A / & A -or fibi rnutuo sequantur, Ovalis in fundtum
evanuit, Q.use fpecies eft tricefima fexta.
Si radices dux quaevis imaginary funt7 fola ma-
nebit Anguinea fura, fine Ovalq decuflatione5 oil-
pide vel pundo conjugate. Si Anguinea ilia non 42*.,

tranfit per pundum A fpecies eft tricefima feptima>


fin tranfit per pundum illud A ( id quod contin^it Fl£* 43*
ubi termini b ac d defunt,) pundum illud A erit
centrum figure redas omnes per ipfum dudas &
ad Curvam utrinq; terminatas bifecans. Et haec
eft fpecies tricefima odava.
In altero cafu ubi terminus ey deeft 8c propterea xx.
figura Diametrum habet, fi aequationis hums ax3 Hyppp^fip-
i j i J J * ■ a 't* \ a ' r> iZYft dsfeEiiV&.di-
= bXX-rCX+.d radices OmneS AT, At, At, funt amnrum habex,
reales, inasquales & ejufdem figni, figura erit Hyper- p-
bola Conchoidalis cum Ovali ad convexitatem, ""Qua* 4’* '
eft fpecies tricefima nona.
Si duse radices funt insequales & ejufdem figni & Bg, 44,
tertia eft figni contrarii, Ovalis jacebit ad concavi-
tatem Conchoidalis. Eftq; fpecies quadragefima.
Si radices duse min ores AT, At, funt requales i%. 4<r,
& tertia At eft ejufdem figni, Ovalis & Conchoi¬
dalis jungentur fefe decuffando in modum Modi,
Quce fpecies eft quadragefima prima.
Si tres radices funt aequales, Nodus mutabitur in ^.47
Cuff idem & figura erit Cijois Veterwm, Et lisec eft
fpecies quadragefima fecunda.

Si
49.
Si radices duse majores funt acquales, & tertia eft
ejufdem figni,Conchoidalis habebit punclum conju-
gatum ad convexitatem fuam, eftq; fpecies quadra-
geiima tertia.
49 * Si radices duae funt sequales & tertia eft figni con-
trarii Conchoidalis habebit punclum conjugatum
ad concavitatem fuam, eftq; fpecies quadragefiraa
quarta.
48,49. Si radices duae funt impoflibiles habebitur Con-
choidalis pur a fine Ovali , Nodo, Culpide vel
pun do conjugate. Quae fpecies eft quadragefima
quinta..
XXL Siquando in primo aequationum cafu terminus ax?
Hyperbola fep-
tern Parabolica deeft & terminus bxx non deeft, Figura erit Hy¬
.Diametrum non perbola Parabolica duo habens crura Hyperbolica ad
babefft.es.
unam Alymptoton S A G & duo Parabolica in pla-
gam unam 6c eandem convergentia. Si terminus
e y non deeft figura nullam habebit diametrum, fin
deeft habebit unicam. In priori cafu fpecies funt
hae
^ a. Si tres radices AP, A-nr, Ax sequationis hujus
bx34cx +dx-|--' ee = o funt inaequales & ejufdem
figni, figura conftabit ex Ovali & aliis duabus Curvis
quae partim Hyperbolicae funt & partim Parabolics’.
Afempe crura Parabolica continuo duftu junguntur
cruribus Hyperbolicis fibi proximis. Et haec eft
fpecies quadregeiima l'exta.
$ig. 51 . Si radices duae minores funt sequales & tertia eft
ejufdem figni, Ovalis & una Curvarum illarum
Hyperbolo-Parabolicarum junguntur & fe decuflfant
in formam Nodi. Quae fpecies eft quadragefima
feptima.
C 153 ]
Si tres radices funt gequales, Nodus Hie in Cuf- Fig,
pidem vertitur. Eftq; fpecies quadragefima oCtava.
Si radices duse majores funt aequales & tertia eft 53*
ejufdem figni, Ovalis in punttum conjugatum eva-
unit. Qux fpecies eft quadragefima nona.
Si dnx radices funt impoffibiles, manebunt fur<efiz*%3,54*
ilia duae curvae Hyperbolo-parabolicae fine Ovali,
decuftatione, cufpide vel pun&o conjugate^ & fpe-
eiem quinquagefimam conftituent.
Si radices duae funt aequales & tertia eft ftgni con-B*' ^
Irani, Curvae illoe hyperbolo-parabolicae junguntur
fefe decuffando in morem crucis. Eftq; fpecies quin-
quagefima prima.
Si radices duae funt incequaies & ejufdem figfii & F^-
tertia eft figni contrarii, figura evadet Hyperbola
anguinea circa Afymptoton A G, cum Parabola con-
jugata. Et hsec eft fpecies quinquagefima fecunda.
In altero cafu ubi terminus ey deeft & figura xxil.
Diametrum habet, fi dute radices aequationis hujus tttZyfFa™b&7
bxx-j-cx-|-d = o funt impoffibiles, duae habenturP^metrum ha-
figurse hyperbolo-parabolicae a Diametro A B hinc bZX
inde aequaliter diftantes. Qute fpecies eft quinqua- >7'
gefima tertia.
Si aquationis illius radices duae funt impoflibiles, Fi£- 58.
figure hyperbolo'parabolicae junguntur fefe de-
cuffantes in morem crucis, & fpeciem quinquagefi¬
mam quartam conftituunt.
Si radices illae funt inaequales & ejufdem figni, ha- Fi£- is-
betur Hyperbola Conchoidalis cum Parabola ex
eodem latere Afymptoti. Eftq; fpecies quinquage¬
fima quinta.

Xx Si
C154 D
*%•*<>: Si radices ilk funt figni contrariir habetur Con-
choidalis cum Parabola ad alteras partes AfymptotL
Ctuse fpecies eft quinquagefima fexta.
xxiii. f^Siquando in primo ^quationum cafu terminus
utei;qj ?x? & b.xx dee.ftv figura erit Hyperbolifmus
b&u, ’‘ fedionis alicujus Conicce, Hyperbolifmum figure
voco cujus Ordinata proditapplicandoconteptumfub
Ordinata figure illius & red# data ad AbfciiTam com-
munem. Hac ratione linea reda vertitur in hyper-
bolam Gonicam, & fedio omnis Gonica vertitur in
aliquam figurarum quas hie Hyperbolifmos fedio-
num Conicarum voco. Nam sequatio ad figuras
de quibus agimus, nempe x y y -j- e y = c x -j- d, feu
e+z^eei- ^dx-ft 4 exx generatur appli-
y 2x
cando contentum fub Ordinata fedionis Conicae
e+//ee-b4dx-|-4cxx & reda data m ad curvarum
2m ' “
AbfciiTam communem x. Unde liquet quod figura
genita Hyperbolifmus erit Hyperbola?, Ellipfeos vel
Parabolae perinde ut terminus cx affirmativus eft
vel negativus vel nullus.
Hyperbolifmus Hyperbola? tres habet afymptotos
quarum una eft Ordinata prima & principalis A d
alterae duse funt parallels Ablciffae A B & ab eadem
bine inde sequaliter diftant. In Ordinata principali
Ad cape Ad, hinc inde aequales quantitati //c
& per punUa d ac ^ age dg, Afymptotos Ab-
feifife A B parallelas.
Ubi terminus ey non deeft figura nullam ha¬
bet diametrum. In hoc cafu fi aequationis hujus
cxx-ydx-j-Jee^o radices duae A P, Ap funt reales
8c
[ !$$ ]
Sc ina'quales (nam tequales efle nequeunt nifi figura
fit Conica feftio ) figura conftabit ex tribus Hyper-
bolis fibi oppofitis quarum una jacet inter afymp-
totos parallelas & altera duae jacent extra. Et haec
eft fpecies quinquagefima feptima.
Si radices illae duae i’unt impoffibiles,habentur Hy¬
perbolae duae oppofitae extra afymptotos parallelas &
Anguinea hyperbolica intra eafdem. Haec figura
duarum eft lpecierum. Nam centrum non habet
ubi terminus d non deeft ; fed fi terminus ille deeft
pun£tum A eft ejus centrum. Prior fpecies eft quin¬
quagefima oftava, pofterior quinquagefima nona.
TQuod fi terminus e y deeft, figura conftabit ex Kg. 64
tribus hyperbolis oppofitis quarum una jacet inter
afymptotos parallelas & altera duae jacent extra ut
in fpecie quinquagefima quarta, & praterea diame-
trum habet quae eft abfciffa A B. Et haec eft fpecies
fexagefima.
Hyperbolifmus Ellipfeos per hanc aequationem de- XXIV.
finitur xy yey = cx-j-d, & unicam habet afymp- Tr‘t
toton qua eft Ordinata principalis Ad. Si terminusk£ 6^'
ey non deeft, figura eft Hyperbola anguinea fine dia~
metro atq; etiam fine centre fi terminus d non deeft.
Quae fpeeies eft fexagefima prima.
^ ^ At ft terminus d deeft, figura habet centrum fine%* 66*
diametro & centrum ejus eft pun&um A, Species
vero eft fexagefima fecunda,
Et fi terminus ey deeft & terminus d non deeft,Fig* $7*
figura eft Conchoidalis ad afymptoton A G, habetq;
diametrum fine centro, & diameter ejus eft Abfciffa
A EL Quae fpecies eft fexagefima tertia,
Xx 2 Hyper-
[I5<S]
xxv. Hyperbolifmus Parabola per hanc aequationem
Duo Hyperbo-
lifmi Parabola. definitur x y y e y = d ; & duas habet afymptotos,
Abfciffam A B" & Ordinatam primam & principalem
AG* Hyperbolae vero in hac figura funtduae, non
in afymptoton angulis oppcfitis fed in angulis qui
Fig. 68. funt deinceps jacentes, idq; ad utrumq; latus ab-
fciffse A B, & vel fine diametro fi terminus ey ha-
Fig. 6p, betur, vel cum diametro fi terminus ille deeft. Qua;
duse fpecies funt fexagefima quarta & fexagefima
<6-

quinta.
XXVI. In fecundo aequationum cafu habebatur sequatio
Tridens.
xy = ax5-^bxx-bcx-pd. Et figura in hoc cafu
habet quatuor crura infinita quorum duo jhnt hy-
perbolica circa afymptoton A G in contrarias partes
tendentia & duo Parabolica convergentia & cum
prioribus fpeciem Tridentis fere efformantia. Eftq;
B>e ?6. hxc Figura Parabola ilia per quam Cartefius sequa-
tiones lex dimenfionum conftruxit* Hsec eft igitur
Ipecies fexagefima fexta.
XXVII* In tertio cafu aequatio erat yy = ax3~|-bxx-J-cx
Parabola quin
que divergentes.
= d, & Parabolum defignat cujus crura divergunt
ab invicem & in contrarias partes infinite progre-
diuntur. AbfciiTa AB eft ejus diameter & fpecies ejus
funt quinq; fequentes.
Fig. 70,71, Si aequationis a x5 -j- b xa -f- c xd — o radices cm-
nes Ati AT, At funt reales & inaequales,figura eft
Parabola divergens campaniformis cum Ovali ad
verticem. Et fpecies eft fexagefima feptima.
Si radices duae funt aequales, Parabola prodit vel
73* nadata contingendo Ovalem, vel funStata ob Ovalem
infinite parvam. Quse dure fpecies funt fexagefima
oftava & fexagefima nona,
' Si
[i$7]
Si tres radices funt aequales Parabola erit cufp-&g>7$<
data in vertice. Et haec eft Parabola Neiliana quo?
vulgo femicubica dicitur.
Si radices duae funt impoffibiles, habetur Parabola Fig. 73,74,
fura'campaniformis fpeciem feptuagefimain primam
conftituens.
I11 quarto cafu aequato erat y- ax -pbxx-f-cx xxvni.
& haec aequatio Parabolam illam WaUiftanam Parabola cuhca.
defignat quae crura habet contraria & cubica du
ci folet. Et ilc fpecies omnino funt feptuaginta
duae.
Si in planum infinitum a pundto lucido illumina- ^ xxix*
turn umbrae ngurarum projiciantur, umbrae lectio- rum^vmfouv.
num Conicarum femper erunt fedtiones Conicae, eae
Curvarum fecundi generis femper erunt Curvae fe¬
cund! generis, eae curvarum tertii generis femper
erunt Curvae tertii generis, & fic deinceps in infini¬
tum* Et quemadmodum Circulus umbram proji-
ciendo generat fedtiones omnes conicas, tic Parabolae 4
quinq; divergentes umbris fuis generant & exhi-
bent alias omnes fecundi generis curvas , & fic
Curvae qusedam fimpliciores aliorum generum inve-
niri poffunt quae alias omnes eorundem generum
curvas umbris fuis a pundto lucido in planum pro**
jedtis formabunt.
Diximus Curvas fecundi generis a linea redta in xxx;
pundtis tribus fecari poffe, Horum duo nonnun-
quam coincidunt lit cum redta per Ovalem infi¬
nite parvam tranfit vel per concurfum duarum par-
tium Curvae fe mutuo fecantium vel in cufpidem
coeuntium ducitur* Et fiquando redtae omnes in
plagana
[158]
plagam cruris alicujus infiniti tendentes Curvam
in unico tantum pundto fecant ( ut fit in ordinatis
Parabolae Cartefianae & Parabolae cubicse, nec non in
redtis Abfciffae Hyperbolifmorum Hyberbolae & Para¬
bolae ySarallelis ) concipiendum eft quod redtae illae
per alia duo Curvae pundta ad infinitam diftan-
tiam lita ( ut ita dicam ) tranfeunt. Hujufmodi
interfedtiones duas coincidentes five ad finitam
fint diftantiam five ad infinitatn, vocabimus pun-
dtum duplex. Curvae autem quae habent pun*
dtum duplex defcribi poflimt per fequentia Theo«
remata.
XXXI.
'Theoremata de
Cur varum de-
1. Si anguliduo magnitudine dati PAD, PBD circa
fcriytione orga~ polos pofitione datos A, B rotentur, & eorum crura
nica.
A P, B P concurfu fuo P percurrant lineam redtam;
crura duo reliqua A D, B D concurfu fuo D defcri-
bent fedtionem Conicam per polos A, B tranfeun-
tem : proeterquam ubi lineailla redta tranfit per po-
lorum alterutrum Avel B, vel anguli BAD, ABD
fimul evanefcunt, quibus in cafibus pundtum D de*
fcribet lineam redtam.

Si crura prima A P, B P concurfu fuo P


percurrant fedtionem Conicam per polum alter-
utrum A tranfeuntem, crura duo reliqua AD, BD
concurfu fuo D defcribent Curvam fecundi gene¬
ris per polum alterum B tranfeuntem & pun¬
ctual duplex habentem in polo primo A per quern
fedtio Conica tranfit : praeterquam ubi anguli
BAD, ABD fimul evanefcunt, quo cafu pun¬
dtum
[ r$9 1
£tum D defcribet aliam fefitionem Conicam per po-
lum A tranfeuntem.

g, At fi feftio Conica quam punfitum P percur-


rit tranfeat per neutrum polorum A, B, punftum
D defcribet curvam fecundi vel tertii generis pun-
Sum duplex habentem. Et punStum illud duplex
in concurfu crurum defcribentium, A D, BD in-
venietur ubi anguli B AP, A BP fimul evanefcunt,
Curva autem defcripta fecundi erit generis fi an¬
guli BAD, ABD limul evanefcunt, alias erit ter¬
tii generis & alia duo habebit punCta duplicia in
polis A & B*

Jam feftio Conica determinate' ex datis ejus xxxn.


pundis quinq; & per eadem fie defcribi poteft.
Dentur ejus punda quinq; A, B, C, D, E. Jun- tkpr dat*. quin-
gantur eorum tria qusevis A, B, C & trianguli ABC rue(unna-
rotentur anguli duo quivis C A B, CBA circa ver- V
tices fuos A & B, & ubi crurum A C, B C interfedio
C fucceffive applicatur ad punda duo reliqua D, E,
incidat interfedio crurum reliquorum AB & BA
in punda P & Q, Agatur & infinite producatur
reda P Q, & anguli mobiles ita rotentur ut inter-
fedio crurum AB, BA percurrat redam PQ, &
crurum reliquorum interfedio C defcribet propofi-
tam fedionem Conicam per Theorema primum.
xxxin.
Curvae omnes fecundi generis_ pundum duplex cuSuJZ™
habentes determinantur ex datis earum punctis &um duplex ha-
feptem, quorum unum eft pundtum illud duplex,
& tern pimcta.
[ itfo ]
& per eadem pundta fic defcribl poffunti Dentur
Curvae defcribendse pundta quaelibet feptem A, B, C,
D, E, F, G quorum A eft pundtum duplex, Jun-
gantur pundtum A & alia duo quaevis e pundtis puta
B & C ; & trianguli ABC rotetur turn angulus
CAB circa, verticem fuum A, turn angulorum reli-
quorum alteruter ABC circa verticem fuum B. Et
ubi crurum AC? BC concurfus C lucceffive appli-
catur ad pundta quatuor reliqua D, E, F, G incidat
concurfus crurum reliquorum A B & B A in pundta
quatuor P, Q, R, S. Per pundta ilia quatuor &
quintum A defcribatur fedtio Conica, & anguli pro¬
fit! CAB, CB A ita rotentur ut crurum AB, B A
concurfus percurrat fedtionem illam Conicam , &
concurfus reliquorum crurum AC} B C defcribet
Curvam propofitam per Theorema fecundum.
Si vice pundti C datur pofitione redta B C quae
Curvam defcribendam tangit in B, lineae AD, A P
coincident, & vice anguli D AP habebitur linea redta
circa polum A rotanda.
Si pundtum duplex A infinite diftat debebit Redta
ad plagam pundti illius perpetuo dirigi & motu pa-
rallelo ferri interea dum angulus ABC circa polum
B rotatur.
Defcribi etiam poffunt hx curvae paulo aliter per
Theorema tertium, fed defcriptionem fimpliciorem
pofuilTe fufficit.
Eadem methodo Curvas tertii, quarti & fuperio-
rum generum defcribere licet, non omnes quidem
fed quotquot ratione aliqua commoda per moturn
localem defcribi poffunt* Nam curvam aliquam
fecund i
E ]
■fecundi vel fuperioris generis pundum duplex non
habentem commode defcribere Problema eft inter
difficiliora numerandum.
Curvarum ufus in Geometria eft ut per earum xxxiv.
interfediones Problemata folvantur. Proponatur
sequatio conftruenda dimenfionum novem x^ft-bx7 fcnpiomm Cm-
-j-cx6-i-dx5-|-ex44-fx3-j-gxx-|-hx-j-k = o, Ubiwum-
-ft m
b, c, d, )Sc. fignificant quantitates quafvis datas
fignis fuis ft- & -< affefitas. Affumatur sequatio ad
Parabolam cubicam x! = y, & sequatio prior, fcri-
bendo y pro x?, evadet y5ft-bxy y ft-cyyft-dxxy
-ft e x y ft- m y ft- fx3 ft-g x x ft- h x -ft k = o, xquatio ad
Curvam aliam fecundi generis. Ubi m vel f deefife
poteft vel pro lubitu affumi. Et per harum Curva¬
rum defcriptiones & interfediones dabuntur radices
aequationis conftruendse. Parabolam cubicam feme!
defcribere fufficit.
Si xquatio conftruenda per defectum duorum ter- A
minorum ultimorum h x & k reducatur ad feptem
dimenfiones, Curva altera delendo m, habebit pun-
fit um duplex in principio abfciffae, & inde facile de-
lcribi poteft ut fupra.
Si sequatio conftruenda per defefitum termino-
rum trium ultimorum gxxft-hxft-k reducatur ad
fex dimenfiones, Curva altera delendo f evadet
fedio Conica.
Et fti per defedum fex ultimorum terminorum
xquatio conftruenda reducatur ad tres dimenfiones,
incidetur in conftrudionem Wallifimam per Para¬
bolam cubicam & lineam redam.
Conftrui etiam poffunt aequationes per Hyperbo-
filmum Parabola cum dlametro. Ut fi conftruenda
fit hsec sequatio dimenfionum novem tormina penul-
tirno carens, a-pcxxfi-dx34'ex4'rfx ,-j-gx6-|-hx7

^kx8-l'lx9=o j affumatur sequatio ad Hyperbolif-


mum ilium xxy = i, & fcribendo y pro sequatio
conftruenda vertetur in hanc ay5 J|- c y y -j- d x yy -|- e y
+ fx y -j- m x x y•«-(-gh x-f k xx'-fi1 x^ — o,qux cur-
vam fecund! generis defignat cujus defcriptione
Problema folvetun Et quantitatum m ac g alter-
utra hie deeffe poteft, vel pro lubitu affumi.
Per Parabolam cubicam & Curvas tertii generis
conftruuntur etiam sequationes omnes dimenfionum
non plufquam duodecinq & per eandem Parabolam
& curvas quarti generis conftruuntur omnes dimen¬
fionum non plufquam quindecinq Et fic deinceps in
infinitum. Et curvae illse tertii quarti & fuperiorum
generum deferibi femper poffunt inveniendo eorum
pundta per Geometriam planam. lit fi conftruenda
fit sequatioxIS * d-axIOJpbx9'|-cx8Jpdx7+ex6-|-fx?
ft-gx4 fi- hx3 -p ixx -y kx -j- l = o 5 & deferipta
habeatur Parabola Cubica; fit sequatio ad Pa¬
rabolam illarn cubicam x3 = & fcribendo y
pro x2 sequatio conftruenda vertetur in hanc
j4 -j-axy3 -J-cxxyy -^fxxy 4~ixx = o 5 quae eft
rfb dx gx -|^k x
h +1
sequatio ad Curvam tertii generis cujus defcriptione
Problema folvetur. Deferibi autem poteft haec Curva
inveniendo ejus punfta per Geometriam plananqprop-
terea quod indeterminata quantitas x non nifi ad
duas dimenfiones afeendit.
fa
(-n/varum. Tab:I.
/
Cu/nm/rwrv Tab. H.
\

IP

.
Cjjrvwrwnv Tab. IE.
/
J
)

>•

•/

/ I
( urvnrum Tab-. 14.
TRACTATUS
D E

Quadratura Cur vanun,


[Itf*]

Q Uantitates Mathematicas non ut ex partibus


quam minimis conftantes, fed ut motu conti-
nuo defcriptas hie confidero. Lines deferi-
buntur ac deferibendo generantur non per appofi-
tionem partium fed per motum continuum pundto-
rum, fuperficies per motum linearum, folida per
motum fuperficierum, anguli per rotationem late-
rum, tempora per fluxum continuum, & fic in
teris. Hs Genefes in rerum natura locutn vere ha-
bent & in motu corporum quotidie cernuntur. Et
ad hunemodum Veteres ducendo reddas mobiles in
longitudinem re&arum immobilium genefin docue-
runt redtangulorum,
Confiderando igitur quod quantitates squalibus
temporibus crefcentes & crefcendo genitae, pro velo-
citate majori vel minori qua crefcunt ac generantur,
evadunt majores vel minores; methodum qusrebam
deter-
!

1x66-] : _ .

determinandi quantitates ex velocitalibus rnotuum


vel incrementorum quibus generantur ; & has mo
tuum vel incrementorum velocitates nominando Flu¬
xiones & quantitates genitas nominando Fluentes, in-
cidi paulatim Amis 1665 & 1666 in MethodumFlu-
xionum qua hie ufus fum in Quadratura Curvarum.
■ Fluxiones funt quam proxime ut Fluentium aug-
menta sequalibus temporis particulis quam minimis
gen'ita, & ut accurate loquar, funt in prima ratione
dugmentorum nafeentmm; exponi autem poffunt per
lineas quafeunq; quae funt ipfis proportion?;les. Ut
Fig, t fi areae ABC., ABDG Ordinatis BC . B D fuper
bah A B uniform! cum motu progredientibus deferi-
bantur, harum arearum fli xiones erunt inter fe ut
Ordinates defenbentes BC A BD5 & per Ordinatas-
alias exponi poffunt, propterea quod Ordinatae ilia?
funt ut arearum aug rienta nalcentia. Progre-
diatur Ordinata BC de loco fuo BC in locum
quemvis novum b c. Compleatur parallelogram-
mum BC E b, ac ducatur reda VTH quse Cur-
vam tangat in C ipfifq; be & BA produdis occur-
/rat in T & V : & Abfciffs A Ordinatae B C5 &
Lineoe Curvae A C c augmenta modo genita erunt
Bb^ Ec & Cc; & in horurii augmentortim nafcen-
tium ratione prima funt latera trianguli CE fpdeoq;
fluxiones ipfarum AB5 BC & AC funt ut trianguli
illius CET latera CE5 ET &CT & per eadem
latera exponi poffunt, vel quod perinde eft per la¬
tera trianguli coiiftmilis V B C.
Eodem recidit fi fuinantur fluxiones in ultima
'.ratione par tium evanefeentium. Agatuf reda Cc
& _producat.ur eadem ad K, Redeat Ordinata be
in
C167 ]
in locum fuum priorem B C, & coeuntibus ptm£tis
C & c, reda C K coincidet cum tangente C H, &
triangulum evanefcens CEc in ultima fua forma
evadet fimile triangulo GET., & ejus latera evanef-
centia CE, Ec & Cc erunt ultimo inter feut funt
trianguli alterius GET latera CE, ET&CT, &
propterea in hac ratione funt fluxiones linearum A B?
BC & AC. Si punda C & c parvo quovis inter-
vallo ab invicem diftant reda C K parvo interval!© a
tangente CHdiftabit. lit reda CK cum tangente
C H coincidat Sc ratiories ultimo linearum C E, E c &
Cc inveniantuiq debent punda C Sc c coire & om-
nino coincidere. Errores quam minimi in rebus-,
mathematicis non funt contemnendL
Simili argumento fi circulus centre B radio BC
deferiptus in longitudinem Abfciffae AB ad angulos
rectos uniform! cum motu ducatur, fluxio folidi ge~
niti ABC erit ut circulus illegenerans? & fluxio fu-
perficiei ejus erit ut perimeter Circuli illius &
fluxio linege curvse A C conjundtim. Nam quo tem¬
pore folidum ABC generator ducendo circulum
ilium in longitudinem AbfcifSe A B, eodem fuper-
ficies ejus generator ducendo perimetrum circuli il¬
lius in longitudinem Curvse A Cs
,
Rjeda TB circa plum datum T revolvensjecet aliam Fig 2 0
pfitione datum re dam AB: quaritur froprtio fluxio-
mm redarum illarum AB Id T B. Progrediatiir
reda P B de loco fuo P B in locum novum P b* In
P b capiatur P C ipfi P B sequalis1 & ad AB ducatur
PD fic, ut angulus bPD sequalis fit angulo bBC ;
& ob fimilitudinem triangulorum bBC, bPD erit
augmentum Bb ad augmentum Cb ut Pb ad Db,
Redeat
1*58 3
Redeat jaili P b in locum fuum prioreni P B ut aug-
menta ilia evanefcant, & evanefcentium ratio ulti¬
ma, id eft ratio ultima Pb ad Db, ea erit quae eft
PB ad DB, exiftente angulo PDB redo, & prop-
tereain hac ratione eft fluxio ipfius A B ad fluxionem
ipfius P B.
Recta PB circa datum Polum P revolvens fecet
■ alias duos fo/itione datas rectos y4 B ly yl E in B
E : qudcntur frofortio fiuxionum reelarum ittarum
ElB .1? AE. Progrediatur reda revolvens PB de
loco fuo P B in locum novum P b redas A B, A E in
pundis b & e fecantem, & redse A E parallela B G
ducatur ipfi Pb occurrens in C, & erit Bb ad BG ut
A b ad A e, & B C ad E e ut P B ad P E, & conjundis
rationibus Bb ad Ee ut AbxPB ad AexPE.
Redeat jam linea P b in locum fuum priorem P B, &
augmentum evanefeens Bb erit ad augmentum eva-
nefeens Ee ut ABkPB ad AExPE, ideoq; in
hac ratione ell fluxio reda: AB ad fluxionem recta'
A E._
Hinc fi recta revolvens P B lineas quafvis Curvas
pofitione datas fecet in pundis B & E, & recta’ jam
mobiles AB,AE Curvas illas tangant in Sedionum
pundis B & E: erit fluxio Curva quam reda, A B
'tangit ad fluxionem Curvae quam reda A E tangit
ut A BxP B ad A E/P E. Id quod etiam eveniet
fi reda P B Curvam aliquam pofitione datam perpe-
tuo tangat in pundo mobili P.
Fluat quantitas x unifermiter l? invenienda fit fluxio
qumtitatis xn. Quo tempore quantitas x fluendo
evadit xj-o, quantitas xn evadet x-j-o|n, id eft
per anethodum ferierum infinitarum, xn-j noxlw
[Itfp]
'-j-«|?ooxn‘2-|-if5V. Et augmenta o & noxa'H "±£oox®'2
-\-lfjc. funt ad invicem ut i & nxn'I-|--2£foxn‘2-j- yc.
Evanefcant jam augmenta ilia, & eorum ratio
ultima erit i ad nx11'1 : ideoq; fluxio quantitatis
x eft ad fluxionem quantitatis xn ut i adnx”'1.
Similibus argumentis per methodum rationum
primarum & ultimarum colligi poffunt fluxiones li-
nearum feu redtarum feu curvarum in cafibus qui-
bufcunque, ut & fluxiones fuperficierum, angulo-
rum & aliarum quantitatum. In finitis autem quan-
titatibus Analyfin lie inftituere, & finitarum nalcen-
tium vel evanefeentium rationes primas vel ultimas
inveftigare, confonum eft Geometric Veterum: &
volui oftendere quod in Methodo Fluxionum non
opus fit figuras infinite parvas in Geometriam intro-
ducere. Peragi tamen poteft Analyfis in figuris qui-
bufeunq; feu finitis feu infinite parvis qua figuris
evanefeentibus finguntur fimiles, ut & in figuris qua'
pro infinite parvis haberi folent, modo caute pro-
cedas.
Ex Fluxionibus invenire Fluentes Problema dif-
ficilius eft, & folutionis primus gradus aequipollet
Quadrature Curvarum : de qua fequentia olim
feripfi.

D E
TRACTATUS
D E

Quadratura Curvarum.
Q Uantitates indeterminatas ut motu perpetuo
. creicentes vel decrefcentes, id eft ut fluen-
tes vel defluentes in fequentibus confidero,deftgnoq;
literis z5 y, x? v? & earum fiuxiones feu celeritates
9 * * «

erefcendi noto iifdem literis pun&atis z, y, v.


Sunt & harum fluxionum fiuxiones feu mutationes
magis aut minus celeres quas. ipfarum z, y, x5 v
fiuxiones fecundas nominare licet & fic dignare
*-• I? •• <9%x

z5 y, x? v, & harum fiuxiones primas feu ipfarum


»
9
ft •
«• »
*
. ft * ♦
*

z5 y7 x, v fiuxiones tertias fic z, y5 x5 v, & quartas fic


*•••••••
o,® !5 <1 ft SO

z5 y, x} v. Et quemadmodum z5 y, x, v funt flu-


xiones quantitatum z5 yr v5 & hoe funt fiuxiones

quantitatum z, y5 x, v & hoe funt fiuxiones quantita¬


tum primarum z, y, x5 v : fic hoe quantitates confide-
rari poffunt ut fiuxiones aliarum quas fic defignabo,
[ I7I ]
Si Si if fj

z, y, x, v, & hse utfluxiones aliarum z,y5 x, v, &


hoc ut nuxiones aliarum z*> y5 x., v. Dengnant lgitur
j «• «®
f * • «• * # •* ®«i;

z5 z, z, z, z, z} z7 z rtor. feriem quantitatum quarum


quoelibet pofterior eft fluxio prsecedentis & quaelibet
prior eft fluens quantitas fluxionem habens fubfe-
r 1 1 f.J-.-r-XX, CS

quentem. Similis eft feries //az—zz? //az—zz?


f ~ 1 <-• 1 -wu. f - ■ - r, -nn'#-w.i.*.-*a=J --,-iS 8 @ —■—^»«=a

:az—zz , f/az—zz , V\az—zz, ^az—zz, ut &


_ az-|-z2 az-f-z2 az-pz2 az-j-z2 az-j-z2
a—z a- a- •z a-
az-f-z2
. Et notandum eft quod quantitas quaelibet

prior in his feriebus eft ut area figurae curviliniae


cujus ordinatim applicata re&angula eft quantitas

pofterior & abfcifla eft z : uti //az—zz area curvae

cujus ordinata eft /az—zz & abfcifla z. Quo au«*


tem fpedant haec omnia patebit in Propofitionibus
quae fequuntur.

Zz a PROP,
[ r72 ]
PROP. I. PROB. I.

2)at a <equatione quotcunq; fluentes qmntit-ates invol- -


vente^ invenire fluxiones.

Solatia.

Multiplicetur omnis sequationis terminus per in-


dicem dignitatis quantitatis cujufq; fluentis quam
involvit, & in fingulis multiplicationibus mutetur
dignitatis latus in fluxionem fuam, & aggrega-
tum faftorum omnium fub propriis lignis erit
equatio nova.

Explicatio.
Sunto a, b, c9 d l9V\ quantitates determinate &
immutabiles, 8c proponatur equatio quevis quan¬
titates fluentes z, y5 x 1Sc. involvens, uti x3 — xyy
-j-aaz —b? == o. Multiplicentur termini primoper
indices dignitatum x, 8c in fingulis multiplication^
bus pro dignitatis latere^ feu x unius dimenfionis,
• • •
fcribatur x?8c fumma fadorum erit 3 x x2—x y y.Idem
«

fiat in y 8c prodibit—axy y. Idem fiat in z 8c pro-


©
dibit a a z. Ponatur fumma fadtorum equalis ni-
8 » ©

hilo, Sc habebitur equatio 3 x x2—xyy — 2x y y


-]-aaz = o. Dico quodhac cecjuationedelinitur re-
latio fluxionum.
De-
[ i73l

Demonftratio.
Nam fit o quantitas admodum parva & fun to
* * •
oz, oy, ox, quantitatum z, y, x momenta id eft in-
crementa momentanea fynchrona. Et fi quantita¬
tes ftuentes jam funt z, y & x, hae poft momentum
» x> ®

temporis incrementis fuis oz, oy, ox aufite, evadent


• « •
z-|-oz, y-^oy, xq-ox, quae in aequatione prima pro
z, y & x fcriptae dant aequationem x3-j-^xxox
•• • *
3X00XX o3x3 —xyy —oxyy—2xoyy — ixooyy
a 9 • ® * •

—xooyy—xo3yy-j-aaz^-aaoz—b^ = o. Subducatur
aequatio prior, & refiduum divifum per o erit 3XX2
9 V » 9'"' 9 * ® ® e • A

•^3xxox~^x3oo — xyy—3xyy —^xoyy — xoyy —xooyy


4-aaz = b. Minuatur quantitas o in infinitum,& neg~
* »

leftis terminis evanefcentibus reftabit gxx2 —xyy


» •
—2xyy Taaz—°- Q- e. d,
_ «

Explicatio plenior.
Ad eundem modum fi asquatio effet X3—xyv
^E2S3ca=s=ssasK=s=3a=9 ^ v • %

-J-aa f^ax—yy—b^ — o, produceretur :jx2x-—xyy -


• *' • .
~2xyy+aa^ax—yy = o. Xlbi fi fiuxionern i/\ a?.—yy
tollere velis, pone Kax—yy = z, & erit ax—yy = za
&
[i ] 74
# ♦ ' ♦

& (.per hanc Fropofitionem ) ax—!2yy = ?/:i feu


ax -^yy ax—ayy
= z, hoc eft ^ax—-jry • E f*

ax—yy
. * • ,, a3x—iaayy
inde g x2x—-xyy—2xyy -p —.~=o
2 /ax—-yy
Et per operationem repetitam pergitur ad fiuxio-
mes fecundas, tertias & fequentes. Sit sequatio
zy3—Z4-|-a4 = o, & fiet per operationem primam
-* • t « * *

-zy^Vim2—A-zz?"°-> per fecundani zy3-j-6zyy2


®« • «« *
+3zyy2+6zy2y—4ZZ3“I° , per tertiam
- c®# 9 *S •» *** **"*>

zy1 v 9zyy2 + 9*yy*-h i8w-V3zyy2-l- l8zyyy


8 9 9 *19 ©

6zy3—qzz3—3 6zzz2— aqz3z=o.


*

tlbi vero fic pergitur ad fluxiones fecundas, ter¬


tias & feqtientes, convenit quantitatem aliquam ut
uniformiter fiuentem conliderar.eT& pro ejus iluxione
prima unitatem teribere, pro fecunda vero & fe-
quentibus nihil. Sit aequatio zy3 — z4 -p a4 = o, ut
iupra; Sc fluat Z uniformiter, fitq; ejus fluxio unitas,
8 c fiet, per operationem, primam y^-^syy2—4Z3 = o,
■ * «« «

;.per fecundam 6yy2 -ji 3zyy2 ~^6zy2y — iaz2 = o,


.per tertiam 9yf+ i Bpy+JzyyH’ iS^yy-j-^zyg
-•*-—aqz = o.
ii7$ ]
V

In hujus autem generis aequationibus concipien-


dum eft quod ftuxiones in fingulis terminis fint ejul-
® *

deni ordinis, id eft vel -omnes primi ordinis y, z,


•• » •• 9
vel omnes fecundi y, y29 yz? z2, vel omnes tertii
••• »• • • • « •• •
y, yy, yz, y3, y2z, yz2 Z3 &c. Et ubi res aliter fe
habet complendus eft ordo per fubintelle&as ftuxio¬
nes quantitatis uniformiter fluentis, Sic aequatio
« «»

noviffima complendo ordinem tertium fit 2

Jf 18zy2y-|-3Zyy2-'r 18zyyy-j-,6zy3—aqzz? = o.

PROP. II. PROB.IL

Invmire Curvets qua qmdrari poffunt.

Sit ABC figura invenienda, BC Ordinatim ap- Erg. 4. '


plicata reftangula, & AB abfeifla, Producatur
CB ad E ut fit BE— 1 ? & compleatur parallelo-
grammum ABED: & arearum ABC, ABED
ftuxiones erunt ut BC &BE, Aftumatur igitur
aequatio quaevis qua relatio arearum definiaturr &
inde dabitur relatio ordinatarum BC &BE per
Prop. I. Q E, L

Hujus rei . exempla habentur in Propofitionibus


duabus fequentibus.

\
PR OR
C176]

PROP. III. THEOR. I.

Si pro abfcifla A B ,8i area AE feu ABxi pro-


milcuefcribaturz5& fipro e -Egz2fl-|-hz3«-j-’&cs
fcribatur R: fit autem area Curvae z®Rh erit.
ordinatim applicata BC —

&c. in z 6-1 R K~l.

Demonjlratio.

Nam fi fit z8R,i=V, erit per Prop. 1, 9zz6'!Ra


® • ®
^-^z8RRVI = v. Pro R* in primo aequationis ter-
mino & z9 in fecundo fcribe RRVI & zz9'1, & fiet
« * •

§zR-j-*zR in z8'*R\r = v. Erat autem R=e-|-fz»


~\-gz2«-\-hz^ &c. & inde per Prop. 1. fit R =j
® • ®

^fzz^1 Jp2„gzz2M'I-|-’3whzz3«‘i>'|- &c. quibus fubftitu-


tis & fcripta BE feu 1 pro z7 fiet
in *M RVl = v=BC.
Q. E. D.

PROP.
[ 3
"in

PROP. IV, THEOR, II.

Si Curvae abfciffa A B fit z, 8c fi pro e-j-> fz» -j-gz1*


8cc. fcribatur R, 8c pro k-}-lz»-}-mz2*4- &c. fcri-

batur S ; fit autem area Curvse z® R* : erit or-


dinatim applicata BC=,

&e | S jgW “^0 ®^S9®89^*»e*

4" 0 0 1 7H
-ta« c 1 z i f 1 z*" P» Slz3" *. I i^R^S***
±l„eraz2" il
i-2f«
ftnz3,ZL
1'2^S
§mz40-*
Demonftratur ad modum Propofitionis fuperioris.
\\
PROP. V. THEOR. III.

SiCurvae abfciffa AB fit z, & pro e-|-fz,'-j-gzI*


-’p hz3" -j- 8cc. Icribatur R : fit autem ordinatim ap¬
plicata z9lRVI in a -f-bz" +cz2» -[-dz3"-|- 8cc. 8c po-
natur ?a = r. r-f-*=s. s4-* = t. t4-* = v.8cc. erit area

2*R> i„;a AilMfA.. : •c-.fB-'SA . , >‘dr.fC^gB-vhA


r —f- 19e T——— ■
- T -TT_-Z"
" ' * 5“ r *4— 2j e
-z2" + —-
r —l.
3?e
■ Z3»
—s f r\ —t p —v L n

H- ~3 ~2g z*” -I- 8cc. Ubi A, B, C, D, 8cc.


r-H4,e
Aaa denotant
C17 8 3
denotant totas coefficientes datas terminorum fingu-
lorum in ferie cum fignis luis -\ •&—,nempe A primi
termini coefficientem jlE B fecundi coefficientem

fcfA C tertii coefficientem &


r —j- i, e r-+2,e
lie deinceps.

Demonjlratio.

Sunto juxta Propolitionem tertiam3

Curvarum Ordinatse & earundem ares,

i. «eA l| ■'AH fAz" tl gAz2" "1-3


\\}AH hAz3"&c. V1 Az9 R\

a ■ * ‘ '<R ;,eBz"+®1'»fBz2,'1_s;;
"r aw n~2a«o
|~"gBz3"&c. i
r z9-xT^>r >
Bz9+” R .

e c « e
+g+2»,eCz2''ji H'2"fCz3" &c. Cz9+2» RA.

•+8-h»,eDz3"&c.j Dz9'^ Ra.

Et (i fitmma ordinatarum ponatur aequalis ordi¬


nate a^kzM'C^d'dz3"-^ &c. in z9'1 RA'\ fumma
a rearum z9RA in A ^Bz» ^Cz2«4~Dz3», d- &c. equa-
lis erit area? Curve cujus ifta eft ordinata. iEquen-
tur igitur Ordinatarum termini correfpondentes, &
fiet a=eeA, b = +9„fAeB, c= +2L§^ fB

'4- FF*T,e C &c. & inde $; = A. ^4—— j Bo


• 1 5 _______ ^ 0-h«3e
Cs=== i§"l~1 rl A/jji B z’ j * » »
--—7 f^2h e~~-iy= Cu Et lie deinceps m infi¬
nitum
[i?9]
nitum. Pone jam £ = r. r-|-A = s. s-j-A = t &c. &
in area z9RAx A^-Bzw'jr-Cz2w-j-Dz3B &c» fcribe ip-
forum A, B, G, &c. valores inventos & prodibit
feries propoiita. Q. E. D.
Et notandmn eft quod Ordinata omnis duobus
modis iu feriem refolvitur. Nam index» vel affir-
mativus eft poteft vel negativus. Proponatur Ordi¬
nata ' —1 - . Hac vel fxc fcribi poteft
z~»x3k—Izzxk—-lzz^-mz^Tq vel lie zx -l-j-^kz'*
xm-lz_1'l-kz_ij -i. In cafu prioreeft a~ gk.b = o.
c== —k e=k. f=o. g=-l. h—m. *=~i. »—i.
s-i=-b 9=-i=r. s=-i. t=_i. v=o. In
pofteriore eft a=— 1. b=o. c=3k. e—m. f=—l.
g=o, h=i. A=-j. «=—i. e—i = i. »=2. r=—2.
s=—i;. t==—x. v— Tentandus eft cal’us uter-
que. _ Et fi ferierum alterutra ob terminos tandem
deficientes abrumpitur ac terminatur, habebitur area
Curva? in terminis finitis. Sic in exempli hujus
priore cafu feribendo in ferie valores ipforum a, b,
e, e, f, g, h, a,
sy r, s, t, v, termini omnes poll pri-
mum evanefeunt in infinitum & area Curvae prodit
ayk~~d-™’_ p;t }ia;C area ob lignum negativum
adjacet abfeifise ultra ordinatam produdtse. Nam
area omnis affirmativa adjacet tain abfcilTae quam
ordinata?, negativa vero cadit ad contrarias par¬
tes ordinata & adjacet abfeilfe produtlse, manente
fcilicet figno Ordinatae. Hoc modo. feries alter¬
utra & nonnunquam utraque femper terminatin'
& finita evadit fi Curva geometrice quadrari po¬
teft. At fi Curva talem quadraturam non admit-
tit, feries utraq; continuabitur in infinitum. & ea-
A aa 2 rum
[ i8o ]
rum altera converget & aream dabit approximando,
praeterquain ubi r (propter aream inffoitam) vel
nihil eft vel numerus integer & negativus, vel ubi i-
aequalis eft unitati. Si * minor eft unitate, conver-
get feries in qua index „ affirmativus eft : fin l unita
te major eft, converget feries altera. In uno cafu
area adjacet abfciffe ad ufq; ordinatam duda?, in
altero adjacet abfciffae ultra ordinatam produdae.
Nota infuper quod fi Ordinata contentum eft fub
fadore rationali Q & fadore furdo irreducibili R*,
& fadoris furdi latus R non dividit fadorem ratio-
nalem Q; erit a-i =tt & R*-1 = R» Sin fadoris fur-
di latus R dividit fadorem rationalem femel, erit
*—1 = ‘jr-y i & R*-1 : fi dividit bis, erit
1=7& RV1 ==R*'\~2: fi ter, erit i=rr-|p^
& R/-1—R^' 3: 8c fic deinceps.
Si Ordinata eft fradio rationalis irreducibilis cum
Denominator ex duobus vel pluribus terminis com*-
pofito : refolvendus eft denominator in divifores
fuos omnes primos. Et fi divifor fit aliquis cui
nullus alius eft aequalis, Curva quadrari nequit:
Sin duo vel plures fint divifores aequales, rejicien-
dus eft eorumunus, 8c fi adhuc alii duo vel plures
fint fibi mutuo aequales 8c prioribus inaequales, re-
jiciendus eft etiam eorum unus, 8c fie in aliis omnir-
bus aequalibus fi adhuc plures fint : deinde divifor
qui relinquitur vel contentum fub diviforibus omni¬
bus qui relinquuntur, fi plures funt, ponendum eft
pro R, 8c ejus quadrati reciprocum R'2 pro R^,prae-
terquam ubi contentum illud eft quadratum vel cu-
bus vel quadrate quadratum,8cc. quo eafu ejus latus
ponem
[i8i]
ponendum eft pro R & poteftatis index 2 vel 5 vel 4
negative fumptus pro a. & Ordinata ad denomimu-
torem Rz vel R3 vel R4 vel R? &c. reducenda.
Ut ft ordinata fit —jfel ZJ~8z3— ; quoniam
Z5-J-Z4—5Z3—z2-|-8z—4 7 1
hxc
fraftio irreducibilis eft & denominatoris divifores
funt pares, nempe z—1, z—1, z—1 & z^a,
z-\-2, rejicio magnitudinis utriufque diviforem
unum & reliquorum z—1, z—1 , z\-2 conten-
turn z3-—’^z-j—2 pono pro R & ejus quadrat! re-
ciprocum qp feu R—2 pro R*"1. Dein Ordina¬
ta m ad denominatorem R2 feu R1-* rediico, & fit
z6— 9z4'|-8z3
, id eft Z3 X 8 - 9 z4-z3 x a — 3 z 4- z3f2
z3 —^zipoj quad.
Et inde eft a —8. b=— 9. c — o. d 1, &c.
e=a. f=-3, g=o. h=i. k~i = ~7. k= _n
1. 9-1 = 5. s = 4 = r. s= 3. t = a. v=r. Et his
in ferie feriptis prodit area terminis om-
nibus in tota ferie poft primum evanefeentibus
Si deniq; Ordinata eft fradio irreducibilis & ejus
denominator contentum eft fub fadore rationali Q.
& fadore furdo irreducibili R’, inveniendi funt la-
teris R divifores omnes primi, & rejiciendus eft di-
vifor unus magnitudinis cujufq; & per divifores
qui reftant, fiqui fint, multiplicandus eft fador
rationalis Q.: & ft fadum asquale eft lateri R vel
later is illius poteftati alicui cujus indexed: numerus
integer, efto index ille m, & erit *,~i = m, &
RV. = R"T"m» m fi Ordinata fit
<q<r-~XX pc ub. qj-q<qx—.qxx—x 5
quoniam
[ i823
quoniam fa&oris furdi latus R feu q^ -|-qqx—qxx—x^
divifores habet q+x} q-\-x, q—xqui duarumfunt
magnitudinunq rejicio diviforem unum magnitudi-
nis utriufq; & per diviforem q-)~x qui relinquitur
multiplico faftorem rationalem qq—xx. Et quo¬
niam fafihim q^-^qqx—qxx—x^ aequale eft la-
teri R^pono m=i. & inde, cum tt fit fit a—i =
Ordinatam igitur reduco ad denominatorem R:i
& fit Z° x 3qM- aq5xi 8q4xx l-8q3x3~7qqx4~,6qxf
xq^pqqx—qxx—x3h*.Unde efta- 3q6.b = aq*&cB
e~q3. f — qq &c. 0—1=0. e=i=M. A = —]• r=i.
s = 5. t-1. v = o. Et his in ferie fcriptis prodit
3 3
3qqx-|-3X3
area —__m. terminis omnibus in ferie tota
,v/cub. a3-|-aax—axx—-x3 >

poft tertium evanefcentibus.

PROP. VI. THEO.R. IV.

Si Curvse abfciffa A B fit z, & fcribantur R pro


eJ[-fz» Jpgz^^hz311--]- &c. & S pro k -j- lz» \-njz2»
-\-nz3B &c. fit autem ordinatim applicata z^'R^1 S'-1'1
in a-Wbz» -\~cz2» -\-dz3» &c. & fi terminorum, e, f,
g, h, &c. & k, 1, m, n. &c. reftangula fint.
,ek fk gk hk &c
el fl gl hi &c.
em fm gm hm &c.
en fn gn hn &c.

Et
[*%]
Et fi re&anguloriim illorum coefficients nuine-
rales lint refpeftive

»9 = r. = s. = t. t -]-a = v. &c,
r--^ = s. s-f> = t. = v. v-|-^ — w.&c.

S-|-|K = t. — v. v-\-^ = w. W-f-(*=X.&C.


y/ y// JW JUU m a Hi

t~j-#*=v. V~rj-/* = wv = x. = y. &c.

area Curvoe erit hxc


*“~t g k
-o AU—sfkA ln —-s -l-i, fk 73 *—t' f 1 \
ar, a ■ » a »b— s'elA »C-s'+i,el ^-t"emA
z'fiObf4 in •—_j- —-——— --—
rek * r-j-i, e k i-|-2, e k
__ —V h k A
_ *~Z -J-!, g kj^ _V' g 1

“-s-|-2, fk(^ *—£-|-i, f 1 -D —v"fm


n Al —s%j-2, e 1v<# C'-j-ije m —v'"e n

a- H~3> <? k
Z3" &.C

Ubi A denotat termini primi coeffieientem datapn


sL cum figno fuo -\-> vel —, B coeffieientem datam
fecundi, C coeffieientem datam tertii, & fie deinceps.
Terminorum vero, a, b, c, &c. k, 1, m, &c. unus
vel plures deeffe poffunt. Demonftratur Propofitio
ad modum prsecedentis, & quae ibi notantur hie ob-
tinent. Pergit autem feries talium Propofitionum in
infinitum, & Progreffio feriei manifefta eft.

PROP.
C184]

PROP. VII. THEOR. V.

Si pro e4-fzw~[rgz2M-* &c. fcribatur R ut fupra? &


in Curvae alicujus Ordinata RkA maneant
quantitates datae », A, e5 £, g, See. & pro <7 ac T fcri-
bantur fucceffive numeri quicunq; integri : Sc ft
detur area unius ex Curvis quae per Ordinatas in-
numeras ftc prodeuntes defignantur ft Ordinatae funt
duorum nominum in vinculo radicis, vel fi dentur
areae duarum ex Curvis fi Ordinatae funt trium no^
minum in vinculo radicis, vel areae trium ex Curvis
fi Ordinatae funt quatuor nominum in vinculo radi-
cis, Sc fic deinceps in infinitum : dico quod dabun-
tur areae curvarum omnium. Pro nominibus hie
habeo terminos omnes in vinculo radicis tarn de-
ficientes quam plenos quorum indices dignitatum
funt in progreffione arithmetica. Sic ordinata
\/a4—ax3 4"X4 ob terminos duos inter a4 Sc —ax3
deficlentes pro quinquinomio haberi debet. At
binomium eft Sc \/a4~Hx4—'It tanoniurm
cumprogreffio jam per majores differentias proce-
da£. Propofitio vero fic demonftratur.

C A S. L

Santo Curvarum duarum Ordinatae pz8'1 R*-1 &


qz6frI RA“E5 Sc areae pA Sc qB5 exiftente R quanti¬
tate trium nominum e~j-fz» gz2». Et cum per
Prop.
[■85]
Prop. III. fit z9R* area cmvx cuius Ordinata eft
eel0 fz" pz2* in z^R^.fubduc Ordinatas & areas
priores de area & Ordinata pofteriori, & manebit
9c gz2" in zVI RVI Ordinata nova Curvse,&
—ft ZH
z9p*_pA—qB ejufdem area* Pone ee-=p &
=’q & Ordinata evadet gz2® in z9 RA &
area zsRx—aeA—afB—»»fB. Divide utramq* per
#g-t,A*g» & aream prodeuntem die C, & affumpta
utcunq; r, erit r C area Curvse cujus Ordinata eft
rjre-Hn-'gvi; Et qua ratione ex areis pA & qB
aream rC Ordinata; rz9'^”'1 R*-'1 congruentem inve-
nimus, licebit ex areis qB & rC aream quartam
puta sD, ordinatae sz9 '3"'IR'l‘I congruentem invenire,
& fic deinceps in infinitum. Et par eft ratio pro-
greffionis ab areis B & A in partem contrariam
pergentis. Si terminorum 9, e aliquis de¬
ficit & feriem abrumpit, affumatur area pA in prin-
cipio progreffionis unius & area qB in principio al-
terius, & ex his duabus areis dabuntur ares omnes
in progreffione utraque. Et contra, ex aliis duabus
areis aflumptis fit regreffus per analyfin ad areas A
& B, adeo ut ex duabus datis cseterae omnes den-
tur. Q. E. O. Hie eft cafus Curvarum ubi ipfius z
index o augetur vel diminuitur perpetua additione vel
fubdudtione quantitatis». Cafus alter eft Curva¬
rum ubi index x augetur vel diminuitur unitatibus.

Bbb CAS,
[i86]

C A S. II.

Ordinate pz9'xRA & qz^^R*, quibus areae pA


& qB jam refpondeant, ft in Rfteu ejj-fz^gz2” du«
cantur ac deinde ad R viciffim applicentur, eva-
dunt pe -j- "h Pgz2?l x z^R^1 & qez11 -J- qfz2«
-Uqgz3” x z9-^^1. Et per Prop. III. eft az6R^
area Curvae cujus Ordinata eft sae ~j_9^ afz”qt9A)j agz2«
in z9-iRa'1 j & bz8+MRA area Curvas cujus ordinata
eft ^bez® Il9bfz2rt jlabgz3w in z9lRAI. Et harum qua-
1—Ail —

tuor arearum fumma eft pA-\-q@rj- az@RA-|- bz9 i *RA


& fumma refpondentium ordinatarum

+0 afzM
aae -rhn -|-2AM
jigZ2" 9 bgz3H in z^R*"1.
+pe -2A»
I"9 be -s bf
ft* ~n + 02
ft pf
'+pg
+ qe + qf

Si terminus primus tertius & quartus ponantur fe-


orfim sequales nihilo, per primum fiet eae-|-pe=o
feu -8a=p, per quartum - 8b - »b - = q, & per
tertium (eliminando p & q) “/=b. Unde fecundus
fit adeoq; fumma quatuor Ordinatarum eft
—7®e fumma totidem refpondentium
arearum eft az9RA -\-2|fz8-biR*_8aA—■2^~2r^*u>agB.
Divi-
C187 ]
Dividantur hae fummse per >-"aff~'jPl"ah^ & }j Quotum
pofterius dicatur D5 erit D area curvas cujus ordi-
nata eft Quotum prius z®+1hIRA'1. Et eadem ratione
ponendo omnes Ordinatae terminos praster primum
asquales nihilo poteft area Gurvae inveniri cujus Or-
dinata eft z8 lRVI. Dicatur area ifta C, & qua ra¬
tione ex areis A & B invents funt areas C ac D. ex
his areis C ac D inveniri poffunt alias duas E & F
ordinatis z^R*'2 & z°+w'IRv2 congruentes5 & fic de-
inceps in infinitum. Et per analyfin contrariam
regredi rlicet ab areis E&Fad areas CacD, &
inde ad areas A & B, aliafq; quas in progreffione fe-
quuntur. Igitur fi index x perpetua unitatum ad¬
ditione vel lubdudione augeatur vel minuatur, &
ex areis quae Ordinatis fic prodeuntibus refpondent
duas fimpliciffimas habentur ; dantur alias omnes in
infinitum. Q. E. O.

C A $. III.

Et per cafus hofce duos conjunctos^ fi tarn in¬


dex 8 perpetua additione vel fubduftione ipfius n
quam index \ perpetua additione vel fubdufitione
unitatis, utcunq; augeatur vel minuatur, dabuntur
areas fingulis prodeuntibus Ordinatis refpondeiiteso
Q.E.O.

Bbb1 CAS.
t
C *88 J
CAS. IV.

Et fimili augmento fi ordinata conftat ex qua-


tuor nominibus in vinculo radical! & dantur tres
arearunq vel fi conftat ex quinq; nominibus &
dantur quatuor arearum, & fic deinceps : dabun-
tur areae omnes quae addendo vel fubducendo nume-
rum * indici $ vel unitatem indici x generari poflunt.
Et par eft ratio Curvaruin ubi ordinatae ex binomiis
conflantur, & area una earum quae non funt geome-
trice quadrabiles datur. Q. E. O.

PROP. VIII. THEOR, VL

Si pro e^-fzw4'gz2"~|~’&c. & k + \zn -j-mz2^-|-&:c,


fcribantur R & S ut fupra5& in Curvae alicujus Or¬
dinata z9'^ R*±7 maneant quantitates datae ^
^ ^ /q e, f, g, k, 1, m? &c. & pro & y) fcri¬
bantur fucceflive numeri quicunq; integri : & fi
dentur areae duarum ex curvis quae per ordinatas
fic prodeuntes defignantur fi quantitates R & S funt
binomia, vel fi dentur areae trium ex curvis fi R
& S conjunftim ex quinq; nominibus conftant, vel
areae quatuor ex curvis fi R & S conjundtim ex fex
nominibus conftant, & fic deinceps in infinitum :
dico quod dabuntur areae curvarum omnium.
Demonftratur ad modum Propofitionis fuperioris.

PROP.
[ iBp]

PROP. IX. THEOR. VII.

JEquantur Curvarum arete inter fe quarum Or-


dinatae font reciproce ut fluxiones Abfciffarum.
Nam contenta fob Ordinatis & fluxionibus Ab¬
fciffarum erunt aequalia, & fluxiones arearum font
ut ha?c contenta.

COROL. I.
Si affumatur relatio quaevis inter Abfciffas dua-
rum Curvarum, & inde per Prop. i. quteratur
relatio fluxionum Abfciffarum, & ponantur Ordi¬
nate reciproce proportionales fluxionibus, inveniri
poffunt innumerte Curvse quarum arete fibi mutua
sequales erunt.

COROL. II.

Sic enim Curva omnis cujus htec eft Ordinata


ze-i in e fz» gz2» &c.|* affumendo quantitatem
quamvis pro » & ponendo j=s & zs = x, migrat in
aliam fibi sequalem cujus ordinata eft £xfir» in
e -\- f x" gx2" -j-r &c. jA-

CO
[ 19° 3
COROL. III.

Et Curva omnis cujus Ordinata eft z9'1 in


a bz» ~p cz2" -\- &c. x e-p-fz»-p gz2" &cj%affumen-
do quantitatem quamvis pro " & ponendo n=s &
Vx, migrat in aliam fibi cequalem cujus ordinata
eft in a-p bx'-ft- cx2t-p&c.xe-pfx'-pgx2'-p&c.f •

COROL. IV.

Et Curva omnis cujus Ordinata eft z®'1 in


a + bzM cz2» -j- &c. x e -|- fz» gz2« &c~j*
x k -j- lzM ~]-r mz2w Scc.J^ affiimendo quantitatem
quamvis pro ? & ponendo 1 = s & zs~x? migrat in
aliam fibi sequalem cujus ordinata eft jx-^ina-j-bx,
-j- cx2v-p & c • x ejf fx" _p gx2'-p &c.px k-pix'-J-mx^-p

COROL. V.

Et Curva omnis cujus Ordinata eft z9'1 in


pfz" -pgz2»4- &c* ponendo i= x migrat in

aliam fibi aequalem cujus ordinata eft x e -pfx'“

-Pgx 2» -p Sc? M eft xife * {l duofimt


nomina in vinculo radicis vel x g-p fx*-p exiB|
fi tria funt nomina ; & fic deinceps.
CO-
t,
[ l9l ]
CO ROL. VI,

Et Curva omnis cujus Ordinata eft zu in


e -j- f z" gz2” &c.j* x k lz8 -\- mz2“|- &c.[,“
ponendo i = x migrat in aliarn libi aequalem cu¬

jus ordinata eft —ppj x e -ft fx'fl gx"28 -|- dcc.j'1


X

xM-lx-8-^mx-^-i-&c.l“ id eft Iiy X


xl-j~kx"f* ft bina funt nomina in vinculis radicum,
vel xH-i+aft-bt* x g fx» - j- ex2“ft x 1-j-kx"/'2 ft tria
funt nomina in vinculo radicis prioris ac duo in
vinculo pofterioris: & fie in aliis. Et nota quod
area duae aequales in noviffimis hifce duobus Co-
rollariis jacent ad contrarias partes ordinata rum.
Si area in alterutra curva adjacet abfciffe, area
huic aequalis in altera curva adjacet abfcilfse pra-
ducta.', '

CO ROL. VII.

Si relatio inter Curvse alicujus Ordinatam y &


Abfciffam z definiatur per sequationem quamvis
feftam hujus formas,v“in e-I- fvz^-S-qv^z20'1-!-
+ &c. - #ta k?ir*VV£ + fayL
figure affumendo 8=^, x=jz^x=^, migrat
ia a ham nbi aequalem cujus Abfciffa x5 ex data
Ordinata
C192 ]
Ordinata v , determinatur per aequationem non§
affeftam x e-j- fv*q- gv2M -\- hv3n &c.iA x k -\- lv#

-p mv2w-|- &c.f* = x.

COROL. VIII.

Si relatio inter Curvx alicujus Ordinatarn y &


Abfciffam z definitur per aequationem quamvis
affeftam hujus formas, ya in e^-’fywzcfS--j“gy2Mz2cP -f-Scc.
. = z£ in k ly»zd' 4^my2«z2^--&c -$~z? in p qy V
ry2rtz2^-|-&c. haec figura affumendo — gzs7
^-7=^ & ^ migrat in aliam iibi aequalem
cujus Abfciffa x ex data Ordinata v determinatur
per aequationem minus affeftam va in e fvw-j-gv2»
&c. = in k iv« mv2W dj- &c sV in
p-pqv«^- rv2” &c.

COROL. IX,

Curva omnis cujus Ordinata eft t/1 jn


fe ;j;p f I{4„ gz2" -H &c- x e -\-1 z" -f- gz^&c.^'1 x

|a -j- b|ezf -ftfzr+» -|- gz’"!'”~j-&c.|Tj ? ft fits = &

affumantur x = ez' -j-fzp+" -j-gz’'+2°•,


migrat in aliam fibi squalem cujus ordi¬
nata eft x* x a-j-bx'l “• Et nota quod ordinata prior
in
ll9$l
In hoc Corollario evadit fimplicior ponendo x — t,
vel ponendo x = i & efficiendo ut radix dignitatis
extrahi poffit cujus index eft », vel etiam ponendo
=i = ut alios cafus praete-
ream.

CO ILO L. X.

Pro ez' -J-r gzTP** &c.


-j-2» g2^ 2"'1 "1“ &c- k -J- lz» ~j- mz2» -j- &c. & ilz*'1
‘4" -nnz2"'I4'&c. fcribantur R, r, S & s refpe£tive, &
Curva omnis cujus ordinata eft xSr 1 Rs in R*-1 S**-1
x aSv -\- bRx|, ft fite=”“ = " = •, z = a, *-* = .
& RtS? = x, migrat in aliam fibi aequalem cujus or¬
dinata eft x3- x a-j-bx^j" Et nota quod Ordinata
prior evadit fimplicior, ponendo unitates pro r, v%
& » vel tfi & faciendo ut radix dignitatis extrahi
poffit cujus index eft *>, vel ponendo * _= —i vel
o.

PROP. X. PROB. III.

Invenire figuras fimpliciffimas cum quibus Curva


quoevis geometrice compari poteft, cujus ordinatim
applicata y per aequationem non affe&am ex data ab-
fcifla z determinatur*

Ccc CAS,
[ m1
ft C A S. I.

Sit Ordinata az8'1, & area erit jaz8, ut ex Prop.V.


ponendob=o=c=d=f~g=h & e~ i, facilecol-
ligitur.

CAS. II.

Sit Ordinata az8'1 x e -j- fz" j- gz2jK"1 ■-]- &c- & ft


curva cum figuris reftilineis geometrice comparari
poteft, quadrabitur per Prop. V. ponendo b = o = c
■ = d. Sin minus convertetur in aliam eurvam fibi
squalem cujus Ordinata eft ~x~ x e-|-fx-*j-gxl&c.
gen Carol, a. Prop. IX. Deinde fi de dignitatum
indicibus i per Prop. VII. rejiciantur uni¬
te tes donee dignitates ills fiant quam minima:, de-
venietur ad figuras fimpliciffimas qua; hac rations
colligi poffunt. Dein harurn unaquaeq; per Corol.5.
Prop. IX. dat aliam quae nonnunquam llmplicior
eft. Et ex his per Prop. III. & Corol. 9 & 10,
Prop* IX. inter fe collatis, figurse adhuc fimpliciores
quandoq- prodeunt, Deniq; ex figuris fimplicif-
ftmis affumptis- fa£to regreffu computabitur area
qusfita.

CAS.
[ IPS ]
C A S. III.

Sit Ordinata z9'1 x a bz* cz 2» -j-- &c.


x e-jp fz« 4"' gz2M &c-|^1 •> & haec figura fi quadrari
poteft, quadrabitur per Prop, V. Sin minus, di~
ftinguenda eft ordinata in partes z9-1 x axe^fz®
~!r gz2M -J-* Scc-p'1, z9'1 x bzw x e fz« \-g
See. & per Caf. a. invenienda funt figura fimpli-
ciffima cum quibus figura partibus illis refpon-
dentes comparari poflunt. Nam area figurarum
partibus illis refpondentium fub fignis fuis 4* & —
conjun&a component aream totam quafitam.

CAS. IV.
C ) V i

Sit Ordinata z9'1 x a b z« -fi-cz2>| ~fi Sec, x


-fi

e-J-’fz” gz2» -fi &c.H x k -fi lzw ^mz^-fi&c.J^1:


& fi Curva quadrari poreft,quadrabitur per Prop. VI
Sin minus, convertetur in fimpliciorem per Coral 4.
Prop. IX. ac deinde comparabitur cum figuris fim-
pliciffimis per Prop. VIII. & Coral 6, 9 & 10,
Propa IX, ut fit in Cafu a & 3.

• C A S. V, -

Si Ordinata ex variis partibus conftat, partes


lingula pro ordinatis curvarum totidem liabenda
funt5& curva ilia quotquot quadrari poffunt,figilk-
Ccc a ‘ tim
c*9<n
tim quadrandse funt, earumq; ordinatae de ordinata
tota demendae. Dein Curva quam ordinatae pars
refidua defignat feorfim ( ut in Cafu a, 3 & 4,)
cumfiguris fimpliciffimis comparanda eft cum qui-
bus comparari poteft. Et fumma arearum omnium
pro area Curra propofitse habenda eft.

CORQL. r.
Hinc etiam Curva .omnis' cujus Ordinata eft ra¬
dix quadratica affefta cequationis fuoe, cum figuris
fimpliciffimis feu re&ilineis feu curvilineis com-
pari poteft. Nam radix ilia ex duabus partibus
femper conftat qux feorfim fpe&atae non funt aequa-
num radices affefifoe. Proponatur sequatio aayy
4- zzyy — 2a?y ~^2z3y — z% & extradta radix erit:
_ a* %lJr av^-^az3—z4 cujus pars rationalis
Ad ZZ

aq-j-z* „ . aVa4 -j- aaz3’ —


- aa-qrg' &■ pars irrationahs -;a~fy;-~- tunt
ordinatae curvarum quae per hanc Propofitionem
vel quadrari poflunt vel cum figuris fimpliciffimis
comparari cum quibus collationem geometricam ad-
mittunt.

’CORQL.
L
II.

Et curva omnis cujus Ordinata per aequationem


quamvis affedtam definitur quae per Corol. 7. Prop.
IX. in aequationem non affectam migrat, vel qua-
dratur
C *97 ]
drattir per hanc Propofitionem fi quadrari poteft vel
comparatur cum figuris fimplicifllmis cum quibus
compari poteft. Et hac ratione Curva omnis quadra-
tur cujus aequatio eft trium terminorum. Nam aequa-
tio ilia ft affetta fit tranlmutatur in non affectum per
Corol.7. Prop.IX. ac deinde per Corol. a & 5. Prop.
IX. in fimplicffimam migrando, dat vel quadratu-
ram figurae fi quadrari poteft, vel curvam fimplicif-
fimam quacum comparatur.

COROL. III.

Et Curva omnis cujus Ordinata per cequationem


quamvis affectum definitur quae per Corol. 8. Prop.
IX. in aequationem quadraticam affe&am migrat;
vel quadratur per hanc Propofitionem & hujus Co¬
rol. 1. fi quadrari poteft, vel comparatur cum figu¬
ris fimpliciffimis cum quibus collationem geombtri-
ram admittit.

SCHOLIUM.
Ubi quadrandae funt figurae; ad Regulas hafce
generates femper recurrere nimis moleftum effet:
prseftat Figuras quae fimpliciores funt & magis ufui
effe poffunt femel quadrare & quadratures in Ta-
bulam referre, deinde Tabulam confulere quoties
ejufmodi Curvam aliquam quadrare oportet. Hu¬
jus autem generis funt Tabulae duse fequentes, in
quibus z denotat Abfciffam, y Ordinatam rebtan-
gulam
[i98]
ulam & t Aream Curvse quadrands, & d, e, f, g,

CTQ CfQ
. h," funt quantitates datas cum fignis fuis-|- &—.

TABULA
Curvarumfimpliciorum qua quadrari pojfrnt.

Curvarum forms. Curvarum ares.

Forma prima.

dzn~l = v. ~Z" = t.

Forma fecunda.

dz^1 dzw j^—d


’ee-|-2efzjj-|-ffz2 Y1 »ee |-|jefzjj — VCl = t.

Forma tertia.

1* dzJVe+fz«==y. fjfR3 = t5 exiftente R=Ye-J-fz*


a. dz?J Ve= y. ”^1!^ dR3 — t
3. dZ?;v'e+E=y. ■‘—gy'iydR» = t.
3n
4. dzfj Ve-i-fz" = y. 945nf+ dR’ = t.
Forma quarta,

dzrl 2d
1» 7f R — t.
v/e-’rfztt
dz2rI
<v/e-|-fzjj
y« =^r»dR=t.

dz3"1
[ 199 ]
16ee—<8 efz #-1- 6ffz2»
dz3"'1
3 = y> ——cIR = t.
-—96e3-|-48eefzM“-3i5effz2l)-]-3of3 zjH
dz4"'1
Y' io5»4 cl R. ~ t .
v'c- r tz,i

TABULA
Curvarum Jimpliciornm (pace cum Ettipft &
Hyperbola compart pojfunt.

Sit jam aGD vei PGD vei GDS Seftio


Conica cujus area ad Quadraturam Curvae pro- Fig. 5
polite reqmiritur, fitq; ejus centrum A, Axis K a,
Vertex a, Semiaxis conjugatus AP, datum Abfciffae
principium A vei a vei ^ AbfciiTa AB vei aB vei
*B - x, Ordinata reStangula BD = v5 & Area
ABDP vei aBDG vei aBDG^s, exiftente «G Or¬
dinata ad pundtum Jungantur KDyAD, aD. Du-
catur Tangens DT occurrens Abfciffe AB in T.
& compleatur parallelogrammum A EDO, Et
fiquando ad quadraturam Curvae propolit^e requri
runtur areas duarum Sefitionein Conicaruuq dica-
tur pofterioris AbfciiTa Ordinata T, 8c Area ^
Sit autem differentia duarum quantitatum ubi in-
certum eft utrum pofterior de priori an prior de po»
fteriori fubduci debeat.

Curva-
Curvarum Formse. Settionis Conicse. Curvarum Area;,

Forma
[201 ]
M
<u
C5* «Xf i.
Q
<M
eft <u SJ
H Q

<5 CO
P3 Q O
Q
PH p
<
O <
d <1 •
c$
o
« a
d &4 Q
d
«^
G
PQ
n Ph
» *H
g" < o
*aJ
• srH 02 > d
<u Q
Q Id
> t> o > o
«*»
«3 , <+5
S
O d PQ G Q
d
H
oo i >=sr-^ 1
X S“"H P O Q
Q ■i l!i
-M
i> lr 02
> < <D I Am
p-i d
G
O pH
11 a «*-(
c3 «5i ii PQ
G
(•
di
-G
« »—i Jo
rs 4~i P * 1-K +-»
<N I 3E %t4l
PQ II 11
1t o^4- 11 xi I'+j.
o XI ™ ,5> j V
I P id +-> +-»
i Ph 1!
ii 11 H"w <! i 11 n]
4-> co
\ HZa I _ > 11 > >
aj s Xt X
eo X d 'ss
m M 1 C< s •I-
X x I
I M I 01 11 >
•l*
! 1
CO >
<«|M 1 4->
Xl
C4 4J > CO X
M *0<
co CO G
>18 s X
a 11 & O w1 G
® n^t • w-l
CO Xi
ro *G
SK
4-1 s 'O JC
<U I 1* / s
»
d fe
00 1 * & ■3-f*
e
oo ! %\ > > ¥i^ « >

> > II ii
>
11» >.
11 11 X 11 ,x
/x ll|
X
X
11 «
COX1
X v,X
x
vi
X aj
J—
QJI X r IX
u
X,
aj 1
X
l X
<ui i hr r
; *~i [M { £
G > k
wvj »g
XX.

I-*-* > >


> ■> > > X
•» X
X X X
X 11 X X
X
-f ®
X II
X
X 11
H I S?
l! 11 II MST 1! 1 jN ii
11 II
-is t-i 1i N® ■*/ ?? t (1 Na
» as Ma
c3 rs il f*' II 4J
• i—» Pd U u S—I Pd u II U
4- ) IS OG 5S aS id IS
<-M
5— 4
<L> II
«—<
M
-M I_ G II G
-j-j N 02 41 02 I
aj ul cr 1,N!
(-M 02 T" 02
txi > > ai xi > v
<U
> ■> 6 <u
> >
O > -a i
w
cs ■ TSl *4- u.
O *-h
£ti xi in SI Ni PH N
Cl oo -4*
iecr\
c-
•> SO
'SO
^0
W-(
[ 202 ]
PQ cd

a
Q Is
o
OS
<3
-I-

o II
p 4~>
« fc>
nt-
i
is
AW

m
cS
li £-•
1

> AW

©
a «1
"d*
I r*
sc
} 5S-
\\ >
05 6J CO
x
a
II II f
•II * CO
6* > | i >
X
I
4-i n? 1 cs

; I! i! 1 I
cr> fXA/^
y> E>
X
M CS
>
i x
Cl'
X
<u > > 11
ns
c*
1
II II X
X X
* c/3
<U X X bJD
X AW
A>J>
XJ X X <U

. on
C/5
v> 'O
M bJD
<D
bJ3
nf- bJ3
t>a
•*?
I! 0*1 <D
(X
<L»
b£ <u CSt
C I WD
-d-
<u
nf* iD
•# bJ3
e *HI £ 1 f+i*
nj*
1o a>
f
nS '-M
*0 j S O nr ! 4“.
© l _L-
i
-d/bo I "G
> > n3 IdQ
>
> CK > > -d

ir > >
iM
X
X
X o Akf x Acr
8 X S-i
II <U II
4-
3J>
I
II
X II Xxj»

nr <D
.&
<N
r>J
(X
N II a, r«
a T"
I
CJ
J_

> >- to 04
bJ3
)
35 3
is
<u N
a
a
N
r7
.t
i_ N
CS
ns ex <U
CA,
i
ns 3£ to
N
M
ns
X bX3 cs
X .M 04
M
1
L-
1 _
i
’1! V
i
. N
sc x>
«o
<u
> 4>
wj* J N > <D
">

c/nro J3
4> P
>v
cd
t**1
x.
>4
II II
4-»
C
» w-«i II u cd
4-i
I!
,N ,N S£ s X C4
.N CS
is rs
o* N
. W)
t f bJ3 bB

r> cd a

*o >
rd
£t > CS sc
s "■lN ss
*x g U3 i.
fsl
-d rV
.N
J-t
nS i<r!

^-f O
N s§
i
<u Px <u

crn re
[203 ]
es
<1 B
PQ I! Un
C/5
.bfl p > O
&
nd
m
<J bOt^ fi
aj o
an 4-t xO x4J 1'

X pq <L>
X bJ3 PQ VO
HI M
<U
<L> Q s
bQ
P 4-1
X
oo
O 4
X
VO
a II X
i «
ll VO X
£ a C/5
c &
QJ
^PccU
nd •»—< -b Am X x
D

I bJ3
se lT3 00 o
S SS X <n > cn
i
<U
X; IN M
ST bJ) oa
^5*
ll
X b£
00 14 i*«7
aj 3.0 II h >
X
<M
V °°
bJ3
£
X
■ > M X m
I
l_
1 ll >
x,
bS CH
*3-
X
<D
X X b0
X . *»o
AXJ>
C/5 _ . I toD
—< Ji S X ! Oft=
X
vo 1 tJ3 <u
x x bfl
Jo bQ^bX)
<u tt; ^5-
X
T «N X X X
OO IN
<N
£ L 1 I
> >
>
X
x;; W3
c-t , o C/5
T“

<4L <s c/5


I! I . ' *B Am bJ3
> x i>
f . *±3 <u
X --C
Sx
X * X X X rA^-
ii X X OB
X
bfl
I ^ M
x IIIJAJ' Of) OB X QJ
X
T "I
x 4~ ! 3 > >
bJD QJWf f'T“ -h
xbJO
tn

£ X 43
-V-* 00 IS SI ll-
t
f i
> X X X
.X
*+-«
,AAf
P-i ~T~ T" QJ X X X
r QJ cu
> II OD m OB
i T"' J—
bXD *> *> X 4-
1)
X *h 1 ,

> > X X X bD
£ <&
X wo>
11 ‘ll II *f
4~“
1
1
[_

.11 ll N N
NS
j_ QJ cu QJ

i3 -In 6 >• *>


LXV^ >-> >, i=4
■> X X X
>-» ii \\ »
x il II II
<N «N
II NS N3
3& N N1
<N Of) OD
N 9

N
cd b£ f
a cd
>
II
♦ v-4 +- P~< P-< sr
4-i nJ s w <N
Cu <+2 br cO
IN
bfl
N
W3 W3 *f
N
W5
a> o ST
N
J-
*
is
3?
cn
N3
4^ t
cd I cd
i > <Pi N
a
i-i
qj S21 tnj
a *? » 5
5-*
-d
1
fe [
n3
4"
-d
t
o ■> N J2 o
<D & <u

p*
X 1N -d ^ pp
> 4> >
m a m

r--
fs
SO SO
.feCo .^0 Ddd 2
[204]

i!
X
C4
I
> II
X x3

<N C*

l! T-
(X)

,1
>
ii
X
X
£P
_f« .bO
i
4)
*

4i-4
»t3

>>
9
X X X
II hi
ss *
M
ȣ5 NJ
43
fe "rJ tJ J_ 1
.*> 43
*> b£» bD'
Q
"> *>
11 c3
a >%
.4N-i rt
a <Du II U
Forma nona.

£S3 o<D
«*-1
h3 ,N N
5=1
,N NS

PG
V I W3
<D 43I , nj- tt -r-r
«,t»0
> rt
5? ?OD a > >
NJ O5-i t-«
O N
<N
N »

*d 4)
m P-f -d *"d
Cl Cl
e

00

*>*
cs

,te<)

^4
[*°$]
In Tabulis hifce, feries Curvarum cujufq; Forms
utrinq; in infinitum continuari poteft. Scilicet
in Tabula prima, in numeratoribus arearurn for¬
ms tertise & quarts, numeri coefficientes initialium
terminorum (2,—4., 16,—96, 868, &c.) generan-
tur multiplicando numeros—2, —4, —6, —10,&c.
in fe continuo, & fubfequentium terminorum coef¬
ficientes ex initialibus derivantur multiplicando
ipfos gradatim, in Forma quidem tertia, per —J
——I,—f» —To &c. in quarta vero per -f’
~h~~b—l’ &c- Et Denominator-urn coefficientes
3, 15, 105, &c. prodeunt multiplicando numeros
1, 3, 5, 7, 9, &c. infe continuo.
In fecunda vero Tabula, Feries Curvarum forms
prims, fecund®, quints, (ext®, non® & decims ope
folius divifionis, & forms reliqus ope Propofitio-
nis tertis & quarts, utrinq; producuntur in in¬
finitum.
Quinetiam hs feries- mutando lignum numeri
variari folent. Sic enim, e. g. Curva |\/"e_pfz»= y
evadit ■

P R O P. IX. T H E O R. VIII,

'‘Sit A DIC Curva qusvis Abfciffam habens v;a 0.


AB==z & Ordinatam BD=y, 8c fit A E K C Curva * 9‘
alia cujus Ordinata B E squalis eft prioris ares
ABC
[ 206 ]
ADB ad unitatem applicate, &AFLC Curva
tertia cujus Ordinata B F asqualis eft fecundas areas
AEB ad unitatem applicatse, & AGMC Curva
quarta cujus Ordinata B G squalls eft tertias areas
AFB ad unitatem applicatas, &AHNC Curva
quinta cujus Ordinata BH asqualis eft quartae areas
A G B ad unitatem applicatae, & ftc deinceps in
infinitum. Et funto A, B, C7 D, E, &c. Areae Cur¬
va rum Ordinatas habentium y, zy7 z2y, z3y? z4y?
& Abrciflfam communem z.
Detur Abfcifla quaevis AC=t, fitq; BC=t—z
& funto P7 Q, R? S5 T areas Curvarum Ordi¬
natas habentium x, xy7 xxy, x*y, x4y & Abfciflam
communem x.
Terminenter autem has areas omnes ad Abfciflam
totam datam A C7 nec non ad Ordinatam pofitione
datam & infinite produdam CI : & erit arearum
tub initio pofitarum prima ADIC=A=P5 fecunda
AEKC=tA—B=Q.Tertia AFLC = «£=?£+£=iR.
Quarta AGMC — ^a—sttB-htc—p _ig . Qui'nta
A H N C —iiA 4tD -|-E __ i -p
24 24 a •

CO-
[ 207 ]
\

CORO L.

llnde fi Curvs quarum Ordinata* funt y, zy,


z'yr. z3y, &c. vel y, xy, xly, x!y, &c. quadrari
poffunt, quadrabuntur etiam Curva? ADIC^ AEKC,
AFLC, AGMC?&c. & habebuntur Ordinatf BE,
BF-, BG5 BH areis Cur varum proportionates.

SCHOLIUM.
Quantitatum fiuentium fluxiones effe primas 9
fecundas, tertias, quartas 9 aliafq; diximus fiipra.
Hce liuxiones funt ut termini ferierum infinita-
rum convergentium. lie fi zM fit quantitas fluens &
fluendo evadat z-|-o|«9 deinde refolvatur in feriem
convergentem zM'j'HOzrI-^~ooz n3-^^±^o^zyr3
c. terminus primus hujus feriei z” erit quan¬
titas ilia fluens9 lecundus «ozrI erit ejus incremen-
tum primum feu differentia prima cui nafeenti pro-
portionalis eft ejus fluxio prima 9 tertius — ozr2
erit ejus inerementum fecundum feu differentia fe-
cunda cui nafeenti proportionalis eft ejus fluxio
fecunda, quartus ~~3^ o3zK'3 erit ejus increment
turn tertium feu differentia tertia cui nafeenti
fluxio tertia proportionalis eft. & fic deinceps in
infinitum.
r
Exponi
[ 208 ]
Exponi autem poffunt hsefluxiones per Curvarum
Ordinatas BD, BE, BE, BG, BH, &c. Ut fi
Ordinata BE (—fit quantitas fluens, erit
ejus fluxio prima ut ordinata B D, Si BF (=^~)
fit quantitas fluens, erit ejus fluxio prima ut Or¬
dinata BE & fluxioiecunda ut Ordinata BD. Si
BH (— fit quantitas fluens, erunt ejus fluxio-
nes, prima, fecunda, tertia & quarta, ut Ordinate
BG, BF, BE, BDrefpeaive.
Et hinc in aequationibus quas quantitates tantum
duas incognitas involvunt, quarum una eft quan¬
titas uniformiter fluens & altera eft fluxio quslibet
quantitatis alterius fluentis, inveniri poteft fluens
ilia altera per quadraturam Curvarum. Exponatur
enina fluxio ejus per Ordinatam BD, & fi hcec fit
fluxio prima, quaeratur area ADB=BExi5 fi
fluxio iecunda, quaeratur area AEB = BFx i, fi
fluxio tertia, quaeratur area AFB — BGxq&c
& area inventa erit exponens fluentis quaeiitse.

Sed & in aequationibus quae ftuentem & ejus


fluxionem primam fine altera fluente, vel duas
ejufdem fluentis fluxiones, primam & fecundam,
vel fecundam & tertiam, vel tertiam & quartam,
See. fine alter utra fluente involvunt: inveniri pofi
font fluentes per quadraturam Curvarum, Sit
aequatio aav = av A- vv , exiftente v = B E,
v =BD, z =AB & z = i, & aequatio ilia com-

plendo dimenfiones fluxionum, evadet aav = avz


feu jtxt? ==Z. Jam float v uniformiter &
fit
[ 209 ]
fit ejus fluxio v=i & erit-q—= z, & quadrando
Curvam cujus Ordinata eft & Abfcifla v, ha-=
bebitur ftuens z. Adhsec fit aequatio aav=av-j-vv
exiftente v=BF, v=BE, v=BD & z—AB &
per relationem inter v & v feu B D & B E invenie-
tur relatio inter A B & B E ut in exemplo fuperiore.
Deinde per hanc rektionem invenietur relatio in¬
ter A B & BF quadrando Curvam AEB*
iEquationes quae tres incognitas quantitates invol-
vunt aliquando reduci poflunt ad aequationes quae
duas tantum involvunt, & in his cafibus fluentes
invenientur ex fluxionibus ut fupra. Sit aequatio
a—-bxm=cxy«y +dy2«yy. Ponatur y«y=v & erit
a—bxracxv~}-dvv, Hxc aequatio quadrando Cur¬
vam cujus Abiciffa eft x & Ordinata v dat aream
v5 & aequatio altera y«y=v regrediendo ad fluentes
dat =v. Unde habetur fluens y.
Quinetiam in aequationibus quse tres incognitas
involvunt & ad aequationes quae duas tantum in-
volvunt reduci non poflunt , fluentes quandoq;
prodeunt per quadraturam Cur varum. Sit aequatio
axm-j-bxf — rexr’rys sexry jw —fy y\ exiftente
x = i.Et pars pofterior rex^1 ys-j-sex^yys~l— fy y£,
regrediendo ad fluentes, fit exrys—- JL qU^
proinde eft ut area Curvae cujus Abfcifla eft x &
Ordinata axm -] i xlj^ & inde datur fluens y.
Ee e Sit
C 2FO J
__ , 9

Sit aequatio x * axraT bx"|p =—err:1 Et fluens

cujus fluxio eft x xaxm ft- bx"|p erit ait area Curv^e
cujus Abfcifla eft x & Ordinata eft a xm ft- bx«lp.
Item fluens cuius fluxio eft dyYrI- erit ut area Curvs
v'e+fyo
cuius Abfcifla eft y & Ordinata -yyi’— id eft
(per Cafum i- Formae quartae Tab. I.) ut area
Ve-f fy”- Pone ergo^Ve-j-fy" aequalem areae
Curvae cujus Abfcifla eft x & Ordinata ax® -\- b x"^
Sc habebitur fluens y,

Et nota quod fluens omnis quae ex fluxione prima


colligitur augeri poteft vel minui quantitate quavis
non fluente. Qua: ex fluxione fecunda colligitur
augeri poteft vel minui quantitate quavis cujus
fluxio fecunda nulla eft. Quae ex fluxione tertia
colligitur augeri poteft vel minui quantitate quavis
cujus fluxio tertia nulla eft. Et fic deinceps in in¬
finitum,

Poftquam vero- fluentes ex fluxionibus col left?:


£unt?, fi de veritate Condufionis dubitatur,, fluxio-
nes fluentium inventarum viciffim colligendae funt
Sc cum fluxionibus fub initio propofitis comparand^
Mam fi' prodeunt aequales Conclufio rede fe ha-
bet
[2111
Bet: fin minus, corrigenda? funt fiuentes fic, ut
earum fluxiones fiuxionibus fub initio propofitis
aequentur. Nam & Fluens pro lubitu aflfumi po-
teft & affumptio corrigi ponendo fluxionem flu-
entis affumpt® cequalem fluxioni propofitae, & ter-
minos homologos inter fe comparand©*

Et his principiis via ad majora fternitur-


IT**

i\j •■d ERRATA.

P BOOK I. OfOftick*.
Art i. p.3. 1.20. Properties which, ib-p-5-1.$* and that C, p.6. I.9. DE,^ p.2i. I.23.
are two Pays, p.27.1.6. in the Margin put Fig. 14 ££ 15, p.30.1.7. Mat, I.9, M, p.
44.1.15. aswttfpropofed, 11.52. 1. 17. a paper Circle, p.57. l.uit. emerging, p,6o. I.25.
contain with the, p.64.1.18. and 14th, p.65. i.13. at the, p.66. [^.Semicircular, p.67.
I.25. Center, I.31. ^ Inches, p.68. 1.8. to 16, 1.9. or p.71.1.1. bife&9 p.72.1.13.
falls, I.20. being. Part II. p.86.1.5. lelopipede, p.89.1.9. made by, p.93. l.i 8. to 77^
1.28,29, by the third Axiom of the firft Pan of this Book, the Laws, p.105. I.5. fee repre-
femei, p. 144.1. 244, b, r«, 5. P- for Lib.i. Ub.l. write
Ttmi.Pam. p.122. 1 .^.iniico, jj.130.la9.ro the Jttgle, p.132. l.S. by tie bright-
vcfs, p.1-3-5.1.14. Ferlf in the, l.i6.firfl Fanyou, p.136. [.26. firfi Part, [.27. lights,
p.137.1.20. green, accordingly an, i^. 138.1. 21. Prop.6. Part. 2. p.139. I.5. on which,
^.i^.l.ij.XTwhichhave been, p.143* 1*7 •purple, \.i6.feveral Lights,1.2^. of white.
BOOK. II.
P.5. 1. 5.nicely the,p. 7.1.9.^, x denote, I.28. them divers,p, 10.1. 24. xooo to 1024,
p.ii.l.n. olicpiities, I. p.17. 1*4* Hf P* 25.1.11. 10^ p»3i. !• 12. more com¬
pounded, p.55.1.3. foes re fie ft, I.24. and therefore their Colours arife, p.65. I.5. cqrpuf^
eles can, p.71.1.17. given breadth, p.84* 1* 4* a.re tothofe, p. 96. 1. 24. Ohfervation of
this Pan of this Book, p.103.1.17. was to thelhickhefs, p. 105.1.19. of this white Ping,
p.107.1.20. become equal to the third of thofe.
Enumeratio Line arum.
p.143.1.20. datas[ignisfm, p. 144.1.27. refipiciunt, p. 146° 1 .^fmtJfympmo, p.
154.1.13. cx-\-d dat Qrdinatamy =5»1.14* quxgeneratur.
Ouadratura Curvarum.
p.x68.1.24.re^i ^Bjp.r/^.l.ult. J fz«,p.183.1.1 q.a,b,c,tic. e,fig,tic. k,l, m*

‘tic. p. 18$. I.4. in 2,9-i> p.188.1.14. z9dr «<r, p. 190. 1.1&yei

192* I.18. gzp*~*~2n* P*i93*i.n. aS^-bRr; CO,


a a B N T B C
%

211,
*V " ■ ' - ' ; '

' :
■ ■
.
-
V ‘
-

.■

• ■

'

. • n
- 4
'"I

s' r- \\
w



■ -


.


' -

.
.

'

\ ■

~
.
• : -

: ^' ' .
1

-
r *■

L •• , '
i F
’’•ApX
. . ' ■: ■ , -V ■


‘ t-

f ■ . \- ■ .

...

J-
f
.

. .

V '

- - -. • ■

k .
V?':' ■ - • •’ . . ' v

'

g^:‘ ' ■ ’
• •

.’if

' -

■ •

:
spi. .
B . ,
■ -

§r;
.
m .
*>

■. ;*..

-
,v
■ - -- \ . v / ■' ' “ ' ' >
li.-.vk:-' ‘ ■* . & ••*?. ’ 71 i. v- - - '
^
^Vr THE LIBRARY
OF
THE UNIVERSITY
OF CALIFORNIA
LOS ANGELES

GIFT
Dr. K. R. Beigelman

'•k.

».
oPTiCKs:
O R, A

TREATISE
O F T H E

Reflections, Refradiqns^
InfieBions and Colours

O F

LIGHT.
ne Fourth Edition, correSied,

By Sir ISAAC NEWTON, Knt.

L O ND N:
Printed for William Innys at the Wefl-
End of St. Paul's, Mdccxxx.
©
837

^. 'it
Advertifement L
ART of the en-
fui?ig Difeourfe a-
bout hight ivas
"Written at theDe-
fire of fame Gen-
tlemen of the Royal -Society, in
the Tear 1^7^, and then fent to
their Seeretary, and read at their
Meetings, and the refiivas add-
ed about tivehe Tears after to
complete, the Theory ; except the
third Book, and the lafl Propo-
fit ion of the Second, vjhich "were
fince put together out of car- f
ter d Papers, To a\:oid be-
ing engaged in Difputes about
A z thefe
Advertifement.
thefe Matters, I haw
hitherto de-
layed the printing, and jhould
flill ha've delayed it, had not the
Importunity of Friendsprevailed
upon me. If any other Papers
nvrit on this SubjeB are got out

of my Hands they are imperfeB,


and ivere perhaps ^written before
I had tried all the Experiments
here fet do'von, and fully fatisfi-
ed my felf about theLaivs of Re*
fraBions and Compofttion of Co-
lours. I have here publijUd "vjhat
I think proper to eome abroad,
mping that it may not be tran-
Jlated into another hanguage
mthout my Confem.
The Crowns of Colours, ivhieh
fometimes appear about the Sun
and Moon, I ha'oe endea'voured
to gi've an Account of) but for
"want
Advertifement.
^o^antof fufficient Obfer'vations
leave that Matter to be farther
examined. The Siibjeti of the
Third Book I have alfo left im-
perfeBy not having tried all the
Experiments "which I intended
ivhen Iivas about thefe Matters,
nor repeated fome ofthofe ivhich
I did try, until I had fatisfied
my felf about all their Circum-
fiances. To communicate vjhat
I have tried, and leave the refl
to others for farther Enquiry,
is all my Defign in publijhing

thefe Papers.
IndLettervjrittento Tlfr.Leib-
nitz in the Tear I 7^, and pub-
(!)

lijhed by Dr, Wallis, / mention d


a Method by vohich I had found
fome general Theorems about
fquaring Curvilinear Figures,
or
Advertifement.
or comparing them mth the Co-
nic SeBions, or other the jimplefl
Figures mth v)hich they may be
compared. And fome Tears ago
I lent out a Manuscript contain-
ing fuch Theorems, and halving
fince met mth fome Things copi-
ed out of it, I have on this Occa-
fion made it publick, prefixing to
it ^//Introdudion, andSubjoin-

ing a Scholium concerning that


Method, And Ihavejoinedrnth
itanother fmall TraB concern-
ing the Curvilinear Figures of
the Second Kind, "which ivas alfo
"written many Tears ago, and
made knov)n to fome Friends,
"who have folic it ed the making it
publicL

April
1704.
r.
T M
X. -L^«
dvertifement 11.

this Second Edition


[hefeOpticks Iha've
oMtted the Mathema-
tical ^aBs publipd
at the Endof the former Edi-
tion, as not belonging to the
SiibjeB. And at the End of
the Third Book I ha%w added
fome Queflions. And to fiev)
that I do not take Gratuity for
an Property of Bodies,
ejfential
I have added one Queflion con-
cerning its Caufe, chiifing to
propofe by "way of a Quefli-
it
on, becaufe I am not yet fatif-

fied about it for vjant of Expe-


riments.

^^- IN.
Advertisement to this
Fourth Edition.

HIS neuo Edition of


Sir Ifaac Newtonx
Opticks is carefully
printedfrow> the Third
Edition, as it vjas correBed by
the Author s oivn Hand, and
left before his Death with the
Bookfeller, Since Sir Ifaac j*
Lediones Opticas, which he
public kly read in the Uni'verfity
of Cambridge in the Tears
l66^, 16^0, and 16'ji, are
lately printed, it has been thought
proper to make
at the bottom of
the Pages fenceral Citations from
thence, where may be found the
Demonfirations, which the Au- *

thor omitted in thefe Opticks.


:

C I]

THE
FIRST BOOK
O F

OPTICKS.
PART I.

",
Y Delign in this Book is not to ex-
by Hy-
plain the Properties of Light
pothefes, but to propofe and prove
them by Reafon and Experiments
In order to which I ihall premife the
following Definitions and Axioms.

B DEFI-
O P T I C K S.

DEFINITIONS.
D E F I N. I.

T the Rays of Light I under/land its leafi


B
fame
TartSy and thofe as well Siiccejive in the
Lines,as Contemporary in feveral Lines.
For manifeft that Light confifts of Parts,
it is

both Succeflive and Contemporary j becaufe in


the fame place you may ftop that which comes
one moment, and let pafs that which comes pre-
fently after; and in the fame time you may
Hop it any one place, and let it pafs in any
in
other. For that part of Light which is ftopp'd
cannot be the fame with fhat which is let pafs.
The leafl Light or part of Light, which may
be flopp'd alone without the reft of the Light,
or propagated alone, or do or fuffer any thing
alone, which the reft of the Light doth not or
fuifers not, I call a Ray of Light.

D E F I N. IL

of the Rays of Light, is their


Refrangibility
refraBed or turned out of their
T>ifpofition to be
Way in pafjing out of one tranfparent Body or
Medium into another. And a greater or lefs Re-
frangibility of Rays, is their Difpofition to be
turned more or lefs out of their Way in like^ In-
cidences on the fame Medium. Mathematicians
ufually confider the Rays of Light to be Lines
reaching from the luminous Body to the Body
illuminated, and the refradiion of thofe Rays to
be the bending or breaking of thofe lines in
their
BOOK! 3
their pafling out of one Medium into another.
And thus may Rays and Refradions be confi-
dered, ifLight be propagated in an inftanr.
But by an Argument taken from the i^qua-
tions of the times of the Eclipfes of Jupiter i
BatelliteSy it feems that Light is propagated in
time, fpending in its pafTage from the Sun to us

about feven Minutes of time: And therefore I


have chofen to define Rays and Pvcfradions in
fuch general terms as may agree to Light in both
cafes.

D E F I N. in.

of Rays^ is fbeir Difpojitic?! to be


Reflexibility
turned back into the fame Mediu?n jroni
rejieSted or
any other Medium upon whoje Surface they fall.
And Rays are more or lefs refexible, which are
turned back more or lefs eafly. As if Light pafs
out of a Glafs into Air, and by being iiiclmed
more and more to the common Surface of the
Glafs and Air, begins at length to be totally re-
fledled by that Surface ; thofe io:::^ of Rays
which at like Incidences are refledted moft co-
pioully, or by inclining the Rays begin fooneil
to be totally refledted, are mofl reflexible.

D E F I N. IV.
I'he A?jgle of Licidence is that Angle, u-hick,
the Line defcribed by the incident Ray contains with
the Perpendicular to the refeSiing or refracting Sur--
face at the, Point of Incidence,

p2 DEFIN,
4 O P T I C K S.

D E F I N. V.
^ke Afigle of Reflexion or HefraBion^ is the
Angle which the line defcribed by the i'-eJleBed or re-
fraBed Ray coiitaineth with the Perpendicular to
the refleBing or refraSiifig Surface at the Point of
Incidence,

D E F I N. VL
'^he Sines of Incidence^ Reflexion^ and Refra-
Bion, are the Si?ies of the Angles of Incidence, Re-

fexion, and Refr/^Bio?!.

D E F I N. VII.
^hc Light Rays are all alike Refran-
ivhofe
gible^ I Homogeneal and Similar ;
call Simple,
and that whofe Rays are fome more Refrangible
than others, I call Compound, Heterogeneal and
Diffijnilar. The former Light I call Homoge-
neal, not becaufe I would affirm it fo in all re-
ipedts, but becaufe the Rays which agree in Re-
frangibility, agree at leaft in all thofe their other
Properties which I confider in the following
Difcourfe,

D E F I N. VIII.

\the Colours of Homogeneal Lights, I call Pri~


wary, Ilofjiogeneal and Simple j ajid thofe of He-
Heterogeneal ajid Compound. For
teroge??.eal Lights,
thefe are always compounded of the colours of
Homogeneal Lights j as will appear in the fol-
lowing
'O Difcourfe.

AXIOMS.
B O O K I.
5

AX I MS.
A X. I.

npHR Ajigks of RefexioJi and "Refracllon^ lit

in one and thefame Flane with the A?igle of In-


cidence.

A X. II.

'The Angle of Refexion is equal to the Angle of\


Incidence.

AX. III.

If the ref-aBed Ray be returned direclly back to


the Poifit of Incidence^ itJJ:all be rfraBed into the
Line before defcribed by the incident Ray.

A X. IV.
RefraBion out of the rarer Medium into the
denfer, is made towards the Perpendicular ; that
is, Jo that the A?igle of Refraclion be lefs than the
Angle of Incidence.

: A X. \.
The Siiie of Incidence is either accurately or
'very nearly in a green Ratio to the Sine of Re-
fraBion.

Whence if that Proportion be known in any


one Inclination of the incident Ray, 'tis known
in all the Inclinations, and thereby the Refra-
iftion in all cafes of Incidence on the fame refra-
<fting Body may be determined. Thus if the
B 3 R'efra-
6 O P T I C K S.

Refradion be made out of Air into Water, the


Sine of Incidence of the red Light is to the Sine
of its Refracftion as 4 to 3 If out of Air into Glafs,
.

the Sines are as 17 to 11. In Light of other


Colours the Sines have other Proportions: but
the difference is fo little that it need feldom be
coniidered.
Suppofe therefore, that RS [ in Fig. i. ] repre-
fents the Surface of ftagnating Water, and that C
is the point of Incidence in which any Ray coming
in the Air from A in the Line A C is refledled or
refrad:ed, and I would know whither this Ray

fhall go after Reflexion or Refraction: I ereA


upon the Surface of the Water from the point
of Incidence the Perpendicular CP and produce
it downwards to Q^, and conclude by the firft
Axiom, that the Ray after Reflexion and Re-
fradiion, fliall be found fomewhere in the Plane
of the Angle of Incidence ACP produced. I let
fall therefore upon the Perpendicular CP jthe
Sine of Incidence ADand if the refiedted
j

Ray be deflred, I produce AD


to B fo that
D B be equal to A D, and draw C B. For this
Line C B fhall be the refiedted Ray the Angle j

of Reflexion B C P and its Sine B D being e-


qual to the Angle and Sine of Incidence, as they
ought to be by the fecond Axiom, But if the
refra(5led Ray be defired, I produce A D to H,
fo that D Hmay be to A D as the Sine of Re-
fradion to the Sine of Incidence, that is, (if the
Light be red) as 3 to 4; and about the Center
C and in the Plane A C P with the Radius CA
defcribing a Circle ABE, I draw a parallel to the
Perpendicular CPQ^, the Line HE
cutting tl^e
Circum-
B O O K I.
7
Circumference in E, and joining C E, this Line
CE fhall be the Line of the refradied Ray.,
For if E F be let fiiU perpendicularly on the
Line P Q^ this Line E F fliall be the Sine of Re-
fra<flion of the Ray C E, the Angle of Refradion
being E C Qj^ and this Sine E F is equal to D H,
and confequently in Proportion to the Sine of
Incidence AD as 3 to 4.
In like manner, if there be a Prifm of Glafs
(that is, a Glafs bounded with two Equal and
Parallel Triangular ends, and three plain and
well polifhed Sides, which meet in three Parallel
Lines running from the three Angles of one
end to the three Angles of the other end) and
if the Refradion of the Light in pafTing crofs this
Prifm be defired: Let ACB [inFig,2.] reprefent
a Plane cutting this Prifm tranfverlly to its three
Parallel lines or edges there where the Light
pafleth through it, and let DE be the Ray in-
cident upon the firft fide of the Prifm A C where
the Light goes into the Glafs ; and by putting
the Proportion of the Sine of Incidence to the
Sine of Refradion as 1 7 to 11 find E F the firft
refraded Ray. Then taking this Ray for the
Incident Ray upon the fecond fide of the Glafs
B C where the Light goes out, find the next
refraded Ray EG
by putting the Proportion
of the Sine of Incidence to the Sine of Re-
fradion as II to 17. For if the Sine of Inci-
dence out of Air into Glafs be to the Sine of
Refradion as 17 to 11, the Sine of Incidence out
of Glafs into Air muil on the contrary be to the
Sine of Refradipn as 11 to 15^ by the third;
A?«tom»
S O P T I C K S.

Much after the fame manner, if C B [in A D


Fig. 2'] reprefent a Glafs fpherically convex on
both fides (ufually called aLem^ fuch as is a Burn-
ing-glafs, or Speftacle-glafs, or an Objedt-glafs of
a Telefcope) and it be required to know how
Light faUing upon it from any lucid point Q^
fhall be Q^JVI reprefent a Ray
refra(5led, let
falling upon any point M
of its firfl fpherical
Surface A C B, and by ered;ing a Perpendicular
to the Glafs at the point M, find the firll re-
fracted Ray MN
by the Proportion of the
Sines 17 to 11. Let that Ray in going out of
the Glafs be incident upon N, and then find
the fecond refraded Ray q by the Propor-N
tion of the Sines 1 1 to 17. And after the fame
manner may the Refradion be found when the
Lens is convex on one fide and plane or con-
cave on the other, or concave on both fides.

A X. VI.
Homogeneal Rays which foiD from feveral Points
cf any Objecl^ and fall perpendicularly or almoji
perpendicularly on any refieSiing or refraBing Flane
or fpherical Surface^ Jhall afterwards diverge
from fo many other or be parallel to Jo
Points^
tnany other Lines, or converge to fo many other
Points^ either accurately or without any fetifble
'E,rror. And thefame thing will happen, if the
Rays be refcBed or refracted fucceffively by two
or three or more Plane or Spherical Surfaces.
The Point from which Rays diverge or to
which they converge may be called their Focus,
And the Focus of the incident Rays being gi-
I'cn, that of the refleded or refraded ones may
be
B O O K I.
9
be found by finding the Refradtion of any two
Rays, as above j or niore readily thus.
Caf. I. Let ACB [in Fig. 4.] be a refleding or
refradling Plane, and Q^he Focus of the incident
Rays, and ^ C a Perpendicular to that Plane.
Q
And if this Perpendicular be produced to q^
fo that ^ C be equal to Q^, the Point q fhall
be the Focus of the refledted Rays Or if ^ C :

be taken on the fame fide of the Plane with


Q^, and in proportion to Q^
as the Sine of
Incidence to the Sine of Refra6tion, the Point q
fliall be the Focus of the refracted Rays.

Caf 2. Let ACB [in Fig. 5.] be the refleding


Surface of any Sphere whofe Centre is E. Bi-
fed: any Radius thereof, ( fuppofe EC) in T,
and if in that Radius on the fame fide the Point
T you take the Points Q^nd fo that T Q^ ^,
T E, and T be continual Proportionals, and
q^
the Point QJ)e the Focus of the incident Rays,
the Point q fliall be the Focus of the refiedted
ones.
Caf. 3. Let ACB [in Fig. 6.] be the refnidting
Surface of any Sphere whofe Centre is E. In
any Radius thereof E C produced both ways
take E T
and C t equal to one another and fe-
verally fuch Proportion to that Radius as
in
the of the Sines of Incidence and P^e-
lefi^er

fradion hath to the difference of thofe Sines.


And then if in the fame Line you find any two
Points Q^nd ^, fo that T QJ^e to ET as E /^

to /q^ taking t q the contrary way from / which


T QJAeth from T, and if the Point QJ)e the
Focus of any incident Rays, the Point q fliall be
the Focus of the refracted ones>
2 And
lo O P T I C K S.

And by the fame means the Focus of the Rays


after two or more Reflexions or Refradions may
be found.
Caf.^. Let ACBD
[in Fig. 7.] be any refrad-
ing Lens , fpherically Convex or Concave or
Plane on either fide, and let C D
be its Axis
( that is, the Line which cuts both its Surfaces

perpendicularly, and paiTes through the Centres


of the Spheres,) and in this Axis produced let
F andybe the Foci of the refradled Rays found as
above, w^hen the incident Rays on both iides the
Lens are parallel to the fame Axis j and upon the
Diameter F f
bifecCled in E, defcribe a Circle.
Suppofe now that any Point QJ>e the Focus of
any incident Rsys. Draw QJ^ cutting the faid
Circle in T and t^ and therein take t q m fuch
proportion to / E as E or T E hath to T
/^
Q^
Let / ^ lie the contrary way from t which T Q
doth from T, and q fhall be the Focus of the,
rcfrafted Rays without any 'fenfible Error, pro-
vided the Point QJ)e not fo remote from the
Axis, nor the Lens fo broad as to make any of
the Rays fall too obliquely on the refracting
Surfaces. *
And by the like Operations may the reflecting
or refracHiing Surfaces be found when the two
Foci are given, and thereby a Lens be formed,
which Ihall make the Rays flow towards or
from what Place you pleafe. -f-
* In our Author's LeEliones Optica:, Part I. Seft. IV. Prop. 29,
30, there an elegant Method of determining thefe Foci ; not only
is

in fpherical Surfaces, but likewife in any other curved Figure what-


ev«r : And in Prop. 32, 33, the fame thing is done tor any Ray ly-
ing out of the Axis.
f Ibid. Prop. ^4.
. Sq
B O O K I. It
So then the Meaning of this Axiom is, that
if Rays fall upon any Plane or Spherical Surface
or Lens, and before their Incidence flow from
or towards any Point Q^
they fhall after Re-
flexion or Refra6lion flow from or towards the
Point q found by the foregoing Rules. And if
the incident Rays flow from or towards feveral
points Q^ the refleded or refradled Rays fliall
flow from or towards fo many other Points q
found by the fame Rules. Whether the refle<5t-
ed and refracted Rays flow from or towards the
Point q is eafily known by the fltuation of that
Point. For if that Point be on the fame flde
of the refleding or refracting Surface or Lens
with the Point Q^ and the incident Rays flow
from the Q^
Point the reflected flow towards
the Point q and the refradled from it ; and if the
incident Rays flow towards Q, the refleded
flow from q, and the refraded towards it. And
the contrary happens when q is on the other
fide of the Surface.

A X. VIL
Wherever the Rays which come from all the
Points of any Object meet again in Jo many
Poi?its after they have been made to converge by
RefeBion or RefraBion^ make a Pi'
there they will
Bure of the ObjeB upon any white Body on which
they fall.

So if PR [in Fig. 3.] reprefent any Objed with-


out Doors, and A B be a Lens placed at a hole
in the Window-ihut of a dark Chamber, where-
by the Rays that come from any Point Q^of
I that
12 O P T I C K S.

that Qbje6t are made to converge and meet a-


gain in the Point q j and if a Sheet of white Pa-
per be held at q for the Light there to fall up-
on it, the Pidlure of that Objed; P R
will ap-
pear upon the Paper in its proper jQiape and Co-
lours. For as the Light which comes from the
Point Q^goes to the Point q, fo the Light which
comes from other Points P and R of the Objed:,
will go to fo many other correfpondent Points
p and r ( as is manifell by the fixth Axiom ) fo
j

that every Point of the Objed: fhall illuminate a


correfpondent Point of the Pidure, and there-
by make a Pidture like the Objed in Shape and
Colour, this only excepted, that the Pidture fhall
be inverted. And this is the Reafon of that vul-
gar Experiment of cafting the Species of Objeds
from abroad upon a Wall or Sheet of white Pa-
per in a dark Room.
In like manner, when a Man views any Objed:
P QR, [in Fig. 8.] the Light which comes from
the feveral Points of the Objed is fo refraded
by the tranfparent fkins and humours of the
Eye, (that by the outward coat E F G, called
is,

the "Tunica Corfiea, and by the cryftalline hu-


mour A B which is beyond the Pupil ;;z ^ ) as to
converge and meet again in fo many Points in
the bottom of the Eye, and there to paint the
Pidure of the Objed upon that fkin (called the
Tunica Retina ) with which the bottom of the
Eye is covered. For Anatomifts, when they have
taken off from the bottom of the Eye that out-
ward and moft thick Coat called the Dura Ma-
ter^ can then fee through the thinner Coats,
the Pidures of Objeds lively paint^ there-
,

on^
B O O K I. 13
on. And thefe Pidlures, propagated by Mo-
tion along the Fibres of the Optick Nerves in-
to the Brain, are the caufe of Vilion. For ac-
cordingly as thefe Pidtures are perfed: or im-
perfedl, the Objed: is feen perfectly or imperfed:-
ly. If the Eye be tinged with any colour (as in
the Difeafe of the yawidice) fo as to tinge the
Pidures in the bottom of the Eye with that
Colour, then all Objeds appear tinged with the
fame Colour. If the Humours of the Eye by
old Age decay, fo as by (hrinking to make the
Cornea and Coat of the Ci'yiialline Humour grow
flatter than before, the Light will not be re-
frad:ed enough, and for want of a fufficient Re-
fraction will not converge to the bottom of the
Eye but to fome place beyond it, and by con-
fequence paint in the bottom of the Eye a con-
fufed Pidlure, and according to the Indifl:in(ft-
nefs of this Pidture the Objed: will appear con-
fufed. This is the reafon of the decay of fight
in old Men, and fhews why their Sight is mend-
ed by Spedacles. For thofe Convex glalTes fup-
ply the defed of plumpnefs in the Eye, and by
increafing the Refradion make the Rays con-
verge fooner, fo as to convene diftindly at the
bottom of the Eye if the Glafs have a due de-
gree of convexity. And the contrary happens
in fhort-fighted Men whofe Eyes are too plump.
For the Refradion being now too great, the
Rays converge and convene in the Eyes before
they come at the bottom > and therefore the
Pidure made in the bottom and the Vifion
caufed thereby will not be diftind, unlefs the
Object be brought fo near the Eye as that the ,

place
14 o p T I c k: s.
place where the converging Rays convene may
be removed to the bottom, or that the plump-
nefs of the Eye be taken off and the Refrad:i-
ons diminifhed by a Concave-glafs of a due de-
gree of Concavity, or laflly that by Age the
Eye grow flatter till it come to a due Figure:
For fhort-fighted Men fee remote Objeds beft
in Old Age, and therefore they are accounted to
have the moft lafling Eyes.

A X. VIII.

An ObjeB fcen by Reflexion or "RefraSiion, ap'


pears in that place from whence the Rays after their
laji Reflexion or RefraBion diverge in falling on the
SpeBators Eye,

If the Object A [in Fig.^!\ be feen by Reflexion


of a Looking-glafs m n^ it fliall appear, not in its
proper place A, but behind the Glafs at a, from
whence any Rays AB, AC, AD, which flow from
one and the fame Point of the Objed, do after
their Reflexion made in the Points B, C, D, di-
verge in going from the Glafs to E, F, G,
where they are incident on the Spectator's Eyes.
For theJf^ Rays do make the fame Picture in the
bottom of the Eyes as if they had come from
the Objed: really placed at a without the Inter-
pofition of the Looking-glafs; and all Vifion is
made according to the place and fliape of that
Pidure.
In like manner the Obje6t D
[in Fig. 2.] feen
through a Prifm, appears not in its proper place
D, but is thence tranflated to fome other place
d fituated in the laft refraded Ray F G drawn
backward from F to d. And
B O O K I. 15
And fo the'Objed: Q^[ in Fig. 10.] feentlirough

tlie Lens A B, appears at the place q from whence


the Rays diverge in paffing from the Lens to the
Eye. Now it is to be noted, that the Image of

the Objed; at q is fo much bigger or lelTer than


the Objed: it felf at Q^, as the diftance of the
Image at q from the Lens A B is bigger or lefs
than the diftance of the Objed: at C^rom the
fame Lens. And if the Objedl be feen through
two or more fuch Convex or Concave-glafl'es,
every Glafs fhall make a new Image, and the
Object fhall appear in the pkce of the big-
nefs of the laft Image. Which confideration un-
folds the Theory of Microfcopes and Telefcopcs.
For that Theory coniifts in almoll nothing elfe
than the defcribing fuch Glafles as fliall make the
laft Image of any Objedl as diHind and large and
luminous as it can conveniently be made.
I have now given in Axioms and their Ex-
plications the fum of what hath hitherto been
treated of in Opticks. For what hath been ge-
nerally agreed on I content my felf to allume
under the notion of Principles, in order to what
I have farther to write. And this may fuffice
for an Introdu6tion to Readers of quick Wit
and good Underftanding not yet verfed in Op-
ticks Although thofe who are already acquaint-
:

ed with this Science, and have handled GlalTes,


will more readily apprehend what followeth.

PROPO"
O P T I C K S.

PROPOSITIONS.
P ROP.l T H E O R. I.

T IG HTS which differ in Colour, differ alfo in


Degrees of Refrangibility,

The Proof by Experiments.

Exper. I. I took a black oblong ftifF Paper


terminated by Parallel Sides, and with a Per-
pendicular right Line drawn crofs from one
Side to the other, diftinguifhed it into two e-
qual Parts. One of thefe parts I painted with
a red colour and the other with a blue. The
Paper was very black, and the Colours intenfe
and thickJy laid on, that the Phaenomenon
might be more confpicuous. This Paper I
view'd through a Prifm of folid Glafs, wllofe
two Sides through which the Light pafled to the
Eye were plane and well polifhed, and contained
an Angle of about fixty degrees ; which Angle
I call the refracting; Angle of the Prifm. And
whilft I view'd it, I held it and the Prifm before
a Window in fuch manner that the Sides of the
Paper were parallel to the Prifm, and both thofe
Sides and the Prifm were parallel to the Horizon,
and the crofs Line was*alfo parallel to it: and
which fell from the Window upon
that the Light
the Paper made an Angle with the Paper, equal
to that Angle which was made with the fame
Paper
B O O K I. J7
Paper by the Light refle6led from It to the Eye.
Beyond the Prifm was the Wall of the Chamber
under the Window covered over with black
Cloth, and the Cloth was involved in Darknefs
that no Light might be reflected from thence,
which in palTing by the Edges of the Paper to
the Eye, might mingle itfelf with the Light of
the Paper, and obfcure the Phaenomenon there-
of. Thefe things being thus ordered, I found
that if the refracting Angle of the Prifm be
turned upwards, fo that the Paper may feem to
be lifted upwards by the Refraction, its blue
half will be lifted higher by the Refradlon ; ban
its red half. But if the refrad:ing Angle of the
Prifm be turned downward, fo that the Paper
may feem to be carried lower by the Refra-
d:ion, its blue half will be carried fomethin^
lower thereby than its red half Wherefore in
both Cafes the Light which comes from the
blue half of the Paper tlirough the Prifm to
the Eye, does in like Circumitances fuffer a
greater Refradion than the Light which comes
from the red half, and by confequence is m.ore
refrangible.
Ilhijlration. In the eleventh Figure, MN
reprefents D
the Window, and E the Paper
terminated with D J and H E,
parallel Sides
and by the tranfverfe Line F G diftinguiilied
into two halfs, the one D G of an intenfely
blue Colour, the other FE of an intenfely
red. And ^ hC c a b Prifm
reprefents the
whofe refrading Planes KB
b a and c a KC
meet in the Edge of the refracting Angle *% a.
This Edge A a being upward, is paralldftoth to
C the
i8 O P T I C K S.

the Horizon, and to the Parallel-Edges of the


Paper D J and HE, and the tranfverfe Line FG
is perpendicular to the Plane of the Window.

And de reprefents the Image of the Paper {0,^x1


by Refraction upwards in fuch manner, that the
blue half DGis carried higher to dg than the

red half F E is to fe^ and therefore fuffers a


greater Refrad:ion. If the Edge of the refracting
Angle be turned downward, the Image of the
Paper vv^ill be refraded downward j fuppofe to
^ e, and the blue half will be refracted lower to
^ y, than the red half isto 9 g.
Exper, About
2. whofe
the aforeiaid Paper,
two halfswere painted over with red and blue,
and which was ftifflike thin Pafteboard, I lapped
feveral times a llender Thred of very black Silk,
in fuch manner that the feveral parts of the
Thred might appear upon the Colours like fo
many black Lines drawn over them, or like
long and {lender dark Shadows caft upon them.
I might have drawn black Lines with a Pen,
but the Threds were fmaller and better defined.
This Paper thus coloured and lined I fet againft
a Wall perpendicularly to the Horizon, fo that
one of the Colours might ftand to the Right
Hand, and the other to the Left. Clofe before
the Paper, at the Confine of the Colours below,
I placed a Candle to illuminate the Paper ftrong-
ly: For the Experiment was tried in the Night.
The Flame of the Candle reached up to the
lower edge of the Paper, or a very little higher.
Then at the diftance of fix Feet, and one or two
Inches from the Paper upon the Floor I ereCted
a Giafs Lens four Inches ajid a quarter broad,
which
B O O K I. x^
which might colled: the Rays coming from the
feveral Points of the Paper, and make them con-
verge towards fo many other Points at the fame
diftance of fix Feet, and one or two Inches on
the other fide of the Lens, and fo form the Image
of the coloured Paper upon a white Paper placed
there, after the fame manner that a Lens at a
Hole in a Window cafts the Images of Objedts
abroad upon a Sheet of white Paper in a dark
Room. The aforefiid white Paper, ere<5i:ed per-
pendicular to the Horizon, and to the Rays
which fell upon it from the Lens, I moved
fometimes towards the Lens, fometimes from
it, to find the Places where the Images of the

blue and red Parts of the coloured Paper appear-


ed mojft diftindt. Thofe Places I eafily knew by
the Images of the black Lines which I had made
by winding the Silk about the Paper. For the
Images of thofe fine and flender Lines (which
by reafon of their Blacknefs were like Shadows
on the Colours) were confufed and fcarce vifi-
ble, unlefs when the Colours on either fide of
each Line were terminated moft diftindlly. No-
ting therefore, as diligently as I could, the
Places where the Images of the red and blue
halfs of the coloured Paper appeared mofl di-
flindt,I found that where the red half of the
Paper appeared diftindt, the blue half appeared
confufed, fo that the black Lines drawn upon
itcould fcarce be feen ; and on the contrary,
where the blue half appeared mofl diftindt, the
red half appeared confufed, fo that the black
Lines upon it were fcarce vifible. And between
the two Places where thefe Images appeared
C 3 diflindt
2® OP T I C K S.

diftind there was the diftance of an Inch atid a


half; the diftance of the white Paper from the
Lens, when the Image of the red. half of the co-
loured Paper appeared moft diftind, being greater
by an Inch and an half than the diftance of the
fame white Paper from the Lens, when the Image
of the blue half appeared moft diftind:. Irv
like Incidences therefore of the blue and red
upon the Lens, the blue was refradted more by
the Lens than the red, fo as to converge fooner by
an Inch and a half, and therefore is more refran-
gible.
Illiijlration.In the twelfth Figure, DE iig-
nifies the coloured Paper, DG the blue half,
FE the red half, MN the Lens, HJ the white
Paper in that Place where the red half with its
black Lines appeared diftind, and h i the fame
Paper in that Place where the blue half appeared
diftind:. The Place h i was nearer to the Lens
MN than the Place H J by an Inch and an
half
^ Scholium. The fame Things fucceed, notwith-
ftanding that fome of the Circumftances be va-
ried y as in the firft Experiment when the Prifm
and Paper are any ways inclined to the Hori-
zon, and in both when coloured Lines are
drawn upon very black Paper. But in the De-
fcription of thefe Experiments, I have fet down
fuch Circumftances, by which either the Phae-
nomenon might be render'd more confpicuous,
or a Novice might more eafily try them, or by
which I did try them only. The fame Thing, I
have often done in the following Experiments :
Concerning all which, this one Admonition may
fuffice.
B O O K I. 2£
fuffice. Now from thefe Experiments It follows
nor, that all the Light of the blue more refran-
is

gible than all the Light of the red For both


:

Lights are mixed of Rays differently refrangible,


fome Rays not lefs re-
fo that in the red there are
frangible than thofe of the blue, and in the blue
there are fome Rays not more refrangible than
thofe of the red But thefe Rays, in proportion to
:

the whole Light, are but few, and ferve to dimi-


nifh the Event of the Experiment, but are not
able to deftroy it. For, if the red and blue Co-
lours were more dilute and weak, the diflance of
the Images would be lefs than an Inch and a half;
and if they were more intenfe and full, that di-
ftance would be greater, as will appear hereafter.
Thefe Experiments may fuffice for the Colours of
Natural Bodies. For in the Colours made by the
Refradtion of Prifms, this Propof tion will ap-
pear by the Experiments which are now to fol-
low in the next Fropolition.

PROP. 11. The OR. II.

lie Light of the Sim confifls of Rajs


differently Refrangible,

The Proof by Experiments.


Exper. 3. TN a very dark round
Chamber, at a

jj Hole, about one third Part of an


Inch broaa, made in the Shut of a Window, I
placed a Glafs Prifm, whereby the Beam of tlie
Sun's Light, which came in at that Hole, might
be refraj^ed upwards toward the oppofite \Vail
C 3 of
22 O P T I C K S.

of the Chamber, and there form a colour'd I-


mage of the Sun. The Axis of the Prifm ( that
is, the Line paffing through the middle of the

Prifm. from one end of it to the other end pa-


rallel to the edge of the Refracting Angle ) was
in this and the following Experiments perpen-
dicular to the incident Rays. About this Axis
I turned the Prifm flowly, and faw the refradt-
ed Light on the Wall, or coloured Image of
the Sun, firfl to defcend, and then to afcend.
Between the Defcent and Afcent, when the I-
mage feemed Stationary, I ftopp'd the Prifm,
and fix'd it in that Pofture, that it fhould be
moved no more. For in that Pofture the Re-
fractions of the Light at the two Sides of the
refracting Angle, that is, at the Entrance of the
Rays into the Prifm, and at their going out of
it, were equal to one another*. So alfo in other
Experiments, as often as I would have the Re-'
fractions on both fides the Prifm to be equal to
one another, I noted the Place where the Image
of the Sun formed by the refraCted Light ftood
ftill between its two contrary Motions, in the

common Period of its Progrefs and Regrefs ; and


when the Image fell upon that Place, I made
faft the Prifm. And in this Pofture, as the moft
convenient, it is to be underftood that all the

Prifms are placed in the following Experiments,


unlefs where fome other Pofture is defcribed.
The Prifm therefore being placed in this Po-
fture, I let the refracted Light fall perpendicu-
larly upon a Sheet of white Paper at the oppo-
fite Wall of the Chamber, and obferved the Fi-
* See eur AuthorV Leftiones Optica, Parti. Se£i. i. § !©•
StU, II. § 29. and SeSl. III. frop. 25. gurc
B O O K I. Q3
gure and Dimenrions of the Solar Image form-
ed on the Paper by that Light. This Image
was Oblong and not Oval, but terminated with
two Rectilinear and Parallel Sides, and tv/o Se-
micircular Ends. On its Sides it was bounded
pretty diftindtly, but on its Ends very confuled-
ly and indiftindly, the Light there decaying
and vanifl:iing by degrees. The Breadch of this
Image anfwered to the Sun's Diam.eter, and was
about two Inches and the eighth Part of an
Inch, including the Penumbra. For the Image
was eighteen Feet and an half dlftant from the
Prifm, and at this diftance that Breadth, if di-
minifhed by the Diameter of the Hole in the
Window-fhut, that is by a quarter of an Inch,
fubtended an Angle at the Prifm of about half
a Degree, which is the Sun's apparent Diame-
ter. But the Length of rhe Image was about ten
Inches and a quarter, and the Length oi the Re-
d-ilinear Sides about eight Inches ;and the re-
fracting Angle of the Prifm, whereby fo great a
Length was made, was 64 degrees. With a lefs
Angle the Length of the Image was lefs, the
Breadth remaining the fame. If the Prifm was
turned about its Axis that way which made the
Rays emerge more obliquely out of the fecond
refracting Surface of the Prifm, the Image foon
became an Inch or two longer, or morej and
if the Prifm was turned about the contrary
way, fo as to make the Rays fall more obliquely
on the firft refraCting Surface, the Image fooa
became an Inch or two fhorter. And there-
fore in trying this Experiment, I was as curi-
Qus as I could be in placing the Prifm by xhe
C 4 abo\^*
24 O P T I C K S.

above-mention'd Rule exadtly in fuch a Poflure,


that the Refradions of the Rays at their Emer-
gence out of the Prifm might be equal to that
at their Incidence on it. This Prifm had fome
Veins running along within the Glafs from one
end to the other, which fcattered fome of the
Sun's Light irregularly, but had no fenfible Ef-
fect in increafing the Length of the coloured
Spedirum. For I fame Experiment
tried the
with other Prifms with the fame Succefs. And
particularly with a Prifm which feemed free
from fuch Veins, and whofe refracting Angle
was 625 Degrees, I found the Length of the
Image 95 or 10 Inches at the diflance of i8|
Feet from the Prifm, the Breadth of the Hole
in the Window-fhut being J
of an Inch, as be-
fore. And becaufe it is eaiy to commit aMi-
llake in placing the Prifm in its due Pofture, I
repeated the Experiment four or five Times,
and always found the Length of the Image that
which is fet down
above. With another Prifm
of clearer Glafsand better Polifh, which feem-
ed free from Veins, and whofe refracting Angle
was 631 Degrees, the Length of this Image at
the fam^e diftance of i8i Feet was alfo about 10
Inches, or loi Beyond thefe Meafures for a-
bout a : or i of an Inch at either end of the
SpeCtrum the Light of the Clouds feemed to be a
little tinged with red and violet, but fo very
faintly, that I fufpeded that TinCture might ei-
ther v/holly, or in great Meafure arife from fome
Rays of the Spedtrum fcattered irregularly by
fome Inequalities in the Subftance and Polilli of
the Glafs, and therefore I did not include it in
I tliefe
B O O K I. 25
thefe Meafures. Now the different Magnitude
of the hole in the Window-fhut, and different
thicknefs of the Prifm where the Rays palled
through it, and different inclinations of the
Prifm to the Horizon, made no fenfible chan-
ges in the length of the Image. Neither did
the different matter of the Prifms make any:
for in a Veffel made of polifhed Plates of Glafs
cemented together in the fhape of a Prifm and
filled with Water, there is the like Succefs of
the Experiment according to the quantity of
the Refradlion. It is farther to be obferved,
that the Rays went on in right Lines from the
Prifm to the Image, and therefore at their very
going out of the Prifm had all that Inclina-
tion to one another from which the length of
the Image proceeded, that is, the Inclination of
more than two degrees and an half. And yet
according to the Laws of Opticks vulgarly re-
ceived, they could not poffibly be fo much incli-
ned to one another *. For let E [
G
mFig. 1 3.] re-
prefent the Window-fhut, F the hole made there-
in through which a beam of the Sun's Light
was tranfmitted into the darkned Chamber, and
ABC a Triangular Imaginary Plane whereby the
Prifm is feigned to be cut tranfverfly through
the middle of the Light. Or if you pleafe, let
ABC reprefent the Prifm it felf, looking di-
redtly towards the Speftator's Eye with its nearer
end; And let X Y be the Sun, the Pa- MN
per upon which the Solar Image or Spectrum is
caff, and P Tthe Image it felf whofe fides to-
wards 1; and w are Redlilinear and Parallel, and
ends towards P and T Semicircular. YKHP
and
* See OMx Author's Lenionei Opticcy Part. I. Sect. i. §.5.
:

^6 d p T I c K a
and X L J T are two Rays, the firft of. which
comes from the lower part of the Sun to the
higher part of the Image, and is refraded in the
Prifm at K and H, and the latter comes from
the higher part of the Sun to the lower part of
the Image, and is refradted at L and J. Since
the Refradions on both fides the Prifm are e-
qual to one another, that is, the Refraction at
K equal to the Refradion at J, and the Refra-
dion at L equal to the Refradion at H, fo that
the Refradions of the incident Rays at K and L
taken together, are equal to the Refradions of
the emergent Rays at H and J taken together
it follows by adding equal things to equal things,

that the Refradions at K


and H taken together,
are equal to the Refradions at J and L taken
together, and therefore the two Rays being e-
qually refraded, have the fame Inclination to
one another after Refradion which they had
before ; that is, the Inclination of half a Degree
anfwering to the Sun's Diameter. For fo great
was the Inclination of the Rays to one another
before Refradion. So then, the length of the
Image P T would by the Rules of Vulgar Op-
ticks fubtend an Angle of half a Degree at the
Prifm , and by Confequence be equal to the
breadth 'y w and therefore the Image would
-,

be round. Thus it would be were the two


Rays XL JT and YKHP, and all the reft which
form the Image P w T 'u, alike refrangible.
And therefore feeing by Experience it is found
that the Image is not round, but about five times
longer than broad, the Rays which going to the
upper end P of the Image fuffer the greateft Re-
fradion,
BOOK I. a;
fradion, mufl be more refrarxgible than thofe
which go to the lower end T, unlefs the Inequa-
lity of Refradtion be cafual.
This Image or Spectrum P T
was .coloured,
being red at its leaft end T, and vio-
refradled
let at its moil refraded end P and yellow ,

green and blue in the intermediate Spaces.


Which agrees with the firft Proportion, that
Lights which differ in Colour, do alio differ in
Refrangibility. The length of the Image in the
foregoing Experiments, I meafured from the
fainteft and outmoft red at one end, to the
fainteft and outmoft blue at the other end, ex-
cepting only a little Penumbra, whofe breadth
fcarce exceeded a (quarter of an Inch, as was
faid above.
Exper. 4. In the Sun's Beam which was pro-
pagated into the Room through the hole in the
Window-fhut at the diffance of fome Feet
,

from the hole, I held the Prifm in fuch a Po-


llure, that its Axis might be perpendicular to
that Beam. Then I looked through the Prifm
upon the hole, and turning the Prifm to and
fro about its Axis, to rhake the Image of the
Hole afcend and defcend-, when between its
two contrary Motions feemed Stationary, I
it

ftopp'd the Prifm, that the Refradions of both


fides of the refrading Angle might be equal to
each other, as in the former Experiment. In
this Situation of the Priim viewing through it
the faid Hole, I obferved the length of its re-
fraded Image to be many times greater than
its breadth, and that the moH: refraded part
thereof appeared violet, the lead refraded red,
2 the
28 O P T I C K S.

the middle parts blue, green and yellow in or-


der. The fame thing happen'd when I remo-
ved the Prifm out of the Sun's Light, and look-
ed through it upon the hole fliining by the
Light of the Clouds beyond it. And yet if the
Refradtion were done regularly according to
one certain Proportion of the Sines of Inci-
dence and Refradion as is vulgarly fuppofed,
the refraded Image ought to have appeared
round.
So then, by thefe two Experiments it appears,
that in equafi Incidences there is a confiderable
inequality of Refractions. But whence this in-
equality arifes, whether be that fome of the
it

incident Rays are refradled more, and others lefs,


conftantly, or by chance, or that one and the
fame Ray is by Refrad;ion difturbed, fliatter'd,
dilated , and as it and fpread into ma-
were fplit
ny diverging Rays, as Grimaldo fuppofes, does
not yet appear by thefe Experiments, but will
appear by thofe that follow.
Exper. 5. Confidering therefore, that if in
the third Experiment the Image of the Sun
jfhould be drawn out into an oblong Form, ei-
ther by a Dilatation of every Ray, or by any o-
ther cafual inequality of the Refradions, the
fame oblong Image would by a fecond Refra-
dion made fideways be drawn out as much in
breadth by the like Dilatation of the Rays, or o-
ther cafual inequality of the Refradions fide-
ways, I tried what would be the Effeds of fuch
a fecond Refradion. For this end I ordered
all things as in the third Experiment, and then
placed a fecond Prifm immediately after the
firfl
B O O K L 2p
I firfl: it, that it might again
in a crofs Pofition to
refrad; the the Sun*s Light which came
beam of
to it through the firfl: Prifm. In the firfl Prifm
this beam was refracted upwards, and in the
fecond fideways. And I found that by the Re-
fraction of the fecond Prifm, the breadth of the
Image was not increafed, but its fuperior part,
which in the firfl Prifm fuffered the greater Re-
fradlion, and appeared violet and blue, did again
in the fecond Prifm Refradlion
fuffer a greater
than its inferior part, which appeared red and
yellow, and this without any Dilatation of the
Image in breadth.
Illiijiration. Let S [in Fig. 14. ] reprefent
the Sun, F the hole in the Window, ABC tlie
iirfl Prifm, DH the fecond Prifm, Y the round
Image of the Sun made by a diredl beam of
Light when the Prifms are taken away, P T
the oblong Image of the Sun made by that beam
pafling through the firfl Prifm alone, when the
fecond Prifm is taken away, and p t the Image
made by the crofs Refradions of both Prifms
together. Now if the Rays which tend to-
wards the feveral Points of the round Image Y
were dilated and fpread by the Refraction of
the firfl Prifm, fg that they fhould not any lon-
ger go in fmgle Lines to fingle Points, but that
every Ray being fplit, fliattered, and changed
from a Linear Ray to a Superficies of Rays di-
verging from the Point of Refraction, and ly-
ing in the Plane of the Angles of Incidence and
Refraction, they fhould go in thofe Planes to
fo many Lines reaching almofl from one end of
the Image P T
to the other, and if that Image
fhould
50 '
OP T I C K S.

fhould thence become oblong: thofe Rays and


their feveral parts tending towards the feveral
Points of the Image P T
ought to be again di-
lated and fpread fide ways by the tranfverfe
Refraftion of the fecond Prifm, fo as to com-
pofe a four fquare Image, fuch as is reprefented
at iH. For the better underftanding of which,
let the Image T
P be diftinguiflied into five e-
qual parts P QK, KQRL, LRSM, MSVN,
N VT. And by the fame irregularity that the
orbicular Light Y is by the Refraction of the

firft Prifm dilated and drawn out into a long

Image P T, the Light P QK


which takes up a
fpace of the fame length and breadth with the
Light Y ought to be by the Refraftion of the
fecond Prifm dilated and drawn out into the
long Image tt q k p, and the Light K
QjR. L into
the long Image kqrl, and the Lights LRSM,
MSVN, N V T, into fo many other long I-
mages /r ^?;7, ?nsvny nvtl, and all thefe long
Images would compofe the four fquare Image
•TT?. Thus it ought to be were every Ray dila-
ted by Refraction, and fpread into a triangular
Superficies of Rays diverging from the Point
of Refradlion. For the fecond Refradion
would fpread the Rays one way as much as the
firft doth another, and fo dilate the Image in

breadth as much as the doth in length.


firft

And the fame thing ought to happen , were


fome Rays cafually refradled more than others.
But the Event is other wife. The Image P T
was not made broader by the Refraction of the
fecond Prifm., but only became oblique, as 'tis
reprefented at / ^ , its upper end P being by
the
:

B O O K I.
31
the Refradion tranflatedto a greater diftance than
its lower end T. So then the Light which went
towards the upper end P of the Image, was ( at
equal Incidences ) more refraded in the fecond
Prifm, than the Light which tended towards the
lower end T, that is the blue and violet, than the
red and yellow j and therefore was more refran-
gible. The fame Light was by the Refradion of
the iirft Prifm tranflated farther from the place.
Y to which it tended before Refraction ; and
therefore fuffered as well in the firft Prifm as in
the fecond a greater Refradion than the reft of
the Light, and by confequence was more refran-
gible than the reft, even before its incidence on
the firft Prifm.
Sometimes I placed a third Prifm after the
fecond, and fometimes alfo a fourth after the
third, by all which the Image might be often
refraded fideways: but the Rays which were
more refradted than the reft in the firft Prifm
were alfo more refraded in all the reft, and that
without any Dilatation of the Image fideways
and therefore thofe Rays for their conftancy of a
greater Refraction are defervedly reputed more
refrangible.
But that the meaning of this Experiment may
more clearly appear, it is to be confidercd that
the Rays which do fall
are equally refrangible
upon a Circle anfwering to the Sun's Difque.
For this was proved in the third Experiment.
By a Circle I underftand not here a perfect geo-
metrical Circle, but any orbicular Figure whofe
length is equal to its breadth,' and which, as
to Senfe, may feem circular. Let therefore AG
[in
32 O P T I C K S.

[in Fig. 15.] reprefent the Circle which all the


niofl: refrangible Rays propagated from the
whole Difque of the Sun, would illuminate and
paint upon the Wall if they were a-
oppofite
lonej EL which all the leafl refran-
the Circle
gible Rays would in like manner illuminate and
paint if they were alone; B H, C J, DK, the
Circles which fo many intermediate forts of
Rays would fucceffively paint upon the Wall,
if they were fmgly propagated from the Sun
in fucceflive order, the reft being always inter-
cepted ; and conceive that there are other in*
termediate Circles without Number which ,

innumerable other intermediate forts of Rays


would fucceffively paint upon the Wall if the
Sun fliould fucceffively emit every fort apart.
And feeing the Sun emits all thefe forts at once,
they muft all together illuminate and paint in-
numerable equal Circles, of all which, being
according to their degrees of Refrangibility
placed in order in a continual Series, that ob-
long Spedrum P T is compofed which I defcri-
bed in the third Experiment. Now
if the
Sun's 'circular Image Y
[in Fig. 14, 15.] which
is made by an unrefradled beam of Light was

by any Dilation of the fnigle Rays, or by any


other irregularity in the Refra<5lion of the iirft
Prifm, converted into the oblong Spedtrum,
P T then ought every Circle AG, B H, C J,
:

^c. in that Spedtrum, by the crofs Refradion


of the fecond Prifm again dilating or other wife
fcattering theRays as before, to be in like man-
ner drawn out and transformed into an oblong
Figure, and thereby the breadth of the Image
"
FT
B O O K I.
3 3
PT would be now as much augmented as tlie
length of the Image Y
was before by the Refra-
dionof the firftPrifmj and thus by the Refra-
ctions of both Prifms together would be formed
a four fquare Figure p ir t% as I defcribed a-
bove. Wherefore fmce the breadth of the Spe-
drum PT is not increafed by the Refradion

fideways, it is certain that the Rays are nqt fplit


or dilated, or otherways irregularly fcatter'd
by that Refradtion, but that every Circle is by
a regular and uniform Refradion tranflated
entire into another Place, as the Circle AG
by the Refradion into the place a gy
greateft
the Circle B H
by a lefs Refradioh into the
place b h, the Circle C J by a Refradion ftill
lefs into the place c i, and fo of the reft) by
which means a new Spedrum p t inclined to
the former P T is in like manner compofed of
Circles lying in a right Line and thefe Circles
;

muft be of the fame bignefs with the former,


becaufe the breadths of all the Spedrums Y,
P T and /> / at equal diftances from the Prifms
are equal.
I conlidered farther,tliat by the breadth of
the hole F
through which the Light enters in-
to the dark Chamber there is a Penumbra
,

made in the Circuit of the Spedrum Y, and


that Penumbra remains in the redilinear Sides
of the Spedrums P T
and pt. I 'placed there-
fore at that hole a Lens or Objed-glafs of a Te-
lefcope w^hich might caft the Image of the Sun
diftindly on Y without any Penumbra at all,
and found that the Penumbra of the redilinear
Sides of the oblong Spedrums P T and
/ 1 was
D alfo
34 O P T I C K S.

alfu thereby taken away, fo that thofe Sides ap-


peared as diilindily defined as did the Circum-
ference of the firft Image Y. Thus it happens
if the Glafs of the Prifms be free from Veins,
and their Sides be accurately plane and well
polifhed without thofe numberlefs Waves or
Curies which ufually arife from Sand-holes a
little fmoothed in polilliing with Putty. If the
Glafs be only well polifhed and free from Veins,
and the Sides not accurately plane, but a little
Convex or Concave, as it frequently happens;
yet may the three Spedtrums Y, P T
and p t
want Penumbras , but not in equal diftances
from the Prifms. Now from this want of Pe-
numbras, I knew more certainly that every one
of the Circles v/as refracted according to fome
inoft regular, uniform and conftant Law. For
if there were any irregularity in the Refra(5tion,
rhe right Lines A E and G L, which all the Cir-
cles in the Spe6lrum P T do touch, could not
by that Refraction be tranflated into the Lines
a e and ^ / as diflind: and fcraight as they were
before, but there would arife in thofe tranflated
Lines fome Penumbra or Crookednefs or Un-
dulation, or other fenfible Perturbation contrary
to what found by Experience. Whatfoever
is

Penumbra or Perturbation fhould be made in the


Circles by the crofs Refraction of the fecond
Prifm, all that Penumbra or Perturbation would
be confpicuous in the right Lines ae and gl
which touch thofe Circles. And therefore fince
there no fuch Penumbra or Perturbation in
is

thofe right Lines, there muft be none in the Cir^


cles. Since the difbance between thofe Tangents
2 or
B O O K r.
35
or breadth of the Spedrum not increafed
is

by the Diameters of the Circles


Refra<5tions, the
are not increafed thereby. Since thofe Tangents
continue to be right Lines, every Circle wiiich
in the iirft Prifm is more or lefs refraded, is
exactly in the fame proportion more or lefs re-
fracted in the fecond. And feeing all thefe
things continue to fucceed after the lame man-
ner when the Rays are again in a third Prifm,
and again in a fourth refra6led fideways, it is
evident that the Rays of one and the fame Circle,
as to their degree of Refrangibility, continue al-
ways uniform and homogeneal to one another,
and that thole of feveral Circles do differ in de-
gree of Refrangibility, and that in fome certain
and conflant Proportion. Which is the thing I
was to prove.
There is yet another Clrcumflance or two of
this Experiment by which it becomes Hill more
plain and convincing. Let the fecond Prifm
DH [in Fig, i6.] be placed not immedi-
ately after the firlt but at fome diftance
,

from it; fuppofe in the mid-way between it


and the Wall on which the oblong Spe<5truni
PT is caft, fo that the Light from the firft
Prifm may fall upon it in the form of an ob-
long Spedrum -r^ parallel to this fecond Prifm,
and be refraded tideways to form the oblong
Spedrum pt upon the Wall. And you- will
Spedirum /> / is inclined
find as before, that this
to that Spedrum P T, which the firft Prifm
forms alone without the fecond; the blue ends
P and p being farther diftant from one another
than the red ones T and /, and by confequence
'

D 2 that
3^ O P T I C K S.

that the Rays which go to the blue end cr of


the Image <t 7, and which therefore fuffer the
greateft Refradion in the firft Prifm, are again
in the fecond Prifm more refradied than the
reft.

The fame thing I try'd alfo by letting the


Sun's Light into a dark Room through two lit-
tle round holes F and (p [in Fig. 17.] made in
the Window , and with two parallel Prifms
ABC and a/Sy placed at thofe holes ( one at
each ) two beams of Light to
refra6ting thofe
the oppofite Wall of the Chamber, in fuch man-
ner that the tv/o colour'd Images P and T MN
which they there painted were joined end to end
and lay in one flraight Line, the red end of T
the one touching the blue end of the other. M
For if thefe two refracfted Beams were again.
by a third Prifm DH
placed crofs to the two
firft , refraded , and the Spedlrums
fideways
thereby tranilated to fome other part of the
Wall of the Chamber, fuppofe the Sped:rum
PT to pt and the Spedrum M
N to m ;/, thefe
tranflated Spedrums p t and. m n would not lie
in one ftraight Line with their ends contiguous
as before, but be broken oif from one another
and become parallel, the blue end m of the I-
mage m n bein^ by a greater Refradion tran-
flated farther from its former place T, than M
the red end t of the other Image p t from the
fam.e place MT ; which puts the Propofition
pad Difpute. And happens whether the
this
third Prifm DH be placed immediately after
the two firft, or at a great diftance from
them, fo that the Light refraded in the two
firfl
;

B O O K I. '
37
iirftPrifms be either white and circular, or co-
loured and oblong when it falls on the third.
^xper. 6. In the middle of two. thin Boards
I made round holes a third part of an Inch in
diameter , and iri the Window-fliut a much
broader hole being made to let into my dark-
ned Chamber a large Beam of the Sun's Light;
I placed a Prifm behind the Shut in that beam
to refradl it towards the oppofite Wali, and
clofe behind the Prifm I fixed one of the Boards,
in fuch manner that the middle of the refradled
Light might pafs through the hole made in it,
and the reft be intercepted by the Board. Then
at the diftance of about twelve Feet from the
firft Board I fixed the other Board in fuch man-

ner, that the middle of the refraded Light which


canie through the hole in the firft Board, and
fellupon the oppofite Wall, might pafs through
the hole in this other Board and the reft being
,

intercepted by the Board might paint upon it


the coloured Spectrum of the Sun. And clofe
behind this Board I fixed another Prifm to rc-
fra<ft the Light v/hich came through the hole.
Then returned fpeedily to the firft Prifm, and
I
by turning it llowly to and fro about its Axis,
I caufed the Image which fell upon the fecond
Board to move up and down upon that Board,
that all its parts might fucceflively pafs through
the hole in that Board and fall upon the Prifm
behind it. And mean time,
in. the I noted the
places on the oppofite Wall to which that Light
afterits Refraftion in the fecond Prifm did pafs

and by the difference of the places I found that


the Light which being ir.olt refraded in the
JD 3 firft
38 O P T I C K S.

firfl Prifm did go to the blue end of the Image,

was again more refraded in the fecond Prifm


than the Light which went to the red end of
that Image, which proves as well the firfl Pro-
portion as the fecond. And this happened whe-
ther the Axis of the two Prifms were parallel, or
inclined to one another, and to the Horizon in
any given Angles.
TUnJlration. Let F \\xs.Fig. i8.] be the wide
hole in the Window-ihut, through which the
Sun fliines upon the firfl Prifrii ABC, and let
the refracted Light fall upon the middle of the
Board D E, and the middle part of that Light
upon the hole G
made in the middle part of that
Board. Let this trajed:ed part of that Light
fall again upon the middle of the fecond Board
d e, and there paint fuch an oblong coloured I-
mage of the Sun as was defcribed in the third
Experiment. By turning the Prifm flow- ABC
iy to and fro about its Axis, this Image will be
made to move up and down the Board de,
and by this means all its parts from one end to
the other may bemade to pafs fucceffively
through the is made in the mid-
hole g which
dle of that Board. In the mean while another
Prifm abcisto be fixed next after that hole gy
to refrad: the trajed:ed Light a fecond time.
And thefe things being thus orderea, I marked
the places M
and N
of the oppofite Wall upon
which the refracted Light fell, and found that
whilft thetwo Boards and fecond Prifm re-
mained unmoved, thofe places by turning the
firfl: Prifm aboutits Axis were changed perpe-

tually. For when the lower part of the Light


which
B O O K I.
3p
which fell upon the fecond Board d e \vas call
through the hole g, it went to a lower place M
on the Wall, and when the higher part of that
Light was caft through the fame hole o-, it went
to a higher place N
on the Wall, and wheii any
intermediate part of the Light was caft through
that hole, it went to fome place on the Wall be-
tween M
and N. The unchanged Pofition of
the holes in the Boards, made the L^cidence
of the Rays upon the fecond Prifm to be the
fame in all cafes. And yet in that common In-
cidence fome of the Rays were more refra(5tcd,
and others lefs. , And thofe were more refraded
in this Prifm, which by a greater Refradion in
the firft Prifm were more turned out of the
way, and therefore for their Conftancy of being
more refradied are defervedly called more refran-
gible.
Exper. J. At two holes made near one ano-
ther in my Window- fliutplaced two Prifms,
I
one at each, which nii?;ht caft upon the oppo-
fite Wall (after the manner of the third Expe-
riment) two oblong coloured Luages of the
Sun. And at a little diftance from the Wall I
placed a long (lender Paper with ftraight and pa-
rallel and ordered the Prifms and Pa-
edges,
per fo, might
that the red Colour of cneiCmage
fall diredly upon one half of the Paper, and
the violet Colour of the other Image upon the
other half of the fame Paper fo that the Pa-
;

per appeared of two Colours, red and violet,


much after the manner of the painted Paper
in the firft and fecond Experiments. Then
with a black Cloth I covered the Wall behind
D 4 thQ
40 O P T I C K S.

the Paper, that no Light might be refledied from


it to difliirb the Experiment, and viewing the

Paper through a third Prifm held parallel to it,


I faw that half of it which was illuminated by
the violet Light to be divided from the other
half by a greater Refra(5lion, efpecially when I
went a good way off from the Paper. For
when I viewed it too near at hand, the two halfs
of the Paper did not appear fully divided from
one another, but feemed contiguous at one of
their Angles like the painted Paper in the firft
Experiment. Which alfo happened when the
Paper was too broad.
Sometimes inftead of the Paper I ufed a white
Thred, and this appeared through the Prifm
divided into two parallel Threds as is repre-
fented in the nineteenth Figure , where DG
denotes the Thred illuminated with violet Light
from D to E and with red Light from F to G,
and d e fg are the parts of the Thred feen by
Refradion. If one half of the Thred be con-
ftanrly illuminated v/ith red, and the other half
be ilkuninated with all the Colours fucceffively,
( which may be done by caufing one of the

Prifms to be turned about its Axis whilft the


other remains unmoved) this other half in view-
ing the Thred through the Prifm, will appear
in a continual right Line with the firfl half when
illuminated with red, and begin to be a little
divided from it when illuminated with Orange,
jind remove farther from itwhen illuminated
yvith yellow,and ftill farther when with green,
^nd farther when with blue, and go yet farther
pff when illuriiinated with Iiidigo, and fartheft
when
B O O K L 41
when with deep violet. Which plainly fhews,
that the Lights of feveral Colours are more and
more refrangible one than another, in this Order
of their Colours, red, orange, yellow, green,
blue, indigo, deep violet j and fo proves as well
the firft Proportion as the fecond.
I caufed alfo the coloured Spedrums P T
[ ] and
in Fig. ij. MN
made in a dark Cham-
ber by the Refradions of -two Prifms to lie in
a Right Line end to end, as was defcribed above
in the fifth Experiment, and viewing them
through a third Prifm held parallel to their
Length, they appeared no longer in a Right
Line, but became broken from one another, as
they are reprefented at ^ ^ and ;;/ ;/, the violet
end m of the Specftrum m n being by a greater
Refradion tranllated farther from its former
Place M
T than the red end t of the other
Spedrum pt.
I farther caufed thofe two Spedtrums P T
[ in Fig. 20. ] and MN to become co-incident
in an inverted Order of their Colours, the red
end of each falling on the violet end of the o-
ther, as they are reprefented in the oblong Fi-
gure PTMN J and then viewing them through
a Prifm DH
held parallel to their Length, they
appeared not co-incident, as when view'd with
the naked Eye, but in the form of two diftindt
Spedrums p t and m n croffing one another in
the middle after the manner of the Letter X.
"Which fliews that the red of the one Spedrum
and violet of the other, which were co-incident
at PN and MT, being parted from one another
by a greater Refradipn of the violet to p and m
thau
42 O P T I C K S.

than of the red to n and /, do differ in degrees of


Refrangibility.
I illuminated alfo a little Circular fiece of
white Paper all over with the Lights of both
Prifms intermixed, and when it was illumina-
ted with the red of one Speftrum, and deep
violet of the other, fo as by the Mixture of
thofe Colours to appear all over purple, I view-
ed the Paper, firft at a lefs diflance, and then
at a greater, through a third Prifmj and as I
went from the Paper, the refracted Image there-
of became more and more divided by the une-
qual Refraction of the two mixed Colours, and
at length parted into two diftind: Images, a red
one and a violet one, whereof the violet v/as
fartheft from the Paper, and therefore fuffered
the greateft Refraction. And when that Prifm
at the Window, which caft the violet on the Pa-
per was taken away, the violet Image difiip-
peared ; but when the other Prifm was taken
away the red vaniflied which fhews, that thefe
;

two Images were nothing elfe than the Lights


of the two Prifms, which had been intermixed
on the purple Paper, but were parted again by
their unequal Refradions made in the third
Prifm, through which the Paper was view'd.
This alfo was obfervable, that if one of the
Prifms at the Window, fuppgfe that which caft
the violet on the Paper, v/as turned about its
Axis to make all the Colours in this order,- vio-
let, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange, red,
fall fucceffivelyon the Paper from that Prifm,
the violet Image changed Colour accordingly,
turning fucceffively to indigo, blue, green, yel-
low
B O O K ^. 45
low and red, and in changing Colbur came nearer
and nearer to the red Image made by the other
Prifm, until when it was alfo red both Images be-
came fully co-incident.
I placed alfo tv/o Paper Circles very near one
another, the one in the red Light of one Prifm,
and the other in the violet Light of the other.
The Circles were each of tliem an Inch in diame-
ter, and behind them the Wall was dark, that- the
Experiment might not be diflurbed by any Light
coming from thence. Thefe Circles thus illu*
minated, I viewed through a Prifm fo held, that
the Refradlion might be made towards the red
Circle, and as 1 went from them they came nearer
and nearer together, and at length became co-
incident } and afterwards when I went flill far-
ther off, they parted again in a contrary Order,
the violet by a greater Refradtion being carried
beyond the red.
Exper. 8. In Summer, when the Sun's Light
ufes to be ftrongefl, placed a Prifm at the
I
Hole of the Window-fliut, as in the third Expe-
riment, yet fo that its Axis might be parallel to
the Axis of the. World, and at the oppofite
Wall in the Sun's refrad:ed Light, I placed an
open Book. Then going fix Feet and two Inches
from the Book, 1 placed there the above-
mentioned Lens, by which the Light reflected
from the Book might be made to converge and
meet again at the diftance of fix Feet and two
Inches behind the Lens, and there paint the
Species of the Book upon a Sheet of white Pa-
per much after the manner of the fecond Ex-
periment. The Book and Lens being made fall,
I no-
44 O P T I C K S.

I noted the Place where the Paper was, when


the Letters of the Book, illuminated by the
fuUeft red Light of the Solar Image falling upon
it, did cafl their Species on that Paper moft
diftinftly And then I ftay'd till by the Motion
:

of the Sun, and confequent Motion of his Image


on the Book, all the Colours from that red to
the middle of the blue pafs'd over thofe Let-
ters J and when thofe Letters were illuminated
by that blue, I noted again the Place of the Pa-
per when
they caft their Species moft diftincftly
upon it And
I found that this laft Place of the
:

Paper was nearer to the Lens than its former


Place by about two Inches and an half, or two
and three quarters. So much fooner therefore
did the Light in the violet end of the Image
by a greater Refradion converge and meet,
than the Light in the red end. But in trying
this, the Chamber was as dark as I could make
it. For, if thefe Colours be diluted and weak-
ned by the Mixture of any adventitious Light,
the diftance between the Places of the Paper
will not be fo great. This diftance in the fe-
cond Experiment, where the Colours of natural
Bodies were made ufe of, was but an Inch and
an half, by reafon of the Imperfection of thofe
Colours. Flere in the Colours of the Prifm,
which are manifeftly more full, intenfe, and
livelythan thofe of natural Bodies, the diftance
is two Inches and three quarters. And were the
Colours ftill more full, I queftion not but that
the diftance would be confiderably greater. For
the coloured Light of the Prifm, by the inter-
fering of the Circles defcribed in the fecond
Figure
B O O K L 45
Figure of the fifth Experiment, and alfo by the
Light of the very bright Cloiick next the Sun's
Body intermixing with thefe Colours, and by
the Light fcattered by the Inequalities in the
Polifh of the Prifin, was fo very much com-
pounded, that the Species which thofe faint and
dark Colours, the indigo and violet, caft upon
the Paper were not diilind enough to be well ob-
ferved.
Exper. g. A Prifm, whofe two Angles at its
Bafe were equal to one another, and half right
ones, and the third a right one, I placed in a
Beam of the Sun's Light let into a dark Cham-
ber through a Hole in the Window-fhut, as in
the third Experiment. And turning the Prifin
flowly. about its Axis, until all the Light which
went through one of its Angles, and was refradl-
ed by it began to be refled:ed by its Bafe, at
which till then it went out of the Glafs, I cb-
ferved that thofe Rays which had fuifered the
greateft Pvcfradiion were fooner reflected than
the refi:. I. conceived therefore, that thofe Ravs
of the refledled Light, which were mofi: re-
frangible, did firfl of all by a total Reflexion
become more copious in that Light than the
refi:, and that afterwards the refi: alfo, by a total

Reflexion, became as copious as thefe. To try


this, I made the refledted Light pafs through
another Prifm, and being refracted by it to fall
afterwards upon a Sheet of white Paper placed
at fome difiance behind it, and there by that
Refradion to paint the ufual Colours of the
Prifm. And then caufing the firfi: Prifm to be
turned about its Axis as above, I obferved that
when
4<5 O P T I C K S.

when thofe Rays, which Prifm had fuf-


in this
fered the greateft Refraction, and appeared of a
bkie and violet Colour began to be totally re-
flected, the blue and violet Light on the Paper,
which was moft refracted in the fecond Prifm,
received a fenlible Increafe above that of the
red and yellow, which was leafl refracted ; and
afterwards, when the reft of the Light which
was green, yellow, and red, began to be totally
reflected in the firft Prifm, the Light of thofe
Colours on the Paper received as great an In-
creafe as the violet and blue had done before.
Whence 'tis manifeft, that the Beam of Light
reflected by the Bafe of the Prifm, being aug-
mented firft by the more refrangible Rays, and
afterwards by the lefs refrangible ones, is com-
pounded of Rays diiferently refrangible. And
that all fuch reflected Light is of the fame Na-
ture with the Sun's Light before its Incidence
on the Bafe of the Prifm, no Man ever doubt-
ed y it being generally allowed, that Light by
fuch Reflexions fuffers no Alteration in its Modi-
fications and Properties. I do not here take No-
tice of any RefraCtions made in the fides of the
firft Prifm, becaufe the Light enters it perpendi-

cularly at the firft fide, and goes out perpendicu-


larly at the fecond fide, and therefore fuffers
none. So then, the Sun's incident Light being of
tlie fame Temper and Conftitution with his emer-

gent Light, and the laft being compounded of


Rays differently refrangible, the firft muft be in
like manner compounded.
lUuJtratmi. In the twenty-firft Figure, ABC
is the firft Prifm, B C its Bafe, B and C its

equal
B O O K I.
47
equal Angles at the Bafc, each of 4^ Degrees,
A its reftangular Vertex, F M
a beam of the
€un's Light let into a dark Room through a
hole F one third part of an Inch broad, M
its

Incidence on the Bafe of the Prifm, MG


a lefs
refrafted Ray, MH
a more refradted Ray, MN
the beam of Light refleded from the Bafe,
V X Y the fecond Prifm by which this beam in
paffing through it is refradled, N
t the lefs re-
fraded Light of this beam, and N/> the more
refraded part thereof. When the firft Prifm
A B C is turned about its Axis according to the
order of the Letters ABC, the Rays MH e-
merge^more and more obliquely out of that
Prifm, and at length after their moft oblique
Emergence are refleded towards N, and going
on to p do increafe the Number of the Rays
N^. Afterwards by continuing the Motion of
the Prifm, the Rays
iirft MG
are alfo refleded
to N increafe the number of the Rays
and N
f.

And therefore the Light MNadmits into its


Compofition, firft the more refrangible Rays,
and then the lefs refrangible Rays, and yet af-
Compofition is of the fame Nature with
ter this
the Sun's immediate Light F M, the Reflexion
of the fpecular Bafe B C caufing no Alteration
therein.
Rxper. 10. Two
Prifms, which were alike
in Shape, I tied fo together, that their Axis and
oppofite Sides being parallel, they compofed a
Parallelopiped. x^nd, the Sun finning into my
dark Chamber through a little hole in the Win-
dow-fliut , placed that Parallelopiped in his
I
beam at fome diftancc from the hole, in fuch a
Pofi:urc\
O P T I C K S.

Pofture, that the Axes of the Prifms might be


perpendicular to the incident Rays , and that
thole Rays being incident upon the firft Side

of one Prifm, might go on through the two


contiguous Sides of both Prifms, and emerge
out of the laft Side of the fecond Prifm. This
Side being parallel to the firft Side of the firfl
Prifm, caufed the emerging Light to be paral-
lel to the incident. Then, beyond thefe two
Prifms I placed a third, which might refrad;
that emergent Light , and by that Refradiion
caft the ufual Colours of the Prifm upon the
oppofite Wall, or upon a fheet of white Paper
held at a convenient Diftance behind the Prifm
for that refracCled Light to fall upon it. After
this I turned the Parallelopiped about its Axis,
and found that when the contiguous Sides of
the two Prifms became fo oblique to the inci-
dent Rays, that thofe Rays began all of them to
be refled:ed, thofe Rays which in the third
Prifm had fuffered the greateft Refraction, and
painted the Paper with violet and blue, were
firft of all by a total Reflexion taken out of the

tranfmitted Light , the reft remaining and on


the Paper painting their Colours of green, yel-
low, orange and red, as before ; and afterwards
by continuing the Motion of the two Prifms,
the reft of the Rays alfo by a total Reflexion
vanift^ed in order, according to their degrees
of Refrangibility. The Light therefore which
emerged out of the two Prifms is compound-
ed of Rays differently refrangible, feeing the
more refrangible Rays may be taken out of it,
while the lefs refrangible remain. But this
Light
B O O K I.
4p
Light being trajeded only through the parallel
Superficies of the two Prifms, if it fuffer'd any
change by the Refradlion of one Superficies it
lofl that Impreihon by the contrary Refraction
of the other Superficies, and fo being refbor'd to
its priftine Conftitution, became of the fame Na-

ture and Condition as at firfl before its Incidence


on thofe Prifms ; and therefore, before its Inci-
dence, was as much compounded of Rays diffe-
rently refrangible, as afterwaVds.
llliiftration. In thetwenty fecond Figure
ABC and BCD are the two Prifms tied together
in the form of a Parallelopiped , their Sides
BC and C B being contiguous, and their Sides
AB and C D parallel. And H
J K is the third
Prifm, by which the Sun's Light propagated
through the hole F into the dark Chamber, and
there pafiing through thofe fides of the Prifms
AB, BC, CBandCD, is refraded at O to
the white Paper P T, falling there partly upon
P by a greater Refra6ticn, partly upon by a T
lefs Refraction, and partly upon and other R
in-
termediate places by intermediate Refrations.
By turning the Parallelopiped ACBD about its

Axis, according to the order of tlie Letters A,


C, D, B, at length when the contiguous Planes
B C and C B become futhciently oblique to the
Rays F M, which are incident upon them at M,
there will vanifh totally out of the refraded
Light OPT, firfl of ail the mofl refraded Rays

OP, (the reft OR


and OT
remaining as be-
fore ) then the Rays O R and other intermedi-
ate ones, and laftly, the leaft refracted Rays OT-
For when the Plane BC becomes fufficiently
E oblique
50 O P T I C K S.

oblique to the Rays incident upon it , tliofe


Rays will begin to be totally refleded by it to-
wards N J
and firft the moft refrangible Rays
will be totally refledted ( as was explained in
the preceding Experiment ) and by Confequence
muft firft difappear at P , and afterwards the
reft as they are in order totally refledted to N,
they niuft difappear in the fame order at R
and T. So then the Rays which at O fuf-
fer the greatefl Refraftion, may be taken out
of the Light M O whilft the reft of the Rays
remain in it , and therefore that Light MO
is compounded of Rays differently refrangi-
ble. And becaufe the Planes A B and C D
are parallel, and therefore by equal and con-
trary Refradlions deftroy one anothers Ef-
fects, the incident Light F M muft be of the
fame Kind and Nature with the emergent Light
M O, and therefore doth alfo confifl of Rays
differently refrangible. Thefe two Lights F M
and MO, before the moft refrangible Rays are
feparated out of the emergent Light M O, a-
gree in Colour, and in all other Properties lo
far as my Obfervation reaches , and therefore
are defervedly reputed of the fame Nature and
Conftitution, and by Confequence the one is
compounded as well as the other. But after
the moft refrangible Rays begin to be totally
refledted, and thereby feparated out of the e-
mergent Light M O, that Light changes its Co-
lour from white to a dilute and faint yellow,
a pretty good orange, a very full red fuccef-
fively, and then totally vanifties. For after the
moft refrangible Rays which paint the Paper at
2 P with
B O O K I. 51
P with a purple Colour^ are by a total P.efje^
xion taken out of the beam of Light O, theM
reft of the Colours which appear on the Paper
at R and T being mix'd in the Liglit O M
compound there a faint yellow, and after the
blue and part of the green which appear on the
Paper between P and R are taken away, the reft
which appear between R and T ( that is the yel-
low, orange, red and a little green) being mix-
ed in the beam MO
compouiid there an orange;
and when all the Rays are by Reflexion taken
out of the beam M
O, except: the leaft refran-
gible, which at T appear of a full red, their
Colour is the fame in that beam O as M after-
wards at T, the Refrafticn of the Prifm HJK
ferving only to feparate the differently refrangible
Rays, without making any Alteration in their
Colours, as ftiall be more fully proved hereafter.
All which confirms as well the firft Propofition
as the fecond.
Scholium. If this Experiment and the former
be conjoined and made one by applying a fourth
Prifm VX Y [in Fig. 22.] to refra(5t the refied:ed
beam MN towards //>, the Conclufion will be
clearer. For then the Light N/> v/hich in the
fourth Prifm is more refracted,- will become ful-
ler and ftronger when the Light O P, which in
the third Prifm H
J K is more refracted, va-
nifties at P; and afterwards when the lefs re-
fracted Light O T vanifhes at T, the lefs re-
fraded Light N
t will become increafed whilft
the more refracted Light at p receives no far-
ther increafe. And as the traje6ted beam MO
in vanifbing is always of fuch a Colour as ought
52 o p T I c K s:

to refultfrom the mixture of the Colours which


fall upon the Paper P T fo is the refleded
,

beam M N always of fuch a Colour as ought to


refult from the mixture of the Colours which
fall upon the Paper p t. For when the mofl
refrangible Rays are by a total Reflexion taken
out of- the beam M O, and leave that beam of
an orange Colour, the Excefs of thofe Rays in
the refled:ed Light, does not only make the vio-
let, indigo and blue at p more full, but alfo

makes the beam MN change from the yellowidi


Colour of the Sun's Light, to a pale white in-
clining to blue, and afterward recover its yel-
lowifli Colour again, fo foon as all the reft of the
tranfmitted Light MOT is reflected.
Now feeing that in all of Expe-
this variety
riments , whether the Trial be made in Light
refledled, and that either from natural Bodies,
as in the firft and fecond Experiment, or fpe-
cular, as in the ninth; or in Light refrad:ed,
and that either before the unequally refracted
Rays are by diverging fepa rated from one an-
other, and loling their whitenefs which they
have altogether, appear feverally of feveral Co-
lours, as in the fifth Experiment; or after they
are feparated from one another, and appear co-
lour'd as in the fixth, feventh, and eighth Ex-
periments; or in Light trajedted through paral-
lel Superficies, deftroying each others Eifedis,
as in the tenth Experiment ; there are always
found Rays, which at equal Incidences on the
fame Medium fufFer unequal Refractions, and
that without any fplitting or dilating of fmgle
Rays, or contingence in the inequality of the
3.
Refra-
B O O K I.
53
Refradtions, as is proved in the fifth and fixth
Experiments. And Rays which dif-
feeing the
fer in Refranglbility may be parted and forted
from one another, and that either by Refradion
as in the third Experiment, or by Reflexion as in
the tenth, and then the fcveral forts apart at
equal Incidences fuffer unequal Refradions, and
thofe' forts are more refracted than others after
Separation, which were more refraded before
it, as and following Experiments,
in the fixth
and if the Sun's Light be trajeded through three
or more crofs Prifms fucceffively, thofe Rays
•which in the firft Prilm are refraded more than
others, are in all the following Prifms refraded
more than others in the fame Rate and Propor-
tion, appears by the fifth Experiment j it's
as
manifeft that the Sun's Light is an heterogeneous
Mixture of Rays, fome of which are conftantly
more refrangible than others, as was propofed.

PROP, m. Theor. III.

'The Suns Light of PMys differing


conftjls
in Reflexibility^ and thofe Puiys are more
reflexible than others 'which are more
refra?igible.

np H I 8 manifeft by the ninth and tenth


is
*- Experiments For in the ninth Experi-
:

ment, by turning the Prifm about its Axis, un-


til the Rays within it which in going out into

the Air were refraded by its Bafe, became fo


oblique to that Bafe, as to begin to be totally
E 3 refiede4
54 O P T I C K S.

refleded thereby; thofe Rays became iirft of all


totally refledied,which before at equal Inciden-
ces with the reft had fuffered the greateft Refra-.
(Stion. And the fame thing "happens in the Refle-
xion made by the commDn Bafe of the two
Prifms in the tenth Experiment.

PROP. IV. Prob. L


7v fepa7^ate from one another the heteroge-
neous Rays of compound Light,

^"T^ HE heterogeneous Rays are in fome mea-


-*- fure feparated from one another by the
Refradion of the Prifm in the third Experi^
ment, and in the fifth Experiment, by taking a-r
way the Penumbra from the redilinear fides of
the coloured Image, that Separation in thofe ve-
ry rcdilinear lides or ftraight edges of the I-
mage becomes perfed. But in all places be-
tween thofe rectilinear edges, thofe innumera-
ble Circles there defcribed, which are feveral-
ly illuminated by homogeneal Rays, by interfe-
ring with one another, and being every where
commix'd , do render the Light fufficiently
compound. But if thefe Circles, whilft their
Centers keep their Diftances and Pofitions, could
be made lefs in Diameter, their interfering one
with another, and by Confequence the Mixture
of the heterogeneous Rays would be propor-
tionally diminiih'd. In the twenty third Figure
let AG, BH, CJ, DK, EL, FM be the Cir-
cles which fo many forts of Rays flowing frppi
the
,

B O O K I.
55
the fame dlfque of the Sun, do in the third Ex-
periment illuminate j of all which and innu-

merable other intermediate ones lying in a con-


tinual Seriesbetween the two rectilinear and pa-
rallel the Sun's oblong Image P
edges of T
that Image is compos'd, as was explained in
the fifth Experiment. And let ^^, bh^ ci^ d ky
e /, fm be fo many lefs Circles lying in a like
continual Series between two parallel right Lines
^y and g m with the fame diftances between their
Centers, and illuminated by the fame forts of
Rays, that is the Circle a g with the fmie fort
by which the correfponding Circle A G was il-
luminated, and the Circle b h with the furie fort
by which the correfponding Circle B was illu- H
minated, and the reft of the Circles ci, d k, el,
fm refped;ively, with the fame forts of Rays by
which the feveral correfponding Circles C J,
D K, EL, F M were illuminated. In the Fi-
gure P T compofed of the greater Circles, three
of thofe Circles A G, B H, C J, are fo ex-
panded into one another, that the three forts of
Rays by which thofe Circles are illuminated ,

together with other innumerable forts of inter-


mediate Rays, are mixed at Q^^ in the middle of
the Circle B H. And the like Mixture happens
throughout almofl the whole length of the Fi-
gure P T. But in the Figure p t compofed of
the lefs Circles, the three lefs Circles a g^ b hy c /,
which anfwer to thofe three greater, do not ex-
tend into one another nor are there any v/liere
j

mingled fo much as any two of the three forts of


Rays by which thofe Circles are illuminated, and
E 4 whicls
.

5^ O P T I C K S.

which in the Figure P T are all of them inter-


mingled at B H.
Now he that fhall thus conlider It, will eafily
underfland that the Mixture is diminifhed in
the fame Proportion with the Diameters of the
Circles. If the Diameters of the Circles whilil
their Centers remain the fame, be made three
times lefs than before, the Mixture will be alfo
three times lefs; times lefs, the Mixture
if ten
will be ten times and fo of other Propor-
lefs,

tions. That is, the Mixture of the Rays in the


greater Figure P T will be to their Mixture in
the lefs/>/, as the Latitude of the greater Fi-
gure is to the Latitude of the lefs. For the La-
titudes of thefe Figures are equal to the Dia-
meters of their Circles. And iience it eafily fol-
lows, that the Mixture of the Rays in the re-
'fra(fted Spedlrum pt is to the Mixture of the
Rays in the dired: and immediate Light of the
Sun, as the breadth of that Spedrum is to the
difference between the length and breadth of the
fame Specflrum.
So then, if we would diminifh the Mixture
of the Rays, we are to diminifli the Diameters
of the Circles. Now thefe would be diminifh-
ed if the Sun's Diameter to which they anfwer
could be made lefs than it is, or ( which comes
to the fame Purpofe) if without Doors, at a
great diflance from the Prifm towards the Sun,
fom.e opake Body were placed, with a round
iioje in the middle of it to intercept ail the
,

Sun's Light excepting fo much as coming


,

from the middle of his Body could pafs through


that
BOOK! 57
that Hole to the Prifm. For fo the Circles A G,
B H, and the reft, would not any longer anfwer
to the whole Difque of the Sun, but only to that
Part of it which could be feen from the Prifm
through that Hole, that it is to the apparent Mag-
nitude of that Hole view'd from the Prifm. But
that thefe Circles may anfwer more diftindtly to
that Hole, a Lens is to be placed by the Prifm to
cafl the Image of the Hole, (that is, every one

of the Circles AG, BH, &c.) diflindly upon


.

the Paper at PT, after fuch a manner, as by a


Lens placed at a Windovy% the Species of Ob-
jects abroad are caft diftindtly upon a Paper
within the Room, and the red:ilinear Sides of
the oblong Solar Image in the fifth Experiment
became diilind: without any Penum.bra. If this
be done, it will not be neceflary to place that
Hole very no not beyond the Win-
far
off,

dow. And therefore inftead of that Hole, I


ufed the Hole in the Window-lluit, as fol-
lows.
Expcr. II. In the Sun's Light let into my
darken'd Chamber through a fmall round Hole
in my Window-fluit, at about ten or twelve
Feet from the Window, I placed a I^ens, by
which the Image of the Hole might be diilindly
call upon a Sheet of white Paper, placed at
the diftance of fix, eight, ten, or twelve Feet
from the Lens. For, according to the diffe*
rence of the Lenfes I ufed various diftances,
which I think not worth the while to defcribe.
Then immediately after the Lens I placed a
Prifm, by which the trajeded Light might be
refracted either upwards or fide-ways, and there-
'

by
y8 O P T I C K S.

by the round Image, which the Lens alone did


caft upon the Paper might be drawn out into a
long one with Parallel Sides, as in the third Ex-
periment. This oblong Image I let fall upon
another Paper at about the fame diftance from
the Prifm as before, moving the Paper either
towards the Prifm or from it, until I found the
juil diftance where the Redilinear Sides of the
Image became moft diflind:. For in this Cafe,
theCircular Images of the Hole, which compofe
that Image after the fame manner, that the Cir-
cles ag^ bh^ ci^ &c. do the Figure ^/ [in Fig.21^
were terminated moft diftindly without any
Penumbra, and therefore' extended into one ano-
ther the leaft that they could, and by confequence
the Mixture of the heterogeneous Rays was now
the leaft of all. By this means I ufed to form
an oblong Image (fuch as is p t) [in Fig. 23,
and 24.] of Circular Images of the Hole, (fuch
as are agy bh, ciy &;c.) and by ufmg a greater
or^lefs Hole in the Window-fhut, I made the
Circular Images a g, b hy ciy Sec. of which it
was formed, to become greater or lefs at pleafure,
and thereby the Mixture of the Rays in the
Image p t to be as much, or as little as I de-
fired.
IlluJlratio7i. In the tu'enty-fourth Figure, F
reprefents the Circular Hole in the Window-
fhut, MN the Lens, whereby the Image or Spe-
cies of that Hole is caft diftindly upon a Paper

at J, ABC the Prifm, whereby the Rays are at


their emerging out of the Lens refrafted from.
J towards another Paper at p /, and the round
Image at J is turned into an oblong Image pt
falling
B O O K I.
s-p
falling on that other Paper. This Image // con-
lifts of Circles placed one after another in a Recti-
linear Order, as was fufficiently cxplaii^^ed in the
fifthExperiment j and thefe Circles are equal to
the Circle J, and confequently anfwer in magni-
tude to the Hole F^ and therefore by diminifhing
that Hole they may be at pleafure diminiihed,
whilft their Centers remain in their Places. By
this means I made the Breadth of the Image pt
to be forty times, and fometimes fixty or feventy
times lefs than its Length. As for inflance, if
tlieBreadth of the Hole F be one tenth of an
Inch, and MF
the diflance of the Lens from the
Hole be 12 Feet; and \i pV> or pM
the diftance
of the Image pi from the Prifm or Lens be 10
Feet, and the refracting Angle of the Prifm be
62 Degrees, the Breadth of the Image pt will
be one twelfth of an Inch, and the Length about
iix Inches, and therefore the Length to the
Breadth as 72 to i, and by confequence the
Light of this Image 71 times lefs compound
than the Sun's dired: Light. And Light thus far
iimple and homogeneal, is fufficient for trying
all the Experiments in this Book about fimple
Light. For the Compofition of heterogeneal
Rays is in this Light fo little, that it is fcarce to
be difcovered and perceiv'd by Senfe, except per-
haps in the indigo and violet. For thefe being
dark Colours, do eafily fuffer a fenfible Allay
by that little fcattcring Light which ufes to be
refraded irregularly by the Inequalities of the
Prifm.
Yet inftead of the Circular Llole F, 'tis better
to fubftitute an oblong Hole iliaped like a long
Paral-
6o O P T I C K S.

Parallelogram with its Length parallel to the


Prifm ABC. For if this Hole be an Inch or
two long, and but a tenth or twentieth Part of an

Inch broad, or narrower j the Light of the Image


ft will be as fimple as before, or fimpler, and
the Image will become much broader, and there-
fore more fit to have Experiinents try'd in its

Lisht than before.


Inftead of this Parallelogram Hole may be fub-
ftituted a triangular one of equal Sides, whofe
Bafe, for inftance, is about the tenth Part of an
Inch, and its Height an Inch or more. For by
this means, if the Axis of the Prifm be parallel to
the Perpendicular of the Triangle, the Image />^
[in Fig. 25.] will now be form'd of equicrural
Triangles ^o-j bh^ ci, dk^ el,f?ji, &c. and in-
numerable other intermediate ones anfwering to
the triangular Hole in Shape and Bignefs, and lying
one after another in a continual Series between
two Parallel Lines ^y^and gm. Thefe Triangles,
are a little intermingled at their Bafes, but not at
their Vertices ; and therefore the Light on the
brighter Side af of the Image, where the Bafes
of the Triangles are, is a little compounded, but
on the darker Side gm \% altogether uncom-
pounded, and in all Places between the Sides the
Compofition is proportional to the diftances of
the Places from that obfcurer Side gm. And ha-?
ving a Spedrum pt oi fuch a Compofition, we
m.ay try Experiments either in its fcronger and lefs
fimple Light near the Side af^ or in its weaker and
fimpler Light near the other Side gm, as. it fhall
feem mofl convenient.

But
1

B O O K L 6
But ill making Experiments of this kind, the
Chamber ought to be made as dark
as can be,

left any Foreign Light mingle it felf with the


Light of the Spedrum p t^ and render it com-
pound J efpecially if we would try Experiments
in the more fmiple Light next the Side g m of
the Spectrum J which being fainter, will have
a lefs proportion to the Foreign Light ; and fo

by the mixture of that Light be more troubled,
and made more compound. The Lens alfo
ought to be good, fuch as may ferve for opti-
cal Ufes, and the Prifm ought to have a large
Angle, fuppofe of 65 or 70 Degrees, and to be
well wrought, being made of Glafs free from
Bubbles and Veins, with its Sides not a little
convex or concave, as ufually happens, but truly
plane, and its Polifli elaborate, as in working
Optick-glalTes, and not fuch as is ufually wrought
with Putty, whereby the edges of the Sand-
holes being worn away, there are left all over
the Glafs a numberlefs Company of very little
convex polite Rifings like Waves. The edges
alfo of the Prifm and Lens, fo far as they may
make any irregular Refraftion, muft be covered
with 2l black Paper glewed on. ilad all the
Light of the Sun's-Beam let into the Chamber,
which is ufelefs and unprofitable to the Experi-
ment, ought to be intercepted v/ith black Pa-
per, or other bkck Obftacles. For otherwife
the ufelefs Light being refled:ed every way in
the Chamber, will mix with the oblong Spe-
ctrum, and help to difturb it. In trying thefe
Things, fo much diligence is not altogether ne-
celiary, but it will promote tlie Succefs of the
Expe-
6i O P T I C K S.

Experiments, and by a veiy fcrupulous Examiner


of Things deferves to be apply'd. It's difficult
to get Glafs Prifms lit for riiis Purpofe, and there-
fore I ufed fometimes prifmatick VelTels made
with pieces of broken Looking-glaffes, and filled
with Rain Water. And to increafe the Refradion,
I fometimes impregnated the Water ftrongly with
Saccharum Saturni,

PROP. V. Theor. IV.


Homogeneal Light is refraSied regularly
^without any D Hatatio7ifputting or Jhatter^
ing of the Rays ^ a7id the co?ifufed Vijion of
ObjeBs feen through refraEiing Bodies by
heteroge7ieal Light arifes from the diffe-^

rent Refrangibility offeveralforts of Rays,

TH E firft Part of this Propofition has been


already fufficiently proved in the fifth Ex-
periment, and will farther appear by the Experi-
ments which follow.
Exper. 12. In the middle of a black Paper I
made a round Hole about a fifth or fixth Part of
an Inch in diameter. Upon this Paper I caufed
the Spedrum of homogeneal Light defcribed
in the former Propofition, fo to fall, that fome
part of the Light m.ight pafs through the Hole
of the Paper. This tranfmitted part of the
Light I refrafted with a Prifm placed behind
^he Paper, and letting this refracted Light fall

perpendicularly upon a white Paper two or


three Feet diftant from the Prifm, 1 found that
the
B O O K I. 63
the Spe6trum formed on the Paper by this Light
was not oblong, as when 'tis made ( in the third
Experiment) by refra-fling the Sun's compound
Light, but was (fo far as I could judge by my
Eye ) perfedily circular, the Length being no
greater than the Breadtl 1. Which fhev/s, that this
Light is refracted regularly without any Dilatation
of the Rays.
Exper. 13. In the homogeneal Light I placed
a Paper Circle of a quarter of an Lich in diameter,
and in the Sun's unrefra6ted heterogeneal white
Light I placed another Paper Circle of the fame
Bignefs. And going from the Papers to the di-
ftance of fomeFeet, I viewed both Circles through
a Prifm. The Circle illuminated by the Sun's he-
terogeneal Light appeared very oblong, as in the
fourth Experiment, the Length being many times
greater than the Breadth j but the other Circle,
illuminated with homogeneal Light, appeared cir-
(iular and diftindtly defined, as when 'tis view'd
with the naked Eye. Which proves the whole Pro-
pofition.
Exper. 14. In the homogeneal Light I placed
Flies, and fuch-like minute Objedls, and view-
ing them through a Prifm, I faw their Parts as
diftindlly defined, as if I had viewed them with
the naked Eye. The fame Objed:s placed in
the Sun's unrefradted hetero2;eneal Lig-ht, which
was white, I viewed alio through a Prifm, and
faw them rnoxl confufcdly defined, fo that I
could not diftinguiili their fmaller Parts from
one another. I placed alfo the Letters of a
fmall print, one while in the homogeneal Light,
and then in the heterogeneal, and viewing them
through
^4 O P T I C K S.

through a Prifm, they appeared in the latter Cafe


fo confufed and indiftin^t, that I could not read
them J but in the former they appeared fo diftindt,
that I could read readily, and thought I faw them
as diflind:, as when I view'd them with my naked
Eye. In both Cafes I view'd the fame Objeds,
through the fame Prifm at the fame diftance from
me, and in the fame Situation. There was no
difference, but in the Light by which the Objedts
were illuminated, and which in one Cafe was
iimple, and in the other compound ; and there-
fore, the diftindl Vifion in the former Cafe, and
confufed in the latter, could arife from nothing
elfe than from that difference of the Lights.
Which proves the whole Propofition.
And in thefe three Experiments it is farther
very remarkable, that the Colour of homogeneal
Light w^as never changed by the Refrad:ion.

PROP. VL Theor. V.
T'he Sine of Incidence of every Ray confi-
dered apart ^ is to its Sine of RefraEiion
i7i a given Ratio,

THAT every
ftant to it
Ray confider'd apart.
fome degree of Refran-
felf in
Is con-

gibility, is fufficiently manifeft out of what has


been faid. Thofe Rays, which in the firfh Re-
fra(5tion, are at equal Incidences moll refraded,
are alfo in the following Refradions at equal
Inci-
BOOK!. S^
Incidences moft refracted ; and fo of the leaft
refrangible, and the reft which have any mean
Degree of Refrangibility, as is manifeft by the

fifth, fixth, feventh, eighth, and ninth Expe-


riments. And thofe which the firft Tiilie at
like Incidences are equally refraded, are again

at like Incidences equally and uniformly retract-


ed, and that whether they be refraded before
they be feparated from one another, as in the
fifth Expernnent, or whether they be refradted
apart, as in the twelfth, thirteenth and four-
teenth Experiments. The Refraction therefore
of every Ray apart is regular, and what Rule that
Refradiion obferves we are now to (liew*.
The late Writers in Opticks teach, that the
Sines of Incidence are in a given Proportion
to the Sines of Refradion, as was explained in
the fifth Axiom ; and fome by Inllruments fit-
ted for meafuring of Refractions, or otherwife
experimentally examining this Proportion, do
acquaint us that they have found it accurate.
But whilft they, not underftanding the difife-
rent Refrangibility of feveral Rays, conceived
them all to be refraCted according to one and
the fame Proportion, 'tis to be prefumed that
they adapted their Meafures only to the middle
of the refracted Light ; fo that from their Mea-
fures we may conclude only that the R^iys
which have a mean Degree of Refrangibility,
that is, thofe which when feparated from the
reft appear green, are refraCted according to a
given Proportion ,of their Sines. And there-
* This is •venfulh treated of in our Author'/ Left. Optic Part \,
Seil.lL
F fore
6& O F T I C K S.

fore we are now to fhew, that the like given


Proportions obtain in all the reft. That it
fhould be fo is very reafonable, Nature being
ever conformable to her felf but an experimen-
-,

tal Proof is defired. And fuch a Proof will be had,


if we can fliew that the Sines of Refradion of
Rays differently refrangible are one to another ia
a given Proportion when their Sines of Incidence
are equal. For, if the Sines of Refraction of all
the Rays are in given Proportions to the Sine of
Refractions of a Ray which has a mean Degree of
Refrangibility, and this Sine is in a given Propor-
, tion to the equal Sines of Incidence, thofe other
Sines of Refradtion will alfo be in given Propor-
tions to the equal Sines of Incidence. Now,
when the Sines of Incidence are equal, will it

appear by the following Experiment, that the


Sines of Refradion are in a given Proportion tQ
one another.
Exper. 15. The Sun fhining into a dark Cham-
ber through a little round Hole in the Window-
fhut, let S [in Fig. 26.] reprefent his round
white Image painted on the oppofite Wall by
his dired: Light, P T
his oblong coloured
Image made by refrading that Light with a
Prifm placed at the Window and p t, or -,

2p 2.t^ or 3/> 3 Z', his oblong colour'd Image


made by refrading again the fame Light fide-
ways with a fecond Prilm placed immediately
after the firft in a crofs Pontion to it, as was
explained in the fifth Experiment j that is to
fay, p t when the Refradion of the fecond
Prifm is fmall, zp 2 twhen its Refracftion is
greater, and 3 /> 3 ^ when it is greateft. For
fuch
,

B O O K I.
6j
fuch of the Pvefradions, if
will be the diverfity
the refrading Angle of the fecond Prifm be of
various Magnitudes 3 fuppofc of fifteen or twen-
ty Degrees to make the Image pt^ of thirty or
forty to make the Image 2p 2t^ and of fixty to
make the Image 3/> 3/. But for want of folid
Glafs Prifms with Angles of convenient Big-
neffes, there may be Veffels made of poliflied
Plates of Glafs cemented together in the form of
Prifms and filled with Water. Thefe things be-
ing thus ordered, I obferved that all the folar
Images or coloured Spectrums P T , />/ , 2p
2.ty 3^ did very nearly converge to the place
3/>
S on which the dired Light of the Sun fell
and painted his white round Image when the
Prifms were taken away. The Axis of the Spe-
ctrum PT, that is the Line drawn through the
middle of it parallel to its re(5tilinear Sides
did when produced pafs exadtly through the
middle of that white round Image S. And when
the RefracStion of the fecond Prifm \t^s equal
to the Refradion of the firfi:, the refrading An*
gles of them both being about 60 Degrees, the
Axis of the Spectrum 3/^3^ made by that Re-
fraction, did when produced pafs alfo throuo-h
the middle of' the fame white round Imao-e S.
But when the Refraction of the fecond Prifm
was lefs than that of the firft, the produced
Axes of the SpeClrums tp or 2t 2p made by
that Refraction did cut the produced A^xis of
the SpectrumTP in the points m and fi, a lit-
tlebeyond the Center of that white round I-
mage S. Whence the proportion of the Line
3/ T to the Line 3/>P was a little greater than
F 2 the
.

6% O P T I C K S.

d^e Proportion of 2/T to 2/>P, and this Pro-


portion a little greater than that of iT to p P.
Now -^vhefi the Light of the Spedtrum P falls T
perpendicularly upon the Wall , thofe Lines
3 4fT, 3/»P, and2^T, 2/P, and ^T, /P, are
the Tangents of the Refra<5tions, and therefore
hy this Experiment the Proportions of the Tan--
gents of the Refradions are obtained , from
whence the Proportions of the Sines being de-
rived, they come out equal, fo far as by view-
ing the SpeftrumSj and ufing fome mathemati-
cal R^albiiing i could eftimate. For I did not
irtaJic an accurate Computation. So then the
Propolition holds true in every Ray apart, fo
hr as appears by Experiment. And that it is
accurately true, may be demonftrated upon this
Suppolition. 1'hat Bodies refi-a^ Light by a5fing
zipoti its Rays in Li?i€s perpmdicular to their Sur^

faces. But in order to this Demonftration, I muil


diftinguifh the Motion of every Ray into two
Motions, the one perpendicular to the refradiing
Surface, the other parallel to it, and concerning
the perpendicular Motion lay down the follow-
ing Propolition.
If any Motion or moving thing whatfoever he
incident with any Velocity on any broad and
thin fpace terminated on both fides by two paral-
lel Planes , and in its Paffage through that
fpace be urged perpendicularly towards the far-
ther Plane by any force which at given diftances
fi-om the Plane is of given Quantities ; the per-
pendicular velocity of that Motion or Thing,
at is emerging out of that fpace, fhall be always
equal to the fquare Root of the funi of the
3 fquare
B O O K I. 69
fquare of the perpendicular velocit}^ of xki'iX
Motion or Thing at its Incidence on that fpace^
and of the fquare of the perpendicular velocity
wliich that Motion or Tiling would have at its
Emergence, if at its Incidence its perpendicular
velocity '^vas infinitely little.

And' the fame Propofition holds true of any


Motion or Thing perpendicul^ly retarded in its
paffage through that Ipace, if inilead of the iura
of the two Squares you take their ditference;.
The Demonflration Mathematicians v*ill eafily
find out, and therefore I iliall not trouble the
Reader with it.
Suppofe now that a Ray coming mod oblique-
ly in the LineMC [in Fig. i.] be refradted at
C by the Plane RS into the Line CN, and.jf
itbe required to find the Line CE, into which
any other Ray AC
fliall be refradjed ; let MC,

AD, be the Sines of Incidence of the two Rays,


and NG, EF, their Sines -of Refradion, and
let the equal Motions of the incident Rays be
reprcfented by the equal Lines and AC, MC
and the Motion M
C being confidered as parai^
lei to the refracting Plane, let the other Motion
AC be diflinguiflied into two Motions AD
and DC, one of which AD
is parallel, and tlie

other DC
perpendicular to the refracfting Sur-
face. In like manner, let the Motions of the
emerging Rays be diftinguifh'd into two, whereof
the perpendicular ones are -^ CG and ^ CF.
And if the force of the refracting Plane begins
to upon the Rays either in that Plane or at
a<ft

a Certain diftance from it on the one fide, and


ends ^t a certain diftance from it on the other
F 3
Side
^o OPTIC K s.

fide, and in all places between .thofe two limits


ad:« upoa
the Rays in Lines perpendicular to
that refrading Plane, and the Actions upon the
Rays from the refrading Plane
at equal diftances
be equal, and at unequal ones either equal or un-
equal according to any rate whatever that Mo- j

tion of the Ray which is parallel to the re-


frading Plane, will fuffer no Alteration by that
Fopce and that Motion which is perpendicular
5

to it will be altered according to the rule of the


foregoing Proportion. If therefore for the per-
pendicular velocity of the emerging Ray C N
you write -^^ CG as above, then the perpendi-
cular velocity of any other emerging Ray CE
which was -^-^CF, will be equal to the fquarc

Root of CD^ -h f§^ CGq. And by fquaring


thefe Equals, and adding to them the Equals
AD^ and MC^ —
CD^, and dividing the
Sums by the Equals CF^-f-EF^ and CG^-f-
NG^', you will have ~-^ equal to Whence
jf^-
the Sine of Incidence, is to EF the Sine of
to,
efradion, as MC to NG, that is, in a given
ratio. And this Demonftration being general,
without determining what Light is, or by what
kind of Force i: is refraded, or alTuming any
thing farther than that the refrading Body ada
upon the Rays in Lines perpendicular to its Sur-.
face J I take it to be a very convincing Argument

of the full truth of this Propoiition,


So then, if the ratio of the Sines of Inci-
dence and Refradion of any fort of Rays be
found
BOOK I. 7.1

found any one given in and


'

in cafe, 'tis all cafes;


this may be readily found by the Method in the
following Propofition.

PROP, VII. Theor. VI.


^he PerfeEiion of Telefcopes is hnpeded by
the different Refrangibilitj of the Rays
of Light.
THE Imperfedtion of Telefcopes
garly attributed to the fpherical Figures of
is vul-

the Glaffes, and therefore Mathematicians have


propounded to figure them by the conical Sedi-
ons. To fhew that they are miftaken, I have in-
ferted this Propofition ; the truth of which will
appear by the nieafure of the Refractions of the
feveral forts of Rays and thefe meafures I thus
;

determine.
In the third Experiment of this firft Part,
.where the refracting Angle of the Prifm was 62^
Degrees, the half of that Angle 31 deg. 15 min.
is the Angle of Incidence of the Rays at their go-

ing out of the Glafs into the Air * ; and the Sine of
this Angle is 5 188, the Radius being loooo. When
the Axis of this Ptifm was parallel to the Horizon,
and the Refraction of the Rays at their Incidence
6n this Prifm equal to that at their Emergence out
of it, I obferved v/ith a Quadrant the Angle which
the mean refrangible P ays, ( that is which
thofe
went to the middle of the Sun's coloured Image )
made with the Horizon, and by this Angle and the
Sun's altitude obferved at the fame time, I found the
• Seesur AxiXhox's Left. Optic. Parti. Sed. II. §. 29.

F 4 Angle
7x O P T I C K S.

Angle which the emergent Rays contained with the


incident to be 44 deg. and 40 min. and the half of
this Angle added to the Angle of Incidence 3 1 deg.
15 min. makes the Angle of Refracflion, which is
therefore 5 3 deg. 35 min. and its Sine 8047. Thefe
are the Sines of Incidence and Refradtion of the
m^an refrangible Rays, and their Proportion in
round Numbers is 20 to 3 1. This Glafs was of a
Colour inclining to green. The laft of the Prifms
mentioned in the third Experiment was of clear
white Glafs. Its refracting Angle 635 Degrees.
The Angle which the emergent Rays contained,
with the incident 45 deg. 50 min. The Sine of
half the firft Angle 5262. The Sine of half the
Sum of the Angles 8157. ^^^^ their Proportion in
round Numbers 2a to 3 1, as before.
From the Length of the Image, which was
about 95 or 10 Inches, fubdud its Breadth, which
was 2s Inches, and the Rerhainder 71 Inches
would be the Length of the Image were the Sun
but a Point, and therefore fubtends the Angle
which the moft and leafl refrangible Rays, when
incident on the Prifm in the fame Lines, do
.'contain with one another after their Emergence.
"Whence this x^^ngle is 2 deg. o'. f. For, the
^^if^ance between the Image and the Prifm
where this Angle is made, was iSj- Feet, and
at that diftance the Chord 7^ Inches fubtends
an Angle of 2 deg. o'. y". Now half this Angle
is the Angle which thefe emergent Rays con-
'
taiH with the emergent mean refrangible Rays,
and a quarter thereof, that is 30'. 2". may be
accounted the Angle which they would contain
with the fame emergent mean refrangible Rays,
were
B O OK I.
73
were they co-incident to them within the Clafs,
and fuffered no other Refraction than that at.their
Emergence. For, if two equal Refractions, the
one at the Incidence of the Rays on the Prifm,
the other at their Emergence, make half the
Angle 2 deg. o'. 7''. then one of thofe RefraCtions
will make about a quarter of that Angle, and this
quarter added to, and fubduded from the Angle
of Refraction of the mean refrangible Rays,
which was 53 deg. 35', gives the Angles of Re-
fraCtion of the moft and leaft refrangible Rays
54 deg. 5' 2", and 53 deg. 4' 58", whofe Sines
are 8099 and 7995, the common Angle of In-
cidence being 31 deg. 15', and its Sine 5188;
and thefe Sines in the leafl round Numbers are in
proportion to one another, as 78 and 'jj to 50.
Now, if you fubduCt the common Sine of In-
cidence 50 from the Sines of RefraCtion 'jy and
78, the Remainders 27 and 28 fliew, that in fmall
Refractions the RefraCtion of the leafl refrangi-
ble Rays is to the Refraction of the moft refran-
gible ones, as 27 to 28 very nearly, and that the
difference of the RefraCtions of the leafl refran-
gible and mofl refrangible Rays is about the
27kh Part of the whole RefraCtion of the mean
refrangible Rays.
Whence they that are skilled in Opticks.will
*'
eafily underfland, that the Breadth of the leafl
circular Space, into which ObjeCt-glaffes of Te-
lefcopes can colleCt all forts of Parallel Rays, is
about the 27^th Part of half the Aperture of the
Glafs, or 55 th Part of the whole Aperture ; and

* This is demonfirated in our AuihoiV Led. Optic. Part I. SeSI. IV.


Fyp. 57.
that
74 O P T I C K a
that the Focus of the moft refrangible Rays is
nearer to the Objeft-glafs than the Focus of the
by about the 275th Part of
leaft refrangible ones,
the diflance between the Objed:-glafs and the
Focus of the mean refrangible ones.
And if Rays of all forts, flowing from any
one lucid Point in the Axis of any convex Lens,
be made by the Refra(3:ion of the Lens to con-
verge to Points not too remote from the Lens,
the Focus of the mofl: refrangible Rays fliall be
nearer to the Lens than the Focus of the leaft
refrangible ones, by a diflance which is to the
275th Part of the diftpnce of the Focus of the
mean refrangible Rays from the Lens, as the di-
ftance between thrt Focus and the lucid Point,
from whence the Rays flow, is to the diflance be-
tween that lucid Point and the Lens very nearly.
Now to examine whether the Difference be-
tween the Refra([lions, v^hich the mofl refrangi-
ble and the leaft refrangible Rays flowing from
the fame Point fuffer in the Objed-glafTes of Te-
lefcopes and fuch-like Glafles, be fo great as is
here defcribed, I contrived the following Experi-
ment. •

Exper. 16. The Lens which I ufed in the fe-


cond and eighth Experiments, being placed fix
Feet and an Inch diflant from any Obje6t, col-
leifled the Species of that Objed: by the mean
refrangible Rays at the diflance of fix Feet and
an Inch from the Lens on the other fide. And
therefore by the foregoing P-ule, it ought to col-
led the Species of that Objedl by the leafl re-
frangible Rays at the diftance of fix Feet and
31 Inches from the Lens, and by the mofl re-
-'

frangible
)

BOOK! 75
frangible ones atthe diftance of five Feet and
iQi Inches from it: So that between the two
Places, where thefe lead and moft refrangible
Rays colledl the Species, there may
be the di-
ftance of about 5^ Inches. For by that Rule,
and an Inch (the diftance of the Lens
as fix Feet
from the lucid Obje6t) is to twelve Feet and
two Inches ( the diflance of the lucid Objedt
from the Focus of the mean refrangible Rays
that is, as One is to Two; fo is the 27ith Part
of fix Feet and an Inch '(the diftance between
the Lens and the fame Focus) to the diftance
between the Focus of the moft refrangible Rays
and the Focus of the leaft refrangible ones,
which is therefore 5g Inches, that is very nearly
5^ Inches. Now to know whether this Meafure
was true, I repeated the fecond and eighth Ex-
pariment with coloured Light, which was lefs
compounded than that I there made life of:
For I now feparated the heterogeneous Rays
from one another by the Method I defcribed
in the eleventh Experiment, fo as to make a
coloured SpecStrum about twelve or fifte^sn Times
longer than broad. This Spectrum I caft on a
printed Book, and placing the above-mentioned
Lens at the diftance of lix Feet and an Inch
from this Spectrum to colleft the Species of
the illuminated Letters at the fame diftance on
the other lidey I found that the Species of the
Letters illuminated with blue were nearer to
the Lens than thole illuminated with deep
red by about three Inches, or three and a quar-
ter ; but the Species of the Letters illumi-
nated with indigo and violet appeared fo con-
I fufed
:

75 O P T I C K S.

fufed and indiftindt, that I could not read them


Whereupon viewing the Prifm, I found it was
s^ full of Veins running from one end of the Glafs
to the other j fo that the Refradion could not
be regular. I took another Prifm therefore
which was free from Veins, and inftead of the
Letters I ufed two or three Parallel black Lines
a little broader than the Strokes of the Let-
ters, and calling the Colours upon thefe Lines
in fuch manner, that the Lines ran along the
Colours from one end of the Spedrum to the
other, I found that the Focus where the indigo,
or confine of this Colour and violet caft the
Species of the black Lines mofl diilindly, to
be about four Inches, or 4^ nearer to the Lens
than the Focus, where the deepefl red caft the
Species of th^ fame black Lines mofl diilind:-
ly. The violet was fo faint and dark, that I
could not difcern the Species of the Lines di-
ilindly by that Colour j and therefore confi-
dering that the Prifm was made of a dark co-
loured Glafs inclining to green, I took another
Prifm of clear white Glafs ; but the Spedrum
of Colours which this Prifm made had long
white Streams of faint Light (liooting out from
both ends of the Colours, which made me con-
clude that fomething w'as amifs j and viewing
the Prifm, I found two or three little Bubbles
ja the Glafs, which refraded the Light irregu-
lar! v. Wherefore I covered that Part of the Glafs
with black Paper, and letting the Light pafs
throucrh another Part of it which was free from
fuch Bubbles, the Spedrum of Colours became
free from thofe irregular Streams of Light, and,
was
B o o k: I.
>7
was now fuch as I defircd. But ftill^I found
the violet fo dark and faint, that I could fcarce
fee the Species of the Lines by the violet, and*
not at all by the deepeft Part of it, which was
next the end of the Spc,(5lrum. I fufpeded there-

fore, that this faintand dark Colour might be


allayed by that fcattering Light which was re-
fraded, and refleded irregularly, partly by fome
very fmall Bubbles in the GlafTes, and partly
by the Inequalities of their Polifh ; which
Light, tho' it was but little, yet it being of a
white Colour, might fuffice to affed the Senfe
fo ftrongly as to difturb the Phaenomena of that
weak and dark Colour the violet, and there-
fore I tried, as in the 12th, 13th, and 14th Ex-
periments, whether the Light of this Colour
did not confifl of a fenfible Mixture of heteroge-
neous Rays, but found it did not. Nor did the
Refradlions caufe any other fenfible Colour than
violet to emerge ©ut of this Light, as they
would have done out of white Light, and by
confequence out of this violet Light had it been
fenlibly compounded with white Light. And
therefore I concluded, that the reafon why I
could not fee the Species of the Lines diftindly
by this Colour, was only the Darknefs of this
Colour, and Thinnefs of its Light, and its di-
ftance from the Axis of the Lens j I divided
therefore thofe Parallel black Lines into equal
Parts, by which I might readily know the di-
ftances of the Colours in the Speftrum from
one another, and noted the diftances of the
Lens from the Foci of fuch Colours, as c<ift the .

Species of the Lines dillindtly, and then confi-


dered
'7& O P T I C K S.

dered vvlaether the difference of thofe distances


bear fuch proportion to 5| Inches, the greatefl
Difference of the diftances, which the Foci of
the deepefl red and violet ought to have from
the Lens, as the diflance of the obferved Co-
lours from one another in the Speftrum bear to
the greatefl diflance of the deepeft red and
violet meafured in the Redilinear Sides of the
Spedrum, that Length of thofe Sides,
is, to the
or Excefs of the Length of the Spedrum above
its Breadth. And my Obfervations were as fol-
lows.
When I obferved and compared the deepefl
fenfible red, and the Colour in the Confine of
green and blue, which at the Redilinear Sides
of the Spedirum was diftant from it half the
Length of thofe Sides, the Focus where the Con-
fine of green and blue cafl the Species of the
Lines diflindly on the Paper, was nearer to the
Lens than the Focus, where the red cafl thofe
Lines diflind:ly on it by about 25 or 2~ Liches.
For fometimes the Meafures were a Jittle greater,
fometimes a little lefs, but feldom varied from
one another above \ of an Inch. For it was very
difficult to define the Places of the Foci, with-
out fome little Errors. Now, if the Colours
diflant half the Length of the Image, ( mea-
fured at its Rectilinear Sides) give 25 or 2| Diffe-
rence of the diflances of their Foci from the
Lens, then the Colours dillant the whole Length
ought to give 5 or 55 Inches difference of thofe
diflances.
Bpt here it's to be noted, that I could not
fee the red to the full end of the Sped:rum,
biit
: .

B O O K I.
7p
but only to the Center of the Semicircle which
bounded that end, or a little farther j and there-
fore I compared this red not with that Colour
which was exadlly in the middle of the Spedlrum,
or Confine of green and blue, but with that which
verged a little more to the blue than to the green
And, as I reckoned the whole Length of the
Colours not to be the whole Length of the
Spedjum, but the Length of its Redilinear Sides,
fo compleating the femicircularEnds into Circles,
when either of the obferved Colours fell within
thofe Circles, meafured the diftance of that
I
Colour from the femicircular End of the Spe-
drum, and fubdudting half this diftance from
the meafured diftance of the two Colours, I
took the Remainder for their corrected di-
ftance; and in thefe Obfcrvations fet down this
correfted diilance for the difference of the di-
flances of their Foci from the Lens. For, as
the Length of the Rectilinear Sides of the Spe-
<3:rum would be the whole Length of all the
Colours, were the Circles of which ( as we
Ihewed) that Spedrum confifts contraded and
reduced to Phyfical Points, fo in that Cafe this
correded diftance would be the real diftance of
the two obferved Colours.
When therefore I farther obferved tlie deepcft
fenfible red,and that blue whofe correded di-
ftance from it was i_ Parts of the Length of
the Redilinear Sides of the Spedrum, the diffe-
rence of the diftances of their Foci from the
Lens was about 3^ Inches, and as 7 to 12, fo is
3? ^o S'v

When
8o O P T I C K S.

When I obferved the deepeft fenfible red, and


that indigo whofe corredied diftance was ~ or | of
the Length of the Rediilinear Sides of the Spe-
(ftrum, the difference of the diftances of theii^
Foei from the Lens, was about 3I Inches, and as
2 to 3, fois3|to 5I.
When I obferved the deepefl fenfible red, and
that deep indigo whofe corredted diftance from
one another was ^ or l of the Length of the
Rectilinear Sides of the Spectrum, the diffe-
rence of the diftances of their Foci from the
Lens was about 4 Inches and as 3 to 4, fo
-,

is 4 to 5|.
When I obferved the deepeft feniible red,
and that Part of the violet next the indigo,
whofe corredled diftance from the red was {|
or I of the Length of the Red:ilinear Sides of the
Spedlrum, the difference of the diftances of their
Foci from the Lens was about 4- Inches, and
as 5 to 6, fo is 4i to 55. For fometimes, when
the Lens was advantageoufly placed, fo that its
Axis refpedted the blue, and all Things elfe
were well ordered, and the Sun ftione clear, and
1 held my Eye very near to the Paper on
which the Lens caft the Species of the Lines, I
could fee pretty diftind:ly the Species of thofe
Lines by that Part of the violet which was next
.the indigo J and fometimes I could fee them
by above half the violet. For in making thefe
Experiments I had obferved, that the Species
of thofe Colours only appear diftindt, which were
in or near the Axis of the Lens So that if the
:

blue or indigo were in the Axis, I could fee


their Species diftindlyj and then the red ap-
peared
B O O K L 8i
peared much kfs diftin6t than before. Wherefore
I contrived to make theSped:riim of Colours flior-
ter than before, fo that both its Ends might be
nearer to the Axis of the Lens. And now its
Length was about 2t Inches, and Breadth a^
bout r 01* i of ^^^ Inch. Alfo inftead of the
black Lines on which the Spectrum was caft, I
made one black Line broader than thofe, that I
might fee its Species more eafily j and this Line I
divided by Ihort crofs Lines into equal Parts, for
meafuring the diflances of the obferved Colours.
And now I could fometimes fee the Species of
this Line with its Divifions almofl: as far as the
Center of the femicircular violet End of the
-Spedrunij and made thefe farther Obferva-^
tions.
When I obferved the deepeft fenfible red, and
that Part of the violet, whofe correfted diftance
from it was about ' Parts of the Re<ftilinear Sides
of the Spectrum, the Difference of the diftances
of the Foci of thofe Colours from the Lens^
was one time 4], another time 47, another time
4t Inches J and as 8 to 9, fo are 47, 4t> 4t, to
5?> 5t'^^ 5^ refpedively.
When Iobferved the deepeft fenfible red,,
and deepeft fenfible violet, ( the correded di-
ftance of which Colours, when all Things were
ordered to the beft Advantage, and the Sun
(hone very clear, was about H
or iy Parts of the
Length of the Rectilinear Sides of the colour-
ed Spedrum ) I found the Difference of the di-
ftances of their Feci from the Lens fometimes
4|- fometimes ^^y and for the moft part ^ In-
G . ehgsi
8i O P T I C K S.

ches or thereabouts ; and as ii to 12, or 15 to


16, fo is five Inches to 5* or 51. Inches.
And by this ProgreiTion of Experiments I fatif-
fied my felf, that had the Light at the very Ends
of the Spedrum been ftrong enough to make the
Species of the black Lines appear plainly on the
Paper, the Focus of the deepefh violet would
have been found nearer to the Lens, than the
Focus of the deepeft red, by about 5^ Inches
at leaft. And this is a farther Evidence, that
the Sines of Incidence and Refradion of the fe-
veral forts of Rays, hold the fame Proportion to
one another in the fmallefl Refractions w^hich they
do in the greateft.
My Progrefs in making this^ice and trouble-
fome Experiment I have fet down more at large,
that they that iliall niay be aware
try it after me
of the Circumfpe(llion make it fuc-
requifite to
ceed well. And if they cannot make it fuc-
ceed fo well as I did, they may notwithftand-
ing coUedl by the Proportion of the diftance of
the Colours of the Spedrum, to the Difference
of the diftances of their Foci from the Lens,
what would be the Succefs in the more diftant
Colours by a better trial. And yet, if they ufe
a broader Lens than I did, and fix it to a long
ftrait Staif, by means of which it may be rea-
dily and truly diredled to the Colour whofe Fo-
cus is defired, not but the Experi-
I queftion
ment them than it did
will fucceed better with
with me. For I directed the Axis as nearly as I
could to the middle of the Colours, and then
the faint Ends of the Spedlrum being remote
from the Axis, caft their Species lefs diflindtly
1 on
B O O K t 85
on the Paper than they would have done, had the
Axis been fucceffively diredled to them.
Now by what has been faid, it's certain that the
Rays which differ inRefrangibilitydo not converge
to the fame Focus j but if they flow from a lucid
Point, as far from the Lens on one fide as their
Foci are on the other, the Focus of the moft re-
frangible Rays fhall be nearer to the Lens than that
of the leafl refrangible, by above the fourteenth
Part of the whole diflance j and if they flow from
a lucid Point, fo very remote from the Lens, that
before their Incidence they may be accounted pa-
rallel, the Focus of the moft refrangible Rays fliall
be nearer to the Lens than the Focus of the kail
refrangible, by about the 27th or 2 8 th Part of their
whole diftance from it. And the Diameter of the
Circle in the middle Space between thofe two
Foci which they illuminate, when they fall there
on any Plane, perpendicular to the Axis (which
Circle is the leaft into which they can all be ga-
thered ) is* about the 55th Part of the Diameter
of the Aperture of the Glafs. So that 'tis a won-
der, that Telefcopes reprefent Objeds fo diftindt
as they do. But were all the Rays of Light
equally refrangible, the Error ariflng only from
the Sphericalnefs of the Figures of Glaffes would
be many hundred times lefs. For, if the Obje6t-
glafs of a Telefcope be Plano-convex, and the
Plane fide be turned towards the Objedlj and
the Diameter of the Sphere, whereof this Glafs
is a Segment, be called D, and the Semidiame-

ter of the Aperture of the Glafs be called S, and


the Sine of Incidence out of Glafs into Air, be
to the Sine of Refradtion as I to R j the Rays
G 2 which
84 O P T I C K S.

w hich come parallel to the Axis of the Glafs, fhall


in the Place where the Image of theObjed: is moft
diflindly made, be fcattered all over a little Circle,

whofe Diameter is —
Iq
X very
^
nearly,
^'
* as
Dquad.
I gather by computing the Errors of the Rays by
the Method of infinite Series, and rejecting the
Terms, Quantities are inconfiderable. As
vi^hofe
for inflance, if the Sine of Incidence I, be to the
Sine of Refradion R, as 20 to 3 1, and if the D
Diameter of the Sphere, to which the Convex-
fide of the Glafs is ground, be 100 Feet or 1200
Inches, and S the Semidiametcr of the Aperture be
two Inches, the Diameter of the little Circle,

(that IS ^ -) will be ,
(or
Iq ycD quad. 20 X 20 X 1 200 X i zoo
961 X
72000000 ) Parts of an Inch. But the Diameter of
the Circle, through which thefe Rays are
little

fcattered by unequal Refrangibility, will be about


the 55 th Part of the Aperture of the Objed-glafs,
which here is four Inches. And therefore, the
Error arifing from the Spherical Figure of the
Glafs, is to the Error arifing from the different Re-

frangibility of the Rays,


*^ '
as to - . that is
•' 72000000 rj*
as I to 5449 ; and therefore, being in comparifon
fo very little, deferves not to be confidered.
But you will fay, if the Errors caufed by the
different Refrangibility be fo very great, how
comes it to pafs, that Objeds appear through
Telefcopes fo diflind: as they do ? I anfwer, 'tis

* Hovj to do this, is pezvn in our AuthorV Left. Optic. Part I.


Se^. IV. Pnp.^x.
becaufe
B O O K I. 85
becaufe the erring Rays are not fcattered uni-
formly over all that Circular Space, but colleded

infinitely more denfely in tlie Center than in


any other Part of the Circle, and in the Way
from the Center to the Circumference, grow
continually rarer and rarer, fo as at the Circum-
ference to become infinitely rare 5 and by rea-
fon of their Rarity are not flrong enough to be
vifible, unlefs in the Center and very near it.
Let ADE [in Fig. 27.] reprefent one of thofe
Circles defcribed with the Center C, and Semi-
diameter AC, and let BFG
be a finaller Circle
concentrick to the former, cutting with its Cir-
cumference the Diameter AC in B, and bife<fl
AC in N and by my reckoning, the Denfity of
}

the Light in any Place B, will be to its Denfity


in N, as AB to BC; and the whole Light with-
in the Icffer Circle BFG, will be to the whole
Light within the greater A ED, as the Excefs
of the Square of A C above the Square of A B,
is to the Square of AC. As if B C be the fifth
Part of AC, the Light will be four times dcn-
fer in B than in N, and the whole Light within
the lefs Circle, will be to the whole Light with-
in the greater, as nine to twenty-five. Whence
it's evident, that the Light within the lefs Cir-
cle, mufl ftrike the Senfe much more ftrongly,
than that faint and dilated Light round about
between it and the Circumference of the grea-
ter.
But it's farther to be noted, that the mcft lu-
minous of the Prifmatick Colours are the yeU
low and orange. Thefe aifed: the Senfes more
ftrongly than all the reft together, and next to
G 3
thefc
S6 O P T I C K S.

thefe in flrength are the red and green. Th^


blue compared with thefe is a faint and dark
Colour, and the indigo and violet are fnuch
darker and fainter, fo that thefe compared with
the ftronger Colours are be regarded^
little to
The Images of Ohjecfls are therefore to be pla-?
ced, not in the Focus of the mean refrangible
Rays, which are in the Confine of green and
blue, but in the Focus of thofe Rays which are
in the middle of the orange and yellow j therQ
where the Colour is moil: luminous and fulgent^
that is in the brighteft yellow, that yellow which
inclines more to orange than to green. And
by the Refraction of thefe Rays (whofe Sines of-
incidence and Refraction in Glafs are as 17 apd
1 1 ) the Refradion of Glafs and Cryflal for Op-
tical Ufes is to be meafured. Let us therefore
place the Image of the Objed; in the Focus of
thefe Rays, and all the yellow and orange will
fall within a Circle, wnofe Diameter is about
the 250th Part of the Diameter of the Aperture
of the Glafs. And if you add the brighter half
of the red, ( that half which is next the orange )
and the brighter half of the green, ( that half
which is next the yellow ) about three fifth
Parts of the Light of thefe two Coloi;irs will
fall within the fame Circle, and two fifth Parts
will fall without it round about y and that which
falls without will be fpread through alinoil as
much more fpace as that which falls within,
and be almoft three times rarer.
fo in the grofs
Of the other half of the red and green, (that is
of the deep dark red and willow green) about
pne quarter will fall within this Circle, and
three
B O O K I. 87
three quarters without, and that which falls
without will be fpread through about four o^
five more fpace than that which falls with-
times
in and fo in the grofs be rarer, and if com
;

pared with the whole Light within it, will be


about 25 times rarer than all that taken in the
grofs J or rather more than 30 or 40 times ra-
rer, becaufe the deep red in the end of the
Spedtmm of Colours made by a Prifm is very-
thin and rare, and the willow green is fome-
thing rarer than the orange and yellow. The
Light of thefe Colours therefore being fo very
much rarer than that within the Circle, will
fcarce affe<5t the Senfe, efpecially fince the deep

red and willow green of this Light, are much


darker Colours than the reft. And for the fame
reafon the blue and violet being much darker
Colours than thefe, and much more rarified,
may be neglected. For the denfe and bright
Light of' the Circle, will obfcure the rare and
weak Light of thefe dark Colours round about
it, and render them almoft infenfible. The
fenfible Image of a lucid Point is therefore
fcarce broader than a Circle, whofe Diameter is
the 250th Part of the Diameter of the Aperture
of the Objedt-glafs of a good Telefcope, or not
much brorder, if you except a faint and dark mifty
Light round about it, which a Spectator wifr.
fcarce regard. And therefore in a Telefcope,
whofe Aperture is four Liches, and Length an
hundred Feet, it exceeds not 2" 45'", or 3". And
in a Telefcope whofe Aperture is two Inches,
and Length 20 or 30 Feet, it may be 5" or 6",
and fcarce above. And this anfwers well to
G 4 Expe-
88 O P T I C K S.

Experience : For fpme Aftronomers have found


the Diameters pf the fix'd Stars, in Telefcopes
of between 20 and 60 Feet in length, to be a-
bout 5" or 6", or at moft 8'' or 10" in diame-
ter. But the Eye-Glafs be tinfted faintly
if
with the Smoak of a Lamp or Torch, to ob-
fcure the Light of the Star, the fainter Light
in the Circumference of the Star ceafes to be
vilib and the Star (if the Glafs be fufficiently
.-,

foilta witli Smoak ) appears fomething more


like a mathematical Point. And for the fame
Reafon, the enormous Part of the Light in the
Circumference of every lucid Point ought to be
Icfs difcernible in fhorter Telefcopes than in lon-
ger, becaufe the^fhorter tranfmit lefs Light to the
Eye.
Now, that the fix'd Stars, by reafon of their
immenfe Diliance, appear like Points, unlefs fo
far as tl^eir Light is dilated by Refra6lion, may
appear from hence j that when the Moon pafTes
over them and eclipfes them, their Light vanifhes,
not gradually like that of the Planets, but all at
once J and in the end of the Eclipfe it returns
into Sight all at once, or certainly in lefs time
than the fecond of a Minute ; the Refradion of
the Moon's Atmofphere a little protrading th^
time in which the Light of the Star firfl vaniilies,

^nd afterwards returns into Sight.


NoWj if we
fuppofe the fenfible Image of a lu-
cid Point, to be even 250 times narrower than
the Aperture of the Glafs 5 yet this Image would
be fciil much greater than if it were only from
th^ fpherical Figure of the' Glafs. For were
i^ not for the different Refrangibility of the
Raysj
;

B O O K I. 8p
Rays, its breadth in an loo Foot Tclefcope

whofe aperture is 4 Inches, would be but ^- ^^^^



parts of an Inch, as ismanifeil by the foregoing
Computation. And therefore in this cafe the
from the fpherical Figure
greateft Errors arifing
of the Glafs, would be to the greateft fenfible
Errors arihng from the different Refrangibihty

of the Rays as ^^^^ to ^ at moft, that is on-

ly as I to 1200. And (hews that


this fufficiently
it is not the fpherical Figures of Glalfes, but the

different Refrangibihty of the Rays which hin-


ders the perfeftion of Telefcopes.
There is another Argument by w4iich it may
appear that the different Refrangibihty of Rays,
is the true caufe of the imperfed:ion of Tele-
fcopes. For the Errors of the Rays arifmg from
the fpherical Figures of Obje6t-glaffes, -Are as the
Cubes of the Apertures of the Objed: Glaffes
and thence to make Telefcopes of various
Lengths magnify with equal diftindlnefs the ,

Apertures of the Objeft-glaffes, and the Charges


or magnifying Powers ought to be as the
Cubes of the fquare Roots of their lengths;
which doth not anfwer to Experience. But
the Errors of the Rays arifing from the different
Refrangibihty, are as the Apertures of the Ob-
jedt-glaffes ; and thence to make Telefcopes of
various lengths, magnify with equal dillin6tnefs,
their Apertures and Charges ought to be as the
fquare Roots of their lengths ; and this anfwers
to Experience, as is v/ell know^n. For Inffance,
^ Tclefcope of 64 Feet in length, with an Aper-
2 turQ
90 O P T I C K S.

ture of 2 1 Inches, magnifies about 120 times,


with as much diftinftnefs as one of a Foot in
length, with ^ of an Inch aperture, magnifies i^
times.
Now were it not for this different Refrangi-
bility of Rays, Telefcopes might be brought to
a greater perfeftion than we have yet defcrib'd,
by compofmg the Objedi-glafs of two Glaffes
with Water between them. Let A D F C [in Fig,
28.] reprefent the Objed:-glafs compofed of two
Glaffes ABEDand BEFC, alike convex on th®
outfides AGD and CHF, and alike concave
on the infides BME, BNE, with Water in
the concavity BMEN. Let the Sine of Inci-
dence out of Glafs into Air be as I to R, and
out of Water into Air, as K to R, and by con-
fequence out of Glafs into Water, as I to K:
and let the Diameter of the Sphere to which the
convex fides AGD and CHF
are ground be
D, and the Diameter of the Sphere to which
the concave fides BME and BNE, are ground
be to D, as the Cube Root of KK —
KI to the
Cube Root of R K-— R I and the Refractions
:

on the concave fides of the Glaffes, will very


much corred the Errors of the Refradions on
the convex fides, fo far as they arife from the
fphericalnefs of the Figure. And by this means
might Telefcopes be brought to fufiicient per-
fection, were it hot for the different Refrangi-
bility of feveral forts of Rays. But by reafon
of this different Refrangibility, I do not yet fee
any other means of improving Telefcopes by
Refractions alone, than that of increafing their
lengths, for which end the late Contrivance of
Hugenhis
B O O K I. pi
Jlugenius feems well accommodated. For very
long Tubes are cumberfome, and fcarce to be
readily managed, and by reafon of their length
are very apt to bend, and fhake by bending, fo
as to cauie a continual trembling in the Objects,
whereby it becomes difficult to fee them difl;in(fl-
ly: whereas by Contrivance the Glaffes are
his
readily manageable, and the Objed-glafs being
fix'd upon a flrong upright Pole becomes more
fteady.
Seeing therefore the Improvement of Tele-
fcopes of given lengths by Refradions is defpe-
ratej I contrived heretofore a Perfpedive by-
Reflexion , ufmg inftead of an Objed-glafs a
concave Metal. The diameter of the Sphere
to which the Metal was ground concave was a-
bout 25 Englijh Inches, and by confequence
the length of the Inftrument about fix Inches
and a quarter. The Eye-glafs v/as Plano-con-
vex, and the diameter of the Sphere to which
the convex iide was ground was about t of an
Inch, or a little lefs, and by confequence it
niagniiied between 30 and 40 times. By ano-
ther way of meafuring I found that it magnified
about 35 times. The concave Metal bore an
Aperture of an Inch and a third part; but the
Aperture was limited not by an opake Circle,
covering the Limb of the Metal round about,
but by an opake Circle placed between the Eye-
glafs and the Eye, and perforated in the mid-
dle with a little round hole for the Rays to pafs
through to the Eye. For this Circle by being
placed here, ftopp'd much of the errroneous
Light, which otherwiie would have difturbed
the
p2 O P T I C K S.

the Vifion. By comparing it with a pretty good


Perfped;ive of four Feet in length, made with
a concave Eye-glafs, I could read at a greater
diftance with my own Inftrument than with the
Glafs. Yet Objedts appeared much darker in
it than in the Glafs, and that partly becaufe

more Light was loft by Reflexion in the Metal,


than by Refraction in the Glafs, and partly be-
caufe my Inftrument was overcharged. Had it.
magnified but 30 or 25 times, it would have
made the Obje(5t appear more brisk and pleafant,
Tv/o of thefe I made about 16 Years ago, and
have one of them flill by me, by which I can
prove the truth of v/hat I write. Yet it is not
fo 2:ood as at the firft. For the concave has been
divers times tarnifhed and cleared again, by rub-
bing it with very foft Leather. When I made
thefe an Artifl in London undertook to imitate it;
but ufing another way of polifhing them than I
did, he fell much fhort of what I had attained
to, as I afterwards underftood by difcourfmg.
the Under- work man he had employed. The
Polifh I ufed was in this manner. I had
two round Copper Plates, each fix Inches in
Diameter, the one convex, the other concave,'
ground very true to one another, On the con-
vex I ground the Objedt-Metal or Concave
which was to be polifli'd, 'till it had taken the
Figure of the Convex and was ready for a
Poliih. Then I pitched over the convex very'
thinly, by dropping melted Pitch upon it, and
warming it to keep the Pitch foft, whilft I
ground it with the. concave Copper wetted
to make it fpread eavenly all over the convex.
^
Thus
BOOK I.
95
Thus by working it well I made it as thin as a
Groat, and after the convex was cold I ground
it again to give it as true a Figure as 1 could.

Then I took Putty which I had made very fine


by wafhing it from all its groiler Particles, and
laying a of this upon tlie Pitch, I ground
little

it upon the Pitch with the concave Copper, till

it had done making a Noife ; and then upon the

Pitch I ground the Objed:-Metal with a brisk


motion, for about two or three Minutes of
time, leaning hard upon it. Then I put frefh.
Putty upon the Pitch, and ground it again till it
had done making a noife, and afterwards ground
the Objed:-Metal upon it as before. And this
Work I repeated till the Metal was poliflied,
grinding it the laft time with all my llrength
for a good while together and frequently
,

breathing upon the Pitch, to keep it moift with-


out laying on any more frefli Putty. The Ob-
jedl-Metal was two Inches broad, and about one
third part of an Inch thick, to keep it from
bending. I had two of thefe Metals, and when
I had poliflied them both, I tried which was
beft, and ground the other again, to fee if I could
make it better than that which I kept. And
thus by many Trials I learn'd the way of po-
lifhing, till I made thofe two reflecting Perfpe-
dlives I fpake of above. For this Art of po-
lilhing will be better learn'd by repeated Pra-
ctice than by my Defcription. Before I ground
'

the Objedt-Metal on the Pitch, I always ground


the Putty on it v/ith the concave Copper, till it
had done making a noife, becaufe if the Parti-
cles of the Putty were not by this means made
to
^4 O P T I C K S.

to flick faft in the Pitch, they would by rolling


up and down grate and fret the Objed-Metal and
fill it full of little holes.

But becaufc Metal is more difficult to polifll


than Glafs, and is afterwards very apt to be
fpoiled by tarnifhing, and reflects not fo much
Light as Glafs quick-filver'd over does I would :

propound to ufe inflead of the Metal, a Glafs


ground concave on the forefide, and as much
convex on the back-fide, and quick-filver'd o-
ver on the convex fide. The Glafs mufl be e-
very where of the fame thicknefs exactly. O-
therwife it will make Objedls look colour'd and
indiftind:. By fuch a Glafs I tried about five or
fix Years ago to make a reflecfling Telefcope of
four Feet in length to magnify about 150 times,
and I fatislied my felf that there wants nothing
but a good Artift to bring the Delign to perfe--
ftion. For the Glafs being wrought by one of
our London Artifls after fuch a manner as they
grind GlalTes for Telefcopes, though it feemed as
well wrought as the Objed:-glaires ufe to be, yet
when it was quick-filver'd, the Reflexion dif-
covered innumerable Inequalities all over the
Glafs. And by reafon of thefe Inequalities, Ob-
jedls appeared indiftindl in this Inflrument. For
the Errors of refledled Rays caufed by any Ine-
quality of the Glafs, are about fix times greater
than the Errors of refradled Rays caufed by
the like Inequalities. Yet by this Experiment
I fatisfied my felf that the Reflexion on the
concave fide of the Glafs, which I feared would
diflurb the Vifion, did no fenfible prejudice to
it, and by confequence that nothing is wanting
to
B O O K I.
p5
to perfed thefe Telefcopes, but good Workmen
who can grind and polifh GlaiTes truly fpherical.
An Objedt-glafs of a fourteen Foot Telefcope,
made by an Artificer at Lo?ido)i, I once mended
confiderably, by grinding it on Pitch with Put-
ty, and leaning very eafily on it in the grinding,
left the Putty {hould fcratch it. Whether this
way may not do well enough for polifhing thefe
reflecting Glaffes, I have not yet tried. But he
that Ihall try either this or any other way of po-
liftiing which he may think better, may do well
to make his GlafTes ready for poliihing, by grind-
ing them without that Violence, wherewith our
Londofi Workmen prefs their Glafles in grinding.
For by fuch violent preiTure, Glafles are apt to
bend a little in the grinding, and fuch bendino^
will certainly fpoil their Figure. To recom-
mend therefore the confideration of thefe refled-
ing GlaiTes to fuch Artifts as are curious in fi-
guring GlafTes, I fliall defcribe this optical Inftru-
ment in the following Propofition.

PROP. VIII. Prob. II.

To pjorten Telefcopes.

LET ABDC [mFig.2g.]


fpherically concave on the
reprefent a Glafs
forefide AB, and
as muchconvex on the backfide CD, fo that
itbe every where of an equal thicknefs. Let it
not be thicker on one fide than on the other,
left it make Objects appear colour'd and indi-
ftina,
^6 O P T I C K S.

flindl , and be very truly wrought and


let it

quick-filver'd over on the backfide; and fet in


the Tube VXYZ which muft be very black
within. Let EFGreprefent a Prifm of Glafs
or Cryftal placed near the other end of the
Tube, in the middle of it, by means of a han-
dle of Brafs or Iron FGK, to the end of which
made flat it is cemented. Let this Prifm be
redangular at E, and let the other two Angles
at F and Gbe accurately equal to each other,
and by confequence equal to half right ones,
and let the plane fides andFE GE
be fquare,
and by confequence the third fide F G
a redlan-
gular Parallelogram whofe length is to its
,

breadth in a fubduplicate proportion of two to


one. Let it be fo placea in the Tube , that
the Axis of the Speculum may pafs through the
middle of the fquare fide EF perpendicularly
and by confequence through the middle of the
fide FG at an Angle of 45 Degrees, and let the
fide E F be turned towards the Speculum, and
the diftance of this Prifm from the Speculum
be fuch that the Rays of the Light PQ, RS, ^c,
which are incident upon the Speculum in Lines
parallel to the Axis thereof, may enter the Prifm
at the fide EF, and be reflected by the fide
FG, and thence go out of it through the fide
GE, to the point T, which muft be the com-
mon Focus of the Speculum ABDC, and of a
Plano-convex Eye-glafs H, through which thofe
Rays muft pafs to the Eye. And let \ - Rays at
their coming out of the. Glafs pafs irough .

a fmall round hole, or aperture made in a lit*


tie plate of Lead, Brafs, or Silver, wherewith
the
B O O K I.
97
the Glafs is to be covered, which hole mufl be
no bigger than is neceflary for Light enovigh to
pafs through. For fo it will render the Objedt
diftindt, the Plate in which 'tis made intercept-
ing all the erroneous part of the Light which
comes from the verges of the Speculum AB.
Such an Inftrument well made, if it be fix Foot
long, (reckoning the length from the Speculum
to the Prifm, and thence to the Focus T ) will
bear an aperture of fix Inches at the Speculum,
and magnify between two and three hundred
times. But the hole H here limits the aperture
with more advantage, than if the aperture was
placed at the Speculum. If the Inftrument be
made longer or fhorter, the aperture muft be in
proportion as the Cube of the fquare-fquare Root
of the length, and the magnifying as the aper-
ture. But it's convenient that the Speculum be
an Inch or two broader than the aperture at the
leaft, and that the Glafs of the Speculum be
thick, that it bend not in the working. The
Prifm EFG muft be no bigger than is necelTary,
and its back lide FG
muft not be quick-lilver'd
over. For without quickfilver it will refledl all
the Light incident on it from the Speculum.
In this Inftrument the Objedl will be invertc^,
but may be erected by making the fquare fides
FF and EG of the Prifm EFG
not plane but
fpherically convex, that the Rays may crofs as
well before they come at it as afterwards between
it andj.rj-e Eye-glafs. If it be defired that the
Inft^^ iie.it bear a larger aperture, that may be

alfo Qone by compofmg the Speculum of two


GlalTes with Water between them.
H If
pg O P T I C K S.

If the Theory of making Telefcopes could at


length be fully brought into Pradtice, yet there
,

would be certain Bounds beyond which Tele-


'

fcopes could not perform. For the Air through


which we look upon the Stars, is in a perpetual
Tremor J as may be ften by the tremulous Moti-
on of Shadows call: from high Towers,- and by-
the twinkling of the fix'd Stars. But thefe Stars
do not twinkle when viewed through Telefcopes
which have large apertures. For the Rays of
Light which pafs through divers parts of the
aperture, tremble each of them apart, and by
means of their various and fometimes contrary
Tremors, fall at one and the fame time upon dif-
ferent points in the bottom of the Eye, and their
trembling Motions are too quick and confufed to
be perceived feverally. And all thefe illuminated
Points conftitute one broad lucid Point, com-
pofed of thofe many trembling Points confufed-
ly and infenlibly mixed with one another by very
ihort and fwift Tremors, and thereby caufe the
Star to appear broader than it is, and without
any trembling of the whole. Long Telefcopes
may caufe Objeds to appear brighter and larger
than fliort ones can do, but they cannot be fo
formed as to take away that confuiion of the
Rays which arifes from the Tremors of the At-
mofphere. The only Remedy is a moft ferene
and quiet Air, fuch as may perhaps be found on
the tops of the higheft Mountains above the grof- .

ier Clouds.

THE
THE
FIRST BOOK
O F

OPTICKS.
PART II.

PROP, I. Theor. I.

T%e Phczno7nena of Colours hi refraEled or


refie&ed Light are not caufed by new
Modifications of the Light varioufly im-
frefsd^ according to the various Termi-
nations of the Light and Shadow.

The Proof by Experiments.


Exper. I. OR if the Sun fhine into a

I
very dark Chamber through
an obiong hole F, [in Fig. i.]
whofe breadth is tlie fixth or
eighth part of an Inch, or fomething lefs j and
his beam F H
do afterwards pafs firft through a
2 H very
i6o O P T i C K S.

very large Prifm ABC, diftant about 20 Feet


from the and parallel to it, and then ( with
hole,
it3 white part) through an oblong hole H, whofe

breadth is about the fortieth or lixtieth part of


an Inch, and which is made in a black opake
Body GI, and placed at thediftanceof two or
three Feet from the Prifm, 'in a parallel Situa-
tion both to the Prifm and to the former hole,
and white Light thus tranfmitted through
if this
the hole H, fall afterwards upon a white Paper
//, placed after that hole H, at thediftanceof
three or four Feet from it, and there paint thC;
ufual Colours of the Prifm, fuppofe red at /,
'

yellow at s, green at r, blue at ^, and violet


at p you may with an Iron Wire, or any fuch
',

like (lender opake Body, whofe breadth is a-


bout the tenth part of an Inch, by intercepting
the Rays at k, /, w, ;z or 0, take away any one
of the Colours at t, s, r, q or />, whilft the other
Colours remain upon the Paper as before j or
with an Obftacle fomething bigger you may
tak away any two, or three, or four Colours
together, the reft remaining: So that any one
of the Colours as well as violet may become
outmoft in the Confine of the Shadow towards
^, and any one of them as well as red may be-
come outmoft in the Confine of the Shadow to-
wards /, and any" one of them may alfo bor-
der upon the Shadow made within the Colours
by the Obftacle R intercepting fome interme-
diate part of the Light; and, any one of
laftly,

them by being left alone, may border upon the


Shadow on either hand. All the Colours have
themfelves indifferently to any Confines of Sha-
I dow.
BOOK I. lor
dow, and therefore the differences, of thefe Co-
lours from one another, do not arife from the
different Confines of Shadow, whereby Light
is varioufly modified, as has hitherto been the
Opinion of Philofophcrs. In trying thefe things
*tisto be obferved, that by how much the holes
F and H
are narrower, and the Intervals be-
tween them and the Prifm greater, and the
Chamber darker, by fo much the better doth the
Experiment fucceed provided the Light be
;

not fo far diminifhed, but that the Colours at


pt he fufficiently vifible. To procure a Prifm
of folid Glafs large enough for this Experiment
will be difficult, and therefore a prifmatick Vef-
fel muft be made of poliili'd Glafs Plates ce-
mented together, and filled with fait Water or
clear Oil.
Exper. 2. The Sun's Light let into a dark
Chamber through the round hole F, [in Fig. 2.]
half an Inch wide, paffed firft through the Prifm
ABC placed at the hole, and then through a
Lens PT
fomething more than four Inches
broad^ and about eight Feet diflant from the
Prifm, and thence converged to the Focus O
of the Lens diftant from it about three Feet,
and there fell upon a white Paper D E. If that
Paper was perpendicular to that Light incident
upon it, reprefented in the pollure DE,
as 'tis

all the Colours upon it at appeared white. O


But if the Paper being turned about an Axis
parallel to the Prifm, became very much incli-
ned to the Light, as 'tis reprefented in the Po-
fitions the fame Light in the one
de-Andi ^i-,
cafe appeared yellow and red, in the other blue.
H 3
Here
102 O P T I C K S.

Here one and the fame part of the Light in one


and the fame place, according to the various In-
clinations of the Paper, appeared in one cafe
white, in another yellow or red, in a third blue,
whilft the Confine of Light and Shadow, and
the Refradions of the Prifm in all thefe cafes
remained the fame.
Expcr. 3. Such another Experiment may be
more Let a broad beam
eaiily tried as follows.
of the Sun's Light coming into a dark Cham-
ber through a hole in the Window-fhut be re-
fracted by a large Prifm ABC, [in Fig. 3.]
whofe refradting Angle C is more than 60 De-
grees, and fo foon as it comes out of the Prifm,
let it fall upon the white Paper glewed up- DE
on a ilifF Plane; and this Light, when the Pa-
per is perpendicular to it, as 'tis reprefented in
DE, will appear perfed:ly white upon the Pa-
per; but when the Paper is very much inclin'd
to itfuch a manner as to keep always paral-
in
lel of the Prifm, the whitenefs of
to the Axis
the whole Light upon the Paper will according
to the inclination of the Paper this way or that
way, change either into yellow and red, as in
the pofture J^, or into blue and violet, as in
the pofture ^ e. And if the Light before it fall
upon the Paper be twice refracted the fame
way by two parallel Prifms, thefe Colours will
become the more confpicuous. Here all the
middle parts of the broad beam of white Light
which fell upon the Paper, did without any
Confine of Shadow to modify it, become co-
lour'd all over with one uniform Colour, the
Colour being always the fame in the middle of
the
B O O K I. 103
the Paper as at the edges, and this Colour chan-
ged according to the various Obliquity of the
reflefting Paper, without any change in the Re-
fradlions or Shadow, or in the Light which fell
upon the Paper. And therefore thefe Colours
are to be derived from fome other Caufe than the
new Modifications of Light by Refradions and
Shadows.
If it be aiked, what then is their Caufe ? I
anfwer, That the Paper in the poilure Jt', being
more oblique to the more refrangible Rays than
to the lefs more ilrongly illu-
refrangible ones, is

minated by the latter than by the former, and


therefore the lefs refrangible Rays are predomi-
nant in the refledted Light. And where-ever
they are predominant in any Light, they tinge it
with red or yellow, as may in fome meafure ap-
pear by the firft Propofition of the firfl Part of
this Book, and will more fully appear hereafter.
And the contrary happens in the poflure cf the
Paper ^e, the more refrangible Rays being then
predominant which always tinge Light with
blues and violets.
Exper 4. The
Colours of Bubbles with which
Children play are various, and change their Si-
tuation varioufly without any refped to any
,

Confine or Shadow. If fuch a Bubble be co-


ver'd with a concave Glafs, to keep it from be-
ing agitated by any Wind or Motion of the Air,
the Colours will flowly and regularly change
their Situation even whilll the Eye and the
,

Bubble, and all Bodies which emit any Light,


or caft any Shadow , remain unmoved. And
therefore their Colours arife from fome regular
H 4 Caufe
104 O P T I C K S.

Caufe which depends not on any Confine of Sha-


dow. What this Caufe is will be fliewed in the
next Book.
To thefe Experiments may be added the
tenth Experiment of the firft Part of this firft
Book, where the Sun's Light in a dark Room be-
ing trajeded through the parallel Superficies of
two Prifms tied together in the form of a Paralle-
lopipede, became totally of one uniform yellow
or red Colour, at its emerging out of the Prifms.
Here, in the production of thefe Colours, the
Confine of Shadow can have nothing to do.
For the Light changes from white to yellow,
orange and red fuccefiively, without any alte-
ration of the Confine of Shadow And at both
:

edges of the emerging Light where the con-


trary Confines of Shadow ought to produce
different Effeds , the Colour is one and the
fame, whether it be white, yellow, orange or
red And in the middle of the emerging Light,
:

where there is no Confine of Shadow at all, the


Colour is the very fame as at the edges, the
whole Light at its very firft Emergence being of
one uniform Colour, whether white, yellow,
orange or red, and going on thence perpetual-
ly without any change of Colour, fuch as the
Confine of Shadow is vulgarly fuppofed to wotk
in refradted Light after its Emergence. Nei-
ther can thefe Colours arife from any new Mo-
difications of the Light by Refradions, becaufe
they change fuecefiively frorri white to yellow,
orange and red, v^hile the Refradtions remain
the fame, and alfo becaufe the Refradions are
made contrary ways by parallel Superficies which
deftro'y
B O O K I. 105
deftroy one another's Effeds. They arife not
therefore from any Modifications of Light made
byRefradions and Shadows, but have foire or her
Caufe. What that Caufe is we (hewed abov-e in
this tenth Experiment, and need not here re-
peat it.

There is yet another material Circumftance of


this Experiment. For this emerging Light being
by a third Prifm HIK" [in Fig. 22. Part L] re-
fradled towards the Paper FT, and there painting
theufual Colours of the Frifm, red, yellow, green,
blue, violet If thefe Colours arole from the Re-
:

fradions of that Frifm modifying the Light, they


would not be in the Light before its Incidence on
that Frifm. And yet in that Experiment we
found, that when by turning the two firft Prifms
about their common Axis all the Colours were
made to vanifh but the red; the Light which
makes that red being left alone, appeared of
the very fame red Colour before its Incidence
on the third Frifm. And in general we find
by other Experiments, that when the Rays
which differ in Refrangibility are feparated from
one another, and any one Sort of them is con-
fidered apart, the Colour of the Light which
they compofe cannot be changed by any Re-
fraction or Reflexion whatever, as it ought to
be were Colours nothing elfe than Modifica-
tions of Light caufed by Refractions, and Re-
flexions, and Shadows. This Unchangeablenefs
of Colour I am now to defcribe in the following
Propofition.

PROP,
io6 O P T I C K S.

PROP. IT. Theor. II.

u47/ homogeneal Light has its proper Colour


anfweriftg to its Degree of Refrangibi-
lity^ and that Colour cannot be changed
by Reflexions and RefraSiions,

the Experiments of the fourth Propofition


INof the firfh Part of this firft Book, when I had
leparated the heterogeneous Rays from one ano-
ther, the Spedrum pt formed by the feparated
Rays, did in the Progrefs from its End^, on which
the moft refrangible Rays fell, unto its other
End /, on which the leaft refrangible Rays fell,
appear tinged with this Series of Colours, violet,
indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange, red, together
with all their intermediate Degrees in a continual
Succeffion perpetually varying. So that there ap-
peared as many Degrees oi Colours, as there were
forts of Rays differing in Refrangibility.
Exper.^. Now, that thefe Colours could not be
changed by Refradtion, I knew by refradiing with
aPrifm fometimes one very little Part of tbisLight,
fometimes another very little Part, as is defcribed
in the twelfth Experiment of the firft Part of this
Book. For by this Refradtion the Colour of the
Light was never changed in the leaft. If any
Part of the red Light was refracted, it remained
totally of the fame red Colour as before. No
orange, no yellow, no green or blue, no other
new Colour was produced by that Refradtion.
Neither did the Colour any ways change by
repeated Refradtions, but continued always the
fame
B O O K I. 107
fame red entirely as at firft. The
Con- like
ftancy and Immutability I found alfo in the blue,
green, and other Colours. So alfo, if I looked
through a Prifm upon any Body illuminated with
any Part of this homogeneal Light, as in the four-
teenth Experiment of the firfl Part of this Book
is defcribed ; I could not perceive any new Co-

lour generated this way. All Bodies illumina-


ted with compound Light appear through Prifms
confufed, (as was faid above) and tinged with
various new Colours, but thofe illuminated with
homogeneal Light appeared through Prifms
neither lefs diflincfl, nor otherwife colour'd,
than when viewed with the naked Eyes. Their
Colours were not in the leaft changed by the
Refrad:ion of the interpofed Prifm. I fpeak
here of a fenfible Change of Colour For the :

Light which I here call homogeneal, being not


abfolutely homogeneal, there ought to arife
fome little Change of Colour from its Hetero-
geneity. But, if that Heterogeneity was fo lit-
tle as it might be made by the
Experimentsfaid
of the fourth Propofition, that Change was not
fenfible, and therefore in Experiments, where
Senfe is Judge, ought to be accounted none
at all.

Exper. 6. And as thefe Colours were not


changeable by Refradions, fo neither were they
by Reflexions. For all white, grey, red, yel-
low, green, blue, violet Bodies, as Paper, Afhes,
red Lead, Orpiment, Lidico, Bife, Gold, Sil-
ver, Copper, Grafs, blue Flowers, Violets,
Bubbles of Water tinged with various Colours,
Peacock's Feathers, the Tindure of Lignum
NepbrU
io8 G P T I C K S.

Nephriticiwi^ and fuch-like, in red homogeneal


Light appeared totally red, in blue Light totally
blue, in green Light totally green, and fo of other
Colours. In the homogeneal Light of any Cc-
lour they all appeared totally of that fame Co-
lour, with this only Difference, that fome of them
reflected that Light more ftrongly, others more
faintly. I never yet found any Body, which by
reflecting homogeneal Light could fenfibly change
its Colour.
From all which it is manifeft, that if the Sun's
Light confifted of but one fort of Rays, there
wduld be but one Colour in the whole World,
nor would it be poflible to produce any new Co-
lour by Reflexions and Refradlions, and by confe-
quence that the Variety of Colours depends upon
the Compofition of Light.

DEFINITION.
TH E homogeneal Light and Rays which
appear red, or rather make Obje<fls apr
pear fo, I call Rubrifick or Red-making ; thofe
which make Objects appear yellow, green, blue,
and violet, I call Yellow-making, Green-making,
Blue-making, Violet-making, and fo of the reft.
And if at any time I fpeak of Light and Rays
as coloured or endued with Colours, I would
be underftood to fpeak not philofophically and
properly, but grolly, and accordingly to fuch
Conceptions as vulgar People in feeing all thefe
Experiments would be apt to frame. For the
Rays to fpeak properly are not coloured. In
them there is nothing elfe than a certain Power
and
B O O K I. lop
dndDifpofition to ftir up aSenfatlon of this or that
Colour. For as Sound in a Bell or mufical String,
or other founding Body, is nothing but a trem-
bling Motion, and in the Air nothing but that
Motion propagated from the Objed, and in the
Senforium 'tis a Senfe of that Motion under the
Form of Sound ; fo Colours in the Objedt are no-
thing but a Difpofition to refledl this or that fort
of Rays more copioufly than the reftj in the
Rays they are nothing but their Difpolitions to
propagate this or that Motion into the Senforium,
and in the Senforium they are Senfations of thofe
Motions under the Forms of Colours.

PROP, III. Prob. I.

To defifte the Refra77gibility of the feveral


forts of homogeneal Light anfwering to
the feveral Colours,

FOR determining this Problem I made the


following Experiment. *
Exper, 7. When I had caufed the Redtilinear
SidesAF, GM, [in /%4.] of the Spedrum of
Colours made by the Prifm to bede- dirtiniflly
the fifth Experiment of the firft Part
fined,^ as in
of this Book is defcribed, rhere were found in it
all the homogeneal Colours in the fame Order
and Situation one among another as in the
Spe^rum of fimple Light, defcribed in the
fourth Proportion of that Part. For the Cir-
cles of which the Spedrum of compound Light
* 5^^ «Ar AuthorV Lea. Optic. Partll. Se^.U. /. 239.
PT
jio O P T I C K S.

PT is compofed, and which in the middle Parts

of the Spectrum interfere, and are intermix'd with


one another, are not intermix'd in their outmoft
Parts where they touch thofe Redilinear Sides
AF and GM. And therefore, in thofe Redi-
linear Sides when diftindly defined, there is no
n^w Colour generated by Refradlion. I obferved
alfo, that if any where between the two outmoft
Circles TMF and PGA a Right Line, as y^,
w^as crofs to the Spectrum, fo as both Ends to
fall perpendicularly upon its Rectilinear Sides,
there appeared one and the fame Colour, and de-
gree of Colour from one End of this Line to
the other. I delineated therefore in a Paper

the Perimeter of the Speft'rum FAP GMT,


and in trying the third Experiment of the firft
Part of this Book, I held the Paper fo that
the Spe([lrum might fall upon this delineated
Figure, and agree with it exactly, whilft an
Affiiiant, whofe Eyes for diftinguilhing Colours
were more critical than mine, did by Right
Lines cc{Bj ^^, g^, &c. drawn crofs the Spe-
ctrum, note the Confines of the Colours, that
is of the red M
a /3 F, of the orange a ^ ^ /3,
of the yellow ye^^, of the green g ^9 ^, of the
blue »iix9, of the indico iXfjua, and of the vio-
let AGA^. And this Operation being divers
times repeated both in the fame, and in feveral
Papers, I found that the Obfervations agreed
well enough with one another, and that the
Redilinear Sides MG
and FA
were by the faid
crofs Lines divided after the manner of a Mufi-
cal Chord. Let GMbe produced to X, that
MX may be equal to GM,
and conceive
2 GX,
BOOK L III
GX, aX, iX, «X, gX, yX, aX, MX, to be
in proportion to one another, as the Numbers,
I, I, f, 1, f, f, i'tt, 4, and fo to reprefent the Chords
of the Key, and of a Tone, a third Minor, a
fourth, a fifth, a fixth Major, a feventh and an
eighth above that Key : And the Intervals M a,
ay, ye, in, »', 'A, and aG, will be tlie Spaces
which the feveral Colours ( red, orange, yel-
low, green, blue, indigo, violet ) take up.
.Now thefe Intervals or Spaces fubtending the
Differences of the Refradlions of the Rays go-
ing to the Limits of thofe Colours, that is, to
the Points M, j, A,
a, y, g,G, may without
y\,

any fenfible be accounted proportional


Error
to the Difierences of the Sines of Refradion of
thofe Rays having one common Sine of Inci-
dence, and therefore fince the common Sine of
Incidence of the mofl and leaft refrangible Rays
out of Glafs into Air was ( by a Method defcri-
bed above) found in proportion to their Sines
of Refraction, as 50 to yy and 78, divide the
Difference between the Sines of Refradiion 77
and 78, as the Line GM
is divided by thofe

Intervals, and you will have 77, 77?, yy^, 77-f,

77t> 77h 77iy 78, the Sines of Refradion of thofe


Rays out of Glafs into Air, their common Sine
of Incidence being 50. So then the Sines of
the Incidences of all the red-making Rays out
of Glafs into Air, were to the Sines of their Re-
fradions, not greater than 50 to yy, nor lefs
than 50 to yyiy but they varied from one ano-
ther according to all intermediate Proportions.
And the Sines of the Incidences of the green-
making
Ill O P T t C K S.

making Rays were to the Sines of their Refradli-.


ons in all Proportions from that of 50 to 'j'jl^
unto that of 50 to 'j'j^. And by the like Limits
above-mentioned were the Refrddlions of the
Rays belonging to the reft of the Colours .de-
fined, the Sines of the red-making Rays extend-
ing from 77 to 'j'j^^ thofe of the orange-making
from 771- to.77-f, thofe of the yellow-making
from j'j}^ to 77 j, thofe of the green-making
from 'j'jy^ to "jji^^ thofe of the blue-making from
77 i to 'J'j^i thofe of the indigo-making from
'i']^ to ji^L^ and thofe of the violet from 77I to

Thefe are the Laws of the Refradlons made


out of Glafs into Air, and thence by the third
Axiom of the iirfl Part of this Book, the Laws of
the Refractions made out of Air into Glafs are ea-
fily derived.
Exper. 8. I found moreover, that when Light
goes out of Air through feveral contiguous re-
fracting Mediums as through Water and Glafs,
and thence goes out again into Air, whether
the refracting Superficies be parallel or inclin'd
to one another, that Light as often as by con-
trary Refractions 'tis fo corrected, that it emer-
geth in Lines parallel to thofe in which it was
incident, continues ever after to be white. But
if the emergent Rays be inclined to the inci-
dent, the Wnitenefs of the emerging Light will
by degrees in paffing on from the Place of Emer-
gence, become tinged in its Edges with Co-
lours. This I try'd by refraCting Light with
Prifms of Glafs placed within a Prifmatick Vef-
iel of Water. Now thofe Colours argue a di-
verging
B O O K I. 113
erging and feparation of the heterogeneous Rays
from one another by means of their unequal Re-
fractions, as in what follows will more fully ap-
pear. And, on the contrary, the permanent
whitenefs argues, that in like Incidences of the
Rays there is no fuch feparation of the emerging
Rays, and by confequence no inequality of their
whole Refrad:ions. Whence I feem to gather
the two following Theorems.

1. The Exceffes of t-he Sines of Refracflion of


feveral forts of Rays above their common SiAe of
Incidence when the Refractions are made out of
divers denfer Mediums immediately into one and
the fame rarer Medium, fuppofe of Air, are to
one another in a given Proportion.
2. The Proportion of the Sine of Incidence
to the Sine of Refradtion of one and the fame
fort of Rays out of one Medium into another,
is compofed of the Proportion of the Sine of

Incidence to the Sine of Refradtion out of the


firft Medium into any third Medium, and of the

Proportion of the Sine of Incidence to the Sine


of Refradtion out of that third Medium into the
fecond Medium.

By the Theorem the Refradtlons of the


firft

Rays of every made out of any Medium in-


fort
to Air are known by having the Refradtion of
the Rays of any one fort. As for inftance, if
the Refradtions of the Rays of every fort out
of Rain-water into Air be defired, let the com-
mon Sine of Incidence out of Glafs into Air be
fubdudted from the Sines of Refradtion, and
I the
1

114 O P T I C K S.

the ExcelTes will be 27, 27^, 27 1, 27J, ^jl,


2j\, 275, 28. Suppofe now
that the Sine of
Incidence of the leaft refrangible Rays be to
their Sine of Refraction out of Rain-water into
Air as 3 to 4, and fay as i the difference of thofe
Sines is to 3 the Sine of Incidence, fo is 27 the
leaft of the ExcefTes above-mentioned to a fourth
Number 8 1 j and 8 1 will be the common Sine of
Incidence out of Rain-water into Air, to which
Sine if you add all the abovementioned ExcefTes,
you will have the defired Sines of the Refrad:ions
108, io8f, 108-I, iq8', 108 ", 1085, io8|,
109.
By the latter Theorem the Refradlion out of
one Medium into another is gathered as often
£s you have the Refractions out of them both in-
to any third Medium. As if the Sine of Inci-
dence of any Ray out of Glafs into Air be to its
Sine of Refradion, as 20 to 3 i, and the Sine of
Incidence of the fame Ray out of Air into Wa-
ter, be to its Sine of Refraction as 4 to 3; the
Sine of Incidence of that Ray out of Glafs into
Water will be to its Sine of RefraCtion as 20 to 3
and 4 to 3 jointly, that is, as the FaCtum of '20
and 4 to the FaCtum of 3 1 and 3, or as 80 to 93.
And thefe Theorems being admitted into Op-
ticks, there would be fcope enough of hand-
ling that Science voluminoufly after a new man-
ner *j not only by teaching thofe things which
tend to the perfection of Vifion, but alfo-by
determining mathematically all kinds of Phae-
nomena of Colours which could be produced
* Js is done in our Author'i Left. Optic. Part I. SeSl. III. and
IV. and Par til. Se^. II.
by
BOOK I. rx5*
by Refradlions. For
to do this^ there is nothing
elle requifite than to find out the Separations of
heterogeneous Rays, and their various Mixtures
and Proportions in every Mixture. By this way
of arguing I invented almoft all the Phsenomena
defcribed in thefe Books, befide fome others lefs
neceffary to the Argument; and by the fuccelles
I met with in the Trials, I dare promife, that to
him who fhall argue truly, and then try all things
with good 'Glaffes and fufficient Circumfpeclion,
the cxpeded Event will not be wanting. But he
is firft to know what Colours will arife from any
others mix'd in any affigned Proportion.

PROP. IV. Theor. hi.


Colours may be produced by Compofttion
ix^hich Jljall belike to the Colours of homO"
geneal Light as to the Appeara7ice of Co-
lour^ hut not as to the hrmiutability of
Colour and Co7iflitution of Light. Aftd
thofe Colours by how much they are more
co7npounded by fo much are they lefs full
and inte?ife^ a?id by too much Compofition
they may be diluted and weflke?id till they
ceafey and the Mixture beco77ies white or
grey, 'There may be alfo Colours produced
by Compoftio?tj which are not fully like
any of the Colours of homoge?2eal Light.

FOR Mixture of homogeneal


a
low compounds an Orauge,
red and yel-
like in appea-
I 2 ranee
ii6 O P T I C K S.

ranee of Colour to that orange which in the


feries of unmixed prifmatick Colours lies between
them; but the Light of one orange is homogeneal
as to Refrangibility, and that of the other is he-
terogeneal, and the Colour of the one, if viewed
through a Prifm, remains unchanged, that of
the other is changed and refolved into its compo-
nent Colours red and yellow. And after the fame
manner other neighbouring homogeneal Colours
may compound new Colours , like the in-
termediate homogeneal ones, as yellow and green,
the Colour between them both, and afterwards,
if blue be added, there will be made a green
the middle Colour of the three which enter the
Compofition. For the yellow and blue on either
hand, if they are equal in quantity they draw the
intermediate green equally towards themfelves in
Compofition, and fo keep it as it were in i^qui-
librio, that it verge not more to the yellow on the
one hand, and to the blue on the other, but by
their mix'd Actions remain ftill a middle Colour.
To this mix'd green there may be farther added
fome red and violet, and yet the green will not
prefently ceafe, but only grow lefs full and vivid,
and by increalingthe red and violet, it will grow
more and more dilute, until by the prevalence of
the added Colours it be overcome and turned into
whitenefs, or fome other Colour. So if to the
Colour of any homogeneal Light, the Sun's white
Light compofed of all forts of Rays be added,
tliat Colour will not vanifh or change its Species,
but be diluted, and by adding more and more
white it will be dikited more and more perpetu-
ally. Laflly, If r^d and violet be mingled, there
1 will
B O O K I. 117
will be generated according to their various Pro-
portions various Purples, fuch as are not like in
appearance to the Colour of any homogeneal
Light, and of thefe Purples mix'd v^dth yellow
and blue may be made other nev^ Colours.

PROP. V. Theor. IV.


Whiumjs and grey Colours hetwee?i
all
white and blacky may be compounded of
Colours^ and the whitenefs of the Suns
Light is compounded of all the primary
^Colours mix'd in a due Proportion,

The Proof by Experiments.


Exper. 9.np H E Sun fliining into a dark Cham-
-*- ber through a round hole in
little

the Window-fliut and his Light being there


,

refraded by a Prifm to cafl his coloured Image


PT [in Fig. 5.] upon the oppofite Wall I held :

a white Paper V to that Image in fuch manner


that it might be illuminated by the colon r'd
Light refle(5ted from thence, and yet not inter-
cept any part of that Light in its paflage from
the Prifm to the Spectrum. And I found that
when the Paper was held nearer to any Colour
than to the reft, it appeared of that Coiour to
which it approached neareft^ but when it was
equally or almoft equally diftant from all the
Colours, fo that it might be equally illumina-
ted by them all it appeared white. And in this
laft fituation of the Paper, if fome Colours were
I inter-
3
ii8 O P T I C K S.

, intercepted, the Paper loft white Colour, and


its

appeared of the Colour of the reft of the Light


which was not intercepted. So then the Pa-
per was illuminated with Lights of various Co-
lours, namely, red, yellow, green, blue and
violet, and every part of the Light retained its
'proper Colour, until it was incident on the Pa-
per, and became refleded thence to the Eycj
fo that If it had been- either alone ( the reft of
the Light being intercepted ) or if it had a-
bounded moft and been predominant in the
,

Light refled:ed from the Paper, it would have


tinged the Paper with its own Colour and yet j

being mixed with the reft of the Colours in a


due pi:oporti6n, it made the Paper look white,
and therefore by a Compoiition with the reft
produced that Colour. The feveral parts of
the coloured Light refleded from the Spectrum,
whilft they are propagated from thence through
the Air, do perpetually retain their proper Co-
lours, becaufe wherever they fall upon the Eyes
of any Spedator, they m.ake the feveral parts of
the Spectrum to appear under their proper Co-
lours. They retain therefore their proper Co-
lours when they fall. upon the Paper V, and fo
\)y the confuficn and perfed: mixture of thofe'
Colours compound the whitenefs of the Light
refleded from thence.
Expcr. lo. Let that Spe6trum or folar Image
]^T [in Fig. 6,'\ f^ll now upon the Lens MN
above four Liches broad, and about fix Feet di-
ftarit fi'om the Prifm ABC and fo figured that
it may caufe the coloured Light which diverg-^
^ph from the Prifm to converge and meet again-
"i a*.
"B O O K I. iig
at its Focus G, about fix or eight Feet diflant
from the Lens, and there to fall perpendicularly
upon a white Paper DE. And if you move
this Paper to and fro, you will perceive that
near the Lens, as at de^ the whole folar Image
(fuppofe 2X pt) will appear upon it intenfely
coloured after the manner above-explained, and
that by receding from the Lens thofe Colours
will perpetually come towards one another, and
by mixing more and more dilute one another
continually, until at length the Paper come to
the Focus G, where by a perfed: mixture they
will wholly vanifh and be converted into white-
nefs, the whole Light appearing now upon the
Paper like a little white Circle. And after-
wards by receding farther from the Lens, the
Rays which before converged will now crofs
one another in the Focus G, and diverge from
thence, and thereby make the Colours to appear
again, but yet in a contrary order; fuppofe at
^i, where the red t is now above which before
was below, and the violet p is below which be-
fore was above.
Let us now flop the Paper at the Focus G,
where the Light appears totally white and cir-
cular, and let us confider its whitenefs. I fay,
that this is compofed of the converging Colours.
For if any of thofe Colours be intercepted at
the Lens, the whitenefs will ceafe and degene-
rate into that Colour which arifeth from the
compofition of the other Colours which are not
intercepted. And then if the intercepted Co-
lours be let pafs and fall upon that compound
Colour, they mix with it, and by their mixture
I 4. reilore
I20 O P T I C K S.

ilore the whitenefs. So if the violet, blue and


green be intercepted, the remaining yellow,
orange and red will compound upon the Paper
an orange, and then if the intercepted Colours
be let pafs, they will fall upon this compounded
orange, and together with it decompound a
white. So alfo if the red and violet be inter-
cepted, the remaining yellow, green and blue,
will compound a green upon the Paper, and
then the red and violet being let pafs will fall up-
on this green, and together with it decompound
a white. And that in this Compoiition of white
the feveral Rays do not fuffer any Change in their
colorific Qualities by ading upon one another,
but are only mixed, and by a mixture of their
Colours produce white, may farther appear by
thefe Arguments.
If the Paper be placed beyond the Focus G,
fuppofe at h^i, and then the red Colour at the
Lens be alternately intercepted, and let pafs a-
gain, the violet Colour on the Paper will not fuf^
fer any Change thereby, as it ought to do if the
feverai forts of Rays adted upon one another in
the Focus G, where they crofs. Neither will
the red upon the Paper be changed by any alter-
nate flopping, and letting pafs the violet which
crolieih it.

And the Paper be placed at the Focus G,


if

and the white round Image at G be viewed


through the Pnfm HIK, and by the Refradiion
of that Prifm be tranllated to the place ri', and
there sppear tinged with various Colours, name-
ly, the violet at v and red at r, and others be-
tween, and then the red Colours at the Lens
be
B O O K I. 121
be often ftopp'd and by turns, the red
let pafs

at r will accordingly difappear, and return as of-


ten, but the violet at v will not thereby fuffer any
Change. And fo by flopping and letting pafs
alternately the blue at the Lens, the blue at v
will accordingly difappear and return, without
any Change made in the red at r. The red there-
fore depends on one and the blue
fort ot Rays,
on another fort, which in the Focus G v/here
they are commix'd, do not acTt on one another.
And there is the fame Reafon of the other Co-
lours.*
I confidered farther, that when the moft re-
frangible Rays P/>, and the leaft refrangible
ones T t, are by converging inclined to one ano-
ther, the Paper, if held very oblique to thofe
Rays in the Focus G, might refled: one fort of
them more copioully than the other fort, and
by that Means the remedied Light would be
tinged in that Focus with the Colour of the pre-
dominant Rays, provided thofe Rays feverally
retained their Colours, or coloriiic Qualities in
the Compofition of White made by them, in tliat
Focus. But if they did not retain them in that
White, but became all of them feverally endued
there with a Difpof^tion to flrike the Senfe with
the Perception of White, then they could never
lofe their Whitenefs by fuch Reflexions. I in-
clined therefore the Paper to the Rays very oblique-
ly, as in the fecond Experiment of this fecondPart
of the firft Book, that the moft refrangible Rays
might be more copioufiy refieded than the refl,
and the Whitenefs at Length changed fucceffively
into blue, indigo, and violet. Then I inclined it

the
122 O P T I C K S.

the contrary Way, that the leaft refrangible Rays


might be more copious in the reflected Light than
the reft, and the Whitenefs turned fucceffively to
yellow, orange, and red.
Laftly, I made an Inftrument XY in fafhion
of a Comb, whofe Teeth being in number fix-
teen, were about an Inch and an half broad, and
the Intervals of the Teeth about two Inches
wide. Then by interpofmg fucceffively the
Teeth of this Inftrument near the Lens, I inter-
cepted Part of the Colours by the interpofed
Tooth, whilft the reft of them went on through
the Interval of the Teeth to the Paper DE, and
there painted a round Solar Image. But the Pa-
per I had iirft placed fo, that the Image might
appear white as often as the Comb was taken
away j and then the Comb being as was faid in-
terpofed, that Whitenefs by reafon of the inter-
cepted Part of the Colours at the Lens did al-
ways change into the Colour compounded of
thofe Colours which were not intercepted, and
that Colour was by the Motion of the Comb
perpetually varied fo, that in the paffing of every
Tooth over the Lens all thefe Colours, red, yel-
low, green, blue, and purple, did alw^ays fuc-
ceed one another. I caufed therefore all the
Teeth to pafs fucceffively over the Lens, and
when the Motion w^as flow, there appeared a
perpetual Succeffion of the Colours upon the
Paper But if I fo much accelerated the Mo-
:

tion, that the Colours by reafon of their quick


Succeffion could not be diftinguiffied from one
another, the Appearance of the fmgle Colours
ceafed. There was no redj no yellow, nq
green.
B O O K I. 123
green, no blue, nor purple to be feen any lon-
ger, but from a Confulion of rhem all there a-
rofe one uniform white Colour. Of the Light
which now by the Mixture of all the Colours ap-
peared white, there was no Part really white.
One Part was red, another yellow, a third green,
a fourth blue, a fifth purple, and every Part re-»
tains its proper Colour till it ftrike the Senfo-
rium. If the Impreffions follow one another
flowly, fo that they may be feverally perceived,
there is made a diftind: Senfation of all the Co-
lours one after another in a continual SucceA
fion. But if the Impreffions follow one ano-
ther fo quickly, that they cannot be feverally
perceived, there arifeth out of them all one
common Senfation, which is neither of this
Colour alone nor of that alone, but hath it felf
indifferently to 'em all, and this is a Senfation
of Whitenefs. By the Quicknefs of the Succei^
lions, the Impreffions of the feveral Colours are
confounded in the Senforium, and out of that
Confufion arifeth a mix'd Senfation. If a burn-
ing Coal be nimbly moved round in a Circle
with Gyrations continually repeated, the whole
Circle will appear like Fire ; the reafon of which
is, that the Senfation of the Coal in the feve-

ral Places of that Circle remains imprefs'd on


the Senforium, until the Coal return again to
the fame Place. And fo in a quick Confecu-
tion of the Colours the Impreffion of every Co-
lour remains in the Senforium, until a Revolu-
tion of all the Colours be compleated, and that
firit Colour return again. The Impreffions there-
fore of all the fucceffive Colours are at once in
the
124 O P T I C K S.

the Senforium, and jointly ftir up a Senfation of ,

them all ; and fo


manifeft by this Experi-
it is

inent, that the commix'd Impreffions of all the


Colours do ilir up and beget a Senfation of white,
that is, that Whitenefs is compounded of all the
Colours.
And if the Comb be now taken away, that all
the Colours may at once pafs from the Lens to
the Paper, and be there intermixed, and toge-
ther refleded thence to the Spectator's Eyes; their
Impreffions on the Senforium being now more
fubtilly and perfe(5lly commixed there, ought
much more to ftir up a Senfation of White-
nefs.
You may inftead of the Lens ufe two Prifms
HIK and LMN, which by refracting the co-
loured Light the contrary Way to that of the
^rft Refraction, may make the diverging Rays
converge and meet again in G, as you fee repre-,
fented in the feventh Figure. For where they
meet and mix, they will Qompofe a white Light,
as when a Lens is ufed.
Exper. 1 1. Let the Sun's coloured Image P T
[in Fig. 8.] fall upon the Wall of a dark Cham-
ber, as in the third Experiment of the firft Book,
and let the fame be viewed through a Prifm
aifCy held parallel to the Prifm ABC, by whofe
Refraction that Image was made, and let it now
appear lower than before, fuppofe in the Place
S over-againft the red Colour T. And if you
go near to the Liiage P T, the SpeCtrum S will
appear oblong and coloured like the Image P T $
but if you recede from it, the Colours of the
SpeCtrum S will be contracted more and more,
and
B O O K T. 125
and Sped:rum S becoming
at length vanifli, that
perfedly round and white and if you recede yet
j

farther, the Colours will emerge again, but in a


contrary Order. Now that Spedlrum S appears
white in that Cafe, when the Rays of feveral
forts which converge from the feveral' Parts of
the Image P T, to the Prifm abc, are fo re-
fradted unequally by it, that in their PalTage
from the Prifm to the Eye they may diverge
from one and the fame Point of the Spedirum
S, and fo fall afterwards upon one and the
fame Point in the bottom of the Eye, and there
be mingled.
And farther, if the Comb be here made ufe of,
by whofe Teeth the Colours at the Image PT
may be fucceffively intercepted ; the Spe(ftrum S,
when the Comb is moved llowly, will be perpe-
tually tingedwith fucceiTive Colours: But when
by accelerating the Motion of the Comb, the
Succeffion of the Colours is fo quick that they
.

cannot be feverally feen, that Spedrum S, by a


confufed and mix'd Senfation of them all, will
appear white.
Exper. 12. The Su.i ihining* through a large
Prifm ABC [in Fig, 9.] upon a Comb X Y,
placed immediately behind the Prifm, his Light
which pafTed through the Interftices of the
Teeth fell upon a white Paper E. The D
Breadths of the Teeth were equal to their In-
terftices, and feven Teeth together w^th their
Interftices took up an Inch in Breadth. Now,
when the Paper was about two or three Inches
diftant from the Comb, the Light which paf-
fed through its. feveral Interftices painted fo
many
126 O P T I C K S.

many Ranges of Colours, kl^mn, op^ qr^ &c.


which were one
parallel to another^ and conti-
guous, and without any Mixture of white. And
thefe Ranges of Colours, if the Comb was moved
continually up and down with a reciprocal Mo-
tion, afcended and defcended in the Paper, and
when the Motion of the Comb was fo quick, that
the Colours could not be diftinguiflied from
one another, the whole Paper by their Con-
fufion and Mixture in the Senforium appeared
white.
Let the Comb now reft, and let the Paper
be removed farther from the Prifm, and the fe-
veral Ranges of Colours will be dilated and
expanded into one another more and more, and
by mixing their Colours will dilute one ano-
ther, and at length, when the diftance of the
Paper from the Comb is about a Foot, or a
little more (fuppofe in the Place 2D 2E) they
will fo far dilute one another, as to become
white.
With any Obftacle, let all the Light be now
ftopp'd which paffes through any one Literval
of the Teeth, fo that the Range of Colours which
comes from thence may be taken away, and
you will fee the Light of the reft of the Ranges
to be expanded into the Place of the Range taken
away, and there to be coloured. Let the in-
tercepted Range pafs on as before, and its Co-
lours falling upon the Colours of the other
Ranges, and mixing with them, will reftore the
Whitenefs.
Let the Paper 2 D2 E be now very much in-
clined to the RaySj fo that the moft refrangible
Rays
BOOK I. 127
Rays may be more copioufly refleded than the
reft, and the white Colour of the Paper through
the Excefs of thofe Rays will be changed into
blue and violet. Let the Paper be as much in-
clined the contrary way, that the leaft refran-
gible Rays may be now more copioufly refledl-
ed than the reft, and by their Excefs the White-
nefs will be changed into yellow and. red. The
feveral Rays therefore in that white Light do
retain their colorific Qualities, by which thofe
of any fort, whenever they become more co-
pious than the reft, do by their Excefs and Pre-
dominance caufe their proper Colour to ap-

And by the fame way of arguing, applied to the


third Experiment of fecond
this Part of the firft
Book, it may be concluded, that the white Colour
of all refracted Light at its very firft Emergence,
where it appears as white as before its Incidence,
is compounded of various Colours.

Exper, 13. In the foregoing Experiment the


feveral Intervals of the Teeth of the Comb do
the Office of fo many Prifms, every Interval pro-
ducitig the Phcenomenon of one Prifm. Whence
inftead of thofe Intervals ufing feveral Prifms,
I try'd to compound Whitenefs by mixing their
Colours, and did it by ufing only three Prifms,
as alfo by ufing only two as follows. Let two
Prifms ABC and a be, [in Fig. 10.] whofe re-
frading Angles B and b are equal, be fo placed
parallel to one another, that the refrading An-
gle B of the one may touch the Angle c at the
Bafe of the other, and their Planes C B and
cbj at which the Rays emerge, may lie in Di-
redum.
128 O P T I C K S.

re(5luin. Then let the Light trajedied through


them upon the Paper
fall N, M diiftant about 8
or 12 Inches from the Prifms. And the Co-
lours generated by the interior Limits B and c
of the two Prifms, will be mingled at P T, and
there compound white. For if either Prifm be
taken away, the Colours made by the other will
appear in that Place P T, and when the Prifmi
is reftored to its Place again, fo that its Co-
lours may there fall upon the Colours of the
other, the Mixture of them both will reftore the
White nefs.
This Experiment fucceeds alfo, as I have tried,
when the Angle b of the lower Prifm, is a lit-
tle greater than the Angle B of the upper, and
between the interior Angles B and f, there in-
tercedes fome Space B c, as is reprefented in
the Figure, and the refrading Planes B C and
b c, are neither in Directum, nor parallel to one
another. For there is nothing more requilite
to the Succefs of this Experiment, than that
the Rays of all forts may be uniformly mixed
upon the Paper in the Place P T. If the moft
refrangible Rays coming from the fuperior
Prifm take up all the Space from to P, theM
Rays of the fame fort which come from the in-
ferior Prifm ought to begin at P, and take up
all the reft of the Space from thence towards
N. If the leaft refrangible Rays coming from
the fuperior Prifm take up the Space T, the M
Rays of the fame kind which come from the
other Prifm ought to begin at T, and take up
the remaining Space TIN. If oric fort of the
Rays which have intermediate Degrees of Re-
frangibility,
B O O K I. 129
frangibillty, and come from the fuperlor Prifm
be extended through the Space M
Q^ and ano-
ther fort of thofe Rays through the Space JR., M
and a third fort of them through the Space S, M
the fame forts of Rays coming from the lower
Prifm, ought to illuminate the remaining Spaces
QN, R N, S N, refpedively. And the fame is

to be underftood of all the other forts of Rays.


For thus the Rays of every fort will be fcattered
uniformly and evenly through the whole Space
MN, and fo being every where mix'd in the fame
Proportion, they muft every where produce the
fame Colour. And therefore, fince by this Mix-
ture they produce white in the Exterior Spaces
MP and TN, they muft alfo produce white
in the Interior Space PT. This is the reafon
of the Compolition by which Whitenefs was pro-
duced in this Experiment, and by what other
way foever I made the like Compofition, the Re-
fult was Whitenefs.
Laftly, If with the Teeth of a Comb of a due
Size, the coloured Lights of the two Prifms
which fall upon the Space PT
be alternately in-
tercepted, that Space P T, when the Motion of
the Comb is flow, will always appear coloured,
but by accelerating the Motion of the Comb fo
much that the fucceffive Colours cannot be
diftinguifhed from one another, it will appear
white.
Exper, 14. Hitherto I have produced White-
nefs by mixing the Colours of Prifms. If now
the Colours of natural Bodies are to be min-
gled, let Water a little thicken'd with Soap be
agitated to raife a Froth, and after that Froth
K has
130 O P T I C K S.

has ftood a little, there will appear to one that


{hall view it intently various Colours every where
in the Surfaces of the feveral Bubbles j but to
one that fliall go fo far off, that he cannot diftin-
guifh the Colours from one another, the whole
Froth will grow white with a perfedl White-
nefs.
Exper. 15. Laftly, In attempting to compound
a white, by mixing the coloured Powders which
Painters ufe, I conlider'd that all coloured Pow-
ders do fupprefs and flop in them a very confi-
derable Part of the Light by which they are illu-
minated. For they become coloured by refledl-
ing the Light of their own Colours more co-
pioufly, and that of all other Colours more fpa-
ringly, and yet they do not refied: the Light of
their own Colours fo copioufly as white Bodies
do. If red Lead, for inflance, and a white Pa-
per, be placed in the red Light of the colour'd
Spedtrum made in a dark Chamber by the Re-
fraction of a Prifm, as is defcribed in the third
Experiment of the firfl Part of this Book ; the Pa-
per will appear more lucid than the red Lead,
and therefore refledis the red-making Rays more
copioufly than red Lead doth. And if they be
held in the Light of any other Colour, the
Light reiledled by the Paper will exceed the
Light reflefted by the red Lead in a much
greater Proportion. And the like happens in
Powders of other Colours. And therefore by
mixing fuch Powders, we are not to exped; a
flrong and full White, fuch as is that of Pa-
per, but fome dusky obfcure one, fuch as might
arife from a Mixture of Light and Darknefs,
I or
BOOK I. 131
or from white and black, that is, a grey, pr
dun, or ruflet brown, fuch as are the Colours'
of a Man's Nail, of a Moufe, of Afhcs, of or-
dinary Stohes, of Mortar, of Dull: and Dirt in
High-ways, and the like. And fuch a dark white
I have often produced by mixing colour 'd Pow-
ders. For thus one Part of red Lead, and five
Parts of Viridc lEris, compofed a dun Colour
like that of a Moufe. For thefe two Colours
were feverally fo compounded of others, that
in both together were a Mixture of all Co-
lours; and there was lefs red Lead ufed than
Viride Mr is, becaufe of the Fulnefs of its Co-
lour. Again, one Part of red Lead, and four
Parts of blue Bife, compofed a dun Colour
verging a little to purple, and by adding to
this a certain Mixture of Orpiment and Viride
Mris in a due Proportion, the Mixture loft its
purple TinQure, and became perfed:ly dun.
But the Experiment fucceedcd belt without Mi-
nium thus. To Orpiment I added by little
and little a certain full bright purple, which
Painters ufe, until the Orpiment ceafed to be
yellow, and became of a pale red. Then I di-
luted that red by adding a little Vitide JEris,
and a little more blue Bife than Viride Mris, un-
til it became of fuch a "grey or pale white, as

verged to no one of the Colours more than to


another. For thus it became of a Colour equal
in Whitenefs to that of Afhes, or of Wood newly
cut, or of a Man's Skin. The Orpiment re-
fledled more Light, than did any other of the
Powders, and therefore conduced more to the
Whitenefs of the com.pounded Colour than thev.
.
K 2 fo
132 O P T I C K S.
To affign the Proportions accurately may be diffi-
cult,by reafon of the different Goodnefs of Pow-
ders of the fame kind. Accordingly, as the Co-
lour of any Powder is more or lefs full and lumi-
nous, it ought to be ufed in a lefs or greater Pro-
portion.
Now, confidering that thefe grey and dun Co-
lours may be alfo produced by mixing Whites
and Blacks, and by confequence differ from
perfedt Whites, not in Species of Colours, but
only in degree of Luminoufnefs, it is manifefl that
there nothing more requifite to make them
is

perfectly white than to increafe their Light fuffici-


ently ; and, on the contrary, if by increafmg
their Light they can be brought to perfedl White-
nefs, it will thence alfo follow, that they are of
the fame Species of Colour with the beft Whites,
and differ from them only in the Quantity of
Light. And this I tried as follows. I took the

third of the above-mention'd grey Mixtures, ( that


which was compounded of Orpiment, Purple,
Biie. and Viride Mrhand rubbed it thickly
)

upon the Floor of my Chamber, where the Sun


{hone upon it through the opened Cafement ;
and by it, in the fhadow, I laid a Piece of white
Paper of the fame Bignefs. Then going from
them to the diflance of 12 or 18 Feet, fo that
I could not difcern the Unevennefs of the Sur-
face of the Powder, nor the little Shadows let
fall from the gritty Particles thereof j the Pow-
der appeared intenfely white, fo as to tranfcend
even the Paper it felf in Whitenefs, efpecially
if the Paper were a little fliaded from the Light
of the Clouds, and then the Paper compared
5
with

,A
B O O K I. 133
with the Powder appeared of fuch a grey Colour
as the Powder had done before. But by laying
the Paper where the Sun fliines through the
Glafs of the Window, or by fhutting the Win-
dow that the Sun might fhine through the Glafs
upon the Powder, and by fuch other fit Means of
iiicreafing or decreafnig the Lights wherewith the
Powder and Paper were illuminated, the Light
wherewith the Powder is illuminated may be*
made ilronger in fuch a due Proportion than
the Light wherewith the Paper is illuminated,
that they fhall both appear exadly alike in
Whitenefs. For when I was trying this, a Friend
coming to vifit me, I ftopp'd him at the Door,
and before I told him what the Colours were, or
what I was doing ; I asked him. Which of the
two Whites were the beft, and wherein they dif-
fered ? And after he had at that diflance viewed
them well, he anfwer'd, that they were both good
Whites, and that he could not fay which was
beft, nor wherein their Colours differed. Now,
if you confider, that this White of the Powder
in the Sun-fliine was compounded of the Co-
lours which the component Powders ( Orpi-
ment. Purple, Bife, and Viride JEris ) have in
the fame Sun-fhine, you muft acknowledge by
this Experiment, as well as by the former, that
perfedt Whitenefs may be compounded of Co-
lours.
From what has been faid it is alfo evident,
that the Whitenefs of the Sun's Lisrht is com-
pounded of all the Colours wherewirh the feve-
ral forts of Rays whereof that Light confifts,
when by their feveral Refrangibilities they are
K 3 fepa-
134 O P T I C K S.

feparated from one another, do tinge Paper or any


other white Body whereon they fall. For thofe
Colours {hy Prop.ll. Part 2.) are unchangeable,
and whenever all thofe Rays w^ith thofe their Co-
lours are mix'd again, they reproduce the fame
white Light as before.

PROP. VI. Prob. II.

Lt a mixture of Primary Colour s-^ the


^luantity and S^uality of each bei7tg
given^ to know theColour of the Compound,

WITH Radius
the Center
OD
O [m
defcribe a Circle ADF,
Fig. 11.] and
and
diltinguiih its Circumference into feven Parts

DE, EF, FG, GA, AB, B C, CD, propor-


tional to the feven Mufical Tones or Intervals
of the eight Sounds, «So/, /^, fa^ fol^ la^ mi, fa,
fol, contained in an eight, that is, proportional
to the Number ~, 75, ts, |, 15, is, \. Let the firfl
Part I>E reprefent a red Colour, the fecond EF
orange, the third F G
yellow, the fourth CA
green, the fifth AB blue, the fixth BC indigo,
and the feventh C D violet. And conceive that
thefe areall the Colours of uncompounded Light

gradually pafiing into one another, as they do


when made by Prifms j the Circumference
DEFGABCD, reprefenting the whole Series
of Colours from one end of the Sun's colour'd
Image to the other, fo that from D to E be
all degrees of red, at E the m.ean Colour be-
tween red and orange, from E to F all de-
crees
B O O K I. 135
grees of orange, at F the mean between orange
and yellow, from F to G all degrees of yellow,
and fo on. Let p be the Center of Gravity
of the Arch D E, and q^ r, j, t, u^ Xy the Cen-
ters of Gravity of the Arches E F, F G, G A,
-

A B, B C, and C D refpedively, and about


thofe Centers of Gravity let Circles proportio-
nal to the Number of Rays of each Colour in
the given Mixture be defcrib'd that is, the ;

Circle p proportional to the Number of the


red-making Rays in the Mixture, the Circle q
proportional to the Number of the orange-ma-
king Rays in the Mixture, and fo of the reft.
Find the common Center of Gravity of all thofe
Circles p, q^ r, s, t, z/, x. Let that Center be
Z; and from the Center of the Circle ADF,
through Z to the Circumference, drawing the
Right Line O Y, the Place of the Point Y in the
Circumference Ihall ihew the Colour arifmg from
the Compofition of all the Colours in the given
Mixture, and the Line OZ
fhall be propor-
tional to the Fulnefs or Intenfenefs of the
Cok)ur, that is, to its diftanCe from Vv^iitenefs.
As if Y fall middle between F and G,
in the
the compounded Colour fliall be the beft yel-
low J if Y verge from the middle towards F
or G, the compound Colour fliall accordingly
be a yellow, verging towards orange or green.
If Z fall upon the Circumference, the Colour
fhall be intenfe and florid in the higheft Degree ;
if it fall in the mid- way between the Circum-
ference and Center, it fhall be but half fo
intenfe, that is, it fhall be fuch a Colour as
would be made by diluting the intenfeil yellow
K 4 with
136 O P T I C K S.

with an equal quantity of whitenefs ; and if it


fall upon the center O, the Colour fhall have loft
all its intenfenefs, and become a white. But it
is to be noted, That if the point Z fall in or
near the line OD, the main ingredients being
the red and violet , the Colour compounded
fhall not be any of the prifmatick Colours, but
a purple, inclining to red or violet, according-
ly as the point Z on the fide of the line
lieth
DO towards E or towards C, and in general
the compounded violet is more bright and more
fierythan the uncompounded. Alfo if only two
of the primary Colours which in the circle are
pppofite to one another be rnixed in an equal
proportion, the point Z {hall fall upon the cen-
ter O, and yet the Colour compounded of thofe
two fhall not be perfectly white but fome ,

faint anonymous Colour, For I could never


yet by mixing only two primary Colours pro-
duce a perfeft white. Whether it may be com-
pounded of a mixture of three taken at equal
diftances in the circumference I do not know,
but of four or five I do not much queftion but
it may. But thefe are Curiofities of little or no
moment to the underflanding the Phaenomena
of Nature. For in all whites produced by Na-
ture, there ufes to be a mixture of all forts of
Rays, and by confequence a compofition of all
Colours.
To give an inftance of this Rule; fuppofe a
Colour is compounded of rhefe homogeneal
Colours, of violet one part, of indigo one part,
of blue two parts, of gi^een three parts, of yel-
)pw five parts, of orange fix parts, and of red
ten
B O O K I. 137
ten parts. Proportional to thefe parts defcribe
the Circles x, v, /, s, r, q, p, refpedively, that is,
fo that if the Circle x be one, the Circle 1; may-
be one, the Circle f two, the Circle s three, and
the Circles r, and ten. Then I
q and/>, five, fix
find Z the common center of gravity of thefe
Circles, and through Z
drawing the Line OY,
the Point Y falls upon the circumference between
E and F, fomething nearer to E than to F, and
thence I conclude, that the Colour compounded
of thefe Ingredients will be an orange, verging a
little more to red than to yellow. Alfo I find
that OZ is a little lefs than one half of O Y, and

thence I conclude, that this orange hath a little


lefs than half the fulnefs or intenfenefs of an un-
compounded orange j that is to fay, that it is

fuch an orange as may be made by mixing an ho-


mogeneal orange with a good white in the pro-
portion of the Line OZ
to the Line ZY, this
Proportion being not of the quantities of mixed
orange and white Powders, but of the quantities
of the Lights reflected from them.
This Rule I conceive accurate enough for pra-
dtice, though not mathematically accurate ; and
the truth of it may be fufliciently proved to Senfe,
by flopping any of the Colours at the Lens in the
tenth Experiment of this Book. For the refi: of
the Colours which are not fi:opp'd, but pafs on to
the Focus of the Lens, will there compound
either accurately or very nearly fuch a Colour, as
by thi^ Rule ought to refult from their Mixture.

FRO P.
138 O P T I C K S.

PROP. VIL The OR. V.


Univerfe which are
/ill the Colours in the
made by Lights and depend not on the
Power of Imagination^ are either the
Colours of homogeneal Lights^ or com-
founded of thefe-^ and that either accu-
rately or very nearly^ according to the,

Rule of the foregoing Problem,

FOR that
it has been proved (in Frop. i. Fart 2.)
the changes of Colours made by Refra-
d:ions do not arife from any new Modifications of
the Rays imprefs'd by thofe Refradions, and by
the various Terminations of Light and Shadow,
as has been the conftant and general Opinion of
Philofophers. It has alfo been proved that the
feveral Colours of the homogeneal Rays do con-
ftantly anfwer to their degrees of Refrangibility,
[Prop. I. Part i. andPrc/^. 2. Part 2.) and that
their degrees of Refrangibility cannot be changed
by Refractions and Reflexions [Prop. 2. Part i.)
and by confequence that thofe their Colours
are likewife immutable. It has alfo been pro-
ved diredlly by refrafting and reflecting homo-
geneal Lights apart, that their Colours cannot be
changed, [Prop. 2. Part 2.) It has been proved
alfoj that when the feveral forts of Rays are mix-
ed, and in croflmg pafs through the fame'fpace,
they do not ad- on one another fo as to change
each others colorific qualities. [Exper. 10. Part 2.)
but by mixing their Adions in the Senforium be-
get
BOOK I.
139
get a Senfation differing from what either would
do apart, that is a Senfation of a mean Colour
between their proper Colours j and particularly
when by the concourfe and mixtures of all forts
of Rays, a white Colour is produced, the white
is a mixture of all the Colours which the Rays

would have apart, [Frop. 5. Part 2.) The Rays


in that mixture do not lofe or alter their feveral
colorific qualities, but by all their various kinds
of Adions mix'd in the Senforium, beget a Sen-
fation of a middling Colour between all their Co-
lours, which is whitenefs. For whitenefs is a
mean between all Colours, having it felf indiffe-
rently to them aU, fo as with equal facility to be
tinged with any of them. A red Powder mixed
with a little blue, or a blue with a little red,' doth
not prefcnrly lofe its Colour, but a white Powder
mix'd with any Colour is prefently tinged with
that Colour, and is equally capable of being

tinged with any Colour whatever. It has been


fhewed alfo, that as the Sun's Light is mix'd of
all forts of Rays, fo its whitenefs is a mixture of
the Colours of all forts of Rays thofe Rays ha-
-,

ving from the beginning their feveral colorific


qualities as well as their feveral Refrangibilities,
and retaining them perpetually unchanged not-
withftanding any Refradtions or Reflexions they
may at any time fuffer, and that whenever any
fort of the Sun's Rays is by any means (as by
Reflexion in Exper. g. and 10. Part i. or by
Refradion as happens in all Refractions) fepara-
ted from the reft, they then manifell; their proper
Colours. Thefe things have been prov'd, and
the fujn of all this amounts to the Propofitioa
here
I40 O P T I C K S.

here to be proved. For if the Sun's Light is


mix'd of feveral forts of Rays, each of which
have originally their feveral Refrangibilities and
colorific Qualities, andnotwithftanding their Re-
.fraftions and Reflexions, and their various Sepa-
rations or Mixtures, keep thofe their original
Properties perpetually the fame without alterati-
on then all the Colours in the World muft be
;

fuch as conftantly ought to arife from the origi-


nal colorific qualities of the Rays whereof the
Li2;hts confift by which thofe Colours are feen.
And therefore if the reafon of any Colour what-
ever be required, we have nothing elfe to do than
to confider how the Rays in the Sun's Light have
by Reflexions or Refraftions, or other caufes, been
parted from one another, or mixed together j or
otherwfe to find out what forts of Rays are in the
Light by which that Colour is made, and in what
Proportion ; and then by the laft Problem to
learn the Colour which ought to arife by mixing
thofe Rays (or their Colours) in that proportion.
I fpeak here of Colours fo far as they arife from
Light. For they appear fometimes by other Cau-
fes, as when by the power of Phantafy wc fee Co-
lours in a Dream, or a Mad-man fees things be-
fore him which are not there; or when we fee
Fire by flriking the Eye, or fee Colours like the
Eye of a Peacock's Feather, by prefTing our Eyes
in either corner whilft we look the other way.
Wliere thefe and fuch like Caufes interpofe nor,
the Colour always anfwers to the fort or forts
of the Rays whereof the Light confifts, as I
have conftantly found in whatever Phasnomena of
Colours I have hitherto been able to examine.
I aiall
B O O K I. 141
I {hall in the following Proportions give inftan-
ces of this in the Phaenomena of chiefeft note.

PROP, VIII. Prob. III.

By the difcove7'ed Properties of Light to

explain the Colours made by Prijms.

LET ABC [in Fig. 12.] reprefent a Prifnl


refracting the Light of the Sun, which
comes into a dark Chamber through a hole F <j>

almofl as broad as the Prifm, and let MN re-


prefent a white Paper on which the refracted
Light is caft, and fuppofe the moil refrangible
or deepeft violet-making Rays fall upon the
Space Pttj the leaft refrangible or deepeft red-
making Rays upon the Space T7, the rniddle,
fort between the Indigo-making and blue-mu-
king Rays upon the Space Qv, the middle fort
of the green-making Rays upon the Space Rp,
the middle fort between the yellow-making and
orange-making Rays upon the Space S a-, and o-
ther intermediate forts upon intermediate Spa-
ces. For fo the Spaces upon which the feveral
forts adequately fall will by reafon of the diffe-
rent Refrangibility of thofe forts be one lower
than another. Now if the Paper MNbe fo
near the Prifm that the Spaces PTand ^-j do
not interfere with one another, the diftance be-
tween them T it will be illuminated by all the

forts of Rays in that proportion to one another


which they have at their very firft coming out
of
142 O P T I C K S.

of the Prifm, and confequently be white. But


the Spaces P T and ttT on either hand, will not
be illuminated by them all, and therefore will
appear coloured. And particularly at P, where
the outmofl violet-making Rays fall alone, the
Colotir mufi: be the deepeft violet. At Q^here
the violet-making and indigo-making Rays are
mixed, it mufl: be a violet inclining much to
indigo. At R where the violet-making, indigo-
making , blue-making , and one half of the
green-making Rays are mixed , their Colours
muft (by the conftrudtion of the fecond Pro-
blem ) compound a middle Colour between in-
digo arid blue. At S where all the Rays are
mixed, except the red-making and orange-ma-
king, their Colours ought by the fame Rule to
compound a faint blue, verging more to green
than indigo. And in the progrefs from S to T,
this blue will grow more and more faint and'
dilute, till at T, where all the Colours begin to
be mixed, it ends in whitenefs. ^
So again, on the other fide of the white at r,
where the leaft refrangible or utmoft red-ma-
king Rays are alone, the Colour mull: be the
deepeft red. At a the mixture of red and o-
range will compound a red inclining to orange.
At ^ the mixture of red, orange, yellow, and
one half of the green muft compound a middle
Colour between orange and yellow. At ^ the
mixture of all Colours but violet and indigo will
compound a faint yellow, verging more to green
than to orange. And this yellow will grow
more faint and dilute continually in its progrefs
from
.

B O O K I.
143
from V to TT, where by a mixture of all forts of

Rays it will become white.


Thefe Colours ought to appear were the Sun*s
Light perfedly white: But becaufe it inclines to
yellow, the Excefs of the yellow-making Rays
whereby 'tis tinged with that Colour, being
mixed with the faint blue between S and T, will
draw it to a faint green. And fo the Colours In
order from P to r ought to be violet, indigo,
blue, very faint green, white, faint yellow, o-
range, red. Thus by the computation And
it is :

they that pleafe to view the Colours made by a


Prifm will find it fo in Nature.
Thefe are the Colours on both fides the white
when the Paper is held between tlie Prifm and
the Point X where the Colours meet, and the
interjacent white vaniflies. For if the Paper be
held flill farther off from the Prifm, the mofl
refrangible and leaft refrangible Rays will be
wanting in the middle of the Light, and the refl
of the Rays which are found there, will by mix-
ture produce a fuller green than before. Alfo
the.yellowand blue will now become lefs com-
pounded, alid by confequence more intenfe than
before. And this alfo agrees with experience.
And if one look through a Prifm upon a
white Objed: cncompafTed with blacknefs or
darknefs, the reafon of the Colours arifing on
the edges is much the fame, as will appear to

ons that fhall a little confider it. If a black Ob-


jed: be encompafTed with a white one, the Co-
lours which appear through the Prifm are to be
derived from the Light of the white one, fpread-
ing into the Regions of the black, and therefore
they
144 O P T I C K S.

they appear in a contrary order to that, when a


white Objeft is furrounded with black. And the
fame is to be underftood when an Obje6l is view-
ed, whofe parts are fome of them lefs luminous
than others. For in the borders of the more and lefs
luminous Parts, Colours ought always by the fame
Principles to arife from the Excefs of the Light
of the more luminous, and to be of the fame
kind as if the darker parts were black, but yet to
be more and dilute.
faint
What is of Colours made by Prifms may
faid
be eafily applied to Colours made by the GlalTes
of Telefcopes or Microfcopes, or by the Hu-
mours of the Eye. For if the Objedl-glafs of
a Telefcope be thicker on one fide than on the
other, or if one half of the Glafs, or one half
of the Pupil of the Eye be cover'd with any
opake fubftance j the Objedi-glafs, or that part of
it or of the Eye which is not cover'd, may be
confider'd as a Wedge with crooked Sides, and
*
every Wedge of Glafa or other pellucid Subftance
has the effect of a Prifm in refradiing the Light
which paffes through it *.
How the Colours in the ninth and tenth Ex-
periments of the lirfl Part arife from the diffe-
rent Reflexibility of Light, is evident by whar
was there faid. But it is obfervable in the ninth
Experiment, that whilft the Sun's dired: Light
is yellow, the Excefs of the blue-making Rays

in the refleded beam of Light fuffices MN,


only to bring that yellow to a pale white incli-
ning to blue, and not to tinge it with a mani-
* See eur AuthorV Left. Optic. Part II. Se^. II. fa^. i6g, &(.

feftly
B Q O K I. 145
feftlyblue Colour. To obtain therefore a better
blue, I ufed inftead of the yellow Light of the
Sun the white Light of the Clouds^ by varying a
little the Experiment, as follows.
Exper, 16. Let HFG [in Fig. 13.] repre-
fent a Prifm open Air, and S the Eye of
in the
the Spedator, viewing the Clouds by their
Light coming into the Prifm at the Plane Side
FIGK, and refleded in it by its Bafe HEIG,
and thence going out through its Plane Side
H E F K to the Eye. And when the Prifm and
Eye are conveniently placed, fo that the Angles
of Incidence and Reflexion at the Bafe may be
about 40 Degrees, the Spe£latpr will fee a Bow
MN of a blue Colour, running from one End
of the Bafe to the other, with the Concave Side
towards him, and the Part of the Bafe IMNG
beyond this Bow will be brighter than the other
Part E M H
N on the other Side of it. This blue
Colour M
N being made by nothing elfe than by
Reflexion of a fpecular Superficies, feems fo odd
a Phaenomenon, and fo difficult to be explain-
ed by the vulgar Hypothefis of Philofophers,
that I could not but think it deferved to be taken
Notice of. Now for underftanding the Rea-
fgn of it, fuppofe the Plane. ABC to cut the
Plane Sides and Bafe of the Prifm perpendicu-r
larly. From the Eye to the Line B C, wherein
that Plane cuts the Bafe, draw the Lines S^
and S/', in the Angles S^^: 50 degr. i, and Stc
49 degr. Vt, and the Point p will he the Limit
beyond which none of the moft refrangible
Rays can pafs through the Bafe of the Prifm,
and be refraded, whofe Incidence is fuch thai;
L t'hey
14,6 OPTIC K S.

they may be refieded to the Eye ; and the Point


t will be the like Limit for the leaft refrangi-
Rays, that is, beyond which none of them
ble.
can pafs through the Bafe, whoie Incidence is
fuch that by Reflexion they may come to the
Eye. And the Point r taken in- the middle
.

Way p and ^, will be the like Limit


betv/een
for the meanly refrangible Rays. And there-
.

fore all the leaft refrangible Rays which fall


upon the Bafe beyond /, that is, between t and B,
and can come from thence to the Eye, will be
refledted thither But on this fide t^ that is,
:

between t and f, many of thefe Rays will be


tranfmitted through the Bafe. And all the moft
refrangible Pvays which fall upon the Bafe be-
yond ^, that is, between p and B, and can by
Reflexion come from thence to the Eye, will be
refleded thither, but every where between p
and r, many of thefe Rays will get through the
Bafe, and be refraded and the fame is to be
j

underftood of the meanly refrangible Rays on


either fide of the Point r. Whence it follows,
that the Bafe of the Prifm rriufl every where
between t and B, by a total Reflexion of all forts
of Rays to the Eye, look white and bright.
And every where between p and C, by reafon of
the Tranfmiflion of many Rays of every fort,
look more pale, obfcure, and dafk. But at r,
and in other Places between p and /, where all
the more refrangible Rays are refledied to the
Eye, and many of the lefs refrangible are. tranf-
.mitted, the Excefs of the moft refrangible in
the refleded Light will tinge that Light with
their Colour, which is violet and blue. Arid-
this
B O O K I. 147
this happens by taking the Line C/r/B any
.where between the Ends of the Prilm HG
and EI.

PROP, IX. prob. r\^.

By Lighi
the difcGvered Pf'operties of to

explain the Colours of the Rain-bow,

THIS Bow never


n|ins in the Sun-fhine,
appears, but where it
and may be made
artiticially by fpouting up Water which may
break aloft, and fcatter into Drops, and fall down
like Rain. For the Sun fliining upon thefe
Drops certainly caufes the Bow to appe^f* to a
Spectator ftanding in a due Polition to the Rain
and Sun. And hence it is now agreed upon,
that this Bow
is made by Refraction of the Sun's

Light Drops of falling Rain. This^was un-


in
derllood by fome of the Antients, and of late
more fully difcover'd and explain'd by the fa-
mous Dominis Archbilhop of ^pa-
Antoniiis de
lato, in his Book De Radiis
Visits &
Liicis, pub-
lifhed by his Friend Bartolus at Venice^ in the
Year 161 1,. and written above 20 Yeai's before.
For he teacher' there how the interior Bow is
made in round Drops of Raiii by two Refracti-
ons of the Sun's Light, and one Reflexion be-
tween them, and the exterior by two Refradti-
ons, and two forts of Reflexions between them
in each Drop of Vv^ater, and proves his Expli-
cations by Experiments made witba Phial full
lof Water, and with Globes of Glafs filled
L 2 with
148 O P T I C K S.

with Water, and placed in the Sun to make the


Colours of the two Bows appear in them. The
fame Explication Des-Cartes hath purfued in his-
Meteors, and mended that of the exterior Bow.
But whilft they underftood not the true Ori-
gin of Colours, it's neceffary to purfue it here
a little farther. For underftanding therefore how
the Bow is made, let a Drop of Rain, or any
other fpherical tranfparent Body be reprefented
by the Sphere BNFG, [in Fig. 14.] defcribed
with the Center C, and Semi-diameter C N.
And let ANbe one of the Sun's R^s inci-
dent upon it at N, and thence refradled to F,
where let it either go out of the Sphere by Re-
fraction towards V, or be refle<5ted to ; and G
at G let it either go out by Refradion to R, or
"

be refledled to H; and at H
let it go out by
Refrad:ion towards S, cutting the incident Ray
in Y. Produce ANand RG, till they meet in
X, and upon AXand NF, let fall the Per-
pendiculars CD
and CE, and produce till CD
it fall upon the Circumference at L. Parallel to
the incident Ray AN draw the Diameter B Q^
and let the Sine .of Incidence out of Air into
Water be to the Sine of Refradion as I to R.
Now, if you fuppofe the Point of Incidence N
to move from the Point B, continually till it
come to L, the Arch Q F will firil increafe and
then decrcafe,and fo will the Angle A X R
which the Rays A and G R contain ; and the
N
Arch QJ' and Angle AXR
w ill be biggeft
when ND is to CN as -/H^RR to v/ 3 RR, in
which cafe NE will be to ND as 2 R to I. Alfo
the Angle AYS, which the Rays AN and HS
contain
B O O K I. 149
contain will firft decreafe, and then increafe and
grow leaft when ND is to CN as y'llZlRK to
^8RR, in which cafe NE will be to ND, as
3 Rtol. And Angle which the next emer-
fo the
gent Ray ( that is, the emergent Ray after three
Reflexions) contains with tlie incident Ray AN
will come to its Limit when is to ND CN
as y/li— KR to / 15 RR, in which cafe NE will
be to ND as 4R to I. And the Angle which the

Ray next after that Emergent, that is, the Ray


emergent after four Reflexions, contains with the
Incident, will come to its Limit, when ND is to
CN KK
as /ii — which cafe NE
to v/ 24 RR, in
will be to ND
as 5 R to I i and fo on infinitely,
the Numbers 3,8, 15, 24, &c. being gather'd by
continual Addition of the Terms of the arithme-
tical Progreflion 3, 5, 7, 9, ^c. The Truth of all
this Mathematicians will ealily examine.* > .

Now it is to be obferved, that as when the Sun


comes to his Tropicks, Days increafe and decrcafe
but a very little for a great while together j fo when
by increaling the diflance CD, thefe Angles come
to their Limits, they vary their quantity but very
little for fome time together, and therefore a fir

greater Number of the Rays which fill upon all


the Points N in the Quadrant BL, {hall emcrg. in
theLimits of thefe Angles, than in any other Incli-
nations. And farther it is to be obferved, that the
Rays which differ in Refrangibility will have dif-
ferent Limits of their Angles of Emergence, and
by confequence according to their different De^
grees of Refrangibility emerge moft copioufly
_,
* This is demonjirated in our Author'j Ledl. Optic Part I. Se^l. IV.
Prop. 35 and 36.

L 3 in
150 O P T I C K S.

in different Angles, and being feparated from one


another appear each in their proper Colours,
And v/hat thole Angles are may be eaiily ga-
ther'd from the foregoing Theorem by Com-
putation.
For in the leaft refrangible Rays the Sines I
and R (as was found above) are io8 and 8i,
and thence by Computation the greateft Angle
AXR will be found 42 Degrees and 2 Minutes,
and the kail Angle AYS, 50 Degrees and c^j
Minutes. And in the moll refrangible Rays the
Sines I and R are 109 and 81, and thence by
Computation the greateft Angle AXR wilh be
found 40 Degrees and 17 Minutes, and the leaft
Angle AYS 54 Degrees and 7 Minutes.
Suppofe now \^\'^x. O [ in Fig. 15. ] is the Spe-
6lator's Eve, and OP a Line drawn parallel to
the. Sun's 'Rays, and let POE, POF, POG,
POH, be Angles of 40 Degr. 17 Min. 42 Degr.
2 Mm. 50 Degr. c^-j Min. and 54 Degr. 7 Min.
refpe6tively, and thefe Angles turned about
their common Side O P, fhall with their other
Sides OE, OF; OG, OH, defcribe the Verges
of two Rain-bows AF BE and CHDG. Foi*
if E, F, G, H, be drops placed any where in
the conical Superficies defcribed by OE, OF,
OG, OH, and be illuminated by the Sun's Rays
SE, SF, SG, SH; the Angle SEO being e-
qual to the Angle POE, or 40 Degr. 17 Min.
ihall be the greateft Angle in which the moft
refrangible Rays can after one Pvetiexion be re-
fradled to the Eye, and therefore all the Drops
in the Line O E Inall fend the moft refrangible
Rays moft copioufly to the Eye, and thereby
ftrike
BOO KllC fi5a
i\nkt the ^fes with the deepeft violet Colour in
that Region. And in like manner the^^ngle SFO
being equal to the Angle POF, or 42 Degr.
2 Min. fhall be the greateft in which the Icall: re-
frangible Rays after one Reflexion can emerge
out of the Drops, and therefore thofe Rays
come moft copioufly to the Eye from the
.fliall

Drops in the Line O F, and flrike the Senfes with


the deepeft red Colour in that Region. And by
the fame Argument, the Rays which have inter-
mediate Degrees of Refrangibility fliall comeiinofl
copioufly from Drops between E and F, and'llirike
the Senies with the intermediate Colours, in the
Order which their Degrees of Refrangibility rc-
€|uiie, that is in the Progfefs 'from E toF, or
from the infide of the Bow to the outfide in this
order, violet, indigo, blue, green, ycllow,"^^ orange,
red. But the violet, by the mixtiue of the white
Light of the Clouds, will appear laint and in-
cline to purple.
- Again, the Angle SGO being equal to the
Angfe POG, or 5oGr. 51 Min. fhall be the Iciift
Angle in which the leaft refrangible Rays can
after two Reflexions emerge out of the Drops,
and therefore the leafl Rays lliall
refrangible
come moffc copioufly to the Eye from the Drops
i-n the Line OG, and firike the StnfQ with the

deepeft red in that Region. And the Angle


SHO being equal to the Angle POH, or 54 Gr.-
7 Min. fliall be the leafl Angle, in which the moft
refrangible Rays after two Pvcfiexions can emerge
out of the Drops and therefore thofe Rays
J

fhall come mofl copioufly to the Eye froni^


the Drops in the Line OFI, and ilrike the Senfes
L 4 with
152 O P T I C K S.

with the deepeft violet in that Region. And by the


fame Argument, the Drops in the Regions be-
tween G and H
fliall ftrike the Senfe with the in-

termediate Colours in the Order which their


Degrees of Refrangibility require, that is, in the
Progrefs from G to H, or from the infide of the
Bow to the outiide in this order, red, orange, yel-
low, green, blue, indigo, violet. And fmce
thefe four Lines OE, OF, OG, OH, may be
fituated any where in the above-mention'd co-
iiical Superficies is
; what
faid of the Drops
and Colours in thefe Lines is to be underftood
of the Drops and Colours every where in thofe
Superficies.
Thus iliall there be made tv^o Bows of Co-
lours, an interior and ftronger, by one Reflexion
jn the Drops, and an exterior and fainter by
two J for the Light becomes fainter by every
Reflexion. And their Colours fhall lie in a con-
trary Order to one another, the red of both Bows
bordering upon the Space GF, which is be-
tween the Bows. The Breadth of the inte-
rior Bow EOF meafured crofs the Colours fhall
be I Degr. 45 Min. and the Breadth of the ex-
terior GOH fhall be 3 Degr. 10 Min. and the
diflance between them GOF
fhall be 8 Gr. 15
Min. the greateft Semi-diameter of the inner-
mofl, that is, the Angle POF being 42 Gr. 2
Min. and the leafl Semi-diameter of the outer-
mofl POG, being 50 Gr. 57 Min. Thefe are
the Meafures of the Bows, as they would, be
were the Sun but a Point ; for by the Breadth
of his Body, the Breadth of the Bows will be in^
creafed, and ^heir Diflance decreafed by half a
Degree,'
B O O K I. 153
Degreq, and (o the breadth of the interior Iris
will be 2 Degr. J5 Min. that of the exterior 3
Degr. 40 Min. their diftance 8 Degr. 25 Min.
the greateft Semi-diameter of the interior Bow
42 Degr. 17 Min. and the leail of the exterior
50 Degr. 42 Min. And fuch are the Dimenfions
of the Bows in the Heavens found to be very
nearly, when their Colours appear ftrong and
perfed:. For once, by fuch means as I then liad,
I .meafured the greateft Semi-diameter of the
interior Iris about 42 Degrees, and the breadth
of the red, yellow and green in that Iris 63 or
64 Minutes, befides the outmoft faint red ob-
fcured by the brightnefs of the Clouds, for
which we may allow 3 or 4 Minutes more. The ,

breadth of the blue was about 40 Minutes more


belides the violet, .which was fo much obfcu-
red by the brightnefs of the Clouds, that I could
not meafure its breadth. But fuppofing the
breadth of the blue and violet together to equal
that of the red, yellow and green together, the
whole breadth of this Iris will be about 2 t De-
grees, as above. The leail diftance between this
Iris and the exterior Iris was about 8 De2;rees and

30 Minutes. The exterior Iris was broader than


the interior, but fo faint, efpecially on the blue
fide, that I could not meafure its breadth di-
ftindlly. At another time when both Bows ap-
peared more diftind:, I meafured the breadth of
the interior Iris 2 Gr. 10', and the breadth of the
red, yellow and green in the exterior Iris, was to
the breadth of the fame Colours in the interior
as 3 to 2.
this
;

154 O P T I C K S.

This Explication of the Rain-bow is yet far-


ther confirmed by the known Experiment (made
by Antonius de Dominis and Des-Cartes ) of
hanging up any where in the Sun-iliine a Glafs
Globe filled with Water, and viewing it ih fuch
a poflure, that the Rays which come from the
Globe to the Eye may contain with the Sun's
Rays an Angle of either 42 or 50 Degrees. For ^

if the Angle be about 42 or 43 Degrees, the


Spectator (fuppofe at O ) {hall fee a full i:ed
Colour in that fide of the Globe oppofed to
the Sun as 'tis reprefented at F, and if that An-
^gle become lefs (fuppofe by depreflnig the Globe
to E) there will appear other Colours, yellow,
green and blue fucceflive in the fame fide of
the Globe. But if the- Angle be made about
50 Degrees (fuppofe by lifting up the Globe to
G) there will appear a red Colour in that Me
of the Globe towards the Sjun, and if the An-
gle be made greater (fuppofe by lifting up tlie
Globe to H) the red will turn fucceffively to
the other Colours, yellow, green and blue. The
fame thing I have tried, by letting a Globe reft,
and raifing or depreifing the Eye , or other-
wife moving it to make the Angle of ajufl mag*
nitude. ;u y-.
Ihave heard it reprefented, that if the Light
of a Candle be refraded by a Prifm to the Eye
when the blue Colour falls upon the Eye, the
Spe<5tator {hall fee red in the Prifm, and when
the red falls upon the Eye he fhall fee blue
and if this were certain , the Colours of the .

Globe and Rain-bow ought to appear in a. con-


nary order to what we find. But the Colours
^ of
BOOK I.
155
of the Candle being very faint, the miftake feems
to arife from the difficulty of difcerning what
Colours fall on the Eye. For, on the contrary,
I have fometimes had occafion to obferve in the
Sun's Light refraded by a Prifm, that the Spe-
ctator always fees that Colour in the Prifm which
falls upon his Eye. And the fame I have found
true alfo in Candle-light. For when the Prifm
is moved (lowly from the Line which is drawn

diredly from the Candle to the Eye, the red ap-


pears firft in the Prifm and then the blue, and
therefore each of them is feen when it falls upon
the Eye. For the red pafTes over the Eye firft,
and then the blue.
The Light which comes through drops of
Rain by two Refra6tions without any Reflexion,
ought to appear ftrongeft at the diftance of a-
bout. 26- Degrees from the Sun, and to decay
gradually both ways as the diftance from him in-
creafes and decreafes. And the fame is to be un-
derftood of Light tranfmitted through fphe-
"rical Hail-ftones. And if the Hail be a little
flatted , as it often is , the Light tranfmitted
may grow fo ftrong at a little lefs diftance than
that of 26 Degrees, as to form a Halo about
the Sun or Moon ; which Halo, as often as the
Hail-ftones are duly figured may be colour'd,
and then it muft be red within by the leaft re-
frangible Rays, and blue without by the moft
refrangible ones, efpecially if the Hail-ftones
have" opake Globules of Snow in their center
to intercept the Light within the Halo {asHu^
genius has obferv'd) and make the infide there-
of more diftind')y defined than it would other-
wife
156 O P T I C K S.

wife be. For fuch


Hail-ftones, though fpheri-
cal, by terminating the Light by the Snow,
may make a Halo red within and colourlefs
without, and darker in the red than without,
as Halos ufed to be. For of thole Rays which
pafs clofe by the Snow the Rubriform will be
ieaft refracted, and fo come to the Eye in the di-
refteft Lines.
The Light which pafTes through a drop of
Rain after two Refra6:ions, and three or more
Reflexions, is fcarce ftrong enough to caufe a
fenfible Bow; but in thofe Cylinders of Ice by
which Hiigenius explains the Parhelia^ it may
perhaps be fenfible.

PROP. X. Prob. V.
By the difccvered Properties of Light to

explain the permanent Colours of Natu-


ral Bodies,

THESE
fome
Colours arife
natural Bodies refled:
from hence that
,

fome forts of
Rays, others other forts more copioufly than the
reft. Minium refledts the Ieaft refrangible or
red-rfiaking Rays moft copioufly, and thence ap-
pears red. Violets refled: the moft refrangible
moft copioufly, and thence have their Colour,
and fo of other Bodies. Every Body refledls the
Rays of its own Colour more copioufly than the
reft, and from their excefs and predominance in

the refleded Light has its Colour.

Exper^
'

B O O K I.
157
Exper. ij. For if in the homogeneal Lights
obtained by the folution of the Problem pro-
pofed in the fourth Propolition of the firft Part
of this Book, you place Bodies of feveral Co-
lours, you will find, as I have done, that every
Body looks mofl fpiendid and luminous in the
Light of its own Colour. Cinnaber in the ho-
mogeneal red Light is mofl refplendent, in the
.green Light it is manifeftly lefs refplendent, and
in jhe blue Light ftill lefs. Lidigo in the vi-
olet blue Light is moll refplendent, and its fplen-
dor is gradually diminiih'd, as it is removed
thence by degrees through the green and yellow
Light to the red. By a Leek the green Light,
and next that the blue and yellow which com-
pound green, are more flrongly refle6ted than the
other Colours red and violet, and fo of the reft.
But to make thefe Experiments the more mani-
feft, fuch Bodies ought to be chofen as have the
fulleft and moft vivid Colours, and two of thofe
Bodies are to be compared together. Thus, for
inftance, if Cinnaber and ultra-nMxv'mt blue, or
fome other full blue be held together in the red
homogeneal Light, they will both appear red,
but the Cinnaber will appear of a ftrongly lumi-
nous and refplendent red , and the ultra-mz-
rine blue of a faint obfcure and dark red and ;

if they be held together in the blue homogeneal


Light, they will both appear blue, but the ultra-
marine will appear of a ftrongly luminous and
refplendent blue, and the Cinnaber of a faint
and dark blue. Which puts it out of difpute,
that the Cinnaber reflecfts the red Light much
more copioufly than the ////n;-marine doth, and
2 the
158 O P T I C K S.

the ulfra-m^i'lne refleds the blue Light much


more copioully than theCinnaber doth. The fame
Experiment may be tried fuccefsfully with red
Lead and Indigo, or with any other two colour'd
Bodies, if due allowance be made for the diffe-
rent ftrength or wealoiefs of their Colour and
Light.
And as the reafon of the Colours of natural
Bodies is evident by thefe Experiments, fo it is.
farther confirmed and put pafl difpute by ,the
two firft Experiments of the firft Part, where-

by 'twas proved in fuch Bodies that the reflefed


Lights which differ in Colours do differ alfo in
degrees of Refrangibility.^ For thence it's cer-
tain, that fome Bodies reflect the more refran-
gible, others the lefs refrangible Rays more co-
piouily.
And that this is not only a true reafon of thefe
Colours, but even the only reafon, may appear
farther from this Confideration, that the Colour
of homogeneal Light cannot be changed by the
Reflexion of natural Bodies.
For if Bodies by Reflexion cannot in the leafl
change the Colour of any one fort of Rays, they
cannot appear colour'd by any other means than
by refle(^ting which either are of their
thofe
own Colour, or which by mixture muft pro-
duce it.
But in trying Experiments of this kind care
muft be had that the Light be fufficiently ho-
mogeneal. For if Bodies be illuminated by the
ordinary prifmatick Colours, they will appear
neither of their own Day-light Colours, nor of
the Colour of the Light caft on them, but of
fome
BOOK!. 159
feme middle Colour between both, as I have
found by Experience. Thus red Lead (for in-
ftance ) illuminated with
the ordinary prifma-
"tick green will not appear either red or green,
but orange or yellow, or between yellow and
green, accordingly as the green Light by which
'tis illuminated is more or lefs compounded.
For becaufe red Lead appears red when illumi-
nated with white Light wherein all forts of
,

Rays are equally mix'd, and in the green Light


all forts of Rays are not equally mix'd, the Lx-
cefs of the yellow-making green-making and
,

blue-making Rays in the incident green Light,'


will caufe thofe Rays to abound fo niuch in the
refle<^ted Light, as to draw the Colour from red
towards their Colour. And becaufe the red Lead
refle(fts the red-making Rays moft copioufly in

proportion to their number, *and next after them


the orange-making and yellow-making Rays ;
thefe Rays in the refledted Light will be more in
proportion to the Light than they were in the in-
cident green Light, and thereby will draw the
refleded Light from green towards their Co-
lour. And therefore the red Lead will appear
neither red nor green, but of a Colour between
both.
In tranfparently colour'd Liquors 'tis obfer-
vable, that their Colour ufes to vary with their
thicknefs. Thus, for inftance, a red Liquor in
a conical Glafs held between the Light and the
Eye, looks of a pale and dilute yellow at the
bottom where 'tis thin, and a little higher where
'tis thicker grows orange, and where 'tis ftili
thicker becomes red, and where 'tis thickeft
V the
i6o O P T I C K S.

the red is.deepefl anddarkeft. For it is to be


conceiv'd that fuch a Liquor flops the indigo-
making and violet-making Rays moft eafily, the
blue-making Rays more difficultly, the green-'
making Rays ftill more difficultly, and the red-
making moft difficultly : And that if the thick-
nefs of the Liquor be only fo much as fuffices
to Hop a competent number of the violet-ma-
king and indigo-making Rays, without dimi-
nifliing much the number of the reft, the reft
muft (by Prop. 6. Part 2.) compound a pale
yellow. But if the Liquor be fo much thicker
as to ftop alfo a great number of the blue-ma-
king* Rays, and fo^ie of the ^reen-making, the
reft muft compound an orange j and where it is
fo thick as to ftop alfo a great number of the
green-making and a confiderable number of the
yellow-making, the I'eft muft begin to compound
a red, and this red muft grow deeper and darker
as the yellow-making and orange-making Rays
are more and more ftopp'd by increafmg the
thicknefs of the Liquor, fo that few Rays befides
the red-making can get through. •

Of this kind is an Experiment lately related


to me by Mr. Halley, who, in diving deep into ,

the Sea in a diving Veftel, found in a clear Sun-


fhine Day, that when he was funk many Fa-
thoms deep into the Water, the upper part of
his Hand on which the Sun ftione dired:ly
through the Water and through a fmall Glafs
Window in the Vefiel appeared of a red Co-
lour, like that of a Damask Rofe, and the Wa-
ter below and the under part of his Hand
illuminated by Light refleded from the Water
below
BOOK I. i6i
below look'd green. For thence it may be ga-
ther'd, that the Sea- Water refleds back the violet
and bhie-making Rays moft eafily, ,and lets the •

red-making Rays pafs moft freely and copioufly to


ffreat Depths. For thereby the Sun's direct Light
at all great Depths, by reafcn of the predomi-
nating red-making Rays, muft appear red and j

the greater the Depth is, the fuller and in-


tenfer muft that red be. And at fuch Depths
as the violet-making Rays fcarce penetrate unto,
the blue-making, green-making, and yellow-
making Rays being refleded from below more
copioully than the red-making ones, muft com-
pound a green.
Now, if there be two Liquons of full Colours,
fiif)pofe a red and a blue, and both of them fo
thick as fuffices to tnake their Colours fufficiently
full; though either Liquor be fufficiently tranfpa-
tenz apart, yet will you not bfe able to fee through
Doth together. For, if only the red-making Rays
pafs through one Liquor, arid only the blue*
making through the other, no 'Rays can pafs
through both. This Mr. H^ok' tried cafuilly
^ith Glafs Wedges filled with red and blue Li-
quors, and was furprized at the unexpeded Event,
the reafon of it being then unknown ; which
makes me truft the more to his Experiment,
though I have not tried it my felf. But he
that would repeat it, muft take care the Li-
quors be of very good and full Colours.
Now, whilft Bodies become coloured by refled:-
ing or tranfmitting this or that fort of Rays more
eopiouily than the reft, it is to be conceived that
they ftop and ftrfle in themfelves the Rays
M > which
i62 O P T I C K S.

which they do not refledt or tranfmit. For, if


Gold be foliated and held between your Eye and
. the Light, the Light looks of a greenifh blue,
and therefore mafTy Gold lets into its Body the
blue-making Rays to be reflected to and fro
within it tillthey be ftopp'd and ftifled, whilft
it refle(5ls the yellow-making outwards, and
thereby looks yellow. And much after the fame
manner that Leaf Gold
yellow by refle<ited,
is

and blue by tranfmitted Light, and maify Gold


.is yellow in all Pofitions of the Eye there are -,

foqie Liqi:jors, as the Tincfture of Lignum


Nephriticumy and fome forts of Glafs which
tranfmit one fort of Light moft copioufly, and
refled another fort, and thereby look of feve-
4^al Colours, according to the Pofition of the
Eye to the Light. But, if thefe Liquors or
.Glafles were fo thick and mafTy that no Light
could get through them, I queftion not but they
fwould like all other opake Bodies appear or
ohe and the fame Colour in all Pofitions of the
Eye, though this I cannot yet affirm by Expe^
rience. For colour'd Bodies, fo far as my
all

Obfervation reaches, may be feen through if


made fufficiently thin, and therefore are in fome
meafure tranfparent, and differ only in degrees
of Tranfparency from tinged tranfparent Li-
<juors; thefe Liquors, as well as thofe Bodies,
by a fufficient Thicknefs becoming opake. A
tranfparent Body which looks of any Colour by
tranfmitted Light, may alfo look of the fame
Colour by reflected Light, the Light of that
Colour being reflected by the farther Surface
of the Body, or by the Air beyond it. And
then
BOOK L .161
then the refleded Colour will be diminlfhed, and
perhaps ceafe, by making the Body very thick,
and pitching it on the backfide to diminifh the
Reflexion of its farther Surface, fo that the Light
refle(3;ed from the tinging Particles may predomi-
nate. In fuch Cafes, the Colour of the reflecfted
Light will be apt to vary from that of the Light
tranfmitted. But whence it is that tinged Bo-
dies and Liquors refledt fome of Rays, and
fort
intromit or tranfmit other forts, fhall be faid in
the next Book. In this Propofition I content my
felf to have put it paft difpute, that Bodies have
fuch Properties, and thence appear colour'd.

PROP. XI. Prob. VI.


By mixing colour d Lights to compound a
beam of Light of the fa^ne Colour and
Nature with a beam of the Su?is direEi
Light y and therein to experience the
Truth of the foregoing Propoftions,

LET ABCby which


Prifm,
abc [in Fif[. 16.] reprefent a
the Sun's Light let into
a dark Chamber through the Hole F, may be
refradted towards the Lens MN,and paint upon
it at py q, r, j, and /, the ufual Colours vio-
let,blue, green, yellow, and red, and let the
diverging Rays by the Refrad:ion of this Leng
converge again towards X, and there, by the
mixture of all thofe their Colours, compound a
white according to what was fhewo above.
M 2 Then
i64 OPTIC K S.

Then let another Prifm DEG deg, parallel to


the former, be placed at X, to refrad: that white
Light upward* towards Y. Let the refracting,
Angles of the Prifms, and their diflances from
the Lens be equal, fo that the Rays which con-
verged from the Lens towards X, and without
Refradion, would there have crofled and di-
verged again, may by the Refradtion of the fe-
cond Prifm be reduced into Parallelifm and
diverge no more. For then thofe Rays will re-
compofe a beam of white Light XY. If the
refradting Angle of either Prifm be the bigger,
that Prifm muft be fo much the nearer to the
Lens. You will know when the Prifms and the
Lens are well fet together, by obferving if the
X
beam of Light Y, which comes out of the fe-
cond Prifm be perfectly white to the very edges
of the Light, and at all diftances from the Prifm
continue perfectly and totally white like a beam
of the Sun's Light. For till this happens, the
Polition of the Prifms and Lens to one another
muft be correded ; and then if by the help ©f a
long beam of Wood, as is reprefehted in the
Figure, or by a Tube, or fbme other fuch In-
ftrument made for that Purpofe, they- be made
faft in that Situation, you may fame
try all the
Experiments in this compounded beam of Light
X Y, which have been made in the Sun's dired:
Light. For this compounded beam of Light
has the fame appearance, and is endow'd with
all. the fame Properties with a diredt beam of the

Sun's Light, fo far as my Obfervation reaches.


And in trying Experiments in this beam you
may by flopping any of the Colours /, q^ r, />
and
B O O K I. 165
and at the Lens, fee how the Colours produce^
/,

in the Experiments are no other than thofe which


the Rays had at the Lens before they entered the
Compofition of this Beam And by confcqijence>
:

that they arife not from any new Modifications of


the Light by Refradtions and Reflexions, but from
the various Separations and Mixtures of the Rays
originally endow'd with theircolour-making Qua-
lities.

So, for inftance, having with aLens 4, Liches


broad, and two Prifms on either hand 6i Feet
diftant from the Lens, made fuch a beam of
compounded Light ; to examine the reafon of
the Colours made by Prifms, I rcfraded this com-
pounded beam of Light XY with another Prifm.
HIK kh, and thereby call the ufual Prifma-
tick Colours PQRST upon the Paper LV
placed behind. And then by flopping any of
the Colours />, ^, r, j, /, at the Lens, I found
that the fame Colour would vanifh at the Pa-
per. So if the Purple p was ftopp'd at the
Lens, the Purple P upon the Paper would vanifh,
and the reft of the Colours would remain un-
alter'd, imlefsperhaps the blue, fo far as fome
purple latent in it at the Lens might be fepa-
rated from it by the following RefraSions. And
fo by intercepting the green upon the Lens, the
green R upon the Paper would vanifli, and fo
of the refl j which plainly fhews, that as the
white beam of Light XY was compounded of
feveral Lights varioufly colour'd at the Lens,
fo theColours which afterwards emerge out of
itby new Refradlions are no other than thofe
of which its Whitenefs was compounded. The
M
3 Refradion
i66 O P T I C K S.
Refradion of the Prifm HIK /^^ generates the
Colours PQ^ST upon the Paper, not by chan-
ging the colorific Qualities of the Rays, but by
feparating the Rayswhich had the very fame colo-
Qualities before they enter'd the Compofition
rific

of the refradied beam of white Light X


Y. For
otherwife the Rays which were of one Colour at
the Lens might be of another upon the Paper,
contrary to what we find.
So again, to examine the reafon of the Co-
lours of natural Bodies, I placed fuch Bodies
in the Beam of Light XY, and found that they
all appeared there of thofe their own Colours

which they have in Day-light, and that thofe


Colours depend upon the Rays which had the
fame Colours at the Lens before they enter'd the
Compofition of that beam. Thus, for inflance,
Cinnaber illuminated by this beam appears of
the fame red Colour as in Day-light ; and if
at the Lens you intercept the green-making and
blue-making Rays, its rednefs will become more
full and lively :But if you there intercept the
red-making Rays, it will not any longer ap-
pear red, but become yellow or green, or of
lome other Colour, according to the forts of
Rays which you do not intercept. So Gold
in this Light XY appears of the fame yellow
Colour as in Day-light, but by intercepting at
the Lens a due Quantity of the yellow-making
Rays it will appear white like Silver ( as I have
tried ) which Ihews that its yellownefs arifes from
the Excefs of the intercepted Rays tinging that
Whitenefs with their Colour when they are let
pafs. So the Infuiion of Ugmm
Nephriticum
(as
B O O K I. 167
(as I have alfo tried) when held in this beam of

Light XY, looks blue by the reflected Part of the


Light, and red by the tranfrrjitted Part of it, as
when 'tis view'd in Day-light j but if you intercepc
the blue at the Lens the Infufion will lofe its re-
fled:ed blue Colour, whilft its tranfmitted red re-
mains perfect,and by the lofs of fome blue-
making Rays, wherewith it was allay'd, becomes
more intenfe and full. And, on the contrary, if
the red and orange-making Rays be intercepted at
the Lens, the Infufion will lofe its tranfmitted red,
whilft its blue will remain and become more full
and perfedl. Which fhews, that the Infufion
does not tinge the Rays with blue and red, but
only tranfmit thofe mofl copioufiy which were
red-making before, and refledts thofe moft copi-
oufly which were blue-making before. And after
the fame manner may theReafons of other Phaeno-
mena be examined, by trying thorn in this artificial
beam of Light XY.

M 4 THE
THE
SECOND BOOK
OF

OPTICKS.
P A R T I.

Obfervations concerning the Reflexions y Re-


fraBionSy and Colours of thi^t tranfpa-
rent Bodies,

T has been obferved by others,


that tranfparent Subftances, as
Glafs, &V. when
Water, Air,
made very thin by being blown
into Bubbles, or otherwife formed
into Plates, do exhibit various Co-
lours according to thcjr various thinnefs, altho' at
a greater
BOOK II. 169
a greater tlucknefs they appear very clear and
colour! efs. In the former Book I forbore to
treat of, thefe Colours, becaufe they feemed of a
more difficult Confideration, and were not necef-
fary for eftabliihing the Properties of Light there
difcourfed But becaufe they may conduce to
of.

farther Difcpveries for compleating the Theory of


Light, efpecially as to the conftitution of the
parts of natural Bodies, on which their Colours
or Tranfparency depend j I have here fet down
an account of thern. To render this Difcourfe
fhort and didindt, I have fiifl defcribed the prin-
cipal of my Obfervations and then confider'd
,

and made ufe of them. The Obfervations are


thefe.
Ohf. I., Comprefiing two Prifms hard toge-
ther that their fides (which by chance were a
very convex) might fomewhere touch one
little

another : found the place in which they touch-


I

ed to become abfolutely tranfparent, as if they


had there been one continued piece of Glafs,
For when the Light fell fo obliquely on the
Air, which in other places was between them,
as to be all refledcds ic feemed in that place of
contact to be wholly tranfmitted, infomuch that
when look'd upon, it appeared like a black or
dark fpot, by reafon that little or no fenfible
Light was refledled from thence, as from other
places ; and when looked through it feemed ( a^
it were) a hole in that- Air which was formed

into a thin Plate, by being comprefs'd between


the Glafles. And through this hole Objeds that
were beyond might be feen diftindly which ,

could not at all be feen through other parts of


the
lyo O P T I C K S.

the GlafTes where -the Air was interjacent. Al-


though the GlafTes were a little convex, yet this
transparent fpot was of a confiderable breadth,
which breadth feemed principally to proceed
from the yielding inwards of the parts of the
GlafTes, by reafon of their mutual prefTure. For
by prefTing them very hard together it would be-
come much broader than otherwife.
Obf. 2. When the Plate of Air, by turning
the Prifms about their common Axis, became (o
little inclined to the incident Rays, that fome of
them began to be tranfmitted, there arofe in it
many flender Arcs of Colours which were
at firfl

fhaped almofl like the Conchoid ,you fee


as
them delineated in the firfl Figure. And by con-
tinuing the Motion of the Prifms, thefe Arcs
increafed and bended more and more about the
faid tranfparent fpot, till they were compleated
into Circles or Rings incompafling it, and af-
terwards continually grew more and more con-
tradted.
Thefe Arcs at their firfl appearance were of
a violet and blue Colour, and between them
were white Arcs of Circles , which prefently
by continuing the Motion of the Prifms became
a little tingedm their inward Limbs with red
and yellow, and to their outward Limbs the
blue was adjacent. So that the order of thefe
Colours from the central dark fpot, was at that
time white, blue, violet j black, red, orange,
yellow, white, blue, violet, &c. But the yel-
low and red were much fainter than the blue and
*

violet.

2
'
The
BOOK 11. 171
The Motion of the Prifms aBout their Axis
being continued, thefe Colours contracl^ed more
and more, Shrinking towards the whitenefs on
either fide of it, until they totally vaniihed into
it. And then the Circles in thofe parts appear'd
black and white, without any other Colours in~
termix'd. But by farther moving the Prifms
about, the Colours again emerged out of the
whitenefs, the violet and blue at its inward
Limb, and at its outward Limb the red and yel-
low. So that now their order from the central
Spot was white, yellow, red; black; violet,
.blue, white, yellow, red, ^c, contrary to what
it was before.
Obf. 3. When the Rings or fome parts of
them appeared only black and white, they were
very diftindl and well defined, and the blacknefs
feemed as intenfe as that of the central Spot.
Alfo in the Borders of the "Rings, where the
Colours began to emerge out of the white-
nefs, they were pretty diftind: , which made
them very great multitude.
vifible to a I have
fometimes number'd above thirty Succeffions
(reckoning every black and white Ring for one
Succeflion) and feen more of them, which by
reafon of their fmalnefs I could not number.
But in other Pofitions of the Prifms, at which
the Rings appeared of many Colours, I could
not diftinguiih above eight or nine of them, and
the Exterior of thofe were very confufed and
dilute.
In thefe two Obfervations to fee the Rings di-
and without any other Colour than bl^ck
ilin<5t,

and white, I found it neceflary to hold my Eye


at
172 O P T I C K S.

at a good diftance from them. For by ap-


proachijfjg nearer,although in the fame inclina-
tion of my Eye to the Plane of the Rings, there
emerged a bluifH Colour out of the white,
which by dilating it felf more and more into
the black, render'd the Circles lefs diflindt, and
left the white a little tinged with red and yel-
low. I found alfo by looking through a flit or
oblong hole, which was narrower than the pupil
of my Eye, and held clofe to it pjirallel to the
Piifms, I could fee the Circles much diftindter
and vifible to a far greater number than other-
wife.
Ohf.\> To obferve more nicely the order of
the Colours which arofe out of the white Cir-
cles as the Rays became lefs and lefs inclined
to the Plate of Airj I took two Objed-glafTes,
the one a Plano-convex for a fourteen Foot
Telefcope, and the other a large double Con-
vex for one of about fifty Footj and upon this,
laying the other with its plane fide downwards,
I prelfed them (lowly together,, to make the
Colours fucceffively emerge in the middle of the
Circles, and then fiowly lifted the upper Glafs
from the lower to make them fuccefTively vaniih
again in the fame place. The Colour, which
by preffing the GlalTes together, emerged laft in
the middle of the other Colours, would upon its
firft appearance look like a Circle of a Colour

almoft uniform from the circumference to the


center, and by compreffing the GlaiTes ftill more,
grow continually broader until a new Colour
emerged in its center, afid thereby it becanie a
Ring encompaihng ^hat new Colour. And by
2 com-
BOOK IL t73
domprefiing the Gkfles more, the diameter
ftill

of this Ring would increafe, and the breadth of


itsOrbit or Perimeter decreafe until another new
Colour emerged in the center of the laft: And
fo on and other
until a third, a fourth, a fifth,
following new Colours fuccefiively emerged
there, and became Rings encompalfmg the inner-
moft Colour, the laft of which was the black
Spot. And, on the contrary, by lifting up the
upper Glafs from the lower, the diameter of the
Rings would decreafe, and the breadth of their
Orbit increafe, until their Colours reached fuc-
cefiively to the center and then they being of a
;

confiderable breadth, I could more eafily difcern


and diftinguifti their Species than before. And
by this means I obferv'd their Succeflion and
Quantity to be as foUoweth.
Next to the pellucid central Spot made by
the contadl of the Glaffes fucceeded blue, white,
yellow, and red. The blue was ib little in quan-
tity, that I could not difcern
it in the Circles

made by the Prifms, nor could I well diftinguifti


any violet in it, but the yellow and red were
pretty copious, and feemed about as much in
extent as the white, and four or five times more
than the blue. The next Circuit in order of
Colours immediately encompaffmg thefe were
violet, blue, green, yellow, and red: and thefe
were all of them copious and vivid, excepting
the green, which was very quantity, and
little in
feemed much more faint and dilute than the
other Colours. Of other four, the vio-
the
let was the
leaft in extent, and the blue lefs
than the yellow or red. The third Circuit or
^ Order
174. O P T I C K S.

Order was purple, blue, green, yellow, and


red ; in which the purple feemed more reddifh
than the violet in the former Circuit, and the
green was much more confpicuous , being as
brisk and copious as any of the other Colours,
except the yellow, but the red began to be a lit-
tle faded, inclining very much to purple. Af-
ter this fucceeded the fourth Circuit of green
and red. The green was very copious and live-
ly, inclining on the one lide to blue, and on
the othtr fide to yellow. But in this fourth
Circuit there was neither violet, blue, nor yel-
low, and the red was very imperfe6l and dir-
ty. Alfo the fucceeding Colours became more
and more imperfed: and dilute, till after three
or four revolutions they ended in perfedt
whitenefs. Their form, when the Glafles were
moft comprefs'd fo as to make the black Spot
appear in the center, is delineated in the fe-
Gond Figure ; where a, b, f, ^, e :
/, ^, h, /,
k : /, w, w, 0, p: q, r : s, t : v, x: )\ z, de-
note the Colours reckon'd in order from the
center, black, blue, white,red: vio- yellOw,
let, blue, green, purple,
yellow, red:
blue,
green, yellow, red: green, red: greenifh blue,
red: greenifli blue, pale red: greenifli blue,
reddifh white.
Obf. 5. To determine the interval of the
Glalfes, or thicknefs of the interjacent Air, by
which each Colour was produced, I meafured
the Diameters of the firfl fix Rings at the moft
lucid part of their Orbits, and fquaring them, I
found their Squares to be in the arithmetical Pro-
greffion of the odd Numbers, i, 3, 5, 7, 9, 1 1.

And
BOOK II. 175
And one of thefe Glafles was plane, and
fince
the other fpherical, their Intervals at thofe Rings
jnuft be in the fame Progreffion. I meafured alio

the Diameters of the dark or faint Rings between


the more lucid Colours, and found their Squares
to be in the arithmetical Progrelfion of the. even
Numbers, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12. And it being very
nice and difficult to take thefe meafures exadly;
I repeated them divers times at divers parts of
ihe GlafTes, that by their Agreement I might be
confirmed in them. And the lame method I ufed
in determining fome others of the following Ob-
fervations.
Obf. 6. The Diameter of the fixth Ring at

the moil lucid part of its Orbit was -^ parts of

an Inch, and the Diameter of the Sphere on '

which the double convex Objedt-glals was


ground was about 102 Feet, and hence I ga-
thered the thicknefs of the Air or Aereal Inter-
val of the Glaffes at that Ring. But fome time
after, fufpedting that in making this Obfervatioii
I had not determined the Diameter of the
Sphere with fufficient accuratenefs, and being
uncertain whether the Plano-convex Glafs was
truly plane, and not fomething concave or con-
vex on that fide which I accounted plane and ;

whether I had not preiTed the GlafiTes together,


as I often did, to make them touch j ( For by
preffing fuch GlalTes together their parts eafily
yield inwards, and the Rings thereby become
fenfibly broader than they would be, did the
GlalTes keep their Figures.) I repeated the
Experiment , and found the Diameter of the
fixth
176 O P T I C K S.

fixth Iticid Ring about -^ parts of an Inch. 1

repeated the Experiment alfo with fuch an Ob-


jed-glafs of another Tclefcope as I had at hand.
This was a double Convex ground on both
fides to one and the fame Sphere, and its Fo-
cus was diftant from it 83 f Inches. And thence,
if the Sines of Incidence and Refraction of the
bright yellow Light be affumed in proportion
as II to 17, the Diameter of the Sphere to
which the Glafs was figured will by computa-
tion be fougd 182 Inches. This Glafs I laid
upon a flat one, fo that the black Spot appear-
ed in the middle of the Rings of Colours with-
out any other PrelTure than that of the weight
of the Glafs. And now meafuring the Diame-
ter of the fifth dark Circle as accurately as I
could, I found it the fifth part of an Inch pre-
cifely. This Meafure was taken with the point$
of a pair of CompaiTes on the upper Surface
on the upper Glafs, and my Eye was about
eight or nine Inches diftance from the Qlafs,
almofl perpendicularly over it, 'and the Glafs
was r of an Inch thick, and thence it is eafy to
colled: that the true Diameter of the Ring be-
tween the Glaffes was greater than its meafur'd
Diameter above the Glaffes in the Proportiort
of 80 to y9, or thereabouts, and by confequence
equal to ^| parts of an Inch, and its true Semi-
diameter equal to tV parts. Now as the Dia-
meter of the Sphere (.182 Inches) is to the Se-
mi-diameter of this fifth dark Ring .(t* parts of
an Inch) fo is this Semi-diameter to the thick-
: nefs of the Air at this fifth dark Ring j which is
there-
BOOK II. ?t77
therefore
^
-7^^— or —^^ Parts of an Inch ; and
567931 1774784
^

the fifth Part thereof, viz. tke -r^


•0739
Part of an

Inch, the Thicknefs of the Air at thefirft


is

of thefe dark Rings.


The fame Experiment I repeated with another
double convex Objed'-glafs ground on both fides
to one and the fame Sphere. Its Focus was di-
flarit from it i68j Inches, and therefore the Dia-
meter of that Sphere was iS'4 Inches. This
Glafs being laid upon the fijme plain, Glafs,
the Diameter of the fifth of the dark Rings,
when the black Spot in their Center appear'd
plainly without preffing the Glailes, was by the
meafure of the Compafles upon fhe upper Glafs
!ii Parts of an Inch, and by. confequence be-

tween theGlaffes it was ~^:.. For the upper Glafs

was ^ of an Inch thick, arid rhy Eye was diitant


from it 8 Inches. And a third proportional to
"half this from the Diameter ,,©jf the/Sphere is

,,-r- Parts of an Inch. Thi^ is therefore the

Thicknefs of the Air at this. Ring, and a fifth

Part thereof, viz. the ~— th Part of. an Incli is

the Thicknefs thereof at the firfl of the Rings, as


above.
fame Thing, by laying thefe Obje(5t-
I tried the
glafies flat Pieces of a broken Looking-
upon
glafs, and found the fame Meafures of the
Rings: Which makes me rely upon them till
N they
178 O P T I C K S.

.they can be determin'd more accurately byGlailes


ground to larger Spheres, though in fuch GlafTes
greater care muft be taken of a true Plane.
Thefe Dimenfions were taken, when my Eye
was placed almoft perpendicularly over the Glaf-
fes,being about an Inch, or an Inch and a quar-
ter, diilant from the incident Rays, and eight
Inches diftant from the Glafs j fo that the Rays
were inclined to the Glafs in an Angle of about
four Degrees. Whence by the following Obfer-
vation you will underftand, that had the Rays
been perpendicular to the GlafTes, the Thicknefs
of the Airat thefe Rings would have been lefs ia
the Proportion of the Radius to the Secant of four
Degrees, that is, of loooo to 10024. Let the
ThicknefTes found be therefore dimini{h'd in this
Proportion, and they will become —^ and — --^
^.

or ( to ufe the nearefl round Number ) the


g~^th Part of an Inch. This is the Thicknefs of

the Air at the darkeft Part of the iirft dark Ring


made by perpendicular Rays; and half this Thick-
nefs multiplied by the ProgreiTion,' i, 3, 5, 7, g^
iiy^^c. gives the Thicknefles of the Air at the
moft luminous Parts of all the brighteft Rings, viz,

{^y T^o) T^oy r78^> ^^' ^heir arithme-

tical Means ^^, - g^~, ^j^^, &c. being its

ThicknefTes at the darkefl Parts of all the dark


ones.

Oi/.j.
BOOK IL 179
Obf. 7. The Rings were leaft, when my Eye
was placed perpendicularly over theGlafTes in the
Axis of the Rings And when I view'd them
:

obliquely they became bigger, continually fwel-


ling as I removed my Eye farther from the Axis.
And partly by meafuring the Diameter of the
fame Circle at feveral Obliquities of my Eye,
partly by other Means, as alfo by making ufe of
the two Prifms for very great Obliquities, I found
its Diameter, and confequently the Thicknefs of

the Air at its Perimeter in all thofe Obliquities to


be very nearly in the Proportions exprefs'd in
this Table.

Angle of In-
i8o O P T I C K S.

* In the two firll Columns are exprefs'd the Obli-


quities of the incident and emergent Rays to the
Plate of the Air, that their Angles of Inci-
is,

dence and Refraction. In the third Column the


Diameter of any colour'd Ring at thofe Obliqui-
of which ten conffcitute
ties is exprelTed in Parts,
that Diameter when the Rays are perpendicular.
And in the fourth Column the Thicknefs of
the Air at the Circumference of that Ring is
exprelTed in Parts, of which alfo ten eonfti-
tute its Thicknefs when the Rays are perpen-
dicular.
And from thefe Meafures I feem to gather
this Rule: That the Thicknefs of the Air is pro-
portional to the Secant of an Angle, whofe Sine*
is a certain mean Proportional between the Sines.'

of Incidence and Refradlion. Arid that mean


. Proportional, fb far as by thefe Meaftires I caw
determine it, is the firft of an hundred and fix
arithmetical mean Proportionals between thofe»
Sines counted from the bigger Sine, that; is,
*
from the Sine of Refradion when the Re-
fraction is made out of
the Glafs into the^
Plate of Air, or from the Sine of Incidence when*
the Refraftion is made out oi the Plate of Air
into the Glafs. ,

O^.' 8. The
dark Spot in the middle of the
Rings increafed alfo by the Obliquation of the
Eye, although almofl infenfibly. But, if inftead
of the ObjeS-glafTes the Prifms were made ufe
of, its Increafe was more manifefl when viewed
fo, obliquely that no Colours appeared about
it.
'
It was leafl when the Rays were incident
moll obliquely on the interjacent Air, and as
the
BOOK II. i8i
the obliquity decreafed it increafed more and
more until the colour'd Rings appear'd, and
then decreafed again, but not fo much as it in-
creafed before. And
hence it is evident, that
the Tranfparency was not only at the abfolute
Contad of the GlalTes, but alfo^here they had
fome little Interval. I have fometimes obferved
the Diameter of that Spot to be between half
and two fifth parts of the Diameter of the ex-
terior Circumference of the red in the firft Cir-
cuit or Revolution of Colours when view'd al-
moft perpendicularly ; whereas when view'd ob-
liquely it hath wholly vanifli'd and become
opake and -white like the other parts of the
Glafs 3 whence it may be coUeded that the
Glaffes did then fcarcely, or not at all, touch
one another, and that their Interval at the pe-
rimeter of that Spot when view'd perpendicu-
larly was about a fifth or fixth part of their In-
terval at the circumference of the faid red.
O/y^rT'. 9.. By looking through the two conti-
guous Objed-glafies, I found that the interja-
cent Air exhibited Rings of Colours, as well
by tranfmitting Light as by refleding it. The
central Spot was now white, and from it the
order of the Colours were yellowifli red; black,
violet, blue, white, yellow, red; violet, blue,
green, yellow, red, &c. But thefe Colours
were very faint and dilute, unlefs when the
Light was trajecled very obliquely through the
Glaffes For by that means they became pretty
:

vivid. Only the firft yellowifh red , like the


blue in the fourth Obfervation, was fo little and
faint as fcarcely to be difcern'd. Comparing
N 3 the
i82 O P T I C K S.

the colour'd Rings made by Reflexion, with


thefe made by tranfmilTion of the Light j I
found that white was oppofite to black, red to
blue, yellow to violet, and green to a Compound
of red and violet. That is, thafe parts of the
Glafs were black when looked through, which
when looked upon appeared white, and on the
contrary. And fo thofe which in one cafe exhi-
bited blue, did in the other cafe exhibit red.
And the like of the other Colours. The man-
ner you have reprefented in the third Figure,
A
where B, CD, are the Surfaces of theGlaifes
contiguous at E, and the black Lines between
them are their Diftances in arithmetical Progref-.
iion, and the Colours written above are feen by
refiedied Light, and thofe below by Light tranf-
mitted.
Oof. 10. Wetting the Objed-glafTes a little
at their edges, the Water crept in flowly be-
tween them, and the Circles thereby became
lefs and the Colours more
faint Infomuch that
:

as theWater crept along, one half of them at


which it firft arrived would appear broken off
from the other half, and contracted into a lefs
Room. By meafuring them I found the Pro-
portions of their Diameters to the Diameters of
the like Circles made by Air to be about itvtu.
to eight, and confequently the Intervals of the
Glaffes at like Circles, caufed by thofe two Me-
diums Water and Air, are as about three to four.
• Perhaps it may be a general Rule, That if any
other Medium more or lefs denfe than Water
be comprefs'd between the Glaffes, their Inter-
vals at the Rings cavifed thereby will be to their
Intervals
BOOK II. 183
Intervals caufed by interjacent Air, as the Sines
are which meafure the Refrad;ion made out of
that Medium into Air.
Obf. II. When
the Water was between the
Glafles, if I prefTed the upper Glafs varioully at
its edges to make
the Rings move nimbly from
one place to another, a little white Spot would
immediately follow the center of them, which
upon creeping in of the ambient Water into that
place would prefently vanilh. Its appearance
was fuch as interjacent Air would have caufed,
and it exhibited the fame Colours. But it was
not Air, for where any Bubbles of Air were in
the Water they would not vanilli. The Refle-
xion- muft have rather been caufed by a fubtiler
Medium, which could recede through the Glaf-^
fes at the creeping in of the Water.

Obf. 12. Thefe Obfervations were made in


the open Air. But farther to examine the Effects
of colour'd Light falling on the Glaffes, I dar-
3cen'd the Room, and view'd them by Reflexion
of the Colours of a Prifm caft on a Sheet of
white Paper, my Eye being fo placed that I
could fee the colour'd Paper by Reflexion in the
Glalfes as in a Looking-glals.
, And by this
means the Rings became diftind:er and vifible to
a far greater number than in the open Air. I
have fometimes feen more than twenty of them,
whereas in the open Air I could not difcern above
eight or nine.
Obf. 13. Appointing an A ffiftant to move the
Prifm to and fro about its Axis, that ail the
Colours might fucceffively fall on that part of
the Paper which I faw by Reflexion from that
4 N part
j84 OPTIC K S.

part of "the GlafTes, where the Circles appear'd,


£o thax all. the Colours might be fucceffively re,
fiefted from the Circles to my Eye whilft I held
it immovable, I found, the Circles which the

red Light made to be manifeftly bigger than


which were made by the blue and violet.
thofe
And it was very pleafant to fee them gradually
fwell or contrad: accordingly as the Colour of the
Light was changed. The Interval of the Glaf-
fes at any of the Rings when they were made by
|:heutmoft red Light, was to their Interval at the
fame Ring when made by the utmoft violet,
greater than as 3 to 2, and lefs than as 13 to 8.
By the moft of my Obfer vat ions it was as 14 to
9. And this Proportion feem'd very nearly the
fame in all Obliquities of my Eye ; unlefs whea
two Prifms were made ufe of inftead of the Ob^
jedi-glafTes. For then at a certain great obliquity
of my Eye, the Rings made by the feveral Co-
lours {eem'd equal, and at a greater obliquity
thofe made by the violet would be greater than
the fame Rings made by the red: the Refrad:ion
of the Prifm in this cafe caafing the moft refran^
gible Rays to fall more obliquely on that plate of
the Air than the leaft refrangible ones. Thus
the Experiment fucceeded in the colour'd Light,
which was fufhciently ftrong and copious to
jnake the Rings fenfible. And thence it may be
gather'd, that if the moft refrangible and leaft
refrangible Rays had been copious enough to
make the Rings fenfible without the mixture of
other Rays, the Proportion which here was 14 to
9 would have been a little greater, fuppofe 14?
or 14T to 9.
,

BOOK IT. 185


Obf. 14. Whilft the Prifm was turn'd about
its Axis with an uniform Motion, to make all

the feveral Colours fall fucceffively upon the


Objedi-glafles, and thereby to marke the Rings
contrad: and dilate The Contradion or Dilata-
:

tion of each Ring thus made by the variation of


its Colour was fwifteft in the red, and floweft

in the violet, and in the intermediate Colours


it had intermediate degrees of Celerity. Com-
paring the quantity of Contrad:ion and Dilata-
tion made by all the degrees of each Colour, I
found that it was greatefl in the red j lefs in
the yellow, ftill lefs in the blue, and leaft in the
violet. And to make as juft an Eftimation as I
could of the Proportions of their Contrad:ions
or Dilatations, I obferv'd that the whole Con-
traction or Dilatation of the Diameter of any
Ring made by the degrees of red, was to
all

that of the Diameter of the fame Ring made by


all the degrees of violet, as about four to three,
or five to four, and that when the Light was
of the middle Colour between yellow and green,
the Diameter of the Ring was very nearly an
arithmetical Mean between the greatefl Diame-
ter of the fame Ring made by the outmoft red,
and the leaft Diameter thereof made by the
outmoft violet Contrary to what happens in
:

the Colours of the oblong Spedlrum made by


the Refraction of a Prifm, where the red is
moft contracted the violet moft expanded
,

and in the midft of all the Colours is the Con-


fine of green and blue. And hence I feem to
collect that the thicknefies of the Air between
the GlaiTcs there, where the Ring is fucceffive-
ly
i86 O P T I C K S.

ly made by the limits of the five principal Co-


lours ( red, yellow, green, blue, violet ) in or-
der ( by the extreme red, by the limit
that is,

of red and yellow in the middle of the orange,


by the limit of yellow and green, by the limit
of green and blue, by the limit of blue and
violet in the middle of the indigo, and by the
extreme violet ) are to one another very nearly
as the fixth lengths of -aXhord which found the
Notes in a fixth Major, Jhl^ la, mi\ fa, Jol, la.
But it agrees fomething better with the Obferva-
tion to fay, that the thickneffes of the Air be-
tween the GlafTes there, where the Rings are
fuccefTively made by the limits of the feven Co-
lours, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indi-
go, violet in order, are to one another as the
Cube Roots of the Squares of the eight lengths
^f a Chord, which found the Notes in an eighth,
Jhl, la, fa, Jbl, la, mi, fa, fol ; that is, as the
Cube Roots of -the Squares of the Nurinbers, i,
8 f J i
§> 5> 4J 1;
i
Si
^
'^J
I
2*

Obf Thefe Rings were not of various


15.
Colours like thofe made in the open Air, but
appeared all over of that prifmatick Colour on-
ly witli which they were illuminated. And by
projediing the prifmatick Colours immediately
upon the GlalTes, I found that the Light which
fell on the dark Spaces which were between
the colour'd Rings was tranfmitted through the
GlalTes without any variation of Colour. For
on a white Paper placed behind, it would paint
Rings of the fame Colour with thofe which
were refleded, and of the bignefs of their im-
mediate Spaces. And from thence the origin
I of
BOOK II. 187
of thefe Rings Is manifefl; namely, that the Air

.between the Glaffes, according to its various


thicknefs, is difpofed in fome places to refledt,
and in others to tranfmit the Light of any one
Colour (as you may fee reprefented in the
fourth Figure ) and in the fame place to refled:
that of one Colour where it tranfmits that of
another. ,

Obf. 16. The Squares of the Diameters of


thefe Rings made by any prifmatick Colour were
in arithmetical Progrefilon, as in the fifth Ob-
fervation. And the Diameter of the fixth Cir-
cle, when made by the citrine yellow, and

viewed almofl perpendicularly, was about ^


parts of an Inch, or a little lefs, agreeable to the
fixth Obfervation.
The precedent Obfervations were made with
a rarer thinMediuni; terminated by a denfer,
fuch as was Air or Water comprefs'd between
two GlalTes. In thofe that follow are fet down
the Appearances of a denfer Medium thin'd
within a rarer, fuch as are Plates of Mufcovy
Glafs, Bubbles of Water, and fome other thin
Subftances terminated on all fides with Air.
Obf. 17. If a Bubble be blown with Water
firft made tenacious by dilTolving a little Soap

in it, 'tis a common Obfervation, that after a


while it will appear tinged with a great variety of
Colours. To defend thefe Bubbles from being
agitatedby the external Air (whereby their Co-
lours are irregularly moved one among ano-
ther, fo that no accurate Obfervation can be
made of themj as foon as I had blown any of
thorn
i88 OPTIC K S.

them I cover'dit with a clear Glafs, and by that

means Colours emerged in a very regular


its

order, like fo many concentrick Rings encom-


paffing the top of the Bubble. And as the Bub-
ble grew thinner by the continual fubfiding of
the Water, thefe Rings dilated flowly and over-
fpread the whole Bubble, defcending in order to
the bottom of it, where they vanifn'd fuc-
celTively. In the mean while, after all the Co-
lours were emerged at the top, there grew in the
center of the Rings a fmall round black Spot,
like that in the firft Obfervation, which con-
tinually dilated it it became fometimes
felf till

more than i of an Inch in breadth before


or ^

the Bubble broke. At firft I thought there had


been no Light refleded from the Water in that
place, but obferving it more curioufly, I faw
within it feveral fmaller round Spots, which
appeared much blacker €nd darker than the
reft, whereby I knew that there was fome Re-
flexion at the other places which were not fo
dark as thofe Spots. And by farther Tryal I
found that I could fee the Images of fome
things (as of a Candle or the Sun) very faintly
refled:ed, not only from the great black Spot,
but alfo from the little darker Spots which were
within it.
Belides the aforefaid colour'd Rings there
would often appear fmall Spots of Colours, af-
cending and defcending up and down the fides
of the Bubble, by reafon of fome Inequalities in
the fubfiding of the Water. And fometimes
fmall black Spots generated at the fides would
2 afcend
BOOK II. 189
afcend up to the larger black Spot at the top of
the Bubble, and unite with it.
ObJ. 18. Becaufe the Colours of thefe Bubbles
were more extended and lively than thofe of the
Air thinn'^d between two GlafTes, and fo more
eafy to be diiliinguilli'd, I Ihall here give you a
farther defcription of their order, as they were
obferv'd in viewing them by Reflexion of the
Skies when of a white Colour, whilft a black
fubftance was placed behind the Bubble. And
they were thele, red, blue; red, blue; red,
blue; red, green; red, yellow, green, blue,
purple; red, yellow, green, blue, violet; red,
yellow, white, blue, black.
The three fir ft Succeffions of red and blue
were very dilute and dirty, efpecially the firft,
where the red feem'd in a manner to be white.
Among thefe there was fcarce any other Colour
fenfible befides red an^ blue, only the blues ( and
principally the fecond blue ) inclined a little to
green.
The fourth red was alfo dilute and dirtv, bur
not fo much as the former three ; after that fuc-
ceeded little or no yellow but a copious
,

green,which at firft inclined a little to yellow,


and then became a pretty brisk and good wil-
low green, and afterwards changed to a bluiib
Colour; but there fucceeded neither blue noF
violet. •

The fifth red at firft inclined very much to


purple, and afterwards became more bright
and but yet not very pure. This was
brisk,
fucceeded with a very bright and intenfe yel-
low» which was but little in quantity, and foon
chang'd
xgo O P T I C K S.

chang'4 to green: But that green was copious


and fomething more pure, deep and lively, than
the former green. After that follow'd an ex-
cellent blue of a bright Sky-colour, and then a
purple, which was lefs in quantity than the blue,
and much inclined to red.
The fixth red was at of a very fair and
firft

lively fcarlet, and foon after of a brighter Co-


lour, being very pure and brisk, and the beft
of all the reds. Then after a lively orange fol-
low'd an intenfe bright and copious yellow,
which was alfo the beft of all the. yellows, and
this changed firft to a greenifti yellow, and then
to a greenifli bluej but the green between the
yellow and the blue, was very little and dilute,
feeming rather a greenifli white than a green.
The blue which fucceeded became very good,
and of a very fair bright Sky-colour, but yet
fomething inferior to the former blue 3 and the
violet was intenfe and deep with little or no
rednefs in it. And lefs in quantity than the
blue.
In the laft red appeared a tin6lure of fcarlet
next to violet, which foon changed to a bright-
er Colour, inclining to an orange j and the yel-
low which follow'd was at firft pretty good
and lively, but afterwards it grew more dilute,
until by degrees it ended in perfed: whitenefs.
And this whitenefs, Water was very te-
if the
nacious and well-temper'd, would fiowly fpread
and dilate it felf over the greater part of the
Bubble; continually growing puler. at the top,
where at length it would crack in many places,
and thofe cracks, as they dilated, would appear
of
BOOK II. . rgt
of a pretty good, but yet obfcure and dark
Sky-colour; the white between the blue Spots
diminifliing, until it refembled the Threds of
an irregular Net-work, and foon after vanifh'd,
and left all the upper part of the Bubble of the
faid dark blue Colour. And this Colour, after
the aforefaid manner, dilated it felf downwards,
until fometimes it hath overfpread the whole
Bubble. In the mean while at the top, which
was of a darker blue than the bottom, and ap-
pear'd alfo full of many round blue Spots, fome-
thing darker than the reft, there woiild emerge
one or more very black Spots, and within thofe,
other Spots of an intenfer blacknefs, which I
mention'd in the former Obfervation and thefe ;

continually dilated themfelves until the Bubble


broke.
Water was not very tenacious, the black
If the
Spots would break forth in the white, without
any of the blue. And fome-
fenfible intervention
times they would break forth within the prece-
dent yellow, or red, or perhaps within the blue
of the fecond order, before the intermediate Co-
lours had time to difplay themfelves.
By this defcription you may perceive how great
an Colours have with thofe of Air
affinity thefe
defcribed in the fourth Obfervation, although
fet down in a contrary order, by reafon that
they begin to appear when the Bubble is thick-
eft, and are moft conveniently reckon'd from
the loweft and thickeft part of the Bubble up-
wards.
Obf. 19. Viewing in feveral oblique Poiitions
of my Eye the Rings of Colours emerging on
the
192 O P T I C K S.

the top of the Bubble, I found that they were


fenfibly dilated by increafing the obliquity, but
yet not fo much by far as thofe made by thinn'd
Air in the feventh Obfervation. For there they
v/ere dilated fo much as, when view'd moft ob-
liquely, to arrive at a part of the Plate more than
twelve times thicker than that where they ap-
pear'd when viewed perpendicularly j whereas ii;i
this cafe the thicknefs of the Water, at which
they arrived when viewed moil obliquely, was to
that thicknefs which exhibited them by per-
pendicular Rays, fomething lefs than as 8 to 5'.
By the beft of my Obfervations it was between
15 and 15; to 10; an increafe about 24 times lefs
than in the other cafe.
Sometimes the Bubble would become of an
uniform thicknefs all over, except at the top of
it near the black Spot, as I knew, becaufe it
would exhibit the fame appearance of Colours
in all Portions of the Eye. And then the Co-
lours which were feen at its apparent circumfe-
rence by the obliquefl Rays, would be different
from thofe that were feen in other places, by
Rays lefs oblique to it. And divers Spedtators
might fee the fame part of it of differing Co-
lours, by viewing it at very differing Obliqui-
ties. Now obferving how much the Colours at
the fame places of the Bubble, or at divers pla*
ces of equal thicknefs, were varied by the fe-
veral Obliquities of the Rays; by the affiflance
of the 4th, 14th, 1 6th and i8th Obfervations,
as they are hereafter explain'd, I colled: the
thicknefs of the Water requifite to exhibit any
one and the fame Colour, at feveral Obliquities,
to
BOOK II.
193
to be very nearly in the Proportion expTeffed in
this Table.

Incidence on
the Water.
194 OP TIC KS.
nals between the Sines of Incidence and Refradion
^

counted from the lelTer Sine, that is, from the


Sine of Refrad:ion when the Refradion is made
out of Air into Water, otherwife from the Sine
of Incidence.
I ,have fometimes obferv'd, that the Colours

whi<;h arife on polifh'd Steel by heating it, or on


Bell-metal, and fome other metalline Sub-
ftances, when melted and pour'd on the Ground,
where they may cool in the open Air, have, like
the Colours of Water-bubbles, been a little
changed by viewing them at divers Obliquities,
and particularly that a deep' blue, or violet,
when view'd very obliquely, hath been changed
to a deep red. But the Changes of thefe Co-
lours are not fo great and fenfible as of thofe
made by Water. For the Scoria, or vitrified Part
of the Metal, which mofl Metals when heated or
melted do continually protrude, and fend out
to their Surface, and which by covering the
Metals in form of a thin glafly Skin, caufes
thefe Colours, is much denfer than Water ; and
I find that the Change made by the Obliquation
x)f the Eye is leaft in Colours of the denfeft thin
Subilances.
Obf. 20.As in the ninth Obfervation, fo here,
the Bubble, by tranfmitted Light, appear'd of a
contrary Colour to that which it exhibited by
Reflexion. Thus when the Bubble being look'd
on by the Light of the Clouds reflected from
it, feemed red at its apparent Circumference,
if the Clouds at the fame time, or immediately
after, were view'd through it, the Colour at its
Circumference would be blue-. And, on the
contrary.
BOOK IL 19$
.contrary, when by refleded Light it appeared
blue, it would appear red by tranfmitted Light.
Obf. 2 1. By wetting very thin Plates of Muf-
CGvy Glals, whole thmnels made the like Co-
lours appear, the Colours became more taint and
languid , efpecially by wetting the Plates on
that fide oppofite to the Eye: But I could not
So then
perceive any variation of their Species.
the thicknefs of a Plate requiiite to produce
any Colour, depends only on the denlity of the
Plate, and not on that of the ambient Medium.
And hence, by the loth and i6th Obfervations,
may be known the thicknefs which Bubbles of
Water, or Plates of Mufco'-cy Glafs, or other
Subftances, have at any Colour produced by
them.
Obf, 22. A thin tranfparent Body, which is
denfer than its ambient Medium, exhibits more
brisk and vivid Colours than that which is fo
much rarer; as I have particularly obferved iii
the Air and Clafs. For blowing Glafs very thin
at a Lamp Furnace, thofe Plates encompalTed
with_ Air did exhibit Colours much more vivid
than thofe of Air made thin between two Glaf-
fes.

Obf. 23. Comparing the quantity of Light


refledtedfrom the feveral Rings, I found that
it was mpft copious from the iiril or inniofi;,

and in the exterior Rings became gradually lef^


and lefs. Alfo the whitenefs of the iirft Ring
was flronger than that refleded from thofe
parts of the thin Medium or Plate which wxre
without the Rings j as I co aid manifeftly per-
ceiveby viewing at a diftance the Rings made
C a by
196 O P T I C K S.

by the two Objed-glafTes ; or by comparing tw6


Bubbles of Water blown at diflant Times, in the
firft of which the Whitenefsappear'd, which fuc-

ceeded all the Colours, and in the other, the


Whitenefs which preceded them all.
Obf. 24. When the two Objeil-glafTes were
lay'd upon one an cither, fo as to make the Rings-
of the Colours appear, though with my naked Eye
I could not difcern aljove eiffht
o or nine of thofe
Rings, yet by viewing them through a Prifm I
have feen a far greater Multitude, infomuch that
I could number more than forty, befides many
others, that were fo very fmall and clofe together,
that I could not keep my Eye fteady on them fe-
verally fo as to number them, but by their
Extent I have fometimes eftimated them to be
more than an hundred. And I believe the Expe-
riment may be improved to the Difcovery of far
greater Numbers. For they feem to be really un-
limited, though vifible only fo far as they can be
feparated by the Refradion of the Prifm, as I (hall
hereafter explain.
But was but one fide of thefe Rings, namely,
it

that towards which the Refraction was made,


which by that Refradion was render'd diftind:,
and the other fide became more confufed than
when view'd by the naked Eye, infomuch that
there I could not difcern above one or two,
and fometimes none of thofe Rings, of which
I could difcern eight or nine with my naked
Eye. And their Segments or Arcs, which on
the other fide appear'd fo numerous, for the
moft part exceeded not the third Part of a Cir-
cle. If the Refraction was very great, or the
Prifm
B O O K II. 197
Prilm very diftant from the Ohjed-glalTes, the
middle Part of thofe Arcs became alfo confu-
fed, fo as to difappear and conftitute an even
Whitenefs, whiUl on either fide their Ends, as
alfo the whole Arcs farthefl from the Center,
became diftinder than before, appearing in the
Form as you fee them defign'd in the hfth Fi-
gure.
The Arcs, where they feem'd diflindteft, were
only white and black fuccellively, without any
other Colours intermix'd. But in other Places
there appeared Colpurs, whofe Order was inverted
by the Kefradtion in fuch manner, that if I firft
held the Prifm very near the Objedt-glafles, and
then gradually removed it farther off towards my
Eye, the Colours of the 2d, 3d, 4th, and fol-
lowing Rings flirunk towards the white that
emerged between them, until they wholly va-
nifli'd into it at the middle of the Arcs, and
afterwards emerged again in a contrary Order.
But at the Ends of the Arcs they retain'd their
Order unchanged.
I have fometimes one Objed-glafs
fo lay'd
upon the other, to the naked Eye they
that
have all over feem'd uniformly white, without
the leaft Appearance of any of the colour'd
Rings ; and yet by viewing them through a
Prifm, great Multitudes of thofe Rings have
difcover'd themfelves. And in like manner
Plates of Miifcovy Glafs, and Bubbles of Glafs
blown at a Lamp-Furnace, which were not fo
tlijn as to exhibit any Colours to the naked Eye,
have through the Prifm exhibited a great Va^
riety of them ranged irregularly up and down in
O 3 the
198 O P T I C K S.

the Form of Waves. And fo Bubbles of Water,


before they began to exhibit their Colours to the
naked Eye of aBy-ftander, have appeared through
fl Prlfrn, girded about with many parallel and
horizontal Rings ^ to produce v^hich Effed:, it

was neceffary hpld the Prifm parallel, or


to
very nearly parallel to the Horizon, and to
difpofe it {q th^t the Rays might be refraded
upwards.

T H»E
THE
SECOND BOOJ^
O F

OPTICKS
PART II.

Remarks tipo-n the foregoing Obfervatio?ts,

AVING given my
Obfervations
of thefe Colours, before I make
life of them to unfold the Caufes

of the Colours of natural Bodies,


it is convenient that by the fim-

pleft of them,fuch asare the ad, 3d,


4th, 9th, I2thj 1 8th, 20th, and 24th, I firft ex-
O 4 plaiu
20O ; O P T I C K S.

plain the more compounded. And firft to fhew


now the Colours in the fourth and eighteenth
Obiervations are produced, let there be taken in
any Right Line from the Point Y, [in Ffg.6.] the
Lengths YA, YB, YC, YD, YE, YF, YG, YH,
in proportion to one another, as the Cube-RoOts
of the Squares of the Numbers, 5, t,
|, ^, |, |,
f^g,
i,

whereby the Lengths of aMulical Chord to found


all the Notes in an eighth are reprefented; that
is, in the Proportion of the Numbers 6300, 68 14,

71 14, 7631, 8255, 8855, 9243> loooo. And


at the Points A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, let Perpen-
diculars A a, B /3, &c, be erefted, by whofe In-
tervals the Extent of the feveral Colours fet under-
neath againft them, is to be reprefented. Then
divide the Line A a in fuch Proportion as the
lumbers i, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 9, xo, 1 1, &c. fet at
the Points of Divifion denote. And through
thofe Divifions from Y draw Lines 1 1, 2 K, 3 L,
5 M, 6 N, 7 O, &c.
Now, if A 2 be fuppofed to reprefent the
Thicknefs of any thin tranfparent Body, at which
the outmoft Violet is moft copioully reflected
in the firft Ring, or Series of Colours, then by
the 13th Obfervation, HK will reprefent its
Thicknefs, at which the utmoft Red is moft co-
pioufly refleded in the fame Series. Alfo by
the 5th and i6th Obfervations, A 6 and HN
will denote the ThicknelTes at which thofe ex-
treme Colours are moft copioufly refledied in
the fecond Series, and A 10 and HQ^he Thick-
neffes at which they are moft copioufly refledl-
ed in the third Series, and fo on. And the
Thicknefs at which any of the intermediate Co-
i lours
BOOK II. 20I
iours are reflefted moft copioufly, will, accor-
ding to the 14th Obfervation, be defined by the
diftance of the Line AH
from the intermediate
parts of the Lines 2 K, 6N, 10 Q, &c. againft
which the Names of thofe Colours are written
below.
But farther, to define the Latitude of thefe
Colours in each Ring or Series, let A i defign
the leajft thicknels, and A 3 the greateft thi,ck-
nefs at which the extreme violet in the firft
,

Series is reiledted, and let HI, and L, de- H


fign the like limits for the extreme red, and let
the intermediate Colours be limited by the in-
termediate parts of the Lines il, and 3L, a-
gainfi; which the Names of thofe Colours are
written, and fo on: But yet with this caution,
that the Reflexions be fuppofed flrongefl at the
intermediate Spaces, 2K, 6N, ioQ> ci?r. and
from thence to decreafe gradually towards thefe
limits, 3L, 5M, 7O, &c. on
1 1, either fide;
where you muft not conceive them to be pre-
cifely limited, but to decay indefinitely. And
whereas have afiign'd the fame Latitude to e-
I
very Series, I did it, becaufe although the Co-
lours in the firfl Series feem to be a little broad-
er than die* reft, by reafon of a ftronger Re-
flexion tliere, yet that inequality is fo infenfi-
ble as fcarcely to be determin'd by Obferva-
tion.
Now according to this Defcription, concei-
ving that the Rays originally of feveral Colours
are by turns refleded at the Spaces 1 1 L 3, 5M
O7, 9P R
1 1, ^c. and tranfmitted at the Spaces

AHIi, 3LM5, 7 OP
9, &c, it is eafy to know
wliat
202 O P T I C K S.

what Colour muft the open Air be exhi-


in
bited at any thickneis of a tranlparent thin Bo-
dy. For if a Ruler be -applied parallel to AH,
at that diftance from it by which the thicknefs
of the Body is reprefented, the alternate Spaces
il L3, 5M O7, &c. which it croiTeth will de-
note the reflected original Colours, of which
the Colour exhibited in the open Air is com-
pounded. Thus if the conftitutiop of the green
in the third Series of Colours be defired, apply
the Ruler as you fee at tt p cr 9, and by its paffing
through fome of the blue at tt and yellow at cr,
as' well as through the green at ^, you may con-

clude that the green exhibited at that thicknefs of


the Body is principally conflituted of original
green, but not without a mixture of fome blue
and yellow.
By this means you may know how the Co-
lours from the Center of the Rings outward
ought to fucceed in order as they were defcri-
bed in the 4th and i8th Obfervations. For if
you move the Ruler gradually from through AH
having pafs'd over the firfl Space
all diflances,
which denotes little or no Reflexion to be made
by thinneft Subftances, it will firft arrive at i the
violet, and then very quickly at the blue and
green', which together with that violet com-
pound blue, and then at the yellow and red, by
whofe farther addition that blue is converted
into whitenefs, which whitenefs continues du-
ring the tranfit of the edge of the Ruler from
I to 3, and after that by the fucceffive dehci-
cnce of its component Colours, turns firfl to
co-mpound yellow, and then to red, and lafl of
all
9
BOOK IT. 203
all the red ceafeth at L. begin the Co- Then
lours of the fecond Series, which fucceed in
order during the tranfit of the edge of the
Ruler from 5 to O, and are more lively than
before becaufe more expanded and fevered.
,

-And fame reafon, inftead of the former


for the
v^hite intercedes between the blue and
there
yellow a mixture of orange, yellow, green,
blue and indigo, all which together ought to
exhibit a dilute and imperfect green. So the
Colours of the third Series all fucceed in or-
der; firft, the violet, which a little interferes
with the red of the fecond order, and is there-
by inclined to a reddifli purple; then the blue
and green, which are lefs mix'd with other
Colours, and confequently more lively than be-
fore, efpecially the green: Then follows the
yellow, forne of which towards the green is di-
Itintt and good, but that part of it towards the
fucceeding red, as alfo that red is mix'd with
the violet and blue of the fourth Series, where-
by various degrees of red very much inclining
to purple are compounded. This violet and
blue, which fliould fucceed this red, being mix-
ed with , and hidden in it , there fucceeds a
green. And this at firft is much inclined to
blue, but foon becomes a good green, the on-
ly unmix'd and lively Colour in this fourth Se-
ries. For as, it verges towards the yellow, it
begins to interfere with the Colours of the fifth
Series by whofe mixture the fucceeding yel-
,

low and red are very much diluted and made


dirty, efpecially the yellow, which being the
v/eaker Colour is fcarce able to iTiew it felf.

After
204 O P T I C K S.

more and
After this the feveral Series interfere
more, and their Colours become more apd more
intermix'd, till after three or four more revo-
lutions ( in which the red and blue predominate
by turns) all forts of Colours are in all places
pretty equally blended, and compound an even
whitenefs.
And fmce by the 15th Obfervation the Rays
endued with one Colour are tranfmitted, where
thofe of another Colour are reflected, the reafon
of the Colours made by the tranfmitted Light in
the 9th and 20th Obfervations is from hence
evident.
If not only the Order and Species of thefe
Colours, but alfo the precife thicknefs of the
Plate, or thin Body
at which they are exhibited,
be defired in parts of an Inch, that may be alfo
obtained by affiftance of the 6th or i6th Obfer-
vations. For according to thofe Obfervations
the thicknefs of the thinned Air, which be-
tween two GlalTes exhibited the moil luminous

fjarts of the firfl fix Rings were ^7^^ -^^


-4 —
178000
—1—
178000^
—1— —V-
178000^ 178000
parts of
-I
an Inch,

Suppofe the Light refle(5ted moll copioufly at


thefe thicknefles be the bright citrine yellow,
or confine of yellow and orange, and thefe thick-
nefles will be Fa, Fyu, Fr, F|, Fo, F7. And
this being known, it is eafy to determine what

thicknefs of Air is reprefented by G(p, or by any


other difl:ance of the Ruler from A H.
But farther, fince by the loth Obfervation the
thicknefs of Air was to the thicknefs of Water,
which
BOOK 11. 205
which between the fame GlaiTes exhibited the
fame Colour, as 4 to 3, and by the 21ft Obfer-
vation the Colours of thin Bodies are not varied
by varying the ambient Medium jthe thick-
nefs of a Bubble of Water, exhibiting any Co-
lour, will be J of the thicknefs of Air produ-
cing the fame Colour. And fo according to
the fame loth and 21ft Obfervat ions, the thiok-
nefs of a Plate of Glafs, whofe Refradion of
the mean refrangible Ray, is meafured by the
proportion of the Sines 31 to 20, may be \° of
the thicknefs of Air producing the fame Co-
lours; and the lijce of other Mediums. I do
not affirm , that this proportion of 20 to 3 r,
holds in all the Rays for the Sines of other
;

forts of Rays have other Proportions. But the


differences of thofe Proportions are fo little
that I do not here confider them. On thefe
Grounds I have compofed the following Table,
wherein the thicknefs of Air, Water, and Glafs,
at which each Colour is mofl intenfe and fpeci-
fick, is exprelfed in parts of an Inch divided in-
to ten hundred thoufand equal parts.


me
2o6 O P T I C K a
I'he thicknefs of colour d Plates and Particles of

-^
^ Jir.
^Very black
Black
Beginning of
Black
Their Colours of the
Blue
4kft Order, *\
White
Yellow
I

Orange
vRed
r Violet
V Indigo
A Blue
Of thcfecond Order, J Green
Alellow
y Orange
/ Bright red
L Scarlet
Purple
Indigo
Blue
of the third Order,< Green
Yellow
Red
Bluifh red

Bluifli green
of the fourth Order,* Green
Yellowiih green
Red
{Gre^eniih blue
Ofihe fifth Order,

-rvr
Of 1
the
r 1-
fixth
« J
Order,
TGreenifli blue
\^q^
of the fevemh Or-rGreeniih blue
der, (.Ruddy white
BOOK IL 20 j

Now if this Table be compared with the 6th
Scheme, you will there fee the conftitntion of
each Colour, as to its Ingredients, or the ori-
ginal Colours of which it is compounded, and
dience be enabled to judge of its Intenfenefs or
Imperfection ; which may fuffice in explication
of the 4th and i8th Obfervations, unlefs it be
farther delired to delineate the manner how
the Colours appear, when the two Objed;-glaf-
fes are laid upon one another. To do which,
let there be defcribed a large Arc of a Circle,
and a ftreight Line which may -touch that Arc,
and parallel to that Tangent feveral occult
Lines, at fuch diftances from it, as the Num-
bers fet againft the feveral Colours in the Ta-
ble denote. For the Arc, and its Tangent, will
reprefent the Superficies of the Glalles termi-
nating the interjacent Air; and the places where
the occult Lines cut the Arc will (how at what
diftances from the center, or Point of contadl,
each Colour is refiedled.
There are.alfo other Ufesof
this Table: For
by its of the Bubble in
afiirtance the thicknefs
the 19th Obfervation was determin'd by the Co-
lours which it exhibited. And fo the-bignefs of
the parts of natural Bodies may be conje-
diured by their Colours, as ihall be hereafter
fhewn. Alfo, if two "or more very thin Plates
be laid one upon another, fo as to compofe one
Plate equalling them all in thicknefs, the refult-
ing Colour may be hereby determin'd. For in-
flance, Mr. Hook obferved, as ismentioned in
his Micrograpkia^ that a faint yellow Plate of
Miijccoy Glafs laid upon a bli^e one, conftituted
a very
2o8 O P T I C K S.

a very deep purple. Tke yellow of the firfl Or-


der is a faint one, and the thicknefs of the Plate
exhibiting it, according to the Table is 42, to
which add 9, the thicknefs exhibiting blue of
the fecond Order, and the Sum will be 13I,
which is the thicknefs exhibiting the purple of
the thir4 Order.
To explain, in the next place, the circum-
ftances of the 2d and 3d Obfervations 5 that is,
how the Rings of the Colours may ( by turning
the Prifms about their common Axis the con-
trary way to that expreffed in thofe Obferva-
tions ) be converted into white and black Rings,
and afterwards into Rings of Colours again, the
Colours of each Ring lying now in an inverted
order; it muft be remember'd, that thofe Rings
of Colours are dilated by the obliquation of the
Rays to the Air which intercedes the GlalTes,
and that according to the Table in the 7th Ob-
fervation, their Dilatation or Increafe of their
Diameter is mofl manifeft and fpeedy when
they are obliquefl:. Now, the Rays of yellow
being more refra(5led by tne firft Superficies of
the faid Air than thofe of red, are thereby
made more oblique to the fecond Superficies,
at which they are refieded to produce the co-
lour'd Rings, and confequently the yellow Cir-
cle in each Ring will be more dilated than the
red; and the Excefs of its Dilatation will be fo
much the greater, by how much the greater is

the obliquity of the Rays, until at laft it be-


come of equal extent with the red of the fame
Ring. And for the fame reafon the green, blue
and violet, will be alfo fo much dilated by the
ftill.
BOOK II. 209
iibill greater obliquity of their Rays,
as to be-
come all very nearly of equal extent with the
red, that is, equally diltant from the center of
the Rings, And
then all -the Colours of the
fame Ring mull be coincident, and by their
mixture exhibit a white Ring. And thefe white
Rings muft have black and dark Rings between
them, becaufe they do not fpread and interfvire
with one another, as before. And for that rea-
fon alfo they mufl become diftindler, and vifible
to far greater numbers. But yet the violet be-
ing obliqueft will be fomething more dilated,
in proportion to its extent, than the other Co-
lours, and fo very apt to appear at the exterior
Verges of the white.
Afterwards, by a greater obliquity of the
Rays, the violet and blue become more fenfibly
dilated than the red and yellow, and fo being
farther removed from the center of the Rines,
the Colours muft emerge out of the white in- an
order contrary to that which they had before;
the violet and blue at the exterior Limbs of
each Ring, and the red and yellow at the in-
terior. And the violet, by reafon of the great-
eft obliquity of its Rays, being in proportion
moft of all expanded, will fooneft appear at
the exterior Limb of each white Ring, and be-
come more confpicuous than the reft. And the
feveral Series of Colours belonging to the feve-
ral Rings, will, by their unfolding and fpread-
ing, begin again to interfere, and thereby ren-
der the Rings lefs diftindt, and not vifible to fo
great numbers.

P If
2IO O P T I C K S.

If inflead of the Prifms the Objed-glafleS be


made ufe of, the Rings which they exhibit be-
come not white and diilindl by the obhquity of
the Eye, by reafon that the Rays in their paflage
through that Air which intercedes tne Glafles
are very nearly parallel to thofe Lines in which
they were lirft incident on the GlafTes, and con-
fequently the Rays endued with feveral Colours ^
are not inclined one more than another to that
Air, as it happens
in the Prifms.
There is another circumftance of thefe
yet
Experiments to be confider'd, and that is why
the black and white Rings which when view'd
at a diftance appear diftincft, fliould not only be-
come confufed by viewing them near at hand,
but alfo yield a violet Colour at both the edges
of every white Ring. And the reafon is, that
the Rays which enter the Eye at feveral parts
of the Pupil, have feveral Obliquities to the Glaf-
fes, and thofe which are mofl oblique, if confi-
der'd apart, would reprefent the Rings bigger
than thofe which are the leaft oblique. Whence
the breadth of the Perimeter of every white
Ring is expanded outwards by the obliquefl
Rays, and inwards by the leafi oblique. And
this Expanfion is fo much the greater by how
much the greater is the difference of the Obli-
quity ; that is, by how much the Pupil is wider^
or the Eye nearer to the Glafles. And the
breadth of the violet muft be mofb expanded,
becaufe the Rays apt to excite a Senfation of
that Colour arc mofl oblique to a fecond or
farther Superficies of the. thinn'd Air at which
they are rcfiedted, and have alfo the grearefl
varia-
BOOK II. 211
variation of Obliquity,which makes that Co-
lour fooneftemerge out of the edges of the
white. And as the breadth of every Ring is
thus augnaented, the dark Intervals niufl be di-
minifli'd, until the neighbouring Rings become
continuous, and are blended, the exteiior iiril,
and then thofe nearer the center j fo that they
can no longer be diftinguifh'd apart, but feem to
conflitute an even and uniform whitenefs.
Among all the Obfervations there is none ac-
companied with fo odd circumftances as the
twenty-fourth. Of thofe the principal are, that
in thin Plates, v/hich to the naked Eye feem of
an even and uniform tranfparent whitenefs,
without any terminations of Shadows, the Re-
fraction of a Prifm fhould make Rings of Co-
lours appear, whereas it ufually makes Objedts
appear colour'd only there where they are ter-
minated with Shadows, or have parts unequal-
ly luminous ; and that it fliould make thofe
Kings exceedingly diftindl and white, although
it ufually renders Objeds confufed and colour-

ed. The Caufe of thefe things you will under-


ftand by confidering, that all the Rings of Co-
lours are really in tiie Plate, when vie w'd with
'

the naked Eye, although by reafon of the great


breadth of their Circumferences they fo much
interfere and are blended together, that they
feem to conflitute an uniform whitenefs. But
when the Rays oafs through the Prifm to the
Eye, the Orbits of the feveral Colours in every
Ring are refraded, fome more than others, ac-
cording to their degrees of Pvcfrangibility By
:

which means the Colours on one fide of the


P 2 Ring
212 O P T I C K S.

Ring (that is on one fide of


in the circumference
its center, ) become more unfolded and dilated,

and thofe on the othef fide more complicated and


contraded. And where by a due Refra(3:ion they
are fo much contradied, that the feveral Rings'
become narrower than to interfere with one ano-
ther, they muft appear diftind:, and alfo white,
if the conftituent Colours be fo much contrad:ed
as to be wholly coincident. But on the other
fide, where the Orbit of every Ring is made
broader by the farther unfolding of its Colours,
it muft interfere more with other Rings than be-

fore, and fo become lefs diftind;.

To explain this a little farther, fuppofe the


concentrick Circles A V, and B X, [in Fig. 7.]
reprefent the and violet of any Order,-
red
which, together with the intermediate Colours,
conllitute any one of thefe Rings. Now thefe
being view'd through a Prifm, the violet Circle
B X, will, by a greater Refraction, be farther
tranllated from its place than the red A V^ and
fo approach nearer to it on that fide of the Cir-
cles, towards which the Refractions are made.
For inftance if the red be tranflated to a v,
-,

the violet may be tranflated to I? x, fo as to ap-


proach nearer to it at x than before y and if the
red be farther tranllated to av, the violet may
be fo much farther tranflated to b x as to con-
vene with it at X ; and if the red be yet farther
tranflated to a T, the violet may be ftill fo much
farther tranflated to /? | as to pafs beyond it at
§, and convene with it at e and f. And this
being underllood not only of the red and vio-
let, but of all the other intermediate Colours,
and
BOOK II. 213
and alfo of every revolution of thofe Colours,
you will ealily perceive how thofe of the fame
revolution or order, by their nearnefs at x v
and T J, and their coincidence at x v, e and J\
ought to conftitute pretty diftindt Arcs of Cir-
cles, efpecially at x v, or at e and f; and that
they will appear feverally at x Vy and at x v ex-
hibit whitenefs by their coincidence, and again
appear feveral at T |, but yet in a contrary or-
der to that which they had before, and ftill re-
tain beyond e and f. But on the other fide,
at a I?, a b, or a l3, thefe Colours mufl: become
much more confufed by being dilated and fpread
fo as to interfere with thofe of other Orders.
And the fame confufion will happen at T | be-
tween e and f^ if the Refraction be very great,
or the Prifm very diftant from the Objcdt-glaf-
fes: In which cafe no parts of the Rings will
be feen, fave only two little Arcs at e and J\
whofe diftance from one another will be aug-
mented by removing the Prifm flill farther from
the Objed-glafTes : And thefe little Arcs mult
be diftindtefl and w^hiteft at their middle, and
at their ends, where they begin to grow con-
fufed, they mull be colour'd. And the Colours
at one end of every Arc mufl be in a contrary
order to thofe at the other end, by reafon that
they crofs in the intermediate white ; namely,
their ends, which verge towards T
g, will be
red and yellow on that fide next the center,
and blue and violet on the other fide. But
their other ends which verge from. T J, will on
the contrary be blue and violet on that fide to-
P 2 ^ya^ds
214 O P T I C K S.

wards the center, and on the other fide red and


yellow.
Now as all thefe things follow from the pro-
perties of Light by a mathematical way of rea-
them may be manifefted
foning, fo the truth of
by Experiments. For in a dark Room, by view-
ing thefe Rings through a Prifm, by reflexion
of the feveral prifmatick Colours, which an
affiftant caufes to. move to and fro upon a Wall
or Paper from whence they are reflected, whilft
the Spe6:ator's Eye, ihe Prifm, and the Objed:-
glaffes, (as in the 13th Obfervation,) are placed
Iteadyj the Polition of the Circles made fuc-
ceifively by the feveral Colours, will be found
fuch, in refped: of one another, as I have de-
scribed in the Figures a b x ^0^ or a b x v, or
a /S I T. And by the fame method the truth of
the Explications of other Obfervations may be
examined.
By what hath been faid, the like Phaenomena
of Water and thin Plates of Glafs may be un-
derftood. But fragments of thofe Plates
in fmall
there is where they
this farther obfervable, that
lie flat upon a Table, and are turned about their
centers whilfl they are view'd through a Prifm,
they will in fome poflures exhibit Waves of va-
rious Colours ; and fome of them exhibit thefe
Waves in one or two Pofitions only, but the
mofc of them do in all Pofitions exhibit them,
and make them for the mofl part appear al-
mioft all over the Plates. The reafon is, that
the Superficies of fuch Plates are not even, but
have many Cavities and Swellings, which, how
fhallow foever, do a little vary the thicknefs of
th^
BOOK II. 215
tlie Plate. at the feveral fides of thofe Ca-
For
vities, Reafons newly defcribed, there
for the
ought to be produced Waves in feveral po-
llures of the Prifm. Now though it be but
fome very fmall and narrower parts of the Glafs,
by which thefe Waves for the niofl part are cau-
fed, yet they may feem to extend themfelves
over the whole Glafs, becaufe from the narrow-
eft of thofe parts there are Colours of feveral
Orders, that is, of feveral Rings, confufedly re-
fleded, which by Refraction of the Prifm are
unfolded, feparated, and, according to their
degrees of Refraction, difperfed to feveral pla-
ces, fo as to conftitute fo many feveral Waves,
as there were divers orders of Colours promifcu-
oufly reflected from that part of the Glafs.
Thefe are the principal Phasnomena of thin
Plates or Bubbles, whofe Explications depend
on the properties of Light, which I have here-
tofore deliver'd. And thefe you fee do necef-
farily follow from them, and agree with them,
even to their very leaft circumftancesj and not
only fo, but do very much tend to their proof.
Thus, by the 24th Obfervation it appears, that
the Rays of feveral Colours, made as well by thin
Plates or Bubbles, as by Refradions of a Prifm,
haye feveral degrees of Refrangibility j where-
by thofe of each order, which at the reflexion
from the Plate or Bubble are intermix'd with
thofe of other orders, are feparated from them
by Refraction, and aflbciated together fo as to
become vifible by themfelves like Arcs of Cir-
cles. For if the Rays were all alike refrangi-
ble, 'tis impofiible that the whitenefs, which
P 4 to
2i6 O P T I C K S.

to the naked Senfe appears uniform, fhould by


Refraction have its parts tranfpofed and ranged
into thofe black and white Arcs.
appears alfo that the unequal Refradlions
It
of Rays proceed not from any contin-
difforin
gent irregularities ; fuch as are Veins, an uneven
Polifh, or fortuitous Polition of the Pores of
Glafs ; unequal and cafual Motions in the Air
or /Ether, the fpreading, breaking, or dividing
the fame Ray into many diverging parts ; or the
like. For, admitting any fuch irregularities,
it v^ould be impoiTible for Refractions to render

ihofe Rings fo very diflincft, and well defined,


as they do in the 24th Obfervation. It is ne^
cefTary therefore that every Ray have its proper
and conftant degree of Refrangibility connate
with it, according to which its refraction is ever
juflly ^nd regularly perform'd^ and that feveral
flays have feveral of thofe degrees.
And what is faid of their Refrangibility may
be alfo underflood of their Reflexibility, that is,
of their Difpofitions to be refle<^ed, fome at a
greater, and others at a lefs thicknefs of thin
Plates or Bubbles j namely, that thofe Difpofi-
tions are alfo connate with the Rays, and im-
mutable ; a^ may appear by the 13 th, 14th, and
J 5 th Obfervations, compared with the fourth and
eighteenth.
By the precedent Obfervations appears al-
it

fo, that whitenefs is a diihmilar mixture of all


polours, and that Light is a mixture of Rays
endued with all thofe Colours. .For, confider-
ing the multitude of the Rings of Colours in
jhe ^d^ I2th5 and 24th Obfervations, itismani-
"^ ; feft,
BOOK 11. 217
feft, that although 4th and i8th Obfer-
in the
vations thereappear no more than eight or
jiine of thofe Rings, yet there are really a far
greater number, which fo much interfere and
mingle with one another, as after thofe eight
or nine revolutions to dilute one another whol-
ly, and conllitute an even and fenfibly uniform
whitenefs. And
confequently that whitenefs
muft be allow'd a mixture of all Colours, and
the Light which conveys it to the Eye muft
be a mixture of Rays endued with all thofe Co-
lours.
But by the 24th Obfervation it ap-
farther J
pears, that thereis a conftant relation between

Colours and Refrangibility the moft refrangi-


;

ble Rays being violet, the leaft refrangible red,


and thofe of intermediate Colours having pro-
portionably intermediate degrees of Refrangibi-
lity. And by the 13th, 14th, and J5th Obfer-
vations, compared with the 4th or i8th, there
appears to be tlie fame conftant relation be-
tween Colour and Reflexibility ; the violet be-
ing in like circumftances refleded at leaft thick-
nelfes of any thin Plate or Bubble, the red at
greateft thicknelTes, and the intermediate Co-
lours at intermediate thicknefles. Whence it
follows, that the colorifick Difpofitions of Rays
are alfo connate with them, and immutable^ and
by confequence, that all the Produdions and
Appearances of Colours in the World are de-
rived, not from any phyfical Change caufed in
Light by Refradion or Reflexion, but only

Irom the various Mixtures or Separations of


|lays, by virtue of their different Refrangibility
or
-^
218 O P T I C K S.

or Reflexibility. And in this refped the Scicncd


of Colours becomes a Speculation as truly ma-
thematical as any other part of Opticks. I mean,
fo far as they depend on the Nature of Light,
and are not produced or alter'd by the Power
v of Imagination, or by ilriking or preffing the
Eye.

THE
THE
SECOND BOOK
O F

OPTICKS.
PART III.

Of the permanejit Colours of natural Bo-


dies^ and the Analogy between them and
the Colours of thiii tranfparent Plates*

AM now come to another part of


this Defign, which is to confider how
the PhiEnomena of thin tranfparent
Plates fland related to thofe of all o-
ther natural Bodies. Of thefe Bodies I have al-
ready told you that they appear of divers Co-
lours,
220 O P T I C K S.

lours, accordingly as they are difpofed to refled:


moft copiouily the Rays originally endued with
thofe Colours. But their Conflitutions, where-
by they refied: fome Rays more copiouily than
others, remain to be difcover'd and thefe I lliall;

endeavour to manifeft in the following Propo-


iitions.

P R O p. I.

*ith'ofe of tran/parent Bodies refieEi the


Superficies
greatejl quantity of Lights which have the great-
eft refraBing Power ^ that is, which i7itercede
Mediums that differ mofi in their refraBiije Den-
Jities. And in the Confines of equally refraBing
Mediums there is no Kefiexion.

TH E Analogy between Reflexion and Re-


fradion will appear by confidering, that
when Light paffeth obliquely out of one Medi-
um into another which refracts from the per-
pendicular, the greater is the difference of their

refradive Denfuy, the lefs Obliquity of Inci-
dence is requifite to caufe a total Reflexion,
For as the Sines are which meafure the Refra-
(Ttion, fo is the Sine of Incidence at which the

total Reflexion begins, to the Radius of the


Circle ; and confequently that Angle of Inci- *

dence is leaft where there is the greateft difl^e-


rence of the Sines; Thus in the paffing of
Light out of Water into Air, where the Refra-
ction is meafured by the Ratio of the Sines 3 to
4, the total Reflexion begins when the Angle
of Incidence is about 48 Degrees 35 Minutes,
'^
In
;

BOOK II. ill


Iti pafling out of Glafs into Air, where the Re-
fradiion is meafured by the Ratio of the Sines
20 to 31, the total Reflexion begins when the
Angle of Incidence is 40 Degrees 10 Minutes;
and fo in paffing out of Cryftal, or more flrong-
ly refrading Mediums into Air, there is ftill a lefs
obliquity caufe a total reflexion.
requifite to
Superficies v/hich refrad; mofl: do
therefore
fooneft refled: all the Light which is incident
on them, and fo muft be allowed moft flrongly
reflexive.
But the truth of this Propofition will farther
appear by obferving, that in the Superficies in-
terceding two tranfparent Mediums, (fuch as are'
Air, Water, Oil, common Glafs, Cryftal, me-
talline Glafies, Ifland Glafl^es, white tranfparent
Arfenick, Diamonds, ^c.) the Reflexion is
ftronger or weaker accordingly, as the Super-
ficies hath a greater or lefs refrading Power.
For in the Confineof Air and Sal-gem 'tis
ftronger than in the Confine of Air and Water,
and ftill ftronger in the Confine of Air and .com-
mon Glafs or Cryftal, and ftronger in the Con-
fine of Air and a Diamond. If any of thefe,
and fuch like tranfparent Solids, be immerged
in Water, its Reflexion becomes much weak-
er than before j and ftill weaker if they be im-
merged in the more ftrongly refrading Liquors
of well rectified Oil of Vitriol or Spirit of Tur-
pentine. If Water be diftinguifli'd into two
parts by any imaginary Surface, the Reflexion
in the Confine of thofe two parts is none at all.
In the Confine of Water and Ice 'tis very little
in that of Water and Oil 'tis fomething greater;
la
222 O P T I C K S.

in that of Water and Sal-gem ftill greater ; and


in that of Water and Glafs, or Cryftal, or other
denfer Subftances ftill greater, accordingly as
thofe Mediums differmore or
lefs in their re-
frading Powers. Hence in the Confine of com-
mon Glafs and Cryftal, there ought to be a
weak Reflexion, and a ftronger Reflexion in
the Confine of common and metalline Glafs;
though I have not yet tried this. But in the
Confine of two Glafies of equal denfity, there
is not any fenfible Reflexion ; as was fliewn in

the firft Obfervation. And tlie fame may be


underftood of the Superficies interceding two
Cryftals, or two Liquors, or any other Sub-
ftances in which no Refradion is caufed. So
then the reafon why uniform pellucid Mediums
(fuch as Water, Glafs, or Cryftal,) have no fen-
fible Reflexion but in their external Superficies,
where they are adjacent to other Mediums of
a diflferent denfity, is becaufe all their conti-
guous parts have one and the fame degree of
denfity.

Prop. II.

^he parts of almojl all jtatiiral Bodies are


leajl
in fome meajure tranfparent : And the Opa-
city of thofe Bodies arifeth from the multi-
tude of "Reflexions caufed in their intertial
Parts,

'Tp HAT this is fo has been obferved by o-


-*• and will eafily be granted by them
thers,
that have been converfant with Microfcopes.
And it may be alfo tried by applying any fub-
flancc
BOOK JL 223
ftance to a hole through which fome Light is
immitted into a dark Room. For how opake
foever that Subftance may feem in the opea
Air, it will by that means appear very manifeft-
ly tranfparent, if it be of a fufficient thiniiefs.
Only white metalline Bodies miift be excepted,
which by reafon of their exceffive denfity feem
to refled: almoft all the Light incident on their
firft Superficies unlefs by folution in Menftru-
j

ums they be reduced into very fmall Particles,


and then they become tranfparent.

Prop. IIL
Between the parts of opake mid colour d Bodies
are many Spaces^ either empt)\ or repleniJUd
with Mediians of other DenfitieSy as Water
between the tingijig Corpufcles wherewith a-
ny Liquor is impregnated ^ Air between the
aqueous Globules that confiitute Clouds or Mijh\
and for the mofl part Spaces loid of both Air
and Water but yet perhaps not wholly ^coid of
^

all Subjlance^ between the parts of hard Bo-


dies,

' I ^ HE
truth of this Is evinced by the two
-^
precedent Propofitions For by the fe- :

cond Propofition there are many Reflexions


made by the internal parts of Bodies, which, by
the Propoiition, would not happen if the
firll

parts of thole Bodies were continued without


any fuch Interftices between them ; becaufe Re-
flexions are caufed only in Superficies, which
intercede Mediums of a differing denfity, by
'Frop, I.

^ Buc
224 O P T I C K S.

But farther, that this difcontinuity of parts


is the principal Caufe of the opacity of Bodies,

will appear by confidering, that opake Subftan-


ces become tranfparent by filling their Pores
with any Subftance of equal or almoft equal den-
fity with their parts. Thus Paper dipped in
Water or Oil, the O cuius Mundi Stone fteep'd
in Water, Linnen Cloth oiled or varniih'd, and
many other Subilances foaked in fuch Liquors
as will intimately pervade their little Pores, be-
come by that means more tranfparent than other-
wife ; fo, on the contrary, the mofh tranfparent
Subftances may, by evacuating their Pores, or
feparating their parts, be render'd fufficiently o*
pake ; wet Paper, or the Oculus Mun-
as Salts or
di Stone by being dried, Horn by being fcraped,
Glafs by being reduced to Powder, or otherwife
flawed; Turpentine by being ftirred about with
Water till they irdx imperfectly, and Water by
being form'd into many fmall Bubbles, either a-
lone in the form of Froth, or by fliaking it to-
gether with Oil of Turpentine, or Oil Olive, or
with fome other convenient Liquor, with which
it will not perfectly incorporate. And to the in-
creafe of the opacity of thefe Bodies, it condu-
ces fomething, tliat by the 23d Obfervation the
Reflexions of very thin tranfparent Subftances are
conliderably ftronger than thofe made by the
faipe Subftances of a greater thicknefs,

Prop*
BOOK IL 225

Prop. IV.
The Farts of Bodies and their Interftices mi/fl not
be lefs than of feme definite bignefs^ to render^
them opake and colour d.

p.OR the opakeft Bodies, if their parts be


*- fubtilly divided, (as Metals, by being diflbl-
ved in acid Menftruums, ^c^ become perfect-
ly tranfparent. And you may alfo remember,
that in eighth Obfervation there 'was no
the
fenfible reflexion at the Superficies of the Ob-
ied-glaffes, where they were very near one an-
other, though they did not ablblutely touch.
And in the 1 7th Obfervation the Reflexion of

the Water- bubble where it became thinriell was


almofl infenfible, fo as to caufe very black Spots
to appear on the top of the BubblCj by the want
of reflected Light.
On thefe grounds I perceive it is that Water,
Salt, Glafs, Stones, and fuch like Subftances,
are tranfparent. For, upon divers Confidera-
tions, they feem to be as full of Pores or Inter-
ftices between their parts as other Bodies are,
but yet their Parts and Interftices to be too
fmall to caufe Reflexions in their common Sur-
faces.

Q^ Prop.
226 O PT I C K S.

P R O p. V.
^he tranfparcnt farts of Bodies, according to their
Je-veral Jizes^ reJieEl Rays of one Colour^ and
traifmit thofe of another y on the fame grounds
that thin Plates or Bubbles do refeB or tranfmit
thofe Rays, Atid this, I take to be the ground of
all'their Colours.

*P O R if a thinn'd or plated Body, which


-- being of an even thicknefs, appears all o-
ver of one uniform Colour, fliould be flit into
Threads, or broken into Fragments, of the fame
thicknefs with the Plate j I fee no reafon why
every Thread or Fragment fhould not keep its
Colour, and by confequence why a heap of thofe
Theads or Fragmmts fliould not conflitute a
Mafs or Powder of the fame Colour, which the
Plate exhibited before it was broken. And the
parts of all natural Bodies being like fo many
Fragments of a Plate, muft on the fame grounds
exhibit the fame Colours.
Now, that they do fo will appear by the affi-
nity of their Properties. The finely colour'd
*

Feathers of fome Birds, and particularly thofe


of Peacocks Tails, do, in the very fame part of
the Feather, appear of feveral Colours in feveral
Pofitions of the Eye, after the very fame man-
ner that thin Plates were found to do in the
7th and 1 9th Obfervations, and therefore their
Colours arife from the thinnefs of the tranfpa-
rent parts of the Feathers; that is, from the
flendernefs of the very fine Hairs, or Capilla-
menta^ which grow put of the fides of the
groifer
;

BOOK II. 227


grofler lateral Branches or Fibres of thofe Fea-
thers. And to the fame purpofe it is, that the
"Webs of fome Spiders, by being fpun very fine,
have appeared colour'd, as fome have oblerv'd,
and that the colour'd Fibres of fome Silks, by
varying the Pofition of the Eye, do vary their
Colour. Alfo the Colours of Silks, Cloths,
and other Subftances, which Water or Oil can
intimately penetrate, become more faint and
obfcure by being immerged in thofe Liquors,
and recover their Vigor again by being dried
much after the manner declared of thin Bodies
in the loth and 21ft Obfervations. Leaf-Gold,
fome forts of painted Glafs, the Infufion of
Lignutn Nephritiaun, and fome other Subilan-'
ces, refledl one Colour, an(i tranfmit another;,
like thin Bodies in the 9th and 20th Obferva-
tions. And fome of thofe colour'd Powder5
which Painters ufe, may have their Colours a
little changed, by being very elaborately and
finely ground. Where I fee not what can be
juftly pretended for thofe changes, befides the
breaking of their parts into lefs parts by that
fame manner that the Co-
contrition, after the
lour of a thin Plateis changed by varying its

thicknefs. For which reafon alfo it is that the


colour'd Flowers of Plants and Vegetables, by
being bruifed, ufually become more tranfparenz
than before, or at leafl in fome degree or o-
ther change their Colours. Nor is it much lefs
to my purpofe, that, by mixing divers Liq^uors,
very odd and remarkable Produd:ions and
Changes of Colours may be effected, of which
no caufe can be more obvious and rational than
Q^ that.
228 O P T I C K S.

tha:tthe faiine Corpufcles of one Liquor da vari-


oufly ad upon or unite with the tinging Corpufcles
of another, fo as to make them fwell, or fhrink,
( whereby not only their bulk but their denfity

alfo may be changed,) or to divide them into


fmaller Corpufcles, (whereby a colour'd Liquor
may become tranfparent,) or to make many of
them affociate into one clufter, whereby two
tranfparent Liquors may compofe a colour'd one.
For we fee how Menftruums are
apt thofe faiine
to penetrate and diffolve Subftances to which
they are applied, and fome of them to precipi-
tate what others diilblve. In like manner, if we
confider the various Phaenomena of the Atmo-
fphere, we may obferve, that when Vapours are
iirft raifed, they hinder not the tranfparcncy of

the Air, being divided into parts too fmall to


caufe any Reflexion in their Superficies. But
when in order to compofe drops of Rain they
begin to coalefce and conflitute Globules of all
intermediate lizes, thofe Globules, when they
become of a convenient fize to refle6t fome Co-
lours and tranfmic others,may conftitute Clouds
of various Colours according to their fizes. And
I fee not what can be rationally conceived in fo
tranfparent a Subftance as Water for the produ-
ction of thefe Colours, befides the various fizes
of its fluid and globular Parcels.

Prop,
^

BOOK 11. 229

Prop. VI.
^he parts of Bodies 011 ivhich their Colours depend
are denjer than the Medium which pervadet
their Interjiices,

np HIS will appear by confidering, that the


-" Colour of a Body depends not only on
the Rays which are incident perpendicularly
on its parts, but on thofe alfo which arc inci-
dent at all other Angles. And that according
to the 7th Oblervation, a very little variation
of obliquity will change the refled:ed Colour,
where the thin Body or fmall Particle is rarer
than the ambient Medium, infomuch that fuch
a fmall Particle will at diverfly oblique Inci-
dences refledl all forts of Colours, in fo great a
variety that the Colour refuking from them all,
confufedly refled:ed from a heap of fuch Parti-
cles, muft rather be a white or grey than any
other Colour, or at beft it muft be but a very
imperfecft and dirty Colour. Whereas if the
thin Body or fmall Particle be much denfer than
the ambient Medium, the Colours, according to
the 19th Obfervation, are fo little changed by
the variation of obliquity, that the Rays which
are refled;ed leafl obliquely may predominate
over the feft, fo much as to caufe a heap of fuch
Particles to appear very intenfely of their Co-
lour.
It conduces alfo fomething to the confirma-
tion of this Propolition, that, according to the
22d Obfervation, the Colours exhibited by the
denfer thin Body within the rarer,' are more
brisk
0^3 ^
;

130 O P t I C K S.

brisk than thofe exhibited by the rarer within the


denfer.

I Prop. VII.
*the bignefs of the component parts of natural Bo-
dies may be conjellured by their Colours.

FO R fince the parts of thefe Bodies, by


Frop, 5. do mofl probably exhibit the
fame Colours with a Plate of equal thicknefs,
provided they have the fame refradiive denlity
and fince their parts feem for the mcft part to
have much the fame dehfity with Water or
Glafs, as by many circumftances is obvious to
colledt J to determine the fizes of thofe parts,
you need only have recourfe to the precedent
Tables, in which the thicknefs of Water or
Glafs exhibiting any Colour is exprefled. Thus
if it be defired to know the diameter of a Cor-
p.ufcle, which being of equal denlity with Glafs
ihall refled: green of the third Orders the Num-

ber 165^ (hews it to be ^-^ parts of 'an Inch.


I 0000 A

The greatefl: difficulty is here to know of


what Order the Colour of any Body is. And
for this end we muft have recourfe to the 4th
and 1 8th Obfervations ; from whence may be
coUedted thefe particulars.
and other reds^ oranges
Scarlets y and yel~ y

JowSy if they be pure and intenfe, are mofl pro-


bably of the fecond order. Thofe of fhe firfl
and third order alfo may be pretty goodj only
the yellow of the firfl order is faint, and the
_
orange
BOOK II. 231
orange and red of the third Order have a great
Mixture of violet and bkie.
There may be good Greens of the fourth Order,
but the pureft are of the third. And of this
Order the green of all Vegetables feenis to be,
partly by reafon of the Intenfenefs of their Co-
lours, and partly becaufe when they wither fome
of them turn to a greenifh yellow, and others
to a more perfed: yellow or orange, or perhaps
to red, paiTing firft through all the aforefaid in-
termediate Colours. Which Changes feem to
be effected by the exhaling of the Moifture
which may leave the tinging Corpufcles more
denfe, and fomething augmented by the Accre-
tion of the oily and earthy Part of that Moifture.
Now the green, without doubt, is of the fame
Order with thofe Colours into which it changeth,
becaufe the Changes are gradual, and thofe Co-
lours, though ufually not very full, yet ar&
often too full and lively to be of the fourth
Order.
Blues and Purples may be either of the fe-
cond or third Order, but the beft are of the
third. Thus the Colour of Violets feems to be
of that Order, becaufe their Syrup by acid Li-
quors turns red, and by urinous and alcaiizate
turns green. For fince it is of the Nature of
Acids to diffolve or attenuate, and of Alcalies
to precipitate or incrailate, if the Purple Co^
lour of the Syrup was of the fecond Order, an
acid Liquor by attenuating its tinging Cor-
pufcles would change it to a red of the in ft Or-
der, and an Alcali by incralTating them would
change it to a green of the fecond Order ;
Qjj. which
232 O P T I C K S.

which red and green j efpecially the green, feem


too imperfed: to be the Colours produced by
thefe Changes. But if the faid Purple be fup-
pofed of the third Order, its Change to red of the
fecond, and green of the third, may without any
Inconvenience be allow'd.
If there be found any Body of a deeper and lefs
reddifh Purple than that of the Violets, its Colour
moft probably is of the fecond Order. But yet
there being no Body commonly known whofe Co-
lour is conftantly more deep than theirs, I have
made ufe of their Name to denote the deepeft and
leaft reddilh Purples, fuch as manifeftly tranfccnd
their Colour in purity.
The blue of the firft Order, though very faint
and little, may poffibly be the Colour of fome
Subftances j and particularly the azure Colour
of the Skies feems to be of this Order. For all
Vapours when they begin to condenfe and coa-
lefce into fmall Parcels, become firft of that Big-
nefs, whereby fuch an Azure muft be reflected be-
fore they can conftitute Clouds of other Colours.
And fo this being the firft Colour which Vapours
begin to refled, it ought to be the Colour of the
fineft and moft tranfparent Skies, in which Va-
pours are not arrived to that Grofliiefs requifite to
refled: other Colours, as we find it is by Expe-
rience.
JVhitenefs, moft intenfe and luminous, is
if
that of the Order, if lefs ftrong and lumi-
firft

nous, a Mixture of the Colours of feveral Or-


ders. Of this laft kind is the Whitenefs of
Froth, Paper, Linnen, and moft white Sub-
ftances j of the former I reckon that of white
Metals
BOOK II. 233
Metals to be. For whilft the denfell of Metals,
Gold, if foliated, is tranfparent, and all Metals
become tranfparent if dilfolved in Menftriiums
or vitrified, the Opacity of white Metals ari-
feth not from their Denfity alone. They be-
ing lefs denfe than Gold would be more tranf-
parent than it, did not fome other Caufe con-
cur with their Denfity to make them opake.
And this Caufe I take to be fuch' a Bignefs of
their Particles as fits them to refledl the white of
the firft order. For, if they be of other Thick-
nefi!es they may refled: other Colours, as is ma-
nifeft by the Colours which appear upon hot
Steel in tempering it, and fometimes upon the
Surface of melted Metals in the Skin or Scoria
which arifes upon them in their cooling. And
as the white of the firfl order is the Itrongefl
which can be made by Plates of tranfparent
Subftances, fo it ought to be ftronger in the
denfer Subftances of Metals tlian in the rarer
of Air, Water, and Glafs. Nor do I fee but
that metallick Subftances of fuch a Thicknefs as
may fit them to reflect the white of the firft or-
der, may, byreafon of their great Denfity (ac-
cording to the Tenor of the firft of thefe Pro-
pofitions) refled: all the Light incident upon
them, andfo be as opake and fplendent as it's
poflible for any Body to be. Gold, or Copper
mix'd with lefs than half their Weight of Silver,
or Tin, or Regulus of Antimony, in fufion, or
amalgamed with a very little Mercury, become
white J which fhews both that the Particles of
white Metals have much more Superficies, and
fo are fmaller, than thofe of Gold and Copper,
and
234- O P T I C K S.

and alfo that they are fo opake as not to fuflef


the Particles of Gold or Copper to fhine through
them. Now it is fcarce to be doubted, but
that the Colours of Gold and Copper are of
the fecond or third order, and therefore the
Particles of white Metals cannot be much big-
ger than is requifite to make them reflect the
white of the firft order. The Volatility of Mer-
cury argues that they are not much bigger,
nor may they be much lefs, left they lofe their
Opacity, and become either tranfparent as they
do when attenuated by Vitrification, or by Solu-
tion in Menftruums, or black as they do when
ground fmaller, by rubbing Silver, or Tin, or
Lead, upon other Subftances to draw black
Lines. The firft and only Colour which white
Metals take by grinding their Particles fmaller,
is black, and therefore their white ought to be

that which borders upon the black Spot in the


Center of the Rings of Colours, that is, the
white of the firft order. But, if you would
hence gather the Bignefs of metallick Particles,
you muft allow for their Denfity. For were
Mercury tranfparent, its Denfity is fuch that
the Sine of Incidence upon it ( by my Compu-
tation) would be to the Sine of its Refraction,
as 7 1 to 20, or 7 to 2. And therefore'the Thick-
nefs of its Particles, that they may exhibit the
fame Colours with thofe of Bubbles of Water,
ought to be lefs than the Thicknefs of the
Skin of thofe Bubbles in the Proportion of 2
to 7. Whence it's pofiible, that the Particles
of Mercury m.ay be as little as* the Particles of
fome
:

BOOK II.
235
(ome tranfparent and volatile Fluids, and yet
refled the white of the firft order.
Laftly, for the produdtion of blacky the Cor-
pufcles mufl be lefs than any of thofe which ex-
hibit Colours. For at all greater fizes there is

too much Light reflected to conftitute this Co-


lour. But they be fuppofed a little lefs than
if

is requifite torefled^ the white and very faint


blue of the firfl order, they will, according to
the 4th, 8th, i7thand iSthObfervations, refled:
fo very little Light as to appear intenily black,
and yet may perhaps varioully refrad it to and
fro within themfelves fo long, until it happen
to be ftifled and by which means they will
loft,

appear black in all Eye without


pofitions of the
any tranfparency. And from hence may be under-
flood why Fire, and the more fubtile diffolver Pu-
trefaction, by dividing the Particles of Subftan-
ces, turn them to black, why fmall quantities
of black Subftances impart their Colour very
freely and intenfly to other Subftances to which
they are applied ; the minute Particles of thefe,
by reafon of their very great
number, eaftly o-
verfpreading the grofs Particles of others ; why
Glals ground very elaborately with Sand on a
Copper Plate, 'till it be well poliftVd, mukes
the Sand, together with what is worn off" from
the Glafs and Copper, become very black
wiiy black Subftances do fooneft of all others
become hot in the Sun's Light and burn, (which
Effed: may proceed partly from the multitude
of Refradions in a little room, and partly from
the eafy Cominotion of fo very fmall Cor-
pufcies; ) and why blacks are ufually a little in-

clined
236 O P T I C K S.

clined to a bluifli Colour. For that they are Co


may be feen by illuminating white Paper by
Light refie.ded from black Subftances. For the
Paper will ufually appear of a bluifh white j and
the reafon is, that black borders on the obfcure
blue of the order defcribed in the i8th Obferva-
tion, and therefore refled:s more Rays of that Co-
lour than of any other.
In thcfe Defcriptions I have been the more
particular, becaufe it is not impoffible but that
Mifcrofcopes may at length be improved to the
difcovery of the Particles of Bodies on which
their Colours depend, if they are not already in
fome meafure arrived to that degree of per-
fedion. For if thofe Inftruments are or can be
fo far improved as with fufficient diflindtnefs
to reprefent Objedls five or fix hundred times
bigger than at a Foot diftance they appear to
our naked Eyes, I fliould hope that we might
be able to difcover fome of the greatefi; of thofe
Corpufcles. And by one that would magnify
three or four thoufand times perhaps they might
all be difcover'd, but thofe which produce
blacknefs. In the mean while I fee nothing ma-
terial in this Difcourfe that may rationally be
doubted of, excepting this Pofition That tran-
:

fparent Corpufcles of the fame thicknefs and


denfity with a Plate, do exhibit the fame Co-
lour. And this I would have underftood not
without fome Latitude,, as well becaufe thofe
Corpufcles may be of irregular Figures, and
many Rays muft be obliquely incident on them,
and fo have a fliorter way through them than
the length of their DiameterSj as becaufe the
flraitnels
B O O K II. 237
ftraknefs of the Medium put in on all fides
within fuch Corpufcles may a little alter its Mo-
tions or other qualities on which the Reflexion
depends. But yet I cannot much fufped: the
laft becaule I have obferved of fome fmall
,

Plates of Mufcovy Glafs which were of an even


thicknefs, that through a Microfcope they have
appeared of the fame Colour at their edges and
corners where the included Medium was ter-
minated, which they appeared of in other pla-
ces. However it will add much to our Satif^
fadion, if thofe Corpufcles can be difcover'd
with Microfcopes ; which if we fhall at length
attain to, I fear it will be the utmofl improve-
ment of this Senfe. For it feems impoflible to
fee the more fecret and noble Works of Nature
within the Corpufcles by reafon of their tranfpa-
rency.

Prop. VIII.
^he Cmife of Refcxion is not the impinging
of
Light on thefolid or impervious parts of Bodies^
as is commonly believed.

np HIS will appear by the following Confi-


-°- derations. Firft, That in the paflage of
Light out of Glafs into Air there is a Reflexion
as ftrong as in its palTage out of Air into Glafs,
or rather a little ftronger, and by many degrees
ilronger than in its pallage out of Glafs into Wa-
ter. And it feems not probable that Air {hould
have more flrongly refleding parts than Waf^r
or Glafs. But if that ihould poflibly be fuppo-
fed, yet it will avail nothing j for the Reflexion
238 O P T I C K S.
'

is as flrong or ftronger when the Air drawn is

away from the Glafs, ( fuppofe by the Air-Pump

invented by Otto Gueriet^ and improved and made


ufeful by Mr. Boyle) as when it is adjacent to it.
Secondly, If Light in its pafTage out of Glafs
into Air be inqident more obUquely than at an
Angle of 40 or 4 1 Degrees wholly refleded,
it is

if lefs obliquely it is meafure tranfmit-


in great
ted. Now it is not to be imagined that Light at
one degree of obliquity fhould meet with Pores
enough in the Air to tranfmit the greater part of
it, and at another degree of obliquity fliould

meet with nothing but parts to refled: it wholly,


efpecially coniidering that in its palTage out of
Air into Glafs, how oblique foever be its Inci-
dence, it finds Pores enough in the Glafs to tranf-
mit a great part of it. If any Man fuppofe that
it is not refledled by the Air, but by the outmofl

fuperficial parts of the Glafs, tliere is itill the


fame dithculty: Befides, thatfuch a Suppofition
is unintelligible, and will alfo appear to be falfe

by applying Water behind fome part of the Glafs


inllead of Air. For fo in a convenient obliquity
of the Rays, fuppofe of 45 or 46 Degrees, at
which they are all refleded where the Air is adja-
cent to the Glafs, they Ihall be in great meafure
tranfmitted where the Water is adjacent to it;

which argues, that their Reflexion or Tranfmiffi-


on depends on the conilitution of the Air and
W^ater behind the Glafs, and not on the ftriking
of the Rays upon the parts of the Glafs. Third-
ly, If the Colours made by a Prifm placed at
the entrance of a Beam of Light into a darken'd
Room te lucceffively call: on a fecond Prifm
placed
BOOK II. 239
placed at a greater diftance from the former,
in luch manner that they are all alike incident
upon it, the fecond Prifm may be lo inclined to
the incident Rays, that thole which are of a
blue Colour fliall be all refleded by it, and yet
thofe of a red Colour pretty copioufly tranlmit-
ted. Now if the Reflexion be caufed by the
parts of Air or Glafs, I would ask, why at the
fame Obliquity of Incidence tiie blue fliould
wholly impinge on thofe parts, fo as to be all
reflected, and yet the red find Pores enough
to be in a great meafure tranfmitted. Fourth-
ly, Where two Glaffes touch one another, there
is no fejifible Reflexion, as was declared in the
iirftObfervation; and yet I fee no feafon why
the Rays fhould not impinge on the parts of
Glafs, as much when contiguous to other Glafs
as when contiguous to Air. Fifthly, When
the top of a Water-Bubble (in the 17th Obfer-
vation, ) by the continual fubflding and exha-
ling of the Water grew very thin, there Vv^as
fuch a little and almofl infenfible quantity of
Light reflected from it, that it appeared in-
tenfly black; whereas round about that black
Spot, where the Water was thicker, -the Refle-
xion was fo ftrong as to make the Water feem
very white. Nor is it only at the leaft thick-
nefs of thin Plates or Bubbles, that there is no
manifeft Reflexion, but at many other thick-
neffes continually greater and greater. For in
the 15th Obfervation the Rays of the fame Co-
lour were by turns tranfmitted at one thicknefs,
and refledied at another thicknefs, for an in-
determinate number of Succeflions. And yet
I in
.

2/,o ,
O P T I C K S.

in the Superficies of the thinned Body, where


it of any one thicknefs, there are as many
is

parts for the Rays to impinge on, as where it


is of any other thicknefs. Sixthly, If Reflexion
were caufed by the parts of reflecting Bodies,
it would be impoilible for thin Plates or Bub-

bles, at one and the fame place, to refled; the


Rays of one Colour, and tranfmit thofe of ano-
ther, as they do according to the 13 th and 15 th
Obfervations. For it is not to be imagined
that at one place the Rays which, for infliance,
exhibit a blue Colour, fliould have the fortune
to dalh upon the parts, and thofe which exhi-
bit a red to hit upon the Pores of the Body 5

and tfien at another place, where the Body is


either -a little thicker, or a little thinner, that
on the contrary the blue fhould hit upon its
pores, and the red upon its parts. Laftly, Were
the Rays of Light refleded by impinging on
the folid parts of Bodies, their Reflexions from
polifh'd Bodies could not be fo regular as they
are. For in polifliing Glafs with Sand, Putty, or
Tripoly, it is not to be imagined that thofe
Subftances can, by grating and fretting the Glafs,
bring all its leafl: Particles to- an accurate Polifh;
fo that all their Surfaces fliall be truly plain or
truly fpherical, and look all the fame way, fo
as together to compofe one even Surface. The
fmaller the Particles of thofe
Subftances are,
the fmalier will be the Scratches by which they
continually fret and wear away the Glafs until
it be polifli'd j but be they never fo fmall they

can wear away the Glafs no otherwife than by


grating and fcratching it, and breaking the
3 Protu-.
,

BOOK 11. 241


Protuberances; and therefore polifli it no o-
therwife than by bringing its roughnefs to a ve-
ry fine Grain, lb that the Scratches and Fret-
tings of the Surface become too fmall to be
vifible. Andtherefore if Light were refled:ed
by impinging upon the folid parts of the Giafs,
it would be fcatter'd as much by the moll po-
lilh'd Glafs as by the rougheft. So then it re-
anains a Problem, how Glafs poliili'd by fretting
Subftances can refled; Light lb regularly as it
does. And this Problem is fcarce otherwife to
be folved, than by faying, that the Reflexion of
a Ray is etfe(5ted, not by a lingle point of the
reflecting Body, but by Ibme power of the Bo-
dy which is evenly diffufed all over its Surface,
and by which it a6ls upon the Ray without im-
mediate Contad:. For that the parts of Bodies
do a(fl upon Light at a diftance Ihall be Ihewn
hereafter.
Now Light be refled:ed, not by impinging
if
on the of Bodies, but by fome other
folid parts
principle j it's probable that as many of its Rays
as impinge on the folid parts of Bodies are not
refleded but ftifled and loll in the Bodies. For
otherwife we mull allow two forts of Refle-
xions. Should all the Rays be refledled which,
impinge on the internal parts of clear Water or
Cryllal, thofe Subftances would rather have a
cloudy Colour than a clear Tranfparency. To
make Bodies look black, it's necefiary that ma-
ny Rays be llopp'd, retained, and loft in them ;
and it feems not probable that any Rays can be
llopp'd and ftifled in them which do not im-
pinge on their parts.
R And
a+2 O P T I C K S.
And heilce we may underftand that Bodies
are much more rare and porous^, than is com-
monly believed. Water is nineteen times light-
er, and by confequence nineteen times rarer
than Gold ; and Gold is fo rare as very readily

and vv^ithout the leafl oppofition to tranfmit the


magnetick and eafily to admit Quick-
Effluvia,
filver into its Pores, and to let Water pafs
through it. For a concave Sphere of Gold fil-
led with Water, and folder'd up, has, upon pref-
fmg the Sphere with great force, let the Water
fqueeze through it, and ftand all over its out-
fide in multitudes of fmall Drops, like Dew,
without burfting or cracking the Body of the
Gold, as I have been inform'd by an Eye-wit-
nefs. From all which we may conclude, that

Gold has more Pores than folid parts, and by


confequence that Water has above forty times
more Pores than Parts. And he that fhall find
out an Hypothefls, by which Water may be fo
rare, and yet not be capable of compreffion by
force, may doubtlefs by the fapie Hypothefis
make Gold, and Water, and all other Bodies, as
much rarer as he pleafesj fo that Light may
find a ready pafTage through tranfparent Sub-
ftances.
The Magnet ads upon Iron through all denfe
Bodies not magnetick nor red hot,' without a-
ny diminution of its Virtue ; as for inftance,
through Gold, Silver, Lead, Glafs, Water.
The gravitating Power of the Sun is tranfmit-
ted through the vafl Bodies of the Planets with-
out any diminution, fo as to ad; upon all their
parts to their very centers with the fame Force
and
B O O K II. 243
and according to the fame Laws, as if the part
upon which it ads were not furrounded with
the Body of the Planet. .The Rays of Light,
whether they be very fmall Bodies projeded, .

or only Motion or Force propagated, are mo-


ved in right Lines ; and whenever a Ray of
Light is by any Obftacle turned out of its rcdi-
linear way, it will never return into the fame
redilinear way, unlefs perhaps by very great ac-
cident. And yet Light is tranfniittcd through
pellucid folid Bodies in right Lines to very .great
diftances. How Bodies canhave a futikient
quantity of Pores for producing thefe EtfcAs is
very difficult to conceive, but perhaps not al-
together impolTible. For the Colours of Bodies
arife from the Magnitudes of the Particles winch
refled them, as was explained above. Now if
we conceive thefe Particles of Bodks to be fo
difpofcd amongll themfelves, that the Intervals
or empty Spaceb between them may be equal in
magnitude to them all j and that tne£e i^arii-
cles maybe compufed of other Particles nmch
fmaller, which have as much empty Space be-
tween them as equals all the Magnitudes of
thefe fmaller Particles: And that in like man-
ner theie fmaller Particles are again compufed
of others much fmaller, all which together are
equal to all the Pores or empty Spaces between
them; and fo on perpetually till \ou come to
fond Particles, fuch 2.\ have no Pores or empty
Spaces within them : And if in any grofs Lody
there be, for inftance, three fuch degrees of
of which are folid this Bo-
Particles, the leaft ;

dy will have feven times more Pores than folid


R 2 Parts.
244 O P T I C K S.

Parts. But if there be four fuch degrees of


Particles, the leaft of which are folid, the Bo-
dy more Pores than folid
will have fifteen times
Parts. If there be five degrees, the Body will
have one and thirty times more Pores than folid
Parts. If fix degrees, the Body will have fixty
and three times more Pores than folid Farts. And
fo on perpetually. And there are other ways of
conceiving how Bodies may be exceeding porous.
But what is really their inward Frame is not yet
known to us.

Prop. IX.
Bodies refeB and refradf Light by o?ie and the
fame power, ^varioiijly exercijed in 'various- Cir-
cumjiances.

THIS Firft,
appears
Becaufe
by feveral
when Light
Confiderations.
goes out of
Glafs into Air, as obliquely as it can pofiibly
do. If its Incidence be made ftill more oblique,

it becomes totally refledted. For the power of


the Glafs after it has refracfled the Light as ob-
liquely as is poflible, if the Incidence be ftill

made more oblique, becomes too firong to let


any of its Rays go through, and by confequence
caufes total Reflexions. Secondly , Becaufe
Light is alternately reflected and tranfmitted
by thin Plates of Glafs for many Succeflions,
accordingly as the thicknefs of the Plate increa-
fes in an arithmetical Progreflion. For here
the thicknefs of the Glafs determines whether
that Power by which Glafs ad:s upon Light
ihall caufe it to be rcfle(5ted, or fufier it to be
tranf-
BOOK 11. 245
tranfmitted. And, Thirdly, becaufe thofe Sur-
faces of tranfparent Bodies which have the great-
eft refradling power, refled the greateft quan-
tity of Light, as was fliewn in the fir'll Propofi-
tion.

Prop. X.
If Light be fwifter in Bodies 'than in Vacuo, in
the proportion of the Sines which 7ncafure the
RefraElion of the Bodies, the Forres of the
Bodies to refcB and refrafl Light, are very
nearly proportional to the denfities of the fame
Bodies ; excepting that unBuous a?id fulphureous
Bodies refraSt more than others of this fame den-

LE T AB face of
reprefent the refrading plane Sur-
any Body, and IC a Ray incident
very obliquely upon the Body in C, fo that the

Angle ACI may be Infinitely little, and let CR


be the refracfled Ray. From a given Point B
perpendicular to the refradling Surface ered: B R
meeting with the refrading Ray C R
in R, and
if C R reprefent the Motion of the refraded
Ray, and this Motion be diftinguifh'd into two
Motions CB and BR, whereof CB is paral-
R 3
lei
246 O P T I C K S.

lei to the refracting Plane, and BR perpendi-


cular, to it: CBfhall reprefent the Motion ^o.f
the incident Ray, and B R
the Motion genera-
ted by the Reiradtion, as Opticians have of late
explain'd.
Now if any Body or Thing, in moving through
any Space of a given breadth terminated on
both fides by two parallel Planes, be urged for-
ward in all parts of that Space by Forces tend-
ing direftly forwards towards the laft Plane, and
before its Incidence on the firil Plane, had no
Motion towards it, -or but an infinitely little
one J and if tlie Forces in all parts of that Space,
between the Planes, be at equal diftances from
the Planes equal to one another, but at feveral
diftances be bigger or lefs in any given Propor-
tion, the Motion generated by the Forces in
the whole pafiage of the Body or thing through
that Space fliall be in a fubduplicate Proportion
of the Forces, as Mathematicians will eafily
underftand. And therefore, if the Space of adti-
vity of the refrafting Superficies of the Body
be confider'd as fuch a Space, the Motion of
the Ray generated by the refracting Force of
the Body, during its pafiage through that Space,
that is, the Motion B R, muft be in fubdupli-
cate Proportion of that refracting Force. I fay
therefore, that the Square of the Line B R, and
by confequence the refracting Force of the Bo-
dy, is very nearly as the denfity of the fame Bo-
dy. For this will appear by the following Ta-
ble, wherein the Proportion of the Sines which
meafure the Refracftions of feveral Bodies, the
Square of B R, fuppofing C B an unite, the Den-
fities
BOOK II. 247
fitiesof the Bodies eftimated by their Specifick
Gravities, and their Refradtive Power in refpea
of their Denfities are fet down in feveral Co-
lumns.
248 O P T I C K S.

by Aftronomers. For, if Light pafs through many


refradling Subftances or Mediums gradually denfer
and denfer, and terminated with parallel Surfaces,
the Sum of all the Refradions will be equal to
the iingle Refraction which it would have fuirer'd
in paffing immediately out of the firft Medium
into the lafl. And this holds true, though the
Number of the refradling Subftances be increafed
to Infinity, and the Diftances from one another
as much decreafed, fo that the Light may be
refraded in every Point of its Paflage, and by
continual Refradions bent into a Curve-Line.
And therefore the whole Refradlion of Light
in paffing through the Atmofphere from the
higheft and rareft Part thereof down to the loweft
and denfeil Part, mufl be equal to the Re-
fradion which it would fuffer in paffing at
like Obliquity out of a Vacuum immediately
into Air oi equal Denfity with that in the loweft
Part of the Atmofphere.
Now, although a Pfeudo-Topaz, a Selenitis,
Rock Cryftal, Ifland Cryftal, Vulgar Glafs
(that is. Sand melted together) 'and Glafs of
Antimony, which are terreftrial ftony alcalizate
Concretes, and Air which probably arifes from
ftich Subftances by Fermentation, be Subftances
very differing from one another in Denfity, yet
by this Table, they have their refradive Powers
almoft in the fame Proportion to one another
as their Denfities are, excepting that the Re-
fradion of that ftrange Subftance, Ifland Cryftal
is a little bigger than the reft. And parti-
cularly Air, which is 3500 Times rarer than
the Pfeudo-Topaz, and 4.400 Times rarer than
a Glafs
BOOK IL 249
Glafs of Antimony; and 2000 Times rarer than
the Seleniti8, Glafs vulgar, or Cryflal of the
Rock, has notwithftanding its rarity the fame re-
fradive Power in refped: of its Denfity which
thofe very denfe Subftances have in refped of
theirs, excepting fo far as thofe differ from one
another.
Again, the Refraction of Camphire, Oil Olive,
Linfeed Oil, Spirit of Turpentine and Amber,
which are fat fulphureous unduous Bodies, and
a Diamond, which probably is an unduous Sub-
ftance coagulated, have their refradive Powers in
Proportion to one another as their Denlities with-
out any confiderable Variation. But the re-
fradive Powers of thefe undluous Subftances are
two or three Times greater in refpedt of their
Denfities than the refradive Powers of the former
5ubftances in refped of theirs.
Water has a refradive Power in a middle de-
gree between thofe two forts of Subflances,
and probably is of a middle nature. For out
of grow all vegetable and animal Subftances,
it

which confift as well of fulphureous fat and in-


flamable Parts, as of earthy lean and alcalizate
ones.
Salts and Vitriols have refradive Powers in a
middle degree between thofe of earthy Subflances
and Water, and accordingly are compofed of
thofe two forts of Subflances. For by dill illation
and redification of their Spirits *a great Part of
them goes into Water, and a great Part remains
behind in the form of a dry fix'd Earth capable
of Vitrification.

Spirit
250 O P T I C K S.

Spirit of Wine Power in a


has a refradiv^e
middle degree between thofe of Water and oily
Subftances, and accordingly feems to be compo-
fed of both, united by Fern^.entation; the Water,
by means of fome faline Spirits with which 'tis
impregnated, dillolving the Oil, and volatizing
it by the Ad;ion. For Spirit of Wine is inflama-
blc by means of its oily Parts, and being diftilled
often from Salt of Tartar,, grow by every diftil-
lation more and more aqueous and phlegma-
tick. And Chymiils obferve, that Vegetables
(as Lavender, Rue, Marjoram, (^f. ) diftilled ^^r
fe^ before fermentation yield Oils without any
burning Spirits, but after fermentation yield ar-
dent Spirits without Oils W^hich fliews, that
:

their Oil is by fermentation converted into Spi-


rit. They find alfo, that if Oils be poured in a
fmall quantity upon fermentating Vegetables,
they diftil over after fermentation in the form
of Spirits*
So then, by the foregoing Table, all Bodies
feem to have their retradive Powers propor-
tional to their Denfities, (or vei'y nearly;) ex-
cepting fo far as they partake more or lefs of
iulphureous oily Particles, and thereby have their
refradiive Power made greater or lefs. Whence
it feems rational to attribute the refrad-ive Power
of all Bodies chiefly, if not wholly, to the ful-
phureous Parts with which they abound. For
it's Bodies aJDOund more or lefs
probable that all
with Sulphurs. And
as Light congregated by a
Burning-glafs ads moft upon fulphureous Bo-
dies, to turn them into Fire and Flame ; fo,
fince all Adion is mutual. Sulphurs ought to a6t
moft
BOOK II. 251
moil upon Light. For that the action between
Light and Bodies mutual, may appear from
is

this Confideration That the denfeil Bodies


;

which rtfrad: and reflect Light moft Wrongly,


grow hotteft in the Summer Sun, by the adtion
of the refradcd or refied:ed Light.
I have hitherto explain'd the power of Bo-
dies to reflect and refradt, and (liew'd, that thin
tranfparent Plates, Fibres, and Particles, do, ac-
cording to their feveral thickneifes and dcnli-
ties, refled: feveral forts of Ravs, and thereby
appear of feveral Colours; and by confecjuence
that nothing more is requifitc for producing all
the Colours of natural Bodies, than the feveral
fizes and denfities of their tranfparent Particles.
But whence it is that thefe Plates, Fibres, and
Particles, do, according to their feveral thick-
nelTes and denfities, refledt feveral forts of kays,
I have not yet explain'd. To give fome infight
into this matter, and make way for underftand-
ing the next part of this Book, I fhall conclude
this part with a few more Proportions. Thofe
which preceded refpeft the nature of Bodies,
thefe the nature of Light For both mufl be
:

underftood, before the reafon of their Adlions


upon one another can be known. And becaufe
the laft Propofition depended upon the velocity
of Light, I will begin with a Propofition of that
kind.

Prop.
252 O P T I C K S.

Prop. XL
Light is propagated from luminous Bodies in
time, and Jpends about feven or eight Mi-
nutes of an Hour in paffing from the Sun to the
Earth,

'l
^ HIS
was (obferved firfl by Roemer, and
-*- then by others, by means of the Eclipfes of
the Satellites of Jupiter. For thefe Eclipfes,
when the Earth is between the Sun and Jupiter,
happen about itvtn. or eight Minutes fooner
than they ought to do by the Tables, and when
the Earth is beyond the Sun they happen about
feven or eight Minutes later than they ought to
do; the reafon bemg, that the Light of the
Satelliteshas farther to go in the latter cafe
than* in the former by the Diameter of
the Earth's OrbiL Some inequalities of time
may arife from the Excentricities of the Orbs of
the Satellites ; but thofe cannot anfwer in all the
Satellites, and at all times to the Poiition and
Diftance of the Earth from the Sun. The mean
motions of Jupiter s Satellites is alfo fwifter in
his defcent from his Aphelium to his Perihelium,
than in his afcent in the other half of his Orb.
But this inequality ha^ no refpcd: to the pofition
of the Earth, and in the three interior Satellites
5s infenfible, as I find by computation from the
Theory of their Gravity.

Prop.
)

BOOK IL 253

Prop. XII.

Every Ray of Light in its pajfagc through any


refraBing Surface is put into a certain trajijicnt
Conjlitution or State ^ which in the progrefs
of the Ray returns, at equal Intervals^ and
difpofes the Ray at every return to be eafily
tranfmitted through next refraSfitjg Sur-
the
'

face, and betiveen the returns to be eafdy refieSied


by it.

TH I S is manifeil by the 5th, 9th, 12th,


and 15th jObfervations. For by thofe Ob-
fervations it appears that one and the fame
,

fort of Rays at equal Angles of Incidence on a-


ny thin tranfparent Plate, is alternately refledled
and tranfmitted for many Succeffions according-
ly as the thicknefs of the Plate increafes in
arithmetical Progreffion of the Numbers, o,
I, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, ^c. fo that if the firft
Reflexion ( that which makes the firfl: or inner-
moft of the Rings of Colours there defcribed
be made at the thicknefs i, the Rays fliall be
tranfmitted at the thicknelTes o, 2, 4, 6, 8, lo,
12, ^c. and thereby make the central Spot and
Rings of Light, which appear by tranfmillion,
and be refledied at the thicknefs i, 3, ^, 7, o,
I I, ^c. and thereby make the Rings which
appear by Reflexion. And- this alternate Re*-
flexion and TranfmilTion, as I gather by the 24th
Obfervation, continues for above an hundred
viciflitudes, and by the Obfervations in the next
part of this Book, for many thoufands, being
propagated from one Surface of a Glafs Plate to
the
254 O P T I C K S.

the other, though the thicknefs of the Plate be


a quarter of an Inch or above : So that this al-
ternation feems to be propagated from every
refrading Surface to all diflances w^ithout end or
limitation.
This alternate Reflexion and Refradtion de-
pends on both the Surfaces of every thin Plate,
becaufe it depends on their diflance. By tlie
21 ft Obfervation, if either Surface of a thin
Pjate of Miifcovy Glafs be wetted, the Colours
caufed by the alternate Reflexion and Refraction
grow faint, and therefore it depends on them
both.
It is therefore performed at the fecond Surface;
for if it were perform'd at the firft, before the
Rays arrive at the fecond, it would not depend
on the fecond.
It is alfo influenced by fome action or difpo-
fition,propagated from the firft to the fecond,
becaufe other wife at the fecond it v^ould not
depend on the firft. And this adion or difpo-
fition, in its propagation, intermits and returns
by equal Intervals, becaufe in all its progrefs it

inclines the Ray at one diftance from the- firft

Surface to be reflefted by the fecond, ano-


at
ther to be tranfmitted by it, and that by equal
Intervals for innumerable viciflitudes. And be-
caufe the Ray is difpofed to Reflexion at the
diliances i, 3, 5, 7, 9, ^c. and to Tranfmiflion

at the diftances o, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, Gfr. (for its


tranfmillion through the firft Surface, is at the
diftance o, and it is tranfmitted tiirough both
together, if their diftance be infinitely little or

much lefs than i ) the difpofition to be tranf-


I mit.e4
BOOK 11.
255
mitted at the diftances 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, &c. is to be
accounted a return of the lame difpofition which
the Ray firft had at the diftance o, that is at its
tranfmiffion through the firft refradling Surface.
All which is the thing I would prove.
What kind of adion or difpofition this is;
Whether it confifts in a. circulating or a vibra-
ting motion of -the Ray, or of the Medium, or
fomething do not here enquire. Thofe
elfe, I

that are averfe from alTenting to any new Dif-


coveries, but fuch as they can- explain by an Hy-
pothecs, may for the prefent fuppofe, that as
Stones by falling upon Water put the Watef in-
to an undulating Motion, and all Bodies by
percufTion excite vibrations in the Air; fo the
Rays of Light, by impinging on any refracting
or reflecfting Surface , excite vibrations in the
refrafting or refiecfting Medium or Subftance,
and by exciting them agitate the folid parts of
the refrad:ing or reflecting Body, and by agita-
ting them caufe the Body orto grow warm
hot; that the vibrations thus excited are pro-
pagated in the refradting or reflecfting Medium
or Subftance, much after tlie manner that vibra-
tions arepropagated in the Air for caufing
Sound, and move fafter than the Rays fo as to
overtake thenij and that when any Ray is in
that part of the vibration which confpires with
its Motion, it eafily breaks through a refrading

Surface, but when it is in the contrary part of


the vibration which impedes its Motion, it is
eafily reflected ; and, by confequence, that e-
very Ray is fucceftively difpofed to be eafily re-
flected, or eafliy tranfmitted, by every vibration
which
256 O P T I C K S.

which overtakes it. But whether this Hypothe-


lis be true or falfe I do not here conlider. I con-
tent my with the bare Difcovery, that the
felf
Rays of Light are by fome caufe or other alter-
nately difpofed to be refled:ed or refraded for
many viciffitudes.

DEFINITION.
I'he returns of the difpofition of any Ray to be
refeBed I will call its Fits of eafy Reflexion,
and thofe of its difpoftion to be tranfmitted its
Fits of eafy Tranfmiffion, and the [pace it
pa[fes between every return and the next re-
tunty the Interval of its Fits.

Prop. XIII,
'The reafon why
the Surfaces of all thick tranf-
farent Bodies refledi part of the Light inci^
dent on thein^ and refraSi the reji ^ isy that
fome Rays at their Incidence are in Fits of eafy
Reflexion^ a7id others in Fits of eafy Tranf-
mifjion.

np HIS may be
gather'd from the 24th Ob-
-*- where the Light reflected by
fervation,
thin Plates of Kv: and Glafs, which to the naked
Eye appear'd evenly white all over the Plate, did
through a Prifm appear waved with many Suc-
ceffions of Light and Darknefs made by alter-
nate Fits of eafy Reflexion and eafy Tranfmiffi-
on, the Prifm fevering and difl:inguifliing the
Waves of which the white refledled Light was
compofed, as was explain' d above.
And
BOOK II; 2^7
And hence Light is in Fits of cafy Reflexion
and eafy Tranfmiflion, before its Incidence on
tranfparent Bodies. And probably it is put in-
to fuch Fits at its firfl emilTion from luminous
Bodies, and continues in them during all its pro-
grefs. For thefe Fits are of a lafting naturcj as
will appear by the next part of this Book.
In this Proportion I fuppofe the tranfparent
Bodies to be thick becaufc if the thicknefs of
j

the Body be much than the Interval of the


lefs

Fits of eafy Reflexion and Tranfmitiion of the


Rays, the Body lofeth its refleclling power. For
if the Rays, which at their entering into the'
Body are put into Fits of eafy Tranfmiflion, ar-
tive at the farthefl Surface of the Body before
they be out of thofe Fits, they muil: be tranfmit-
ted. And this is the reafon why Bubbles' of
Water lofe their refledling power when they
grow very thin ; and why all opake Bodies, when
reduced into very fmall parts, become tranfpa^
rent.

Prop. XIV.
'Thofe Surfaces cf tranfparent Bodies^ which if the
Ray be in a Fit of 'Refratlicn do rfra6i it vicf:
fli-ongly^ if the Ray be in a Fit of Rcfiexion do
refeB it 7nofi eafdy.

FO R we fhewed above, in Frop. 8. that thai


caufe of Reflexion is not the impinging of
Light on the folid impervious parts of Bodies^
but fome other power by which thofe folid
parts ad; on Light at a diilance. fhewedWe
alio in Frop, 9. that Bodies refled: and refrad:
S Lighc
258 O P T I C K S.

Light by one and the fame power, varloufly ex-


ercifed in various circumftances; and in Prop. i.
that the moft ftrongly refracting Surfaces refledt
the moft Light: All which compared together
evince and ratify both this and the laft Propo-
rtion.

Prop. XV.
In any one and the fame fort of Rays, emerging in
any Angle out of any refraSling Surface into one
and the fame Medium, the hitervalaf the fol-
lowing Fits of eafy Refexion and 'T^ranfmifjion
are either accurately or very nearly, as the ReB-
angle of the Secaiit of the Angle of RefraSlion,
and of the Secant of another Angle, whofe Sine
is 106 arithmetical mean Rroporti-
the firfi of
onals, between the Sines of Incidence and Refra-
Bion, countedfrom the Si?2e of RefraBion.

T^ H I S is manifefl by the 7th and 19th Obfcr-


••" vations.

Prop.
B O O K n. 259

Prop. XVI.
Lt feveral of Rays e-merging in equal Anglci.
forts
out of any refradiing Surface into the fame Me^
dium^ the Litervals of the foiio'wing hits of eafy
'Reflexion and eafy T'ranfniJJion are either accu-
rately, or very nearly, as the Cube-Roots of the
Squares of the lengths of a Chord, which fownd
the Notes in an Eight, fol, la, fa, fol, la, mi,
fa, fol, ivith all their imter mediate degrees an-

fuoering to the Colours of thofe Rays, accordtfg to


the Analogy defcrihed in the feventh Experiment
of the fecond Part of theflrft Book.

np H I S manifeft
is by the 13th and 14th Ob-
* fervations.
Prop. XVII.
Jf Rays of anyfort pafs perpendicularly ifito feve^
ral Mediums, the hitcrvcls of the Fits cf eafy
Reflexion and l^ranfmiflion in any one Medium,
are to thofe Intervals in any other, as the Sine of
Incidence to the Sine of RefraBion, wlmi the
Rays pafs out of the flrfl of thofe ti^o Mediums
into the fecond.

T^ H I S is manifeft by the loth Obferva-


-^ tion.

S 2 Prop,
26o O P T I C K S.

Prop. XVIII.
If the Rays nvhich paint the Colour in the Confine
of yellow and orange pafs perpejidicularly out of
any Medium into Air, the Intervals of their Fits

of eafy Reflexion are the th part of an Inch,

And of the fa?ne length are the Intervals of their


Fits of eafy I^ranfmifjion,
'

^ I ^ HISmanifeft by the 6th Obfervation.


is
-*" From thefe Propofitions it is eafy to col-
led: the Intervals of the Fits of eafy Reflexion
and eafy Tranfmiffion of any fort of Rays refra-
ined in any Angle into any Medium and j thence
to know, whether the Rays fhall be reflected, or
tranfmitted at their fubfequent Incidence upon
any other pellucid Medium. Which thing, be-
ing ufeful for underflanding the next part of this
Book, was here to be fet down. And for the
fame reafon I add the two following Propofi-
tions.

Prop,
BOOK II. 261

Prop. XIX.
If any fort of Rays faUi7ig on the polite Surface
of any pellucid Medium be refeBed back^ the Fits
of eafy Refexion^ which they have at the point of
Refexion, fall fill continue to return j a?jd the
Returns fiall be at diftances from the point of
Refexicn in the arithmetical prcgrejfon of the
'Numbers 7.^ 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, &c. and between
thefe Fits the Rays pall be in Fits of eafy 7'rafif
mijjion.

"P O R of eafy Reflexion and


fiRce the Fits
•*- Qafy TranfmilTion are of a returning na-
ture, there is no reafoa why thefe Fits, which
continued till the Ray arrived at the reflecting
Medium, and there inclined the Ray to Refle-
xion, ihould there ceafe. And if the Ray at the
point of Reflexion was in a Fit of eafy Reflexion,
the progreflion of the diftances of thefe Fits
from that point mufl: begin from o, and fo be of
the Numbers o, 2, 4, 6, 8, &c. And therefore
the progreffion of the dillances of the interme-
diate Fits of eafy Tranfmiflion, reckon'd from
the fame point, mufl be in the progreflion of
the odd Numbers i, 3, 5, 7, 9, ^c. contrary
to what happens when the Fits are propagated
from points of Refradion.

S3 Prop,
;

262 O P T I C K S.

Prop. XX.
^he Intervals of the Fits of eafy Reflexion and,
eafy T'ranfmifjion^ propagated from points of
KeHexion into afiy Medium^ are equal to the
Intervals of the like Fits^ which the fame Rays
would ba-veyif refraBed into the fame Medium
in Angles of Rejraciion equal to their Angles of
Reflexion,

'P O R when Light is refleded by the fecond


"- Surface of thin Plates, it goes out after-
wards fieely at the firft Surface to make the
Rin^s of Colours which appear by Reflexion j
and, by the freedom of its egrefs, makes the
Colours of thefe Rings more vivid and ftrong
than thofe which appear on the other fide of
the Plates by the tranfmitted Light. The re-
fieded Rays are therefore in Fits of eafy Tranf-
miffion at their egrefs; v/hich would not always
happen, if the Intervals of the Fits within the
Plate after Reflexion were not equal, both in
kngth and number, to their Intervals before it.

And this confirms alfo the proportions fet down


in the former Propofition. For if the Rays
both in going in and out at the firfh Surface be
in Fits of eafy Tranfmiffion, and the Intervals
and Numbers of thofe Fits between the firft
and fecond Surface, before and after Reflexion,
be equal, the diftances of the Fits of eafy
Tranfmiflion from either Surface, muft be in
the fame prpgreffion after Reflexion as before
that is, from the firft Surface which tranfmit-
ted them, in the progreffion of the even Num-.
bers
B O O K IL 263
bers o, 2, 4, 6, 8, (^c. and from the fecond
which refledled them, in that of the odd Num-
bers I, 3, 5, 7, &c. But thefe two Propofi-
tions will become much more evident by the
Obfervations in the following part of this
Book.

S4 THE
THE
SECOND BOOK
O F

OPTICKS
PART IV.

Qbfervations concerning the Reflexions and


Colour^ of thick tranfparent polij^d
Platzs.

HERE Is no Glafs or Speculum how


well foever polifliedjbut, befides the
Light which it refradts or refledls re-,

way irregularly
gularlyj fcatters every
a faint Light, by means of which the
polifh'd Surface, v/hen illuminated in a dark room
by
BOOK II. 265
by a beam of the Sun's Light, may be eafily feen
in all pofitions of the Eye. There are certain
Phaenomena of this fcatter'd Light, which when
I firft obferved them, feem'd very flrange and
furprizing to me. My Obfervations were as fol-
lows.
Obf. I. The Sun fhining into ray darkened
Chamber through a hole one third of an Inch
wide, riet the intromitted beam of Light fall
perpendicularly upon a Glafs Speculum ground
concave on one fide and convex on the other,
to a Sphere of five Feet and eleven Inches Ra-
dius, and Quick-filver'd over on the convex
fide. And holding a white opake Chart, or a
Quire of Paper at the center of the Spheres to
which the Speculum was ground, that is, at the
diftance of about live Feet and eleven Inches
from the Speculum, in fuch manner, that the
beam ©f Light might pafs through a little hole
made in the middle of the Chart to the Specu-
lum, and thence be reflected back to the fime
hole: I obferved upon the Chart four or five
concentric Irifes or Rings of Colours, like Rain-
bows, encorapaffing the hole much after the
manner that thofe, which in the fourth and fol-
lowing Obfervations of the firft part of this third
Book appear'd between the Objedl-glaiTes, en-
compafled the black Spot, but yet larger and
fainter than thofe. Thefe Rings as they grew
larger and larger became diluter and fainter, fo
that the fifth was fcarce vifible. Yet fome-
times, when the Sun llione very clear, there
appear'd faint Lineaments of a fixth and fe-
vgnth. If the diftance of the Chart from the
S,pecu-»
266 O P T I C K S.

Speculum was much greater or much lefs than


that of fix Feet, the Rings became dilute and
vaniQi'd. And if the diftance of the Speculum
from the Window was much greater than that
of fix Feet, the refledied beam of Light would
be fo broad at the diftance of fix Feet from the
.

Speculum where the Rings appear'd, as to ob-


fcure one or two of the innermoft Rings. And
therefore I ufually placed the Speculum at a-
bout fix Feet from the Window fo that its
j

Focus might there fall in with the center of its


concavity at the Rings upon the Chart. And
this Pofiiure is always to be underfi:ood in the
following Obfervations where no other is ex-
prefs'd.
Obf. 2. The Colours of thefe Rain-bows fuc-
ceeded one another from the center outwards,
in the fame form and order with thofe which
were made in the ninth Obfervation of the firft
Part of this Book by Light not refledled, but
tranfmitted through the two Objedi-glafiTes. For,
firfi:, there was in their common center a white

round Spot of faint Light, fomething broader


than the refleded beam of Light, which beam
fometimes fell upon the middle of the Spot, and
fometimes by a little inclination of the Specu-
lum receded from the middle, and left the Spot
white to the center.
This white Spot was immediately encompaf-
fed with a dark grey or rufleti and that dark grey
with the Colours of the firfi: Iris; which Colours
on the infide next the dark grey were a little
violet and indigo, and next to that a blue, which
on the outfide grew pale, and then fucceeded a
little
BOOK 11. 267
little greenifh yellow, and after that a brighter
yellow, and then on the outward edge of the
Iris a red which on the outfide inclined to pur-
ple.
This was immediately encompaffed with a
Iris

fecond, whofe Colours were in order from the in-


fide outwards, purple, blue, green, "yellow, light
red, a red mix'd with purple.
Then immediately foUow'd the Colours of the
third Iris, which were in order outwards a green
inclining to purple, a good green, and a red more
bright than that of the former Iris.
The fourth and fifth Iris feem'd of a bluifli
green within, and red without, but fo faintly
that it was difficult to difcern the Colours.

Obf. 3. Meafuring the Diameters of thefe


Rings upon the Chart as accurately as I could,
I found them alfo in the fame proportion to
one another with the Rings made by Light tranf-
mitted through the two Objed-glafies. For
the Diameters of the four iirfl of the brjf^ht
Rings meafured between the brightefl parts of
their Orbits, at the diftance of fix Feet from the
Speculum were 144, 2I, 2— 3^ Inches, whofe
Squares are in arithmetical progreffion of the
numbers i, 2, 3, 4. If the white circular Spot
in the middle be reckon'd amongfl the Rings,
and its central Light, where it fsems to be n:oil
luminous, be put equipollent to an infinitely
little Ring ; the Squares of the Diameters of the

Rings will be in the progrefiion o, i, 2, 3, 4,


&c. I meafured alfo the Diameters of the dark
Circles between thefe luminous ones, and found
their Squares in the progreflion of the num-
bers
268 O P T I C K S.^
bers T, It, 2^, 3^, '&c. the Diameters of the
firftfour at the diftance of fix Feetsfrom the
Speculum, being i.?^, 2tV, 2t, 3tt Iiiches. If
the diftance of the Chart from the Speculum
was increafed or diminilhed, the Diameters of
the Circles were increafed or diminifhed pro-
portionally.
Obf. ^. By the analogy between thefe Rings
and thofe defcribed in the Obfervations of the
firft Part of this Book, I fufpedted that there

were many more of them which fpread into


one another, and by interfering mix'd their Co-
lours, and diluted one another fo that they could
not be feen apart. I viewed them therefore
through a Prifm, as I did thofe in the 24th Ob-
fervation of the firft Part of this Book. And
when the Prifm was fo placed as by refradling
the Light of their mix'd Colours to feparate
them, and diftinguilh the Rings from one ano-
ther, as it did thofe in that Obfervation, I could
then fee them than before, and eafily
diftind:er
number eight or nine of them, and fometimes
twelve or thirteen. And had not their Light
been fo very faint, I queftion not but that I might
have feen many more.
Ohf. 5. Placing a Prifm at the Window to re-
fradl the intromitted beam of Light, and caft
the oblong Speftrum of Colours on the Specu-
lum I covered the Speculum with a black Pa-
:

per which had in the middle of it a hole to let


any one of the Colours pafs through to the Spe-
culum, whilft the reft were intercepted by
the Paper. And now I found Rings of that Co-
lour only which fell upon the Speculum. If
the
BOOK II. 269
the Speculum was illuminated with red, the
Rings were totally red with dark Intervals, if
with blue they were totally blue,and fo of the
other Colours. And when they v/ere illumi-
nated wi'th any one Colour, the Squares of their
Diameters meafured between their moil lumi-
nous Parts, were in the arithmetical Progreilion
of the Numbers, o, i, 2, 3, 4, and the Squares
of the Diameters of their dark Intervals in the
Progreffion of the intermediate Numbers j, It,
2f, 33. But if the Colour was varied, they va-
ried their Magnitude. In the red they were lar-
geft, in the indigo and violet leaft, and in the
intermediate Colours yellow, green, and blue,
they were of feveral intermediate Bigneffes an-
fwering to the Colour, that is, greater in yel-
low than ia green, and greater in green than in
blue. And iicnce I knew, that when the Spe-
culum was illuminated with white Light, the
red and yellow on the outlide of the Rings were
produced by the hoA refrangible Rays, and the
blue and violet by the moir refrangible, and that
the Colours of each Ring fpread into the Co-
lours of the neighbouring Rings on either fide,
after the manner explain'd in the firft and fe-
cond Part of this Book, and by mixing diluted
one another fo tliat they could not be diflin-
guifli'd, unlefs near the Center where they were
leaft mix'd. For in this Obfervation I could
fee the Rings more diftindly, and to a greater
Number than before, being able in the yellow
Light to number eight or nine of them, be-
iides a faint ihadow of a tenth. To fatisfy my
felf how much th^ Colours of the feveral Rings
fpread
270 O P T I C K S.

fpread Into one another, I meafured the Dia-


meters of the fecond and third Rings, and found
them when made by the Confine of the red and
orange to? be to the fame Diameters when made
by the Confine of blue and indigo, as 9 to 8,
or thereabouts. For it was hard to determine
this Proportion accurately. Alfo the Circles
made by the red, yellow, and green,
fuccefiively
differ'd more from one another than thofe made
fuccefTively by the green, blue, and indigo. For
the Circle made by the violet was too dark to
be feen. To carry on the Computation, let us
therefore fuppofe that the Differences of the
Diameters of the Circles made by the outmoft
red, the Confine of red and orange, the Confine
of orange and yellow, the Confine of yellow
and green, the Confine of green and blue, the
Confine of blue and indigo, the Confine of in-
digo and violet, and outmoft violet, are in pro-
portion as the Differences of the Lengths of a
Monochord which found the Tones in an Eight j
jbl, la^ fa, Jol, la, mi, fa, fol, , that is, as the
Numbers ir, tV, tV, t'-, tV, tV> ^' ^"d if the
Diameter of the Circle made by the Confine of
red and orange be 9 A, and that of the Circle
made by the Confine of blue and indigo be 8 A
as above their difference 9 A
; 8 A will be —
to the difference of the Diameters of the Cir-
cles made by the outmoft red, and by the Con-
fine of red and orange, as tV -1- tt A- rV -^ tV ^o \,
that is as tV to \, or 8 to 3, and to the diffe-
rence of the Circles m.ade by the outmoft vio-
let, and by the Confine of blue and indigo, as

TT 4- TT -1- tV 4- vT to rr 4- iV, that is, as -iy to tV>


or
BOOK IL 271
or as 16 to 5. And therefore thefe differences
will be g A and /g A. the firft to 9 A and
Add
fubdud the lafi: from 8 A, and you will have the
Diameters of the Circles made by the leafl and

moft refrangible Rays ''i. A and -^ A. Thefe di-

ameters are therefore to one another as 75 to


61^ or 50 to 41, and their Squares as 2500 to
168 1, that is, as 3 to 2 very nearly. Which
proportion differs not much from the proportion
of the Diameters of the Circles made by the
outmoft red and outm-oft violet, in the 13 th Ob-
fervation of the firft part of this Book.
Ol?f. 6. Placing my Eye where thefe Rings
appear'd plaineft, I faw the Speculum tinged all
over with Waves of Colours, (red, yellov/, green,
blue J ) like thofe which in the Obfervations of
the firft part of this Book appeared between
the Obje(3:-glaffes, and upon Bubbles of Water,
but much largei". And after the manner of thofe,
they were of various magnitudes in various Po-
litions of the Eye, fwellin-^ and ihrinking as I
moved my Eye this way and that way. They
were formed like Arcs of ccnccntrick Circles, as
thofe were 5 and v/hen my Eye was over againft
the center of the concavity of tho Speculum, (that
is, 5 Feet and 10 Inches diftant from the Specu-

lum,) their common center was in a right Line


with that center of concavity, and with the
hole in the Window. But m other poftures of
my Eye their center had other pofitions. They
appear'd by the Light of tlie Clouds propagated
to the Speculum through the hole in the Win-
dow J and when the Sun {hone through that
2 hole
272 O P T I C K S.

hole upon the Speculum, his Light upon it was


of the Colour of the Ring whereon it fell, but by
its fplendor obfcured the Rings made by the Light

of the Clouds, unlefs when the Speculum was


removed to' a great diftance from the Window,
fo that his Light upon it might be broad and faint.
By varying the polition of my Eye, and moving
it nearer to or farther from the direct beam of the

Sun's Light, the Colour of the Sun's refleded


Light conflantly varied upon the Speculum, as it
did upon my Eye, the fame Colour always ap-
pearing to a By-ftander upon my Eye which to
me appear'd upon the Speculum. And thence I
knew that the Rings of Colours upon the Chart
were made by thefe refledled Colours, propagated
thither from the Speculum in feveral Angles, and
that their produdion depended not upon the ter-
mination of Light and Shadow.
Obf. J. By the Analogy of all thefe Pheno-
mena with thofe of the like Rings of Colours
defcribed in the f rft part of this Book, it feem-
ed to me that thefe Colours were produced by
this thick Plate of Glafs, much after the manner
that thofe were produced by very thin Plates.
For, upon trial, I found that if the Quick-fil-
ver were rubb'd off from the backfide of the
Speculum, the Glafs alone would caufe the
fame Rings of Colours, but much more faint
than before j and therefore the Phaenomenon
depends not upon the Quick-lilver, unlefs fo far
as the Quick-hlver by increaiing the Reflexion
of the backfide of the Glafs increafes the Light
of the Rings of Colours. I found alfo that a
Speculum of Metal without Glafs made fome
Years
BOOK II. 273
Years fince for optical ufes, and very well
wrought, produced none of thofe Rings j and
thence I underfbood that thefe Rings arifc not
from one fpecular Surface alone, but d'epend
upon the two Surfaces of the Plate of Glafs
whereof the Speculum was made, and upon the
thicknefs of the Glafs between them. For
as in the 7th and 19th Obfervations of the firft
part of this Book a "thin Plate of Air, Water,
or Glafs of an even thicknefs appeared of one
Colour when the Rays were perpendicular to
it, of another v/hen they were a little oblique,

of another v/hen more oblique, of another when


ftill more oblique, and foon y fo here, in the
lixth Obfervation, the Light which emerged
out of the Glafs in feveral Obliquities,- made tlie
Glafs appear of feveral Colours, and being pro-
pagated in thofe Obliquities to the Chart, tiierc
painted Rings of thofe Colours. And as the
reafon why a thin Plate appeared of feveral Co-
lours in feveral Obliquities of the Rays, v/as,
that the Rays of one and the fame fort are re-
fleded by the thin Plate at one obliquity and
tranfmitted at another, and thofe of other forts
tranfmitted where thefe are refleded, and re-
flected where thefe are So the
tranfmitted :

reafon why .the thick Plate of Glafs whereof


the Speculum was made did appear of various
Colours in various Obliquities, and in thofe
Obliquities propagated thofe Colours to the
,

Chart, was, that the Rays of one and the


fame fort did at one Obliquity emerge out
of the Glafs, at another did not emerge, but
were refleded back towards the Quick-filver
T . by
t74 O P T I C K S.

by the hither Surface of the Glafs, and according-


ly as the Obliquity became greater and greater,
emerged and were refiedted alternately for ma-
ny Succeffignsj and that in one and the fame
Obliquity the Rays of one fort were refled:ed,
and thofe of another tranfmitted. This is ma-
nifeft by the fifth Obfervation of this part of this
Book. For in that Obfervation, when the Spe-
culum was illuminated by any one of the prif-
matick Colours, that Light made many Rings
of the fame Colour upon the Chart with dark
Intervals, and therefore at its emergence out of
the Speculum was alternately tranfmitted and
not tranfmitted from the Speculum to the Chart
for many SuccefTions, according to the various
Obliquities of its Emergence. And when the
Colour caft on the Speculum by the Prifm was
varied, the Rings became of the Colour cafl on
it, and varied their bignefs with their Colour,
and therefore the Light was now alternately
tranfmitted and not tranfmitted from the Spe-
culum to the Chart at other Obliquitiss than
before. It feemed to me therefore that thefe
Rings were of one and the fame original with
thofe of thin Plates, but yet with this difference,
that thofe of thin Plates are made by the alter-
nate Reflexions and Tranfmiffions of the Rays
at the fecond Surface of the Plate, after one paf-
fage through itj but here the Rays go twice
through the Plate before they are alternately re-
ileded and tranfmitted. Firft, they go through
it from the firfi: Surface to the Quick-filver, and

then return through it from the Quick-filver


to the firil Surface, and there are either tranf-
mitted
BOOK II.
275
micted to the Chart or refledled back to the
Quick-filver, accordingly as they are in their
Fits of eafy Reflexion or Tranfmiffion when
they arrive at that Surface. For the Intervals
of the Fits of the Rays which fall perpendicu-
larly on the Speculum,, and are reiledled back
in the fame perpendicular Lines, by rcafon" of
the equality of tbefe Angles and Lines, are of
the fame length and number within the Glafs
after Reflexion as before, by the 19th Propofl-
tion of the third part of this Book. And there-
fore fince all the Rays that enter through the
iirll: Surface are in their Fits of eafy Tranfmif-

fion at their entrance, and as many of thefe as


are refledted by the fecond are in their Fits of
eafy Reflexion there, all thefe mufl: be again in
their Fits of eafy Tranfmiffion at their return
to the firil, and by confequence there go Out
of the Glafs to the Chart, and form upon it the
white Spot of Light in the center of the Rings.
For the reafon holds good in all forts of Rays,
and therefore all forts mufl go out promifcu-
oufly to that Spot, and by their mixture caufe "

it to be white. But the Intervals of the Fits of


thofe Rays which are reflected more obliquely
than they enter, mull: be greater after Reflexion
than before, by the 15th and 20th Propcfitlons.
And thence it may happen that the Rays at their
return to the firli Surface, may in certain Ob-
liquitiesbe in Fits of eafy Reflexion, and return
back to the Qu]ck-f:!ver, and in other interme-
diate Obliquities be again in Fits of eafy Tranf-
miffion, and fo go out to the Chart, and paint
on it the Rings of Colours about the white Spot.
T 2 And
276 O P T I C K S.

And becaufe the Intervals of the Fits at equal


obliquities are greater and fewer in the lefs re-
franf^ible Rays, and lefs and more numerous in
rhe more refrangible, therefore the lefs refrangi-
ble at equal obliquities fhall make fewer Rings
than the more refrangible, and the Rings made
by thofe iliall be larger than the like number of
Rings made by thefej that is, the red Rings
fhali be larger than the yellow, the yellow than
the green, the green than the blue, and the blue
than the violet, as they were really found to be
in the fifth Obfervation. And therefore the firll
Ring of all Colours encompaffing the white
Spot of Light lliall be red without any violet
within, and yellow, and green, and blue in the
middle, as it was found in the fecond Obferva-
tion ; and thefe Colours in the fecond Ring, and
thofe that follow, fliall be more expanded, till
they fpread into one another, and blend one an-
other by interfering.
Thefe feem to be the reafons of thefe Rings
in general and this put me upoi;i obferving the
j

thicknefs of the Glals, and confidering whether


the dimenfions and proportions of the Rings may
be truly derived from it by computation.
Obf. 8. I meafured therefore the thicknefs of

this concavo-convex Plate of Glafs, and found it


every where \ of an Inch precifely. Now, by
the fixth Obfervation of the firft Part of this
Book, a thin Plate of Air tranfmits the brighteft
Light of the firft Ring, that is, the bright yel-

low, when its thicknefs is the g-^ th part of an

Inchi and by the tenth Obfervation of the fame


Part,
BOOK IT. 277
Parr, a thin Plate of Glafs trLinfmits the fame
Light of" the farrie Ring, when its diicknefs k
lefs in proportion of tb.e Sine of Refrad:ion to
the Sine of Incidence, that is, when its thick-

nefs is the ,--


1

'";;;;;;
1^13000
th or -
137545
'
— th part of an Inch,
^
fappofing the Sines are as 1 1 to 17. And it this
thickncfs be doubled, it tranfmits the fame bright
Light of thefecond Ring; if trippled, it tranf-
mits that "of tlie third, and fo on; the bright
yellow Light in all thefe cafes being in its Fits
of Tranfmiiiion. And therefore if its thickncfs
be multiplied 34386 times, fo as to become J of
an Inch, it tranfmits the fame bright Liglit of
the 34386th Ring. Suppofe this be the bright
yellow Light tranfmitted perpendicularly from
the refled-ing convex lide of the Glafs through
the concave fide to the white Spot in the cen-
ter of the Rings of Colours on the Chart: And
by a Rule in the 7th and igvh Obfervations in
the firft Part of this Book, and by the J5ch and
20th Propofitions of the third Part of this Book,
if the Rays be made oblique to the Glafs, the
thickncfs of the Glafs requilite to tranfmit the
fame bright Light of the fame Ring in any ob-
liquity, is to this fliickncfs of; of an Inch, as the-
Secant of a certain Angle to the Radius, the
Sine of which. Angle is the firfl of an hundred
and fiX arithmetical Means between the Sines
of Incidence and Rcfrartion, counted from the
Sine of Incidence when the Refrac^liion is made
out of any plated Body into any Medium en-
compafTmg it ; that isj in this cafe, out of Glafs
into Air. Now if the thicknefs of the Glafs be
T 3
increafed
278 O P T I C K S.

increafed by degrees, fo as to bear to its firft

thicknefs, (viz. that of a quarter of an Inch,)'


the Proportions which .(the number of
34386
Fits of the perpendicular Rays in ^oing through
the Glafs tov/ards the white Spot in the center
of the Rings,) hath to 34385, 34384, 34383, and
34382, (the' numbers of the Fits of the oblique
Rays in going through the Glafs towards the
firft, fecond, third, and fourth Rings of Co-
lours, ) and if the firfl thicknefs be divided in-
to 1 00000000 equal parts, the increafed thick-
00002908, 1 00005 8 1 6, 1 00008725,
nefies will be 1

and 100011633, and the Angles of which thefe


thicknelTes are Secants will be 26' 13", 37' 5",
45' 6", and 52' 26", the Radius being looooooooj
and die Sines of thefe Angjjes are 762, 1079,
1321, and 1525, and the proportional Sines of
Refradion 1 172, 1659, 203 1, and 2345, the Ra-
dius being 1 00000. For fmce the Sines of In-
cidence out of Glafs into Air are to the Sines
of Refraiftion as 11 to 17, and to the above-
mentioned Secants as 1 1 to the iirft of 106 arith-
metical Means betVv^een 11 and 17, that is, as;

1 1 to II —>, thofe Secants will be to the Sines


106'

of Refradion as 11 -j^ to 17, and by this Ana-


logy will give thefe Sines. So then, if the ob-
liquities of the Rays to the concave Surface of
the Glafs be fuch that the Sines of their Refra-
dion in paiTing out of the Glafs through that
Surface into the Air be 1172, 1659, 2031, 2345,
the bright Light of the 34386th Ring fhall e-
jnerge at the thickneffes of the Glafs, which are
2 to
BOOK II. 279
to 5 of aninch as 34386 to 34385,.34384, 34383,
34382, refpedively. And therefore, if the thick-
nefs in all thefe Cafes T3e 5 of an Inch (as it is in
the Glafs of which the Speculum was made)
the bright Light of the 34385th Ring fhall e-
merge where the Sine of Refracftion is 1 172,
and that of the 34384th, 34383th, and 34382th
Ring where the Sine is 1659, 2031, and 2345
refpedtively. And in thefc Angles of Refra-
ction the Light of thefe Rings fliall be propaga-
ted from the Speculum to the Chart, and there
paint Rings about the white central round Spot
of Light which we faid was the Light of thp
34386th Ring. And the Semidiameters of thefe
Rings fhall fubtend the Angles of Refraction
made at the Concave-Surface of the Speculum,
and by confequence their Diameters flrjll be to
the diftance of the Chart from the Speculum as
thofe Sines of Refraction doubled are to the
Radius, that is, as 1172, 1659, 2031, and 2345,
doubled are to 1 00000. And therefore, if the
diftance of the Chart from the Concave-Surface
of the Speculum be fix Feet ( as it was in the
third of thefe Obfervations ) the Diameters of
the Rings of this bright yellov/ Light upon the
Chart fhall be i'688, 2*389, 2*925, 3*375 Inches:
For thefe Diameters are to fix Feet, as the above-
mention'd Sines doubled are to the Radius.
Now, thefe Diameters of the bright yellow
Rings, thus found by Computation are the
very fame with thofe found in the third of thefe
Obfervations by meafuring them, viz. with
I IS, 2g, 2ii, and 3g Inches,, and therefore the
1 heory of deriving thefe Rings from the thick-
T 4 nsfs
28o O P T I C K S.

nefs of the Plate of Glafs"* of which the Specu-


was made, and from the Obliquity of the
.lurii

emerging P.ays agrees with the Obfervation. In


this Computation 1 have equalled the Diameters
of the bright Rings made by Light of all Co-
lours, to the Diameters of the Rings made by
the bright yellow. For this yellow makes the
brighteft Part of the Rings of all Colours. If
you defire theDiameters of the Rings made by the
Light of any other unmix'd Colour, you may
find them readily by putting them to the Diame-
ters of the bright yellow ones in a fubduplicate
Proportion of the Intervals of the Fits of the
Rays of thofe Colours when equally inclined to
the refrading or reflecting Surflice which caufed
thofe Fits, that is, by putting the Diameters of
the Rings made by the Rays in the Extremities
and Limits of the feven Colours, red, orange,
yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet, proportio-
nal to the Cube-roots of the Numbers, i, |, ^, J,
|, 55 -^5 ly
which exprefs the Lengths of a Mono-
chord founding the Notes in an Lighth: For
by this m.eans the Diameters of the Rings of
thefe Colours will be found pretty nearly in
the fame Proportion to one another, which
they ought to have by the fifth of thefe Obferva-
tions.
And thus I fatisfy'd my felf, that thefe Rings
were of the fame Kind and Original with thofe
of thin Plates, and by confequenxe that the Fits
or alternate Difpofitions of the Rays to be
refleded and tranfmirted are propagated to
great diftances from every refleding and re-
frading Surface. But yet to put the mat-
ter
;

BOO K II, 281


ter out of doubt, I added the following Obfer-
vation.
Obf. 9. If ^thefe Rings thus depend on the
thicknels of the Plate of Glafs, their Diameters
'

at equal diilances from feveral Speculums made


of iuch CDncavo-convex Plates of Glafs as are
ground on the fame Sphere, ought to be recipro-
cally in a fubduplicate Proportion of the thick-
neffes of the Plates of Glafs. And if this Pro-
portion be found true by experience it will amount
to a demonftratlon that thefe Rings (like thofe
formed in thin Plates) do depend on the thick-
nefs of the Glafs. I procured therefore ano-
ther concavo-convex Plate of Glafs ground on
both lides to the fame Sphere with the former
Plate. Its thicknefs was l^ Parts of an Inch
and the Diameters of the three hYi\. bright Rings
meafured between the brightell Parts of their
Orbits at the diftance of fix Feet from the
Glafs were 3. 4^-. 5J. Inches. Now, the thick-
nefs of the other Glafs being \ of an Inch v/as
to the thicknefs of this Glafs as ? to 4 that is
as 31 to 10, or 310000000 to icooooooo, and
the Roots of thefe Numbers are 1 7607 and loooo,
and in the Proportion of the iirlt of thefe Roots
to the fecond are the Diameters of the brip-ht
Rings made in this Obfervation by the tliinner
Glafs, 3. 4fi. 57, to the Diam.eters of the fime
Rings made in the tliird of thefe Obfervations"
by the thicker Glafs i-.^. 2!. 2^k, that is, the Dia-
meters of the Rings are reciprocally in a fubdu-
plicate Proportion of the thickneffcs of the Plates
of Glafs.
282 O P T I C K S.

So then in Plates of Glafs which are alike


concave on one fide, and alike convex on the
other fide, and alike quick-filver'd on the con-
vex fides, and differ in nothing but their thick-
'

nefs, the Diameters of the Rings are reciprocally


in a fubduplicate Proportion of the thickneffes of
the Plates. And this fhew^s fufticiently that the
Rings depend on both the Surfaces of the Glafs,
They depend on the convex Surface, becaufe they
lare more luminous when that Surface is quick-

filver'd over than when it is without Quick-filver.


They depend alfo upon the concave Surface, be-
caufe without that Surface a Speculum makes them
not. They depend on both Surfaces, and on the
difiiances between them, becaufe their bignefs is
varied by varying only that diftance. And this
dependance is of the fame kind with that which
the Colours of thin Plates have on the difi:ance
of the Surfaces of thofe Plates, becaufe the big-
nefs of the Rings, and their Proportion to one
another, and the variation of their bignefs arifing
from the variation of the thicknefs of the Glafs,
and the Orders of their Colours, is fuch as ought
to refult from th© Propofitions in the end of the
third Part of this Book, derived from the Phaeno-
mena of the Colours of thin Plates fet down in
the firfi: Part.
There Phenomena of thefe Rings
are yet other
of Colours, but fuch as follow from the fame
Propofitions, and therefore confirm both the
Truth of thofe Propofitions, and the Analogy be^
tween thefe Rings and the Rings of Colours
made by very thin Plates. I fhali fubjoin fome
of them.
ObJ\
BOOK II. 283
Obf. 10. When the beam of the Sun's Light
was refleded back from the Speculum not di-
redly to the hole in the Window, but to a pLce
a little diftant from it, the common
center of
that Spot, and of all the Rings of Colours fell

in the middle way between the beam of the in-


cident Light, and the beam of the refleded
Light, and by confequence in the center of the
fpherical concavity of the Speculum, whenever
the Chart on which the Rings of Colours fell
was placed at that center. And as the beam of
refledfed Light by inclining the Speculum re-
ceded more and more from the beam of inci-
dent Light and from the common center of the
colour'd Rings between them, thofe Rings grew
bigger and bigger , and fo alfo did the white
round Spot, and new Rings of Colours emer-
ged fucceffively out of their common center,
and the white Spot became a white Ring en-
compaffing them 3 and the incident and reflected
beams of Light always fell upon the oppofite
parts of this white Ring, illuminating its Peri-
meter like two mock Suns in the oppofite parts
of an Iris. So then the Diameter of this Ring,
meafured from the middle of its Light on one
lide to the middle of its Light on the other fide,
was always equal to the diftance between the
middle of the incident beam of Light,'' and the
middle of the refleded beam meafured at the
Chart on which the Rings appeared: And the
Rays which form'd this Ring were reflected by
the Speculum in Angles equal to their Angles of
Incidence, and by confequence to their Angles
pf Refradion at their entrance into the Glafs,
but
284 O P T I C K S.

but yet their Angles of Reflexion were not in


the fame Planes with their Angles of Inci-
dence.
'

Obf. 1 1. The
Colours of the new Rings Were
in a contrary order to thofe of the former, and
arofe after this manner. The white round Spot

of Light in the middle of the Rings continued


white to the center till the diftance of the inci-
dent and refleded beams at the Chart was about
8 parts of an Inch, and then it began to grow
dark in the middle. And when that diftance was a-
bout ItV of an Inch, the white Spot was become
a Ring encompaffing a dark round Spot which in
the middle inclined to violet and indigo. And
the luminous Rings encompafling it were grown
equal to thofe dark ones which in the four firft
Obfervations encompafled them, that is to fay,
the white Spot was grown a white Ring equal to
the firft of thofe dark Rings, and the firft of
thofe luminous Rings was now grown equal to
the fecond of thofe dark ones, and the fe-
cond of thofe luminous ones to the third of
thofe dark ones, and fo on. For the Diameters
of the luminous Rings were now itV, 2'V, 2j,
3 iV, S^c. Inches.
When the diftance between the incident and
reflected beams of Light became a little big-
ger, there emerged out of the middle of the
dark Spot after the indigo a blue, and then out
of that biue a pale green, and foon after a yel-
low and red. And when the Colour at the
center was brighteft, being between yellow and
red, the bright Rings were grown equal to thofe
Rings -which in the four firft Obfervations next
encom-
BOOK II. 285
encompaiTed them; that is to fay, the white
Spot in the middle of thofe Rings was now be-
come a white Ring equal to the iirft of thofe
bright Rings, and the firft of thofe bright ones
was now become equal to the fecond of thofe,
and fo on. For the Diameters of the white
Ring, and of the other luminous Rings encom-
paffing it, were now 1 44, 2|, 2|i, 3|., J^c. or
thereabouts.
When the diftance of the two beams of
Light at the Chart was a little more increafed,
there emerged out of the middle in order after
the red, a purple, a blue, a green, a yellow,
and a red inclining much to purple, and when
the Colour was brighteft being between yellow
and red, the former indigo, blue, green, yel-
low and, red, were become an Iris or Ring of
Colours equal to the firlt of thofe luminous
Rings which appeared in the four firfh Obfer-
vations, and the white Ring which was now
become the fecond of the luminous Rings was
grown equal to the fecond of thofe, and the
lirft of thofe which was now become the third

Ring was become equal to the third of thofe,


and fo on. For their Diameters were Itx, 2g,
2-rT, 3 Inches, the diftance of the two beams
1-

of Light, and the Diameter of the v/hite Ring


being 2t Inches.
When thefe two beams became more diflant
there emerged out of the middle of the pur-
plifh red, firft a darker round Spot, and then
out of the middle of that Spot a brighter. And
now the former Colours ( purple, blue, green,
yellow, and purplilh red) were become a Ring
equal
286 O P T. I C K S.

equal to the firft of the bright Rings mentioned


in the four firfl Obfervations, and the Rings
about this Ring were grown equal to the Rings
about that refpedtively j the diftance between
the two beams of Light and the Diameter of the
white Ring ( which was now become the third
Ring ) being about 3 Inches.
The Colours of the Rings in the middle be-
gan now to grow very dilute, and if the di-
ftance between the two Beams was increafed
half an Inch, or an Inch more, they vanifh'd
whilfl the white Ring, with one or two of the
Rings next it on either fide, continued ftill vi-
able. But if the diftance of the two beams of
Light was ftill more increafed, thefe alfo va- .

nifhed: For the Light which coming from fe-


veral parts of the hole in the Window fell up-
on the Speculum in feveral Angles of Incidence,
made Rings of feveral bigneffes, which diluted
and blotted out one another, as I knew by inter-
cepting fome part of that Light. For if I in-
tercepted that part which was neareft to the
Axis of the Speculum the Ring's would be lefs,

if the other part which was remoteft from it

they would be bigger.


Obf. 12. When the Colours of the Prifm
were caft fucceffively on the Speculum, that
Ring which in the two laft Obfervations was
white, was of the fame bignefs in all the Co-
lours, but the Rings without it were greater in
the green than in the blue, and ftill greater in
the yellow, and greateft in the red. And, on the
contrary, the Rings within that white Circle
were lefs in the green than in the blue, and ftill
lefs
BOOK II. 287
the yellow, and leaft in the red.
lefs in For the
Angles of Reflexion of thofe Rays which made
thisRing, being equal to their Angles of Inci-
dence, the Fits of every reflected Ray within
the Glafs after Reflexion are equal in length
and number to the Fits of the fame Ray with-
in the Glafs before Incidence on the refled:-
its

ing Surface. And all the Rays


therefore flnce
of all forts at their entrance into the Glafs were
in a Fit of Tranfmiffion, they were alfo in a Fit
of Tranfmiflion at their returning to the fame
Surface after Reflexion j and by confequence
were tranfmitted, and went out to the white
Ring on the Chart. This is the reafon why
that Ring was of the fame bignefs in all the Co-
lours, and why in a mixture of all it appears
white. But in Rays which are reflefted in o-
ther Angles, the Intervals of the Fits of the
leaft refrangible being greateft, make the Rings
of their Colour in their progrefs from this white
Ring, either outwards or inwards, increafe or
decreafe by the greateft fteps ; fo that the Rings
of this Colour without are greateft, and within
leaft. And this is the reafon why in the laft
Obfervation, when the Speculum was illumina-
ted with white Light, the exterior Rings made
by Colours appeared red without and blue
all
within, and the interior blue without ^nd red
within.
Thefe. are the Pha?nomena of thick convexo-
concave Plates of Glafs, which are every where
of the fame thicknefs. There are yet other
Phaenomena when thefe Plates are a little thick-
er on one fide than on the other, and others
when
288 O P T I C K S.

when the Plates are more or lefs concave than


convex, or plano-convex, or double-convex. For
in all thefe cafes the Plates make Rings of Co-
lours, but after various manners; all which, fo
far as I have yet obferved, follow from the Pro-
pofitions in the end of the third part of this
Book, and fo confpire to confirm the truth of
thofe Propofitions. But the Phaenomeiia are
too various, and the Calculations whereby they
follow from thofe Proportions too intricate to
be here profecuted. I content my felf with ha-
ving profecuted this kind of Phaenomena fo far
-as to difcover their Caufe, and by difcovering
it to ratify the Propofitions in the third Part of
this Book.
As Light reflecSled by a Lens quick-
Obf. 13.
iilver'd on the backfide makes the Rings of Co-
lours above defcribed, fo it ought to make the
like Rings of Colours in pafling through a drop
of Water. At the firft Reflexion of the Rays
within the drop, fome Colours ought to be
tranfmitted, as in the cafe of aj^ens, and others
to be refie(^l:ed back to the Eye. For inftance,
if the Diameter of a fmall drop or globule of
"Water be about the 500th part of an Inch, fo
that a red-making Ray in paffing through the
middle of this globule has 250 Fits of eafy
Tranlhiifiion within the globule, and that all
the red-making Rays which are at a certain di-
ftance from this middle Ray round about it
have 249 Fits within the globule, and all the
like Rays at a certain farther diftance found a-
bout it have 248 Fits, and all thofe at a cer-
tain farther diftance 247 Fits, and fo on; thefe
concern-
BOOK II. 2S9
concentrick Cirdes of Rays after their tranf-
miiTion, falling on a white Paper, will make
concentrick Rings of red upon the Paper, fup-
pofing the Light .which pafles through one An-
gle globule, llrong enough to be fenlible. And,
in like manner, the Rays of other Colours will
make Rings of other Colours. Suppole now
Day the Sun ihines through a thin
that in a fair
Cloud of fuch globules of Water or Hail, and
that the globules are all of the fame bignefs;
and the Sun feen through this Cloud fhall ap-
pear encompaffed with the like concentrick
Rings of Colours, and the Diameter of the firfl:
Ring of red fliall be 7 1. Degrees, that of the fe-
cond 10 i Degrees, that of the third 12 Degrees
33 Minutes. And accordingly as the Globules
of Water are bigger or lefs, the Rings lliall be
lefs or bigger. This is the Theory, and Expe-
rience anfwers it. For in 'jiuh; 1692, I faw by
reflexion in a Veflel of ftagnating Water three
Halos, Crowns, or Rings of Colours about the
Sun, like three little Rain-bows, concentrick
to his Body. The Colours of the firft or In-
nermoft Crown were blue next the Sun, red
without, and white in the middle between the
blue and red. Thofe of the fecond Crown
were purple and blue within, and pale red with-
out, and green in the middle. And thofe of
the third were pale blue within, and pale red
without; thefs Crowns enclofed one another
immediately , fo that their Colours proceeded
in this continual order from the Sun outward:
blue, white, red 3 purple, blue, green, pale
U yello;v
290 O P T I C K S.

yellow and red j pale blue, paid red. The Di-


ameter of the fecond Crown meafured from
the middle of the yellow and red on one fide
of the Sun, to the middle of the fame Colour
on the other was gr Degrees, or therea-
fide
bouts. The Diameters of the firfl and third
1had not time to meafure, but that of the firfl
feemed to be about five or fix Degrees, and
that of the third about twelve. The like
Crov/ns appear fometimes about the Moon;
for in the beginning of the Year 1664, Fel?r,
19th at Night, I faw two fuch Crowns about
her. The Diameter of the firfi: or innermoft
was about three Degrees, and that of the fe-
cond about five Degrees and an half Next a-
bout the Moon was a Circle of white, and next
about that the inner Crown, which was of a
bluifli green within next the white, and of a
yellow and red without, and next about thefe
Colours were blue and green on the infide of
the outward Crown, and red on the outfide of
it. At the fame time there appear'd a Halo a-
bout 22 Degrees 35' diftant from the center of
the Moon. It was elliptical, and its long Dia-
meter was perpendicular to the Horizon, verg-
ing belovv farthefk from the Moon. I am told
that the Moon has fometimes three or more
concentrick Crowns of Colours encompafiing
one another next about her Body. The more
equal the globules of Water or Ice are to one
another, the more Crowns of Colours will ap-
pear, and the Colours will be the more lively.
The Halo at the diilance of 22t Degrees from
the
BOOK IL 291
the Moon is of another fort, By its beino; oval
and remoter from the Moon beiow than above,
I conclude, that it made
v^cis by Refradlion in
fome fort of Hail or Snow floating in the Air in
an horizontal pofture, the refra<5ting Angle being
about 58 or 60 Degrees.

U 2 THE
^
BOOK III. 293
and 'that Shadows have three parallel
thefe
Fringes, Bands or Ranks of colour'd Light ad-
jacent to them. Rut if the Hole be enlarged
the Fringes grow broad and run into one ano-
ther, fo that theycannot be diftinguifh'd. Thefe
broad Shadows 'and Fringes have been reckon'd
by fome to proceed from the ordinary refra6tion
of the Air, but without due examination of the
Matter. For the circumftances of the Phano-
nienon, fo far as I have obferved them, are as
follows.
Obf. I. I made of Lead a fmall
in a piece
Hole with a Pin, whofe breadth was the 42d
part of an Inch. For 2 1 of thofe Pins laid to-
gether took up the breadth of half an Inch.
Through this Hole I let into my darken'd
Chamber a beam of the Sun's Light, and found
that the Shadows of Hairs, Thred, Pins, Straws,
and fuch like flender Subftances placed in this
beam of Light, were confiderably broader than
they ought to be, if the Rays of Light pa fled
on by thefe Bodies in right Lines. And parti-
cularly a Hair of a Man's Head, whofe breadth
was but the 280th part of an Inch, being held in
this Light, at the diftance of about twelve Feet
from the Hole, did caft a Shadow which at the
diftance of four Inches from the Hair was the
"

fixtieth part of an Inch broad, that is, above


four times broader than the Hair, and at the di-
'

ftance of two Feet from the Hair Vs^as about the


eight and twentieth part of an Inch broad, that
is, ten times broader than the Hair, and at the

diftance of ten Feet was the eighth part of an


Inch bsoad, that is 35 times broader,
U 3 Nor
294 O P T I C K S.

Nor is it material whether the Hair be en-


compaffed with Air, or with any other pellucid
Subllance. For I wetted a polifli'd Plate of
Glafs, and laid the Hair in the Water upon the
Glafs, and. then laying another polifli'd Plate of
Glafs upon it, fo that the Water* might fill up
the fpace between the GlafTes, I held them in
the aforefaid beam of Light, fo that the Light
might pafs through them perpendicularly, and
the Shadow of the Hair was at the fame di-
flances as big as before. The Shadows of
Scratches made in polifh'd Plates of Glafs were
alfo much broader than they ought to be, and
the Veins In polifh'd Plates of Glafs did alfo caft*
the like broad Shadows. And therefore the
great breadth of thefe Shadows proceeds from
feme other caufe than the" Refraction of the
Air.
Let the Circle X
[in Fig. i.] reprefent the
middle of the Hair; ADG,
BEH, CFI,
three Rays pafTmg by one fide of the Hair at
feveraldiflances ; KNQ^LOR, MPS, three
other Rays paffmg by the other fide of the Hair
at the like diflancesjD, E, F, and N, O, P, the
places where the Rays are bent in their paf-
fage by the Hair j G, H, I, and Q^, S, the
places where the Rays fall on a Paper GQ^
I S the breadth of the Shadow of the Hair cafl
on the Paper, and TI, VS, two Rays paffing
to the Points 1 and S without bending when
the Hair is taken away. And it's manifefl that
all the Light between thefe two Rays TI and
VS is bent in paffmg by the Hair, and turned
alide from the Shadow I S, becaufe if any part
cf
BOOK III. 295
of this Light were not bent it would fall on the
Paper within the Shadow, and there illuminaie
the Paper, contrary to experience. And becaufe
when the Paper is at a great diftance from the
Hair, the Shadow is broad, and therefore the
Rays TI and VS are *at a great diftance from

one another, it follows that the Hair ads unon


the Rays of Light at a good diltance in their paf-
fing by it. But the Action is frrongeft on the
Rays which pafs by at leaft^ diflances, and
grows weaker and weaker accordingly as the
Rays pafs by at diftances greater and greater, as
is reprefented in the Scheme For thence it :

comes to pafs, that the Shadow of the Hair is


much broader in proportion to the diflance of the
Paper from the Hair, when the Paper is nearer

the Hair, than when it is at a great diftance


from it.

0I?j:2. The Bodies (Metals,


Shadov/s of all
Stones, Glafs, Wood, Horn,
&c. ) in thisIce,
Light were border'd with three Parallel Fringes
or Bands of coloured Light, whereof that which
was contiguous to the Shadow was broadeft
and moft luminous, and that which was remo-
teft from it was narroweft, and fo faint, as not ^

eafily to be vifible. It v/as difficult to diftinguiili


the Colours, unlefs when the Light fell very ob-
liquely/upon a fmooth Pap:-r, or fome other
fmooth white Body, fo as to make them appear
much broader than they would otherwife do.
And then the Colours were plainly vifible in
this Order: The tirft or innermoft Fringe wViS
violet and deep blue next the Shadow, and then
light blue, green, and yellow in the middle, ai :d
U 4 .r^^d
;;

2o6 O P T I C K S.

red without. The fecond Fringe was almoft


contiguous to the firft, and the third to the fe-
cond, and both were blue within, and yellow and
red without, but their Colc^rs were very faint,
cfpecially thofe of the third. The Colours there-
fore proceeded in this order from the Shadow
violet, indigo, pale blue, green, yellow, red
blue, yellow, red; pale blue, pale yellow and
red. The Shadows made by Scratches and
Bubbles in polifh'd Plates of Glafs were bor-
der'd with the like Fringes of colour'd Light.
And if Plates of Looking-glafs floop'd off near
the edges with a Diamond-cut, be held in the
fame beam of Light, the Light which paffes
through the parallel Planes of the Glafs will be
border'd with the like Fringes of Colours where
thofe Planes meet with the Diamond-cut, and
by this means there will fometimes appear four
or five Fringes of Colours. Let AB, CD [in
Vig. 2.] reprefent the parallel Planes of a Look-
ing-glafs, and B D the Plane of the Diamond-
cut, making at B a very obtufe Angle with the
Plane AB. And let all the Light between the
Rays ENI and FBM pafs diredly through the
parallel Planes of the Glafs, and fall upon the
Paper between I and M, and all the Light be-
tween the Rays GO and HD be refraded by
the oblique Plane of the Diamond-cut BD,
and fall upon the Paper between K and L;
and the Light which paffes diredly through the
parallel Planes of the Glafs, and falls upon the
Paper between I and M, will be border'd with
three or more Fringes at M.
So
BOOK III.
297
So by looking on the Syn through a Feather
or black Rifcband held clofe to the Eye, feveral
Rain-bows will appear j the Shadows which the
Fibres or Threds caft on the T'unica Retina^
being border'd wi^h' the like Fringes of Co-
lours.

^kf'Z' When
the Hair was twelve Feet diftant
from Hole, and its Shadow fell obliquely
this
upon a flat white Scale of Inches and Parts of an
Inch placed half a Foot beyond it, and alfo when
the Shadow fell perpendicularly upon the fame
Scale placed nine Feet beyond it j I meafured the
breadth of the Shadow and Fringes as accu-
rately as I could, and found them in Parts of an
Inch as follows.

The
298 O P T I C K S.

At tloe I)iftance of
BOOK III. 299
Thefe Meafures took by letting the Shadow
I
of the Hair, at half a Foot diflance, fall fo ob-
liquely on the Scale, as to appear twelve times
broader than when it fell perpendicularly on it
atthe fame diftance, and fetting down in this
Table the twelfth part of the Meafures I then
took.
ObC. 4. When the Shadow and Fringes were
caft obliquely upon a fmooth white Body, and
that Body was removed farther and farther
from the Hair, the firft Fringe began to appear
and look brighter than the reft of the Light
at the diftance of lefs than a quarter of an Inch
from the Hair, and the dark Line or Shadow
between that and the fecond Fringe began to
appear at a lefs diftance from the Hair than that
of the third part of an Inch. The fecond Fringe
began to appear at a diftance from the Hair of
lefs than half an Inch, oand the Shadow between
that and the third Fringe at a diftance lefs than
ail Inch, and the third Fringe at a diftance lefs
than three Inches. At greater diftances they
became much more fenlible, but kept very
nearly the fame proportion of their breadths
and intervals which they had at their firft ap-
pearing. For the diftance between the middle
of the firft, and middle of the fecond Fringe,
was to the diftance between the middle of the
fecond and middle of the third Fringe, as three
to two, or ten to feven. And the laft of thefe
two diftances was equal to the breadth of the
bright Light or luniinous part of the firft Fringe.
And this breadth was
the breadth of the
to
bright Light of the fecond Fringe as feven to
four,
30O O P T I C K S.

four, and to the dark Interval of the firft and


fecond Fringe as three to two, and to the like
dark Interval between the fecond and third as
two to one. For the breadths of the Fringes
feem'd to be in the progreffion of the Numbers
I) v^i v^l, and their Intervals to be in the
fame progreffion with them j that is, the Frin-
ges and their kitervals together to be in the
continual progreffion of the Numbers i, /?, /f,
</!, v'i-, or thereabouts. And thefe Proportions
held the fame very nearly at all diftances from
the Hair ; the dark Intervals of the Fringes be-
ing as broad in proportion to the breadth of the
Fringes at their firil appearance as afterwards at
great dillances from the Hair, though not fo dark
and diftind:. •

Obf. 5. The Sun fhining into my darken'd


Chamber through a hole a quarter of an Inch
broad, I placed at the diilance of two or three
Feet from the Hole a Sheet of Pafteboard, which
was black'd all over on both fides, and in the
middle of it had a hole about^ three quarters
of an Inch fquare for the Light to pafs through.
And behind the hole I faften'd to the Palte-
board with Pitch the blade of a ffiarp Knife, to
intercept fome part of the Light which paffied
through the hole. The Planes of the Pafte-
board and blade of the Knife were parallel to
one another, and perpendicular to the Rays.
And when they w^re fo placed that none of
the Sun's Light fell on the Pafteboard, but all of
it pafied through the h.ole'to t*he Knife, and there

part of it fell upon the blade of the Knife, and


part of it paifed by its edge j I let this part of
the
;

BOOK III. 301


'

the Light which paiTed by, fall on a white Pa-


per two or three Feet beyond the Knife, and
there faw two ftreams of faint Light fhoot out
both ways from the beam of Light into the flia-
dow, like the Tails of Comets. But becaufe the
Sun's dired: Light by its brightnefs upon the
Paper obfcured thefe faint ftreams, fo that I
could fcarce fee them, I made a little hole in
the midft of the Paper for that Light to pafs
through and fall on a black Cloth behind it
and then I faw the two ftreams plainly. They
were like one another, and pretty nearly equal
in length, and breadth, and quantity of Light.
Their Light at that end next the Sun's direct
Light was pretty ftrong for the fpace of about
a quarter of an Inch, or half an Lich, and in all
*
its progrefs from that direct Light decreafed
gradually till it became infenfible. The whole
length of either of thefe ftreams meafured up-
on the Paper at the diftance of three Feet from
the Knife was about fix or eight Inches ; fo that
it fubtended an Angle at the edge of the Knife

of about 10 or 12, or at moft 14 Degrees. Yet


fometimes I thought I faw it ftioot three or four
Degrees farther, but with a Light fo very faint
that I could fcarce perceive it, and fufpe(5ted it

might ( in fome meafure at leaft ) arife from


fome other caufe than the two ftreams did. For
placing my Eye in that Light beyond the end
of that ftream which was behind the Knife, and
looking towards the Knife, I could fee a line of

Light upon its edge, and that not only when


my Eye was in the line cf the Streams, but al-
fo when it was without that line either towards
the
302 O P T I C K S.

the point of the Knife, or towards the handle.


This line of Light appear'd contiguous to the
edge of the Knife, and was narrower than the
Light of the innermofl Fringe, and narroweft
when my Eye was fartheft from the dired: Light,
and therefore feem'd to pafs between the Light
of that Fringe and the edge of the Knife, and
that which palTed nearefl the edge to be mofl .

bent, though not all of it.


Ohf. 6. I placed another Knife by this, fo
that their edges might be parallel, and look to-
wards one another, and that the beam of Light
might fall upon both the Knives, and fome part
of it pafs between their edges. And when the
diflance of their edges was about the 400th
part of an Inch, the ftream pjlrted in the mid-
^

die, and left a Shadow between the two parts.


This Shadow was fo black and dark that all the
Light which pafTed between the Knives feem'd
to be bent, and turn'd afide to the one. hand or
to the other. And as the Knives ftill approach'd
one another the Shadow grew broader, and the
ftreams ihorter at their inward ends which were
next the Shadow, until upon the contad; of the
Knives the whole Light vahilh'd, leaving its place
to the Shadow.
And hence I gather that the Light which is
leaft bent, and goes to the inward ends of the
ftreams, palTes by the edges of the Knives at
the greatefh diftance, and this diflance when
the Shadow begins to appear between the
ftreams, is about the Sooth part of an Inch. And
the Light which paffes by the edges of the
Knives at diftances ftill lefs and lefs, is more and
more
BOOK III. 303
more bent, and goes ta thofe parts of the
ftreams which are farther and farther from the
diredt Light; becaufe when the Knives approach
one another till they touch, thofe parts of the

ftreams vanifti laft v/hich are fartheil from the


dired Light.
Obf. 7. In the fifth Obfervation the Fringes
did not appear, but by reafon of the breadth of
the hole in the Window became fo broad as to run
into one another, and by joining, to rriake one
continued Light in the beginning of the ftreams.
But in the fixth, as the Knives approached one
another, a little before the Shadow appeared
between- the two ftreams, the Fringes began
to appear on the inner ends of the Streams on
either fide of the dired: Light ;three on one
fide made by the edge of one Knife, and three
on the other fide made by the edge of the o-
ther Knife. They Were diftindeft when the
Knives were placed at the greateft diftance from
the hole in the Window, and ftill became more
diftind: by making the hole lefs, infomuch that
I could fometimes fee a faint lineament of a
fourth Fringe beyond the three above men-
tion'd. And as the Knives continually ap-
'

proach'd one another, the Fringes grew di-


ftinder and larger, until they vanifh'd. The
outmoft Fringe vanifli'd firft, and the middle-
moft next, and the innermoft laft. And after
they were all vanifh'd', and the line of Light
which was in the middle between them was
grown very broad, enlarging it felf on both fides
into the ftreams of Light defcribed in the fifth"
Obfervation, the above-rnention'd Shadow be-
.1 gan
304- O P T I C K S.

gan to appear in the middle of this line, and


divide it along the middle into two lines of
Li^ht, and increafed until the whole Light va-
nilh'd. This enlargement of the Fringes was
fo great that the Rays which go to the inner-
moft Fringe feem'd to be bent above twenty
'

times more v/hen this Fringe was ready to va-


nifh, than when one of the Knives was taken
away.
And from this and the former Obfervation
compared, I gather, that the Light of the firffc
Fringe pafTed by the edge of the Knife at a di-
flance greater than the Sooth part of an Inch,
and the Light of the fecond Fringe paiTed by
the edge of the Knife at a greater diftance than
the Light of the firft Fringe did, and that of
the third at a greater diftance than that of the
fecond, and that of the ftreams of Light defcri-
bed in the fifth and fixth Obfervations pafTed by
the edsies of the Knives at lefs diftances than that
of any of the Fringes.
Obf. 8. I caufed the edges of two Knives
to be ground truly ftrait, and pricking their
points into a Board fo might
that their edges
look towards one another, and meeting near
their, points contain a redtilinear Angle, I faften'd
their Handles together with Pitch to make this
Angle invariable. The diftance of the edges of
the Knives from one another at the diltance of
four Inches from the angular Point, where the
edges of the Knives met, was the eight;: part
'

of an Inch j and therefore the Angle contain'd


by the edges was about one Degree 54'. The
Knives thus fix'd together I placed in a beam
of
BOOK III. 305
of the Sun's Light, let into my darken'd Cham-
ber through a Hole the 420! Part of an Inch wide,
at the diftance of 10 or 15 Feet from the Hole,
and let the Light which pafled between their edges
fall very obliquely upon a fmooth white Ruler at
the diftance of half an Inch, or an Inch from
the Knives, and there faw the Fringes by the
two edges of the Knives run along the edges of
the Shadows of the Knives in Lines parallel to
thofe edges without growing fenfibly broader,
till they met in Angles equal to the Angle
contained by the edges of the Knives, ai d
where they met and joined they ended without
croffing one another. But if the Ruler was
held at a much greater diftance from the
Knives, the Fringes w^here they were firther
from the Place of their Meeting, were a little
narrower, and became fomething broader and
broader as they approach'd nearer and nearer to
one another, and after they met tiiey crofs'd
one another, and then became much broader
than before.
Whence gather that the diftances at which
I
the Fringes pafs by the Knives are not increafed
nor alter'd by the approach of the Knives, but
the Angles in whicli the Rays are there bent
are much increafed by that approach ; and that
the Knife which is neareli any Ray determines
which way the Ray ftiall be bent, and the other

Knife increafes the bent.


Obf, 9. When the Rays fell very obliquely
upon the Ruler at the diftance of the third Part,
of an Inch from the Knives, the dark Line be-
tween the firft and fecond Fringe of the Sha-
X dow
3o6 OP T I C K S.

dow of one Knife, and the dark Line between


the firft and fecond Fringe of the Shadow of
the other Knife met with one another, at the
diftance of the fifth Part of an Inch from th«
end of the Light which pafTed between the
Knives at the concourfe of their edges. And
therefore the diftance of the edges of the Knives
at the meeting of thefe dark Lines was the i6oth
Part of an Inch. For as four Inches to the
eighth Part of an Inch, fo is any Length of the
edges of the Knives meafured from the point
of their concourfe to the diftance of the edges
of the Knives at the end of that Length, and fo
is the fifth Part of an Inch to the i6oth Fart.

So then the dark Lines above-mention'd meet


in the middle of the Light which pafTes be-
tween the Knives where they are diftant the
i6oth Part of an Inch, and the one half of that
Light pafles by the edge of one Knife at a di-
ftance not greater than the 320th Part of an
Inch, and falling upon the Paper makes the
Fringes of the Shadow of that Knife, and the
other half pafies by the edge of the other Knife,
at a diftance not greater than the 320th Part of
an Inch, and falling upon the Paper makes the
Fringes of the Shadow of the other Knife. But
if the Paper be held at a diftance from the
Knives greater than the third Part of an Inch,
the dark Lines above-mention'd meet at a greater
diftance than the fifth Part of an Inch from
the end of the Light which pafTed between the
Knives at the concourfe of their edges ; and
therefore the Light which falls upon the Paper
where thofe dark Lines meet pafles between the .

Knives
BOOK III. 307
Knives where the edges are diftant above the
160th part of an Inch.
For at another time, when the two Knives
were diltant eigiit Feet and five Inches from the
little hole in the Window, made with a fmall
Pin as above, the Light which fell upon the Pa-
per where the aforefaid dark lines met, paffed
between the Knives, where the dillance between
their edges was as in the following Table, w^hen
the diftance of the Paper from the Knives was
alfo as follows.

Dijiaiices of the Paper


from the Knhes i}i

Inches.
3o8 OPTIC K S.

Obf. 10.When the Fringes of the Shadows


of the Knives fell perpendicularly upon a Paper
at a great diftance from the Knives, they'w^ere
in the form of Hyperbola's, and their Dimen-
fions were as follows. Let CA, CB [in Fig. 3.]
reprefent Lines drawn upon the Paper parallel
to the edges of the Knives, and between which
all the Light would fall, if it pafled between
the edges of the Knives without inflexion ; DE
a Right Line drawn through C
making the An-
gles A CD, BCE, equal to one another, and
terminating all 'the Light which falls upon the
Paper from the point where the edges of the
Knives meet; fkt^ and glv^ three hyper-
eisy
bolical Lines reprefenting the Terminus of the
Shadow of one of the Knives, the dark Line
between the firft and fecond Fringes of that
Shadow, and the dark Line between the fecond
and third Fringes of the fame Shadow ; xip, ykq,
and z/r, three other hyperbolical Lines repre-
fenting the Terminus of the Shadow of the other
Knife, the dark Line between the firfl and fecond
Fringes of that Shadow, and the dark line be-
tween the fecond and third Fringes of the fame
Shadow. And conceive that thefe three Hyper-
bola's are like and equal to the former three, and
crofs them in the points i, and /, and that the
/',

Shadows of the Knives are terminated and diflin-


guifh'd from the lirft luminous Fringes by the
lines e i s and x ip, until the meeting and crof-
fmg of the Fringes, and then thofe lines crofs
the Fringes in the form of dark lines, termina-
ting the firft luminous Fringes within fide, and
diftinguifhing them from another Light which
begins
BOOK III. 309
begins to appear at /, and illuminates all the
triangular fpace /j^DEj. comprehended by thefe
dark lines, and the right line DE. Of thefe
Hyperbola's one Afymptote is the line DE, and
their other Afymptotes are parallel to the lines
C A and C B. Let r 'v reprefent a line drawn
any where upon the Paper parallel to the Afym-
ptote DE, and let this line crofs the right lines
AC in w, and B C in «, and the fix dark hy-
perbolical lines in />, ^, ^ 3 J, ^, i' ; and by mea-
suring the diftances /) J, gt, r'-j, and thence
collecting the lengths of the Ordinates n p, n q^
nr or m s^ m /, m v^ and doing this at feveral
diftances of the line r v from the Afymptote DD,
you may find as many points of thefe Hyperbo-
la's as you pleafe, and thereby know that thefe

curve lines are Hyperbola's differing little from


the conical Hyperbola. And by meafuring the
lines C /, C k, C /, you may find other points of
thefe Curves.
For inftance; when the Knives were diftant
from the hole in the Window ten Feet, and the
Paper from the Knives nine Feet, and the An-
gle contained by the edges of the Knives to
which the Angle ACBis equal, was fubtend-
ed by a Chord which was to the Radius as i
to 32, and the diftance of the line rv from the
Afymptote DEwas half an Inch: I meafured
the lines pSy qt, rv, and found them 0*35,
o'65, o'98 Inches refped;ively and by adding
;

to their halfs the line r m n^ ( w^hich here was


the 128th part of an Inch, or 0*0078 Inches,) the
Sums «^, nq^nVy were o' 1828, ©'3328, 0*4978
Inches. I meafured alfo the diftances of the
X 3
brighteft
3IO O P T I C K S.

which run between


brightefl parts of the Fringes
and st, qr and t 'U, and next beyond r and 'u>
fq
and found them o'5, o'B, and iij Inches.
Obf. II. The Sun fhining into my darkened
Room through a fmall round hole made in a
Plate of Lead with a flender Pin, as above ; I
placed at the hole a Prifm to refrad the Light,
and form on the oppofite Wall the Spedtrum
of Colours, defcribed in the third Experiment
of the firft Book. And then I found that the
Shadows of all Bodies held in the colour'd
Light between the Prifm and the Wall, were
border'd with Fringes of the Colour of that
Light in which they were held. In the full red
Light they were totally red without any fenfi-
ble blue or violet, and in tiie deep blue Light
they were totally blue without any fenfible red
or yellow ; and fo in the green Light they were
totally green, excepting a little yellow and blue,
which were mixed .in the green Light of the
Prifm. And comparing the Fringes made in
the feveral colour'd Lights, I found that thofe
made in the red Light were largeft, thofe
made in the violet were leail, and thofe made
-in the green Vv^ere of a middle bignefs. For
the Fringes with which the Siradow of a Man's
Hair were bordered, being meafured crofs the
Shadow at the diftance of fix Liches from the
Hair, the diflance between the middle and moil;
luminous part of the iirfl or innermoft Fringe
on one. fide of the Shadow, and that of the like
Fringe on the other iide of the Shadow, was in

the full red Lieht -~ of an Inch, and in the full

violet
BOOK III. 311
violet ?V. And the like diftance between the
middle and mofl luminous parts of the fecond
Fringes on either iide the Shadow was in the full
red Light and in the violet tV of an Inch.
»'=-,

And thefe diftances of the Fringes held the fame


proportion at all diftances from the Hair without
any fenfible 'variation.
So then the Rays which made thefe Fringes
in the red Light paffed by the Hair at a greater
diftance than thofe did which made the like
Fringes in the violet j and therefore the Hair
in caufing thefe Fringes adied alike upon the
red Light or leaft refrangible Rays at a greater
diftance, and upon the violet or moft refrangi-
ble Rays at a lefs diftance, and by thofe adions
difpofed the red Li^ht into larger Fringes, and
the violet into fmaller, and the Lights of inter-
mediate Colours into Fringes of intermediate big-
neftes without changing the Colour of any fort
of Light.
When therefore the Hair firft and fe-
in the
cond of thefe was held in the
Obfervations
white beam of the Sun's Light, and caft a Sha-
dow which was border'd with three Fringes of
coloured Light, thofe Colours arofe not from
any new modifications imprefs'd upon the Rays
of Light by the Hair, but only from the vari-
ous inflexions whereby the feveral Sorts of Rays
were feparated from one another, which before
feparation, by the mixture of all their Colours,
compofed the white beam of the Sun's Light,
but whenever feparated compofe Lights of the
feveral Colours which they are originally difpo-
fed to exhibit. In this i ithObfervation, where
X 4 the
312 O P T I C K S.

!Dhe Colours are feparated before the Light paf-


fes by the Hair, the leaft refrangible Rays, which
when feparated from the reft make red, were
infleded at a greater diftance from the Hair, fo
as to make three red Fringes at a greater di-
ftance from the middle of the Shadow of the
Hair j and the moft refrangible Rays which
when feparated make violet, were inflected at
a lefs diftance from the Hair, fo as to make
three violet Fringes at a lefs diftance from the
middle of the Shadow of the Hair. And other
Rays of intermediate degrees of Refrangibility
were inflefted at intermediate diftances from
the Hair, fo as to make Fringes of intermediate
Colours at intermediate diftances from the mid-
dle of the Shadow of the Hair. And in the
fecond Obfervation, where all the Colours are
mix'd in the white Light which pafles by the
Hair, thefe Colours are feparated by the vari-
ous inflexions of the Rays, and the Fringes
which they make appear all together, and the
innermoft Fringes being contiguous make on^^
broad Fringe compofed of all the Colours in .

due order, the violet lying on the infide of the


Frmge next the Shadow, the red on the out-
fide fartheftfrom the Shadow, and the blue,
green, and yellow, in the middle. And, in like
manner, the middlemoft Fringes of all the Co-
lours lying in order, and being contiguous,
make another broad Fringe compofed of all the
Colours and the outm.oft Fringes of all the
-J

Colours lying in order, and being contiguous,


make a third broad Fringe compofed of all the
Colours. Thefe are the three Fringes of co-
lour'd
BOOK III. 313
lour'd Light with which the Shadows of all Bo-
dies are border'd in the fecond Cbfervation.
When I made the foregoing Obfervations, I
defign'd to repeat moft of thcm.with more care
and exadnefs, and to mJike fome new ones for
determining the manner how the Rays of Light
are bent in their palTage by Bodies, for making
the Fringes of Colours with the dark lines be-
tween them. But I was then interrupted, and
cannot now think of taking thefe things into far-
ther Confideration. And fince 1 have not finifh'd
this part of my Defign, I fhall conclude with
propofing only fome Queries, in order to a far-
ther fearch to be made by odiers.

^ery i. Do not Bodies a<5t upon Light at


a diltance, and by their action bend irs Raysj and
is not this action ( cceteris paribus ) flrongeft at

the leaft diftance ?


^. 2. Do not the Rays which Re-
differ in
frangibility differ alfo in Flexibity and are they
j

not by their different Inflexions feparatcd from


one another, fo as after feparation to niake the
Colours in the three Fringes above defer ibed ?
And after what manner are they infle(5ted to make
thofe Fringes ?
^. 3 Are not the Rays of Light in pafling
by the edges and fides of Bodies, bent feveral
times backwards and forwards, with a motion
like that of an Eel ? And do not the three Frin-
ges of colour'd Light above-mention'd arife from
three fuch bendings ?
^. 4. Do not the Rays of Light which fall
upon Bodies, and are refleded or refraded, be-
gin
;

314 O P T I C K S.

gin to bend before they arrive at the Bodies


; and
are they not reflecfled, and infledied,
refrafted,
by one and the fame Principle, ading varioufly
in various Circumftances ?
^. 5. Do not Bodies and Light ad mutually
upon one another ; that is to fay. Bodies upon
Light in emitting, receding, refrading and in-
fleding it, and Light upon Bodies for heating
them, and putting their parts into a vibrating
motion vs^herein heat confifts ?

^. 6. Do
not black Bodies conceive heat
more eafily from Light than thofe of other Co-
lours do, by reafon that the Light falling on them
is not refleded outw^ards, but enters the Bodies,
and is often refleded and refraded within them,
until it be ftifled and loft ?
^. 7. Is not the ftrength and vigor of the
a^ion between Light and fulphureous Bodies ob-
ferved above, one reafon why fulphureous Bodies
take fire more,readily, and burn more vehement-
ly than other Bodies do ?

^. 8. Do not all when heated


fix'd Bodies,
emit Light and fhine
beyoiifl a certain degree,
and is not this Emiffion perform'd by the vi-
brating motions of their parts ? And do not all
Bodies which abound with terreflrial parts, and
efpecially with fulphureous ones, emit Light
as often as thofe parts are fufficiently agitated j

whether that agitation be made by Heat, or by


Fridicn, or Percuffion, or Putrefadion, or by
any vital Motion, or any other Caufe? As for
infliance Sea- Water in a raging Storm
; Quick- ;

filver agitated in ^jacuo the Back of a Cat, or


;

Neck of a Horfe, obliquely ftruck or rubbed in


a dark
;

BOOK III. 315


a dark place ; Wood,
Flefh and Fifli while they
putrefy ; Vapours ariling from putrefy 'd Wa-
ters, ufually call'd Ignes Fatui ; Stacks of moifl
Hay or Corn growing hot by fermentation
Glcfw-worms and the Eyes of fome Animals by
vital Motions the vulgar Phofphoriis agitated
J

by the attrition of any Body, or by the acid


Particles of the Air; Amber and fome Dia-
monds by ftriking, preffing or rubbing them;
Scrapings of Steel ftruck off with a Flint Iron ;

hammer'd very nimbly till it become fo hot as


to kindle Sulphur thrown upon it the Axle- ;

trees of Chariots taking fire by the rapid rota-


tion of the Wheels and fome Liquors mix'd
;

with one another whofe Particles come toge-


ther with an Impetus, as Oil of Vitriol diftilled
from its weight of Nitre, and then mix'd with
twice its weight of Oil of Annifeeds. So alfo a
Globe of Glafs about 8 or 10 Inches in diameter,
being put into a Frame where it may be fwiftly
turn'd round its Axis , will in turning fhine
where it rubs againft the palm of ones Hand
apply 'd to it: And if at the fame time a <^iece
of white Paper or white Cloth, or the end of
ones Finger be held at the diftance of about a
quarter of an Inch or half an Inch from that
part of the Glafs where it is mojft in motion,
the eled:rick Vapour which is excited by the
fri6lion of the Glafs againft the Hand, will by
dafhing againft the white Paper, .Cloth or Fin-
ger, be put into fuch an agitation as to emit
Light, and make the white Paper, Cloth or Fin-
ger, appear lucid like a Glow-worm ; and in
rufhing out of the Glafs will fometimes pufti
againft
3i6 *
O P T I C K S.

againft the Finger fo as to be felt. And the fame


things have been found by rubbing a long and
large Cylinder of Glafs or Amber with a Paper
held in ones hand, and continuing the fridiion till
the Glafs grew warm.
^. 9. Is not Fire a Body heated fo hot as to
emit Light copioufly? For what elfe is a red hot
Iron than Fire? And what elfe is a burning Coal
than red hot Wood ?
§u. 10. Is not Flame a Vapour, Fume or Ex-
halation heated red hot, that is, fo hot as to
fhine ? For Bodies do not flame without emit-
ting a copious Fume, and this Fume burns in
the Flame. The Igms Fatuus is a Vapour fhi-
ning without heat, and is there not the fame
difference between this Vapour and Flame, as
between rotten Wood fhining without heat and.
burning Coals of Fire ? In diftilling hot Spirits,
if the Head of the Still be taken off, the Va-
pour which afcends out of the Still will take fire
at the Flame of a Candle, and turn into Flame,
and the Flame will run along the Vapour from
the Candle to the Still. Some Bodies heated by
Motion or Fermentation, if the heat grow in-
renfe, fume copioufly, and if the heat be great
enough the Fumes will (liine and become Flame.
Metals in fuflon do not flame for want of a co-
pious Fume, except Spelter, which fumes co-
pioufly, and thereby flames. All flaming Bo-
dies, as Oil,Tallow, Wa"^, Wood, foffil Coals,
Pitch, Sulphur, by flaming waflie and vanifli in-
to burning Smoke, which Smoke, if the Flame
be pur out, is very thick and vifible, and fome-
times fmells ftrongly, but in the Flame lofes its
fmell
BOOK III. 317
fmell by burning, and according to the nature
of the Smoke the Flame is of feveral Colours,
as that of Sulphur blue, that of Copper open'd
with fublimate green, that of Tallow yellow,
that of Camphire white. Smoke paffing through
Flame cannot but grow red hot and red hot ,

Smoke can have no other appearance than that


of Flame. When Gun-powder takes fire, it
goes away into flaming Smoke. For the Char-
coal and Sulphur eafily take fire, and fet fire to
the Nitre, and the Spirit of the Nitre being
thereby rarified into Vapour ruflies out with
,

Explofion much after the manner that the Va-


pour of Water rufhes out of an ^olipile^ the
Sulphur alfo being volatile is converted into
Vapour, and augments the Explofion. And
the acid Vapour of the Sulphur (namely that
which diftils under a Bell into Oil of Sulphur,)
entring violently into the fix'd Body of the Ni-
tre, fets loofe the Spirit of the Nitre, and ex-
cites a great Fermentation, whereby the Heat
is farther augmented, fix'd Body of the
and the
Nitre is Fume, and the Explo-
alfo rarified into
fion is thereby made more vehement and quick.
For if Salt of Tartar be mix'd with Gun-pow-
der, and that Mixture be warm'd till it takes
fire, the Explofion will be more violent and
quick than that of Gun-powder alone; which^
cannot proceed from any other caufe than the
action of the Vapour of the Gun-powder upon
the Salt of Tartar, whereby that Salt is rarified.
The Explofion of Gun-powder arifes therefore
from the whereby all the Mixture
violent aftion
being quickly and vehemently heated, is rarified
r and
3i8 O P T I C K S.

and converted into Fume and Vapour: which


Vapour, by the violence of that adiion be- ,

coming fo hot as to fhine, appears in the form of


Flame.
^. 1 1. Do not great Bodies conferve their
heat the longeft, their parts heating one ano-
ther, and may not great denfe and fix'd Bo-
dies, when heated beyond a certain degree, e-
mit Light fo copioufly, as by the Emilfion and
Re-a6tion of its Light, and the Reflexions and
Refradions of its Rays within its Pores to grow
ilill hotter, till it comes to a certain period of

heat, fuch as is that of the Sun ? And are not


the Sun and fix'd Stars great Earths vehemently
hot, whofe heat is conferved by the greatnef^
of the Bodies, and the mutual Adiion and Re-
action between them, and the Light which they
emit, and whofe parts are kept from fuming a-
way, not only by their fixity, but alfo by the
vaft weight and denfity of the Atmofpheres in-
cumbent upon them ; and very ftrongly com-
preffing them, and condenfing the Vapours and
Exhalations which arife from them? For if
Water be made warm in any pellucid Veflel
emptied of Air, that Water in the Vacuum will
bubble and boil as vehemently as it would in
the open xAir in a Veffel fet upon the Fire till
it conceives a much greater heat. For the
weight of the incumbent Atmofphere keeps
down the Vapours, and hinders the Water from
boiling, until it grow much hotter than is re-
quifite to make it boil in vacuo. Alfo a mix-
ture of Tin and Lead being put upon a red hot
Iron in vacuo emits a Fume and Flame^ but the
3 fame
BOOK III. 319
fame Mixture in the open Air, by reafon of the
incumbent Atmofphere, does not fo much as e-
mit any Fume which can be perceived by Sight.
In like manner the great weight of the Atmo-
fphere which lies upon the Globe of the Sun
may hinder Bqdies there from riling up and
going away from the Sun in the form of Va-
pours and Fumes, unlefs by means of a far
greater heat than that which on the Surface of
our Earth would very eafily turn them into Va-
pours and Fumes. And the fime great weight
may condenfe thofe Vapours and Exhalations as
foon as they fliall at any time begin to afcend
from the Sun, and make them prefently fall
back again into him, and by that adion increafe
his Pleat much after the manner that in our
Earth the Air increafes the Heat of a culinary
Fire. And the fame weight may hinder the
Globe of the Sun from being diminifh'd, unlefs
by the Emiflion of Light, and a very fmall quan-
tity of Vapours and Exhalations.
%/. 12. Do not the Rays of Light in falling
upon the bottom of the Eye excite Vibrations
in the Tunica Retina? Which Vibrations, be-
ing propagated along the folid Fibres of the op-
tick Nerves into the Brain, caufe the Senfe of
feeing. For becaufe denfe Bodies conferve their
Heat a long time, and the denfeft Bodies con-
ferve their Heat the longeft, the Vibrations of
their parts are of a lalling nature, and there-
fore may be propagated along folid Fibres of
uniform denfe Matter to a great diftance, for
conveying into the Brain the impreffions made
upon all the Organs of Senfe. For that Motion
which
320 O P T I C K S.

which can continue long one and the fame part


in
of a Body, can be propagated a long way from
one part to another, fuppofing the Body homo-
geneal, fo that the Motion may not be refleded,
reffaded, interrupted or diforder'd by any un-
evennefs of the Body.
^. 13. Do not feveral forts of Rays make
Vibrations of feveral |)ignefres, which according
to their bignelfes excite Senfations of feveral Co-
lours, much after the manner that the Vibrations
of the Air, according to their feveral bignelfes
excite Senfations of feveral Sounds ? And parti-
cularly do not the moft refrangible Rays excite
the fhorteft Vibrations for making a Senfation of
deep violet, the leafl refrangible the largeft for
making and the feveral
a Senfation of deep red,
intermediate forts of Rays, Vibrations of feveral
intermediate bigneffes to make Senfations of the
feveral intermediate Colours ?
^. 14. May not the harmony and difcord of
Colours arife from the proportions of the Vibra-
tions propagated through the Fibres of the op-
tick Nerves into the Brain, as the harmony and
difcord of Sounds arife from the proportions of
the Vibrations of the Air? For fome Colours, if
they be view'd together, are agreeable to one
another, as thofe of Gold and Indigo, and others
difagree.
^i. 15. Are not the Species of Objedls feen
with both Eyes united where the optick Nerves
meet before they come into the Brain, the Fi-
bres on the right fide of both Nerves uniting
there, and after union going thence into the
Brain in the Nerve whicji is on the right fide of
thq
BOOK III. .21
the Head, and the Fibres on the left fide of
both Nerves uniting in the fame place, and af-
ter union going into the Brain in the Nerve
which is on the left fide of the Head, and thefe
tw^o Nerves meeting in the Brain in fuch a man-
ner that their Fibres make but one entire Spe-
cies or Pidure, half of which on the right fide
of the Senforium comes from the right fide of
both Eyes through the right fide of both op-
tick Nerves to the place where the Nerves meet,
end from thence on the right fide of the Head
into the Brain, and the other half on the left
fide of the Senforium comes in like manner from
the left fide of both Eyes. For the op tick
Nerves of fuch Animals as look the fame way
with both Eyes (as of Men, Dogs, Sheep, Oxen,
&c\) meet before they come into the Brain, but
the optick Nerves of fuch Animals as do not
look the fame way with both Eyes (as of Fifiics,
and of the Chameleon,) do not meet, if I am
rightly inform'd.
^. 1 6. When a Man in the dark prefTes either
corner of his Eye with and turns his
his Finger,
Eye away from he will fee a Circle
his Finger,
of Colours like thofe in the Feather of a Pea-
cock's Tail. If the Eye and the Finger remain
quiet thefe Colours vanifh in a fecond Minute of
Time, but if the Finger be moved with a qua-
vering Motion they appear again. Do not thefe
Colours arife from fuch Motions excited in the
bottom of the Eye by the PrelTure and Motion
of the Finger, as at other times are excited
there by Light for caufing Vifion ? And do not
the Motions once excited continue about a Se-
,y cond
322 O P T I C K S.

cond of Time before they ceafe ? And when a


Man by a ftroke upon his Eye fees a flafh of
Light, are not the Hke Motions excited in the
Retina by the ftroke ? And when a Coal of Fire
moved nimbly in the circumference of a Cir-
cle, makes the whole circumference appear like
a Circle of Fire is it not becaufe the Motions
;

excited in the bottom of the Eye by the Rays


of Light are of a lafting nature, and continue
till the Coal of Fire in going round returns to

its former place ? And confidering the lafting-


nefs of the Motions excited in the bottom of
the Eye by Light, are they not of a vibrating
nature ?

%/. 17. If a Stone be thrown into ftagnating


Water, the Waves excited thereby continue-
fome time to arife in the place where the Stone
fell into the Water, and are propagated from
thence in concentrick Circles upon the Surface
of the Water to great diftances. And the Vi-
brations or Tremors excited in the Air by per-
cuffion, continue a little time to move from the
place of percufTion in concentrick Spheres to
great diftances. And manner, when a Ray
in like
of Light falls upon the Surface of any pellucid
Body, and is there refra(fted or reflected, may not
Waves of Vibrations, or Tremors, be thereby
excited in the refracting or reflecfling Medium at
the point of Incidence, and continue to arife
there, and to be propagated from thence as long
as they continue to arifeand be propagated, when
they are excited in the bottom of the Eye by the
Prellure or Motion of the Finger, or by the Light
which comes from the Coal of Fire in the Ex-
periments.
B o o ic in. 323
perimetits abovemention'd ? and are not thefa
Vibrations propagated from the point of Inci-
dence to great diltances ? And do they not over-
take the Rays of Light, and by overtaking them
fucceffively, do they not put them into the Fits
of eafy Reflex io.^. and eafy Tranfmiinon defcribed
above? For if the Rays endeavour to recede from
the denfeft part of the Vibration, they may be
ahernately accelerated and retarded by the Vi-
brations overtaking them.
%. 18. If in two large tall cylindrical Vef-*
fels of Glafs inverted, two little Thermometers
be fufpended fo as not to touch the Veffels, and
the Air be drawn out of one of thefe Veffels,
and thefe Veffels thus prepared be carried out
of a cold place into a warm one; the Thermo-
meter ift 'Vacuo will grov/ warm as much, and
almoft as foon as the Thermometer which is
not in vacuo. And when the Veffels are carri-
ed back into the cold place, the Thermometer
in vacuo will grow cold almofi: as foon as the
other Thermometer. Is not th^e Heat of the
warm Room convey'd through the Vacuum by
the Vibrations of a much fubriler Medium than
Air, which after the Air was drawn out remain-
ed in the Vacuum f And is not this Medium the
fame with that Medium by which Light is re-
fracted and refleded, and bv whofe Vibrations
Light communicates Heat to Bodies, and is
put into Fits of eafy Reflexion and eafy Tranf-
miffion ? And do not the Vibrations of this Me-*
dium in hot Bodies contribute to the intenfenefs
and duration of their Heat ? And do not hot
Bodies communicate their Heat to contiguous
y 3 cdld
324 O P T I C K S.

cold ones, by the Vibrations of this Medium


propagated from them into the cold ones ? And
is not this Medium exceedingly more rare and

fubtile than the Air, and exceedingly more ela-


ftick and adlive? And doth it not readily per-
vade all Bodies? And is it not ( by its elaftick
force) expanded through all the Heavens ? .

^. 19. Doth not the Refradtion of Light


proceed from the different denfity of this JEzhe-
real Medium in different places, the Light re-
ceding always from the denfer parts of the Me-
dium? And is not the denfity thereof greater
in free and open Spaces void of Air and other
groffer Bodies, than vi^ithin tjie Pores of Wa-
ter,' Glafs, Cryflal, Gems, and other compacfl
Bodies? For w^hen Light paffes through Glafs
or Cryflal, and falling very obliquely upon the
farther Surface thereof is totally refleded, the
total Reflexion ought to proceed rather from the
denfity and vigour of the Medium w^ithout and
beyond the Glafs, than from the rarity and w^eak-
nefs thereof
^. 20. Doth not this Ethereal Medium in
paffing out of Water, Glafs, Cryflal, and other
compad: and denfe Bodies into empty Spaces,
grov^ denfer and denfer by degrees, and by that
means refraft the Rays of Light nor in a point,
but by bending them gradually in curve Lines ?
And doth not the gradual condcnfation of this
Medium extend to fome diflance from the Bo-
dies, and thereby caufe the Inflexions of the
Rays of Light, which pafs by the edges of denfe
Bodies, at fome diflance from the Bodies ?

^.
BOOK III. 325
^. 21. Is not this Medium much rarer with-
in the denfe Bodies of the Sun, Stars, Planets
and Comets, than in the empty celeftial Spaces
between them ? And in pafling from them to
great diftances doth it not grow denfer and
,

denfer perpetually, and thereby caufe the gra-


vity of thofe great Bodies towards one another,
and of their parts towards the Bodies; every
Body endeavouring to go from the denfer parts
Medium
of the towards the rarer ? For if this
Medium be rarer within the Sun's Body than at
its Surface, and rarer there than at the hun-
dredth part of an Inch from Its Body, and ra-
rer there than at the fiftieth part of an Inch ftom
its Body, and rarer there than at the Orb of
Saturn, I fee no reafon why the Increafe of
denfity fhould flop any where, and not rather
be continued through all diftances from the Sun
to Saturn^ and beyond. And though this In-
creafe of denfity may at great diftances be ex-
ceeding flow, yet if the elaftick force of this
Medium be exceeding great, it may fufhce to
impel Bodies from the denfer parts of the Me-
dium towards the rarer , with all that power
which we call Gravity. And that the elaflick
force of this Medium is exceeding great, may
be gather'd from the fwiftnefs of its Vibrations.
Sounds move about 1 140 EnMh Feet in a fe-
cond Minute of Time, and in feven or eight
Minutes of Time they move about one hundred
Englijlo Miles. Light moves from t':e Sun to
us in about feven or eight Minutes f Time,
which diflance is about 70000000 Eng jh Miles,
fuppofing the horizontal Parallax of tiic Sun to
Y 3 be
3^6 O P T I C K S,

be about 12". And the Vibrations or Pulfes of


this Medium, that they may caufe the akernatc
Fits of eafy TraDfiriillion and eafy Reflexion, .

muft be fwlJtcr th; n Light, and by confequencc


above 700000 amL?. fwiirer.than Sounds. And
therefore the eUitick force of this Medium, in
proportion to its denfiiy, muft be above 70000Q
X 700000 (that is, above 490000000000) times
greater than the elaftick force of the Air is in
proportion to its deufity. For the Velocities of
the Puh'es of ehifticiv Mediums are in a fubdupU^
cate Ratio of the Hlailiciries and the Rarities of
the Mediums taken together.
As Attraction is ilronger in fmall Magnets
than in great ones in proportion to their Bulk,
and Gravity is greater in the Surfaces of fmall
Planets than in thofe of great ones in propor-
tion to their bulk, and fmall Bodies are agita-
ted much more by eledric attradion than great
ones J fo the fmallnefs of the Rays of Light
may contribute very much to the power of
the Agent by which they are refraded. And
fo if any one fhould fuppofe that Mther ( like
our Air) may contain Particles which endeavour
to recede from one another ( for J do not know
what this Mther is) and that its Particles are
exceedingly fmaller than thofe of Air, or even
than thofe of Light: The exceeding fmallnefs
of its Particles may contribute to the greatnefs
of the force by which thofe Particles may re-,
cede from one anqther, and thereby make that
Medium exceedingly more rare and elaftick
than Air, and by confequence exceedingly lefs
able to refift the motions of Projediles, and
exceed-
BOOK III. 327
exceedingly more able to prefs upon grofs Bodies,
by endeavouring to expand it lelf.
^/. 22. May not Planets and Comets, and all
grofs Bodies, perform their Motions more freely,
and with lefs refiftance in this ^Ethereal Medium
than in any Fluid, which fills all Space ade-
quately without leaving any Pores, and by confe-
quence is much denfer than Quick'-lilver or Gold?
And may not its refiftance be fo fmall, as to be
inconfiderable Forinftance; 1£ this Mther (for
?

fo I will call fhould be fuppofed 700000


it ) -

times more elaftick than our Air, and above


700000 times more rare j its refiftance would
be above 600000000 times lefs than that of Wa-
ter. And fo fmall a refiftance would fcarce
make any fenfible alteration in the Motions of
the Planets in ten thoufand Years. If any one
would ask how a Medium can be fo rare, let
him tell me how the Air, in the upper parts of
the Atmofphere, Qin be above an hundred thou-
fand thoufand times rarer than Gold. Let him
alfo tellme, how an eledtrick Body can by Fri-
ction emit an Exhalation fo rare and fubtile, and
yet fo potent, as by its Emiflion to caufe no
fenftble Diminution of the weight of the de-
rrick Body, and to be expanded through a
Sphere, whofe Diameter is above two Feet, and
yet to be able to agitate and carry up Leaf Cop-
per, or Leaf Gold, at the diftance of above a
Foot from the eledrick Body? And how the
Effluvia of a Magnet can be fo rare and fubtile, as
to pafs through a Plate of Glafs without any Reii-
ftance or Diminution of their Force, and vet fo
potent as to turn a magnetick Needle beyond the
Glafs? y 4 ^,
328 P T I C K S.

^/. 23. Is not Vifion perform'd chiefly by the


Vibrations of this Medium, excited in, the bot-
tom of the Eye by the Rays of Light, and pro-
pagated through the folid, pellucid and uniform
Capillamenta of the optick Nerves into the place
of Senfaticn ? And is not Hearing perform'd by
the Vibrations either of this or fome other Medi-
um, excited in the auditory Nerves by the Tre-
mors of the Air, and propagated through the fo-
lid, pellucid and uniform Capillamenta of thofe
Nerves into the place of Senfatiofi ? And fo of
the other Senfes.
^. Animal Motion perform'd by
24. Is not
the Vibrations of thisMedium, excited in the
Brain by the power of the Will, and propaga-
ted from thence through the folid, pellucid and
uniform Capillamenta of the Nerves into the
Mufcles, for contrad:ing and dilating them ? I
fuppofe that the Capillamenta of the Nerves are
each of them folid and uniform, that the vibra-
ting Motion of the iEthereal Medium may be
propagated along them from one e;id to the other
uniformly, and w^ithout interruption: For Ob-
ftrudions in the Nerves create Palfies. And that
they may be Sufficiently uniform , I fuppofe
them to be pellucid when view'd fmgly, tho' the
Reflexions in their cylindrical Surfaces may make
the whole Nerve ( compofed of many Capilla-
menta) appear opake and white. For opacity
.arifes from reflecting Surfaces, fuch as may di-
fturb and interrupt the Motions of this Medium.
^/. 25. Are there not other original Proper-
ties of the Rays of Light, befides thofe alrea-

dy defcribed ? An inftance of another original


Fro-
BOOK III. 329
Property we have in the Refradion of Illand
Cryftal defcribed firft by Erajmm Bartholine^
,

and afterwards more exadly by Hugeniin^ in his


Book De la Lumiere, This Gryftal is a pel-
kicid fiffile Stone, clear as Water
or Cryftal of
the Rock, and without Colour j enduring a red
Heat without lofing its tranfparency, and in a
very ftrong Heat calcining without Fufion.
Steep'd a Day or two in Water, it lofes its na-
tural Polifh. Being rubb'd on Cloth, it attracfls
pieces of Straws and other light things, like Am-
bar or Glafs; and with Aqua Jortis it makes an
Ebullition. It feems to be a fort of Talk, and
is found in form of an oblique Parallelopiped,
with lix parallelogram Sides and eight folid An-
gles. The obtule Angles of the Parallelograms
are each of them 10 1 Degrees, and 52 Minutes;
the acute ones 78 Degrees and 8 Minutes. Two
of the folid Angles oppofite to one another, as
C and E, are compalTed each of
them with three of thefe obtufe ^'* '/£"""
Angles, and each of the other
fix with one obtufe and two acute ones. It
cleaves eaiily in planes parallel to any of its
Sides, and not in any other Planes. It cleaves
with a glofly polite Surface not perfectly plane,
but with fome little unevennefs. It is eafily
fcratch'd, and by reafon of its foftnefs it takes a
Polifh very difficultly. It polifhes better upon
polifh'd Looking-glafs than upon Metal, and
perhaps better upon Pitch, Leather or Parch-
ment. Afterwards it muft be rubb'd with a lit-
tle Oil or white of an Egg, to fill up its Scratches;
whereby it will become very tranfparent and po-
lite.
330 O P T I C K S.

lite. But for feveral Experiments, it is not necef-

fary to polifh it. If a piece of this cryflalline


Stone be laid upon a Book, every Letter of the
Book feen through it will appear double, by
means of a double Refracflion. And if any beam
of Light falls either perpendicularly, or in any
oblique Angle upon any Surface of this Cryftal,
it becomes divided into two beams by means of,

the fame double Refraction. Which beams are of


the fame Colour with the incident beam of Light,
and feem equal to one another in the quantity of
their Light, or very nearly equal. One of thefe
Refra<flions perform'd by the ufual Rule of Op-
is

ticks, the Sine of Incidence out of Air into this


Cryftal being to the Sine of Refradion, as five to
three. The other Refra(5tion, which may be cal-
led the unufual Refraction, is perform'd by the
following Rule.
5\

H ^
Let ADBC reprefent the refrading Surface
of
\
1

BOOK III. 331


of the Cryftal, C the biggeft folid Angle at that
Surface, GEHF the oppofite Surface, and CK
a perpendicular on that Surface. This perpen-
dicular makes with the edge of the Cryftal C F,
an Angle of 19 Degr. 3'. Join KF, and in it
take KL, fo that the Angle KCL be 6 Degr.
40'. and the Angle LCF 12 Degr. And if 23'.

ST any beam of Light incident at


reprefent T
in any Angle upon the refracfting Surface B C, AD
let TVbe the refradted beam determin'd by the
given Portion of the Sines 5 to 3, according to
the ufual Rule of Opticks. Draw V X parallel
and equal to KL. Draw it the fame way from
V in which L liethfromK; and joining TX,
this line T X fhall be the other refracted beam
carried from T to X, by the unufual Refra-
d;ion,
If therefore the incident beam S T be perpen-
dicular to the refra(5ling Surface, the two beams
TV and TX, into which it fhall become di-
vided, fliall be parallel to the lines and CL ;CK
one of thofe beams going through the Cryftal
perpendicularly, as it ought to do by the ufual
Laws of Opticks, and the other T X by an unu-
fual Refradion diverging from the perpendicular,
and making with it an Angle V T X of about 6
Degrees, as is found by Experience. And
hence, the Plane VTX, and fuch like Planes
which are parallel to the Plane C F K, may be
called the Planes of perpendicular Refradion.
And the Coaft towards which the lines and KL
VX are drawn, may be call'd the Coaft of unu-
fual Refraction.
In like manner Cryftal of the Hock has a
5 double
;

332 O P T I C K S.

double Refra(5tion : But the difference of tl^ two


Refradions is not fo great and manifefl as in
Ifland Cryftal.
When the beam S T incident on Ifland Cry-
ftal is divided into T V and T X,
two beams
and thefe two beams arrive at the farther Surface
of the Giafs ; the beam T V, which was refra-
cted at the firfl Surface after the ufual manner,
Ihall be again refracted entirely after the ufual
manner at the fecond Surface and the beam T X,
;

which was refracted after the unufual manner in


the firft lliall be again refradlied entirely
Surface,
after theunufual manner in the fecond Surface
fo that both thefe beams fliall emerge out of the
lecond Surface in lines parallel to the firft incident
beam S T.
And if two pieces of Ifland Cryftal be pla-
ced one after another, in fuch manner that all
the Surfaces of the latter be parallel to all the
correfponding Surfaces of the former: The
Rays which are refradted after the ufual man-
ner in the flrft Surface of the firft Cryftal, ftiall
be reflated after the ufual manner in all the
following Surliices j and the Rays which are re-
fraded unufual manner in the firft Sur-
alter the
face, fhaii be relradted after theunufual manner
in all tlie following Surfaces. And the fame thing
happens, though the Surfaces of the Cryftals be
any ways inclined to one another, provided that
their Planes of perpendicular Refradlion be pa-
rallel to ope another.
And therefore there is an original difterencc
an theRays of Light, by means of which fome
Rays are m
this Experiment conftantly refra(S-
k.' ed
BOOK m. 333
cd after the ufual manner, and others conftant-
ly after the unufual manner For if the diffe-
:

rence be not original, but arifes from new Mo-


difications imprefs'd on the Rays at their firft
Refrad:ion, it would be aker'd by new Modi-
fications in the three following Refractions;
whereas it fuffers no alteration, but is conftant,
and has the fame effed upon the Rays in all the
Refractions. The unufual Refraction is there-
fore perform'd by an original property of the
Rays. And it remains to be enquired, whether
the Rays have not more original Properties than
are yet difcover'd.
^. 26. Have not the Rays of Light feveral
fides, endued with Properties ?
feveral original
For if the Planes of perpendicular Refradtion
of the fecond Cryftal be at right Angles with
the Planes of perpendicular RefraCtion of the
firft Cryftal, the Rays which are refradted after

the ufual manner in paffing through the firft

Cryftal, will be all of them refradted after the


unufual manner in pafling through the fecond
Cryftal; and the Rays which are refradted af-
ter the unufual manner in paffing through the
firft Cryftal, will be all of them refradted after

the ufual manner in paffing through the fecond


Cryftal. And therefore there are not two forts
of Rays differing in their nature from one ano-
ther, one of which is conftantly and in all Po-
fitions refradted after the ufual manner, and the
other conftantly and in all Pofitions after the
unufual manner. The difference between the
two forts of Rays in the Experiment mention'd
in the 25th Queftion, was only in the Pofitions
I ©f
334 O P T I C K S.

of the Sides of the Rays to the Planes of pef<»


pendicular Refrad:ion. For one and the fame
Ray is here refraded fometimes after the ufual,
and fometimes after the unufual manner, ac-
cording to the Polition which its Sides have to
the Cryflals. If the Sides of the Ray are poii-
ted the fame way to both Cryflals, it is refra^
fted after the fame manner in them both : But
if that fide of the Ray which looks towards
the Coaft of the unufual Refradion of the iirft
Cryftal, be 90 Degrees from that fide of the
fame Ray which looks toward the Coaft of the
unufual Refradion of the fecond Cryltal, (which
may be effected by varying the Pofition of the
fecond Cryftal to the firft, and by confequence
to the Rays of Light, ) the Ray {hall be refraded
after feveral manners in the feveral Cryflals.
There is nothing more required to determine
whether the Rays of Light which fall upon the
fecond Cryflal fhall be refraded after the ufual
or after the unufual manner, but to turn about
this Cryflal, fo that the Coafl of this Cryflal's
unufual Refradion may be orf this or on that
fide of the Ray. And therefore every Ray may
be confider'd as having four Sides or Quarters,
two of which oppofite to one another incline
the Ray to be refradled after the unufual man-
ner, as often as either of them are turn'd to-
wards the Coafl of unufuil Refradion j and the
other two, whenever either of them are turn'd
towards the Coafl of unufual Refradion, do not
incline it to be otherwife refracted than after
the ufual manner. The two iirfl may there-
fore be call'd the Sides of unufual Refradion-
And
BOOK in. 335
And fince thefe DifpofitioRS were in the Rays
before their Incidence on the fecond, third, and
fourth Surfaces of the two Cryflals, and fuffer-
ed no alteration ( fo far as appears, ) by the Re-
fra(flion of the Rays in their paflilge through
thofe Surfaces, and the Rays v/ere refrad:ed by
the fame Laws in all the four Surfaces ; it ap-
pears that thofe Difpofitions were in the Rays
originally, and fufier'd no alteration by the firil
Refradion, and that by means of thofe Difpofi-
tions the Rays -were refradied at their Incidence
on the firft Surface of the firfh Cryilal, fome of
them after the ufual, and fome of them after the
unufual manner, accordingly as their Sides of
vinufual Refradion were then turn'd towards the
Coaft of the unufual Refradion of that Cryilal,
or lideways from it.
Every Ray of Light has therefore two oppo-
fite Sides, originally endued with a Property on

which the unufual Refradion depends, and the


other two oppofite Sides not endued with that
Property. And it remains to be enquired, whe-
ther there are not more Properties of Light by
which the Sides of the Rays differ, ani are di-
ftinguifh'd from one another.
In explaining the difference of the Sides of
the Rays above mention'd, I have fuppofed that
the Rays fall perpendicularly on the firfl Cry-
ftal. But if they falK obliquely on it, the Suc-
cefs is the fame.Thofe Rays which are refra-
ded after the ufual manner in the firfl Cryflal,
will be refraded after the unufual manner in the
fecond Cryflal, fuppoiing the Planes of perpen-
dicular
336 O P T I C K a
dicular Refradtion to be at right Angles with one
another, as above j and on the contrary.
If the Planes of the perpendicular Refraction
of the two Cryflals be neither parallel nor per-
pendicular to one another, but contain an acute
Angle The two beams of Light which emerge
:

out of the firfl Cryftal, will be each of them di-


vided into two more at their Incidence on the fe-
cond Cryftal. For in this cafe the Rays in each
of the two beams will fome of them have their .

Sides of unufual Refradlion, and fome of them


their other Sides turn'd towards the Coaft of the
unufual Refradtion of the fecond Cryftal.
^/. 27. Are not all Hypothefes erroneous
which have hitherto been invented for explain-
ing the Phaenomena of Light, by new Modifica-
tions of the Rays ? For thofe Phaenomena de-
pend not upon new Modifications, a§ has been
fuppofed, but upon the original and unchange-
able Properties of the Rays.
^. 28. Are not all Hypothefes erroneous,
in which Light is fuppofed to confift in Pref-
lion or Motion, propagated through a fluid Me-
dium ? For in all thefe Hypothefes the Phaeno-
mena of Light have been hitherto explain'd by
fuppofing that they arife from new Modifica-
tions of the Rays j which is an erroneous Sup-
pofition.
If Light confifted only in PreiTion propaga-
ted without adhial Motion, it would not be a-
ble to agitate and heat the Bodies which refrad:
and refledl it. If it confifted in Motion propa-
gated to all diftances in an inftant, it would re-
quire an infinite force every moment, in every
fhining
BOOK IIL 337
fhinlng Particle, to generate that Motion. And
if it confiiled in Preflion or Motion, propaga-
ted either in an inftant or in time, it would bend
into the Shadow.' For Preffion or Motion
cannot be propagated in a Fluid in right Lines,
beyond an Obitacle which ftops part of the Mo-
tion, but will bend and fpread every way into
the quiefcent Medium which lies beyond the
Obftacle. Gravity tends downwards, but the
PrelTure of Water arifnig from Gravity tends
every way with equal Force, and is propagated
as readily, and with as much force lideways as
downwards, and through crooked paflages as
through ftaait ones. The Waves on the Surface
of ftagnating Water, paffing by the fides of a
broad Obftacle which Itops part of them, bend
afterwards and dilate themfelves gradually into
the quiet Water behind the Obftacle. The
Waves, Pulfes or Vibrations of the Air, where-
in Sounds confift, bend manifeftly, though not
fo much as the Waves of Water. For a Bell
or a Cannon may be heard beyond a Hill which
intercepts the fight of the founding Body, and
Sounds are propagated as readily through crook-
ed Pipes as through ftreight ones. But Light
is never known to follow crooked Paftages nor

to bend into the Shadow. For the fix'd Stars


by the Interpofition of any of the Planets ceafe
to be fien. And fo do the Parts of the Sun
by the Interpofition of the Moon, Mercury or
Venm. The Rays which pafs very near to the
edges of any Body, are bent a little by the adion
of the Body, as we ftiew'd above but this j

bending is not towards but from the Shaiow,


Z and
338 O P T I C K S.

and is perform'd only in the paffage of the Ray


by the Body, and at a very fmall diftance from
it* So foon as the Ray is pafl the Body, it goes
right on.
To explain the unufual Refra^ion of Ifland
Cryftal by PreiTion or Motion propagated, has
not hitherto been attempted ( to my knowledge)
except by Huygms^ who for that end fuppofed
two feveral vibrating Mediums within that Cry-
ftal. But when he tried the Refradions in two
fucceffive pieces of that Cryftal , and found
them fuch as is mention'd above; he confef-
fed himfelf at a lofs for explaining them. For
PrefTions or Motions, propagated from a Ihining
Body through an uniform Medium, muft be
on all fides alike j whereas by thofe Experi-
ments it appears, that the Rays of Light have
different Properties in their different Sides. He
fufpeded that the Pulfes of /Ether in pafling
through the firft Cryftal might receive certain
new Modifications, which might determine
them to be propagated in this or that Medium
within the fecond Cryftal, according to tht
Pofition of that Cryftal.
M^is tour dirt comment But what Modifications
ceU fe fait, jenay rlen ^l^^fgmight be he COuld
trove jufqu id qui me fa- r. ^ i r•
i

tisfaje. c. H. de la iumi- Hot lay, nor think of any


ere. c. 5. p. 91. thing fatisfadory in that
Point. And if he had
knov^n that the unufual Refradlion depends not
on new Modifications, but on the original and
unchangeable Difpofitionsof theRays, he would
have found it as difficult to explain how thofe
Pifpofitions which he fuppofed to be imprefs'd
_ on
BOOK IIL 339
on the Rays by the firft Cryftal, could be in

them before Incidence on that Cryftal,


their
and in general, how all Rays emitted by £hi-
ning Bodies, can have thpfe Difpofitions in
them from the beginning. To me , at leafl:,
this feems inexplicable if Light be nothing
,.

elfe than Preffion or Motion propagated through


Mther,
And it is as difficult to explain by thefe Hy-
pothefes, how Rays can be alternately in Fits
of eafy Reflexion and eafy Tranfmiffion j unlefs
perhaps one might fuppofe that there are in all
Space two ^Ethereal vibrating Mediums, and
that the Vibrations of one of them conftitute
Light, and the Vibrations of the other are fwift-
er, and as often as they overtake the Vibrations
of the firft, put them into thofe Fits. But how
two Mthers can be diffufed through all Space,
one of which ads upon the other, and by con-
fequence is re-a<5led upon, without retarding,
fliattering, difperling and confounding one an-
others Motions, is inconceivable. And againft
filling the Heavens with fluid Mediums, unlefs
they be exceeding rare, a great Objedion arifes
from the regular and very lafting Motions of
the Planets and Comets in all manner of Courfes
through the Heavens. For thence it is mani-
feft, that the Heavens are void of all fenfible

Refiftance, and by confequence of all fenfible


Matter.
For the refifling Power of fluid Mediums a-
rifes from the Attrition of the Parts of
partly
the Medium, and partly from the Vis inertia
of the Matter. That part of the Refiftance of
Z 2 afphe-
340 O P T I C K S.

a fpherical Body which arifes from the Attrition


of the Parts of the Medium is very nearly as the
Diameter, or, at the moft, as the FaSfum of the
Diameter, and the Velocity of the fpherical Bo-
dy together. And that part of the Reliflance
which arifes from the Vis inertia of the Matter,
is as the Square of that FaBiim. And by this
difference the two forts of Refiftance may be di-
flinguifh'd from one another in any Medium;
and thefe being diftinguifh'd, it will be found
that almoft all the Refiftance of Bodies of a com-
petent Magnitude moving-in Air, Water, Quick-
filver, and fuch like Fluids with a competent Ve-
locity, arifes from the Vis inertice of the Parts of
the Fluid.
Now that part of the refifting Power of any
Medium which arifes from the Tenacity, Fri-
ction or Attrition of the Parts of the Medium,
may be dimini(h'd by dividing the Matter into
fmaller Parts, and making the Parts more fmooth
and flippery: But that part of the Refiftance
which arifes from the Vis inerti(X, is proportio-
nal to the Denfity of the Mattel, and cannot be
diminifh'd by dividing the Matter into fmaller
Parts, nor by any other means than by decrea-
iing the Denlity of the Medium. And for thefe
Reafons the Denlity of fluid Mediums is very
nearly proportional to their Refiftance. Li-
quors which differ not much in Denfity, as Wa-
ter, Spirit of Wine, Spirit of Turpentine, hot
Oil, differ not much in Refiftance. Water is
thirteen or fourteen times lighter than Quick-
. iilver, and by confequence thirteen or fourteen
times rarer, and its Refiftance is lefs than that
of
BOOK III. 341
of Quick-filver in the fame Proportion, or there-
abouts, as I have found by Experiments made
with Pendulums. The open Air in which we
breathe is eight or nine hundred times lighter
than Water, and by confequence eight or nine
hundred times rarer, and accordingly its Refi-
ftance is lefs than that of Water -in the fame
Proportion, or thereabouts j as I have alfo found
by Experiments made with Pendulums. And in
thinner Air the Reiiftance is ftill lefs, and at
length, by ratifying the Air, becomes infenfi-
ble. For fmall Feathers falling in the open Air
meet with great Refiftance, but in a tall Glafs
well emptied of Air, they fall as fail as Lead or
Gold, have feen tried feveral times. Whence
as I
the Refiftance feems ftill to decreafe in propor-
tion to the Denlity of the Fluid. For I do not
find by any Experiments, that Bodies moving
in Quick-filver, Water or Air, meet with any
oaher fenfible Refiftance than what arifes from
the Denfity and Tenacity of thofe fenfible Flu-
ids, as they would do if the Pores of thofe Flu-
ids, and all other Spaces, were filled with a
denfe and fubtile Fluid. Now if the Refiftance
in a Veffel well emptied of Air, was but an
hundred times lefs than in the open Air, it
would be about a million of times lefs than in
Quick- filver. But it feems to be much lefs in
fuch a Veffel, and. ftill much lefs in the Hea-
vens, at the height of three or four hundred
Miles from the Earth, or above. For Mr. Boyle
has fliew'd that Air may be rarified above ten
thoufand times in VefTels of Glafs j and the
Heavens are much emptier of Air than any Va-^
23. cuiim
342 O P T I C K S.

cuum we can make below. For fmce the Air


is comprefs'd by the Weight of the incumbent

Atmoiphere., and the Denfity of Air is propor-


tional to the Force compreffing it, it follows by
Computation, that at the lieight of about fe-
ven and a half Engliflj Miles from the Earth, the
Air is four times rra-er than at the Surface of the
Earth J and at the height of 15 Miles it is fix-
teen times rarer than that at the Surface of the
Earth J and at the height of 22^, 30, or 38 Miles,
it is refpedively 64, 256, or 1024 times rarer,

or thereabouts J and at the height of 76, 152,


228 Miles, it is about loooooo, 1 000000000000,
or loooGOOoooooooooooo times rarer j and fo
on.
Heat promotes Fluidity very much, by dimi-
nifliing the Tenacity of Bodies. It makes ma-

ny Bodies fluid which are not fluid in cold, and


increafes the Fluidity of tenacious Liquids, as
of Oil, Balfam, and Honey, and thereby de-
creafes their Refiftance. But it decreafes not
the Refiftance of Water confiderably, as it would
do if any confiderable part of the Refiftance of
Water from the Attrition or Tenacity of
arofe
its Parts. And therefore the Refiftance of Wa-
ter arifes principally and almoft entirely from
the Vis inertice of its Matter j and by confe-
quence, if the Heavens were as denfe as War»
ter, they would not have much lefs Refiftance
than Water Jif as denfe as Quick-filver, they
would not have much lefs Refiftance than Quicks
filver; if abfolutely denfe, or full of Matter
without any Vacimm^ let the Matter be never
fo fubtil and fluid, they would have a greater
Refiftance
BOOK m. 343
Refiftance than Qulck-filver. A folid Globe in
fuch a Medium would above half its Mo-
lofe
tion in moving three times the length of its
Diameter, and a Globe not folid ( fuch as are
the Planets, ) would be retarded fooner. And
therefore to make way for the regular and lad-
ing Motions of the Planets and Comets,- it's ne-
ceffary to empty the Pleavens of all Matter, ex%
cept perhaps fome very thin Vapours, Steams,
or Effluvia, arifmg from the Atmofpheres of the
Earth, Planets, and Comets, and from fuch an
exceedingly rare ;^thereal Medium as we de-
fcribed above. A denfe Fluid can be of no ufe
foi- explaining the Phaenomena of Nature, the

Motions of the Planets and Comets being better


explain'd without it. It ferves only to difturb
and' retard the Motions of thofe great Bodies,
and make the Frame of Nature languifh And :

in the Pores of Bodies, it ferves only to ftop


the vibrating Motions of their Parts, wherein
their Heat and A<fl:ivity conlifts. And as it is
of no ufe, and hinders the Operations of Na-
ture, and makes her languifn, fo there is no e-
vidence for its Exiftence, and therefore it oueht
to be rejected. And if it be rejeded, the Hy-
pothefes that Light confiils in Preffion or Mo-
tion, propagated through fuch a Medium, are
rejeded with it.
And for rejeding fuch a Medium, we have
the Authority of thofe the oldeft and moll ce-
lebrated Philofophers -of Greece and Phcenkiay
who made aVacuum^ and Atoms, and the Gra-
vity of Atoms, the firft Principles of their Phi-
lofophyj tacitly attributing Gravity to fo.Ec- o-
Z 4 thci
344- O P T I C K S.

ther Caufe than denfe Matter. Later Philofo-


phers baniili the Confi deration of fuch a Caufe
out of natural Philofophy, feigning Hypothefes
for explaining all things mechanically, and re-
ferring other Caufes to Metaphylicks Whereas :

the main Bufniefs of natural Philofophy is to


argue from Phcenomena without feigning Hy-
pothefes, and to deduce Caufes from Effects,
till we come to the very firft Caufe, which cer-

tainly is not mechanical ; and not only to un-


fold the Mechanifm of the World, but chiefly
to refolve thefe and fuch like Queftions. What
is there in places almofl empty of Matter, and

whence is it that the Sun and Planets gravitate


towards one another, without denfe Matter be-
tween them ? Whence is it that Nature doth
nothing in vain ; and whence arifes all that Or-
der and Beauty which we fee in the World ?
To what end are Comets, and whence is it that
Planets move all one and the fame way in Orbs
concentrick, while Comets move all manner of
ways in Orbs very excentrick ; and what hinders
the fix'd Stars from falling upon one another ?
How came the Bodies of Animals to be contri-
ved with fo much Art, and for what ends were
their feveral Parts ? Was the Eye contrived
without Skill in Opticks, and the Ear without
Knowledge of Sounds ? Plow do the Motions
of the Body follow from the Will, and whence
is the Inftindt in Animals ? Is not the Senfory of

Animals that place to which the fenfitive Sub-


itance is prefent, and into which the fenfible
Species of Things ap carried through jthe Nerves
and Brain, that there they may be perceived
BOOK III.
345
by their immediate prefence to that Scbftancc ?
And thefe things being rightly difpatch'd, does
it not appear from Plia^nomena that there is a
Being incorporeal, living, intelligent, omnipre-
fent, who in infinite Space, as it were in his Sen-

fory, fees the things themfelves intimately, and


throughly perceives them, and comprehends
them wholly by their immediate prefence to
himfelf Of which things the Images only car-
:

ried through the Organs of Senfe into pur little


Senforiums, are there feen and beheld by that
which in us perceives and thinks. And though
every true Step made in this Philofophy brings us
not immediately to the Knowledge of the firll
Caufe, yet it brings us nearer to it, and on that
account is to be highly valued.
^. 29. Are not the Rays of Light very
fmall Bodies emitted from lliining Subllances ?
For fuch Bodies will pafs through uniform Me-
diums in right Lines without bending into the
Shadow, which is the Nature of the Rays of
Light. They will alfo be capable of feveral
Properties, and be able to conferve their Pro-
perties unchanged in paffing through feveral
Mediums, which is another Condition of thq
Rays of Light. Pellucid Subllauces a6t upon
the Rays of Light at a diftance in refracting-, re-
flecting, and inflecting them, and the Rays m.u-
tually agitate the Parts of thofe Subfl:ances at ^a
difl:arce for heating them i and this ACtion and
Re-aUion at a difl:ance very much refembles an
attractive Force between Bodies. If RefraCtion
be perform'd by Attraction of the Rays, the
Sines of Incidencs muft be to the Sines of Re-
fraCtion
346 O P T I C K S.

fraftion in a given Proportion, as we {hew'd in


our Principles of Philofophy And this Rule is :

true by Experience. The Rays of Light in


going out of Giafs into a Vacuum^ are bent to-
wards the Glafs ; and if they fall too obliquely
on the Vacuum^ they are bent backwards into
the Glafs, and totally reflected j and this Refle- ^

xion cannot be afcribed to the Refiftance of an


abfolute Vacuum^ but muft be caufed by the
Power of the Glafs attracting the Rays at their
going out of it into the Vacuum^ and bringing
them back. For if the farther Surface of the
Glafs be moiflen'd with Water or clear Oil, or
liquid and clear Honey, the Rays which would
otherwife be refleded will go into the Water,
Oil, or Honey ; and therefore are not refle(5ted
before they arrive at the farther Surface of the
Glafs, and begin to go out of it. If they go out
of it into the Water, Oil, or Honey, they
go on, becaufe the Attraction of the Glafs is
almoft balanced and rendered ineffectual by
the contrary Attraction of the .Liquor. But if
they go out of it into a Vacuum which has no
Attraction to balance that of the Glals, the At-
traction of the Glafs either bends and refraCts
them, or brings them back and reflects them.-
And this is ftill more evident by laying together
two Prifms of or two ObjeCt-glaSes of
Glafs,
very long Telefcopes, the one plane, the o-
ther a little convex, and fo compreffing them
that they do not fully touch, nor are too far a-
funder. For the Light which upon the
falls
farther Surface of the firfl Glafs where the In-
terval between the Glaffes is not above the ten
hundred
BOOK III.
347
hundred thoufandrh Part of an Inch, will go
through that Surface, and through tbe Air or
Vacuum between the GlaiTes, and enter into the
fecondGlafs, as was explain'd in the firft, fourth,
and eighth Obfervations of the firft Part of the
fecond Book. But, if the fecond Glafs be taken
away, the Light which goes out of the fecond
Surface of the. firft Glafs into the Air or Va-
cuum^ will not go on forwards, but turns back
into the firft Glafs, and is reflecftcd and there-
;

fore it is drawn back by the Power of the firft


Glafs, there being nothing elfe to turn it back.
Nothing more is producing all the
requifite for
variety of Colours, and degrees of Refrangibi-
lity, than that the Rays of Light be Bodies of
different Sizes, of which may take
the leaft
violet the weakeft and darkeft of the Colours,
and be more cafily diverted by refrad:ing Sur-
faces from the right Courfe ; and the reft as
they are bigger and bigger, may make tlie
ftronger and more lucid Colours, blue, green,
yellow, and red, and be more and more diHi-
cultly diverted. Nothing more is requifite for
putting the Rays of Light into Fits of eafy Re-
flexionand eafy Tranfmiffion, than that they be
fmall Bocjies which by their attractive Powers,
or fome other Force, ftir up Vibrations in what
they ad; upon, which Vibrations being fwifter
than the Rays, overtake them fucceftively, and
agitate them fo as by turns to increafe and de-
creafe their Velocities, and thereby put them
into thofe Fits. And laftly, the unufual Refra-
(ftion of Ifland-Cryftal looks very much as if it
were perform'd by fome kind of attractive vir-
tue
348 O P T I C K S.

tue lodged in certain Sides both of the Rays,


and of the Particles of the Cryftal. For were
it not for* fome kind of Difpofition or Virtue

lodged in fome Sides of the Particles of the


Cryflal, and not in their other Sides, and which
inclines and bends the Rays towards the Coafl
of unufual Refraction, the Rays which fall per-
pendicularly on the Cryllal, would not be re-
fraded towards that Coafl rather than towards
any other Coaft, both at their Incidence and at
their Emergence, fo as to emerge perpendicu-
larly by a contrary Situation of the Coaft of
unufual Refradion at the fecond Surface ; the
Cryftal acting upon the Rays after they have
pafs'd through it, and are emerging into the
Air; or, if you pieafe, into a V aciium' And
lince the Cryftal by this Difpofition or Virtue
does not ad: upon the Rays, unlefs when one
of their Sides of unufual Refradion looks to-
wards that Coaft, this argues a Virtue or Difpo-
fition in thofe Sides of the Rays, which an-
fwers to, and fympathizes with that Virtue or
Difpofition of the Cryftal, as the Poles of two
Magnets anfwer to one another. And as Mag-
netifm may be intended and remitted, and is
found only in the Magnet 2nd in Iron So this :

Virtue of refrading the perpendicular Rays is


greater in Ifland-Cryftal, lefs- in Cryftal of the
Rock, and is not yet found in other Bodies. I
do not fay that this Virtue magnetical
is It :

feems to be of another kind. I only fay, that


wnatever it be, it's difficult to conceive how
the Rays of Light, unlefs they be Bodies, can
have a permanent Virtue in two of their Sides
I which
BOOK III.
349
which is not in their other Sides,and this without
any regard to their PoUtion to the Space or Me-
dium through which they pafs.
What I mean in this Queftion by a Vacuum^
and by the Attradions of the Rays of Light to-
wards Giafs or Cryftal, may be undcrftood by '

what was faid in the i8th, 19th, and 20th Que-


ftions.
^eji. 30. Are not grofs Bodies and Light con-
vertible intoone another, and may not Bodies re-
ceive much of their A(^l:ivity from the Particles
of Light which enter their Compofition? For all
fix'd Bodies being heated emit Light fo long as
they continue fufficiently hot, and Light mutually
flops in Bodies as often as its Rays ftrike upon
their Parts, as we fliew'd above. I know no
Body apt to fliine than Water; and yet Wa-
lefs

ter by frequent Diftillations changes into fix'd


Earth, as Mr.Boy/e^ has try'd ; and then this Earth
being enabled to endure a fufficient Heat, {hines
by Heat like other Bodies.
The changing of Bodies into Light, and Light
into Bodies, is very conformable to the Courfe
of Nature, which feems delighted with Tranf-
mutations. Water, which is a very fluid taflelefs
Salt, fhe changes by Heat into Vapour, which is
a fort of Air, and by Cold into Ice, which is a
hard, pellucid, brittle, fufible Stone ; and this
Stone returns into Water by Heat, and Vapour
returns into Water by Cold. Earth by Heat be-
comes Fire, and by Cold returns into Earth.
Denfe Bodies by Fermentation rarify into feve-
ral forts of Air, and this Air by Fermentation,
and fometimes without it, returns into denfe
Bodies.
;

350 O P T I C K S.

Bodies. Mercury appears fometimes in the form


of a fluid Metal,fometimes in the form of a hard
brittle Metal, fometimes in the form of a corro-
live pellucid Salt call'd Sublimate, fometimes in
the form of a taftelefs, pellucid, volatile white
Earth, call'd Mercip^ius Dulcis j or in that of a
red opake volatile Earth, call'd Cinnaber j or in
that of a red or vv^hite Precipitate, or in that of
a fluid Salt ; and in Diftillation it turns into
Vapour, and being .agitated i?i VaciiOj it fhines
like Fire. And Changes it re-
after all thefe
turns again into its firfl: form of Mercury.
Eggs grow from infenfible Magnitudes, and
change into Animals j Tadpoles into Frogs
and Worms into Flies. All Birds, Beaflis and
Fifhes, Infers, Trees, and other Vegetables,
with their feveral Parts, grow out of Water
and watry Tinctures and Salts, and by Putre-
fadtion return again into watry Subftances. And
Water ftanding a few Days in the open Air,
yields aTindurc, which (like that of Malt) by
ftanding longer yields a Sediment and a Spi-
rit, but before Putrefaction is fit Nourifhment

for Animals and Vegetables. And among fuch


various- and fl:range Tranfmutations, why may
not Nature change Bodies into Light, and Light
into Bodies ?

^leji. 3 1. Have not the fmall Particles of Bo-


dies certain Powers, Virtues, or Forces, by which
they adt at a diftance, not only upon the Rays
of Light for reflecting, refra(fling, and inflect-
ing them, but alio upon one another for pro-
ducing a great Part of the Phaenomena of Na-
ture ? For it's well known, that Bodies ad:
one
BOOK TIL 351
one upon anotlier by the Attradions of Gravity,
Magnetifm, and Eledtricity j and thefe Inftances
ihew the Tenor and Courfe of Nature, and make
it not improbable but that there may be more at-

tradlive Powers than thefe. For Nature is very


confonant and conformable to her felf How
thefe Attradtions may be perform'd, I do not here
confider. What I call Attraction may be per-
form'd by impulfe, or by fome other means un-
known to me. I ufe that Word here to fignify
only in general any Force by which Bodies tend
towards one another, whatfoever be the Caufe.
For we muft learn from the Phcenomena of
Nature what Bodies attradt one another, and
what are the Laws and Properties of the At-
traction, before we enquire the Caufe by which
the Attraction is perform'd. . The Attractions of
Gravity, Magnetifm, and EleCtricity, reach to
very fenfible diflances, and fo have been obferved
by vulgar Eyes, and there may be others which
reach to fo fmall diflances as hitherto efcape Ob-
fervation j and perhaps eleCtrical Attraction may
reach to fuch fmall diftances, even without being
excited by FriCtion.
For when Salt of Tartar runs per IDeliquium,
is not this done by an Attraction between the

Particles of the Salt of Tartar, and the Parti-


cles of the Water which float in the Air in the
form of Vapours ? And why does not common
Salt, or Salt-petre, or Vitriol, run per Deliqimirn^
but for want of fuch an Attraction ? Or why
docs not -Salt of Tartar drav^^ more Water out
of the Air than in a certain Proportion to its
quantity, but for want of an attractive Force
2 after
^52 O P T I C K S.

after it is fatiated with Water ? And whence


is it but from this attractive Power that Water

which alone diftils with a gentle luke-warm


Heat, will not diftil from Salt of Tartar with-
out a great Heat ? And is it not from the like
attractive Power between the Particles of Oil of
Vitriol and the Particles of Water, that Oil of
Vitriol draws to good quantity of Water
it a
out of the Air, and after it is fatiated draws no
more, and in Diftillation lets go the Water very
difficultly ? And when Water and Oil of Vi-
triol poured fucceffively into the fame Veffel
grow very hot in the mixing, does not this
Heat argue a great Motion in the Parts of the
Liquors ? And does not this Motion argue, that
- the Parts of the two Liquors in mixing coa-
lefce with Violence, and by confequence rufli to-
wards one another with an accelerated Mo-
tion ? And when Aqua fortis, or Spirit of Vi-
triol poured upon Filings of Iron, dilTolves the
Filings with a great Heat and Ebullition, is not
this Heat and Ebullition effected by a violent
Motion of the Parts, and does' not that Motion
argue that the acid Parts of the Liquor rufh to-
wards the Parts of the Metal with violence,
and run forcibly into its Pores till they get be-
tween its outmoft Particles, and the main Mafs
of the Metal, and furrounding thofe Particles
loofen them from the main Mafs, and fet them
at liberty to float off into the Water ? And
when the acid Particles, which alone would
diftil with an eafy Heat, will not feparate from
the Particles of the Metal without a very vio-
lent
BOOK III. 353
lent Heat, does not this confirm the Attradtioa
between them ?

When Spirit of Vitriol poured upon com-


mon Salt or Salt-petre makes, an Ebulhtion with
'

the Salt, and unites wich it, and in Diftillatian


the Spirit of the common Salt 'or Salt-petre
comes over much eafier than it would do be-
fore, and the acid part of the Spirit of Vitriol
ilays behind j does not this argue that the fi:<'d
Alcaly of the Salt attrads the acid Spirit ot the
Vitriol more ftrongly than its own Spirit, and
not being able to hold them both, lets go its
own? And when Oil of Vitriol is draw^n off
from its weight of Nitre and from both the
j

Ingredients a compound Spirit of Nitre is diflil-


led, and two parts of this Spirit are poured on
one part of Oil of Cloves or Carraway Seeds, or. of
any ponderous Oil of vegetable or animal Sub-
ftanCes, or Oil of Turpentine thicken'd with a
little Balfam of Sulphur, and the Liquors grow fo

very hot in mixing, as prefently to fend up a burn-


ing Flame does not this very great and fudden
;

Heat argue that the two Liquors mix with vio-


lence, and that their Parts in mixing run to-
wards one another with an accelerated Motion,
and cla(h with the greateft Force ? And is it
not for the fame reafon that well redlified Spi-
rit of Wine poured on the fame compound Spi-
rit fla{hes*f and that the Piilvis fuUninam, com-

pofed of Sulphur, Nitre, and Salt of Tartar,


goes off with a more fudden and violent Ex-
plofion than Gun-powder, the acid Spirits of
the Sulphur and Nitre ruihing towards one an-
other, and towards the Salt of Tartar, with fo
aA great
354- O P T I C K S.

great a violence, as by the (hock to turn the


whole at once into Vapour and Flame ? Where
the DilTolution is flow, it makes a flow Ebulli-
tion and a gentle Heat j and where it is quick-
er:, it makes a greater Ebullition with more
heat ; and where it is done at once, the Ebul-
lition is contraded into a fudden Blaft or vio-
lent Explofion, with a heat equal to that of
Fire and Flame. So when a Drachm of the a-
bove-mention'd compound Spirit of Nitre was
poured upon half a Drachm of Oil of Carraway
Seeds i?i vaciio^ the Mixture immediately made
a flafh like Gun-powder, and burll the ex-
haufted Receiver, which was a Glafs fix Inches
wide, and eight Inches deep. And even the
grofs Body of Sulphur powder'd, and with an
equal weight of Iron Filings and a little Water
made into Pafte, ads upon the Iron,* and in five
or fix hours grows too hot to be touch'd, and
emits a Flame, And by thefe Experiments com-
pared with the great quantity of Sulphur with
which the Earth abounds, and the warmth of
the interior Parts of the Earth, and hot Springs,
and burning Mountains, and with Damps, mi-
neral Corufcations, Earthquakes,
hot fuffoca-
ting Exhalations, Flurricanes, and Spouts; we
may learn, that fulphureous Steams abound in
the Bowels of the Earth and ferment with Mi-
nerals, and fomietim^es take fire with a fudden
Corufcatlon and Explofion; and if pent up in
fubterraneous Caverns, burfl the Caverns with a
great {baking of the Earth, as in fpringing of a
Mine. And then the Vapour generated by the
Explofion, expiring through the Fores of the
3 Earth,
BOOK III.
355
Earth, feels hot and fuffocateSj and iiiakes Tem-«
pefls and Hurricanes, and fometimes caufes the"
Land to Hide, or the Sea to boil, and carries
up the Water thereof in Drop3, which by their
weight fall down again in Spouts, ^xlfo fome
fulphureous Steams, at all times when the Earth
is dry, afcending into the Air, ferment there
with nitrous Acids^ and fometimes taking fire
caufe Lightning and Thunder, and fiery Me-
teors. For the Air abounds with acid Vapours
fit to promote Fermentations, as appears by the-

rufling of Iron and Copper in it, the kindling


of Fire by blowing, and the beating of the
Heart by means of Refpiration. Now the a-
bove-mention'd Motions are fo great and violent
as to fhew t]iat in Fermentations the Particles of
Bodies which almofi: reft, are put into new Mo-
tions by a very potent Principle, w^hich ad:s up-
on them only when they approach one another,
and caufes them to meet and clafh with 2;reat vi*
olence, and grow hot with the motion, and dafli
one another into pieces, and vapifli into Air, and
Vapour, and Flame.
When Salt of Tartar per deliqiiium^ being
poured into the Solution of any Metal, preci-
pitates the Metal, and makes it fail down to the
bottom of the Liquor in the form of Mud:
Does not this argue tliat the acid Particles are
attracted more ftrong-ly by the Salt of Tartar
than by the Metal, and by the ftronger Attra-
d:ion go from the Metal to the Salt of Tartar ?
And fo when a Solution of Iron in Anna forth
diffolves the Lapis Calciminarh^ and lets go the
Iron, or a Solution of Copper difiblves Iron im-
Aa 2 merfed
; ;

356 O P T I C K S.

irierfed in it and
go the Copper, or a So-
lets
'4ution of Silver difTolves Copper and lets go the
Silver, or a Solution of Mercury in Aquafortis
being poured upon Iron, Copper, Tin, or Lead,
difTolves the Metal and lets go the Mercury
does not this argue that the acid Particles of
the Aqua fortis are attracted more ftrongly by
the Lapis Calamniaris than by Iron, and more
flrongly by Iron than by Copper, and more
ftrongly by Copper than by Silver j and more
ftrongly by Iron, Copper, Tin, and Lead, than
by Mercury ? And is it not for the fame reafon
that Iron requires more Aqua fortis to dilTolve
it than Copper, and Copper more than the other
Metals and that of all Metals, Iron is dilTolved
;

moft eafily, and is mofi: apt to ruft ; and next af-


ter Iron, Copper?
When Oil of Vitriol mix'd w^ith a little
is

Water, or is run per deliquiuni^ and in Diftil-


lation the Water afcends difficultly, and brings
over v^rith it fome part of the Oil of Vitriol in

the form of Spirit of Vitriol, and this Spirit be-


ing poured upon Iron, Copper,' or Salt of Tar-
tar, unites with the Body and lets go the Wa-
ter doth not this fliew that the acid Spirit is at-
'j

traded by the Water, and more attracted by


the fix'd Body than by the Water, and there-
fore lets go the Water to clofe v^ith the fix'd
Body ? And is it not for the fame reafon that
the Water and acid Spirits which are mix'd to-
gether in Vinegar, Aqua fortis^ and Spirit of
Salt, cohere and rife together in Diftillation
but if the Mejiftruum be poured on Salt of Tar-
tar, or on Lead, or Iron, or any fix'd Body
which
BOOK III.
357
which can diflblve, the Acid by a fironger At-
it

traction adheres to the Body, and lets go ths


Water ? And is it not alfo from a mutual At-
tracftion that the Spirits o£ Soot and Sea-Sak
unite and compofe the Panicles of Sal-armo-
niac, which are lefs volatile than before, be-
caufe grofler and frc€r from Water ; and that
the Particles of Sal-armoniac in Sublimation car-
ry up the Particles of Antimony, which will not
fublime alone ; and that the Particles of Mer-
cury uniting with the acid Particles of Spirit
of Saltcompofe Mercury fublimate, and with
the Particles of Sulphur, compofe Cinnaber;
and that the Particles of Spirit of Wine and
Spirit of Urine well redlitied unite, and letting
go the Water which dillblved them, compofe a
confident Body; and that in fubliming Cinna-
ber from Salt of Tartar, or from quick Lime,
the Sulphur by a ftronger Attraftion of the Salt
or Lime lets go the Mercury, and flays with
the fix'd Body and that when Mercury fubli-
;

mate is fublimed from Antimony, or from Re-


gulus of Antimony, the Spirit of Salt lets go the
Mercury, and unites with the antimonial Me-
tal which attracts it more ftrongly, and ftays
with it till the Heat be great enough to make
them both afcend together, 'and then carries
up the Metal with it form of a very fu^
in the
fible Salt, called Butter of Antimony, although
the Spirit of Salt alone be almoft as volatile as
Water, and the Antimony alone as fix'd as
Lead ?

When yi^ua fortis diffolves Silver and not


Gold, and Aqua regia diffolves Gold and not
Aa 3 Silver,
35^ O P T I C K S.

Silver, may it not be faid that Aqua forth is

fubtil enough to penetrate Gold as well as Sil-

ver, but wants the attracflive Force to give it


Entrance j and that Aqua regia is fubtil enough
to penetrate Silver as v/ell as Gold, but wants
the attractive Force to give it Entrance ? For
Aqua rcgia is nothing elfe than Aqua fortis
mix'd v/ith fome Spirit of Salt, or with Sal-ar-
moniac J
and even common Salt diiTolved in A-^
qua fcrtis^ en.ibies the Metijiruwrn to dilfolve
Gold, though the Salt be a grofs Body. When
therefore Spirit of Snlt precipitates Silver out
of Aqua fortis^ is it not done by attrading and
jnixing with the Aqua Jortisy and not attrad:-
jng, or perhaps repelling Silver? And when
Water precipitates Antimony out of the
Subli-
mate of Antimony and Sal-armoniac, or out of
putter of Antimony, is it not done by its dif^
folving, mixing with, and weakening the Sal^
grmoniac or Spirit of Salt, and its not attract-
ing, or perhaps repelling the Antimony ? And
is it not for want of an attradive virtue be-
tween the Parts of Water and Oil, of Quick-^
lilver and Antimony, of Lead and Iron, that
thefe Subllances do not mixj .and by a weak
Attradion, that Quick-filver and Copper mix
difiicultly j and fi'om a flrong one, that Quick-
filver. and Tin, Antimony and Iron, Water and

Salts, mix readily? And in general, is it not

from the fame Principle that Heat congregates;


homogeneal Bodies, and feparates heterogeneal
ones?
When Arfenick with Soap gives a Regulus^
and with Mercury fublimate a volatile fufible
^
Salt,
BOOK III. 359
Salt, like Butter of.Antimony, doth not this
lliew that Arfenick, which is a Subftance totally
volatile, is compounded of fix'd and volatile
Parts, ftrongly cohering by a mutual Attradion,
fo that the volatile will not afcend without car-
rying up the fixed ? And fo, when an equal
weight of Spirit of Wine and Oil of Vitriol
are digefted together, and in Diftillation yield
two fragrant and volatile Spirits which will not
mix with one another, and a fix'd black Earth
remains behind ; doth not this fliew that Oil of
Vitriol is compofed of volatile and fix'd Parts
ftrongly united by Attradion, fo as to afcend to-
gether in form of a volatile, acid, fluid Salt,
until the Spirit of Wine attrads and feparates
the volatile Parts from the fixed ? And there-
fore, fince Oilof Sulphur per Campcmam is of
the fame Nature with Oil of Vitriol, may it not
be inferred, that Sulphur is alfo a mixture of
volatile and fix'd Parts fo ftrongly cohering by
Attradion, as to afcend together in Sublima-
tion. By diflblving Flowers of Sulphur in Oil
of Turpentine, and diftilling the Solution, it is
found that Sulphur is compofed of an inflama-
ble thick Oil or fat Bitumen, an acid Salt, a
very fix'd Earth, and a little Metal. The three
firfl were found not much unequal to one
another, the fourth in fo fmall a quantity as
fcarce to beworth confidering. The acid Salt
Water, is the fame with Oil of Sul-
difix)lved in
phur per Campanam, arid abounding .much in
the Bowels of the Earth, and particularly in
Markafites, unites it felf to the other Ingredi-
ents of the Markafite, which are. Bitumen, I-
A a 4 ron,
360 O P T I C K S.

ron. Copper, and Earth, acid with them corn-


pounds Alkim, Vitriol, and Sulphur. With the
Earth alone it compounds AUum ; with the Me-
tal alone, or Metal and Earth together, it com-
pounds Vitriol; and with the Bitumen and Earth
it compounds Sulphur. Whence it comes to
pafs that Markances abound v/ith thofe three Mi-
nerals. And is it not from the mutual Attradtior^
of the Ingredients that they ftick together for
ccmpoundins; thefe Minerals, and that the Bitu-
men carries up the other Ingredients of the Sul-
phur, which without it would not fublime ? And
the fame Queftion may be* put concerning all,
or almofc all the grofs Bodies in Nature. For
all the Parts of Animals and Vegetables are com-
pofed of Subftances volatile and fix'd, fluid and
folid, as appears by their Analyfis ; and fo
are Salts and Minerals, fo far as Chymifls have
been hitherto abl? to examine their Compofi-
tion.
When Mercury fublimate is re-fublimed with
frefh Mercury, and becomes Mercurius Dulcis^
which is a white taftelefs Earth fcarce dilTolva-
ble in Water, and Mercurius Dulcis re-fublimed
with Spirit of Salt returns into Mercury fubli-
mate ; and when Metals corrpded with a little
acid turn into ruft, which is an Earth taftelefs
and indiffolvable in Water, and this Earth im-
bibed with more acid becomes a metallick

Salt ; and when fome Stones, as Spar of Lead,


diifolv^d in proper M^nfiruums become Salts ;
do not thef.:; tilings fhew that Salts are dry Earth
and watry Acid united by Attradion, and that
the Earth \\all not become a Salt without fq
muql^
BOOK III. 361
much acid as makes it diffolvable in Water ? Do
not the {harp and pungent Taftes of Acids
arife from the ftrong Attradtion whereby the
acid Particles rufli upon and agitate the Par-
ticles of the Tongue ? And when Metals are dif-
folved in acid MenJi?'immSy and the Acids in
conjunction with the Metal ad after a different
manner, fo that the Compound has a different
Tafte much milder than before, and fometimes
a fweet one is it not becaufe the Acids ad-,
j

here to the metallick Particles, and thereby


lofe much of their Aftivity ? And if the Acid
be in too fmall a Proportion to make the Com-
pound diffolvable inWater, will it not by ad-
hering flrongly to the Metal become unadive and
lofe its Tafle, and the Compound be a taflelefs
Earth ? For fuch things as are not diffolvable by
the Moiflure of the Tongue, ad not upon the
Tafle.
As Gravity makes the Sea flow round the
deafer and weightier Parts of the Globe of the
Earth, fo the Attraction may make the watry
Acid flow round the denfer and compader Par-
ticlesof Earth for compofing the Particles of
Salt. For otherwife the Acid would not do
the Ofhce of a Medium between the Earth and
common Water, for making Salts diffolvable in
the Water nor would Salt of Tartar readily
j

draw off the Acid from diffolved Metals, nor


Metals the Acid from Mercury. Now, as in the
great Globe of the Earth and Sea, the denfefl
Bodies by their Gravity fink down in Water,
^nd always endeavour to go towards the Cen-
ter of the 'Globe; fo in Particles of Salt, the
denfefl
362 O P T I C K S.

denfcft Matter may always endeavour approach


to
the Center of the Particle So that a Particle of
:

Salt may be compared to a Chaos ; being denfe,


hard, diy, and earthy in the Center j and rare,
foft, moift, and watry -in the Circumference.
And hence it feems to be that Salts are of a
lafting Nature, bejng fcarce dellroy'd, unlefs by
drawing away their watry Parts by violence,
or by letting them foak into the Pores of the
central Earth by a gentle Heat in Putrefa-
ction, until the Earth be diflblved by the Wa-
ter, and feparated into fmaller Particles, which
by reafon of their Smallnefs make the rotten
Compound appear of a black Colour. Hence
ilfo It may be, that the Parts of Animals and
"Vegetables preferve their feveral Forms, and
affimilate their Nouriihment j the foft and moift
Nourifhment eafily changing its Texture by a
gentle Heat and Motion, till it becomes like the
denfe, hard, dry, and durable Earth in the Cen-
ter of each Particle. But when the Nourilh-
ment grows unfit to be allimilated, or the cen-
tral Earth grows too feeble to affimilate it, the
Motion ends in Confufion, Putrefacftion, and
Death.
If a very fmall quantity of any Salt or Vitriol
be dilfolved in a great quantity of Water, the.
particles of the Salt or Vitriol will not fmk to
the bottom, though they be heavier in Specie
than the Water, but will eveidy diffufe them-
felves into all the Water, fo as to make it as fa-
line at the top as at the bottom. And does not
this imply that the Parts of the Salt or Vitriol
recede from one another, and endeavour to ex-
pand
BOOK III. 363
pand themfelves, and get as far afunder as the
quantity of Water in which they float, will al-
low ? And does not this Endeavour imply that
they have a repulfive Force by which they fly
from one another, or at leaft, that they attrad:
the Water more llrongly than they do one ano-
ther ? For as all things afcend in Water which
are lefs attraded than Water, by the gravitating
Power of the Earth fo all the Particles of Salt
j

which float in Water, and are lefs attraded than


Water by any one Particle of Salt, muil recede
from that Particle, and give way to the more at-
traded V/ater.
When any faline Liquor is evaporated to aCu-
ticle and let cool, the Salt concretes in regular
Figures j which argues, that the Particles of the
Salt before they concreted, floated in the Liquor
^t equal difl:ances in rank and file, and by confe-
quence that they aded upon one another by fome
Power which at equal diilances is equal, at une-
qual diftances unequal. For by fuch a Power
they will range themfelves uniformly, and with-
out it they will float irregularly, and come to-
gether as irregularly. And fmce the Particles
of Ifland-Cryftal ad all the fame way upon
the Rays of Light for caufing the unufual Re-
fradion, may it not be fuppofed that in the For-
mation of this Cryfl:al, the Particles not only
ranged themfelves in rank and file for concreting
in regular Figures, but alfo by fome kind of po-
lar Virtue turned their homogeneal Sides the
fame way.
The Parts of all homogeneal hard Bodies
which fully touch one another, flick together
N'ery
;

364 OPTIC K S.

very ftrongly. And for explaining how this


may be, fome have invented hooked Atoms,
which begging the Queftion^ and others tell
is

us that Bodies are glued together by reft, that


is, by an occult Quf.lity, or rather by nothing;

and others, that they flick together by confpi-


ring Motions, that is, by relative reft amongft .

themfelves. I had rather infer from their Co-


hefion, that their Particles attrad: one another by
fbme Force , which
immediate Contaft is ex-
in
ceeding ftrong, at fmall diftances performs the
chymical Operations above-mention'd and ,

reaches not far from the Particles with any fenfi-


ble -Effea.
All Bodies fcem to be compofed of hard Par-
ticles: For otherwife Fluids would not congeal 5
as Water, Oils, Vinegar and Spirit or Oil of
,

Vitriol do by freezing Mercury by Fumes of


;

Lead; Spirit of Nitre and Mercury, by diflbl-


ving the Mercury and evaporating the Flegm
Spirit of Wine and Spirit of Urine, by deflegm-
ing and mixing them; and Spirit of Urine and
Spirit of Salt, by fubliming them together to
make Sal-armoniac. Even the Rays of Light
feem to be hard Bodies ; for otherwife they
would not retain different Properties in their
different Sides, And therefore Hardnefs may
be reckon'd the Property of all uncompounded
Matter. At leaft, this feems to be as evident
as the univerfal Impenetrability of Matter. For
all Bodies, fo far as Experience reaches, are ei-
ther hard, or may be harden'd; and we have
no other Evidence of univerfal Impenetrability,
befides a large Experience without an experi-
mental
BOOK III. 365
mental Exception. Now if compound Bodies
are fo very hard as we find fome of them to
be, and yet are very porous, and confift of Parts
which are only laid together j the fimple Par-
ticles which are void of Pores, and were never
yet divided, muft be much harder. For fuch
hard Particles being heaped up together, can
fcarce touch one another in more than a few
Points, and therefore muft be feparable %by
much lefs Force than is requifite to break a fo~
lid Particle, whofe Parts touch in all the Space
between them, without any Pores or Interftices
to weaken their Cohelion. And how fuch ve-
ry hard Particles which are only laid together
and touch only .in a few Points, can flick toge-
ther, and that (b firmly as they do, without the
a{rifi;ance of fomething which caufes them to
be attracted or prefs'd towards one another, is
very difficult to conceive.
The fame thing I infer alfo from the cohe-
ring of two polifh'd Marbles in vacuo^ and from
tlie llanding of Quick-filver in the Barometer at
the height of 50, 60 or 70 Inches, or above,
when ever well-purged of Air and careful-
it is

ly poured in, fo that its Parts be every where


contiguous both to one another and to the
Glais. The Atmofphere by its weight prefles
the Quick-filver into the Glafs, to the height of
29 or 30 Inches. And fome other Agent railes
it higher, not by preihng it into the Glafs, but

by making its Parts flick to the Glafs, and to


one another. For upon any difcontinuation of
Parts, made either by Bubbles or by fhaking the
Glafs,
366 O P T I C K S.

Glafs, the whole Mercury falls down to the


height of 29 or 30 Inches.
And of the fame kind with thefe Experi-
ments are thofe that follow. If two plane po-
lifh'd Plates of Glafs ( fuppofe two pieces of a
polifh'd Looking-glafs ) be laid together, fo that
their fides be parallel and at a very fmall di-
ftance from one another, and then their lower
edggs be dipped into Water, the Water will
rife up between them. And the lei's the di-
ftance of the Glaffes is, the greater will be the
height to which the Water will rife. If the
diftance be about the hundredth part of an Inch,
the Water will rife to the height of about an
Inch J and if the diilance be greater or lefs in
any Proportion, the height will be reciprocally
proportional to the diftance very nearly. For
the attractive Force of the Glaffes is the fame,
whether the diftance between them be greater
or lefsi and the weight of tlie Water drawn
up is the fame, if the height of it be recipro-
cally proportional to the diftance of the Glaffes.
And in like manner Water afcends between
,

two Marbles polifti'd plane, when their poliftied


lides are parallel, and at a very little diftance
from one another. And if flender Pipes of
Glafs be dipped at one end into ftagnating Wa-
ter, the Water will rife up within the Pipe, and
the height to which it riles will be reciprocally
proportional to the Diameter of the Cavity of
the Pipe, and will equal the height to which it
rifes between two Planes of Glafs, if the Semir-
diameter of the Cavity of the Pipe be equal to
the diftance betv/een the Planes, or thereabouts.
And
BOOK IIL 367
An.d thefe Experiments fucceed after the fame
manner in 'vacuo as in the open Air, (as hath
been tried before the Royal Society, ) and there-
fore are not influenced by the Weight or Pref-
fiire of t!^e Atmofphere.
And if a large Pipe of Giafs be fiiied with
fifted Afhes well preffed together in the Glafs,
.and one end of the Pipe be dipped into ftagna-
ting Water, the Water will rife up flowly^ in
the Afhes, fo as in the fpace of a Week or Fort-
night to reach up within the Glafs, to the height
of 30 or 40 Inches above the ftagnating Water.
And the Water rifes up to this height by the
Action only of thofc Particles of the Aihes which
are upon the Surface of the elevated Water;
the Particles which are within the Water, at-
tra6ting or repelling it as much downwards as
upwards. Andtherefore the Action of the Par-
ticles is very ftrong. But the Particles of the
Alhes being not lb denfe and clofe together
as rhofe of Glafs, their Action is not fo flrong
as that of Glafs, which keeps Quick- fiiver fuf-
pended to the height of 60 or 70 Inches, and
therefore a6ls with a Force which would keep
Water fufpcnded to the height of above 60
Feet.
By the fame Principle, a Sponge fucks in
Water, and the Glands in the Bodies of Ani-
mals, according to their feveral Natures and
Difpofitions, fuck in various Juices from the
Blood. . -
If two plane polifh'd Plates of Gafs three or
four Inches broad, and twenty or twenty five
long, be laid one of them parallel to the Ho-
rizon,
368 O P T I C K S.

1-izon, the other upon the


firft, fo as at one of

their ends to touch one another, and contain an


Angle of about lo or 15 Minutes, and the fame
be firft moiften'd on their inward fides with a
Glean Cloth dipp'd into Oil of Oranges or Spirit
of Turpentine, and a Drop or two of the Oil
or Spirit be let fall upon the lower Glafs at thei.
other end j fo foon as the upper Glafs is laid •
down upon the lower, fo as to touch it at one
end as above, and to touch the Drop at the other
end, making with the lower Glafs an Angle of
about 10 or 15 Minutes; the Drop will begin to
move towards the Concourfe of the GlalTes, and
will continue to move with an accelerated Mo-
tion, till it arrives at that Concourfe of the
Glailes. For the two Glaffes attradt the Drop,
and make it run that way towards which the At-^
tradlions incline.
.
And if when the Drop is in
motion you lift up that end of the Glaffes where

they meet, and towards which the Drop moves,


the Drop will afcend between the Glaffes, and
therefore is attracted. And as you lift up the
Glaffes more and more, the Drop will afcend
flower and flower, and at length reit, being then
carried downward by its Weight, as much asup-
wards by the Attraction. And by this means
you may know the Force by which the Drop is
attracted at all diftances from the Concourfe of
the Glaffes. ^
Now by fome Experiments of this kind,
(made by Mr. Hauksbee) it has been found that
the Attraction is almofl reciprocally in a dupli-
cate Proportion of the diflance of the middle
of the Drop from the Concourfe of the Glaffes,
viz.
BOOK III. 369
1/2;. reciprocally in a limple Propoition, by rea-

fon of the fpreading of the Drop, and its touch-


ing each Glafs in a larger Surface; and again re-
ciprocally in a fimple Proportion, by* reaibn of
the Attradions growing ftronger within the
fame quantity of attracting Surface. The At-
traction therefore within the fame quantity of
attrading Surface, is reciprocally as the diftance
between the Glaiies. And therefore where the
diftance exceeding fmall, the Attraction muft
is

be exceeding great. By the Table in the fe-


cond Part of the fecond Book, wherein the
thicknefles of colour'd Plates of Water be-
tween two Glafles are fet down, the thicknefs
of the Plate where it appears very black, is
three eighths of the ten hundred thoufandth
part of an Inch. And where the Oil of O-
ranges between the Glafles is of this thicknefs,
the Attraction coUeCled by the foregoing Rule,
feems to be fo ftrong, as within a Circle of an
Inch in diam.eter, to fuffice to hold up a
Weight equal to that of a Cylinder of Water
of an Inch in diameter, and two or three Fur-
longs in length. And where it is of a lefs
thicknefs the Attraction mny be proportionally
greater, and continue to increafe, until the
thicknefs do not* exceed that of a iinglc Par-
ticle of the Oil. There are therefore Agents
in Nature able to make the Particles of Bo-
dies ftick together by very ftrong Attractions.
And it is the Bufinefs o£ experimental Philofophy
to find them out.

B b ^ . Now
370 O P T I C K S.

fjow the fmalleft Particles of Matter may co-


here by the ftrongeil Attra61:ions, and compofe
bigger Particles of weaker Virtue ; and many of
thele may* cohere and compofe bigger Particles
whofe Virtue is flill weaker, and fo on for divers
Succeffions, until the Progrellion end in the big-
geft Particles on which the Operations in Chymi-
Itry, and the Colours of natural Bodies depend,
and which by cohering compofe Bodies of a fen-
fible Magnitude. If the Body is compact, and
bends or yields inward to Preflion without any
Hiding of its Parts, it is hard and elaftick, re-
turning to 'its Figure with a Force riling from
the mutual AttracCtion of its Parts. If the
Parts flide upon one another, the Body is mal-
leable or foft. If they flip eafily, and are of a
fit Size to be agitated by Heat, and the Heat is

big enough to keep them in Agitation, the Body


is fluid ; and if it be apt to flick to things, it is

humid ; and the Drops of every fluid affed a


round Figure by the mutual Attradiion of their
Parts, as the Globe of the Earth and Sea affedrs a
round Figure by the mutual Attraction of its Parts
by Gravity,
Since Metals difTolved in Acids attradt but a
fniall quantity of the Acid, their attradiive Force
can reach but to a fmall diftance from them.
And as in Algebra, where affirmative Quanti-
ties vanifli and ceafe, there negative ones be-
gin J fo in Mechanicks, where Attradion cea-
fes, there a repulfive Virtue ought to fucceed.
And that there is fuch a Virtue, feems to fol-
low from the Reflexions and Inticxions of the
I Rays
BOOK III. 371
Rays of Light. For the Rays are repelled by
Bodies in both thefe Cafes, without the imme-
diate Contad; of the reflecting or inflecting Bo-
dy. It feems alfo to follow from the Emillion
of Light ; the Ray fo foon as it is ihaken off
from a fhining Body by the vibrating Motion of
the Parts of the Body, and gets beyond the
reach of Attraction, being driven away with ex-
ceeding great Velocity. For that Force which
is fufficient to turn it back in Reflexion, may

be fufficient to emit it. It feems alfo to fol-


low from the Produdion of Air and Vapour.
The Particles when
they are fjjaken off from
Bodies by Heat or Fermentation, fo foon as
they are beyond the reach of the Attradion of
the Body, receding from it, and alfo from one
another with great Strength, and keeping at a
diftance, fo as fometimcs to take up above a
Million of Times more fpace than they did be-
fore in the form of a denfe Body. WliicJi vafh
Contradion and Expanfion feems unintelligible,
by feigning the Particles of Air to be fpringy
and ramous, or rolled up like Hoops, or by
any other means than a repulfive Power. The
Particles of Fluids which do not cohere 100
ftrongly, and are of fuch a Smallncfs as renders
them mofl: fufceptibk of thofe Agitations which
keep Liquors \n a Fluor, are mofl: eafily fepa-
rated and rarifled into Vapour, and in the Lan-
guage of the Chymifl:s, they are volatile, rari-
fying with an eafy Heat, and condenfing with
Cold. But thofe which are groffer, and fo lefs
ibfceptible of Agitationj or cohere by a flironger
B b 2 Attradion,
372 O P T I C K S.

Attradlon, are not feparated without 'a fironger


Pleat, or perhaps not without Fermentation.
And thefe iaft are the Bodies which Chymifls
call fix'd, and being rarified by Fermentation,
become true permanent Air j thofe Particles re-
ceding from one another with the greateft
Force, and being moft difficultly brought toge-
ther, which upon Conrad: cohere moft ftrongly.
And becaufe the Particles of permanent Air are
grofter, and arife from denfer Subftances than
thofe of Vapours, thence it is that true Air is

more ponderous than Vapour, and that a moift


Atmofphere is lighter than a dry one, quantity
for quantity. From the fame repelling Power
it feems to be that Flies walk, upon the Wa-
ter -without wetting their Feet ; and that the
Obje<5t-giaiTes oflong Telefcopes lie upon one
another without touching j and that dry Pow-
ders are difficultly made to touch one ano-
ther fo as to ftick together, unlefs by melting
them, or wetting them with Water, which by
exhaling may bring them together and that ;

two poliih'd Marbles, which by immediate Con-


tad ftick together, are difficultly brought fo
clofe together as to ftick.
And thus Nature will be very conformable
to herfelf and very fimple, performing all the
great Motions of the heavenly Bodies by the
Attradion of Gravity which intercedes thofe
Bodies, and almoft^U the fmall ones of their
Particles by fome other attractive and repelling
Powers which intercede the Particles. The
Vis inertias is a paffive Principle by which Bo-
dies
BOOK III. 373
dies perfift in their Motion or Reft, receive Mo-
tion in proportion to the Force kiiprefTing it,

and refift as much as they are itfifted. By


this Principle alone there never could Ivxvq been
any Motion in the World. Some other Principle
was neceffary for putting Bodies into Motion
and now they Motion, fome other Prin-
are in
ciple is neceflary for conferving the Motion.
For from the various Compofition of two Mo-
tions, very certain that there is not always
'tis

the fame quantity of Motion in the World. For


if two Globes joined by a Ilendtr Rod, revolve

about their common Center of Gravity with
an uniform Motion, while that Center moves
on uniformly in a right Line drawn in the
Plane of their circular Motion j the Sum of
the Motions of the two Globes, as often as the
Globes are in the right Line defcribed by their
common Center of Gravity, will be bigger than
the Sum of their Motions, when they are in a
Line perpendicular to that right Line. By this
Liftance it appears that Motion may be got or

loft. But by reafon of the Tenacity of Fluids,


and Attrition of their Parts, and the Weakneli
of Elafticity in Solids, Motion is much more
apt to be loft than got, and is always -upon the
Decay. For Bodies which are either abfolutely
hard, or fo foft as to be void of Elafticity,
will not rebound from one another. Impene-
trability makes them only ftop. If two equal
Bodies meet diredly t^i 'vacuo, they will by the
Laws of Motion ftop where they meet, and
lofe all their Motion, and remain in reft, unlefs
B b 3 they
374 O P T I C K S.

they be elafcick, and receive new Motion froi^


their Spring. If they have lb much Elafticit]
aSifuffices to make them re- bound with a quar-
ter, or half, or three quarters of tlie Force with
which they come together, they will lofe three
quarters, or half, or a quarter of their Motion.
And this may be try'd, by letting two equal
Pendulums fall againft one another from equal
heights. If the Pendulums be of Lead or foft
Clay, they will lofe all or almoft all tlieir Mo-
tions: If of elaftick Bodies they will lofe all but
what they recover from their Elafticity. If it
be faid, that they can lofe no Motion but what
they communicate to other Bodies, the confe-
quence l;, that i?t vacuo they can lofe no Mo-
tion, but when they meet they muft go on and
penetrate one another's Dimenlions. If three
equal round Veffels be filled, the one with Wa-
ter, the other with Oil, the third with molten
Pitch, and the Liquors be ftirred about alike
to give them a vortical Motion j the Pitch by
its Tenacity will lofe its Motion quickly, the

Oil being lefs tenacious will keep i^ longer, and


the Water being lefs tenacious will keep it long-
eft, but yet will lofe it in a fliort time. Whence
it is eafy to underftand, that if many contiguous

Vortices of molten Pitch were each of them as


large as thofe which fome fuppofe to revolve
about the Sun and fix'd Stars, yet thefe and all
their Parts would, by their Tenacity and Stiffnefs,
communicate their Motion to one another till
they all refted among themfelves. Vortices of
Oil or Water, or fome fluider Matter, might
continue
BOOK III. 375
continue longer in Motion; but unlefs the Mat-
ter were void of all Tenacity and Attrition of
Parts, and Communication of Motion, (which
is not to be fuppofed,) the Motion v/ould con-

ftantly decay. Seeing therefore the variety of


Motion which we find in the World is ahvays
decreafing, there is a neceflity of confer ving
and recruiting it by adive Principles, fuch as
are the caufe of Gravity, by which Planets and
Comets keep their Motions in their Orbs, and
Bodies acquire great Motion in falling; ai>d the
caufe of Fermentation, by which the Heart and
Blood of Animals are kept in perpetual Motion
and Heat; the inward Parts of the Earth are
conftantly warm'd, and in fome places grow
very hot; Bodies burn and fhine. Mountain^
take Fire, the Caverns of the Earth are blown
up, and the Sun continues violently hot and
lucid, and warms all things by his Light. For
we meet with very little Motion in the World,
befides what is owing to thefe ad:ive Principles.
And if it were not for thefe Principles, the Bo-
dies of the Earth, Planets, Comets, Sun, and
all things in them, would grow cold and freeze,
and become inadtive Mafles ; and all Putrefadi-
on, Generation, Vegetation and Life would ceafe,
and the Planets and Comets would not remain in
their Orbs.
All thefe things being confider'd, feems pro-
it

bable to me, that God in the Beginning form'd


Matter in folid, mafly, hard, impenetrable, move-
able Particles, of fuch Sizes and Figures, and with
fuch other Properties, and in fuch Proportion
Bb 4 to
376 OPTIC K S.

to Space, moft conduced to the End £o\


as
which he form'd them j and that thefe primi-)
tive Particles being Solids, are incomparably
harder than any porous Bodies compounded of
them J even lb very hard, as never to v^^ear or
break in pieces ; no ordinary Pov^er being able
to divide what God himfelf made one in the jErft
Creation. While the Particles continue entire,
they may compofe Bodies of one and the fame
Nature and Texture in all Ages But fhould
:

they wear away, or break in pieces, the Nature


of Things depending on them, would be chan-
ged. Water and Earth, compofed of old worn
Particles and Fragments of Particles, would not
be of the fame Nature and Texture now, with
Water and Earth compofed of entire Particles
in the Beginning. And therefore, that Nature
may be lafting, the Changes of corporeal Things
are to be placed only in the various Separations
and new Aflbciations and Motions of thefe per-
manent Particles j compound Bjodies being apt
to break, not in the midfi of fclid Particles, but
where thofe Particles are laid together, and only
touch in a few Points.
feems to me farther, that thefe Particles
It
have not only a Vis i?ierticej accompanied with
fuch paffive Laws of Motion as naturally refult
from that Force, but alfo that they are moved
by certain adive Principles, fuch as is that of
Gravity, and that which caufes Fermentation,
and the Cohefion of Bodies. Thefe Principles
I confider, not as occult Qualities, fuppofed to
refult from the fpeciiick Forms of Things, but
as
BOOK in. 377
PS Laws of Nature, by which the Things
general
themfelves are form'd; their Truth appearing
to us by Phenomena, though their Caufes be
not yet difcover'd. For theie are manifeil Qua-
lities, and their Caufes only are occult.
iVud
the Arijloteiians gave the Name of occult Qua-
lities, not to manifeil Qualities, but to iuch
Qualities only as they fuppofed to lie hid im
Bodies, and to be the unknown Caufes of ma-
nifeft EffedsSuch as would be the Caufes of
:

Gravity, and of m.agnetick and eledrick At-


tradtions, and of Fermentations, if we fliould
fuppofe that thefe Forces or Adions arofc from
Qucilities unknov/n to us, and uncapable of be-
ing difcovered and made manifeil. Such oc-
cult Qualities put a Hop to the Improvement
of natural Philofophy, and therefore of. late
Years have been rcjedled. To tell us that e-r
very Species of Thii^gs is endow'd with an oc-
cult fpecifick Quality by which it ads and pro- v

duces manifefl Etfeds, is to tell us nothing: But


to derive two or three general Principles of Mo-
tion from Phaenomena, and afterwards to tell us
how the Properues and Adions of ail corporeal
Things follow from thofe manifeil Principles,
would be a very great ilep in Philofophy, though
the Caufes of thofe Principles were not yet dif-
cover'd : And therefore I fcruple not to propbfe
the Principles of Motion above-mention'd, they
being of very general Extent, and leave tl^ir*
Caufes to be found out.
Now by the help of thefe Principles, all ma-
terial Things feern to have been comoofed of
the
378 O P T I C'k S.

the hard and folid Particles above-mention'!


varioufly aiTociated in the iirfl Creation By th)
Counfel of an intelligent Agent. For it beeame)
him who created them to fet them in order.
And if he did fo, it's unphilofophical to feek

for any other Origin of the World, or to pre-


tend that it might arife out of a Chaos by the
mere Laws of Nature j though being once
form'd, it may
continue by thofe Laws for ma-
ny Ages. For while Comets move in very ex-
centrick Orbs in all manner of Pofitions, blind
Fate could never make all the Planets move
one and the fame way in Orbs concentrick,
fome inconfiderable Irregularities excepted,
which may have rifen from the mutual Ad:ions
of Comets and Planets upon one another, and
which will be apt to increafe, till this Syflem
wants a Reformation. Such a wonderful Uni-
formity in the Planetary Syflem mufl be allow-
ed the Effect of Choice. And fo muft the
Uniformity in the Bodies of Animals, they ha-
ving generally a right and a left fide fhaped a-
like, and on either fide of theii: Bodies two
Legs behind, and either two Arms, or two •

Legs, or two Wings before upon their Shoul-


ders, and between their Shoulders a Neck run-
ning down into a Back-bone, and a Head up-
on it J and in the Head two Ears, two Eyes, a
Nofe, a Mouth, and a Tongue, alike fituated.
•Alfo the firfl Contrivance of thofe very artifi-
cial Parts of Animals, the Eyes, Ears, Brain,
Mufcles, Heart, Lungs, Midriff, Glands, La-
rynx, Hands, Wings, fwimming Bladders, na-
tural
BOOK III.
379
. nral Spedlacles, and other Organs of Senfe and
Motion J and the Inftin(!^ of Brutes and Infeds,

can be the effed of nothing elfe than the Wif-


dom and Skill of a powerful ever-living Agent,
who being in all Places, is more able by
his Will to niove the Bodies within his bound-
lefs uniform Senforium, and thereby to form
and reform the Parts of the Univerfe, than we
are by our Will to move the Parts of our own
Bodies. And yet we not to confider the
are
World as the Body of God, or the feveral Parts
thereof, as tlie Parts of God. He is an uni-
form Being, void of Organs, Members or Parts,
and they are his Creatures fubordinate to him,
and fubiervient to his Will j and he is no more
the Soul of them, than the Soul of Man is the
Soul of the Species of Things carried through
the Organs of Senfe into the place of its Sen-
fation, where it perceives them by means of its
immediate Prefence, without the Intervention
of any third thing. The Organs of Scnic are
not for enabling the Soul to perceive the Spe-
cies of Things in its Senforium, but only for
conveying them thither j and God has no need
of fuch Organs, he being every where prefent
to the Things themfelves. And fince Space is
divifible in injimtum^ and Matter is not necef-
farily in all places, it may be, alfo allow'd that
God is able to create Particles of Matter of fe-
veral Sizes and Figures, and in feveral Propor-
. tions to Space, and perhaps of different Denli-
ties and Forces, and theieby to vary the Laws
of Nature, and make Worlds of feveral forts in
feveral
380 O P T I C K S.

feveral Parts of the Univerfe. At leafl, I fee i^j-


thiiig of Contradidiion in all this.
As in Mathematicks, fo in Natural Philofo-
phy, the Inveftigation of difficult Things by the\
Method of Analyfis, ought ever to precede the
Method of Compofition. This Analylis con-
fifts in making Experiments and Obfervations,

and in drawing general Concluiions from them


by Induction, and admitting of no Objections
againft the Conclufions, but fuch as are taken
from Experiments or other certain Truths.
,

For Hypothefes are not to be regarded in ex-


perimental Philofophy. And although the ar-
guing from Experiments and Obfervations by
Induction be no Demonftration of general Con-
clufions ; yet it is the befl way of arguing which
the Nature of Things admits of, and may be
looked upon as fo much the flronger, by how
much the Induction is more general. And if
no Exception occur from Phaenomena, the Con-
clufion may be pronounced generally. But if
at any time afterwards any Exception fliall oc-
cur from Experiments, it may then begin to be
pronounced with fuch Exceptions as occur. By
this way of Analylis we may proceed from Com-
pounds and from Motions to the
to Ingredients,
Forces producing them and in general, from
j

Effeds to their Caufes and from particular


,

Cauies to more general ones, till the Argument


end in themoll general. This is theMethod
of Analyfis And the Synthefis coniifls in af-
:

fuming the Caufes difcover'd, and eftablifh'd


as Principles, and by them explaining the Phae-
nomena
{
BOO K III. 381
noraena proceeding from them, and proving the
Explanations."
In the two firfl -Books of thefe Opticks, I
.
proceeded by this Analyfis to difcover and prove
'

the original Differences of the Rays of Light in


refped: of Refrangibility, Reflexibility, and Co-
lour, and their alternate Fits of eafy Reflexion
and eafy Tranfmiffion, and the Properties of
Bodies, both opake and pellucid, on which
their Reflexions and Colours depend. And
thefe Difcoveries being proved, may be alTumed
in the Method of Compofition for explaining
the Phzenomena arifmg from them: An In-
ftance of which Method I gave in the End of
the firft Book. In this third Book I have only
begun the Analyfis of what remains to be dif-
cover'd about Light and its Eflfcdts upon the
Frame of Nature, hinting feveral things about
it, and leaving the Hints to be examin'd and
improv'd by the farther Experiments and Ob-
fervations of fuch as are inquifitive. And if
natural Philofophy in all its Parts, by purfuing
this Method, Ihall at length be perfedied, the
Bounds of Moral Philofophy will be alfo enlar-
ged. For fo far as we can know by natural
Philofophy what is the firlt Caufe, what Power
he has over us, and what Benefits we receive
from him, fo far our Duty towards him, as well
as that towards one another, will appear to us
by the Light of Nature. And no doubt, if the
Worlhip of falfe Gods had not blinded the Hea*-
then, their moral Pmioibphy would have gone
farther than to the four Cardinal Virtues j and
infi:ead
382 O P T I C K S.

infteadof teaching the Tranfmigration of Souls,


and to worfhip the Sun and Moon, and dead
Heroes, they would have tajught us to worfhip
our true Author and Benefactor, as their Ance-
ftors did under the Government of Noah and his
Sons before they corrupted themfelves.

FINIS.
BOOKS printed for William Innys.
A A CI Newtoni, Equ. Aur. in Academia Cantabrigienfi Ma-
Isthefeos olim Profeflbris Lucafiani Leftiones opiicae. 4/0. 1729.
The fame in Englijh. %vo. 1728.
Univerfal Arithmctick. By Sir Ifaac Newton. The Second E-
dition. %vo. 1728.
Opticas Sive de Reflexionibus, Refraflionibus, Inflexionibus &
:

Coloribus Lucis Libri ties, Authore Ifaaco Newton, Equite Au-


rato. Latine reddidit Samuel Clarke, S. T. P. Editio fecunda,
auftior. 8cff. 1719-

Philofophise Naturalis Principia Mathcmatica. Authore Ifaaco


Newton, Equ. Aur. Editio tertia, aufta emendata. \to. 1726. ^
The Method of Fluxions both Direft and Inverfe The former :

being a Tranllation from the Marquis de V Hofpital,


and the latter
fupplied by the Tranflator, E. Stone, F. R. S. Jn two Volumes.
%vo. 1730. /
_

Epiilola ad amicum de Cotelii Inventis Ciirvarum ratione, ^V.


\to. 1722.
An Analytick Treatife of Conic Sedlions. By E. Stone. \t9.
Mathematical Elements of Natural Phiiofophy confirm'd by Ex-
periments Or an Introduftion to Sir Ij'aac Newton's Phiiofophy.
:

By1V.J.'sGravefandt,hL.D. In two Vols. 8:/^. The Third


Edition. 1726.
Phyfico-Theology Or a Demonftration of the Being and Attri-
:

butes of God, from his Works of Creation ; with large Notes and
many curious Obfervations. By IV. Derham, Canon of WindjoTy
and F. R. S. The Seventh Edition. %vo. 1727.
Mr. Derhani's Allro-ThcoJogy Or a Demonftration of the Be-
:

ing and Attributes of Gc from a Survey of the Heavens; with


I

Cuts. The Fifth Edition. Sr-a. 1726.


Philofophical Letters between the la:e Learned Mr. Ray and fe-
veral of his Ingenipus Correfpendents, Natives and Foreigners. To
which are added thofe of fra^icis Wiiloughby, Efq; The whole
confining of many curious Difcoverics and Improvements in the
Hii^ory of Quadrupeds, Birds, Fifr.es, Infefts, Plants, Fofiils,
Fountains, idc. Publifhed by Mr. Dcrhatn. Zvo.
Mr. Ray\ Three Phyiico-Theologlcal Difcourfes, concerning
I. The primitive Chaos, and Creation of the World. II. The
general Deluge, its Caufes artd EfFedls. III. The DilTolution of
the World and future Conflagration, l^c. Illuftrated with Copper-
Plates. The fourth Edition, with Additions. %vo.
His Wifdom of God in the Works of the Creation. The
Ninth Edition. %vo. 1727.
Mr. Ronayne\ Treatile of Algebra. The Second Edition, with
Additions. Sec.
1727
Geometria Organica Sive Defcriptio Linearum Curvarum uni-
:

verfilis. Auftore Colino Mac Laurin, Math. Col. Abred. Prof. &
R. S. S. 4/(?. 1720.
Aa
BOOKS printed for W. I n N y s. •

An Introduftion to Natural Philofophy : Or PhiJorophrcal Le-


£lures read in the Univerfity of Oxford, A. D. 700. To which
1

zre added, The DcmonHrations of Mr. Huyge?;is Theorems, con-


cerning Force and circular Motion. By yo/:?n Kei'/, M. D. Sav.
Prof, of Allronomy, and F. R. S. The Second Edition. Svff.

PhilofophicrJ Tranfaclinns, giving fome Account of the prefent


"Ehidertakings, Studies and Labours of the Ingenious, in many con-
fiderable Parts of the World. Vol. 36. Continued and publifh'd
by JV. Rr/ity, M. D. and Reg. Soc. Seer.
1730.
4/1?.

The Lives of the French, Italian and Gerjnaii Philofophers, late


Members of the Royal Academy of Sciences in Paris. Together
with Abftracls of the chqicefl Pieces communicated by them to that
Tlluftrious Society. To which is added, the Preface of the Ingeni-
ous Monfieur Fonicnelie, Sccretgry and Author of the Hiilory of
the faid x'\cademy, ^vo.
\Leonaidi Plukeneti'. M. D. Opera omnia Botanica in fex Tomoe
divifa,. viz. I. II. III. Phytographise. IV. Almageftum Botani-
<wm. V. Almagefti Botanici MantifTa. VI. Amaltheum Botani-
cum in quibus Stirpes illuftriores minus cognitae, exoticae, Rarioref-
due novjffime detcftae ad plures Chiliadas defcribuntur. Turn
ionibus Tabulis JEntis CCCCLIV. fumma cura depiftis Figu-
fintur.
I Methodus Incrementorum direfla & univerfa. Auftore Brook
Taylor, L. L. D. &
Reg. Soc. Seer. 4/^. 171 7.
i The Pollhumous Works of Dr. Robert Hcoke; in which, I. The
j^refcnt Deficiency of natural Philofophy is difcourfed of, with
tiie Methods of rendring it more certain and beneficial. II. Of
the Nature, Motion and Effedls of Light, particularly that of the
Sun and Comets. III. An hypothetical Explication of Memory ;
how the Organs made ufe of by the Mind in its Operation may be
inechanically underftood. IV. An Hypothefis and Explication of
^e Cauie of Gravity, or Gravitation, Maignetifm, iffc. V. Dif-
courfes of Earthquakes, their Caufes and Effects, and Hiftories of
fcveral To which are annex'd, Phyfical Explicntions of feveral
:

of the Fables in Oviifs Metamorphofis, very difisrent from other


Mythologick Interpreters. VI. Ledures for improving Navi-
gation and Aftronomy, with the Defcriptions of feveral new and
ufeful Inlh-uments-, illuftrated with Sculptures To thefe Dif-
courfes is prefix'd the Author's Life. By Richard IVttller, R. S.
Seer. Folio.
Synopfis Univerfa Medicina TraFltca : Sive doftiffimorum vi-
rorum de Morbis eorumque Caufis ac Rem.ediis judicia. Accefle-
runt nunc demum cafus nonnulli oppido rari. Authorc J. Allen, M.D.
Editio tertia;, prioribus, triente plus, auftior. In 2 Vol. 'ivo. 1729.
%'4

p.

i; y

o
r;

•.-k^-4
1
77 Book E Tab. I.

,.,#•

>.

'i.J , ^,lt:B,„A,\,i

^^P^
I]2'-J- 4 -^

i;\Ji^>\\\N\^'

'^

^j^ — Ji
G

HV
B

X
I

M
V —
-R

H -Q

A
7.'-.A.-.- .i,m

<'iri"."my"iifT'''ii'i'''''''''"'''''''*
R

E I
/
'lab Uiil

o
\
M

i
I

ki^
1-
V
X

I-
JC:
^^^

rM \

<^

B
-4^^
U

H.
G
A.-
/ M
1 lai) .^
X

1o^ y_/

^J

\^ .

Вам также может понравиться